0% found this document useful (0 votes)
5 views795 pages

Technical Proposal

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1/ 795

TECHNICAL PROPOSAL

EPC Contract for:


(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau
September 2018
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................. 3
Situation of Electric System .................................................................................................................................................. 4
CURRENT SITUATION ELECTRIC SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................... 4
PLANNING OF ELECTRIC SYSTEM IN BISSAU ................................................................................................................ 4
Planning of Electric Energy Offers .................................................................................................................... 4
Planning of Electric Network at Bissau ............................................................................................................ 5
Transmission Network at Guinea-Bissau......................................................................................................... 5
Regional Transmission Network Project .......................................................................................................... 5
PROJECT DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................................................. 5
SITE LOCATION.......................................................................................................................................................... 6
Project Specific Technical Data............................................................................................................................ 7
Interfaces........................................................................................................................................................... 7
Construction Scope of Work .............................................................................................................................................. 15
GENERAL............................................................................................................................................................... 15
MOBILIZATION & DEMOBILIZATION: ............................................................................................................. 15
PROJECT MANAGEMENT................................................................................................................................ 15
SITE Preparation ............................................................................................................................................ 16
BOUNDARY FENCE AND GATES ..................................................................................................................... 17
FOUNDATIONS ................................................................................................................................................ 17
BUILDINGS ...................................................................................................................................................... 18
Electrical Scope of Work .................................................................................................................................................... 19
LV WORKS .......................................................................................................................................................... 19
GROUNDING & LIGHTNING INSTALLATION ................................................................................................... 20
AUXILIARY POWER INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................. 21
MONITORING SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................... 22
SECURITY SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................................... 24
INSTALLATION OF THE INVERTER STATIONS ................................................................................................ 26
MEDIUM VOLTAGE INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................ 26
TRENCHES ...................................................................................................................................................... 27
CONDUITS INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................................. 28
LABELLING ...................................................................................................................................................... 29
COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................................................................... 29
Page 1 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
SURVEYING WORKS ....................................................................................................................................... 29
Mechanical Scope of Work ................................................................................................................................................ 30
SUPPORT STRUCTURES FOR MODULES ....................................................................................................... 30
Annex 1: List of General Rules .......................................................................................................................................... 31
Annex 2: Preliminary design Drawings ............................................................................................................................ 32
1. GENERAL PLANT LAYOUT ................................................................................................................................. 32
2. STAGING PLAN ............................................................................................................................................... 32
3. FENCING AND GATE DETAILS ........................................................................................................................... 32
4. METEO STATION ............................................................................................................................................. 32
5. ELECTRICAL LAYOUT ....................................................................................................................................... 32
6. GROUNDING SYSTEM ..................................................................................................................................... 32
7. TRENCHES ..................................................................................................................................................... 32
Annex 3: Procurement Plan ............................................................................................................................................... 33
Annex 4: Module Datasheet............................................................................................................................................... 34
Annex 5: Power Conversion Station Datasheets ............................................................................................................ 35
1. INVERTERS .................................................................................................................................................... 35
2. POWER TRANSFORMER .................................................................................................................................. 35
Annex 6: Low Voltage Equipment ..................................................................................................................................... 36
Annex 7: CABLE FEEDERS - MV & DC Power Cables ...................................................................................................... 37
Annex 8: Earthing (Grounding) System ............................................................................................................................ 38
1. BAHRA CABLES.............................................................................................................................................. 38
2. WALLIS.......................................................................................................................................................... 38
Annex 9: CCTV System ........................................................................................................................................................ 39
1. PELCO ........................................................................................................................................................... 39
2. AMERICAN-DYNAMICS ................................................................................................................................... 39
Annex 10: Meteo Station Datasheets .............................................................................................................................. 40
1. MET ONE ....................................................................................................................................................... 40
2. STEVENS ....................................................................................................................................................... 40
Annex 11: Project Schedule ............................................................................................................................................... 41
Annex 12: Project Safety Management ........................................................................................................................... 42
Annex 13: Quality Assurance and Quality Control Requirements ............................................................................... 43
Annex 14: Project Team ..................................................................................................................................................... 44

Page 2 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________

INTRODUCTION

T he Republic of Guinea-Bissau is located at West of Africa. It includes the tropical part and the Bissagos
islands. The tropical part boundaries are the Senegal from North, Guinea from East and the Atlantic Ocean
from South. The Coast is approximately 300 Km Long. Bissau is the capital. The population of Guinea-
Bissau is 1.61 million citizens, 27 tribes which 80% are Balanta, fula, mandingo. The Portuguese is the official
language, and the Creole is a communication language.

Bissau is the capital of Country where 384,000 citizens (2010). The weather is hot all the year, with an average
temperature of 25°C.

The installation of the electrical industry in Guinea-Bissau is weak, the electrical supply is mainly provided by
diesel thermal power station of low production capacity and high operating costs, it doesn’t satisfy the country
electricity demand. For changing this current situation of electricity supply in Guinea-Bissau and improve the
electricity production infrastructure, SINOHYDRO signed on 5 October 2016 at Bissau an MOU with the ministry
of Energy and industry in order to develop hydroelectric projects, solar projects and the re-establishment of
Bissau electricity network. In accordance with MOU conditions, SINOHYDRO did the studies related to the
preparation and the execution of a project of photovoltaic Power plant with capacity 20 MW. During the site visit,
the site of Bor at 8 KM of the West side has been selected for the construction of photovoltaic Power plant with
capacity 20 MW.

.A. CONSTRUCTION has an outstanding track record delivering complex power plants that support Egypt’s
H efforts to meet its growing energy needs. As one of leading contractors in Egypt qualified to bid on power
projects, we have been active partners in the Government’s fast track program ever since its launch in the
late 1980s.

Our prestigious track record in this sector includes more than 10 mega power stations that, combined, have
added more than 6,000 megawatts to the National Grid in the past decade. We deliver all aspects of power-
related construction, exceeding the sector’s demanding criteria with a comprehensive range of services that
include pilling, heavy reinforced concrete structures, steel structures, mechanical works, water intakes,
chimneys and discharges.

Continuing our commitment to providing the full energy solution to the ever-growing energy needs, H. A.
CONSTRUCTION has strategically planned to provide the full EPC, Turn-Key Photovoltaic Power Plant Package to
its local / international customers.

Page 3 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________

SITUATION OF ELECTRIC SYSTEM

CURRENT SITUATION ELECTRIC SYSTEM


Currently, Bissau electrical network is relatively weak and doesn’t cover the whole city of Bissau. The distribution
system is composed of two networks of 10Kv and 6Kv which covers only the urban zone, at long distances
inducing important tension drops. In addition to this situation, the distribution equipment is antiquated which
doesn’t allow to supply most of the urban zones and pre-urban zones. Bissau electric distribution system
includes high voltage line, it’s length is about 99 Km with total number of transforms 94 of 10/0.4Kv and 21
transformers of 6/0.4Kv with different capacities included between 100Kva and 630Kva.The electric supply in
Bissau is limited mainly for the domestic and the administrative use, the consumption in industrial use almost
doesn’t exist.

The principal source of energy supply in Bissau is a Diesel Power Plant is composed of groups of generators
which the majority is malfunction and another 13 groups of 1MW rented to a Senegalese society which are
working normally. In accordance with the declaration of EAGB agents, a capacity of 13MW can satisfy only 1/3 of
the demand which explain the difficulty of electricity supply and justify the partial offloading at rush hours.

PLANNING OF ELECTRIC SYSTEM IN BISSAU

PLANNING OF ELECTRIC ENERGY OFFERS


Recently, the following electric energy production sources was planned to be used in the electricity system in
Guinea Bissau:

Energy Project of OMVG: the dams of Sambagalou and Kaléta supply a part of its energy in Guinea Bissau, with a
quota respectively 14% and 4% which are 18MW and 10MW having an equivalent guaranteed energy 56 million
kWh and 48 million kWh respectively.

Cussselinta and Saltinho Dams Projects: it’s provided that the construction will be on 2023 with installation
capacity respectively 13MW and 14 MW, annual production 115 million kWh and 125 million kWh. This power
stations will be connected to Bra substation.

Thermal Power Station Project: The first phase 15 MW composed of 3 groups of 5MW, the second phase 10 MW
in one group. This power station site is located at approximately 7Km in the South-West of Bissau city center, this
project is in tender stage and will be connected to EAGB Substation at Bissau.

Photovoltaic Power Station Project: As per the development plan of energy sector and in addition to conventional
energies, it’s provided the construction of Photovoltaic Power Station at Bissau which can be connected to the
EAGB substation or Bra substation.

Page 4 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
PLANNING OF ELECTRIC NETWORK AT BISSAU
As per the development plan of energy sector, taking in consideration the provisional high demand scenario, the
maximum consumption at Bissau will reach 49 MW and for the low demand scenario, it will reach 42MW in
accordance with these scenarios the actual production and distribution systems can’t satisfy the demand for
Bissau region alone. The European Funds of Development proposed to rehabilitate the electric network at Bissau,
specially the substation which access is connected to the loop 63kV and at 3 electric sources (substation 63kV
Antula, substation of Bra, EAGB power station). The African Bank of Development (BAD) financed a loop of 30 KV
at Bissau with the three stations of Antula, Bra and EAGB

TRANSMISSION NETWORK AT GUINEA-BISSAU


As per the development plan of energy sector, it’s provided the construction of a national transmission network,
composed of a network of 63kV crossing the whole country with length 485 Km and 12 station HT/MT.

REGIONAL TRANSMISSION NETWORK PROJECT


As per the OMVG program, it’s provided the construction of 225 kV transmission line crossing Guinea-Bissau, going
from Boké (Guinea) passing by Salthino (Guinea-Bissau) located at 110 km from Salthino, Salthino – Bambadinea
for a distance of 55 km, Bambadinca – Mansoa for a distance of 54 km and Mansoa – Tanaf (Senegal) for a
distance of 133 km. 4 stations will be built 220kV/30kV each respectively at Bissau, Mansoa, Bamdadinca and
Salthino

PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The current electrical supply in Guinea Bissau represent 1/3 of the demand, so the government decided to start
a plan to increase the electrical supply through many projects. Hence it was planned to construct a Solar Power
Plant in Bissau with a capacity of 20 MW as a first step.

The short-term plan of the project is to construct a 20 MW solar power plant to be extended to 50 MW as a long-
term plan. The project will be executed in "BOR" located 8 km from Bissau. The site of the project is covered with
vegetation. The geological conditions of the project are suitable for the execution of the project.

Page 5 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
SITE LOCATION
The site where the 20 MW PV Project is to be built with 500 m transmission line in Mafanco 133 km East of Bissau,
the country's capital city

The 30 MW PV Project is to be built with 17 km transmission line located in Bula distant 20 km from the capital
Bissau.

Page 6 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
PROJECT SPECIFIC TECHNICAL DATA

INTERFACES
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The PV solar plants consist of poly crystalline modules with 330Wp nominal Power,

The distribution of the panels on the area is performed to minimize losses caused by shading considering the sun
minimum inclination.

The PV plants are essentially composed of:

• PV modules mounted on a galvanized steel structure.

• String box with current sensors.


• Conversion Unit MV by with two inverters 1250 kVA and 0,6/1 kV DC cables for String box connection to
the inverter.

• Low voltage AC cables for auxiliary’s services.

• Armored medium voltage 18/30 kV AC cables for the connection to MV Station.


• Main Control Room equipped with medium voltage switchgears for the incoming/outgoing lines and
transformers equipped with protection relays.

• Auxiliary Cabin equipped with Aux. transformer, Aux. LV board and UPS.

• Security room with Antitheft and Surveillance System.


• Warehouse containers for spare parts.

• Office Life module.

• Meteo stations.

• SCADA system.

• Transmission line with concrete posts


Other accessories and facilities are described in the documentation attached.

PHOTOVOLTAIC GENERATOR

The photovoltaic generator has been designed and configured based of the Jinko solar EAGLE 72 cells, 330 Wp
(Refer to Module datasheet - Annex 4).

The modules have been subjected to rigorous testing to ensure long term reliability and have been certified in
order to meet the latest safety standards.

Page 7 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
They include an IP67 junction box with a bypass diode that ensures effective protection to prevent the cells from
overheating produced by partial shading. The junction box will be equipped with 1,2 m customized 4 mm 2 output
cables.

The output comes with two Multi‐Contac 4 with 4/6 mm2 connectors. The rated values of the selected solar
module’s main features in standard operating conditions (1,000 W/m2 irradiance, air mass 1,5 and 25°C cell
temperature).

CONVERSION UNIT

The conversion unit is proposed to be either INGECON SUN 1275TL U B460 or ABB central inverter, PVS 980.
Their specifications are listed in the attached Datasheets (Annex 5). All the current and voltage values are in
compliance with the module string design of the PV power plant.

CABLES

The LV route from the generators up to its delivery to the MV transformer runs through different sections of
conductors with different cross‐ sections and characteristics.

The purpose is to measure the conducting lines so that no circuit suffers a voltage drop greater than 4% along its
entire route. These sections are as follows:

• From the modules to SB (DC):

o Solar quality cable for sun exposure 1,5 kV

o Buried in duct or running on modules structure profiles

o 6 mm2 cross section

o Cu conductor

• From SB to inverter (DC):

o Armored (min 0,8 thickness) Cable 0,6/1,5 kV

o Buried direct in the ground

o Cross sections 300 mm2- Aluminum


o Al conductor

• From inverter to transformer (AC), supplied by Sungrow:

o Cable 0,6/1,5 kV

o Cross-section defined by Sungrow.

• Communications between inverters

o Multi-Conductor RS 485 - 4x2x0.5mm² cable.


o Fiber optical multimode cable

• Surveillance system and auxiliaries

• (min 0,8 thickness) Cable 0,6/1,5 kV


Page 8 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
• Cu Conductor
The MV route from the MV transformer should be:

• MV cables

• Armored (min 0,8 thickness) Cable 18/30kV

• Cross-sections 3x(2x185) mm2 - Aluminum

• Al conductor

The ground conductor shall be made of minimum section 50 mm2 Cu, which shall run exposed along the
trenches. Its grounding distribution can be seen in the attached plan.

TRENCHES

All the power cable used in the plant will be directly buried underground with no protection, so armature is
required in order to give mechanical protection.

Details on different section and dimension of trenches are attached (Annex 1 – Item 7).

Page 9 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
GROUNDING SYSTEM

The PV plant should be considered as a single generator, so all the metallic part should be connected together in
order to from a single grounding system.

To achieve this goal ground braids are required between structures which are directly in contact with the soil.

The module frame should be in contact with the structure in order to perform continuity.

The ground conductor shall be made of a minimum section 50 mm2 Cu, which shall run exposed along the
trenches. Its grounding distribution can be seen in the attached plan.

All the neutrals of the power transformers will not be connected to ground, making an IT system on the AC side of
the generator.

Shelter and Cabins Grounding

A ring of minimum section of 95mm2 Aluminum cable is placed around cabins with 2 meters long earth rod at
each corner.

(Please refer to Annex 8)

METEO STATION

In order to measure the power plant power ratio at least 2 meteo stations will be implemented in the PV plant
with the following:

• Measurement of global radiation

• Measurement of module plan radiation

• Measurement of PV cell temperature

• Measurement of absolute air pressure

• Measurement of air temperature and humidity

• Measurements of wind direction and speed

The meteo stations will be connected to the monitoring system via RS485/LAN cable and will be equipped with
auxiliary batteries.

(Please refer to Annex 10)

ANTITHEFT AND SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

Perimeter Protection

Along the perimeter will be placed 14 speed dome cameras and a fix camera. The access gate and the control
room will be also protected.

The video of all cameras will be recorded for 30 days both in the NVR and in the server located in the control
room.

The NPS sensor is part of the NPS system. Each NPS processing unit and each camera will be connected to an
IP66 field station where are placed all the devices able to convert the signals from the NPS sensor and from the

Page 10 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
cameras by the optical fiber that will be the communication channel among all the field station of the plant and
the central control unit (QSVAR) placed in the Control Room.

NPS System

NPS is a security system that has the purpose to detect every attempt of climb over, breach of pressing impact
on a fence. It is installed directly on the nets, both light and heavy, and it consist of two principal components,
the NPS processing unit and the NPS sensor.

The NPS processing unit is a hardware system that has the task to receive the signals from the sensor,
processing them and defining the type of event associating it to an alarm. The accompanying software permits to
manage from remote the configuration, the calibration, the state control and the firmware upload.

The NPS sensor is a linear passive element of piezoelectric type which needs to be installed on the perimeter
fence net through appropriate fastening clamps and has the task to detect the stress to which the net is exposed
and to transmit these signals to the NPS processing unit.

Access Gate Protection

The access gate will be equipped with an armored digital keyboard, to activate/deactivate the alarm system and
allow the access to the authorized staff. The keyboard will be connected to an IP66 field station.

Control Room Protection

In the control room, the room where the QSVAR is, will be positioned a keyboard for system management, a door
magnetic open/ close detector, and a double technology detector, all devices will be directly connected with the
QSVAR.

Alarm System Management

To manage the alarm system will be used a 16 Bit central with 128/296 alarm areas, able to receive the signals
from NPS devices, cameras, contacts and keyboards.

The whole system will be totally managed both locally, from the control room and remotely (using internet
connection). The system proposed is also able to send SCS, mail and radio link.

UPS

The alarm system will be equipped with two UPS and a power pack adequately sized to supply enough electricity
for at least 6 hours in case of grid power failure. The UPS will supply energy to all components of the security
system.

Two UPS will be used, in order to:

• Halving the load of each UPS

• Increase autonomy without electric supply

• Ensuring the system functioning at 50% in case one of the two UPS fails.

Perimeter Lighting System

In order to facilitate the inspection of the perimeter and ensure a good view during the night time, a perimeter
lighting system will be provided. It will foresee the use of low-consumption LED lighting projectors, installed on
poles with height of 6 meters above the ground.
Page 11 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
The lighting system is structured into 3 groups of ignitions, the operating mode may be:

• Total scheduled power-on from timer and twilight mode during night time;

• Total scheduled power-on from timer and twilight mode in the night hours by turning off a group after a
specified time;

• Scheduled power on of a group from timer and twilight mode in the night hours;

• Total or partial power on only on alarm at pre-set time;

• Total or partial auto/manual power-on mode.

SCADA SYSTEM

A plant monitoring system will be responsible for communication, data acquisition, monitoring. The installation
will feature the following:

A total system size of 30,294 MW with a central SCADA system depicted in the following picture.

• 18 Inverters in 9 Cabins

• 180 String Boxes

• Trackers

• MV cabin devices will be monitored

• The Local SCADA will be installed in the Security Room.

• Ethernet communication connecting all transformation centers and the main cabinet.

• Tariff Meters

• Strings

• Weather Stations

Here described the equipment composed by the following units:

1) 1 RTU for each inverter cabin (Conversion Unit)

2) PV Plant SCADA Server Panel

Each RTU will integrate communication coming from inverters, weather station ,strings of each sub-field. The
SCADA will integrate communication coming from inverters, weather station, strings, meters, analyzers,
switchgear and auxiliary systems installed in the plants.

In particular the SCADA HMI will display the following information among others:

• Sensors and weather station on the HMI main page

• Medium voltage status

• Conversion shelter and inverter measures and status

• Trackers status

Page 12 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
• String boxes monitoring of measures and status (for each string)

• Power Control measures and set points

• Performance of the system, overall and inverter details

• Data visualization

• Alarm management

SCADA, through PV Control Panel PLC, will manage the activity of the PV PLANT CONTROLLER to realize the
automatic control on closed loop reactive power and on open loop active power limitation in compliance to grid
requirements:

• Reactive Power

• Power Factor Control

• Voltage control (Q(V) control)

• Active Power Limitation

The Plant Monitoring System will integrate the communication with the inverters, strings monitoring, weather
station, switchgears and auxiliary systems to be installed in the plant. It shall perform the following key
functions:

• Plant monitoring

• Plant electrical network monitoring

• Trackers status

• Plant energy management (optimization of auxiliary power sources)

• Plant performance assessment

• Plant operation and reliability-centered maintenance management

• Plant reliability/availability assessment

• Communication with Owner’s centralized remote monitoring & control system

The data acquisition system communicates with all the following devices installed in the shelters:

• Sensors

• Inverters

• Trackers

• Shelter digital Input

• Protection interfaces (optional)

• Weather Station

Page 13 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
METERING SYSTEM

The Metering Equipment shall be capable of obtaining and interpreting readings and performing the
adjustments, if required, to provide information concerning Facility Energy Output and Input and shall be
installed, operated and maintained in accordance with the Egyptian Metering Code. The Metering Equipment
shall be part of the PV Facility's control and measurement installations, and the criteria specified below.

The Metering Equipment shall be provided and will be connected to same cores of both CTs and VTs. All meters
shall support minimum two different tariff rates. The Metering Equipment shall comply with the Metering Code
and the Metering Equipment and instrument transformers shall be approved by grid operator.

Page 14 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________

CONSTRUCTION SCOPE OF WORK

GENERAL

MOBILIZATION & DEMOBILIZATION:


H.A.C will consider the following activities in the quotation of this item:

• Mobilization of all the temporary facilitates (office containers, diesel generators, etc.) in order to carry out
the Scope of Works detailed below

• Mobilization of all the machinery, equipment (with maintenance records) needed to perform the Scope of
Works

• Providing all necessary equipment for work during night shifts and ensuring that all safety conditions for
such works are considered

• H.A.C is responsible for the mobilization of all the manpower needed to ensure the on-time and correct
installation required in the SoW and deliver and upload complete documentation including medical records
to a centralized software platform – H.A.C shall take all necessary precautions for having availability of
working in sifts, night shift included, and shall prepare the work areas accordingly (generators, mobile
lighting systems, etc.) and will do it according to the both Guinian, Egyptian labor laws

• Providing containers as temporary stores for received materials, tools and equipment

• Maintaining the laydown area and upgrade it if required, for temporary storing of the material supplied by
the client

• Complying with the works schedule and make sure that all necessary machinery will be available for the on-
time and successful completion

• Providing all necessary documents related to the SoW / execution of the mechanical part, in both English
and Arabic.

• H.A.C will be responsible for all transportation required for the successful completion of the works, to and
from the Project Site and inside the Project Site. The Contractor must provide all conformity documents for
all the machinery and vehicles used on the Project Site.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT
H.A.C. will provide all the manpower and documentation related to the project management of the works in
accordance with local laws and best engineering practices:

• Project Management

• Quality Plan and Supervision

• HSE Plan and Supervision


Page 15 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
• Engineering support to the Employer
• H.A.C will be responsible to unload all material related to this SoW from containers to contractor laydown
area

• H.A.C will ensure the good collaboration with the other subcontractors for electrical and mechanical works,
daily work schedules to be agreed between all parties during daily tool-box meetings

• Dispose of all waste created by the activities described in this SOW, according to international standards.

SITE PREPARATION
SITE CLEARANCE

• H.A.C will verify Owner-furnished benchmarks.

• H.A.C will Survey to established locations, contours, lines, grades datum, control point and related items as
required

• H.A.C will demolish, remove and dump any existing structures within project boundary including, but not
limited to foundations, sumps, boulders, manholes, ditches, block ramps and trenches to the designated
areas for disposal as per the local authorities.

• H.A.C will clean the project site from debris, garbage, surplus, plants and left over unused materials and
dispose off-site at the designated areas for disposal as per the local authorities.

LAYDOWN AREA (Please refer to the attached Staging Drawing)


H.A.C will prepare the laydown area as per the attached drawing. The scope will also include the following:

• Compacting the area as per site requirements

• Supplying and installation of temporary fence and access gates.

The site will be leveled. The plant roads will connect all the facilities with proper slopes. The below works will be
Performed.

• H.A.C will backfill within project boundary required to accomplish the site platform elevation.

• The roads design will be Gravel roads including 200mm Base Granular material 80% CBR and 350mm. Sub-
Base Granular material 30% CBR. Works including 300mm. Compact subgrade and fill with min. 15% CBR
as per drawings.

• Constructing offloading Ramps

Page 16 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
BOUNDARY FENCE AND GATES
H.A.C will supply and install all of the parts required for the 2m high perimeter fencing with a 50 cm high anti-climb
system using three rows of barbed wire. Therefore, the total height is 2.5m. Fence materials will be supplied by
the client.

H.A.C will supply and install all of the parts required for the 2m high perimeter fencing with a 50 cm high anti-climb
system using three rows of barbed wire. Therefore, the total height is 2.5m. Fence materials will be supplied by
the client.

H.A.C will install the posts of the fence:

• Circular posts with rain caps

• Distance between support posts: 5.000 mm with bracing at corners and connected to the earth grid.

• Concrete footings for posts C40 (WxLxH: 500 x 500 mm x 800) as per the EN 206 standard

• Concrete footings for strain reliefs C40 ((WxLxH: 1000 x 1000 mm x 800) as per the EN 206 standard
H.A.C will install the manual gate which will have the following specifications:

• Single leaf swing manual-opening gate (Pedestrian Gate - 1.00 m wide)

• The mounting posts should not allow the gates to become un-hinged.

• Concrete footings for gate posts C40 (WxLxH: 500 x 500 mm x 800) as per the EN 206 standard
H.A.C will install the manual gate which will have the following specifications:

• Manual-opening gate (Main Gate – 6.00m wide)

• Frame with dimensions 6 x 2,5 m including hinges, and security locks.

• The mounting posts should not allow the gates to become un-hinged.

• Concrete footings for gate posts C40 (W x L X H: 500 x 500 mm x 800) as per the EN 206 standard

(Please refer to Annex 1 – Item 3)

FOUNDATIONS
H.A.C will construct the concrete foundation according to the international and local codes and standards for the
following facilities:

• Inverter Stations

• Delivery Point (14x4x0.3m)

• Control Building (16x14x0.3m)

Page 17 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
The concrete will be grade C30.

Steel grade will be Fe460

Blinding concrete will be 75mm

BUILDINGS
SUPPLY AND FULL INSTALLATION OF PRE-FABRICATED CONTROL BUILDING:
H.A.C will supply and install of all necessary civil work, MEP works, electrical installation, furniture and additional
facilities (fire-detection systems, ventilation, sanitary, etc.).

SUPPLY & INSTALLATION OF WATER TANK 5,000L:


H.A.C will supply and install Polyethylene roto molded in one-piece tank for outdoor installation, with a plain base,
with a volume of 5,000L, with an access hatch for maintenance operations. Includes cut valves, water pipes (inlet
and outlet). The water tank is protected from UV irradiation avoiding water degradation. Works include but is not
limited to the following:

• Excavation, compaction, installation of subbase layer, forming, blinding, polyethylene sheet, reinforced steel
rebar's, pouring concrete etc.

• Includes attachment inserts into the concrete slab for mounting of the tanks.

• Includes metal ladder for access to the top side of the water tank with platform. installation of pipes &
accessories, supply and install of the protection bollard.

• Includes all required connections to the control building

SUPPLY & INSTALLATION OF SEPTIC TANK:


H.A.C will supply and install roto molded in one-piece tank for buried installation, with a plain base, with a volume
of 2,000L, with an access hatch for maintenance operations. Includes cut valves, water pipes (inlet and outlet).

Works include but is not limited to the following:

• Excavation, compaction, installation of subbase layer, forming, blinding, polyethylene sheet, reinforced steel
rebar's, pouring concrete etc.

• Includes attachment inserts into the concrete slab for mounting of the tanks.

• Installation of pipes & accessories, supply and install of the protection bollard.

• Backfilling

• Includes all required connections to the control building

Page 18 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________

ELECTRICAL SCOPE OF WORK

LV WORKS
CONNECTION OF PV MODULE STRINGS:

• To electrically connect the modules, 30 in series to form the strings by plugging the existing male and
female connectors together. No crimping activities are required since the modules cables have all the
connectors pre-installed.

• Neatly organizing the cables into the module frame utilizing cable clips (cables clips will be supplied by the
Employer), each module will be supplied with 2 cable clips

SUPPLY & INSTALLATION OF DC SWITCH BOX:


H.A.C will supply / install the DC Switch Boxes along with lugs and all required fasteners, with one DC input and
two DC output per pole, with a switch disconnector, a terminal block for the auxiliary power cable and
overvoltage protection. All these devices will be already preinstalled on the DC Switch Box.

• H.A.C will supply / install the Switch Box on the modulespost.

• H.A.C will crimp lugs and terminate the input from the DC-Bus cable (2x70mm²-Al).

• H.A.C will crimp lugs and terminate the output from the DC underground cable (4x240mm²-Al) in the DC
Switch Box

• H.A.C will crimp lugs and terminate the earthing bare copper cable (1cx35mm²) in the DC Switch Box. The
contractor shall supply Y/G heat shrink and isolate the exposed part of the cable

• H.A.C will supply and crimp cable shoes and terminate the input from the auxiliary power supply cable
(2x5cx6mm²-Cu) in the DC Switch Box

• H.A.C will supply and crimp cable shoes and terminate the output from the auxiliary power supply cable
(3cx2.5mm²-Cu) in the DC Switch Box

• H.A.C will verify all glands are properly sealing the cable entries

• The heat shrink sleeves will be provided for the cable sizes mentioned above. The heat shrink will be blue
and red color. Average length is 20cm per termination.

SUPPLY & INSTALLATION OF 300mm² DC UNDERGROUND CABLE


H.A.C will supply / install the 1x300 mm² (Al) 1500Vdc cable

• Laying direct buried DC Cable in the existing DC trenches, from the DC Switch Box to the Inverters and
through the concrete foundation pad of the inverter station

• Terminate at the DC input of the inverter

Page 19 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
• Trenches construction

• Supply the lugs with all required fasteners

• The heat shrink sleeves will be provided for the cable sizes mentioned above. The heat shrink will be blue
and red color. Average length is 20cm per termination.

GROUNDING & LIGHTNING INSTALLATION


SUPPLY/ INSTALL OF COPPER GROUNDING CABLES
H.A.C will:

• Install them directly buried along DC, MV, CCTV and in grounding trenches with all fittings and conforming to
IEC and local standards.

• Terminate each end of 1Cx35mm² bare copper cable to each end of mounting structure, DC Switch Box,
fence post, by exothermic-welding connections and terminate end of the cable to Inverter Station.

• H.A.C will supply the bare copper cable and lugs, and all required exothermic-welding connections and
materials

GROUNDING RODS:

• H.A.C will supply / Install the copper grounding rods with a minimum diameter of 14.3 mm and a minimum
length of 3m.

• H.A.C will supply / Install the rods buried to a depth of minimum 3 meter

• Perform the connection to the earth network

• H.A.C will supply / install of earthing pit with cover for each ground rod (400x400mm)

• In addition to all related accessories

MOUNTING TABLE BONDING:

• H.A.C will supply / install Mounting Table Jumpers by using fastener sets between the mounting tables

MOUNTING TABLE JUMPERS:

• H.A.C will supply / install Mounting Table Jumpers (1x35mm² Cu Y/G) with cable lugs, in addition to
stainless steel fastener sets

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR CONTROL BUILDING

• H.A.C will supply / install lightning protection system with all necessary components in accordance with local
requirements and as per provided drawings.

Page 20 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
• Lightning protection system per set shall include but is not limited to the following:
o Air terminals with mounting accessories

o 3x24mm copper bar as required with mounting accessories

o Test joint (contactor)

o 1Cx70mm² G/Y copper cable (2 sets each 30 m)

o Earth rods in earthing manholes with all accessories

o All termination lugs and fasteners for connecting the items mentioned above

AUXILIARY POWER INSTALLATION

SUPPORT BRACKETS:

• H.A.C will supply / install the support brackets on the posts of the trackers which will be prepared for that
purpose using the provided fasteners. Therefore, the Contractor shall not consider any drilling activities on
the posts.

SADDLE CLAMPS

• H.A.C will supply / install the saddle clamps on the support bracket item (5.1). The Contractor shall tension
the turn buckle to required value

6mm STEEL ROPE:

• H.A.C will lift the steel rope and install the steel rope on the installed brackets.
The steel rope will be 6mm diameter. The length of each section will be 45m in average. The steel rope shall be
secured to the using saddle clamps and using turnbuckles.

• H.A.C will supply all fasteners for securing the steel rope to the brackets.

THE HANGERS

• H.A.C will supply / install the hangers on the steel rope after finishing the previous-mentioned items

LAYING DC-BUS CABLE TYPE-1 (70mm²) IN THE HANGERS:


The Contractor shall lay the DC-Bus Cable in the hangers. This item considers laying 2 DC-Bus Cables

(positive and negative) in each hanger.

Page 21 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________

LAYING DC-BUS CABLE TYPE-2 (95mm²) IN THE HANGERS: (Please Refer to DC Cable Management System)

• H.A.C will lay the DC-Bus Cable in the hangers.

This item considers laying 2 DC-Bus Cables (positive and negative) in each hanger.

LAYING AND TERMINATION OF AUXILIARY POWER CABLES:

MONITORING SYSTEM

CENTRAL MONITORING RACK:

H.A.C will supply the Central Monitoring Rack and install it at the Control Building. The work includes the
• electrical and communication connection of the rack.

• The Central Monitoring Rack will include the following equipment (or equivalent) but is not limited to:

o 1 - Rack 19" AT 22U

o 1 - Electrical leading RACK 19in 1U 9 Plugs 1 - Patch Panel Cat 5e UTP 48 ports

o 1 - Patch Panel F.O.

o 1 - UPS ME-6000-GRU - 2h 6KV Rack 19

o 2 - Adaptor for DIN rail 1 - ventilation unit 19"

o 1 - Switch Ethernet JETNET 5428G

o 1 - Power supply 220/24V: PULS DIMENSION, CS5.241

o 1- Surge arrestor: PHOENIX CONTACT, PLUBTRAB PT 2 PE/S 230AC/FM 2858357

o 2- Differential switch: ABB, S202

Page 22 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
o 1 - Modbus RTU / TCP converter: MOXA, MGate MB3280

o 1 - Input/output model: ADAM 5000/TCP (ADAM-5000L/TCP-AE, 1 x ADAM-5017-A4E, 1 x ADAM-5050-


A2E)

THE MAIN CONTROL UNIT:

• H.A.C will supply / install the Main Control Units at the Inverter Stations.

• H.A.C will supply the necessary mechanical attachments to install this equipment at the Inverter Stations.

POWER PLANT CONTROLLER:

• H.A.C will supply / install the Power Plant Controller at the Control Building.

• H.A.C will:

o Perform the electrical and communication connection of the Power Plant Controller with the network.

o Including supporting Inverter Supplier for the commissioning of the Power Plant controller

WEATHER STATION:

• H.A.C will supply / install the meteorological stations and accessories.

• This work includes the installation of the following cables and equipment:

o Laying and termination of 30 m LV power cabling type 3cx4mm² 0.6/1kV for the power supply to
Meteorological Station,

o Laying and termination of 30 m Ethernet Cat6 cable


o Data logger

o I/O module

o Power supply.

o 1 x 6-meter Post with an 800 mm x 800 mm x 600 mm Reinforced Concrete Foundation

o 1 x Horizontal pyranometer secondary standard on the tower

o 1 x Wind speed & direction on the tower


o 1 x Ambient temperature on the tower

o 2 x Module Temperature Sensor on the back side of the modules


Page 23 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
o 1 x Relative humidity sensor on the tower

H.A.C will supply and install all required SS PVC quoted cable ties and cable shoes

RS-485 UNDERGROUND COMMUNICATION CABLES IN CONDUITS:

• H.A.C will supply / install the RS 485 2x2x22 AWG type FTP with twisted/screened pairs communication
cables to connect to the modules

TERMINATION OF RS-485 COMMUNICATION CABLES:

• H.A.C will terminate the communication cables in the Main Control Units and in the trackers motors control
units. Each Unit is one connection; therefore, a single cable has 2 connections at the start and the end of
each cable.

INSTALLATION OF FIBER OPTIC CABLES BETWEEN INVERTER STATIONS/ FROM INVERTER STATIONS TO CONTROL
BUILDING:

• H.A.C will supply / install the armored Optical Fiber, Multi-mode, 50/125, 12 fibers cables and they will be
buried directly.

• H.A.C will supply the required connectors and perform the splicing works

CONNECTION AND PRE-COMMISSIONING OF THE MONITORING SYSTEM AT THE INVERTER STATIONS AND
CONTROL BUILDING:

• H.A.C will provide test report for each connector of the Fiber optic cables. These tests must be performed by
a certified party for these tests

• Ensure connectivity of all related equipment to the communication infrastructure within the Inverter Stations
and the Control Building

• Support monitoring system supplier in pre-commissioning activities to ensure the operation of the system
and correct installation

SECURITY SYSTEM
LAYING OF FIBER OPTIC CABLES FOR SECURITY SYSTEM:

• H.A.C will supply / install the armored Optical Fiber, Multi-mode, 50/125 fiber optic cables in the trenches.

Page 24 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
LAYING AND TERMINATION OF POWER SUPPLY CABLES FOR THE CAMERA NETWORK:

• H.A.C will supply / install the LV power supply cables 3cx2.5mm² 0.6/1kV and relevant crimp cable shoes

SECURITY THERMAL CAMERAS (35mm) - SECURITY DOME CAMERAS:

• H.A.C will supply / install thermal Camera 35 mm or similar to cover the perimeter, including all necessary
equipment according to drawings.

• H.A.C will supply / install the Security Dome Cameras to cover all the input with IR night vision mode system
including all necessary equipment.

SECURITY CAMERAS SWITCH BOARDS:

• H.A.C will supply / install the thermal and dome cameras security switch board to the post of the camera
including all necessary equipment.

SECURITY CAMERAS POSTS:

• H.A.C will supply / install the security posts (4m in height) for the cameras. This activity includes all the
necessary equipment including the concrete foundation (300x300x750mm) with 4 No. M16 mounting bolts.

INSTALLATION OF CABLES FROM CAMERA TO SWITCH BOARDS:

• H.A.C will supply / install the Ethernet cables, power supply cables, conduits, and cable ties:

• Fix 3m conduit to post including 90° elbow if required using SS PVC quoted cable ties.

• Lay and connect 3m pre-crimped Ethernet cable from Switch Board to Camera through conduit

• Lay and connect 3m power cable 3Cx2.5mm² cable from Switch Board to Camera through conduit for the

• H.A.C will supply and crimp the cable shoes required.

SECURITY SYSTEM DEVICES AT THE CONTROL BUILDING:

• H.A.C will supply / install the following equipment:

o 2 x 19" TFT Monitors


o Online UPS + 2h Batteries

o 19" Rack Cabinet 600 x 800 or similar

o Power distribution units

o PTZ Controller

o Videorecorder and IP encoder with video analysis license

o Keyboard for NVR


o 1 x Manageable Modular Switch
o Necessary patch cords

o Necessary patch panels

Page 25 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
INSTALLATION OF THE INVERTER STATIONS
• H.A.C will unload and place the inverter station on the foundation using a crane and following the
installation manual instruction

o Inverters of 1.275 MVA

o 1x Medium Voltage skid preassembled by supplier with: 2x MV transformer, 2x AUX transformer, RMU, LV
Panel.

MEDIUM VOLTAGE INSTALLATION


LAYING OF MV CABLES

TYPE MATERIAL

TYPE 1: 185mm² 12.7/22 (24) kV underground MV line, single cable Al conductor,


1x185 mm², directly buried in trench for inverter station connection

TYPE 2: 300mm² 12.7/22 (24) kV underground MV line, single cable Al conductor,


1x300 mm², directly buried in trench for inverter station connection

TYPE 3: 630mm² 12.7/22 (24) kV underground MV line, single cable Al conductor,


1x630 mm², directly buried in trench for inverter station connection

INSTALLATION OF MV TERMINALS:
H.A.C will supply / install MV termination kit suitable for (185/300/630) mm² cables in MV Switchgear (Inverter
Stations and substation); each termination is considered to be 1 cable end and 1 phase only

INSTALLATION OF MV JOINTS:
H.A.C will supply / install MV Joints suitable for (185/300/630) mm² cables in MV Switchgear (Inverter Stations
and substation); each termination is considered to be 1 cable end and 1 phase only

INSTALLATION OF MV MAIN SWITCHGEAR:


H.A.C will supply / install the MV Main Switchgear:

• Unload the MV Main Switchgear Package Unit at its final location and place on concrete foundations

INSTALLATION OF MV RING MAIN UNIT AND AUX SUPPLY:


H.A.C will supply / install the MV Package Unit:

• Install the MV Ring Main Unit on the dedicated foundation next to the Control Room.

Page 26 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
INSTALLATION OF MV/LV Auxiliary Transformer:
H.A.C will perform the following activities to install the MV/LV Auxiliary Transformer and the Auxiliary Distribution
Board in the Control Room:

• Supply / install the 60kVA MV/LV Auxiliary Transformer on the dedicated foundation next to the Control
Room.

• Supply / install the Auxiliary Distribution Board in the Control Room.

COMMISSIONING OF THE MV WORKS:


H.A.C will perform the commissioning of the MV System in accordance to the relevant IEC Standards.

TRENCHES
MECHANICAL EXCAVATION OF MV / DC TRENCHES:
H.A.C will execute these trenches in accordance with the following:

TRENCH TYPE SIZE (W x D) - cm


MV TRENCHES 50 x 90
DC TRENCHES TYPES 1 & TYPE 7 50 x 80
DC TRENCHES TYPE 2 80 x 80
DC TRENCHES TYPE 3 200 x 80
DC TRENCHES TYPE 4 60 x 80
DC TRENCHES TYPE 5 200 x 80
DC TRENCHES TYPE 6 200 x 95
• Laying 10cm of trench bed, fine sand without rocks

• Laying all cables according to the drawings

• Backfilling the trench with imported soil according to the drawings.

• Specification of Replacement Soil:

o Soil Thermal Resistivity of Replacement Soil:  2 W/m. K, at maximum moisture content of 2% or less at
90% Compaction.

• Backfilling the trench with the excavated soil according to the drawings. Rock particles larger than 150 mm
shall be removed prior to compaction of the fill. The excavation works shall be completely dry, unless
otherwise specified.

• Each layer should be compacted up to 90% of natural proctor

• Place warning tape according to the drawings

• Mechanical protection supply and installation according to the drawings.

• The cable routes must be marked by concrete blocks clearly indicating voltage and cable type at every 50
meters.
Page 27 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
• All works should be performed according to IEC and Local Standards.
MECHANICAL EXCAVATION OF EARTHING TRENCHES

• H.A.C will execute these trenches in accordance with the following:

o Opening of trench (W x D: 30 x 50 cm) by mechanical excavation, according to drawings and


specifications

o Laying all cables according to the drawings

o Backfilling the trench with the excavated soil according to the drawings. Rock particles larger than 150
mm shall be removed prior to compaction of the fill. The excavation works shall be completely dry, unless
otherwise specified.

o Each layer should be compacted up to 90% of natural proctor

o Place warning tape according to the drawings

• All works should be performed according to IEC and Local Standards. The Contractor shall supply the
warning tape

MECHANICAL EXCAVATION OF CCTV TRENCHES:

• H.A.C will execute these trenches in accordance with the following:

o Opening of trench (W x D: 30 x 50 cm) by mechanical excavation, according to drawings and


specifications

o Laying 10 cm of trench bed, fine sand without rocks

o Laying all cables and conduits according to the drawings

o Backfilling the trench with the excavated soil Rock particles larger than 150 mm shall be removed prior
to compaction of the fill. The excavation works shall be completely dry, unless otherwise specified.

o Each layer should be compacted up to 90% of natural proctor

o Place warning tape according to the drawings


• All works should be performed according to IEC and Local Standards. The Contractor shall supply the
warning tape

CONDUITS INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION DIRECTLY IN THE GROUND

• H.A.C will supply / install the conduit along with elbows, joints and supplementary material.

• The conduits will be Schedule 40

Page 28 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
LABELLING
• H.A.C will supply / install all electrical equipment and cables’ labels.

COMMISSIONING
PRE-COMMISSIONING:

• H.A.C will perform pre-commissioning works which includes but is not limited to the following:

o Checking system integrity, compliance with technical specifications, electrical terminals torque and
marking of the correct torque position, visuals inspections, etc.

o Proper tools will be used (torque wrenches, etc.)

COMMISSIONING:

o The final commissioning and the pre-commissioning will be performed by H.A.C, with / without the
assistance of a Subcontractor of 3rd Party

o However, H.A.C will be responsible to perform all commissioning required tests,

SURVEYING WORKS
• H.A.C will:

o Find best solution to mark the correct location of the trenches, foundations, manholes and any other
electrical installation works which might require the marking. Refer to the general and electrical layout
for further information.

o Any tools or material needed like steel or plastic sticks to place the marks shall be provided during
surveying works.

o H.A.C will provide all calibration certificates of surveying equipment prior to performing the works

o H.A.C will provide a permanent land surveyor for the duration of the civil activities, and as many land
surveyors as necessary for the on- time, as per schedule completion of the works. All progress reports will
contain the land surveyor's measurements attached.

Page 29 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________

MECHANICAL SCOPE OF WORK

SUPPORT STRUCTURES FOR MODULES


INSTALLATION OF SUPPORT STRUCTURES FOR MODULES

• Hot-dip galvanized steel piles, Aluminum support beams, complete with support poles, longitudinal support
structure, including every part of assembly to the foundation.

INSTALLATION OF DRIVEN OMEGA PILES

• Driven piles will be driven to 1.40m height above ground

• S275JR steel - hot-dip galvanized according to ISO1461:2009

INSTALLATION OF DRIVEN OMEGA PILES FOR STRINGBOX SUPPORT

• Height above ground 1.40 m S275JR steel - hot-dip galvanized according to ISO1461:2009

Page 30 of 44
_____________________________________________________________________ __________________

ANNEX 1: LIST OF GENERAL RULES

Page 31 of 44
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 2 of 18

Index
GeneralOverviewfortheStandards ...................................................................................................................... 3
PVModules ........................................................................................................................................................... 3
Inverters ................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Transformer .......................................................................................................................................................... 8
Cables .................................................................................................................................................................. 10
Metering .............................................................................................................................................................. 11
Monitoring .......................................................................................................................................................... 12
General ................................................................................................................................................................ 12
Safety ....................................................................................................................................................................................................15
Components ....................................................................................................................................................... 18
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 3 of 18

GeneralOverviewfortheStandards

The following table summarizes available local standards for main components of PV power
generation systems as well as related international standards.

PVModules
(notes): ___

Standard Scope Objective

IEC 62817 Photovoltaic systems - Design qualification of solar IEC 62817:2014 is a design qualification standard
trackers applicable to solar trackers for photovoltaic systems, but
may be used for trackers in other solar applications. The
standard defines test procedures for both key
components and for the complete tracker system. In some
cases, test procedures describe methods to measure
and/or calculate parameters to be reported in the defined
tracker specification sheet. In other cases, the test
procedure results in a pass/fail criterion. This standard
ensures the user of the said tracker that parameters
reported in the specification sheet were measured by
consistent and accepted industry procedures. The tests
with pass/fail criteria are engineered with the purpose of
separating tracker designs that are likely to have early
failures from those designs that are sound and suitable for
use as specified by the manufacturer.
IEC 62790 Junction boxes for photovoltaic modules - Safety IEC 62790:2014 describes safety requirements,
requirements and tests constructional requirements and tests for junction boxes
up to 1 500 V dc for use on photovoltaic modules
according to class II of IEC 61140:2001. This standard
applies also to enclosures mounted on PV-modules
containing electronic circuits for converting, controlling,
monitoring or similar operations.
IEC TS 62727 Photovoltaic systems - Specification for solar IEC/TS 62727:2012(E) provides guidelines for the
trackers parameters to be specified for solar trackers for
photovoltaic systems and provides recommendations for
measurement techniques. The purpose of this test
specification is to define the performance characteristics
of trackers and describe the methods to calculate and/or
measure critical parameters. This specification provides
industry-wide definitions and parameters for solar
trackers.
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 4 of 18

Standard Scope Objective

IEC 62548 Photovoltaic (PV) arrays - Design requirements IEC/TS 62548:2013(E) sets out design requirements for
photovoltaic (PV) arrays including d.c. array wiring,
electrical protection devices, switching and earthing
provisions. The scope includes all parts of the PV array up
to but not including energy storage devices, power
conversion equipment or loads. The object of this
Technical Specification is to address the design safety
requirements arising from the particular characteristics of
photovoltaic systems.
IEC 61730 Photovoltaic (PV) module safety qualification IEC 61730-1:2004+A1:2011+A2:2013 Describes the
Part 1: Requirements for construction fundamental construction requirements for photovoltaic
Part 2: Requirements for testing modules in order to provide safe electrical and mechanical
operation during their expected lifetime. Addresses the
prevention of electrical shock, fire hazards, and personal
injury due to mechanical and environmental stresses.
Pertains to the particular requirements of construction
and is to be used in conjunction with IEC 61215 or IEC
61646. This consolidated version consists of the first
edition (2004), its amendment 1 (2011) and its
amendment 2 (2013). Therefore, no need to order
amendments in addition to this publication.
IEC 61724 Photovoltaic system performance monitoring - Recommends procedures for the monitoring of energy-
Guidelines for measurement, data exchange and related photovoltaic (PV) system characteristics, and for
analysis the exchange and analysis of monitored data. The purpose
is the assessment of the overall performance of PV
systems.
IEC 61683 Photovoltaic systems - Power conditioners - Describes guidelines for measuring the efficiency of power
Procedure for measuring efficiency conditioners used in stand-alone and utility-interactive
photovoltaic systems, where the output of the power
conditioner is a stable a.c. voltage of constant frequency
or a stable d.c. voltage.
IEC 61345 UV test for photovoltaic (PV) modules Determines the ability of a photovoltaic module to
withstand exposure to ultra-violet (UV) radiation from 280
nm to 400 nm.
IEC 61215 Terrestrial photovoltaic (PV) modules - Design IEC 61215-1:2016 lays down requirements for the design
qualification and type approval qualification and type approval of terrestrial photovoltaic
Part 1: Test requirements (PV) modules suitable for long-term operation in general
open-air climates, as defined in IEC 60721-2-1. This
Part 1-1: Special requirements for testing of
standard is intended to apply to all terrestrial flat plate
crystalline silicon photovoltaic (PV) modules
module materials such as crystalline silicon module types
Part 2: Test procedures as well as thin-film modules. The objective of this test
sequence is to determine the electrical and thermal
characteristics of the module and to show, as far as
possible within reasonable constraints of cost and time,
that the module is capable of withstanding prolonged
exposure in climates described in the scope. This edition
of IEC 61215-1 includes the following significant technical
changes with respect to the second edition of IEC
61215:2005: new standard series structure consistent
with other IEC standards: Part 1 lists general
requirements, Part 1-x specifics for each PV technology
and Part 2 defines testing. All tests defined in Part 2 are
MQTs (module quality tests).
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 5 of 18

Standard Scope Objective

IEC 60904 Photovoltaic devices Describes procedures for the measurement of current-
Part 1: Measurement of photovoltaic current-voltage voltage characteristics of photovoltaic devices in natural
characteristics or simulated sunlight. Lays down basic requirements for
the measurement, defines procedures for different
measuring techniques in use and shows practices for
minimising measurement uncertainty.
IEC 60891 Photovoltaic devices - Procedures for temperature IEC 60891:2009 defines procedures to be followed for
and irradiance corrections to measured I-V temperature and irradiance corrections to the measured I-
characteristics V (current-voltage) characteristics of photovoltaic devices.
It also defines the procedures used to determine factors
relevant for these corrections. Requirements for I-V
measurement of photovoltaic devices are laid down in IEC
60904-1.
IEC 60870-1 Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 1: General Section one: Specifies classes for environmental
considerations. conditions under which telecontrol equipment has to
Section One: General principles operate. Gives an overall view of the functional elements
contributing to basic structures and to the choice of
Section Two: General principles
telecontrol system configurations. It deals with functions
which are typical for any process to be monitored and
controlled but emphasizes the specific problems which
characterize geographically widespread processes, such as
the dominant influence of telecommunications links with
restricted bandwidth and often low signal-to-noise ratio.
However, this report serves only as an introduction to the
detailed standards and recommendations laid down in
Parts 2-5 of IEC 60870.
Section Two: Presents guidelines but not standards for
establishing specifications for telecontrol systems and
equipment following the other IEC standards on
telecontrol systems and other relevant international
standards and recommendations such as CCITT
recommendations. Also facilitates the comparison of
equipment produced by different manufacturers.
IEC 60870-5 Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: IEC 60870-5-101:2003+A1:2015 Applies to telecontrol
Transmission protocols equipment and systems with coded bit serial data
Part 5-101: Transmission protocols - Companion transmission for monitoring and controlling geographically
widespread processes. Defines a telecontrol companion
standard for basic telecontrol tasks
standard that enables interoperability among compatible
telecontrol equipment. The defined telecontrol
companion standard utilizes standards of the IEC 60870-5
series of documents.
IEC 60364-1 Low-voltage electrical installations Fundamental principles, assessment of general
characteristics, definitions
IEC 60364-7 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 7-712: Apply to the electrical installations of PV power supply
Requirements for special installations or locations - systems including systems with AC modules.
Solar photovoltaic (PV) power supply systems
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 6 of 18

Standard Scope Objective

IEC/TR 61850 Communication networks and systems for power IEC/TR 61850-1:2013 is applicable to power utility
utility automation automation systems and defines the communication
Part 1: Introduction and overview between intelligent electronic devices in such a system,
and the related system requirements. This part gives an
Part 3: General requirements
introduction and overview of the IEC 61850 standard
Part 4: System and project management
series.
IEC 61850-3:2013 defines the general requirements,
mainly regarding construction, design and environmental
conditions for utility communication and automation IEDs
(intelligent electronic devices) and systems in power plant
and substation environments. These general requirements
are in line with requirements for IEDs used in similar
environments, for example measuring relays and
protection equipment.
IEC 61850-4:2011 applies to projects associated with
process near automation systems of power utilities (UAS,
utility automation system), like e.g. substation automation
systems (SAS). It defines the system and project
management for UAS systems with communication
between intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) in the
substation respective plant and the related system
requirements.
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 7 of 18

Inverters
(notes): ___

Standard Scope Objective


IEC 62109 Safety of power converters for use in photovoltaic IEC 62109-1:2010(E) applies to the power conversion
power systems equipment (PCE) for use in photovoltaic systems where a
Part 1: General requirements uniform technical level with respect to safety is necessary.
Defines the minimum requirements for the design and
Part 2: Particular requirements for inverters
manufacture of PCE for protection against electric shock,
energy, fire, mechanical and other hazards. Provides general
requirements applicable to all types of PV PCE.
IEC 62109-2:2011 covers the particular safety requirements
relevant to d.c. to a.c. inverter products as well as products
that have or perform inverter functions in addition to other
functions, where the inverter is intended for use in
photovoltaic power systems. Inverters covered by this
standard may be grid-interactive, stand-alone, or multiple
mode inverters, may be supplied by single or multiple
photovoltaic modules grouped in various array configurations,
and may be intended for use in conjunction with batteries or
other forms of energy storage.
IEC 62116 Utility-interconnected photovoltaic inverters - Test IEC 62116:2014 provides a test procedure to evaluate the
procedure of islanding prevention measures performance of islanding prevention measures used with
utility-interconnected PV systems. This standard describes a
guideline for testing the performance of automatic islanding
prevention measures installed in or with single or multi-phase
utility interactive PV inverters connected to the utility grid.
The test procedure and criteria described are minimum
requirements that will allow repeatability. Major changes with
respect to the previous edition concern the DC power source
and test conditions.
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 8 of 18

Transformer
(notes): ___

Standard Scope Objective


IEC 61558-1 Safety of power transformers, power supplies, IEC 61558-1:2005+A1:2009 deals with safety aspects of
reactors and similar products power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar
Part 1: General requirements and tests products such as electrical, thermal and mechanical safety.
This standard covers the following types of dry-type
transformers, power supplies, including switch mode
power supplies, and reactors, the windings of which may
be encapsulated or non-encapsulated. It has the status of
a group safety publication in accordance with IEC Guide
104. This consolidated version consists of the second
edition (2005) and its amendment 1 (2009).
IEC 61558-2 Safety of power transformers, power supplies, Section 2-1: This part of IEC 61558 deals with safety
reactors and similar products aspects of separating transformers and power supplies
Part 2-1: Particular requirements and tests for incorporating separating transformers such as electrical,
thermal and mechanical safety. This second edition
separating transformers and power supplies
cancels and replaces the first edition published in 1997. It
incorporating separating transformers for general
constitutes a technical revision. The main changes consist
applications of updating this Part 2-1 in accordance with Part 1 edition
Part 2-2: Particular requirements and tests for 2, and adding power supplies to the scope. This Part 2-1
control transformers and power supplies has the status of a group safety publication in accordance
incorporating control transformers with IEC Guide 104.
Section 2-2: This part of IEC 61558 deals with safety
aspects of control transformers and power supplies
incorporating control transformers such as electrical,
thermal and mechanical safety This second edition cancels
and replaces the first edition published in 1997.
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 9 of 18

Standard Scope Objective


IEC 60076 Power transformers IEC 60076-1:2011 applies to three-phase and single-phase
Part 1: General power transformers (including auto-transformers) with the
Part 2: Temperature rise for liquid-immersed exception of certain categories of small and special
transformers. For those categories of power transformers
transformers
and reactors which have their own IEC standards, this part
Part 6: Reactors
is applicable only to the extent in which it is specifically
Part 11: Dry-type transformers called up by cross-reference in the other standard.
IEC 60076-2:2011 applies to liquid-immersed transformers,
identifies power transformers according to their cooling
methods, defines temperature rise limits and gives the
methods for temperature rise tests.
IEC 60076-6:2007 Applies to the following types of
reactors: shunt reactors; series reactors including current-
limiting reactors, neutral-earthing reactors, power flow
control reactors, motor starting reactors, arc-furnace
series reactors; filter (tuning) reactors; capacitor damping
reactors; capacitor discharge reactors; earthing
transformers (neutral couplers); arc-suppression reactors;
smoothing reactors for HVDC and industrial application.
IEC 60076-11: Applies to dry-type power transformers
(including auto-transformers) having values of highest
voltage for equipment up to and including 36 kV and at
least one winding operating at greater than 1,1 kV. Applies
to all construction technologies.
IEC 61558-3 Safety of power transformers, power supplies, IEC 61558-1:2005+A1:2009 deals with safety aspects of
reactors and similar products power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar
Part 1: General requirements and tests products such as electrical, thermal and mechanical safety.
This standard covers the following types of dry-type
transformers, power supplies, including switch mode
power supplies, and reactors, the windings of which may
be encapsulated or non-encapsulated. It has the status of
a group safety publication in accordance with IEC Guide
104. This consolidated version consists of the second
edition (2005) and its amendment 1 (2009).
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 10 of 18

Cables
(notes): ___

Standard Scope Objective


IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables Specifies the nominal cross-sectional areas, in the range
0,5 mm2 to 2 500 mm2, for conductors in electric power
cables and cords of a wide range of types. Requirements
for numbers and sizes of wires and resistance values are
also included. These conductors include solid and stranded
copper, aluminium and aluminium alloy conductors in
cables for fixed installations and flexible copper
conductors. The standard does not apply to conductors for
telecommunication purposes. The applicability of this
standard to a particular type of cable is as specified in the
standard for the type of cable. Unless indicated to the
contrary in a particular clause, this standard relates to the
conductors in the finished cable and not to the conductor
as made or supplied for inclusion into a cable. Informative
annexes are included giving supplementary information
covering temperature correction factors for resistance
measurement (Annex B) and dimensional limits of circular
conductors (Annex C). The principal changes with respect
to the previous edition are as follows: a) the consolidation
of material from IEC 60228A; b) addition of a definition for
nominal cross-sectional area; c) an increase in the range of
conductor sizes in Tables 1 and 2; d) addition of a note
that solid aluminum alloy conductors, having the same
dimensions as aluminum conductors, will have a higher
resistance; e) strengthening of the recommendations for
dimensional limits of compacted stranded copper
conductors.
IEC 60502 Power cables with extruded insulation and their IEC 60502-1:2004+A1:2009 specifies the construction,
accessories for rated voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 dimensions and test requirements of power cables with
kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) extruded solid insulation for rated voltages of 1 kV (Um =
1,2 kV) and 3 kV (Um = 3,6 kV) for fixed installations such
Part 1: Cables for rated voltages of 1 kV (Um = 1,2
as distribution networks or industrial installations. This
kV) and 3 kV (Um = 3,6 kV)
standard includes cables which exhibit properties of
reduced flame spread, low levels of smoke emission and
halogen-free gas emission when exposed to fire. Cables for
special installation and service conditions are not included,
for example cables for overhead networks, the mining
industry, nuclear power plants (in and around the
containment area), submarine use or shipboard
application.
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 11 of 18

Metering
(notes): ___

Standard Scope Objective


IEC 61869 Instrument transformers - Part 1: General This International Standard is applicable to newly
requirements manufactured instrument transformers with analogue or
digital output for use with electrical measuring
instruments or electrical protective devices having rated
frequencies from 15 Hz to 100 Hz. TC 38 decided to
restructure the whole set of stand-alone Standards in the
IEC 60044 series and transform it into a new set of
standards composed of general requirements documents
and specific requirements documents. This Standard is the
first issue of this new series and can be regarded as a
Product Family standard. It contains the general
requirements for instrument transformers and shall be
read in conjunction with the relevant specific
requirements standard for the instrument transformer
concerned.
IEC 62052 Electricity metering equipment (AC) - General Covers type tests for electricity metering equipment for
requirements, tests and test conditions - Part 11: indoor and outdoor application and to newly
Metering equipment manufactured equipment designed to measure the electric
energy on 50 Hz or 60 Hz networks, with a voltage up to
600 V. It applies to electromechanical or static meters for
indoor and outdoor application consisting of a measuring
element and register(s) enclosed together in a meter case.
It also applies to operation indicator(s) and test output(s).
IEC 62053 Electricity metering equipment (a.c.) - Particular Part 11: Electromechanical meters for active energy
requirements (classes 0,5, 1 and 2)
Part 21: Static meters for active energy (classes 1 and 2)
Part 23: Static meters for reactive energy (classes 2 and 3)
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 12 of 18

Monitoring
(notes): ___

Standard Scope Objective


IEC 60950 Information technology equipment - Safety - Part 1: IEC 60950-1:2005+A1:2009+A2:2013 is applicable to
General requirements mains-powered or battery-powered information
technology equipment, including electrical business
equipment and associated equipment, with a RATED
VOLTAGE not exceeding 600 V. Also applicable are
components and subassemblies intended for
incorporation in information technology equipment. It is
not expected that such components and subassemblies
comply with every aspect of the standard, provided that
the complete information technology equipment,
incorporating such components and subassemblies, does
comply.

General
(notes): ___

Standard Scope Objective


IEC 60068 Environmental testing EC 60068-2-78:2012 RLV contains the International
Part 2-78: Tests – Test Cab: Damp heat, steady state Standard and its Redline version. The Redline version is
available in English only. The Redline version provides you
with a quick and easy way to compare all the changes
between this standard and its previous edition. The
Redline version is not an official IEC Standard, only the
current version of the standard is to be considered the
official document.
IEC 60068-2-78:2012 establishes a test method for
determining the ability of components or equipment to
withstand transportation, storage and use under
conditions of high humidity. The object of this standard is
to investigate the effect of high humidity at constant
temperature without condensation on a specimen over a
prescribed period. It is applicable to small equipment or
components as well as large equipment, and can be
applied to both heat-dissipating and non-heat-dissipating
specimens.
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 13 of 18

Standard Scope Objective


IEC 60364 Low-voltage electrical installations Gives the rules for the design, erection, and verification of
Part 1: Fundamental principles, assessment of electrical installations. The rules are intended to provide
general characteristics, definitions for the safety of persons, livestock and property against
dangers and damage which may arise in the reasonable
use of electrical installations and to provide for the proper
functioning of those installations. IEC 60364-1 applies to
the design, erection and verification of electrical
installations such as those of a) residential premises; b)
commercial premises; c) public premises; d) industrial
premises; e) agricultural and horticultural premises; f)
prefabricated buildings; g) caravans, caravan sites and
similar sites; h) construction sites, exhibitions, fairs and
other installations for temporary purposes; i) marinas; j)
external lighting and similar installations; k) medical
locations; l) mobile or transportable units; m) photovoltaic
systems; n) low-voltage generating sets. IEC 60364-1
covers a) circuits supplied at nominal voltages up to and
including 1 000 V a.c. or 1 500 V d.c.; b) circuits, other than
the internal wiring of apparatus, operating at voltages
exceeding 1 000 V and derived from an installation having
a voltage not exceeding 1 000 V a.c., for example,
discharge lighting, electrostatic precipitators; c) wiring
systems and cables not specifically covered by the
standards for appliances; d) all consumer installations
external to buildings; e) fixed wiring for information and
communication technology, signalling, control and the like
(excluding internal wiring of apparatus); f) the extension or
alteration of the installation and also parts of the existing
installation affected by the extension or alteration.
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP IEC 60529:1989+A1:1999+A2:2013 Applies to the
Code) classification of degrees of protection provided by
enclosures for electrical equipment with a rated voltage
not exceeding 72,5 kV. Has the status of a basic safety
publication in accordance with IEC Guide 104. The
contents of the corrigenda of January 2003, September
2007, October 2009, October 2013 and May 2015 have
been included in this copy.
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 14 of 18

Standard Scope Objective


IEC 60811 Electric and optical fibre cables - Test methods for IEC 60811-504:2012 gives the procedure for performing
non-metallic materials bending tests at low temperature on extruded insulations
Part 504: Mechanical tests - Bending tests at low and sheaths. IEC 60811-504:2012 cancels and replaces 8.1
and 8.2 of IEC 60811-1-4:1985, which is withdrawn. Full
temperature for insulation and sheaths
details of the replacements are shown in Annex A of IEC
Part 505: Mechanical tests - Elongation at low
60811-100:2012.
temperature for insulations and sheaths IEC 60811-505:2012 gives the procedure for performing
Part 506: Mechanical tests - Impact test at low elongation tests at low temperature on extruded
temperature for insulations and sheaths insulations and sheaths. IEC 60811-505:2012 cancels and
replaces 8.3 and 8.4 of IEC 60811-1-4:1985, which is
withdrawn. Full details of the replacements are shown in
Annex A of IEC 60811-100:2012.
IEC 60811-506:2012 gives the procedure for performing
impact tests at low temperature on extruded insulations
and sheaths. IEC 60811-506:2012 cancels and replaces 8.5
of IEC 60811-1-4:1985, which is withdrawn. Full details of
the replacements are shown in Annex A of IEC 60811-
100:2012.
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 15 of 18

Safety
(notes): ___

Standard Scope Objective


IEC 60099 Surge arresters IEC 60099-4:2014 applies to non-linear metal-oxide
Part 4: Metal-oxide surge arresters without gaps for resistor type surge arresters without spark gaps designed
a.c. systems to limit voltage surges on a.c. power circuits with Us above
1 kV.
Part 5: Selection and application recommendations
IEC 60099-5:2013(E) is not a mandatory standard but
provides information, guidance, and recommendations for
the selection and application of surge arresters to be used
in three-phase systems with nominal voltages above 1 kV.
It applies to gapless metal-oxide surge arresters as defined
in IEC 60099-4, to surge arresters containing both series
and parallel gapped structure - rated 52 kV and less as
defined in IEC 60099-6 and metal-oxide surge arresters
with external series gap for overhead transmission and
distribution lines (EGLA) as defined in IEC 60099-8. In
Annex H, some aspects regarding the old type of SiC
gapped arresters are discussed.
IEC 60365 Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire IEC 60332-1-2:2004+A1:2015 Specifies the procedure for
conditions testing the resistance to vertical flame propagation for a
Part 1-2: Test for vertical flame propagation for a single vertical electrical insulated conductor or cable, or
optical fibre cable, under fire conditions. The apparatus is
single insulated wire or cable - Procedure for 1 kW
given in IEC 60332-1-1.
pre-mixed flame
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 16 of 18

Standard Scope Objective


IEC 60754 Test on gases evolved during combustion of IEC 60754-1:2011 specifies the apparatus and procedure
materials from cables for the determination of the amount of halogen acid gas,
Part 1: Determination of the halogen acid gas other than hydrofluoric acid, evolved during the
combustion of compounds based on halogenated
content
polymers and compounds containing halogenated
Part 2: Determination of acidity (by pH
additives taken from electric or optical fibre cable
measurement) and conductivity constructions. The method specified in this standard is
intended for the testing of individual components used in
a cable construction. The use of this method will enable
the verification of requirements which are stated in the
appropriate cable specification for individual components
of a cable construction.
IEC 60754-2:2011 specifies the apparatus and procedure
for the determination of the potential corrosivity of gases
evolved during the combustion of materials taken from
electric or optical fibre cable constructions by measuring
the acidity (pH) and conductivity of an aqueous solution
resulting from the gases evolved during the combustion.
The general method specified in this standard is intended
for the testing of individual components used in a cable
construction. Formulae are given for the calculation of a
weighted value for a combination of materials found in a
specified cable. The use of this method will enable the
verification of relevant requirements for either individual
components or combined components of a cable
construction stated in the appropriate cable specification.
A simplified method is included for the testing of individual
components where it is required only to demonstrate
compliance with a stated performance requirement for
quality control purposes.
IEC 61034 Measurement of smoke density of cables burning IEC 61034-1:2005+A1:2013 Provides details of the test
under defined conditions apparatus to be used for measuring smoke emission when
Part 1: Test apparatus electric or optical fibre cables are burnt under defined
conditions, for example, a few cables burnt horizontally.
The light transmittance (lt) under flaming combustion and
smouldering conditions can be used as a means of
comparing different cables or complying with specific
requirements. NOTE: For the purposes of this standard,
the term "electric cable" covers all insulated metallic
conductor cables used for the conveyance of energy or
signals.
IEC 62305 Protection against lightning IEC 62305-1:2010 provides general principles to be
Part 1: General principles followed for protection of structures against lightning,
Part 3: Physical damage to structures and life hazard including their installations and contents, as well as
persons.
IEC 62305-3:2010 provides the requirements for
protection of a structure against physical damage by
means of a lightning protection system (LPS), and for
protection against injury to living beings due to touch and
step voltages in the vicinity of an LPS (see IEC 62305-1).
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 17 of 18

Standard Scope Objective


IEEE 80 Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding This guide is primarily concerned with outdoor ac
substations, either conventional or gas-insulated. These
include distribution, transmission, and generating plant
substations. With proper caution, the methods described
herein are also applicable to indoor portions of such
substations, or to substations that are wholly indoors.
IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Practical test methods and techniques are presented for
Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a measuring the electrical characteristics of grounding
Grounding System systems. Topics addressed include safety considerations,
measuring earth resistivity, measuring the power system
frequency resistance or impedance of the ground system
to remote earth, measuring the transient or surge
impedance of the ground system to remote earth,
measuring step and touch voltages, verifying the integrity
of the grounding system, reviewing common methods for
performing ground testing, reviewing instrumentation
characteristics and limitations, and reviewing various
factors that can distort test measurements.
IEEE 665 Guide for Generating Station Grounding Grounding practices that have generally been accepted by
the electric utility industry as contributing to effective
grounding systems for personnel safety and equipment
protection in generating stations are identified. A guide for
the design of generating station grounding systems and for
grounding practices applied to generating station indoor
and outdoor structures and equipment, including the
interconnection of the station and substation grounding
systems, is provided.
PAGE

Guinea-Bissau 18 of 18

Components
(notes): ___

Standard Scope Objective


IEC 60898 Electrical accessories - Circuit-breakers for IEC 60898-1:2015(E) applies to a.c. air-break circuit-
overcurrent protection for household and similar breakers for operation at 50 Hz, 60 Hz or 50/60 Hz, having
installations a rated voltage not exceeding 440 V (between phases), a
rated current not exceeding 125 A and a rated short-circuit
Part 1: Circuit-breakers for a.c. operation
capacity not exceeding 25 000 A.
IEC 60947 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear IEC 60947-1:2007+A1:2010+A2:2014 is to harmonize as far
Part 1: General rules as practicable all rules and requirements of a general
Part 2: Circuit-breakers nature applicable to low-voltage switchgear and
controlgear in order to obtain uniformity of requirements
Part 3: Switches, disconnectors, switch-
and tests throughout the corresponding range of
disconnectors and fuse-combination units
equipment and to avoid the need for testing to different
Part 4-1: Contactors and motor-starters - standards.
Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters IEC 60947-2:2006+A1:2009+A2:2013 applies to circuit-
breakers, the main contacts of which are intended to be
connected to circuits, the rated voltage of which does not
exceed 1 000 V a.c. or 1 500 V d.c.; it also contains
additional requirements for integrally fused circuit-
breakers.
IEC 60947-3:2008+A1:2012+A2:2015 applies to switches,
disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination
units to be used in distribution circuits and motor circuits
of which the rated voltage does not exceed 1 000 V a.c. or
1 500 V d.c. The manufacturer shall specify the type,
ratings and characteristics according to the relevant
standard of any incorporated fuses.
IEC 60947-4-1:2009+A1:2012 applies to the types of
equipment whose main contacts are intended to be
connected to circuits the rated voltage of which does not
exceed 1 000 V a.c. or 1 500 V d.c. Starters and/or
contactors dealt with in this standard are not normally
designed to interrupt short-circuit currents. Therefore,
suitable short-circuit protection forms part of the
installation but not necessarily of the contactor or the
starter.
IEC 62271 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear IEC 62271-1:2007+A1:2011 applies to a.c. switchgear and
Part 1: Common specifications controlgear designed for indoor and outdoor installation
and for operation at service frequencies up to and
including 60 Hz on systems having voltages above 1 000 V.
This standard applies to all high-voltage switchgear and
controlgear except as otherwise specified in the relevant
IEC standards for the particular type of switchgear and
controlgear.
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
ANNEX 2: PRELIMINARY DESIGN DRAWINGS

1. GENERAL PLANT LAYOUT

2. STAGING PLAN

3. FENCING AND GATE DETAILS


4. METEO STATION

5. ELECTRICAL LAYOUT
6. GROUNDING SYSTEM

7. TRENCHES

Page 32 of 44
24

330
330

72,728

BIDDER
Staging Plan

BIDDER
BIDDER
BIDDER
24

330
330
72,728

ELECTRICAL LAYOUT
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
ANNEX 3: PROCUREMENT PLAN

Procurement Plan
S.N. Equipment Brand Product Warranty period

Ja Solar

Jinko
Back to back warranty – 10-year product
1 Module Risen and 25-year performance
Talesun

Chint

ABB

Ingeteam

Power Conversion Sungrow


2 5 years
Station
GP Tech

Santerno

GE

3 Power Transformer ABB 2 years

4 Low Voltage Equipment ABB 2 years


CABLE FEEDERS - MV &
5 KBE 2 years
DC Power Cables
BAHRA Cables
6 EARTHING SYSTEM 2 years
WALLIS

Pelco
7 CCTV SYSTEM 2 years
American-Dynamics

MET One
8 Meteo Station 2 years
Stevens

Page 33 of 44
_______________________________________________________________________________________

ANNEX 4: MODULE DATASHEET

Page 34 of 44
www.jinkosolar.com

Eagle 72P-V
320-340 Watt (5BB)
POLY CRYSTALLINE MODULE
Positive power tolerance of 0~+3%

ISO9001:2008 ISO14001:2004 OHSAS18001


certified factory.
IEC61215 IEC61730 certified products.

KEY FEATURES
System Voltage:
The maximum voltage is promoted to 1500V and the module strings
are extended by 50% which reduces the overall system BOS.

5 Busbar Solar Cell:


5 busbar solar cell adopts new technology to improve the efficiency of
modules , offers a better aesthetic appearance, making it perfect for rooftop
installation.

High Power Output:


Power
Warranty
Polycrystalline 72-cell module achieves a power output up to 340Wp.

PID RESISTANT:
Eagle modules pass PID test, limited power degradation by PID test is
PID RESISTANT
guaranteed for mass production.

Low-light Performance:
Advanced glass and surface texturing allow for excellent performance in
LOW LIGHT
low-light environments.

Severe Weather Resilience:


2400 Pa
5400 Pa Certified to withstand: wind load (2400 Pascal) and snow load (5400 Pascal).

Durability against extreme environmental conditions:


RESISTANT High salt mist and ammonia resistance certified by TUV NORD.

Temperature Coefficient:
CLIMATE
Improved temperature coefficient decreases power loss during high
DURABILITY
temperatures.

LINEAR PERFORMANCE WARRANTY


10 Year Product Warranty 25 Year Linear Power Warranty

linear performance warranty


100%
Guaranteed Power Performance

97.5% Add Standard performance warranty


ition
al va
95% lue f
rom
Jinko
Sola
90% r’s lin
ear w
arra
nty

80.7%

years
1 5 12 25
Engineering Drawings Electrical Performance & Temperature Dependence

992 40 942
Current-Voltage & Power-Voltage Temperature Dependence
Junction box Curves (325W) of Isc,Voc,Pmax

100
Label

Installing Holes 12 350

300
10

L
1956

4
Ø
2- 250

1360
860
8
Grounding Holes
200 Isc
6
150 Voc
4 Pmax
Cathode - + Anode 100
Connector
A A
2 50

0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50

Mechanical Characteristics
+0.2
0
4.9

9 5.5
1.5
55 CellType Poly-crystalline156×156mm(6inch)
40

5
4.
3

+0.3
7.70
8
No.ofcells 72(6×12)
55

1.5
14

1.8

Dimensions 1956×992×40mm(77.01×39.05×1.57inch)
35

Weight 22.5kg(49.6lbs.)
FrontGlass 3.2mm,Anti-ReflectionCoating,
HighTransmission,LowIron,TemperedGlass
Packaging Configuration Frame AnodizedAluminiumAlloy
(Twopallets=Onestack) JunctionBox IP67Rated
26pcs/pallet,52pcs/stack,624pcs/40'HQContainer OutputCables TÜV1×4.0mm2,Length:1200mmorCustomizedLength

SPECIFICATIONS

ModuleType JKM320PP-72-V JKM325PP-72-V JKM330PP-72-V JKM335PP-72-V JKM340PP-72-V

STC NOCT STC NOCT STC NOCT STC NOCT STC NOCT
MaximumPower(Pmax) 320Wp 237Wp 325Wp 241Wp 330Wp 245Wp 335Wp 249Wp 340Wp 253Wp

MaximumPowerVoltage(Vmp) 37.4V 34.7V 37.6V 35.0V 37.8V 35.3V 38.0V 35.6V 38.2V 35.9V

MaximumPowerCurrent(Imp) 8.56A 6.83A 8.66A 6.89A 8.74A 6.94A 8.82A 6.99A 8.91A 7.05A

Open-circuitVoltage(Voc) 46.4V 43.0V 46.7V 43.3V 46.9V 43.6V 47.2V 43.8V 47.5V 44.0V

Short-circuitCurrent(Isc) 9.05A 7.35A 9.10A 7.40A 9.14A 7.45A 9.18A 7.52A 9.22A 7.98A

ModuleEfficiencySTC(%) 16.49% 16.75% 17.01% 17.26% 17.52%

OperatingTemperature(℃) -40℃~+85℃

Maximumsystemvoltage 1500VDC (IEC)

Maximumseriesfuserating 20A

Powertolerance 0~+3%

TemperaturecoefficientsofPmax -0.40%/℃

TemperaturecoefficientsofVoc -0.31%/℃

TemperaturecoefficientsofIsc 0.06%/℃

Nominaloperatingcelltemperature(NOCT) 45±2℃

STC : Irradiance1000W/m 2 CellTemperature25°C AM=1.5

NOCT: Irradiance800W/m 2 AmbientTemperature20°C AM=1.5 WindSpeed1m/s

* Powermeasurementtolerance:±3%

The company reserves the final right for explanation on any of the information presented hereby. EN-JKM-340PP-72-V_rev2017
______________________________________________________________________ __________________

ANNEX 5: POWER CONVERSION STATION DATASHEETS

1. INVERTERS

2. POWER TRANSFORMER

Page 35 of 44
SUN PowerMax U B Series
1,000 Vdc

B Series inverter up to 1275 kVA at 1000 Vdc

TRANSFORMERLESS Maximum power density Maximum protection


These PV central inverters feature more po- These PV inverters are supplied with the com-
CENTRAL wer per cubic foot. Thanks to the use of high- biner box already integrated. Thus, they can
INVERTERS quality components, this inverter series per- guarantee the maximum protection thanks to
forms at the highest possible level. their DC load break switches and the motor-
WITH A SINGLE ized DC switch to decouple the PV generator
Latest generation electronics
POWER BLOCK The B Series inverters integrate an innovative from the inverter.
control unit that runs faster and performs a Moreover, they are also supplied with a motor-
more efficient and sophisticated inverter con- ized AC circuit breaker. Optionally, they can
trol, as it uses a last-generation digital signal be supplied with DC fuses, smart grounding
processor. Furthermore, the hardware of the kit and input current monitoring.
control unit allows some more accurate mea-
surements and very reliable protections. Maximum efficiency values
Through the use of innovative electronic con-
These inverters feature a low voltage ride- version topologies, efficiency values of up to
through capability and also a lower power 98.9% can be achieved.
consumption thanks to a more efficient power
supply electronic board. Enhanced functionality
This new INGECON® SUN PowerMax range
Improved AC connection features a revamped, improved enclosure
The output connection has been designed in which, together with its innovative air cooling
order to facilitate a direct close-coupled con- system, makes it possible to increase the am-
nection with the MV transformer. bient operating temperature.

UL 1741
COMPLIANT

www.ingeteam.com
solar.us@ingeteam.com
SUN PowerMax U B Series 1,000 Vdc

Long-lasting design Ease of maintenance Monitoring and communication


These inverters have been designed to All the elements can be removed or re- Ethernet communications supplied as
guarantee a long life expectancy. Stan- placed directly from the inverter’s front standard. The following applications are
dard 5 year warranty, extendable for up side, thanks to its new design. included at no extra cost: INGECON®
to 25 years. SUN Manager, INGECON® SUN Monitor
Easy to operate
and its Smartphone version Web Monitor,
Grid support The INGECON® SUN PowerMax inver-
available on the App Store. These appli-
The INGECON® SUN PowerMax B Series ters feature an LCD screen for the sim-
cations are used for monitoring and re-
has been designed to comply with the ple and convenient monitoring of the
cording the inverter’s internal operating
grid connection requirements UL1741, inverter status and a range of internal
variables through the Internet (alarms,
IEEE1547 and RULE21, contributing to variables. The display also includes a
real time production, etc.), in addition to
the quality and stability of the electric number of LEDs to show the inverter ope-
the historical production data.
system. These inverters therefore feature rating status with warning lights to indi-
a low voltage ride-through capability, and cate any incidents. All this helps to sim- Two communication ports available (one
can deliver reactive power and control plify and facilitate maintenance tasks. for monitoring and one for plant con-
the active power delivered to the grid. trolling), allowing fast and simultaneous
plant control.

PROTECTIONS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ADVANTAGES OF THE MONOBLOCK VERSION

Integrated combiner box with DC isolators. Insulation failure AC. Higher power density.
DC Reverse polarity. Grounding kit. Latest generation electronics.
Short-circuits and overloads at the output. Heating kit, for operating at an ambient More efficient electronic protection.
Anti-islanding with automatic disconnection. temperature of down to -22 ºF. Night time supply to communicate
Insulation failure DC. DC fuses. with the inverter at night.

Up to 15 pairs of fuse holders. Lightning induced DC surge arresters, type I+II. Enhanced performance.

Lightning induced DC and AC surge arrestors, Monitoring of the group currents at the DC input. Easier maintenance thanks to its
type II. Extendable up to 15 fuse holders per inverter. new design and enclosure.

Motorized DC switch to automatically disconnect PID prevention kit Lightweight spares.


the inverter from the PV array. (PID: Potential Induced Degradation). It allows to ground the PV array.
Low voltage ride-through capability. Night time reactive power injection. Components easily replaceable.
Motorized AC circuit breaker. Sand trap kit.
Hardware protection via firmware.
Additional protection for the power stack,
as it is air cooled by a closed loop.

PowerMax B Series
+12
...

+3
+2 Inverter
+1 L1 AC output for
Filter

L2 connection to a
-1 L3 MV network
-2
-3 M M

...
-12
Optional

Size and weight (inches and Ibs) 610TL U B220 / 830TL U B300 /
1000TL U B360 / 1110TL U B400 /
1165TL U B420
3,440 pounds
89”

11
1”

35
SUN PowerMax U B Series 1,000 Vdc

610TL U B220 830TL U B300 1000TL U B360 1110TL U B400 1140TL U B410
Input (DC)
Recommended PV array power range(1) 618.4 - 792.6 kWp 775.8 - 994.4 kWp 1,011.9 - 1,297 kWp 1,034.3 - 1,325.7 kWp 1,150 - 1,477 kWp

Voltage Range MPP(2) 440 - 820 V 440 - 820 V 524 - 820 V 580 - 820 V 595 - 820 V
Maximum voltage(3) 1,050 V
Maximum current 2,000 A
Nº inputs with fuse-holders 5 up to 12 (up to 15 if the combiner box is not integrated)
Fuse dimensions 63 A / 1,000 V to 630 A / 1,000 V fuses (optional)
Type of connection Connection to copper bars
Power blocks 1
MPPT 1

Input protections
Overvoltage protections Type II surge arresters (type I+II optional)
DC switch Motorized DC load break disconnect
Other protections Up to 15 pairs of DC fuses (optional) / Reverse polarity / Insulation failure monitoring / Anti-islanding protection / Emergency pushbutton

Output (AC)
Power @95 ºF / @122 ºF(4) 609.7 kVA / 560.9 kVA 831.4 kVA / 764.9 kVA 997.7 kVA / 917.8 kVA 1,108.5 kVA / 1,019.8 kVA 1,136 kVA / 1,046 kVA
Current @95 ºF / @122 ºF(4) 1,600 A / 1,472 A
Rated voltage 220 V IT System 300 V IT System 360 V IT System 400 V IT System 410 V IT System

Frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Power Factor(5) 1
Power Factor adjustable Yes, 0-1 (leading / lagging)
THD (Total Harmonic Distortion)(6) <3%

Output protections
Overvoltage protections Type II surge arresters
AC breaker Motorized AC circuit breaker
Anti-islanding protection Yes, with automatic disconnection
Other protections AC short-circuits and overloads

Features
Maximum efficiency 98.9%
CEC 98.5%
Max. consumption aux. services 4,250 W
Stand-by or night consumption(7) 60 W

Average power consumption per day 2,000 W

General Information
Ambient temperature -4 ºF to +140 ºF
Relative humidity (non-condensing) 0-100%
Protection class NEMA 3R (NEMA 3 with the sand trap kit)
Maximum altitude 14,770 ft (for installations beyond 3,300 ft, please contact Ingeteam’s solar sales department)
Cooling system Air forced with temperature control (230 V phase+ neutral power supply)
Air flow range 0 - 78 ft3/s (0 - 7,800 m3/h)
Average air flow 42 ft /s (4,200 m3/h per power block)
3

Acoustic emission (100% / 50% load) <66 dB(A) at 33 ft / <54.5 dB(A) at 33 ft


Marking CE, ETL
EMC and security standards UL1741, FCC Part 15, IEEE C37.90.1, IEEE C37.90.2, CSA22.2 No107
Grid connection standards IEC 62116, UL1741, IEEE1547, IEEE1547.1, NEC CODE, Electric Rule 21: 2015, CSA22.2 No107

Notes: (1) Depending on the type of installation and geographical location. Data for Efficiency INGECON® SUN 1165TL U B420 Vdc = 650 V
STC conditions (2) Vmpp.min is for rated conditions (Vac=1 p.u. and Power Factor=1) 99,00
(3)
Consider the voltage increase of the ‘VOC’ at low temperatures (4) With the sand trap kit,
these values will be for 89.6 ºF and 116.6 ºF, respectively (5) For Pout >25% of the rated 98,00
power (6) For Pout >25% of the rated power and voltage in accordance with IEC 61000-3-4 97,00
Efficiency (%)

(7)
Consumption from PV field when there is PV power available.
96,00
Vdc = 610 Vdc
95,00
Vdc = 705 Vdc
94,00 Vdc = 740 Vdc
93,00
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Power (kVA)
SUN PowerMax U B Series 1,000 Vdc

1165TL U B420 1190TL U B430 1220TL U B440 1250TL U B450 1275TL U B460
Input (DC)
Recommended PV array power range(1) 1,084.9 - 1,392 kWp 1,206 - 1,549 kWp 1,234 - 1,585 kWp 1,262 - 1,621 kWp 1,290 - 1,657 kWp

Voltage Range MPP(2) 610 - 820 V 623.5 - 820 V 638 - 820 V 652 - 820 V 666 - 820 V
Maximum voltage(3) 1,050 V
Maximum current 2,000 A
Nº inputs with fuse-holders 5 up to 12 (up to 15 if the combiner box is not integrated)
Fuse dimensions 63 A / 1,000 V to 630 A / 1,000 V fuses (optional)
Type of connection Connection to copper bars
Power blocks 1
MPPT 1

Input protections
Overvoltage protections Type II surge arresters (type I+II optional)
DC switch Motorized DC load break disconnect
Other protections Up to 15 pairs of DC fuses (optional) / Reverse polarity / Insulation failure monitoring / Anti-islanding protection / Emergency pushbutton

Output (AC)
Power @95 ºF / @122 ºF(4) 1,163.9 kVA / 1,070.8 kVA 1,192 kVA / 1,097 kVA 1,217 kVA / 1,122 kVA 1,247 kVA / 1,147 kVA 1,275 kVA / 1,173 kVA
Current @95 ºF / @122 ºF(4) 1,600 A / 1,472 A
Rated voltage 420 V IT System 430 V IT System 440 V IT System 450 V IT System 460 V IT System

Frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Power Factor(5) 1
Power Factor adjustable Yes, 0-1 (leading / lagging)
THD (Total Harmonic Distortion)(6) <3%

Output protections
Overvoltage protections Type II surge arresters
AC breaker Motorized AC circuit breaker
Anti-islanding protection Yes, with automatic disconnection
Other protections AC short-circuits and overloads

Features
Maximum efficiency 98.9%
CEC 98.5%
Max. consumption aux. services 4,250 W
Stand-by or night consumption(7) 60 W

Average power consumption per day 2,000 W

General Information
Ambient temperature -4 ºF to +140 ºF
Relative humidity (non-condensing) 0-100%
Protection class NEMA 3R (NEMA 3 with the sand trap kit)
Maximum altitude 14,770 ft (for installations beyond 3,300 ft, please contact Ingeteam’s solar sales department)
Cooling system Air forced with temperature control (230 V phase+ neutral power supply)
Air flow range 0 - 78 ft3/s (0 - 7,800 m3/h)
Average air flow 42 ft /s (4,200 m3/h per power block)
3

Acoustic emission (100% / 50% load) <66 dB(A) at 33 ft / <54.5 dB(A) at 33 ft


Marking CE, ETL
EMC and security standards UL1741, FCC Part 15, IEEE C37.90.1, IEEE C37.90.2, CSA22.2 No107
Grid connection standards IEC 62116, UL1741, IEEE1547, IEEE1547.1, NEC CODE, Electric Rule 21: 2015, CSA22.2 No107

Notes: (1) Depending on the type of installation and geographical location. Data for Efficiency INGECON® SUN 1165TL U B420 Vdc = 650 V
STC conditions (2) Vmpp.min is for rated conditions (Vac=1 p.u. and Power Factor=1) 99,00
(3)
Consider the voltage increase of the ‘VOC’ at low temperatures (4) With the sand trap kit,
these values will be for 89.6 ºF and 116.6 ºF, respectively (5) For Pout >25% of the rated 98,00
power (6) For Pout >25% of the rated power and voltage in accordance with IEC 61000-3-4 97,00
Efficiency (%)

(7)
Consumption from PV field when there is PV power available.
96,00
Vdc = 610 Vdc
95,00
Vdc = 705 Vdc
94,00 Vdc = 740 Vdc
93,00
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Power (kVA)

SOL AR INVERTERS

ABB central inverters


PVS980 – 1818 to 2091 kVA

ABB central inverters raise


reliability, efficiency and ease
of installation to new levels.
The inverters are aimed at system
integrators and end users who
require high-performance solar
inverters for large photovoltaic
(PV) power plants. PVS980 central
inverters are available from
1818 kVA up to 2091 kVA, and
are optimized for cost-effective,
multi-megawatt power plants.

01

— World’s leading inverter platform Highlights


01 ABB central
inverter, PVS980 – an Like other ABB central inverters, the PVS980 has • High total performance
outdoor inverter with been developed on the basis of decades of • Outstanding endurance for outdoor use
robust enclosure
experience in the industry and proven technology • Compact, modular product design
platform. Unrivalled expertise from the • High DC input voltage up to 1500 VDC
world’s market and technology leader in • Extensive DC and AC side protection
frequency converters is the hallmark of this • Self-contained cooling system with
solar inverter series. high efficiency
• Versatile design for large-scale PV plants
The PVS980 inverter is one of the most efficient to minimize system costs
and cost-effective ways of converting the direct • Complete range of industrial data
current (DC) generated by solar modules into communication options, including
highquality and CO2-free alternating current (AC) remote monitoring
that can be fed into the power distribution • Life cycle service and support through
network. ABB’s extensive global service network
Solar inverters
PVS980 central inverters from ABB
ABB PVS980 central inverters are ideal for large
PV power plants. The high DC input voltage,
high efficiency, proven components, compact
and modular design and a host of life cycle services
ensure ABB PVS980 central inverters provide a
rapid return on investment.
P R O D U C T F LY E R F O R P V S 9 8 0 A B B S O L A R I N V E R T E R S


02


Maximum energy revenues

— ABB central inverters have a high total efficiency. Versatile design for large-scale PV plants
02 ABB medium
voltage pad mounted Precise, optimized system control and maximum to minimize system costs
solution, PVS980-MVP, power point tracking (MPPT) combine with the ABB’s PVS980 central inverter enables system
installed on site
unit’s highly efficient power converter design to integrators to design PV power plants that use the
deliver the maximum energy from the PV modules optimum combination of inverters with different
to the power distribution network. For end users, power ratings. Equipped with extensive electrical
this generates the highest possible revenues and mechanical protection, the inverters are
from the energy sales. engineered to provide a long and reliable
service life of at least 25 years.
Self-contained, low-maintenance
cooling system Advanced grid support features
PVS980 inverters feature a proven closed loop The PVS980 software includes all the latest grid
cooling system used in other ABB industrial support and monitoring features, including active
applications. This innovative, truly low-maintenance power limitation, fault ride through (FRT) with
cooling solution is designed for demanding current feed-in and reactive power control.
applications and harsh environments, cutting Active and reactive power output can be controlled
maintenance costs and ensuring outstanding by an external control system or automatically by
endurance. the inverter.

Compact and modular design All grid support functions are parameterized,
PVS980 inverters are designed for fast and easy allowing easy adjusting for local utility
installation. The industrial design and modular requirements. ABB central inverters are also able
platform provide a wide range of options, such as to support grid stability at night by providing
remote monitoring, fieldbus connection and reactive power with the DC input disconnected.
modular and flexible DC input connections.
The integrated DC saves space and costs as the
solar array junction boxes can be connected
directly to the fused busbars in the DC cabinet.
PVS980 inverters are customized for the needs
of end users and will be available with short
delivery times.
P R O D U C T F LY E R F O R P V S 9 8 0 A B B S O L A R I N V E R T E R S


ABB central inverters
PVS980 – 1818 to 2091 kVA

High total performance ABB self-contained cooling system


• High efficiency • Closed loop cooling system based on phase
• Low auxiliary power consumption transition and thermosiphon technology
• Innovative controlled cooling • Liquid-cooled inverter power ratings with
• Efficient maximum power point tracking the simplicity of air cooling
• Long and reliable service life of at • No fillable liquids, pumps, valves,
least 25 years inhibitors or leaks
• Low maintenance

Outstanding endurance for outdoor use Versatile design for largescale PV plants
• Water- and dustproof outdoor enclosure • Integrated DC connection with variable number
• Designed to withstand the toughest of inputs
environments • Wide standard option palette for tailoring
• Long and reliable service life following the • Versatile AC connection methods
ABB life cycle model

Modular industrial design Minimizes system costs


• Compact and easy-to-maintain product design • 1500 VDC system voltage
• Fast and easy installation • Wide ranged and highly efficient MPPT algorithm
• Integrated and flexible DC input section • Integrated protection to minimize external
components
• Fast and easy installation and commissioning

Life cycle service and support Wide communication options


• ABB’s extensive global service network • Complete range of industrial data communication
• Extended warranties options for SCADA connections
• Service contracts • Ethernet/Internet Protocol
• Technical support throughout the service life • Remote monitoring
P R O D U C T F LY E R F O R P V S 9 8 0 A B B S O L A R I N V E R T E R S


ABB central inverters
PVS980 – 1818 to 2091 kVA


Technical data and types

Type designation PVS980-58-1818kVA-I PVS980-58-1909kVA-J PVS980-58-2000kVA-K PVS980-58-2091kVA-L


Input (DC)
Maximum recommended PV power (P PV, max) 1) 2910 kWp 3055 kWp 3200 kWp 3346 kWp
Maximum DC current (I max (DC)) 2400 A 2400 A 2400 A 2400 A
DC voltage range, mpp (U DC, mpp) at 35 °C 850 to 1500 V 893 to 1500 V 935 to 1500 V 978 to 1500 V
DC voltage range, mpp (U DC, mpp) at 50 °C 850 to 1100 V 893 to 1100 V 935 to 1100 V 978 to 1100 V
Maximum DC voltage (U max (DC)) 1500 V 1500 V 1500 V 1500 V
Number of MPPT trackers 1 1 1 1
Number of protected DC inputs 8 2) to 24 (+/-) 8 2) to 24 (+/-) 8 2) to 24 (+/-) 8 2) to 24 (+/-)
Output (AC)
Maximum power (S max (AC)) 3) 2000 kVA 2100 kVA 2200 kVA 2300 kVA
Nominal power (S N(AC)) 4)
1818 kVA 1909 kVA 2000 kVA 2091 kVA
Maximum AC current (I max (AC)) 1925 A 1925 A 1925 A 1925 A
Nominal AC current (I N(AC)) 1750 A 1750 A 1750 A 1750 A
Nominal output voltage (U N(AC)) 5) 600 V 630 V 660 V 690 V
Output frequency 5)
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Harmonic distortion, current 6) < 3% < 3% < 3% < 3%
Distribution network type 7) TN and IT TN and IT TN and IT TN and IT
Efficiency
Maximum 8) 98.8% 98.8% 98.8% 98.8%
Euro-eta 8)
98.6% 98.6% 98.6% 98.6%
CEC efficiency 9) 98.0% 98.5% 98.5% 98.5%
Power consumption
Self consumption in normal operation ≤ 2500 W ≤ 2500 W ≤ 2500 W ≤ 2500 W
Standby operation consumption 235 W 235 W 235 W 235 W
Auxiliary voltage source 10) External, 1-phase External, 1-phase External, 1-phase External, 1-phase

1)
DC/AC ratio over 1.6 might decrease maintenance intervals 6)
At nominal power
2)
As standard 7)
Inverter side must be IT type
3)
At 35 °C 8)
Without auxiliary power consumption at min U DC
4)
At 50 °C 9)
With auxiliary power included
5)
±10% 10)
Internal as option
P R O D U C T F LY E R F O R P V S 9 8 0 A B B S O L A R I N V E R T E R S


ABB PVS980 central inverter block diagram

PVS980-58-2000kVA-K

Filter
filter

filter
EMC

EMC
3

Control
and
monitor

PVS980-58-2000kVA-K

Filter
filter

filter
EMC

EMC
3

Control
and
monitor


Technical data and types

Type designation PVS980-58-1818kVA-I PVS980-58-1909kVA-J PVS980-58-2000kVA-K PVS980-58-2091kVA-L


Environmental limits
Degree of protection IP66 11) / UL Type 3R
Ambient temp. range (nom. ratings) 12) -20 °C to +50 °C
Maximum ambient temperature 13) +60 °C
Relative humidity 5% to 100%
Maximum altitude (above sea level) 4000 m 14)
Maximum noise level 88 dBA 15)
Protection
Ground fault monitoring Yes
Grid monitoring Yes
Anti-islanding Yes
DC reverse polarity Yes
AC and DC short circuit and overcurrent Yes
AC and DC overvoltage and surge Yes
User interface and communications
Local user interface ABB control panel
Analog inputs 2 as standard
Digital inputs/relay outputs 7/1 as standard
Fieldbus connectivity Modbus, Profinet, Ethernet 16)
Product compliance
Safety and EMC 16) CE conformity according to LV and EMC directives
Certifications and approvals 17)
IEC, UL, CSA, RCM, IEEE, BDEW, CEI, SAGC, FCC
Grid support and grid functions Reactive power compensation 18), Power reduction, LVRT, HVRT, FqRT
Dimensions and weight
Width/Height/Depth, mm (W/H/D) 3180/2443/1522 3180/2443/1522 3180/2443/1522 3180/2443/1522
Weight appr. 3500 kg 3500 kg 3500 kg 3500 kg

11)
Excluding underpressure testing, IP56 with underpressure 16)
More communication options as engineered option
12)
-40 °C as option 17)
Additional certifications and approvals pending,
13)
Power derating after 50 °C contact ABB for more information
14)
Power derating above 1000 m 18)
Also at night
15)
At partial power typically < 75 dBA

Data communication principle for ABB PVS980 central inverters

PV String PVS980 Communication network


strings monitoring central
box inverter Internet
SCADA Mobile

Remote
monitoring Web

Local Database
3 service PC

I/O PVS980-MVP

MV grid
connection
Electricity Data ABB transformer ABB SafeRing
switchgear

Options Related products


• Integrated and flexible DC input extension • Medium voltage station (transformer and
• AC breaker switchgear) as outdoor or containerised
• AC disconnector switch solution
• DC disconnector switch • String monitoring junction boxes
• Heavy duty (Type 1) surge protection • Remote monitoring solutions
• AC busbar interface
• Internal auxiliary power supply Support and service
• DC grounding, positive ABB supports its customers with a dedicated
• Floating DC service network in more than 60 countries and
• Fieldbus and Ethernet connections provides a complete range of life cycle services
• Current measurement to each DC input from installation and commissioning to
• High altitude version preventative maintenance, spare parts,
• Low temperature version repairs and recycling.
• Warranty extensions
• Solar inverter care contracts
3AXD50000027473 Rev. J EN 06.04.2018

— —
For more information please contact We reserve the right to make technical We reserve all rights in this document and
your local ABB representative or visit: changes or modify the contents of this in the subject matter and illustrations con-
document without prior notice. With re- tained therein. Any reproduction, disclo-
www.abb.com/solarinverters gard to purchase orders, the agreed par- sure to third parties or utilization of its
www.abb.com ticulars shall prevail. ABB does not accept contents – in whole or in parts – is forbidden
any responsibility whatsoever for potential without prior written consent of ABB.
errors or possible lack of information in Copyright© 2018 ABB
this document. All rights reserved
Power transformers

Power transformers
Built for reliability and efficiency
Power transformers
A safe partner

Safe operation
Safe delivery
Safe investment

2 Power transformers
A safe choice in transforming electric energy
Reliability throughout the transformer life cycle

A power transformer is a technology investment that needs


to be secured for decades. The reliability and efficiency of the
transformer has a major impact on the total cost of transmission
over a long period of time. Ultimately, it affects the quality of
life for the people who depend on a continuous power supply
– which makes ABB’s high-quality power transformers a safe
invest­ment, ensuring our clients benefit from profitable and
long-term relations with their customers.
Safe operation All of our plants use identical routines so that we operate
Grid stability depends greatly on the availability of power as one large virtual factory and in turn provide consistent,
transformers, and every operational standstill is costly due to location-independent quality of delivery. In fact, we are able
repair costs and loss of revenues. That is why in every part of to operate multiple parallel manufacturing processes in dif-
the supply chain – from design to delivery – ABB never com- ferent countries, or even continents, in order to ensure timely
promises on quality. delivery according to strict deadlines.

ABB’s platform for designing and manufacturing a complete Our success is the result of continuous feedback of informa-
portfolio of power transformers is unique to the industry. tion throughout our organization. Since every power trans-
It allows us to maintain control of the quality of all relevant former delivery is unique, we re-use all experience by feeding
parts – including key components such as bushings, tap information back into our vast and growing library of best
changers, insulation materials and active parts. We also practices. This helps guarantee the successful transfer of
ensure that the same rigorous demands apply to our first- skills across national borders as well as between generations
class certified suppliers. of our people.

Before delivery, every ABB power transformer is tested Safe investment


according to international standards. Through continuously The purchase price of a power transformer represents only a
improved design and manufacturing procedures, we have fraction of the total cost of ownership of the asset. Operating
succeeded in reducing test failures by 50 percent between costs such as losses, excessive repairs and low availability
2000–2010. As a result, our short circuit reliability is now combine to dramatically change the picture.
more than twice as high as the market average.
Even a short power transformer outage may cost millions
Safe delivery of dollars in lost revenues. The risk of failure is therefore, an
Customers can rely on ABB’s consistent, high quality products. inevitable cost to be considered when evaluating the total
This is the result of our TrafoStar™ platform, a common cost of ownership.
design and manufacturing platform that is today implemented
in all 13 of our power transformer plants worldwide. ABB has Modernizing their power transformer fleet is a sound invest-
delivered more than 14,500 power transformers (over ment for power companies. ABB’s power transformers have
17,000,000 MVA) based on TrafoStar, including over twenty close to 100 percent efficiency, which ensures a short pay-
800 kV UHVDC units and over five hundred 735–765 kV AC back time on the investment. With a global average of 10
units to all major global markets. percent losses in today’s T&D systems, the lifetime cost for
losses alone may exceed the purchase price of a new ABB
transformer by a factor of two – based on estimates of future
energy prices.

Power transformers 3
Proven transformer technology and long-term,
global field experience

Power transformers are key components in power networks.


Their availability and longevity have a major impact on grid
reliability and profitability. ABB does not compromise on quality.
We therefore ensure that every one of our 14,500 delivered units
has undergone rigorous full-acceptance testing. This has made
us the undisputed world leader in the power transformer industry.

50 percent fewer test faults in 10 years Our product range includes:


Fewer test failures generally means fewer field failures. An −− Generator step-up and intertie power transformers
in-depth understanding of the root cause of each failure is −− HVDC and HVDC Light transformers
necessary to ensure high reliability in power transformers. −− Phase shifting transformers
Unfortunately, in today’s fiercely competitive global market, −− Shunt reactors and variable shunt reactors (VSR)
many suppliers refrain from carrying out the necessary tests −− Industrial transformers
or from adequately presenting their results. −− FACTS transformers
−− Railway trackfeeder transformers
At ABB, correct and transparent failure reporting is an affair −− Collector transformers for wind and solar plants
of the heart. We invest vast resources into rigorous full- −− Mobile transformers
accep­­­tan­ce testing. Continuously improved design and −− Polytransformers and multi-voltage generator step-up
manu­facturing methods have helped us to reduce test failures transformers
by 50 percent between 2000–2010. We track and analyze −− Environmentally safe and silent transformers
all reported field failure incidents to ensure consistently high Most of ABB’s power transformers are available with core- or shell-type technology.
transformer availability. Contact ABB or refer to ABB product notes for detailed descriptions of our range.

Twice as high short circuit reliability as the market Consistent quality of vital components
average A power transformer must withstand tremendous loads dur-
ABB conducts all the necessary electrical and thermal tests ing a lifetime of up to 40 years. This requires quality down to
according to international test standards. Short circuit tests the smallest detail and carefully selected components. Global
are particularly expensive to carry out, but they are vital to reliability surveys indicate that reliability is heavily dependent
the reliability of the transformer. That is why we conduct more on excellent quality bushings, tap changers and the active
short circuit tests than any other supplier. The results are part. Thanks to in-house production, ABB is able to consist-
clearly demonstrated by KEMA statistics, proving our short ently control and guarantee the quality of these key compo-
circuit reliability to be more than twice as high as the market nents. For those materials that ABB does not produce, it
average. maintains supply agreements with first-class certified suppliers
to ensure the continuous supply of high-quality materials – even
Complete power transformer portfolio during periods of raw material shortage.
ABB offers a complete range of power transformers and
related components and parts. We have delivered more than Undisputed global leader
14,500 power transformers (over 17,000,000 MVA), including ABB is the world’s largest power transformer manufacturer
over twenty 800 kV UHVDC and over five hundred 735–765 kV with 1,000+ units delivered annually from 13 factories world-
AC units, to all major global markets. Our entire range is the wide. ABB has more than 4,500 employees and works with
result of our own research, development and manufacturing, customers and suppliers in more than 100 countries. We
which makes us unique in the industry. This has given us have the capacity to rapidly deliver customized power trans-
extensive experience in every relevant part of power trans- formers, regardless of specification or international standard.
former technology. Customers worldwide can securely rely on Our global service support network delivers truly professional,
the quality and reliability of our products. local, 24/7 support to almost every corner of the earth.

4 Power transformers
A KEMA* report and ABB statistics indicate that ABB’s short circuit reliability is more
than twice as high as the market average.

TrafoStar rated 25 MVA or higher, short circuit tested 1996–2011 Transformers rated 25 MVA or higher, tested by KEMA 1996–2009

Number of transformers Number of transformers


12 Initially not OK 40 Initially not OK
Initially OK Initially OK
10
32

8
24
6
16
4

8
2

0 0
25–50 50–100 100–200 >200 MVA (rated) 25–50 50–100 100–200 >200 MVA (rated)

31 out of 35 tested units ≥ 25 MVA were passed between 1996 and 2011, Total test failures 28%.
corresponding to 11% test failures.

Test failures * R.P.P. Smeets, L.H. te Paske. Fourteen Years of Test Experience with Short-
Circuit Withstand Capability of Large Power Transformers Travek VIIth Int. Sci.
and Techn. Conf. on Large Power Transf. and Diagn. Syst., Moscow, 2010

Safe operation VALUE


– First class quality ABB quality
– Highest availability and reliability
is verified by
– Complete technology testing to be
– First class suppliers the highest in
– 13 factories the market.

2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010
The total number of test failures on ABB’s 60+ MVA units was reduced
by 50% between 2001 and 2010.

Power transformers 5
On-time delivery of high quality power transformers
TrafoStar Platform

TrafoStar is a global process including more than


60,000 measurements per year in the group.

Training 13 TrafoStar plants

Field experience 10 key indicators

Product performance testing


The global feedback process in ABB’s engineer-to-order process.

Delivering a power transformer takes time and planning. One virtual factory – 13 manufacturing locations
There is a chain of events on which the project success For decades, ABB has refined a common, industry-unique
depends. ABB’s strong delivery performance builds on its manufacturing platform that is now implemented in all of our
common TrafoStar platform, which provides rigorous con- 13 manufacturing facilities around the globe. Common manu-
trol throughout the design, manufacturing, testing, trans- facturing methods, quality standards and test standards allow
port and delivery stages. Our reliable manufacturing and us to manufacture 1,000+ units annually with the same high
delivery processes mean efficiency in your business. quality in all of our plants worldwide. Our harmonized manu-
facturing processes also enable us to operate several plants
Global design standards speed up development in parallel to meet the strictest contractual delivery deadlines.
Consistently designing high-quality power transformers
requires knowledge and experience on a worldwide basis. More than 60,000 process measurements every year
With our global design system including common design Every year, we conduct more than 60,000 process parameter
rules, processes and IT systems, we have built up a global measurements to collect data to improve our global feedback
knowledge base. This allows us to design every power trans- process. All design and production improvements are imple-
former according to the same high standards regardless of mented in a structured release process of IT program, design
location. The transfer of knowledge between countries, con- instructions and manufacturing standards to further increase
tinents and generations is secured by a learning organization customer value. These improvements translate into increased
that continuously feeds back experience to a growing library value for ABB’s customers.
of best practices. Knowledge transfer is further strengthened
through our global Knowledge Communication Center in
Germany.

6 Power transformers
Delivering a power transformer takes time and planning. ABB’s global common TrafoStar platform provides rigorous control throughout the design,
manufacturing, testing, transport and delivery stages.

Our improvement processes measured yearly include: On-site installation and startup support
No customer delivery is completed until the transformer has
−− On-time delivery
been successfully energized. ABB installation engineers are
−− Test and field failures
therefore always on site to supervise installation and startup.
−− Inventory
On arrival, they will prepare the transformer by carefully reas-
−− Cost of poor quality
sembling all parts dismantled for transit, refill it with oil and
−− Total throughput time
conduct all necessary on-site tests to ensure long and trou-
−− Manufacturing throughput time
ble-free service. As far as possible, the engineers assigned
−− Productivity
will have local language skills.
−− Operational health and safety
−− Supplier quality

Secure transportation
Safe delivery VALUE
Moving an object the size and weight of a power transformer – Common platform The global
requires planning, know-how and a global network of con- – Global design TrafoStar plat-
tacts. At the time of transportation, up to 90 percent of the form ensures
cost of the transformer has already been expended. Hence
standards the highest
there is a significant risk for several parties involved, and the – 60,000+ quality from
demands for secure and reliable transportation are stringent. measurements design to
ABB has extensive experience in delivering power trans- installation.
formers by rail, road, ship and even air. Transport security is
– Installation support
ensured through robust transformer design and reliable logistics – Secure transport
partners, selected by a global internal logistics organization.

Power transformers 7
Efficient operation and reliable local support

The purchase price is not the only consideration when


estimating the total cost of ownership for a power transformer.
Risk of failure, efficiency factors, support and environmental
concerns are other important factors. Adding them all up,
ABB’s value proposition will appear highly favorable.

Lower risk of failure with proven technology Efficiency increase through modernization
Transformers are key components in any electric power – a safe investment
system. Operational outages can have many negative con- Total loss in today’s Transmission and Distribution systems
sequences such as lost revenues, repair costs, dissatisfied is about 10 percent on average. Lifetime capitalized losses
customers etc. For example, an outage of a three-phase alone amount to approximately twice the cost of a modern
generator step-up transformer of 500 MVA may cost 3 million ABB power transformer, based on estimates of future energy
euros* per day in lost revenues. Securing transformer avail- prices. The figures speak for themselves: investing in energy
ability should therefore be considered an inevitable expense efficiency pays off. In fact, new high-performance power
to ensure long-term continuous operation. transformer technology is one of the safest investments
imagin­able – particularly as demand for power supply and
The costs can be estimated by summing up a large number energy prices are likely to continue to increase.
of operational risk factors. What if the transformer has a weak
short circuit design? Will it withstand the startup load after Pushing 100 percent efficiency
a blackout? Due to their proven robust design and reliability, Efficiency factors of up to 99.85 percent are achievable
ABB power transformers dramatically reduce these and other today. These levels are mainly determined by the loss capi-
operational risks. talization factors applied by the customer and ABB’s design
skills. Correct loss capitalization factors, together with high-
These are some of the factors that affect the total cost quality core steel grades, core designs, winding conductors
of ownership, aside from the purchase price: and magnetic shielding methods, combine to make ABB’s
−− Capitalized losses power transformers among the most efficient in the market.
−− Short circuit strength
−− On-time delivery
−− Test failure records *Calculation based on a load of 400 MW, 170 operating hours per week and
−− Transport security a power price of 0.05 euro/kWh.

−− Low maintenance cost


−− Environmentally safe design

Life cycle cost Total ownership cost, MUSD

Inferior quality 8 Cost of losses, MUSD


Medium quality Price of trafo, MUSD
ABB quality
6

0
Years 99,726 99,789 99,821

ABB life cycle cost is lower when also considering costs for repairs Relation between total ownership costs, price and cost of losses
and loss of revenues due to potential breakdowns. (15,000 EUR/kW) as a function of efficiency.

8 Power transformers
ABB Power Transformers
– Manufacturing facilities

Reduced environmental impact Close to customers with local support


ABB seeks to minimize its environmental footprint by apply- ABB is the world’s leading provider of professional trans-
ing environmental management systems that encourage former services. With more than 1,000 service experts
manufacturing sites, suppliers and subcontractors to adopt located in 25 service centers worldwide, we can offer local
strict environmental standards. These standards form the support in most major global markets. Backed by 100 years
benchmark by which we hold our manufacturing facilities of transformer know-how and ABB corporate research cent-
accountable. For example, we have reduced overall volatile ers, we are able to provide highly professional support to
organic compounds (VOC) emissions from our manufac- ensure maximum power transformer availability and system
turing processes by introducing low-VOC painting pro- efficiency. We offer original design and OEM spare parts for
cesses. Additionally, ABB has developed environmentally more than 30 brands.
friendly products such as ultra-low sound transformers and
BIOTEMP®-filled transformers. Efficiency through 24/7 support
ABB provides customers with a 24/7 support service, an
Low noise and risk of personal injury offering which few others can rival in terms of standards.
ABB ranks among the world leaders in noise reduction. For Our global support organization works across borders to
example, the total noise level of an ABB three-phase 93 MVA solve even advanced customer problems in a short time. Our
unit can be up to 20 dB lower than a similar standard power common design and manufacturing platform grants every
transformer. ABB power transformers also minimize the risk support team access to the same support facilities, backed by
of explosion due to their safe design, mainly through the use a truly global organization. Our advanced logistics processes
of leading-edge bushings and well-insulated HV and LV leads. make it possible to transport standardized components within
Leakage-free gaskets further improve the safety of our trans- 24 hours, even across continents.
formers.

Ensuring
Ensuring local
local needs needsknowledge
with global with global knowledge

Born healthy Live healthy New lease of life

Safety
Environmentally conscious
Trouble-free operation
Maximize asset utilization
Reduce outage
Extend asset life Safe investment VALUE
Needs

Asset at performance level Low Life Cycle Cost (LCC)


On-time delivery
Smooth handover
Optimize investment
planning
Get more out of aged assets
Optimize capital expenditure – Low risk A modern
– High efficiency ABB trafo
is a safe
Asset at performance level Maximize asset utilization Reduce outage
– Low environmental investment
impact
ABB Solutions

Smooth handover Low Life Cycle Cost (LCC) Extend asset life
Transportation/hauling Optimize investment Optimize capital
due to its high
planning
Control and monitoring
expenditure
Spare parts – Personal safety efficiency.
Condition/risk/life Preventive maintenance
assessment
Transformer
Refurbishment/enhancement – 24/7 local support
Upgrades
management training
Remanufacturing/
TrafoSite Repair
End of life management

Power transformers 9
ABB – your long-term trusted partner

ABB has a long history of proven capability and reliability.


With our global resources in the T&D business, we can ensure
continuous improvement and development. Our worldwide
presence, size and financial strength make us a partner that can
be relied upon time and again.

Quality through experience and cooperation Pushing the research frontline forward
Every grid is unique and so too is every power transformer. ABB’s power transformer operations are backed by the ABB
Transformers are specified by customers who know their Group’s extensive research and development (R&D), which is
grids and who rely on the manufacturer to come up with a financed by three percent of the Group’s annual turnover
solution that perfectly suits their needs. This is why we invite – equivalent to a yearly investment of more than $1 billion.
our customers to provide their input into the design, manu- The interaction between our growing practical experience and
facturing and installation processes. the support of our corporate R&D is unique in the market,
and further demonstrates our commitment to guaranteeing
Global methodology passed down between generations superior product quality and continuous improvement.
After the BBC-ASEA merger in 1988, ABB’s power transformer
technology was developed through a process in which expe- We have access to the research results of 6,000 scientists
rience and best practices from a wide range of previously and engineers in R&D. Cooperation with 70 universities adds
independent transformer manufacturers were selectively to the combined knowledge base, in basic as well as applied
combined into an improved, common technology known as research. In addition, our manufacturing facilities around the
TrafoStar. world have their own resources for development and local
implementation of global R&D results.
This concept epitomizes ABB’s culture of continuous impro­ve­­
ment. Everyone involved in the supply chain works according Demand will always be there – and so will ABB
to the same set of rules. All plants manufacture in accordance Demand for a secure power supply continues to increase. New
with the rules, and follow this up with testing and corrective economies are booming, and along with it, demand for vast
procedures. This way, our worldwide global industrial system amounts of electrical energy. Meanwhile, there is growing
is passed down to the next generation of employees – thus demand for improved energy efficiency and reduced environ-
securing our continued knowledge and expertise which places mental impact. ABB continues to invest in the world’s future
us as world leaders in power transformers. by developing solutions for the energy challenges of tomorrow.

Power transformers VALUE


A safe partner Reducing life
cycle costs
and energy
consumption
– generation
after genera-
tion.

10 Power transformers
Power transformers 11
Contact us

ABB Ltd. Note

© Copyright 2011 ABB. All rights reserved. 1LAB 000424


Affolternstrasse, 44 We reserve the right to make technical changes or modify the
P.O. Box 8131 contents of this document without prior notice. With regard
8050 Zurich, Switzerland to purchase orders, the agreed particulars shall prevail. ABB
does not accept any responsibility whatsoever for potential
www.abb.com/transformers errors or possible lack of information in this document.

We reserve all rights in this document and in the subject


matter and illustrations contained therein. Any reproduction,
disclosure to third parties or utilization of its content – in
whole or in parts – is forbidden without ABB’s prior written
consent.
_____________________________________________________________________ __________________
_

ANNEX 6: LOW VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT

Page 36 of 44
Distribution Transformers

The most comprehensive range of solutions


for distribution transformer applications
Data included in this catalogue are
subjected to changes without any notice.
The most comprehensive range of solutions
for distribution transformer applications
Even our standard solutions are special
In almost every place where people live and work you will find at least one transformer. But as
long as it keeps working and supplying power to the escalator in the department store, the hotel
lift, the office computer, the oven in the local bakery, the farm machinery or the petrochemical
plant nobody gives it a second thought.
However, transformers are one of the most important units in every production process.
Without them the core activities of nearly every business and factory would come to a standstill
– with serious financial consequences.
After nearly 100 years in the development and manufacture of transformers we are well
aware of this dependence. This is why, we never compromise on the performance, security or
reliability of our products. Nor on design, materials, manufacturing methods, environmental
protection or recycling.
Our objective is to support you and to add value to your activities, by offering a comprehensive
range of top quality transformers. We also provide top class service and support.
With this approach we can tailor the most appropriate technical solution to every problem.
A high quality solution with better service and support, better for the environment and yet with
greater availability and a lower total cost of ownership than our competitors.
All over the world, in underground railways, in amusement parks and in every kind of
factory you will find ABB transformers at work. In the following pages ABB invites you to find
the optimal solution to your application and to see with your own eyes that even our standard
solutions are special.

4 ABB Power Technology Products


Product Index

Small Distribution Transformers page 11

Oil Type Transformers


Medium Distribution Transformers page 16

Large Distribution Transformers page 19

Single Phase Transformers page 24

Dry Type Transformers


Vacuum Cast Coil Transformers page 29

RESIBLOC® Resin-Encapsulated Transformers page 36

Pad Mounted Transformers page 43

Special Applications

Transformers for Variable Speed Drives page 44

Reactors page 47

Boosterformers™ page 49

ABB Power Technology Products 5


Oil Type Transformers
Single-phase and three-phase transformers for the range above 16 kVA and up to 72.5 kV.
These units are designed for power centres, substations and networks; also for pad-mounts.
They are used in public distribution systems, commercial buildings and industrial complexes.
The unique core and coil designs and the use of special turn insulating materials make these
units extremely compact, reliable and durable.
A wide range of transformer fluids is available including BIOTEMP™, which is biodegradable, less
flammable and thermally efficient – ideal for densely populated or environmentally sensitive areas.

Dry Type Transformers


For the range 30 kVA to 30 MVA with primary operating voltages up to 41.5 kV and secondary
operating voltages up to 36 kV. These units are designed for operation in difficult conditions
– environmental contamination, fire hazard, high humidity or extreme climates.
They provide high level security and are found in hospitals and other public areas, on oil
platforms, in ships, underground railways and mines.
They are extremely tough and resilient and are resistant to the effects of vibration. They should
be considered for earthquake prone areas.
RESIBLOC® transformers have a special resin-encapsulated construction which is unique to ABB.
This construction provides great strength and flexible design dimensions.

Special Applications
Pad Mounted Transformers: These units are delivered from the factory in tamper-resistant housings
designed to prevent access by unauthorised personnel.

Transformers for variable speed drives: These units can be supplied with primary power ratings
up to 30 MVA. They can be supplied as oil type or dry type. Converter transformers can be used
for the variable speed drives of high-load, low-speed equipment such as mine hoists, rolling mills
and ship propulsion systems. A correctly designed installation will provide impressive savings from
reduced down-time, extended equipment life and lower power costs.

Reactors: Single-phase and/or three phase for a wide range of applications.

Boosterformers™: Boosterformers™ are used in order to improve the function of electrical power
systems and protect the environment from dangerous stray currents near an electrical railway.

6 ABB Power Technology Products


Product Selection Guide
Oil Type Transformers
Product kVA Primary Features
Voltage (kV)

Small ≤ 250 up to 36 Used for indoor or outdoor applications,


Distribution can be provided with off-load tap changers.
Transformers

Medium > 250 up to 36 Used for indoor or outdoor applications, can


Distribution ≤ 2000 be provided with on-load tap changers or
Transformers off-load tap changers.

Large > 2000 up to 72.5 Used for indoor or outdoor applications, can
Distribution be provided with on-load tap changers or
Transformers off-load tap changers.

Single Phase ≤ 100 up to 36 Small distribution transformers for pole


Transformers mounting.

Dry Type Transformers


Product MVA Primary Features
Voltage (kV)

Vacuum ≤ 30 up to 36 Provides the ultimate in winding protection for


Cast Coil the most demanding applications when effici-
ency and reliability are critical.

RESIBLOC® ≤ 30 up to 41.5 Provides the ultimate resistance to mechanical


Resin- stress associated with heat and short circuit
encapsulated conditions in the most demanding applications.

Transformers for Special Applications


Product

Pad Mounted
Transformers

Transformers for
Variable Speed Drives

Reactors

Boosterformers™

ABB Power Technology Products 7


Oil Type Transformers

ABB’s liquid filled Power Distribution Transformers range from 16 kVA upwards, with primary
voltages up to 72.5 kV.
ABB supplies the widest range of power distribution transformers, including specific designs
for power centres, substations, networks and padmounts.
Transformers are an integral part of power systems with applications in industrial facilities,
commercial buildings and utility transmission and distribution networks.
The core and coil design is a unique characteristic of ABB’s oil type transformers, which
generate the reliability, durability and reduced dimensions required for their application in
utilities, industrial installations and public distribution. ABB oil type transformers are manu-
factured in accordance with the international quality standards ISO 9001 and ISO 14001.

Standard features
Standard features include aluminium or copper windings, epoxy or porcelain bushings, gauges,
alarm packages, fans and special signs and tags.
For heavily polluted environmental conditions ABB offers special paint finish cycles in epoxy-
coating for the protection of metallic components and electrical equipment.

Selection Guide
Product kVA Primary Features
Voltage (kV)

Small ≤ 250 up to 36 Used for indoor or outdoor


Distribution applications, can be provided
Transformers with off-load tap changers.

Medium > 250 up to 36 Used for indoor or outdoor


Distribution ≤ 2000 applications, can be provided
Transformers with on-load tap changers or
off-load tap changers.

Large > 2000 up to 72.5 Used for indoor or outdoor


Distribution applications, can be provided
Transformers with on-load tap changers or
off-load tap changers.

Single Phase ≤ 100 up to 36 Small distribution


Transformers transformers for
pole mounting.

8 - Oil Type Transformers ABB Power Technology Products


Construction features
Core
The core is a series of laminations made from high-quality, grain-oriented silicon steel. The stacked
core provides a superior flux path by utilising a step-lap that joins the core legs to the top and
bottom yokes. The effective support for the core together with a step-lap joint have reduced
existing currents by up to 40%, sound levels by up to 3 dB and iron losses by up to 10%.
The core efficiently fills the opening in the coil, leaving a minimum of unused space. The
short yoke between the legs of the core reduces the external flow between the active leg core
material, resulting in an increase in efficiency. The rectangular shape of the core can be more
uniformly and firmly supported to prevent movement of the laminations so as to improve sound
level characteristics.

Coils
The coil features a low voltage rectangular wire or sheet conductor extending along the full
height of the coil. The layer to layer insulation, Insuldur, is a thermally upgraded kraft paper.
The layer insulation is coated with a diamond pattern of B-stage epoxy adhesive, which cures
during processing to form a high strength bond. This bond keeps the windings from moving
during operation or under short circuit stresses. The high to low insulation is fitted over the low
voltage winding and the wire of the strap wound high voltage is wound directly over the low
voltage to form a high strength coil assembly. Generous oil ducts extend along the height of the
coil to provide cooling in the winding. The staggered, diamond epoxy bonds help assure free
oil flow through the winding.
Accurately located taps and a large winding cross section keep unbalanced ampere-turns
to a minimum. Unbalanced ampere-turns create forces during short circuits that push the high
voltage and low voltage coils apart vertically. By minimising this imbalance vertical forces are
correspondingly reduced, thus making the design stronger under short circuit stresses.
The large areas presented by the layer-type winding result in a low ground capacity, which
gives a nearly straight line surge distribution throughout the winding. A compact, high-impulse-
strength coil is the result.

Turn insulation
ABB power distribution transformers are designed to meet specific performance criteria defined
by the customer. Some design considerations may require the use of traditional crepe paper or
Nomex® tape as turn insulation. Most designs, however, utilise DuraBIL®, which is a tough, flexible
and inert turn insulation. It reduces the most prevalent cause of transformer failure – deterioration
of turn insulation.
DuraBIL® is a single layer of epoxy powder deposited electrostatically and baked on a strap
conductor. The process is closely controlled and monitored to ensure a continuous, uniform
coating. The result is a compact turn insulation with superior characteristics including adhesion,
flexibility, abrasion resistance and thermal and chemical stability.
Since DuraBIL® is chemically stable, it does not degrade or contaminate the transformer fluid
with moisture. As a result, DuraBIL® maintains its dimensional stability and the coil’s structural
integrity.

Layer insulation
The Insuldur system of chemical stabilisers thermally upgrades the cellulose insulating materials
to permit 12% higher load capacity. Insuldur can be used with all fluids offered by ABB for small
power transformers. Chemical stabilisers delay insulation breakdown under elevated temperature
conditions. Dimensional changes in the insulating materials are minimised to ensure a tighter
structure. The result is greater strength and coil integrity throughout the life of the transformer.
The Insuldur system allows a unit rated at 55°C to be operated at a 10°C higher temperature
with a 12% increase in kVA capacity.

ABB Power Technology Products 9 - Oil Type Transformers


Transformer fluids
A choice of transformer fluids, including oil, silicone, MIDEL and BIOTEMP™, is offered with
most ratings. Mineral oil is usually recommended for outdoor applications. Silicone and R-Temp
are classified as less flammable fluids and are used when flammability is a concern.
Transformers designed with less flammable fluids can be used to meet specific requirements
of non-flammability. BIOTEMP™ is a new, fully biodegradable, environmentally friendly dielectric
fluid that is also classified as less flammable. BIOTEMP™ has been shown to be 97% biodegradable
within 21 days by underwriters, laboratories. BIOTEMP™ is suitable for indoor applications and
in areas of high environmental sensitivity where any insulating fluid spill would require expensive
clean-up procedures.

10 - Oil Type Transformers ABB Power Technology Products


Small Distribution Transformers (≤ 250 kVA )

Construction features
Description
ABB Distribution Transformers manufactures
three phase oil type small distribution trans-
formers within the range up to 250 kVA and
36 kV. The transformers are adaptable for
pole mounting or assembly in substations.

Standard features
Hermetically sealed transformers completely
filled with oil:

- Corrugating tanks Core


- High and low voltage bushings in accor- The magnetic circuit is of the three column
dance with DIN 42531 and DIN 42530 type with mitred joints. It is manufactured
- Off-circuit tap changer in 5 positions with first-rate, grain oriented silicon iron
- Lifting lugs sheets insulated with carlite. The mounted
- Earthing terminals core is clamped down in order to reduce
- Thermometer pocket in accordance with vibrations and minimise noise levels.
DIN 42554 (standard from 100 kVA)
- Filling plug Windings
- Drain cock The windings are made of either copper or
- Rating plate aluminium; they are insulated with either pure
- Inhibited oil cellulose or double enamel. Furthermore, the
complete columns are manufactured to with-
Transformers can also be manufactured with stand short circuit stresses.
conservators.
Off-circuit tap changer
Other product types with different dimensions The tappings (±2 x 2.5%) of the HV winding,
and technical specifications can be designed are connected to the off-circuit tap changer
and manufactured on request. located horizontally between the yoke and
the tank cover. The handle is located on the
cover and should be operated when the trans-
former is deactivated. The design prevents
setting the off-circuit tap changer to interme-
diate positions. The mechanism can also be
padlocked during normal transformer operation.

ABB Power Technology Products 11 - Small Distribution Transformers


Insulating oil Testing
The mineral oil with its electrical and chemical The transformers are manufactured in accor-
characteristics is in compliance with the IEC dance with ISO 9001 and ISO 14001. At the
Standards and is P.C.B. and P.C.T. free. end of the manufacturing process the trans-
formers are individually tested in accordance
Tank and cover with the IEC Standards.
The sides of the tank are made of corrugated
cooling surfaces. The bottom plate, side and The routine tests are:
frames are of a welded construction. The welds - Measurement of the winding resistance
are tested for oil tightness. The thermometer - Measurement of the voltage ratio and check
pockets, bushings, tap switch drive and lifting of the vector group
lugs are fitted on the tank cover. The cover is - Measurement of the impedance voltage and
bolted to the tank frame. The undercarriage is measurement of load losses
welded to the bottom plate and the rollers are - Measurement of no load losses and no
suitable for either longitudinal or transverse load current
movements. - Dielectric tests

Painting and surface treatment Upon request, witnessed type/special tests


Transformers are either hot-dip galvanized or can be carried out.
painted. The metal parts are carefully sand-
blasted. The painting system is a single coat
one pack epoxy. The top coat is RAL 7033 or
customized. The hot-dip galvanizing is 70 µm
minimum.

Options and accessories


- Plug-in bushings on HV
- Max thermometer
- Dial type thermometer with two contacts
- Oil level indicator for hermetically sealed
transformers
- Thermometer pocket in accordance with DIN
42554 (standard from 100 kVA)
- Off-circuit tap changer with 3 or 7 positions
- Sparking gaps
- Pressure relief device
- Cable boxes
- Integrated pole brackets on tank
- Skid base
- Bi-directional rollers
- Total enclosure on cover over HV and LV
bushings

12 - Small Distribution Transformers ABB Power Technology Products


Oil Type/Small Distribution Transformers

No-Load Loss (W)

Wheel base (mm)

Tank description
Total weight (kg)
Noise level (dB)
Impedance (%)

Load Loss (W)

Oil weight (kg)


Vector Group

Length (mm)

Height (mm)
Width (mm)
HV1 (V)

HV2 (V)

LV1 (V)
kVA

30 20500 0 410 Yzn11 4 100 585 0 395 115 840 770 1005 0 ▲
40 15750 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 90 900 48 340 90 790 580 970 420 ▲
40 15750 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 130 900 48 330 90 790 580 970 420 ▲
50 10000 0 400 Yzn5 4 125 1100 47 375 90 760 650 885 ▲
50 10000 0 400 Yzn5 4 190 1100 50 365 90 760 650 885 ▲
50 10000 0 400 Yzn5 4 125 875 47 425 100 820 625 885 ▲
50 20500 0 410 Dyn11 4 140 885 0 440 125 840 770 1055 0 ▲
50 16800 0 420 Dyn5 4 125 900 51 390 120 820 645 1010 ▲
50 20000 0 400 Yzn11 4 190 1100 44 465 125 870 650 1400 670 ▲
50 22000 0 420 Dyn11 4 115 940 48 415 110 810 585 1040 0 ▲
50 11000 0 420 Dyn11 4 115 920 48 370 90 760 600 945 0 ▲
50 20000 0 400 Yzn5 4 125 875 47 375 95 860 600 975 ▲
50 10000 0 400 Dyn5 3.7 115 850 50 425 115 800 480 1200 0 ▲
50 20000 0 400 Yzn5 4 125 1350 47 350 90 790 580 955 ▲
63 22000 0 420 Yzn5 4 190 1350 51 465 105 1280 630 1650 420 ▲
63 22000 0 420 Yzn5 4 160 1350 48 465 105 1280 630 1650 420 ▲
63 15750 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 130 1130 48 430 100 945 665 970 420 ▲
63 16800 0 420 Dyn5 4 130 950 51 460 110 820 645 1030 ▲
63 15750 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 180 1130 48 430 100 945 665 970 420 ▲
63 21000 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 180 1280 48 460 100 830 680 1150 420 ▲
63 15750 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 180 1160 48 470 100 830 680 1150 420 ▲
100 10000 0 400 Yzn5 4 320 1750 50 585 130 820 775 1030 ▲
100 10000 0 400 Yzn5 4 210 1750 49 670 145 1120 725 1090 ▲
100 20500 0 410 Dyn11 4 220 1485 0 510 120 850 610 1080 0 ▲
100 10500 0 400 Dyn11 3.8 215 1700 48 490 110 870 500 1170 0 ▲
100 16800 0 420 Dyn5 4 180 11800 52 730 160 930 645 1200 ▲
100 21000 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 240 1720 49 585 120 870 670 1200 420 ▲
100 20000 0 400 Dyn11 4 500 1700 48 800 0 950 650 1270 520 ▲
100 10500 0 400 Dyn11 4 165 1700 48 535 110 870 500 1220 0 ▲
100 21000 0 400 Dyn11 4.2 165 1760 48 580 140 920 520 1295 0 ▲
100 11000 0 420 Dyn11 4 185 1520 48 510 95 860 600 1070 0 ▲
100 22000 0 420 Dyn11 4 185 1525 48 545 125 850 610 1115 0 ▲
100 10500 0 420 Dyn5 3.4 165 1240 54 600 135 920 540 1220 0 ▲
100 22000 0 420 Dyn11 3.6 245 1550 48 540 150 920 520 1245 0 ▲
160 22000 0 420 Dyn5 4 375 2350 57 765 165 1000 720 1400 520 ▲
160 15750 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 280 2200 50 830 165 970 805 1110 520 ▲
160 10000 0 400 Dyn11 4 460 2350 50 840 180 1040 675 1140 670 ▲
160 20000 0 400 Dyn11 4 460 2350 50 880 205 1000 700 1210 670 ▲
160 20000 0 400 Dyn11 4 300 2350 50 880 205 1000 700 1210 ▲
160 16800 0 420 Dyn5 4 265 1750 53 890 190 1010 645 1180 ▲
160 15750 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 300 2350 50 1000 220 1080 790 1290 520 ▲
160 15000 0 400 Dyn11 4 650 2400 48 900 0 1100 670 1350 520 ▲
160 10000 0 400 Dyn11 4 300 2000 50 870 180 1040 675 1140 520 ▲
200 20500 0 410 Dyn11 4 420 2295 0 995 235 1080 730 1250 0 ▲
200 10500 0 400 Dyn11 3.8 320 2450 53 870 180 950 625 1345 0 ▲
200 22000 11000 420 Dyn11 3.6 370 2280 53 870 180 950 625 1495 0 ▲
200 11000 0 420 Dyn11 4 365 2225 53 840 160 1030 655 1170 0 ▲
200 22000 0 420 Dyn11 4 370 2250 53 940 200 1020 700 1245 0 ▲
200 10500 0 400 Dyn11 3.8 360 2700 53 840 200 950 625 1295 0 ▲
250 22000 0 420 Dyn5 4 425 3250 55 1180 260 1100 780 1500 520 ▲
250 22000 0 420 Dyn5 4 440 2750 55 1250 260 1100 800 1600 520 ▲
250 10000 0 400 Dyn5 4 425 3250 50 1110 205 1300 750 1190 ▲
250 22000 0 420 Dyn5 4 530 3250 60 1180 260 1100 780 1500 520 ▲
250 10000 0 400 Dyn5 4 425 2750 50 1160 200 1000 700 1220 ▲
250 20000 0 400 Dyn5 4 425 3250 50 1130 220 1060 760 1190 ▲
250 15750 0 400 Dyn5 4.5 360 2350 51 1010 200 1150 975 1260 520 ▲
250 15750 0 400 Dyn5 4.5 460 3200 51 1030 205 1040 950 1185 520 ▲
250 25000 0 400 Dyn11 4.5 780 3500 52 1245 300 1210 860 1605 1070 ▲
250 16800 0 420 Dyn5 4 345 2230 55 1450 270 1150 715 1310 ▲
250 22000 0 420 Dyn1 4 290 5000 46 1120 0 1450 900 1500 520 ▲
250 21000 0 400 Dyn5 4.5 460 3260 51 945 175 990 720 1340 520 ▲

Please note that this table only shows a small sample ▲ Hermetically sealed with corrugated tank ● Corrugated tank with conservator
of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.

ABB Power Technology Products 13 - Small Distribution Transformers


Passenger safety in focus
For airports such as Sweden´s Hultsfreds Airport, passenger safety comes before all else. ABB´s Small
Distribution Transformers ensure that runaway lights, radio beacons and air traffic control communications
all function reliably.
Medium Distribution Transformers (> 250 kVA, ≤ 2000 kVA )

Standard features
Hermetically sealed. (Rated power <1000 kVA):
- Oil filling plug on the cover
- Oil-level indicator
- The two lifting lugs on the cover are made
for lifting the transformer or its removable part
- Corrugated tank
- Undercarriage with bi-directional rollers
- Oil drain valve
- Off-circuit tap changer handle
- Earthing terminals
- Sparking gaps for voltages 15 kV and above
- Rating plate
Additionally, for transformers with conservator
(Rated power ≥1000 kVA):
- Max thermometer
- Magnetic oil-level indicator
Construction features - Oil filling plug on the conservator
- Buchholz relay
Description - Dehydrating breather
MDT transformers are used to step down three- - Conservator
phase high voltage to low voltage for power
distribution, mainly in metropolitan areas and Core
for industrial applications. The transformers in The cores of the transformers are made of
standard versions are designed for use in grain-oriented magnetic, cold-rolled silicon
moderate climates and can be installed both steel laminations with low losses.
outdoors and indoors. The loading is in
accordance with IEC 354. MDT transformers Windings
are hermetically sealed (the tank is completely The windings of the transformers are made of
filled with oil) or equipped with oil conser- high grade electrolytic copper or aluminium.
vator. Both types are equipped with flexible The High Voltage windings are wound either
corrugated tank walls enabling sufficient with round, enamel insulated, or shaped, paper
cooling of the transformer. They also compen- insulated wire. The Low Voltage windings are
sate for the changes in the oil volume during wound with shaped, paper insulated wire or
operation. An advantage of the hermetically foil. The winding construction is characterised
sealed transformers is that the oil is never in by high dielectric strength with high resistance,
contact with the atmosphere thus avoiding to atmospheric surges and to the effects of
periodic oil analysis. short-circuits. Neutral points of the Low Voltage
windings are brought to the tank cover.
Off-circuit tap changer
The off-circuit tap changer is of a 5-position
type connected on the High Voltage side with
a handle located on the cover. The tap changer
should be operated only when the transformer
is deactivated.

16 - Medium Distribution Transformers ABB Power Technology Products


Insulating oil Options and accessories
The mineral oil with its electrical and chemical - Plug-in bushings
characteristics complies with the IEC Standards - Dial type thermometer with two contacts
and is P.C.B. and P.C.T. free. - DGPT2 control device
- Pressure relief valve with or without contacts
Tank and cover - Tap changer with more than five positions
The cover is bolted to the tank frame. The - Cable boxes
transformer undercarriage is provided with - Spark gap meter
bidirectional rollers turnable by π/2 rad (90°) - Air insulated housings
to allow longitudinal and transverse move- - Galvanized tank
ment on flat surfaces. - Additional thermometer pocket
- Dual voltage transformer
Painting and surface treatment
All metal parts are carefully sandblasted. The Specifications
painting is made with a single coat of one- - Standards: IEC, DIN, BS, UNE, PN etc.
pack epoxy paint. The finishing paint is made - 301–2,000 kVA, three-phase, 65°C
with two or three coats. If requested a hot- maximum windings temperature rise
dip galvanized corrugated steel tank can be - 50 Hz standard, 60 Hz optional
provided. - High Voltages 3,000 - 35,000 V
- Low Voltages 100 - 15,750 V
- Vector group: Dy, Yz, Yy, Dd, Yd
- Impedance voltage: 4-7%
- Voltage regulation: ±2 x 2.5%; ±2 x 5%;
+2.5 %, -3 x 2.5%

The rain of terror


Power failure is a nightmare scenario for any healthcare institution, and Hermann Hospital in Texas
experienced one in June 2001, when the tropical storm known as Alison hit Houston.
On 26 June, the hospital ordered a 1000 kVA Distribution Transformer from ABB. Just 60 hours
later, the new transformer was designed, built and dispatched. This helped to ease the consequences
of the disaster, already known in history books as “the rain of terror”.

ABB Power Technology Products 17 - Medium Distribution Transformers


Oil Type/Medium Distribution Transformers

No-Load Loss (W)

Wheel base (mm)

Tank description
Total weight (kg)
Noise level (dB)
Impedance (%)

Load Loss (W)

Oil weight (kg)


Vector Group

Length (mm)

Height (mm)
Width (mm)
HV1 (V)

HV2 (V)

LV1 (V)
kVA

315 26000 0 400 Dyn11 4 980 4130 64 1550 370 1300 900 1700 670 ▲
315 20000 8000 400 Dyn11 4 1050 4200 53 1300 0 1240 800 1400 670 ▲
315 15000 0 400 Dyn11 4 1050 4200 53 1300 0 1240 800 1400 670 ▲
315 10000 0 400 Dyn11 4 1050 4200 53 1300 0 1240 800 1400 670 ▲
400 35000 0 400 Dyn1 6 620 5000 50 2050 0 1300 900 1800 670 ▲
400 21000 0 420 Dyn5 4 750 4600 63 1560 340 1300 900 1600 670 ▲
400 15750 0 400 Dyn5 4.5 570 4100 52 1520 320 1210 850 1480 670 ▲
400 10500 0 420 Dyn5 4 475 3480 0 1730 320 1140 820 1495 0 ▲
500 22000 11000 420 Dyn11 4.4 710 5000 0 1750 320 1140 880 1600 0 ▲
500 20000 0 400 Dyn5 4 730 5500 50 1660 365 1300 920 1860 ▲
500 11000 0 420 Dyn11 4.5 710 4600 0 1690 320 1140 880 1450 0 ▲
500 10000 0 690 Dyn5 4.6 500 4000 0 2200 350 1470 850 1560 0 ▲
500 10000 0 400 Dyn11 4 1450 5800 53 1750 0 1450 970 1500 670 ▲
630 35000 0 400 Dyn1 6 840 7000 52 2600 0 1450 900 1800 670 ▲
630 22000 0 420 Dyn5 6 800 5600 60 2500 510 1400 1050 1700 670 ▲
630 15750 0 400 Dyn5 4.5 720 6100 54 2035 400 1270 900 1600 670 ▲
630 10000 0 400 Dyn5 6 800 8700 54 2040 445 1530 950 1690 ▲
800 26000 0 400 Dyn11 6 1700 8500 68 2650 525 1700 950 2100 670 ▲
800 21000 0 400 Dyn11 4.8 1030 6800 0 2300 380 1520 900 1700 0 ▲
800 15000 10000 400 Dyn11 5 1940 8200 53 2200 0 1630 1080 1600 670 ●
800 10000 0 400 Dyn5 6 1400 8500 56 2320 530 1400 1050 1890 ▲
1000 35000 0 400 Dyn1 6 1600 9700 0 3100 0 1800 1050 1860 820 ▲
1000 21000 0 400 Dyn5 6 1300 10200 56 2800 550 1970 980 1980 820 ●
1000 15750 0 400 Dyn5 6 1300 10200 56 2790 550 1970 980 1980 820 ●
1000 10000 0 400 Yyn0 5.3 1300 12200 0 2420 470 1670 1030 1590 0 ▲
1250 26000 0 400 Dyn11 6 2360 13500 70 3550 760 2000 1100 2250 820 ▲
1250 20000 15000 400 D(D)yn11 7.19 1320 16900 0 4140 1190 2345 1370 2310 820 ●
1250 15000 10000 400 Dyn11 6 2600 13000 65 3600 0 1860 1250 1640 820 ●
1250 10500 0 400 Dyn11 5.4 1460 13400 0 3000 580 1830 1150 1720 0 ▲
1600 35000 0 400 Dyn1 6 2400 14000 0 4000 0 2000 1100 1900 820 ▲
1600 20000 0 400 Yyn0 5.5 1780 16700 0 3320 680 1890 1170 1860 0 ▲
1600 15750 0 400 Dyn5 6 1700 16000 58 3995 820 2100 1130 2250 820 ●
1600 10000 0 690 Dyn5 5.7 1580 13500 0 3680 775 1910 1120 1970 0 ▲
2000 30000 0 6300 Dyn5 6 3200 21000 71 5000 1100 2250 1300 2350 1070 ●
2000 20000 0 400 Yyn0 6 2200 20100 0 4020 850 2010 1220 1910 0 ▲
2000 15750 0 400 Dyn5 6 2100 19000 0 4710 900 2330 1360 2320 1070 ●
2000 10000 0 6300 Dyn5 6 3200 21000 71 5000 1100 2250 1300 2350 1070 ●

Please note that this table only shows a small sample ▲ Hermetically sealed with corrugated tank ● Corrugated tank with conservator
of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.

18 - Medium Distribution Transformers ABB Power Technology Products


Large Distribution Transformers (> 2000 kVA, up to 72.5 kV )

Construction features
Description
ABB has been manufacturing transformers for
almost a hundred years. The production is
based on the development and research carried
out in the design department and at the ABB
Research Centre in close cooperation with our
customers. This long experience combined
with research and development, guarantees
high quality, long life and reliability.

Standard features
The transformers are manufactured and tested
in accordance with the IEC Publication 76. Windings
They are also in compliance with several The material of the windings is either copper
national standards e.g. BS 171, VDE 0532, or aluminum. The windings are made of paper
SS 4270101 etc. insulated rectangular wire in the form of multi-
The transformers can be overloaded in layer, disc or helical windings. Transformers
accordance with IEC Publications 354 (1972). provided with on-load tap-changer usually
The on-load tap-changer and bushings have have a separate tap winding.
been chosen so as not to limit the overload
capability. The cooling methods are ONAN Off-load tap-changer
or ONAN/ONAF. The transformers are normally equipped with
a 5-position off-load tap-changer on the High
Construction features Voltage side, with its handle located on the
The transformers are of the breathing, conven- cover. When changing the tap position the
tional type provided with an oil conservator. transformer has to be un-energized.
Two types of transformers are manufactured: Position 1 of the tap-changer (+ position)
- Transformers with off-load tap changer corresponds with the highest ratio, which
- Transformers with on-load tap changer gives the lowest voltage on the Low Voltage
side. Position 5 of the tap-changer (- position)
Core corresponds with the lowest ratio which conse-
The three legged bolt-less core is constructed quently gives the highest voltage on the Low
of grain oriented steel laminations. The joints Voltage side. Transformers having dual primary
between the leg and yoke are mitred at 45° (or secondary) voltages are usually equipped
and interleaved. The cross section of the leg with a selector switch with the handle on
is circular. the cover.

ABB Power Technology Products 19 - Large Distribution Transformers


On-load tap changer Options and accessories
The on-load tap-changer is mounted on the The transformers are fitted with the following
cover of the main transformer tank. The tap- standard accessories:
changer works as a selector switch combining - Bushings
the features of a diverter switch and a tap - Oil conservator with oil level indicator
selector. The selector switch is located in a - Filling and drain valves
separate oil compartment which is connected - Oil sampling device
to its own conservator. The selector switch is - Earthing terminals
of the high-speed spring operated type with - Lifting lugs
resistive transition impedances. The tap-changer - Jacking pads (radiator tanks)
is equipped with a protective relay. The selector - Rating plate
switch can be lifted for inspection and the oil - Silica-gel breather
in the compartment can be changed separately. - Buchholz relay
The on-load tap-changer is provided with a - Top oil thermometer
motor drive mechanism for remote and local
control. Normally the motor drive is three-phase Additional accessories can be fitted in accor-
and the control and the heating circuits are for dance with the customer’s specifications.
single phase AC supply. When re-quested, DC
circuits can be supplied. Vacuum treatment
Drying and vacuum treatment takes place in a
Insulating oil special oven, where the windings are heated
The mineral oil used in the transformers com- electrically while simultaneously the air is
plies with IEC 296 and several national stan- evacuated from the oven, reaching an absolute
dards. The oil slows down the ageing process. pressure of 1 mbar. The transformer is filled
Transformers with off-load tap changers can with oil while it is still under vacuum. In this
be delivered filled with silicone oil or MIDEL way moisture and gases are effectively remo-
fluid if requested. ved from the windings and oil.

Tank Bushings
The transformer tank is usually of the rigid type The bushings are of a solid porcelain type and
provided with removable radiators connected located on the cover. Bushing insulators can
to the tank by means of a shut-off valve. On be changed without opening the transformer.
request, the tank can be made vacuum proof. The bushings comply with IEC 137.
Transformers up to 5 MVA can be supplied with The terminals can be provided with an air
a compact tank with corrugated cooling fins. insulated enclosure. The enclosure can be
on the primary and/or on the secondary side
Painting and surface treatment and may be constructed for cable or bus duct
Prior to the painting of the tank, the cover and connection. Alternatively the transformers can
oil conservator are sandblasted. External sur- be provided with plug-in bushings.
faces are painted immediately after pretreatment
with a two-pack epoxy primer coat. Testing
The finishing is carried out by applying a All transformers are manufactured according
two-pack polyurethane paint to a total thick- to the ISO 9001 Quality System. The trans-
ness of 180 µm. The colour of the paint is formers are individually tested according to
RAL6013 (rush green). IEC standards.
The inside of the transformer tank is painted
with a two-pack epoxy primer to a thickness
of approx. 30 µm. The external surfaces of the
radiators are hot dip galvanized to a thickness
of approx. 60 µm. Corrugated tanks are flow
painted with alkyd primer and acrylic finish
to a total thickness of 80 µm. The conservator
and the bottom part of the tank are painted
internally.

20 - Large Distribution Transformers ABB Power Technology Products


1. Routine tests 3. Special tests
1.1 Measurement of winding resistance 3.1 Dielectric tests:
1.2 Measurement of voltage ratio and 3.1.1 PD-test
testing of voltage vector relationship 3.1.2 Chopped wave test
1.3 Measurement of impedance voltage, 3.2 Measurement of zero-sequence
short-circuit impedance and load loss impedance on three phase transformers
1.4 Measurement of no-load loss and 3.3 Short circuit test
current 3.4 Measurement of sound level
1.5 Dielectric tests: 3.5 Measurement of harmonics in the
1.5.1 Separate source voltage withstand test noload current
1.5.2 Induced overvoltage withstand test 3.6 Tests of auxilary equipment and wiring
3.7 Tests onload tap-changer
Witness type/special tests can be carried out 3.8 Leakage test for transformer tank
on request.

2. Type tests
2.1 Temperature rise test
2.2 Dielectric tests:
2.2.1 Lightning impulse test

ABB Power Technology Products 21 - Large Distribution Transformers


Less time, more money
Many of the “Paradise Islands” might not seem so paradisial without electricity. Wärtsilä NSD, one of the
world’s leading manufacturers of gas and diesel engines for power generation and for off-shore applications
would definitely not want to be without our fast deliveries of 8, 12 and 16 MVA Large Distribution Trans-
former units. Without that speed their greatest sales advantage for diesel power plants would be lost.
Neither Wärtsilä nor their customers would be able to reach their rewards so quickly. And for the rest of us,
those islands might no longer seem such idyllic places to visit.

22 - Large Distribution Transformers ABB Power Technology Products


Large Distribution Transformers

Rated power Primary Voltage BIL, HV Secondary BIL, LV Tank Description


Voltage
kVA kV kV kV kV
2001-5000 up to 72.5 up to 350 up to 15 up to 110 Hermetically sealed
2001-5000 up to 72.5 up to 350 up to 15 up to 110 Corrugated tank

5000 and above up to 72.5 up to 350 up to 15 up to 110 Radiator tank


with conservator

Large Distribution Transformers


Typical datas for 20/10 kV transformer with off-load or on-load tap-changer

Rated power Tap-changer No-Load Loss Load Loss Impedance Total Weight Oil

kVA W W % kg kg
3150 ±2x2.5% 3500 25000 6.35 6250 1210
±9x1.67% 3800 25500 6.35 10000 2780
4000 ±2x2.5% 4200 29000 6.35 7500 1440
±9x1.67% 4500 31000 6.35 12100 3220
5000 ±2x2.5% 4900 35000 7.15 9300 1670
±9x1.67% 5000 39000 7.15 13400 3620
6300 ±2x2.5% 6000 45000 7.15 13200 2750
±9x1.67% 6200 45000 7.15 15400 3960
8000 ±2x2.5% 7000 56000 8.35 15300 3140
±9x1.67% 7200 56000 8.35 18100 4760
10000 ±2x2.5% 8100 65000 8.35 17200 3480
±9x1.67% 8200 68000 8,35 20600 5090

Other product types with different datas and specifications can be supplied on request.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.

ABB Power Technology Products 23 - Large Distribution Transformers


Single Phase Transformers ( ≤ 100 kVA )

Construction features
Description
ABB Distribution Transformers manufactures
single-phase, oil type small distribution trans-
formers for pole mounting. These represent
an economical option for certain networks.
They are suitable for serving residential over-
head distribution loads, as well as for lighting,
commercial loads, industrial and diversified
power applications. ABB’s core design provides
optimal efficiency and better mechanical,
thermal and electrical performance. These
transformers are designed for the duties nor-
mally encountered on electric utility power Options and accessories
distribution systems. Bushings mounted on lid or on turrets. 2 or 3
view options. Internal HT fuses can be fitted.
Ranges ANSI or DIN bushings. Single or dual ratio.
15 kVA to 100 kVA with voltages up to a Tap-switch or internal link board. Can be fitted
maximum of 36 kV. with acing horns or surge arrestors.

Standard features Standard and type tests


Two types of transformer are manufactured: Can be supplied in accordance with IETS, IEC
- sealed construction or ANSI standards. All units have been type
- free breathing construction tested according to IEC.
Standard features for EATS or ANSI can be
provided.

All units are supplied with hot-dip galvanised


tanks including:
- lifting lugs
- cover mounted, high voltage porcelain
bushing(s) with eyebolt terminal or spade
terminal
- fibreglass reinforced polyester or porcelain
low voltage insulators

24 - Single Phase Transformers ABB Power Technology Products


Planning minimised the impact of Dennis and Floyd
When the hurricanes Dennis and Floyd struck, Carolina Power & Light (CP&L) and ABB were prepared.
Within 48 hours, 225 pole-type, single phase distribution transformers were shipped from ABB´s stock
to CP&L, with a further 2,600 transformers shipped 12 days later.

ABB Power Technology Products 25 - Single Phase Transformers


The Olympics have a bright future
RESIBLOC® transformers from ABB will be in the spotlight at the Olympic Games in Sydney. 100,000
spectators in the grandstands and over a billion people viewing television can count on ABB to make sure
everything works faultlessly – from timekeeping to arena lighting.

26 - Vacuum Cast Coil Transformers ABB Power Technology Products


Dry Type Transformers

ABB’s dry type transformers range from 30 kVA to 30 MVA, with primary operating voltages up to
41.5 kV and secondary operating voltages up to 36 kV.
With the aim of minimising environmental contamination and fire hazards, customers are increas-
ingly requesting dry type transformers. These transformers meet strict parameters with respect to
electrical system demands and functioning in areas with extreme climatic conditions.
Applications include high-density office buildings, nuclear power plants, offshore drilling plat-
forms, nuclear-powered navy vessels and high-volume industrial process plants.
ABB dry type transformers fulfil the requirements of international standards IEC 60726, as well
as the European HD464 and HD538.
ABB’s dry type transformers are virtually maintenance free and are manufactured in accordance
with the international quality standards ISO 9001 and ISO 14001.

Applications
ABB dry type transformers are most suitable for installations that require a high degree of safety,
such as: hospitals, shopping centres, multipurpose cultural centres, car factories etc. ABB dry
type transformers are also the most technologically advanced, designed for the severe conditions
present in:
- Chemical processing, offshore platforms for oil wells, offshore drilling platforms, marine appli-
cations, container cranes at seaports.
- Heavy industrial applications: wind power generation, underground railways, stations and
underground mines in non-classified areas. Rectifiers and frequency converters for AC motors.
Power plants for auxiliary services and excitation transformer systems.

Dry Type Transformers


Product MVA Primary Features
Voltage (kV)

Vacuum ≤ 30 up to 36 Provides the ultimate in winding protection for


Cast Coil the most demanding applications when efficien-
cy and reliability are critical.

RESIBLOC® ≤ 30 up to 41.5 Provides the ultimate resistance to mechanical


Resin- stress associated with heat and short circuit
encapsulated conditions in the most demanding applications.

ABB Power Technology Products 27 - Dry Type Transformers


Standard features
Core
ABB’s dry type transformers utilise a step-lap mitred core construction to ensure optimum per-
formance and minimum sound levels. The mitred core joint allows efficient flux transfer along
natural grain lines between the core legs and yoke. The step-lap construction further enhances the
efficiency of the joint by reducing joint fringing which reduces core losses and exisiting currents.
The core is designed and built to provide the lowest possible losses from the effects of magnetic
hysteresis and eddy currents. All possible steps are taken to prevent local circulating currents and
to avoid built-in bending stresses.
ABB starts with non-ageing highly permeable cold-rolled, grain-oriented silicon steel, and
constructs the core with step-lap mitred joints. Magnetic flux densities are kept well below the
saturation point. The steel is precision cut to assure that it will be smooth and burr-free. For
rigidity and support, the upper and lower yokes are solidly clamped to a sturdy metal frame.
The finished core is coated with a corrosion resistant sealant which provides lamination cohesion
and environmental protection.

Windings
ABB’s windings construction depends on operating voltage, basic impulse level and current
capacity of the individual winding. Typically, ABB’s Low Voltage windings, insulation class 1.1 kV,
are wound using sheet conductors. This construction allows free current distribution within the
axial width of the coil which eliminates the axial forces developed in other types of windings
under short circuit conditions.
During the assembly process each Low Voltage winding is blocked radially and axially against
the core using a combination of solid and resilient mounts for sound suppression and thermal
expansion compensation.
ABB’s winding construction may be either round or oval up to 2500 kVA. Windings on trans-
formers with a rating greater than 2500 kVA are generally round.
An experienced and dedicated work force ensures quality transformers and customer satisfaction
with the product.

28 - Dry Type Transformers


Vacuum Cast Coil Transformers (≤ 30 MVA )

Construction features
Description
ABB vacuum cast coil transformers range from
50 kVA up to 30 MVA with primary operating
voltages up to 36 kV and secondary operating
voltage up to 6 kV.
Customers demand dry type transformers
more frequently in order to minimise environ-
mental contamination and fire hazard. These
transformers are not flammable, they are self-
extinguishing and in the event of a breakdown
there is no risk of leakage of flammable or
contaminating substances.
The emission of toxic substances and fumes
is minimised. The use of cast resin, combined - Provisions for lifting core and coil assembly
with our latest manufacturing technique allows - Rating plate
us to build a stronger compact transformer - Temperature control device
capable of withstanding severe rolling and - Earthing terminals
vibration. - Base equipped with bidirectional rollers or
Vacuum cast coil transformers are virtually designed for skidding
maintenance free. They do not require any
special civil works prior to installation and due Options and accessories
to the particular design they can be repaired Design options:
on site. ABB vacuum cast coil transformers are - 80°C average temperature rise (or other
manufactured in accordance with the interna- according to requirement)
tional quality standard ISO 9001. - Copper windings
Vacuum cast coil transformers are moisture- - Cast coil LV windings
proof, suitable for operation in humid or heav- - Increased basic impulse levels
ily polluted environments. They are the ideal - Dual primary-secondary voltage
transformers for operation in environments - Loss optimised designs
with a humidity higher than 75% as well as at - Retrofit designs
temperatures lower than -25°C. - Other designs available on request

Standard features Accessories


- HV coils vacuum cast in epoxy resin. - Three-phase electronic temperature monitor
LV windings pre-impregnated - Anti vibration pads
- Casting process utilises high performance - Optional ventilated enclosure with remov-
filled epoxy able front and rear panels (IP20 to IP65)
- Aluminium windings, copper optional - Electrostatic screen
- Step-lap mitered core - Forced cooling package with three-phase
- 155°C insulation system and 100°C average electronic temperature monitor
temperature rise - Air-filled terminal chambers
- Four full capacity taps on HV winding - Special paint colours
rated ± 2 x 2.5% - Plug-in terminals (quick connectors)

29 - Vacuum Cast Coil Transformers


Standard tests Fire hazards
- Transformation ratio at all taps and polarity - Neither dioxins nor hydrohalogen
- Applied voltage compounds
- Induced voltage - Non toxic materials used
- Partial discharge test - F1 class certified
- Resistance of all windings - Self-extinguishing
- Vector group - Light transmission factor of fumes >60%
- No-load loss and no-load current
- Load losses and impedance voltage test Electrical and mechanical design
- Impulse test withstands voltage up to 200 kV
Type tests - Mechanically stronger, safe against vibrations
- Temperature rise test and earthquakes
- Lightning impulse test - Withstands thermal and dynamic short
- Measurement of noise level circuit effects
- Insulation resistance
Specifications
Humid or heavily polluted - Self-Cooled Power Raiting: 50 kVA – 25 MVA
environments - Primary Voltage: Withstands up to 36 kV
- Use of epoxy resins – not hygroscopic - Primary Lightning impulse voltage:
- Conductor protected from corrosion Withstands up to 170 kV
- E2 class certified (tested for ambient - Secondary Voltage: Withstands up to 6 kV
90% humidity and 50°C) - Secondary Lightning impulse withstand
- C2 class certified (operation down to -25°C) voltage: Withstands up to 60 kV
- Minimum dust accumulation - Temperature Rise: 100/100°C

Partial discharge tests


- Routine test for partial discharge
- Below 5 pC

Vacuum Cast Coil Transformers: AL/AL Windings. Cenelec losses


Highest voltage for equipment 12 kV AC 28 kV LI 75 kV

Rated power Load loss at Load loss at No-load loss Short-circuit Sound power
120 ºC 75ºC at 100% Ur impedance level
kVA W W W % dB
50 1400 1230 350 4 58
100 2000 1760 440 4 59
160 2700 2380 610 4 62
250 3500 3080 820 4 65
315 4300 3780 1100 4 66
400 4900 4310 1150 4 68
500 6400 5630 1350 6 69
630 7600 6690 1370 6 70
800 9000 8010 1800 6 71
1000 10000 8900 2000 6 73
1250 12500 11130 2500 6 74
1600 14000 12460 2800 6 76
2000 18000 16200 3600 6 78
2500 21000 18900 4300 6 81

AC: Power frequency withstand voltage LI: Lightning impulse withstand voltage.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.

30 - Vacuum Cast Coil Transformers ABB Power Technology Products


Energy for leisure
Few applications place higher demands on transformers than those aboard large cruise liners. This is why
the liners Disney Wonder and Disney Magic use Vacuum Cast Coil transformers from ABB.

ABB Power Technology Products 31 - Vacuum Cast Coil Transformers


Vacuum Cast Coil Transformers: AL/AL Windings. Cenelec losses
Highest voltage for equipment 24 kV AC 50 kV LI 125 kV

Rated power Load loss at Load loss at No-load loss Short-circuit Sound power
120 ºC 75ºC at 100% Ur impedance level
kVA W W W % dB
50 1500 1320 350 6 58
100 2100 1850 500 6 59
160 2900 2550 750 6 62
250 3800 3340 880 6 65
315 4600 4050 1150 6 66
400 5500 4840 1200 6 68
500 7000 6160 1500 6 69
630 7800 6860 1650 6 70
800 9400 8370 2100 6 71
1000 11000 9790 2300 6 73
1250 13500 12020 2900 6 74
1600 16000 14240 3100 6 76
2000 19500 17550 4200 6 78
2500 23000 20700 5000 6 81

AC: Power frequency withstand voltage LI: Lightning impulse withstand voltage.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.

Vacuum Cast Coil Transformers: AL/AL Windings. Cenelec losses


Highest voltage for equipment 36 kV AC 70 kV LI 175 kV

Rated power Load loss at Load loss at No-load loss Short-circuit Sound power
120 ºC 75ºC at 100% Ur impedance level
kVA W W W % dB
160 2900 2550 960 6 66
250 4000 3520 1280 6 67
315 4800 4220 1500 6 68
400 5700 5020 1650 6 69
500 7100 6250 1950 6 70
630 8000 7040 2200 6 71
800 9700 8630 2800 6 72
1000 11500 10240 3100 7 73
1250 13800 12280 3700 7 74
1600 17000 15130 4200 8 76
2000 21000 18900 5000 8 78
2500 25000 22500 5800 8 81

AC: Power frequency withstand voltage LI: Lightning impulse withstand voltage.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.

32 - Vacuum Cast Coil Transformers ABB Power Technology Products


Good as gold
With reliable and environmentally safe transformers from ABB, a windy location in Denmark can become
a gold mine.

ABB Power Technology Products 33 - Vacuum Cast Coil Transformers


Vacuum Cast Coil Transformers: AL/AL Windings. Cenelec losses
Highest voltage for equipment 12 kV IP00

Rated power A B H B1 B2 E Ø G weight

kVA mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm kg
50 1020 800 1240 300 450 520 125 40 520
100 1100 800 1240 300 450 520 125 40 730
160 1270 800 1290 300 475 520 125 40 860
250 1280 850 1440 375 475 670 125 40 1230
315 1350 850 1480 375 495 670 125 40 1310
400 1440 850 1520 375 495 670 125 40 1660
500 1440 850 1630 375 525 670 125 40 1570
630 1550 900 1650 375 525 670 125 40 2060
800 1550 900 1880 375 575 670 125 40 2170
1000 1620 900 1900 375 575 670 125 40 2620
1250 1680 1000 2200 490 610 820 200 70 3100
1600 1840 1000 2250 490 610 820 200 70 4020
2000 1860 1000 2480 490 635 820 200 70 4630
2500 2050 1250 2500 615 635 1070 200 70 5500

AC: Power frequency withstand voltage LI: Lightning impulse withstand voltage.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.

Vacuum Cast Coil Transformers: AL/AL Windings. Cenelec losses


Highest voltage for equipment 24 kV IP00

Rated power A B H B1 B2 E Ø G weight

kVA mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm kg
50 1020 800 1300 300 450 520 125 40 540
100 1100 800 1300 300 450 520 125 40 750
160 1270 850 1350 300 475 520 125 40 970
250 1480 850 1500 375 475 670 125 40 1320
315 1550 850 1550 375 495 670 125 40 1440
400 1620 900 1560 375 495 670 125 40 1760
500 1620 900 1700 375 525 670 125 40 1800
630 1670 900 1730 375 525 670 125 40 2260
800 1680 900 1950 375 575 670 125 40 2450
1000 1770 900 1980 375 575 670 125 40 2910
1250 1800 1000 2270 490 610 820 200 70 3380
1600 1920 1000 2320 490 610 820 200 70 4240
2000 2000 1000 2550 490 635 820 200 70 4900
2500 2150 1250 2580 615 635 1070 200 70 5900

AC: Power frequency withstand voltage LI: Lightning impulse withstand voltage.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.

34 - Vacuum Cast Coil Transformers ABB Power Technology Products


Vacuum Cast Coil Transformers: AL/AL Windings. Cenelec losses
Highest voltage for equipment 36 kV IP00

Rated power A B H B1 B2 E Ø G weight

kVA mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm kg
160 1450 925 1450 300 625 520 125 40 1150
250 1550 1000 1600 375 625 670 125 40 1420
315 1600 1000 1650 375 625 670 125 40 1650
400 1800 1000 1700 375 625 670 125 40 2100
500 1800 1000 1800 375 675 670 125 40 2120
630 1850 1000 1850 375 675 670 125 40 2550
800 1920 1000 2050 375 725 670 125 40 3020
1000 1950 1050 2100 375 725 670 125 40 3250
1250 2000 1100 2400 490 760 820 200 70 3680
1600 2100 1150 2450 490 760 820 200 70 4480
2000 2200 1150 2600 490 785 820 200 70 5200
2500 2350 1300 2650 615 785 1070 200 70 6200

AC: Power frequency withstand voltage LI: Lightning impulse withstand voltage.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.

ABB Power Technology Products 35 - Vacuum Cast Coil Transformers


RESIBLOC® Resin-encapsulated Transformers (≤ 30 MVA )

Construction features
Description
The ABB resin-encapsulated dry-type trans-
former, RESIBLOC®, offers specific advantages.
For more than a quarter of a century we have
been using only epoxy resin and fibre-glass
to encapsulate the wire layers. Epoxy resin
moulding reinforced with fibre-glass rovings
is a material of outstanding strength. Further-
more we manufacture RESIBLOC® transformers
without the addition of extenders or plasticizers.
Electronically controlled winding processes
ensure uniform distribution of the glass rovings
and precise tracking.
The Low Voltage and High Voltage windings
are joined adhesively by way of bars to form
a compact block winding. The favourable
impulse voltage distribution – resulting from
the costly multilayering of the High Voltage
winding – in conjunction with the outstanding
strength of the coil makes RESIBLOC® resin- - Built-in cooling channels to dissipate heat
encapsulated transformers short-circuit proof. - Environmentally friendly
The fibre-glass reinforcement of the resin- - Linear distribution of lightning impulse
encapsulated RESIBLOC® windings is so robust voltage
that we have no hesitation in guaranteeing - Base equipped with bi-directional rollers or
the crack resistance of the High Voltage coil designed for skidding arrangement
for the entire life of the transformer.
We also guarantee that no silicone is used Options and accessories
at any time in RESIBLOC® coil manufacture. - Dimensions adaptable to specific require-
This is a further key point for those operators ments
who demand absolutely silicone free manu- - Loss optimised design
facture from their transformer suppliers. - Special designs as traction, rectifier and
converter transformer, multiwinding
Standard features transformers
- Ratings: from 30 kVA to 30 MVA - Enclosure IP20 to IP65, indoor and outdoor,
- Primary Voltages: up to 41.5 kV galvanized without painting
- Secondary Voltages: up to 36 kV - Fans for forced cooling (up to 140% of AN
- BIL: According to standards rating), including control
- HV Winding: Copper - Anti-vibration pads, (1 set=4 pieces)
- LV Winding: Aluminum - Earthing bolts (1 set=3 pieces)
- Step-lap mitred core - PTC sensors, with relay
- Tapping 2 x 2.5% - Dial type thermometer (with capillary
- Temperature device tube 2 m)
- Fire class F1 - Thermo-resistor PT100
- Environmental class E2 - Copper for LV windings
- Climatic class C2 - Reduced temperature rise on request

36 - RESIBLOC® Resin-encapsulated Transformers ABB Power Technology Products


Certified test results Moisture and pollution proof
- Safe to store and transport at -60°C (stan - 100% humidity and condensation proof
dard test requirement only -25°C) - Strong presence in off-shore applications
- Tested with twice rated current at -40°C - High resistance to chemical pollution
(standard test requirement only -25°C) - Long-term molecular stability due to absence
- Vibration tested for installation in seismic of flexibilisers
areas. Acceleration tested to 12.5 g
- All components tested for non-toxicity Crack proof
- Repeated thermal shock with hot air 120°C - Severe thermo-shock tested
and cold air -10°C (over 10 times) - Severe hot/cold dip tests
- Physical and mechanical properties of coil
Fire proof components optimised
- Approx. 80% fibreglass in winding insulation - High resistance to extremely low ambient
- Only non-toxic materials temperatures
- Max 5% calorific energy of comparable oil - Performance stability under extreme load
type unit conditions
- No halogens, nor sulphur - Not a single crack registered to date
(fluorine/chlorine/bromine)
- Every unit guaranteed to be self-extinguishing. Minimal dust accumulation
Fire class 1 certified - Vertical cooling channels with chimney effect
- Minimum dust settles
Short circuit proof - No horizontal ducts
- High mechanical stability of coil structure - Small upper coil surface
- Diagonally and radially fibreglass braced - Surface structure non-adhesive to dust
(HV-winding)
- Turns glued to each other with prepreg
(LV winding)
- HV and LV windings form a singular coil
- Coil structure will withstand radial forces in
short circuit conditions

ABB Power Technology Products 37 - RESIBLOC® Resin-encapsulated Transformers


RESIBLOC® Resin-encapsulated Transformer
Standard transformers 12 kV

Rated power Load loss at Load loss at No-load loss Short-circuit Sound power
120 ºC 75ºC at 100% Ur impedance level
kVA W W W % dB
100 2000 1700 440 4 59
160 2700 2300 610 4 62
250 3500 3000 820 4 65
315 4200 3650 950 4 67
400 4900 4300 1150 4 68
500 6300 5500 1300 4 69
630 7300 6400 1500 4 70
250 3900 3400 690 6 65
315 4700 4100 820 6 67
400 5730 5000 1000 6 68
500 6530 5700 1200 6 69
630 7600 6600 1370 6 70
800 8820 7700 1700 6 72
1000 10000 8800 2000 6 73
1250 12000 10500 2400 6 75
1600 14000 12700 2800 6 76
2000 18000 15500 3500 6 78
2500 21000 19000 4300 6 81

RESIBLOC® Resin-encapsulated Transformer


Standard transformers 24 kV

Rated power Load loss at Load loss at No-load loss Short-circuit Sound power
120 ºC 75ºC at 100% Ur impedance level
kVA W W W % dB
100 1750 1550 600 4 59
160 2500 2150 870 4 67
250 3450 3000 1100 4 65
400 4900 4250 1450 4 68
630 6900 6000 2000 4 70
100 2050 1750 460 6 59
160 2900 2500 650 6 62
250 3800 3300 880 6 65
315 4580 4000 1050 6 67
400 5500 4800 1200 6 68
500 6870 6000 1400 6 69
630 7800 6900 1650 6 70
800 9280 8100 1900 6 72
1000 11000 9600 2300 6 73
1250 13100 11500 2700 6 75
1500 16000 14000 3100 6 76
2000 19100 19000 4000 6 78
2500 23000 20000 5000 6 81

AC: Power frequency withstand voltage LI: Lightning impulse withstand voltage.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.

38 - RESIBLOC® Resin-encapsulated Transformers ABB Power Technology Products


RESIBLOC® Resin-encapsulated Transformer
Reduced no-load loss transforming 12 kV

Rated power Load loss at Load loss at No-load loss Short-circuit Sound power
120 ºC 75ºC at 100% Ur impedance level
kVA W W W % dB
100 2000 1700 320 4 51
160 2700 2300 440 4 54
250 3500 3000 600 4 57
315 4200 3650 730 4 59
400 4900 4300 880 4 60
500 6300 5500 1000 4 61
630 7300 6400 1150 4 62
250 3900 3400 540 6 57
315 4700 4100 640 6 59
400 5730 5000 780 6 60
500 6530 5700 940 6 61
630 7600 6600 1100 6 62
800 8820 7700 1330 6 64
1000 10000 8800 1500 6 65
1250 12000 10500 1880 6 67
1600 14000 12700 2100 6 68
2000 18000 15500 2750 6 70
2500 21000 19000 3000 6 71

RESIBLOC® Resin-encapsulated Transformer


Reduced no-load loss transforming 24 kV

Rated power Load loss at Load loss at No-load loss Short-circuit Sound power
120 ºC 75ºC at 100% Ur impedance level
kVA W W W % dB
100 1750 1550 400 4 51
160 2500 2150 580 4 54
250 3450 3000 800 4 57
400 4900 4250 1100 4 60
630 6900 6000 1600 4 62
100 2050 1750 340 6 51
160 2900 2500 480 6 54
250 3800 3300 650 6 65
315 4580 4000 820 6 59
400 5500 4800 940 6 60
500 6870 6000 1100 6 61
630 7800 6900 1250 6 62
800 9280 8100 1460 6 64
1000 11000 9600 1800 6 65
1250 13100 11500 2080 6 67
1600 16000 14000 2400 6 68
2000 19100 16700 3100 6 70
2500 23000 20000 3600 6 71

AC: Power frequency withstand voltage LI: Lightning impulse withstand voltage.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.

ABB Power Technology Products 39 - RESIBLOC® Resin-encapsulated Transformers


Offshore of course
About 200 RESIBLOC® transformers are installed on offshore platforms, ensuring that there is a contin-
uous flow of gas and oil. Among our supplies in 1999 was another 15 MVA unit for Statoil’s Veslefrik field.
Special Application Transformers
Customers demand a wide range of excellent products. These should be manufactured competi-
tively. Customers also expect accurate information and expert advice.
ABB supplies a complete range of distribution transformers from single phase, oil-filled or
dry, pole-mounted units through all standard units to meet all power requirements. But sometimes
situations arise in which even the widest range of transformers currently available cannot meet
the customer´s needs. In those cases we design and build customised transformers to fulfil the
customer´s requirements in every respect.
Due to our long experience, our deep and wide engineering skills and our close co-operation
with our customers we can find a practical solution to every problem. So it is little wonder that
ABB has the most advanced transformers in operation around the world – from the very smallest
to the largest and most sophisticated custom built units.

Transformers for Special Applications


Product

Pad Mounted
Transformers

Transformers for
Variable Speed Drives

Reactors

Boosterformers™

42 - Special Application Transformers ABB Power Technology Products


Pad Mounted Transformers

Construction features
Description
ABB padmounted transformers feature a tamper
resistant construction with no externally
accessible bolts, hinges, screws or fasteners,
thus providing a safe, self-contained unit which
cannot be accessed by unauthorised personnel.
Unsightly fences or other forms of protective
devices are not necessary. Completely factory
assembled, the units are shipped in one piece.
These units feature a rectangular core and
coil design which is a distinguishing character-
istic of ABB’s oil type transformers. This proven
design offers reliability, durability and reduced
dimensions. Nearly 40 years of service and
scrupulous testing confirm the consistency of
the design.

Standard features
1. Tamper resistant
2. Copper or aluminium windings b) Ground pad
3. Special core and coil design c) Provision for dial-type thermometer
4. 65°C average temperature rise d) Provision for vacuum-pressure gauge
5. Tap changer for deactivated operation e) Pressure relief valve
6. Four full capacity taps on winding rated f) Liquid level gauge
2.5% 2-FCAN - 2-FCBN on units with g) Diagrammatic stainless steel rating plate
voltage above 601 V 18. Different paint finishes available
7. Liquid preservation system with sealed tank 19. Base designed for rolling the unit in
8. Tank rated 5 psig for oil-filled units accordance with ANSI-IEC-DIN segment
9. Tank rated 8 psig for silicone filled units centre lines
10. Lifting lugs for moving complete units
11. Pressure relief valve Options and accessories
12. Two copper-faced steel ground pads on - Copper windings
tank - 55°C average winding temperature rise
13. Weather-resistant cabinet bolted to the - Dead front primary entrance
front of the transformer - Basic impulse level adjustable on request
14. HV/LV compartment barrier bolted in place - Dial-type thermometer
15. Three-point terminal compartment laching - Liquid level valve
16. HV compartment located on left side - Pressure vacuum gauge
of unit: - Radiator valves
a) Live front-cast resin bushings, or univer- - Sudden Pressure surge relay
sal bushing wells for dead front - CTs and PTs
b) Provision for distribution-class LAs - Special ambient conditions
c) Space for stress cones - Special altitudes
d) Interlocked door which can be opened - Non-standard HV taps
only after opening LV compartment door - Special impedance
17. LV compartment located on right side: - Special noise levels
a) Compartment door with provision for - Electrostatic shields
pad-lock - Special paint finishes

ABB Power Technology Products 43 - Pad Mounted Transformers


Transformers for Variable Speed Drives

● Input transformers for supply of drive systems


6-, 12- or 24-pulse supply for different
converters, e.g.
- load commutated inverters
- PWM inverters
- six step inverters
- cycloconverters (see opposite)
- cascade drives
- diode and thyristor rectifiers

● Output transformers
Transformers for voltage step-up from
converter to motor (see opposite).

● Transformers for converter starting


applications
Transformers are manufactured as oil-filled,
either mineral, silicone or MIDEL fluid, or as
dry type transformers. They can be manu-
Introduction factured with an output of up to approx.
With the increasing use and complexity of 30 MVA (primary power). A symmetrical
variable speed drives for different applications, impedance and the capacity to withstand
selecting the correct converter transformer has short circuiting are essential.
become of vital importance. Choosing the
correct converter transformers for different Input transformers
converters and drive systems means reduced Why add an input transformer?
downtime, extended equipment life, reduced
harmonic distortion and last, but not least, Voltage adaptation
energy saving. Converter drives are normally fed by medium
ABB offers you a wide range of converter voltage networks from 6 kV up to 36 kV. The
transformers. The transformers have been de- converter supply voltage usually ranges from
veloped in close co-operation with converter 400 V up to 4 kV. The input transformer
manufacturers and with the aim of achieving adapts the medium network voltage to the
the highest possible reliability and efficiency. converter supply voltage.

ABB offers converter transformers for your Galvanic isolation


every need: The input transformer isolates the converter
from the feeding network and reduces short
circuit currents to the converter.

EMC
A specifically designed shield between trans-
former windings reduces transferred radio
interference from the drive to the network.
The earthed shield also protects the drive
from transient over-voltages coming from the
feeding network.

44 - Transformers for Variable Speed Drives ABB Power Technology Products


Harmonics reduction Typical applications for output transformers
Network regulations require reduction of har- are when:
monic distortion. The transformer impedance - The motor does not have a standard voltage
acts as a commutating reactor and thus reduces converter (retrofit or by-pass application
harmonics. Different transformer connections required)
are used to achieve multi-pulse systems with - Distance from the converter to the drive is
substantial harmonic reduction. long and a high voltage motor is used to
reduce cabling costs, or where low voltage
Transformers for cycloconverter supply cabling would not be feasible due to losses
Cycloconverters are used for high power, low and voltage drop
speed synchronous motor drives such as: - Cost of a high voltage converter is too high
- Rolling mill drives compared with a low voltage converter and
- Ship propulsion (see below) an output transformer (low end rating of the
- Mine hoist drives converters)
- Wind tunnel drives etc. - Tappings are required to match the drive to
different motor voltages or different cable
The main parts of a cycloconverter drive are lengths
supply transformers, the cycloconverter, high
speed circuit breakers and the synchronous Output transformers are produced in oil type
motor. The following types of transformers and dry type configurations up to 6 MVA
are used: ratings for various types of converter and
- 2 winding transformers output voltages up to 15 kV. Transformers
- 3 winding transformers are individually designed and manufactured
- 4 winding transformers according to system requirements.

Output transformers for converters Ship propulsion systems


Converters are available for only a limited Electric propulsion for marine applications
range of standard motor voltages, the highest was initially used on holiday cruises for
being 4 kV. A specially designed transformer reasons of comfort (i.e. lower vibrations com-
can be used to transform the converter output pared to mechanical propulsion). Nowadays
voltage to match any motor rated voltage. it is also applied to cargo ships, icebreakers,
Normally the voltage is raised from the Low ferryboats etc. due to the installation and
Voltage converter to feed an HV motor. (Thus manoeuvring flexibility of motor groups and
the name “converter step-up transformer”, for space rationalisation as well as for the
which is also commonly used.) improvement in the system’s global perfor-
A standard transformer cannot be used due mance.
to variation in frequency, the harmonic distor- These transformers adapt the generated
tion and the DC component existing during voltage to the voltage of the static converters
transients in the output voltage of the frequency which control the motors. They are designed
converter. A special step-up transformer has to particular specifications to meet specific
therefore been developed for this application space problems (e.g. height limitations) and
in co-operation with converter manufacturers. the presence of high harmonic currents as
well as mechanical vibrations coming from
Typical applications the ship’s structure.
Most typical applications are for submersible
oil pump drives, rolling mill drives and similar
equipment where only HV motor applications
are available. Output transformers can also be
applied to reduce the voltage at the end of a
long transmission system to be more appro-
priate for a motor. The output step down
transformers in the latest applications are
submersible i.e. they are placed on the seabed
close to the motor.

ABB Power Technology Products 45 - Transformers for Variable Speed Drives


Converter transformer. Converter transformer. Converter transformer.

Converter transformer, 19400 kVA, 13.2 MVA, 4-windings, water cooled Converter transformer.
three-windings supply of LCI-drives. RESIBLOC® transformer for ship-
propulsion.

Ship propulsion transformer 6.6 kVA – 6.6-2.1 kVA-AFWF. Converter transformer.

46 - Transformers for Variable Speed Drives ABB Power Technology Products


Reactors

Duplex reactor for ship-propulsion.

Construction features
Introduction
Sıngle-phase and/or three-phase reactors are
characterised by a wide range of solutions
found in several High Voltage and/or Medium The commutation reactors are individually
Voltage installations for both oil-type and dry designed and manufactured according to
purposes. system requirements.

Reactors for cycloconverter drives Duplex reactors


Zero sequence reactors Duplex reactors are special commutation
Zero sequence reactors are used to limit zero reactors used in propulsion drives to achieve
sequence current on motors with galvanically distortion free voltage in the auxiliary circuits.
separated windings. The reactors are individu- The most efficient harmonic reduction is
ally designed and manufactured according to achieved when the duplex reactors are con-
system requirements. Therefore no standard nected to the generators, one to each generator.
types are listed. In this way the effect on harmonics does not
depend on the operation. The duplex reactors
Commutation reactors are individually designed and manufactured
Direct cycloconverters without supply trans- according to system requirements. Single-phase
formers (e.g. propulsion and other drives where and/or three-phase reactors are characterised
space and weight limitations are important) by a wide range of solutions found in several
are usually fitted with commutation reactors. high voltage and medium voltage installations
The reactors reduce the commutation currents for both oil and dry purposes.
and notches in the system voltage. The
commutation reactors are normally dry-type Fields of application
but can also be manufactured as oil immersed. - Cycloconverter drives
- Shunts
Two basic designs are used: - Current-limiting
1. Saturable gapped core reactors - Neutral-earthing current-limiting
- no short circuit current limitation is - Damping
needed - Tuning (filter)
2. Non-saturable type reactors - Earthing-transformer (neutral coupler)
- the reactor also works as a short circuit arc-suppression
limiting reactor - Smoothing

ABB Power Technology Products 47 - Reactors


Submarine converter transformer to Earthing transformer for limitation of
be used to supply power and oil short-circuit current to earthfault.
pumps. Can be placed at a depth of 24 MVA/10 s – Single Phase – 76 kV/
2000 meters below the sea level. 8 kV-60 H2. Extremely robust design
(both electrical and mechanical).

Reactor for reduction of harmonic Coreless, air-insulated, smoothing


currents and trancient over – currents reactor to comply with transformer
in DC Systems. Highly line are mag- in railway applications.
netic characteristics and withstand of
over-voltages caused by lighting and
switching.

48 - Reactors ABB Power Technology Products


Boosterformers™

Cable Boosterformer™
for electric railway system.

ABB Power Technology Products 49 - Boosterformers™


Production:
Cross Advertising, Sweden, January 2001
Printing:
Tryckproduktion, Sweden
Pictures:
ABB, Ron Stroud, Wilhelm Schmidt/Pressens Bild,
Bud Freund, Jean Louis Batt, Michael D. Bryan/Stock
International Magazine Service, Jörgen Ulvsgärd,
National Geographic, Greatshots

© 2000 All Rights Reserved.


Cross Advertising.

Business Area Distribution Transformers


P.O. Box 8131
CH - 8050 Zürich
Switzerland
Tel: +41 1 317 7111
www.abb.com
______________________________________________________________________ __________________

ANNEX 7: CABLE FEEDERS - MV & DC


POWER CABLES

Page 37 of 44
KBE Solar

KBE Solar TÜV


TÜV PV1-F

KBE Solar DB
Erdverlegbar / direct burial

KBE Solar HV 1500 V


TÜV PV1500DC-F

KBE Multinorm
TÜV PV1-F / UL 4703 (PV Wire)
QUALITÄT / QUALITY Made in Germany

Die KBE Elektrotechnik GmbH ist Hersteller von KBE Elektrotechnik GmbH is specialized in manufac-
Kabeln und Leitungen für die Solar-, Automobil- und turing electrical wires and cables for the photovoltaic,
Hausgeräteindustrie. automotive, and household appliance industry.

In unseren nach ISO TS 16949 zertifizierten Werken All our plants are certified according to ISO TS 16949.
produzieren wir rund 1,5 Mio km Leitungen und verar- We manufacture about 1.5 million km of wires and
beiten ca. 20000 t Kupfer pro Jahr. cables with 20000 tons of copper per year.

Das KBE Solarleitungsprogramm reicht von Standard- KBE’s solar product range covers standard cables,
leitungen, über erdverlegbare Leitungen bis hin zu PV-cables for direct burial, and voltages up to 1500 V.
Solarkabeln mit internationalen Zertifizierungen und Our cables are certified according to TÜV and interna-
Spannungen bis 1500 Volt. tional standards.

Diese speziell auf Anforderungen im Bereich PV- Our solar cables are suitable for installations in PV
Kraftwerke, Dachanlagen, Kabelkonfektion, Modulher- power plants, roof systems, wire harnesses, and panel
stellung und Großhandel angepassten Solarleitungen manufacturing while meeting the expectations of distri-
werden auf modernsten Anlagen kostenoptimiert her- butors. Our state-of-the-art production facilities guaran-
gestellt. tee a continuous cost optimization.

Unsere KBE Solarleitungen sind gemäß TÜV und UL KBE solar cables are TÜV certified and UL Listed. The
zertifiziert. Unsere vernetzten Spezialisolierungen special cross-linked insulations exceed the test requi-
übertreffen die gestellten Anforderungen und erzielen rements to ensure long service time and high operating
eine hohe Lebensdauer und Einsatzsicherheit. reliability.

KBE Solarleitungen sind in verschiedenen Außen- KBE solar cables are available in many different
durchmessern erhältlich und damit kompatibel zu allen outer diameters making them compatible with almost
gängigen Steckern und Anschlussdosen. Unsere kur- all connectors and junction boxes. Our capacity and
zen Lieferzeiten werden Sie überzeugen. Verschiedene short delivery time is outstanding while offering different
Verpackungsgrößen erfüllen Ihre individuellen Anforde- packaging sizes to meet your individual requirements.
rungen.
KBE Solar DB – Datenblatt / Technical Data Sheet
Stand: 31.05.2013

Leiter / • E-Cu verzinnt nach DIN EN 60228 • E-Cu tinned, DIN EN 60228
conductor Klasse 5 Class 5

Isolationsmaterial / • Vernetztes Polyolefin • Crosslinked Polyolefin


insulation material • 32 Shore D • 32 Shore D
• Halogenfrei • Halogen free
• Isolationswiderstand im Wasserbad bei • Long-term insulation resistance in
90°C > 3GΩ*m water at 90°C > 3GΩ*m

Mantelmaterial / • Vernetztes Spezial-Polyolefin • Crosslinked Special-Polyolefin


jacket material • 36 Shore D • 36 Shore D
• Halogenfrei • Halogen free
• Witterungs- und UV-beständig • Weathering and UV-resistent
• Ozonbeständig • Ozone resistant

Temperaturbereich / • -40°C bis +90°C • -40°C to +90°C


temperature range • max. Leitertemperatur: 120°C • max. conductor temperature: 120°C

Bemessungsspannung / • U0/U = 600/1000 VAC • U0/U = 600/1000 VAC


voltage rating • max. 1800 VDC (Leiter/Leiter, • max. 1800 VDC (conductor-conductor,
nicht geerdetes System, non earthed system,
unbelasteter Stromkreis) circuit not under load)

Erdverlegbarkeit / • KBE-interne Prüfung gemäß UL 854 • KBE-internal test according to UL 854


direct burial • (Impact-Resistance Test und Crushing- • (Impact-Resistance Test
Resistance Test) and Crushing-Resistance test)
• Installationshinweise • Installation instructions
DIN VDE 50174-1; § 5.2.4 und DIN VDE 50174-1; § 5.2.4 and
DIN VDE 0891 Teil 6, § 4.2 DIN VDE 0891 Teil 6, § 4.2

Flammwidrigkeit / • Gemäß DIN EN 60332-1-2 • Acc. to DIN EN 60332-1-2


flame resistance

Farben / colours • Schwarz, Rot, Blau • black, red, blue

Richtlinien & Zertifikate / • TÜV 2 PfG 1169/08.07, R60085683 • TÜV 2 PfG 1169/08.07, R60085683
guidelines & certificates • RoHS 2002/95/EC • RoHS 2002/95/EC

Bedruckung / printing: KBE SOLAR DB PV1-F x,xxmm²

min. Wand- min. Wand-


Querschnitt / Leiteraufbau / stärke Isola- stärke
Widerstand / Außen Ø / Gewicht /
cross conductor tion / Mantel / KBE
resistance outer Ø weight
section design min. insulation min. jacket Artikelnummer /
thickness thickness item no.
n x max-
[mm2] Rmax. [mΩ/m] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg/km]
Ø [mm]
4,0 56 x 0,310 5,09 0,50 0,50 5,70 60,0 730400015020QU

6,0 80 x 0,310 3,39 0,50 0,50 6,40 80,0 730600015020QU

10,0 80 x 0,410 1,95 0,50 0,50 7,30 120,0 731000015020QU


______________________________________________________________________ __________________

ANNEX 8: EARTHING
(GROUNDING) SYSTEM

1. BAHRA CABLES
2. WALLIS

Page 38 of 44
EARTHING & LIGHTNING
EARTHING & LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM

2 EARTHING
6 EARTH ELECTRODES
11 INSPECTION PITS
12 EARTH ROD ALTERNATIVES - PL ATE & L ATTICE
13 BACKFILLL COMPOUNDS
14 ACCESSORIES
RODS & REBAR CL AMPS -
PIPE CL AMPS -
EAARTH POINTS -
BON
ONDDSS -
20 EARTH BARS

25 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
29 CONDUCTORS
BARE COPPER & ALUMINIUM TAPES -
PVC, LEAD & TIN PL ATED TAPES -
WIRES & CABLES -
39 AIR RODS & ACCESSORIES

45 BAHRAWELD
48 T YPES OF CONNECTIONS

EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
GENERAL INTRODUCTION

7 4
2
3

12

13
13

10 12

10

11

10

1 6 10
1
Multiple Point Bonds Earth Electrodes

2 7 11
Air Terminal Conductor Jointing Earth Lattice Copper
Clamps
3 8 12
Air Rod Base Test Clamps Earth Plate Solid Copper

4 9 13
Square Tape/Conductor Earth Inspection Pit DC Tape Clip
Clamp
5
Copper Tapes/Conductors

2
EARTHING
GENERAL INTRODUCTION

An earthing system is a need in any electrical system to protect from the adverse effects of
lightning, Leakage currents, insulation failures, short circuiting and other faults. A reliable
earthing system with short, direct and low resistive path ensures protecting people, equipment,
structure and environment by dissipating fault currents that are of high magnitude and impulsive
rise times.
Earthing systems are designed as per the requirement of electrical systems and applications,
though the principle remains the same, conductors, devices, type of connections varies for
different applications such as power stations, overhead transmission systems, consumer power
networks.

3 EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
GENERAL INTRODUCTION

An efficient earthing system protects from


‡ ,QMXULHVDQGIDWDOLWLHVWRSHRSOH
‡ 'DPDJHVWRWKHVWUXFWXUHDQGHQYLURQPHQW
‡ )DLOXUHVLQWKHSRZHUV\VWHP
‡ ,QWHUIHUHQFHVDQGQRLVHVLQHOHFWURQLFV\VWHPV
‡ 6KXWGRZQVDQGORQJGRZQWLPHVHWF

4
EARTHING
GENERAL INTRODUCTION

Definitions
‡(DUWK
Earth is an equipotential conductive mass, conventionally assumed that its potential is Zero
(Negligible).

‡(DUWKLQJ
Earthing or Grounding is connecting an electrical network, equipment or structure to earth
incidentally or intentionally, directly or through a conducting medium.

‡&RQGXFWRUV
An electrical conductor is a medium in which electrical charge flows, usually electrons when
there is a potential difference.

‡/HDNDJHFXUUHQW
Current that could flow from any conductive part or the surface of non-conductive parts to
ground if a conductive path is available.

‡6KRUW&LUFXLW
A short circuit is simply a low resistance connection between the two conductors supplying
electrical power to any circuit, this results in excessive current flow in the power source through
the ‘short,’ and may even cause the power source to be destroyed.

‡,PSHGDQFH
The effective resistance of an electric circuit or component to alternating current, arising
from the combined effects of ohmic resistance and reactance. Resistivity of soil, reactance of
conductor and connection forms the impedance of an earthing network.

.H\)DFWRUVGULYLQJWKHHIILFLHQF\
The effectiveness of the earthing system relies on various factors including but not limited to
6RLOUHVLVWLYLW\W\SHDQGVKDSHRIFRQGXFWRUVW\SHRIHOHFWURGHVDQGHIILFLHQF\RIFRQQHFWLRQV
The system design and selection of components are essential in achieving the shortest, direct
and low impedance path to dissipate the energy to the ground.

2XU6ROXWLRQ
%DKUD(DUWKLQJ6\VWHPVRIIHUVDFRPSUHKHQVLYHVROXWLRQZLWKGHVLJQWHFKQLFDOVXSSRUWDWWKH
VLWHIRU6RLO5HVLVWLYLW\WHVWLQJDQGVHOHFWLRQRIFRPSRQHQWVWKDWVXLWVIRUWKHDSSOLFDWLRQV7KH
earthing components are designed and engineered to withstand harsh environmental conditions
DQG IDXOW FRQGLWLRQV LQ WKH HOHFWULFDO QHWZRUNV DQG DUH WHVWHG WR WKH VWULQJHQW %6 ,(& DQG 8/
standards.

5 EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
EARTH ELECTRODES

&RSSHUERQGHGHDUWKURGV
7KUHDGHGURGV
,W LV LPSRUWDQW WKDW WKH HDUWK HOHFWURGH VKRXOG EH FRUURVLRQ UHVLVWDQW DQG OHVV UHDFWLYH WR WKH
conductors used ensuring longer life and low maintenance. Bahra Threaded Copper bonded
earth rods are made by molecularly bonding 99.9% pure electrolytic copper on a high tensile
steel rod.

The copper bonded rod features high tensile strength comparing to solid copper earth rods
and can be deep driven to the ground with less wear to the rods. Even at severe conditions
the bonded copper does not crack or tear, the adhesion of copper is ensured by a thin layer of
nickel beneath the copper.

The threads are formed by a cold rolling process which ensures strength and eliminating the
risk of chipping of threads while driving the rod deep into the ground. Threading is done after
the copper coating as per the standard requirements, and this also ensures thread diameter of
the rods to match couplers and other accessories. Cold Rolled threads are better than the cut
threads as stress is evenly distributed in the cold rolled threading process.

EARTHING SYSTEMS
6
EARTHING
EARTH ELECTRODES

$OO%DKUDFRSSHUERQGHGURGVDUHFRDWHGZLWKDPLQLPXPWKLFNQHVVRIPLOVRUPLFURQV
DVSHUWKH8/VWDQGDUGV PLO LQFKPLFURQV 

Partt N
P No LLength
th Th
Thread
d Di
Diameter
t
RT001 1200 mm 1/2”
RT002 1500 mm 1/2”
RT003 1800 mm 1/2”
RT004 2400 mm 1/2”
RT005 3000 mm 1/2”
RT011 1200 mm 5/8”
RT012 1500 mm 5/8”
RT013 1800 mm 5/8”
RT014 2400 mm 5/8”
RT015 3000 mm 5/8”
RT021 1200 mm 3/4”
RT022 1500 mm 3/4”
RT023 1800 mm 3/4”
RT024 2400 mm 3/4”
RT025 3000 mm 3/4”

&RPSOLHV%6(18/

$FFHVVRULHV
&RXSOHUV
Earth Rod Couplers are designed for coupling two or more threaded
copper bonded earth rods or to couple with a driving stud during
installation. They ensure continual contact between the rods and are
used to aid deep rod driving.

'ULYLQJVWXG
Part no. Type
WHQVLOH VWHHO DUH GHVLJQHG
(DUWK5RG'ULYLQJVWXGVPDGHIURPKLJKWHQVLOHVWHHODUHGHVLJQHG
CT12 1/2” Coupling for driving earth rods by hand tools or power hammer. These
CT58 5/8 ” Coupling reusable studs are fixed on the top of the rod with the help of
CT34 3/4 ” Coupling coupler.

DT12 1/2” Driving Stud


DT58 5/8 ” Driving Stud &RPSOLHV%6(1
DT34 3/4 ” Driving Stud &RPSOLHV8/

 EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
EARTH ELECTRODES

8QWKUHDGHGURGV
Bahra unthreaded copper bonded earth rods are customised rods without threading for specific
applications.

Part No Diameter Length


RT001 12.7 mm 1200 mm
RT002 12.7 mm 1500 mm
RT003 12.7 mm 1800 mm
RT004 12.7 mm 2400 mm
RT005 14.2 mm 3000 mm
RT011 14.2 mm 1200 mm
RT012 14.2 mm 1500 mm
RT013 14.2 mm 1800 mm
RT014 14.2 mm 2400 mm
RT015 14.2 mm 3000 mm
RT021 14.2 mm 1200 mm
RT022 17.2 mm 1500 mm
RT023 17.2 mm 1800 mm
RT024 17.2 mm 2400 mm
RT025 17.2 mm 3000 mm

&RPSOLHV%6(1
&RPSOLHV8/

$FFHVVRULHV

Part no. Type


CU12 12.7 mm Coupling
CU58 14.2 mm Coupling
CU34 17.2 mm Coupling
DU12 12.7 mm Driving Head
DU58 14.2 mm Driving Head
DU34 17.2 mm Driving Head

EARTHING SYSTEMS
8
EARTHING
EARTH ELECTRODES

6ROLG&RSSHUDQG6WDLQOHVVVWHHOHDUWKURGV

6ROLGFRSSHUURG
%DKUD6ROLGFRSSHUURGVDUHKLJKO\FRQGXFWLYHKDUGGUDZQIURPSXUHFRSSHU
cathodes. They are ideally used in conditions where soils are with high salt and moisture
content.

Tin plating is also done to reduce the risk of oxidation and to increase the life of the
rod. Physical connection to the rod can be done by mechanical clamps, compression or
BahraWeld exothermic welding system.

Part No. Diameter Length


RT121 15 mm 1200 mm
RT122 15 mm 1500 mm
RT125 15 mm 3000 mm
RT171 20 mm 1200 mm
RT172 20 mm 1500 mm
RT175 20 mm 3000 mm

6ROLGFRSSHUURGNLW

Part No. Diameter Length


RT124K 15 mm 2440 mm (8 ft)
RT174K 20 mm 2440 mm (8 ft)

9 EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
EARTH ELECTRODES

6WDLQOHVVVWHHOURG
6WDLQOHVVVWHHOURGVDUHXVHGWRRYHUFRPHJDOYDQLFFRUURVLRQZKLFKFDQEHFDXVHGE\
GLVVLPLODUPHWDOVRUFRPSRQHQWVKDYLQJGLIIHUHQWHOHFWURQHJDWLYLW\EXULHGRQDGMDFHQW
sides.

Bahra recommends stainless steel rods with high resistance to corrosion and anodic to
solid copper rods which likely react hostile with the buried metals.

Part No. Diameter Length


RT211 16 mm 1200 mm
RT212 16 mm 1500 mm
RT215 16 mm 3000 mm
RT222 20 mm 1500 mm
RT225 20 mm 3000 mm

6WDLQOHVV6WHHOURGNLW

Part No. Diameter Length


RT214K 16 mm 2400 mm (8 ft)

$FFHVVRULHV

'ULYLQJVWXG
5HXVDEOH+LJKWHQVLOHVWUHQJWK&RPPRQIRUFRSSHU66URGV

&RXSOLQJGRZHO
%UDVV2SWLRQDOSKRVSKRUEURQ]H6WHHO

6WHHOVSLNH
0DGHIURP+LJK7HQVLOHVWUHQJWKVWHHO&RPPRQIRUFRSSHU66URGV

Part No. Type


DT-58 15 mm hardened steel driving stud
DT-34 20 mm hardened steel driving stud
CD-01 Coupling dowel for 15 mm and 20 mm copper rod
CD-02 Coupling dowel for 16 mm and 20 mm stainless steel rod
SP-01 15 mm hardened steel spike
SP-02 20 mm hardened steel spike

&RPSOLHV%6(1
&RPSOLHV8/

EARTHING SYSTEMS

EARTHING
INSPECTION PITS

,QVSHFWLRQ3LW

3RO\PHULQVSHFWLRQSLW
Polymer inspection pits are highly recommended for areas
where higher loads are standard, with a load rating up
WR  NJ SRO\PHU OLGV DUH UHFRPPHQGHG DQG IRU ORDG
UDWLQJVXSWRNJWKHVHSRO\PHUSLWVFDQEHXVHGZLWK
concrete lids.

Part No Description Weight per Unit


PTP01 polymer inspection pit with grey polymer lid 1.80 Kg
PTP02 polymer inspection pit with black polymer lid 1.80 Kg
PTP03 polymer inspection pit with a concrete lid 7.50 Kg
EB05 5 hole earth bar 0.40 Kg

&RPSOLHV%6(1 ,(&

&RQFUHWHLQVSHFWLRQSLW
%DKUD FRQFUHWH HDUWK LQVSHFWLRQ SLWV DUH WHVWHG DV SHU ,(&
 ZLWKVWDQGLQJ  NJ ORDG WHVWV 6WDLQOHVV 6WHHO
 KRRNV E\ GHIDXOW LQ DOO WKH FRQFUHWH LQVSHFWLRQ SLWV
ensure less corrosion, durability and low maintenance.

Part No Description Weight per Unit


PTC01 Concrete inspection pit 32 Kg

&RPSOLHV%6(1 ,(&

$FFHVVRULHV

Part No Description Weight per Unit


EB05 5 holes earth bar 0.40 Kg
EB07 7 holes earth bar 0.58 Kg

&RPSOLHV%6(1 ,(&

 EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
EARTH ROD ALTERNATIVES

(DUWKURGDOWHUQDWLYHV

6ROLGFRSSHUHDUWKSODWH
6ROLG &RSSHU (DUWK SODWHV IXOILO WKH HDUWKLQJ UHTXLUHPHQWV
where driving earth rods are not ideal due to hard rocks or
high resistive soils.

Part No Size Total Surface Area Weight per Unit


RAP15600 600 x 600 x 1.5 mm 0.72 m2 5.00 Kg
RAP15900 900 x 900 x 1.5 mm 1.63 m2 11.21 Kg
RAP03600 600 x 600 x 3 mm 0.73 m2 9.74 Kg
RAP03900 900 x 900 x 3 mm 1.63 m2 21.74 Kg

&RSSHUHDUWKODWWLFH0HVK0DW
&RSSHU HDUWK ODWWLFH0HVK0DW DUH PDQXIDFWXUHG IURP
KLJK FRQGXFWLYLW\ FRSSHU WDSHV DV SHU ,(&  LW LV
UHFRPPHQGHGLQDUHDVZKHUHVWHS WRXFKSRWHQWLDOKD]DUGV
are high.

Part No Size Total Surface Area Weight per Unit


RAL6006003 600 x 600 x 3 mm 0.31 m2 3.98 Kg
RAL9009003 900 x 900 x 3 mm 0.65 m2 7.20 Kg

EARTHING SYSTEMS

EARTHING
BACKFILL COMPOUNDS

%DFNILOOFRPSRXQGV

%DKUD&(0²&RQGXFWDQFH(QKDQFHPHQW0L[
)RU HDUWKLQJ V\VWHPV WR EH HIIHFWLYH LW LV LPSRUWDQW WKDW
the electrical path for dissipation is with lower resistance.
BahraCEM is a backfilling compound that enhances the
conductance by actually increasing the surface area of the
earth rods, also comes with optionally premixed cement for
making long lasting, low maintenance conductive concretes.

Part No Description Weight per Unit


BCEM-01 BCEM 25 Kg
BCEM-02 BCEM (supplied with cement) 25 Kg

%DKUDEHQWRQLWHPRLVWXUHUHWDLQLQJFOD\
Bentonite is a natural mineral mined from the earth, and
it is an economical backfill compound for earth rods. The
property of bentonite to absorb water more than ten times
of its volume and to retain it for a longer time helps in
maintaining lower soil resistivity. Bahra bentonites are first-
grade bentonites developed for earthing applications.

Part No Description Weight per Unit


BENTP Bentonite Powder 22.5 Kg / 50 Lbs

 EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
ACCESSORIES

Accessories

All earthing accessories or mechanical connection components are made from a special
FRSSHU DOOR\ WKDW IHDWXUHV KLJK PHFKDQLFDO VWUHQJWK DQG KLJK FRQGXFWLYLW\ )RU VRPH
parts considering their applications, forging process is used to increase the mechanical
VWUHQJWKDVVXULQJH[WUDKHDY\GXW\SHUIRUPDQFH)DVWHQHUVXVHGLQDOOWKHILWWLQJVDUH
RQO\ PDGH IURP VROLG FRSSHU DOOR\V 6SHFLDO *UDGH %UDVV  3KRVSKRU %URQ]H  SXUH
FRSSHU DQGDUHQRWPDGHIURPFRPPHUFLDOFRSSHUEUDVVSODWHGVWHHO

%6 (1  ,(&   8/  DUH WKH SULPDU\ VWDQGDUGV FRUUHVSRQGLQJ WR
accessories, and test reports can be provided on special request.

Rods and rebar clamps:

5RGWRWDSHFODPS W\SH$ 

Part No Rod diameter Max. conductor


CRTA01 1⁄2” 12.7 mm 26 x 12 mm
CRTA01 5⁄8” 16 mm 26 x 12 mm
CRTA01 3⁄4” 20 mm 26 x 10 mm
CRTA02 5⁄8” 16 mm 30 x 2 mm
CRTA02 3⁄4” 20 mm 30 x 2 mm
CRTA03 5⁄8” 16 mm 40 x 12 mm
CRTA04 5⁄8” 16 mm 51 x 8 mm
CRTA05 3⁄4” 20 mm 51 x 12 mm
CRTA06 1⁄2” 12.7 mm 26 x 20 mm
CRTA06 5⁄8” 16 mm 26 x 18 mm
CRTA06 3⁄4” 20 mm 26 x 10 mm
CRTA06 1” 25 mm 26 x 10 mm

5RGWRWDSHFODPS W\SH* 

Part No Rod diameter Max. conductor


CRTG01 3⁄8” 9.5 mm 6-35 mm2
CRTG02 1⁄2” 12.5 mm 16-50 mm2
CRTG03 5⁄8” 16 mm 5.2-33.6 mm2
CRTG04 5⁄8” 16 mm 16-70 mm2
CRTG05 3⁄4” 20 mm 5.2-33.6 mm2
CRTG06 3⁄4” 20 mm 35-95 mm2
CRTG07 1” 25 mm 70-150 mm2
%6(1,(&

EARTHING SYSTEMS

EARTHING
ACCESSORIES

´8µEROWURGFODPS W\SH( 

Part No Rod / rebar diameter Hole centres


CRTE01 5⁄8” 16 mm 37 mm
CRTE02 3⁄4” 20 mm 37 mm
CRTE03 1” 25 mm 37 mm
CRTE04 5⁄8” 16 mm 37 mm
CRTE05 11⁄2” 38 mm 54 mm
CRTE06 2” 50 mm 64 mm

´8µEROWURGFODPS W\SH*89 

Conductor
Part No Rod / rebar diameter
range
CRCU01 5⁄8” 16 mm 16-95 mm2
CRCU01 3⁄4” 20 mm 16-70 mm2
CRCU02 5⁄8” 16 mm 70-185 mm2
CRCU02 3⁄4” 20 mm 70-150 mm2
CRCU03 5⁄8” 16 mm 150-300 mm2
CRCU03 3⁄4” 20 mm 150-300 mm2
CRCU04 1” 25 mm 16-70 mm2
CRCU05 1” 25 mm 70-150 mm2
CRCU06 1” 25 mm 150-300 mm2

5RGWRFDEOHOXJFODPS W\SH% 

Part No Rod diameter Rod type Bold size


CRCB01 3⁄8” 9.5 mm Copper bond M8
CRCB02 5⁄8” 16 mm Copper bond M10
CRCB03 5⁄8” 15 mm Solid copper M10
CRCB04 3⁄4” 20 mm Copper bond M10
CRCB05 3⁄4” 20 mm Solid copper M10

5HEDUFODPS
Conductor Conductor
Part No Rebar diamater
diameter material
CRCR01 8 mm 8-18 mm Copper
CRCR02 8 mm 18-38 mm Copper

 EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
ACCESSORIES

Tower Earth Clamp:


Tower earth clamps are served as a bond to copper cable or wire or
steel structure.
Channel Conductor
Part No Conductor range Bolt size
thickness material
CTE01 16-70 mm2 10 mm M10 Copper
CTE02 70-120 mm2 10 mm M12 Copper
CTE03 25-50 mm2 10 mm M10 Copper
CTE04 25-50 mm2 10 mm M10 Aluminium
CTE05 120-185 mm2 10 mm M12 Copper
CTE06 185-240 mm2 10 mm M12 Copper

Pipe Clamp :
Pipe clamps are used over metal pipes to connect to earthing
conductors.
Part No Pipe diameter Conductor range
CPC1325 1⁄2” – 1” 13-25 mm 25-95 mm2
CPC3250 11⁄4 ”– 2” 32-50 mm 25-95 mm2
CPC6590 21⁄2 ”– 31⁄2 ” 65-90 mm 25-95 mm2
CPC100125 4” - 2” 100-125 mm 25-95 mm2
CPC150 6” 150 mm 25-95 mm2
CPC200 8” 200 mm 25-95 mm2
CPC250 10” 250 mm 25-95 mm2
CPC300 12” 300 mm 25-95 mm2

Earth Points :
Earth points are used when a steel rebar needs to be grounded or connected to the
GRZQFRQGXFWRU7KH\DUHXVHGZLWK8EROWFODPSVWKDWDUHFRQQHFWHGWRWKHUHEDUZLWK
a conductor. Another end of the conductor is exothermically welded to an earth point
which is connected to a tape or down conductor.

Earth points are also available with standard, and customised pre-welded tails (Bahra
Green Yellow PVC earthing cable).
6LQJOH+ROH(DUWK3RLQW

Part No Hole size Length


EP1N08 M8 x 15 mm 80 mm
EP1N10 M10 x 15 mm 80 mm
EP1N12 M12 x 15 mm 80 mm
EP1N16 M16 x 15 mm 80 mm

EARTHING SYSTEMS

EARTHING
ACCESSORIES

6LQJOHKROHHDUWKSRLQWZLWKVLQJOHSUHZHOGHGWDLO

Part No Description
EP1T08 EP1N08 earth point with pre-welded 500mm earth cable
EP1T10 EP1N10 earth point with pre-welded 500mm earth cable
EP1T12 EP1N12 earth point with pre-welded 500mm earth cable
EP1T16 EP1N16 earth point with pre-welded 500mm earth cable

Two Hole Earth Point

Part No Hole size Length


EP2N01 M8 x 12 mm 80 mm
for connection of 25 mm x 3 mm copper tape or 70 mm2
stranded copper cable.
EP2N02 M12 x 15 mm 80 mm
for connection of 25 mm x 3 mm copper tape or 8 mm2
diameter solid circular copper.

Two Hole Earth PointZLWK6LQJOH3UH:HOGHG7DLO

Part No Description
EP2T01 EP2N01 earth point with pre-welded 500mm earth cable
EP2T02 EP2N02 earth point with pre-welded 500mm earth cable

Two Hole Earth PointZLWK'RXEOH3UH:HOGHG7DLO

Part No Description
EP22T01 EP2T01 earth point with pre-welded 2x500mm earth cable
EP22T02 EP2T01 earth point with pre-welded 2x500mm earth cable

 EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
ACCESSORIES

)RXU+ROH(DUWK3RLQW

Part No Hole size Length


EP4U01 M8 x 14 mm 75 mm

)RXU+ROH(DUWK3RLQWZLWK6LQJOH3UH:HOGHG7DLO

Part No Description
EP4T01 EP4T01 earth point with pre-welded 500mm earth cable

)RXU+ROH(DUWK3RLQWZLWK'RXEOH3UH:HOGHG7DLO

Part No Description
EP42T01 EP4T01 earth point with pre-welded 2x500mm earth cable

7\SH++LJK6WUHQJWK6SOLWEROW&RQQHFWRU

Dimen- Weight per


Part No Conductor range
sion unit
Min Max
Min Max Min Max
CSB01 4 mm2 10 mm2 2.5 mm2 10 mm2 4.1 mm 0.02 Kg
CSB02 10 mm2 16 mm2 2.5 mm2 16 mm2 5.5 mm 0.03 Kg
CSB03 16 mm2 25 mm2 4 mm2 25 mm2 6.9 mm 0.04 Kg
CSB04 25 mm2 35 mm2 4 mm2 35 mm2 8.4 mm 0.06 Kg
CSB05 35 mm2 50 mm2 4 mm2 50 mm2 9.7 mm 0.09 Kg
CSB06 35 mm2 70 mm2 4 mm2 70 mm2 11.2 mm 0.14 Kg
CSB07 50 mm2 95 mm2 4 mm2 95 mm2 13.6 mm 0.17 Kg
CSB08 50 mm2 120 mm2 6 mm2 120 mm2 14.7 mm 0.18 Kg
CSB09 95 mm2 185 mm2 6 mm2 185 mm2 18.2 mm 0.35 Kg

EARTHING SYSTEMS

EARTHING
ACCESSORIES

Bonds:

B bond:
A bonding tool to connect tape to steel structure.
Maximum Tape
Part No Bolt size Conductor material
width
CBB01 26 mm M10 Copper
CBB02 26 mm M10 Aluminium
CBB03 31 mm M10 Copper

Metalwork bond:
%RQGVVWHHOVWUXFWXUHVXSWRPP
Maximum Tape
Part No Bolt size Conductor material
width
CMB01 26 mm M10 Copper
CMB02 26 mm M10 Aluminium
CMB03 31 mm M10 Copper

RWP bond :
A bonding tool to bond tape to rainwater pipes, handrails, etc.
Maximum tape
Part No Bolt size Conductor material
width
CRB01 26 mm M10 Copper
CRB02 26 mm M10 Aluminium

Watermain bond:
A bonding tool to bond tape to rainwater pipes, handrails, etc.
Maximum tape
Part No Conductor material Weight per unit
width
CWB01 26 mm Copper 0.26 Kg

Pipe Bond :
A bonding tool to bond duct and large diameter pipes.
Conductor Weight per
Part No Conductor diameter Pipe diameter
material unit
CWP01 8 mm 50-200 mm Copper 0.46 Kg
CWP02 8 mm 50-200 mm Aluminium 0.25 Kg

 EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
EARTH BARS

Earth Bar:
Earth bar with single disconnecting link:
Copper Earth Bar:
Part No Description Length Weight per unit
EBCS06 6 way 475 mm 2.30 Kg
EBCS08 8 way 575 mm 2.70 Kg
EBCS10 10 way 725 mm 3.30 Kg
EBCS12 12 way 825 mm 3.70 Kg
EBCS14 14 way 925 mm 4.10 Kg
EBCS16 16 way 1025 mm 4.50 Kg
EBCS18 18 way 1125 mm 4.90 Kg
EBCS20 20 way 1275 mm 5.50 Kg
EBCS22 22 way 1375 mm 5.90 Kg
EBCS24 24 way 1475 mm 6.30 Kg
EBCS26 26 way 1575 mm 6.70 Kg
EBCS28 28 way 1725 mm 7.40 Kg
EBCS30 30 way 1825 mm 7.80 Kg

Tinned copper earth bar:

Part No Description Length Weight per unit


EBTS06 6 way 475 mm 2.30 Kg
EBTS08 8 way 575 mm 2.70 Kg
EBTS10 10 way 725 mm 3.30 Kg
EBTS12 12 way 825 mm 3.70 Kg
EBTS14 14 way 925 mm 4.10 Kg
EBTS16 16 way 1025 mm 4.50 Kg
EBTS18 18 way 1125 mm 4.90 Kg
EBTS20 20 way 1275 mm 5.50 Kg
EBTS22 22 way 1375 mm 5.90 Kg
EBTS24 24 way 1475 mm 6.30 Kg
EBTS26 26 way 1575 mm 6.70 Kg
EBTS28 28 way 1725 mm 7.40 Kg
EBTS30 30 way 1825 mm 7.80 Kg
6WDQGDUGZLGWK[KHLJKWPP[PP

EARTHING SYSTEMS

EARTHING
EARTH BARS

(DUWK%DU:LWK7ZLQ'LVFRQQHFWLQJ/LQN
Copper Earth Bar

Part No Description Length Weight per unit


EBCT06 6 way 550 mm 2.80 Kg
EBCT08 8 way 650 mm 3.20 Kg
EBCT10 10 way 800 mm 3.80 Kg
EBCT12 12 way 900 mm 4.20 Kg
EBCT14 14 way 1000 mm 4.60 Kg
EBCT16 16 way 1100 mm 5.00 Kg
EBCT18 18 way 1200 mm 5.40 Kg
EBCT20 20 way 1350 mm 6.00 Kg
EBCT22 22 way 1450 mm 6.40 Kg
EBCT24 24 way 1550 mm 6.80 Kg
EBCT26 26 way 1650 mm 7.20 Kg
EBCT28 28 way 1800 mm 7.90 Kg
EBCT30 30 way 1900 mm 8.30 Kg

Tinned Copper Earth Bar

Part No Description Length Weight per unit


EBTT06 6 way 550 mm 2.80 Kg
EBTT08 8 way 650 mm 3.20 Kg
EBTT10 10 way 800 mm 3.80 Kg
EBTT12 12 way 900 mm 4.20 Kg
EBTT14 14 way 1000 mm 4.60 Kg
EBTT16 16 way 1100 mm 5.00 Kg
EBTT18 18 way 1200 mm 5.40 Kg
EBTT20 20 way 1350 mm 6.00 Kg
EBTT22 22 way 1450 mm 6.40 Kg
EBTT24 24 way 1550 mm 6.80 Kg
EBTT26 26 way 1650 mm 7.20 Kg
EBTT28 28 way 1800 mm 7.90 Kg
EBTT30 30 way 1900 mm 8.30 Kg
6WDQGDUGZLGWK[KHLJKWPP[PP

 EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
EARTH BARS

Earth Bar Accessories :


Copper Earth Bar

Part No Description Length Width Height Weight per unit


EBCAS Swan-neck link 400 mm 50 mm 36 mm 0.42 Kg
EBCAD Disconnecting 125 mm 90 mm 90 mm 0.59 Kg
Link

Tinned Copper Earth Bar

Part No Description Length Width Height Weight per unit


EBTAS Swan-neck link 400 mm 50 mm 36 mm 0.42 Kg
EBTAD Disconnecting 125 mm 90 mm 90 mm 0.59 Kg
Link

EARTHING SYSTEMS
22
EARTHING
EARTH BARS

&6KDSHG&RQQHFWRU
Copper :
Conductor range Conductor range
Part No
(Main) (Tap)
CC101510 10 mm2 1.5-10 mm2

CC161516 16 mm2 1.5-16 mm2

CC16251510 25-16 mm2 10-1.5 mm2

CC251625 25 mm2 25-16 mm2

CC351516 35 mm2 16-1.5 mm2

CC352535 35 mm2 35-25 mm2

CC50425 50 mm2 25-4 mm2

CC503550 50 mm2 50-35 mm2

CC701525 70 mm2 25-1.5 mm2

CC5070435 70-50 mm2 35-4 mm2

CC50703570 70-50 mm2 70-35 mm2

CC95435 95 mm2 35-4 mm2

CC953570 95 mm2 70-35 mm2

CC957095 95 mm2 95-70 mm2

CC12025120 120 mm2 120-25 mm2

CC15025120 150 mm2 120-25 mm2

CC15070150 150 mm2 150-70 mm2

CC1851695 185 mm2 95-16 mm2

CC120185 185-120 mm2 185-120 mm2

CC15024095120 240-150 mm2 120-95 mm2

CC240150 150-240 mm2 150-240 mm2

CC240185 185-240 mm2 185-240 mm2

CC240240 240-240 mm2 240-240 mm2

CC300120 120-300 mm2 120-300 mm2

CC300300 300-300 mm2 300-300 mm2

23 EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
EARTH BARS

Tinned Copper :
Conductor range Conductor range
Part No
(Main) (Tap)
CT101510 10 mm2 1.5-10 mm2

CT161516 16 mm2 1.5-16 mm2

CT166251510 25-16 mm2 10-1.5 mm2

CT251625 25 mm2 25-16 mm2

CT351516 35 mm2 16-1.5 mm2

CT352535 35 mm2 35-25 mm2

CT50425 50 mm2 25-4 mm2

CT503550 50 mm2 50-35 mm2

CT701525 70 mm2 25-1.5 mm2

CT5070435 70-50 mm2 35-4 mm2

CT50703570 70-50 mm2 70-35 mm2

CT95435 95 mm2 35-4 mm2

CT953570 95 mm2 70-35 mm2

CT957095 95 mm2 95-70 mm2

CT12025120 120 mm2 120-25 mm2

CT15025120 150 mm2 120-25 mm2

CT15070150 150 mm2 150-70 mm2

CT1851695 185 mm2 95-16 mm2

CT120185120185 185-120 mm2 185-120 mm2

CT15024095120 240-150 mm2 120-95 mm2

CT240150240150 150-240 mm2 150-240 mm2

CT240185240185 185-240 mm2 185-240 mm2

CT240240240240 240-240 mm2 240-240 mm2

CT300120300120 120-300 mm2 120-300 mm2

CT300300300300 300-300 mm2 300-300 mm2

EARTHING SYSTEMS
24
LIGHTNING
PROTECTION

EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
GENERAL INTRODUCTION

Lightning is a natural phenomenon that occurs during an electrical storm. This


electrostatic discharge occurs inside the clouds or between two clouds or between
cloud and ground. In all the cases due to enormous potential in the clouds, the atoms
in that regions are ionised piloting a strike with light in the form of plasma and sound
in the form of thunder. The rise time of the negative lightning current is typically 1-10
microseconds to reach the peak with amperes ranging from 30 kA to 120 kA.
Lightning protection systems act as a Faraday Cage for structures which protect the
building and its contents from external electric fields by transferring that energy around
the cage instead of passing through the structures. The ultimate aim of lightning
protection system is to offers a low resistance path to the ground where the enormous
energy is safely dispersed without affecting the structure.
A conventional lightning protection system includes Air terminals, conductors and
ground electrodes to offer a low resistance path to the earth as current has a tendency
to flow through low resistance path. Proper grounding is essential for efficiently and
safely dispersing enormous energy from the lightning strike.

Our Offerings
Bahra offers a comprehensive solution for lightning protection that includes,
‡ 6RLO5HVLVWLYLW\7HVWLQJ
‡ 5LVN$VVHVVPHQWDVSHU%6(1,(&
‡ 'HVLJQ
‡ 3URGXFWVXSSOLHV

Soil Resistivity Testing:


It is important to understand the soil resistivity before designing a lightning protection
system as the ground resistance or impedance is one of the key factors in risk assessment
and design. Our expert engineers with periodically calibrated instruments conduct soil
resistivity tests at the site and offer solutions based on the report.

26
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
GENERAL INTRODUCTION

Risk Assessment:
2XU WHDP RI H[SHUWV ZLOO PDNH D FRPSOHWH ULVN DVVHVVPHQW IRU SURMHFWV DV SHU ,(&
 ZLWK WKH VLWH VXUYH\ RU SURMHFW UHSRUWV ,QIRUPDWLRQ RQ JHRJUDSKLFDO ORFDWLRQ
soil resistivity, structure dimensions, the frequency of thunderstorms, wind speed,
people population, etc., are critical for assessing the risks and selecting the right level
of protection.

Design:
Upon selecting the level of protection, a detailed design for the project can be offered
with bill of materials, recommended practices, and installation guidelines. It ensures
optimum level of safety and protection for the people, equipment and structures.

EARTHING SYSTEMS
27
LIGHTNING
GENERAL INTRODUCTION

Product Supplies:
%DKUDPDQXIDFWXUHVFRQGXFWRUVDQGFRPSRQHQWVIRU(DUWKLQJDQGOLJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQ
in its state of the art manufacturing facilities.

Raw Materials & Manufacturing


Copper & Aluminium plays a significant role in earthing and lightning protection as
all the conductors and accessories are either made from Copper, Aluminium and its
DOOR\V %DKUD PDQXIDFWXUHV DOO LWV FRQGXFWRUV IURP  SXUH FRSSHUDOXPLQLXP
cathodes. Accessories are made from copper and aluminium alloys ensuring higher
mechanical strength and conductivity. Most of the accessories are made from bronze
by the casting process and a few are made by the forging process for applications that
need higher mechanical strength.

Approvals & Testing


‡%DKUDFRQGXFWRUVDQGDFFHVVRULHVDUHWHVWHGDVSHU%6(1DQG,(&
‡(DUWKURGVDQGDFFHVVRULHVDUHWHVWHGDVSHU8O

Product Portfolio
Our wide range of conductors and accessories ensures that every project need is
fulfilled to achieve the complete earthing and lightning protection. This catalog lists all
the standard products, In addition to this Bahra offers customized products designed
for particular applications.

28
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS

Conductors:

Bare copper tape:


Bare copper soft drawn tapes are the most
commonly used down conductors in the Middle
(DVW IRU OLJKWQLQJ SURWHFWLRQ %DKUD FRSSHU WDSHV
are soft drawn from 99.99% pure copper cathodes
ensuring higher conductivity. These tapes are
radially edged making it easier to install and are
WHVWHGDVSHU,(& %6(1ZLWKKDUVK
atmospheric conditions and impulse current off
100000 Amperes.
Conductor size
Part No. Weight per metre Standard coil size
(X x Y)

BCT01 12.5 x 1.5 mm 0.17 Kg 100 m


BCT02 12.5 x 3 mm 0.33 Kg 100 m
BCT03 20 x 1.5 mm 0.27 Kg 100 m
BCT04 20 x 3 mm 0.53 Kg 50 m
BCT05 20 x 3 mm 0.53 Kg 100 m
BCT06 25 x 1.5 mm 0.33 Kg 100 m
BCT07 25 x 2 mm 0.49 Kg 50 m
BCT08 25 x 3 mm 0.67 Kg 25 m
BCT09 25 x 3 mm 0.67 Kg 50 m
BCT10 1” x 1⁄4 ” 0.67 Kg 25 m
BCT11 25 x 4 mm 0.89 Kg 50 m
BCT12 25 x 6 mm 1.33 Kg 40 m
BCT13 1” x 1⁄4 ” 1.33 Kg 40 m
BCT14 30 x 2 mm 0.53 Kg 50 m
BCT15 30 x 3 mm 0.83 Kg 50 m
BCT16 30 x 4 mm 1.07 Kg 40 m
BCT17 30 x 5 mm 1.33 Kg 40 m
BCT18 31 x 3 mm 0.83 Kg 50 m
BCT19 31.5 x 4 mm 1.13 Kg 40 m
BCT20 31 x 6 mm 1.65 Kg 30 m
BCT21 38 x 3 mm 1.01 Kg 50 m
BCT22 38 x 5 mm 1.69 Kg 30 m
BCT23 38 x 6 mm 2.02 Kg 25 m
BCT24 40 x 3 mm 1.06 Kg 40 m
BCT25 40 x 4 mm 1.42 Kg 30 m
BCT26 40 x 5 mm 1.78 Kg 25 m
BCT27 40 x 6 mm 2.16 Kg 25 m
BCT28 40 x 6.3 mm 2.24 Kg 25 m
BCT29 50 x 3 mm 1.33 Kg 40 m
BCT30 50 x 4 mm 1.78 Kg 30 m
BCT31 50 x 5 mm 2.22 Kg 20 m
BCT32 50 x 6 mm 2.68 Kg 20 m
BCT33 50 x 6.3 mm 2.80 Kg 20 m
BCT34 50 x 7 mm 3.08 Kg 20 m

EARTHING SYSTEMS
29
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS

Bare Conductor Tape:


Bahra bare aluminium tapes are alternatives to
copper tapes.

Part No. Conductor size (X x Y) Standard


rd coil size
BAT01 12.5 x 1.5 mm 100 m
BAT02 12.5 x 3 mm 100 m
BAT03 20 x 1.5 mm 100 m
BAT04 20 x 3 mm 50 m
BAT05 20 x 3 mm 100 m
BAT06 25 x 1.5 mm 100 m
BAT07 25 x 2 mm 50 m
BAT08 25 x 3 mm 25 m
BAT09 25 x 3 mm 50 m
BAT10 1” x 1⁄4 ” 25 m
BAT11 25 x 4 mm 50 m
BAT12 25 x 6 mm 40 m
BAT13 1” x 1⁄4 ” 40 m
BAT14 30 x 2 mm 50 m
BAT15 30 x 3 mm 50 m
BAT16 30 x 4 mm 40 m
BAT17 30 x 5 mm 40 m
BAT18 31 x 3 mm 50 m
BAT19 31.5 x 4 mm 40 m
BAT20 31 x 6 mm 30 m
BAT21 38 x 3 mm 50 m
BAT22 38 x 5 mm 30 m
BAT23 38 x 6 mm 25 m
BAT24 40 x 3 mm 40 m
BAT25 40 x 4 mm 30 m
BAT26 40 x 5 mm 25 m
BAT27 40 x 6 mm 25 m
BAT28 40 x 6.3 mm 25 m
BAT29 50 x 3 mm 40 m
BAT30 50 x 4 mm 30 m
BAT31 50 x 5 mm 20 m
BAT32 50 x 6 mm 20 m
BAT33 50 x 6.3 mm 20 m
BAT34 50 x 7 mm 20 m
&RPSOLHV%6(1

30
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS

Bare solid circular:


Bare solid circular used on lightning protection applications.

Conductor Cross-sectional Standard coil


Part No. Diameter (A)
material area size
BCSR008 Copper 8 mm 50.27 mm2 50 m
BASR008 Aluminium 8 mm 50.27 mm2 50 m

Bare Stranded Copper Cable :

6RIW'UDZQ6WUDQGHG&RSSHU&DEOH
When an application needs conductors with higher flexibility, copper stranded
conductors are the best alternative to copper tapes. Also, stranded conductors offer a
larger surface area comparing to the solid conductors of the same cross-sectional area.
Larger the surface area, higher is the conduction as current flows on the surface of the
FRQGXFWRU 6NLQHIIHFW 

Part No. Cross-sectional area Stranding No./mm Ø Nominal diameter Weight per metre
BCSS006 6 mm2 7/1.04 3.12 mm 0.05 Kg
BCSS016 16 mm2 7/1.70 5.10 mm 0.15 Kg
BCSS025 25 mm2 7/2.14 6.42 mm 0.23 Kg
BCSS035 35 mm2 7/2.52 7.56 mm 0.32 Kg
BCSS050 50 mm2 19/1.78 8.90 mm 0.43 Kg
BCS070 70 mm2 19/2.14 10.70 mm 0.62 Kg
BCSS095 95 mm2 19/2.52 12.60 mm 0.86 Kg
BCSS120 120 mm2 37/2.03 14.21 mm 1.09 Kg
BCSS150 150 mm2 37/2.25 15.75 mm 1.33 Kg
BCSS185 185 mm2 37/2.52 17.64 mm 1.67 Kg
BCSS240 240 mm2 61/2.25 20.25 mm 2.20 Kg
BCSS300 300 mm2 61/2.52 22.68 mm 2.76 Kg
BCSS400 400 mm2 61/2.85 25.65 mm 3.53 Kg

7LQQHG6RIW'UDZQ6WUDQGHG&RSSHU&DEOH
Tin plated conductors are highly resistant to oxidation
recommended for harsh environments.

Part No. Cross-sectional area Stranding No./mm Ø Weight per metre


BCST020 20 mm2 19/2.14 0.62 Kg

EARTHING SYSTEMS
31
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS

Tinned Copper Tape:


Bahra tinned copper tapes are made from state of the art
continuous tin plating facility. Tin plating prevents from
oxidization and is recommended to avoid copper thefts.
Below weights for tin plated tapes are with a +2% tolerance.

Part No. Conductor Size (X x Y) Weight per metre Standard coil size
TCT01 12.5 x 1.5 mm 0.17 Kg 100 m
TCT02 12.5 x 3 mm 0.33 Kg 100 m
TCT03 20 x 1.5 mm 0.27 Kg 100 m
TCT04 20 x 3 mm 0.53 Kg 50 m
TCT05 20 x 3 mm 0.53 Kg 100 m
TCT06 25 x 1.5 mm 0.33 Kg 100 m
TCT07 25 x 2 mm 0.49 Kg 50 m
TCT08 25 x 3 mm 0.67 Kg 25 m
TCT09 25 x 3 mm 0.67 Kg 50 m
TCT10 1” x 1⁄4 ” 0.67 Kg 25 m
TCT11 25 x 4 mm 0.89 Kg 50 m
TCT12 25 x 6 mm 1.33 Kg 40 m
TCT13 1” x 1⁄4 ” 1.33 Kg 40 m
TCT14 30 x 2 mm 0.53 Kg 50 m
TCT15 30 x 3 mm 0.83 Kg 50 m
TCT16 30 x 4 mm 1.07 Kg 40 m
TCT17 30 x 5 mm 1.33 Kg 40 m
TCT18 31 x 3 mm 0.83 Kg 50 m
TCT19 31.5 x 4 mm 1.13 Kg 40 m
TCT20 31 x 6 mm 1.65 Kg 30 m
TCT21 38 x 3 mm 1.01 Kg 50 m
TCT22 38 x 5 mm 1.69 Kg 30 m
TCT23 38 x 6 mm 2.02 Kg 25 m
TCT24 40 x 3 mm 1.06 Kg 40 m
TCT25 40 x 4 mm 1.42 Kg 30 m
TCT26 40 x 5 mm 1.78 Kg 25 m
TCT27 40 x 6 mm 2.16 Kg 25 m
TCT28 40 x 6.3 mm 2.24 Kg 25 m
TCT29 50 x 3 mm 1.33 Kg 40 m
TCT30 50 x 4 mm 1.78 Kg 30 m
TCT31 50 x 5 mm 2.22 Kg 20 m
TCT32 50 x 6 mm 2.68 Kg 20 m
TCT33 50 x 6.3 mm 2.80 Kg 20 m
TCT34 50 x 7 mm 3.08 Kg 20 m

32
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS

Hard drawn copper bar:


Bahra tinned copper tapes are made from state of the art continuous tin plating facility.
Tin plating prevents from oxidization and is recommended to avoid copper thefts.
Below weights for tin plated tapes are with a +2% tolerance.

EARTHING SYSTEMS
33
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS

Bare Busbar:
7KH PXOWLSXUSRVH EDUH %XVEDUV DUH XVHG DV (DUWK %DU
Ground Busbar for connecting equipment’s ground
WHUPLQDOV7HOHFRPPXQLFDWLRQJURXQGLQJHWF)RU%XVEDUV
with insulation base and with connection terminals refer to
(DUWK%DUVVHFWLRQ

Part No. Conductor Size (X x Y) Weight per metre Length per Bar
BCB01 12.5 x 1.5 mm 0.17 Kg 4m
BCB02 12.5 x 3 mm 0.33 Kg 4m
BCB03 20 x 1.5 mm 0.27 Kg 4m
BCB04 20 x 3 mm 0.53 Kg 4m
BCB05 20 x 3 mm 0.53 Kg 4m
BCB06 25 x 1.5 mm 0.33 Kg 4m
BCB07 25 x 2 mm 0.49 Kg 4m
BCB08 25 x 3 mm 0.67 Kg 4m
BCB09 25 x 3 mm 0.67 Kg 4m
BCB10 1” x 1⁄4 ” 0.67 Kg 4m
BCB11 25 x 4 mm 0.89 Kg 4m
BCB12 25 x 6 mm 1.33 Kg 4m
BCB13 1” x 1⁄4 ” 1.33 Kg 4m
BCB14 30 x 2 mm 0.53 Kg 4m
BCB15 30 x 3 mm 0.83 Kg 4m
BCB16 30 x 4 mm 1.07 Kg 4m
BCB17 30 x 5 mm 1.33 Kg 4m
BCB18 31 x 3 mm 0.83 Kg 4m
BCB19 31.5 x 4 mm 1.13 Kg 4m
BCB20 31 x 6 mm 1.65 Kg 4m
BCB21 38 x 3 mm 1.01 Kg 4m
BCB22 38 x 5 mm 1.69 Kg 4m
BCB23 38 x 6 mm 2.02 Kg 4m
BCB24 40 x 3 mm 1.06 Kg 4m
BCB25 40 x 4 mm 1.42 Kg 4m
BCB26 40 x 5 mm 1.78 Kg 4m
BCB27 40 x 6 mm 2.16 Kg 4m
BCB28 40 x 6.3 mm 2.24 Kg 4m
BCB29 50 x 3 mm 1.33 Kg 4m
BCB30 50 x 4 mm 1.78 Kg 4m
BCB31 50 x 5 mm 2.22 Kg 4m
BCB32 50 x 6 mm 2.68 Kg 4m
BCB33 50 x 6.3 mm 2.80 Kg 4m
BCB34 50 x 7 mm 3.08 Kg 4m


EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS

7LQQHG+DUG'UDZQ%DU

Part No. Conductor Size (X x Y) Weight per metre LLength


h per B
Bar
TCB01 12.5 x 1.5 mm 0.17 Kg 4m
TCB02 12.5 x 3 mm 0.33 Kg 4m
TCB03 20 x 1.5 mm 0.27 Kg 4m
TCB04 20 x 3 mm 0.53 Kg 4m
TCB05 20 x 3 mm 0.53 Kg 4m
TCB06 25 x 1.5 mm 0.33 Kg 4m
TCB07 25 x 2 mm 0.49 Kg 4m
TCB08 25 x 3 mm 0.67 Kg 4m
TCB09 25 x 3 mm 0.67 Kg 4m
TCB10 1” x 1⁄4 ” 0.67 Kg 4m
TCB11 25 x 4 mm 0.89 Kg 4m
TCB12 25 x 6 mm 1.33 Kg 4m
TCB13 1” x 1⁄4 ” 1.33 Kg 4m
TCB14 30 x 2 mm 0.53 Kg 4m
TCB15 30 x 3 mm 0.83 Kg 4m
TCB16 30 x 4 mm 1.07 Kg 4m
TCB17 30 x 5 mm 1.33 Kg 4m
TCB18 31 x 3 mm 0.83 Kg 4m
TCB19 31.5 x 4 mm 1.13 Kg 4m
TCB20 31 x 6 mm 1.65 Kg 4m
TCB21 38 x 3 mm 1.01 Kg 4m
TCB22 38 x 5 mm 1.69 Kg 4m
TCB23 38 x 6 mm 2.02 Kg 4m
TCB24 40 x 3 mm 1.06 Kg 4m
TCB25 40 x 4 mm 1.42 Kg 4m
TCB26 40 x 5 mm 1.78 Kg 4m
TCB27 40 x 6 mm 2.16 Kg 4m
TCB28 40 x 6.3 mm 2.24 Kg 4m
TCB29 50 x 3 mm 1.33 Kg 4m
TCB30 50 x 4 mm 1.78 Kg 4m
TCB31 50 x 5 mm 2.22 Kg 4m
TCB32 50 x 6 mm 2.68 Kg 4m
TCB33 50 x 6.3 mm 2.80 Kg 4m
TCB34 50 x 7 mm 3.08 Kg 4m

EARTHING SYSTEMS

LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS

Coated copper tapes:

Pvc Covered Copper Tape:


In modern structures, Bahra PVC covered tapes maintains the aesthetics of the building,
with the wide color range available in PVC coating it becomes much easier to match
the building color.
7KH WKLFNQHVV RI 39& LV PLQLPXP  PP RQ HDFK VLGH RYHU WKH WDSH DQG *UHHQ
Yellow PVC covered tapes are available for easier identification of earthing or down
conductors.

Lead covered copper tapes


Lead covered copper tapes are widely used in power stations, all lead covered copper
tapes are made with a lead thickness of 2.1 mm.
Order with part numbers replaced with first digit “X” by color code.

Color codes:
Y- Green Yellow
G- Green
1%ODFN
W-White
55HG
B-Blue
(*UH\
L-Lead covered
T-Tin plated

36
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS

Pvc Covered Copper Tape:

Part No. Conductor Size (X x Y) Standard coil size


XCT01 12.5 x 1.5 mm 100 m
XCT02 12.5 x 3 mm 100 m
XCT03 20 x 1.5 mm 100 m
XCT04 20 x 3 mm 50 m
XCT05 20 x 3 mm 100 m
XCT06 25 x 1.5 mm 100 m
XCT07 25 x 2 mm 50 m
XCT08 25 x 3 mm 25 m
XCT09 25 x 3 mm 50 m
XCT10 1” x 1⁄4 ” 25 m
XCT11 25 x 4 mm 50 m
XCT12 25 x 6 mm 40 m
XCT13 1” x 1⁄4 ” 40 m
XCT14 30 x 2 mm 50 m
XCT15 30 x 3 mm 50 m
XCT16 30 x 4 mm 40 m
XCT17 30 x 5 mm 40 m
XCT18 31 x 3 mm 50 m
XCT19 31.5 x 4 mm 40 m
XCT20 31 x 6 mm 30 m
XCT21 38 x 3 mm 50 m
XCT22 38 x 5 mm 30 m
XCT23 38 x 6 mm 25 m
XCT24 40 x 3 mm 40 m
XCT25 40 x 4 mm 30 m
XCT26 40 x 5 mm 25 m
XCT27 40 x 6 mm 25 m
XCT28 40 x 6.3 mm 25 m
XCT29 50 x 3 mm 40 m
XCT30 50 x 4 mm 30 m
XCT31 50 x 5 mm 20 m
XCT32 50 x 6 mm 20 m
XCT33 50 x 6.3 mm 20 m
XCT34 50 x 7 mm 20 m

EARTHING SYSTEMS
37
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS

3YF&RYHUHG&RSSHU6ROLG&LUFXODU
Offered from the portfolio of Bahra Cables, wires and
conductors specially made for earthing and lightning
ning
protection applications.

Cross-sectional Weight per Standard coil


Part No. Diameter (A) Colour range
area metre size
XCSS08 Copper 8 mm 50.27 mm2 0.49 Kg 50 m

Available in all the color mentioned above codes.

38
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
AIR RODS

Conventional Air Termination Systems:

$LU5RGV
Air rods on the roof are selected and positioned
oned based on the design and class of
protection required, a group of air rods make the air termination network for the
lightning protection system. Hard drawn externally threaded rods with knurling to fix
PXOWLSRLQWV PXOWLSRLQWVDUHVXSSOLHGDVVHSDUDWHDFFHVVRULHV 

Part No. Rod length Rod diameter Thread size Conductor material
AR01 500 mm 15 mm M16 Copper
AR02 1000 mm 15 mm M16 Copper
AR03 1500 mm 15 mm M16 Copper
AR04 2000 mm 15 mm M16 Copper
AR05 3000 mm 15 mm M16 Copper

Accessories:

Air rod base:


$LU URG EDVHV DUH PHFKDQLFDO FRQQHFWRUV EHWZHHQ DLU URGV DQG &RSSHU $OXPLQLXP
tapes on flat roof surfaces.

Maximum conductor
Part No. Rod diameter Thread size
width
CAB01 15 mm M16 25 mm
CAB02 15 mm M16 50 mm
AR03 1500 mm 15 mm M16
AR04 2000 mm 15 mm M16
AR05 3000 mm 15 mm M16

)ODW&RQGXFWRU6DGGOH
Flat conductor saddles are used for connecting air rods with stranded conductors.
Conductor
Part No. Rod diameter Thread size Conductor material
diameter
CAF01 50 mm 15 mm M16 Copper
CAF02 70 mm 15 mm M16 Copper
CAF03 95 mm 15 mm M16 Copper

EARTHING SYSTEMS
39
LIGHTNING
AIR RODS - ACCESSORIES

5LGJH6DGGOH
6XLWDEOH WR LQVWDOO RQ ULGJHV RU XQHYHQ VXUIDFHV ZKHUH
standard air rod bases are not feasible to fix.

Maximum
Conductor
Part No. Rod diameter Thread size conductor
material
width
CAR01 15 mm M16 31 mm Copper

5RGEUDFNHWV
6XLWDEOHIRUDSSOLFDWLRQVZKHUHDLUURGVQHHGWREHPRXQWHGRQYHUWLFDOSODQHV

Part No. Rod diameter Rod material Weight per unit


CRB01 15 mm Copper 0.90 Kg

5RGWRFRQGXFWRUFRXSOLQJ
$LU URGV ZKHQ PRXQWHG RQ YHUWLFDO SODQHV ZLWK &5% 'RZQ
conductors such as tapes or stranded conductors can be
connected with a rod to conductor couplings.

For connecting copper tapes:


Conductor Rod Rod Weight per
Part No. Thread size
size diameter material unit
CAT01 25 x 3 mm 15 mm M16 Copper 0.23 Kg

For connecting stranded conductor:


Conductor Rod Rod Weight per
Part No. Thread size
size diameter material unit
CAS01 50-70 mm2 15 mm M16 Copper 0.25 Kg
CAS02 95 mm2 15 mm M16 Copper 0.25 Kg

Multiple points:
Multi points are packed as a kit of 3 rods and a multipoint base.
Additional fasteners are not required ergonomically fixes on
the knurling of air rods.

Part No. Rod diameter Conductor material Weight per unit


ARM01 15 mm Copper 0.27 Kg


EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
AIR RODS - ACCESSORIES

'&WDSHFOLS
'& WDSH FOLS PHFKDQLFDOO\ IL[HV WKH WDSHV RQ WR D ZDOO VXSSOLHG ZLWK FRXQWHUVXQN
screws.

For bare copper tapes:

Part No. Conductor Size


CDC01 20 x 3 mm
CDC02 25 x 3 mm
CDC03 25 x 6 mm
CDC04 30 x 5 mm
CDC05 38 x 5 mm
CDC06 40 x 4 mm
CDC07 40 x 6 mm
CDC08 50 x 4 mm
CDC09 50 x 6 mm

For use with PVC covered copper:


The sizes mentioned as conductor size are only the bare conductor, The PVC extra
thickness of 3 mm on the width and 3 mm on thickness is not added in the conductor
size.

Part No. Conductor Size


CDP02 25 x 3 mm
CDP03 25 x 6 mm
CDP09 50 x 6 mm

For use with lead covered copper:

Part No. Conductor Size


CDL02 25 x 3 mm

For use with bare aluminium:

Part No. Conductor Size


CDA01 20 x 3 mm
CDA09 50 x 6 mm

EARTHING SYSTEMS

LIGHTNING
AIR RODS - ACCESSORIES

For use with PVC covered aluminium:

Part No. Conductor Size


CDM01 25 x 3 mm
CDM02 50 x 6 mm

Tape Clip:
Made from 99.99% pure copper, used for fixing tapes on flat surfaces or the walls.
Additional screws are required for fixing.

Part No. Conductor Size


CTC01 20 x 3 mm
CTC02 25 x 3 mm

One hole clip:


Made from 99.99% pure copper, used for fixing conductors on flat surfaces or the
walls. An additional screw is required for fixing.

Part No. Conductor Conductor material


CHC01 8 mm dia Copper
CHC02 10 mm dia Copper
CHC03 50 mm2 Copper
CHC04 70 mm2 Copper
CHC05 95 mm2 Copper

Cable saddle:

Part No. Conductor Conductor material


CCS01 8 mm dia Copper
CCS02 10 mm dia Copper
CCS03 50 mm2 Copper
CCS04 70 mm2 Copper
CCS05 95 mm2 Copper


EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
AIR RODS - ACCESSORIES

1RQPHWDOOLF'&WDSHFOLS
Made from heavy duty PVC compound. A screw is needed for fixing the base, no
additional screws required for closing the clip.

For bare copper tape:

Part No. Conductor Size


CXDC02 25 x 3 mm
CXDC03 25 x 6 mm
CXDC09 50 x 6 mm

For PVC covered copper tape:

Part No. Conductor Size


CXDP02 25 x 3 mm
CXDP03 25 x 6 mm
CXDP09 50 x 6 mm

Available in different color variants,


Order with part numbers replaced with the second digit “X” by color code.
Color codes:
G- Green
1%ODFN
W-White
55HG
B-Blue
(*UH\
O-Brown

6TXDUHWDSHFODPS
Clamps are supplied with countersunk screws, Additional screws are required for fixing
the bases for all square clamps.

Part No. Conductor Conductor material


CSTT02 25 x 3 mm Copper
CSTT03 25 x 6 mm Copper
CSTT09 50 x 6 mm Copper

EARTHING SYSTEMS

LIGHTNING
AIR RODS - ACCESSORIES

Tape to conductor square clamp:

Part No. Conductor size Conductor material Weight per unit


CSTC01 25 x 3 mm to 50 Copper 0.32 Kg
mm2
CSTC02 25 x 3 mm to 70 Copper 0.30 Kg
mm2
CSTC03 25 x 3 mm to 95 Copper 0.28 Kg
mm2

Cable to cable square clamp:

Part No. Conductor size Conductor material Weight per unit


CSCC01 50 mm2 Copper 0.32 Kg
CSCC02 70 mm2 Copper 0.29 Kg
CSCC03 95 mm2 Copper 0.25 Kg


EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD

EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
GENERAL INTRODUCTION

BahraWeld
BahraWeld is an exothermic welding system that does not require an external source for
heating. Exothermic welding is preferred where highly conductive, strong connections
are required, these connections are permanent and do not loosen over time and
withstands under repeated fault conditions.

Major three parts that comprise this welding system are

Molds
Molds are made from optimum density graphite that lasts for 50 to 80 welds. The
density of graphite and design of mold is selected based on various factors,

‡/LIHRIPROGVWRZLWKVWDQGUHSHWLWLYHRSHQLQJFORVLQJILULQJDQGFOHDQLQJF\FOHVIRU
50-80 connections. (Higher the density of graphite, higher is the life)

‡7LPHIRUZHOGGLVVLSDWLRQ /RZHUWKHGHQVLW\RIJUDSKLWHIDVWHULVWKHKHDWGLVVLSDWLRQ

‡7\SHRIFRQQHFWLRQVL]HDQGFRPSOH[LW\RIFRQQHFWLRQVHWF

,QDGGLWLRQWRWKHVWDQGDUGPROGVOLVWHGLQWKLVFDWDORJ%DKUD:(/'RIIHUVDZLGHUDQJH
RIFXVWRPL]HGPROGVIRUSRZHUVWDWLRQVUDLOZD\VDQGRWKHUXQLTXHDSSOLFDWLRQV

Weld Metal
Weld metals are available in the form of powders and tablets. Weld metals are made
IURPFRSSHUDQGDOXPLQLXPR[LGHV7KHFRQWHQWRIPHWDOYDULHVEDVHGRQWKHVL]HDQG
W\SHRIWKHMRLQWUHTXLUHG,JQLWLRQ6WDUWLQJSRZGHULVDQH[SORVLYHZKLFKLQLWLDWHVWKH
combustion process of weld metal.

Tools
‡33(VVXFKDVJORYHVJRJJOHVDUHPDQGDWRU\IRUWKH%DKUD:(/'SURFHVV

‡ +DQGOH FODPSV DUH UHTXLUHG IRU RSHQLQJ  FORVLQJ DQG WR KROG WKH JUDSKLWH PROGV
during the welding process.

‡)OLQWJXQVRUHOHFWURQLFLJQLWLRQWRROVDUHUHTXLUHGIRULQLWLDWLQJWKHZHOGLQJSURFHVV

‡6FUDSHU%UXVKDQGRWKHUFOHDQLQJWRROVDUHQHHGHGWRFOHDQWKHPROGVFRQGXFWRUV
and joints.

46 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to earth rod CR17 :


A mm Ø B inches Ø C mm2 Weld Metal Mold Handle
12.7 1⁄2 “ 16* 90W10 CR17-M4-12716 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 90W10 CR17-M4-12725 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 35 90W10 CR17-M4-12735 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 115W10 CR17-M4-12750 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 8 mm Ø 115W10 CR17-M4-1278SC HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 70 150W10 CR17-M4-12770 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 95 200W10 CR17-M4-12795 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 120 250W10 CR17-M4-127120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 16* 90W10 CR17-M4-14216 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 90W10 CR17-M4-14225 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 35 90W10 CR17-M4-14235 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 115W10 CR17-M4-14250 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 8 mm Ø 115W10 CR17-M4-1428SC HK4

Bar to bar BB1


A mm x mm Weld Metal Mold Handle
20 x 3 45W10 BB1-M4-203 HK4
25 x 3 65W10 BB1-M4-253 HK4
25 x 4 90W10 BB1-M4-254 HK4
25 x 6 150W10 BB1-M4-256 HK4
30 x 2 65W10 BB1-M4-302 HK4
30 x 3 90W10 BB1-M4-303 HK4
30 x 4 115W10 BB1-M4-304 HK4
30 x 5 115W10 BB1-M4-305 HK4
31 x 3 90W10 BB1-M4-313 HK4
31 x 6 150W10 BB1-M4-316 HK4
38 x 3 115W10 BB1-M4-383 HK4
38 x 5 150W10 BB1-M4-385 HK4
38 x 6 200W10 BB1-M4-386 HK4
40 x 3 115W10 BB1-M4-403 HK4
40 x 4 150W10 BB1-M4-404 HK4
40 x 5 150W10 BB1-M4-405 HK4
40 x 6 200W10 BB1-M4-406 HK4
50 x 3 150W10 BB1-M4-503 HK4
50 x 4 200W10 BB1-M4-504 HK4
50 x 5 200W10 BB1-M4-505 HK4
50 x 6 250W10 BB1-M4-506 HK4

EARTHING SYSTEMS
47
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Bar to bar BB3

A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm mm x mm

20 x 3 20 x 3 65W10 BB3-M4-203203 HK4

25 x 3 25 x 3 65W10 BB3-M4-253253 HK4

25 x 4 25 x 4 90W10 BB3-M4-254254 HK4

25 x 6 25 x 6 150W10 BB3-M4-256256 HK4

30 x 2 30 x 2 65W10 BB3-M4-302302 HK4

30 x 3 30 x 3 90W10 BB3-M4-303303 HK4

30 x 4 30 x 4 115W10 BB3-M4-304304 HK4

30 x 5 30 x 5 115W10 BB3-M4-305305 HK4

31 x 3 31 x 3 115W10 BB3-M4-313313 HK4

31 x 6 31 x 6 200W10 BB3-M4-316316 HK4

38 x 3 38 x 3 115W10 BB3-M4-383383 HK4

38 x 5 38 x 5 150W10 BB3-M4-385385 HK4

38 x 6 38 x 6 200W10 BB3-M4-386386 HK4

40 x 3 40 x 3 115W10 BB3-M4-403403 HK4

40 x 4 40 x 4 150W10 BB3-M4-404404 HK4

40 x 5 40 x 5 150W10 BB3-M4-405405 HK4

40 x 6 40 x 6 200W10 BB3-M4-406406 HK4

50 x 3 50 x 3 200W10 BB3-M4-503503 HK4

50 x 4 50 x 4 200W10 BB3-M4-504504 HK4

50 x 5 50 x 5 200W10 BB3-M4-505505 HK4

50 x 6 50 x 6 250W10 BB3-M4-506506 HK4

48 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Bar to Bar BB7

A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm
20 x 3 45W10 BB7-M4-203 HK4
25 x 3 65W10 BB7-M4-253 HK4
25 x 4 90W10 BB7-M4-254 HK4
25 x 6 150W10 BB7-M4-256 HK4
30 x 2 65W10 BB7-M4-302 HK4
30 x 3 65W10 BB7-M4-303 HK4
30 x 4 90W10 BB7-M4-304 HK4
30 x 5 115W10 BB7-M4-305 HK4
31 x 3 65W10 BB7-M4-313 HK4
31 x 6 150W10 BB7-M4-316 HK4
38 x 3 90W10 BB7-M4-383 HK4
38 x 5 150W10 BB7-M4-385 HK4
38 x 6 200W10 BB7-M4-386 HK4
40 x 3 90W10 BB7-M4-403 HK4
40 x 4 115W10 BB7-M4-404 HK4
40 x 5 150W10 BB7-M4-405 HK4
40 x 6 200W10 BB7-M4-406 HK4
50 x 3 150W10 BB7-M5-503 HK5
50 x 4 200W10 BB7-M5-504 HK5
50 x 5 200W10 BB7-M5-505 HK5
50 x 6 250W10 BB7-M5-506 HK5

EARTHING SYSTEMS
49
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Bar to Bar BB14

A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm mm x mm

20 x 3 20 x 3 45W10 BB14-M4-203203 HK4

25 x 3 25 x 3 65W10 BB14-M4-253253 HK4

25 x 4 25 x 4 90W10 BB14-M4-254254 HK4

25 x 6 25 x 6 115W10 BB14-M4-256256 HK4

30 x 2 30 x 2 65W10 BB14-M4-302302 HK4

30 x 3 30 x 3 65W10 BB14-M4-303303 HK4

30 x 4 30 x 4 90W10 BB14-M4-304304 HK4

30 x 5 30 x 5 115W10 BB14-M4-305305 HK4

31 x 3 31 x 3 90W10 BB14-M4-313313 HK4

31 x 6 31 x 6 150W10 BB14-M4-316316 HK4

38 x 3 38 x 3 90W10 BB14-M4-383383 HK4

38 x 5 38 x 5 150W10 BB14-M4-385385 HK4

38 x 6 38 x 6 200W10 BB14-M4-386386 HK4

40 x 3 40 x 3 90W10 BB14-M4-403403 HK4

40 x 4 40 x 4 115W10 BB14-M4-404404 HK4

40 x 5 40 x 5 150W10 BB14-M4-405405 HK4

40 x 6 40 x 6 200W10 BB14-M4-406406 HK4

50 x 3 50 x 3 150W10 BB14-M5-503503 HK5

50 x 4 50 x 4 200W10 BB14-M5-504504 HK5

50 x 5 50 x 5 200W10 BB14-M5-505505 HK5

50 x 6 50 x 6 250W10 BB14-M5-506506 HK5

50 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Bar to Bar BB41

A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm mm x mm

20 x 3 20 x 3 65W10 BB41-M4-203203 HK4

25 x 3 25 x 3 65W10 BB41-M4-253253 HK4

25 x 4 25 x 4 90W10 BB41-M4-254254 HK4

25 x 6 25 x 6 115W10 BB41-M4-256256 HK4

30 x 2 30 x 2 65W10 BB41-M4-302302 HK4

30 x 3 30 x 3 115W10 BB41-M4-303303 HK4

30 x 4 30 x 4 115W10 BB41-M4-304304 HK4

30 x 5 30 x 5 115W10 BB41-M4-305305 HK4

31 x 3 31 x 3 115W10 BB41-M4-313313 HK4

31 x 6 31 x 6 115W10 BB41-M4-316316 HK4

38 x 3 38 x 3 150W10 BB41-M4-383383 HK4

38 x 5 38 x 5 150W10 BB41-M4-385385 HK4

38 x 6 38 x 6 200W10 BB41-M4-386386 HK4

40 x 3 40 x 3 200W10 BB41-M4-403403 HK4

40 x 4 40 x 4 200W10 BB41-M4-404404 HK4

40 x 5 40 x 5 200W10 BB41-M4-405405 HK4

40 x 6 40 x 6 200W10 BB41-M4-406406 HK4

50 x 3 50 x 3 200W10 BB41-M5-503503 HK5

50 x 4 50 x 4 200W10 BB41-M5-504504 HK5

50 x 5 50 x 5 200W10 BB41-M5-505505 HK5

50 x 6 50 x 6 200W10 BB41-M5-506506 HK5

EARTHING SYSTEMS
51
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

%DUWR(DUWK5RG%53DUW

A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm
Ø Ø
12.7 1⁄2 “ 20 x 3 90W10 BR2-M4-127203 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 x 3 90W10 BR2-M4-127253 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 x 4 90W10 BR2-M4-127254 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 30 x 2 90W10 BR2-M4-127302 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 30 x 3 90W10 BR2-M4-127303 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 31 x 3 90W10 BR2-M4-127313 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 38 x 3 90W10 BR2-M4-127383 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 40 x 3 90W10 BR2-M4-127403 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 x 3 115W10 BR2-M4-127503 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 20 x 3 90W10 BR2-M4-142203 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 x 3 90W10 BR2-M4-142253 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 x 4 115W10 BR2-M4-142254 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 x 6 150W10 BR2-M4-142256 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 30 x 2 90W10 BR2-M4-142302 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 30 x 3 115W10 BR2-M4-142303 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 30 x 4 150W10 BR2-M4-142304 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 30 x 5 150W10 BR2-M4-142305 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 31 x 3 115W10 BR2-M4-142313 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 31 x 6 150W10 BR2-M4-142316 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 38 x 3 150W10 BR2-M4-142383 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 38 x 5 150W10 BR2-M4-142385 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 38 x 6 200W10 BR2-M4-142386 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 40 x 3 150W10 BR2-M4-142403 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 40 x 4 150W10 BR2-M4-142404 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 40 x 5 150W10 BR2-M4-142405 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 40 x 6 200W10 BR2-M4-142406 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 x 3 200W10 BR2-M4-142503 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 x 4 200W10 BR2-M4-142504 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 x 5 200W10 BR2-M4-142505 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 x 6 250W10 BR2-M4-142506 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 20 x 3 150W10 BR2-M4-172203 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 25 x 3 150W10 BR2-M4-172253 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 25 x 4 200W10 BR2-M4-172254 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 25 x 6 200W10 BR2-M4-172256 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 30 x 2 150W10 BR2-M4-172302 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 30 x 3 150W10 BR2-M4-172303 HK4

52 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

%DUWR(DUWK5RG%53DUW

A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm
Ø Ø
17.2 3⁄4 “ 30 x 4 250W10 BR2-M4-172304 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 30 x 5 200W10 BR2-M4-172305 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 31 x 3 200W10 BR2-M4-172313 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 31 x 6 250W10 BR2-M4-172316 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 38 x 3 200W10 BR2-M4-172383 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 38 x 5 200W10 BR2-M4-172385 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 38 x 6 250W10 BR2-M4-172386 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 40 x 3 200W10 BR2-M4-172403 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 40 x 4 200W10 BR2-M4-172404 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 40 x 5 200W10 BR2-M4-172405 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 40 x 6 250W10 BR2-M4-172406 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 x 3 2 x 150W10 BR2-M5-172503 HK5
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 x 4 2 x 150W10 BR2-M5-172504 HK5
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 x 5 2 x 150W10 BR2-M5-172505 HK5
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 x 6 2 x 150W10 BR2-M5-172506 HK5

%DUWR(DUWK5RG%53DUW

A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm
Ø Ø
12.7 1⁄2 “ 20 x 3 90W10 BR7-M4-127203 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 x 3 90W10 BR7-M4-127253 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 x 4 90W10 BR7-M4-127254 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 30 x 2 90W10 BR7-M4-127302 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 30 x 3 90W10 BR7-M4-127303 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 31 x 3 90W10 BR7-M4-127313 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 38 x 3 90W10 BR7-M4-127383 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 40 x 3 90W10 BR7-M4-127403 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 x 3 115W10 BR7-M4-127503 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 x 6 115W10 BR7-M4-127503 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 20 x 3 90W10 BR7-M4-142203 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 x 3 90W10 BR7-M4-142253 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 x 4 115W10 BR7-M4-142254 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 x 6 115W10 BR7-M4-142256 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 30 x 2 115W10 BR7-M4-142302 HK4

EARTHING SYSTEMS
53
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

%DUWR(DUWK5RG%53DUW

A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm
Ø Ø
14.2 5⁄8 “ 30 x 3 115W10 BR7-M4-142303 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 30 x 4 150W10 BR7-M4-142304 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 30 x 5 150W10 BR7-M4-142305 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 31 x 3 115W10 BR7-M4-142313 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 31 x 6 150W10 BR7-M4-142316 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 38 x 3 1115W10 BR7-M4-142383 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 38 x 5 150W10 BR7-M4-142385 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 38 x 6 200W10 BR7-M4-142386 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 40 x 3 115W10 BR7-M4-142403 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 40 x 4 150W10 BR7-M4-142404 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 40 x 5 150W10 BR7-M4-142405 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 40 x 6 200W10 BR7-M4-142406 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 x 3 150W10 BR7-M4-142503 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 x 4 200W10 BR7-M4-142504 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 x 5 200W10 BR7-M4-142505 HK4
14.2 8⁄5 “ 50 x 6 200W10 BR-7M142506-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 20 x 3 115W10 BR-7M172203-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 25 x 3 150W10 BR-7M172253-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 25 x 4 150W10 BR-7M172254-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 25 x 6 200W10 BR-7M172256-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 30 x 2 150W10 BR-7M172302-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 30 x 3 150W10 BR-7M172303-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 30 x 4 250W10 BR-7M172304-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 30 x 5 200W10 BR-7M172305-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 31 x 3 200W10 BR-7M172313-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 31 x 6 200W10 BR-7M172316-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 38 x 3 200W10 BR-7M172383-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 38 x 5 200W10 BR-7M172385-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 38 x 6 250W10 BR-7M172386-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 40 x 3 200W10 BR-7M172403-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 40 x 4 200W10 BR-7M172404-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 40 x 5 200W10 BR-7M172405-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 40 x 6 250W10 BR-7M172406-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 50 x 3 250W10 BR-7M172503-5 HK5
17.2 4⁄3 “ 50 x 4 250W10 BR-7M172504-5 HK5
17.2 4⁄3 “ 50 x 5 2 x 150W10 BR-7M172505-5 HK5
17.2 4⁄3 “ 50 x 6 2 x 150W10 BR-7M172506-5 HK5

54 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

%DUWR6WHHO6XUIDFH%6

A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm

20 x 3 65W10 BS1-M4-203 HK4

25 x 3 90W10 BS1-M4-253 HK4

25 x 4 90W10 BS1-M4-254 HK4

25 x 6 150W10 BS1-M4-256 HK4

30 x 2 90W10 BS1-M4-302 HK4

30 x 3 90W10 BS1-M4-303 HK4

30 x 4 115W10 BS1-M4-304 HK4

30 x 5 150W10 BS1-M4-305 HK4

31 x 3 90W10 BS1-M4-313 HK4

31 x 6 200W10 BS1-M4-316 HK4

38 x 3 150W10 BS1-M4-383 HK4

38 x 5 200W10 BS1-M4-385 HK4

38 x 6 250W10 BS1-M4-386 HK4

40 x 3 150W10 BS1-M4-403 HK4

40 x 4 200W10 BS1-M4-404 HK4

40 x 5 200W10 BS1-M4-405 HK4

40 x 6 250W10 BS1-M4-406 HK4

50 x 3 200W10 BS1-M4-503 HK4

50 x 4 250W10 BS1-M4-504 HK4

50 x 5 250W10 BS1-M4-505 HK4

50 x 6 2 x 150W10 BS1-M5-506 HK5

EARTHING SYSTEMS
55
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

%DUWR6WHHO6XUIDFH%6

A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm

20 x 3 90W10 BS2-M4-203 HK4

25 x 3 90W10 BS2-M4-253 HK4

25 x 4 90W10 BS2-M4-254 HK4

25 x 6 150W10 BS2-M4-256 HK4

30 x 2 115W10 BS2-M4-302 HK4

30 x 3 115W10 BS2-M4-303 HK4

30 x 4 150W10 BS2-M4-304 HK4

30 x 5 200W10 BS2-M4-305 HK4

31 x 3 115W10 BS2-M4-313 HK4

31 x 6 200W10 BS2-M4-316 HK4

38 x 3 150W10 BS2-M4-383 HK4

38 x 5 200W10 BS2-M4-385 HK4

38 x 6 200W10 BS2-M4-386 HK4

40 x 3 115W10 BS2-M4-403 HK4

40 x 4 200W10 BS2-M4-404 HK4

40 x 5 200W10 BS2-M4-405 HK4

40 x 6 250W10 BS2-M4-406 HK4

50 x 3 200W10 BS2-M4-503 HK4

50 x 4 2 x 150W10 BS2-M5-504 HK5

50 x 5 2 x 150W10 BS2-M5-505 HK5

50 x 6 2 x 150W10 BS2-M5-506 HK5

56 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

%DUWR6WHHO6XUIDFH%6

A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm

20 x 3 65W10 BS1-M4-203 HK4

25 x 3 90W10 BS3-M4-253 HK4

25 x 4 115W10 BS3-M4-254 HK4

25 x 6 115W10 BS3-M4-256 HK4

30 x 2 150W10 BS3-M4-302 HK4

30 x 3 115W10 BS3-M4-303 HK4

30 x 4 115W10 BS3-M4-304 HK4

30 x 5 150W10 BS3-M4-305 HK4

31 x 3 115W10 BS3-M4-313 HK4

31 x 6 200W10 BS3-M4-316 HK4

38 x 3 150W10 BS3-M4-383 HK4

38 x 5 200W10 BS3-M4-385 HK4

38 x 6 250W10 BS3-M4-386 HK4

40 x 3 150W10 BS3-M4-403 HK4

40 x 4 200W10 BS3-M4-404 HK4

40 x 5 250W10 BS3-M4-405 HK4

40 x 6 250W10 BS3-M4-406 HK4

50 x 3 250W10 BS3-M4-503 HK4

50 x 4 250W10 BS3-M4-504 HK4

50 x 5 250W10 BS3-M4-505 HK4

50 x 6 250W10 BS3-M4-506 HK4

EARTHING SYSTEMS
57
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to Bar CB1

A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2 mm x mm

16* 20 x 3 45W10 CB1-M4-16203 HK4


16* 25 x 3 45W10 CB1-M4-16253 HK4
25 20 x 3 32W10 CB1-M4-25203 HK4
25 25 x 3 45W10 CB1-M4-25253 HK4
35 20 x 3 45W10 CB1-M4-35203 HK4
35 25 x 3 45W10 CB1-M4-35253 HK4
50 20 x 3 45W10 CB1-M4-50203 HK4
50 25 x 3 65W10 CB1-M4-50253 HK4
8 mm Ø 20 x 3 45W10 CB1-M4-8SC203 HK4
8 mm Ø 25 x 3 65W10 CB1-M4-8SC253 HK4
70 25 x 3 65W10 CB1-M4-70253 HK4
70 25 x 4 65W10 CB1-M4-70254 HK4
70 25 x 6 65W10 CB1-M4-70256 HK4
10 mm Ø 25 x 3 65W10 CB1-M4-10SC253 HK4
10 mm Ø 25 x 4 65W10 CB1-M4-10SC254 HK4
10 mm Ø 25 x 6 65W10 CB1-M4-10SC256 HK4
95 25 x 4 90W10 CB1-M4-95254 HK4
95 25 x 6 90W10 CB1-M4-95256 HK4
120 25 x 6 90W10 CB1-M4-120256 HK4
120 30 x 5 115W10 CB1-M4-120305 HK4
150 25 x 6 115W10 CB1-M4-150256 HK4
150 30 x 5 115W10 CB1-M4-150305 HK4
150 40 x 5 150W10 CB1-M4-150405 HK4
185 31 x 6 150W10 CB1-M4-185316 HK4
185 40 x 5 150W10 CB1-M4-185405 HK4
185 50 x 5 200W10 CB1-M5-240505 HK5
240 50 x 5 200W10 CB1-M5-240505 HK5
240 50 x 6 2 x 150W10 CB1-M5-240506 HK5
300 50 x 6 2 x 150W10 CB1-M5-300506 HK5

[6

58 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to Bar CB4

A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2 mm x mm

16* 20 x 3 45W10 CB4-M4-16203 HK4


16* 25 x 3 45W10 CB4-M4-16253 HK4
25 20 x 3 45W10 CB4-M4-25203 HK4
25 25 x 3 45W10 CB4-M4-25253 HK4
35 20 x 3 45W10 CB4-M4-35203 HK4
35 25 x 3 45W10 CB4-M4-35253 HK4
50 20 x 3 45W10 CB4-M4-50203 HK4
50 25 x 3 45W10 CB4-M4-50253 HK4
8 mm Ø 20 x 3 45W10 CB4-M4-8SC203 HK4
8 mm Ø 25 x 3 45W10 CB4-M4-8SC253 HK4
70 25 x 3 65W10 CB4-M4-70253 HK4
70 25 x 4 65W10 CB4-M4-70254 HK4
70 25 x 6 90W10 CB4-M4-70256 HK4
10 mm Ø 25 x 3 65W10 CB4-M4-10SC253 HK4
10 mm Ø 25 x 4 65W10 CB4-M4-10SC254 HK4
10 mm Ø 25 x 6 90W10 CB4-M4-10SC256 HK4
95 25 x 4 90W10 CB4-M4-95254 HK4
95 25 x 6 115W10 CB4-M4-95256 HK4
120 25 x 6 115W10 CB4-M4-120256 HK4
120 30 x 5 115W10 CB4-M4-120305 HK4
150 25 x 6 115W10 CB4-M4-150256 HK4
150 30 x 5 115W10 CB4-M4-150305 HK4
150 40 x 5 115W10 CB4-M4-150405 HK4
185 31 x 6 150W10 CB4-M4-185316 HK4
185 40 x 5 150W10 CB4-M4-185405 HK4
185 50 x 5 150W10 CB4-M4-240505 HK4
240 50 x 5 200W10 CB4-M4-240505 HK4
240 50 x 6 250W10 CB4-M4-240506 HK4
300 50 x 6 2 x 150W10 CB4-M5-300506 HK5

EARTHING SYSTEMS
59
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to Bar CB5

A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2 mm x mm

16* 20 x 3 45W10 CB5-M4-16203 HK4


16* 25 x 3 65W10 CB5-M4-16253 HK4
25 20 x 3 45W10 CB5-M4-25203 HK4
25 25 x 3 65W10 CB5-M4-25253 HK4
35 20 x 3 45W10 CB5-M4-35203 HK4
35 25 x 3 65W10 CB5-M4-35253 HK4
50 20 x 3 65W10 CB5-M4-50203 HK4
50 25 x 3 65W10 CB5-M4-50253 HK4
8 mm Ø 20 x 3 65W10 CB5-M4-8SC203 HK4
8 mm Ø 25 x 3 65W10 CB5-M4-8SC253 HK4
70 25 x 3 90W10 CB5-M4-70253 HK4
70 25 x 4 115W10 CB5-M4-70254 HK4
70 25 x 6 115W10 CB5-M4-70256 HK4
10 mm Ø 25 x 3 115W10 CB5-M4-10SC253 HK4
10 mm Ø 25 x 4 115W10 CB5-M4-10SC254 HK4
10 mm Ø 25 x 6 150W10 CB5-M4-10SC256 HK4
95 25 x 4 150W10 CB5-M4-95254 HK4
95 25 x 6 150W10 CB5-M4-95256 HK4
120 25 x 6 150W10 CB5-M4-120256 HK4
120 30 x 5 200W10 CB5-M4-120305 HK4
150 25 x 6 200W10 CB5-M4-150256 HK4
150 30 x 5 200W10 CB5-M4-150305 HK4
150 40 x 5 250W10 CB5-M4-150405 HK4
185 31 x 6 250W10 CB5-M4-185316 HK4
185 40 x 5 250W10 CB5-M4-185405 HK4
185 50 x 5 2 x 150W10 CB5-M5-240505 HK5
240 50 x 5 2 x 150W10 CB5-M5-240505 HK5
240 50 x 6 2 X 200W10 CB5-M5-240506 HK5
300 50 x 6 2 x 250W10 CB5-M5-300506 HK5

[6

60 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to Cable CC1

A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm 2

16* 32W10 CC1-M4-16 HK4

25 32W10 CC1-M4-25 HK4

35 32W10 CC1-M4-35 HK4

50 45W10 CC1-M4-50 HK4

8 mm Ø 45W10 CC1-M4-85C HK4

70 65W10 CC1-M4-70 HK4

10 mm Ø 65W10 CC1-M4-10SC HK4

95 90W10 CC1-M4-95 HK4

120 115W10 CC1-M4-120 HK4

150 115W10 CC1-M4-150 HK4

185 150W10 CC1-M4-185 HK4

240 200W10 CC1-M4-240 HK4

300 250W10 CC1-M4-300 HK4

400 2 x 150W10 CC1-M5-400 HK5

[6

EARTHING SYSTEMS
61
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to Cable CC2


A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm 2 mm 2
16* 16* 45W10 CC2-M4-1616 HK4
25 25 45W10 CC2-M4-2525 HK4
35 35 45W10 CC2-M4-3535 HK4
35 25 45W10 CC2-M4-3525
8 mm Ø 8 mm Ø 65W10 CC2-M4-88SC HK4
50 50 90W10 CC2-M4-5050 HK4
50 35 65W10 CC2-M4-5035 HK4
50 25 65W10 CC2-M4-5025 HK4
10 mm Ø 10 mm Ø 90W10 CC2-M4-1010SC HK4
70 70 90W10 CC2-M4-7070 HK4
70 50 90W10 CC2-M4-7050 HK4
70 35 65W10 CC2-M4-7535 HK4
70 25 65W10 CC2-M4-7025 HK4
95 95 115W10 CC2-M4-9595 HK4
95 70 90W10 CC2-M4-9570 HK4
95 50 90W10 CC2-M4-9550 HK4
95 35 90W10 CC2-M4-9535 HK4
120 120 150W10 CC2-M4-120120 HK4
120 95 150W10 CC2-M4-12095 HK4
120 70 90W10 CC2-M4-12070 HK4
120 50 90W10 CC2-M4-12050 HK4
150 150 200W10 CC2-M4-150150 HK4
150 120 150W10 CC2-M4-150120 HK4
150 95 150W10 CC2-M4-15095 HK4
150 70 90W10 CC2-M4-15070 HK4
185 185 200W10 CC2-M4-185185 HK4
185 150 200W10 CC2-M4-185150 HK4
185 120 200W10 CC2-M4-185120 HK4
185 95 150W10 CC2-M4-18595 HK4
240 240 2 x 150W10 CC-2M240240-4 HK4
240 185 200W10 CC-2M240185-4 HK4
240 150 200W10 CC-2M240150-4 HK4
240 120 200W10 CC-2M240120-4 HK4
300 300 2 x 200W10 CC-2M300300-5 HK5
300 240 2 x 200W10 CC-2M300240-5 HK5
300 185 250W10 CC-2M300185-4 HK4
[6

62 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to Cable CC4


A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm 2 mm 2
16* 16* 65W10 CC4-M4-1616 HK4
25 25 45W10 CC4-M4-2525 HK4
35 35 65W10 CC4-M4-3535 HK4
35 25 65W10 CC4-M4-3525 HK4
8 mm Ø 8 mm Ø 90W10 CC4-M4-88SC HK4
50 50 90W10 CC4-M4-5050 HK4
50 35 90W10 CC4-M4-5035 HK4
50 25 90W10 CC4-M4-5025 HK4
10 mm Ø 10 mm Ø 115W10 CC4-M4-1010SC HK4
70 70 115W10 CC4-M4-7070 HK4
70 50 115W10 CC4-M4-7050 HK4
70 35 115W10 CC4-M4-7535 HK4
70 25 115W10 CC4-M4-7025 HK4
95 95 150W10 CC4-M4-9595 HK4
95 70 150W10 CC4-M4-9570 HK4
95 50 115W10 CC4-M4-9550 HK4
95 35 115W10 CC4-M4-9535 HK4
120 120 200W10 CC4-M4-120120 HK4
120 95 200W10 CC4-M4-12095 HK4
120 70 150W10 CC4-M4-12070 HK4
120 50 150W10 CC4-M4-12050 HK4
150 150 250W10 CC4-M4-150150 HK4
150 120 250W10 CC4-M4-150120 HK4
150 95 200W10 CC4-M4-15095 HK4
150 70 150W10 CC4-M4-15070 HK4
185 185 2 x 150W10 CC4-M4-185185 HK4
185 150 250W10 CC4-M4-185150 HK4
185 120 250W10 CC4-M4-185120 HK4
185 95 200W10 CC4-M4-18595 HK4
185 70 200W10 CC4-M4-18570 HK4
240 240 2 x 250W10 CC4-M5-240240 HK5
240 185 2 x 200W10 CC4-M5-240185 HK5
240 150 2 x 200W10 CC4-M5-240150 HK5
240 120 2 x 150W10 CC4-M5-240120 HK5

EARTHING SYSTEMS
63
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to Cable CC6


A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm 2 mm 2
16* 16* 65W10 CC6-M4-1616 HK4

25 25 45W10 CC6-M4-2525 HK4

35 35 65W10 CC6-M4-3535 HK4

35 25 65W10 CC6-M4-3525 HK4

50 50 90W10 CC6-M4-5050 HK4

50 35 65W10 CC6-M4-5035 HK4

50 25 65W10 CC6-M4-5025 HK4

70 70 115W10 CC6-M4-7070 HK4

70 50 115W10 CC6-M4-7050 HK4

70 35 90W10 CC6-M4-7535 HK4

70 25 90W10 CC6-M4-7025 HK4

95 95 150W10 CC6-M4-9595 HK4

95 70 115W10 CC6-M4-9570 HK4

95 50 115W10 CC6-M4-9550 HK4

95 35 115W10 CC6-M4-9535 HK4

120 120 200W10 CC6-M4-120120 HK4

120 95 200W10 CC6-M4-12095 HK4

120 70 150W10 CC6-M4-12070 HK4

120 50 115W10 CC6-M4-12050 HK4

64 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to Cable CC7


A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm 2 mm 2
16* 16* 65W10 CC7-M4-1616 HK4
25 25 45W10 CC7-M4-2525 HK4
35 35 65W10 CC7-M4-3535 HK4
35 25 65W10 CC7-M4-3525 HK4
8 mm Ø 8 mm Ø 90W10 CC7-M4-88SC HK4
50 50 90W10 CC7-M4-5050 HK4
50 35 90W10 CC7-M4-5035 HK4
50 25 65W10 CC7-M4-5025 HK4
10 mm Ø 10 mm Ø 115W10 CC7-M4-1010SC HK4
70 70 115W10 CC7-M4-7070 HK4
70 50 115W10 CC7-M4-7050 HK4
70 35 90W10 CC7-M4-7535 HK4
70 25 90W10 CC7-M4-7025 HK4
95 95 150W10 CC7-M4-9595 HK4
95 70 115W10 CC7-M4-9570 HK4
95 50 115W10 CC7-M4-9550 HK4
95 35 115W10 CC7-M4-9535 HK4
120 120 200W10 CC7-M4-120120 HK4
120 95 200W10 CC7-M4-12095 HK4
120 70 150W10 CC7-M4-12070 HK4
120 50 150W10 CC7-M4-12050 HK4
150 150 2 x 150W10 CC7-M5-150150 HK5
150 120 250W10 CC7-M4-150120 HK4
150 95 200W10 CC7-M4-15095 HK4
150 70 150W10 CC7-M4-15070 HK4
185 185 2 x 150W10 CC7-M5-185185 HK5
185 150 2 x 150W10 CC7-M5-185150 HK5
185 120 250W10 CC7-M4-185120 HK4
185 95 200W10 CC7-M4-18595 HK4
240 240 2 x 200W10 CC7-M5-240240 HK5
240 185 2 x 200W10 CC7-M5-240185 HK5
240 150 2 x 150W10 CC7-M5-240150 HK5
240 120 250W10 CC7-M4-240120 HK4
300 300 2 x 250W10 CC7-M5-300300 HK5
300 240 2 x 250W10 CC7-M5-300240 HK5
300 185 2 x 200W10 CC7-M5-300185 HK5
300 150 2 x 150W10 CC7-M5-300150 HK5

EARTHING SYSTEMS
65
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to Cable CC11


A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm 2 mm 2
50 50 150W10 CC11-M7-5050 HK7
70 70 200W10 CC11-M7-7070 HK7
95 95 250W10 CC11-M7-9595 HK7
120 120 2 x 150W10 CC11-M7-120120 HK7
150 150 2 x 200W10 CC11-M8-150150 HK8
185 185 2 x 250W10 CC11-M8-185185 HK8
240 240 2 x 200W10 CC11-M8-240240 HK8
8 mm Ø 8 mm Ø 150W10 CC11-M7-88SC HK7
10 mm Ø 10 mm Ø 150W10 CC11-M7-1010SC HK7

Cable to Cable CC14


A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm 2 mm 2
16* 16* 65W10 CC14-M4-1616 HK4
25 25 45W10 CC14-M4-2525 HK4
35 35 65W10 CC14-M4-3535 HK4
35 25 65W10 CC14-M4-3525 HK4
8 mm Ø 8 mm Ø 90W10 CC14-M4-88SC HK4
50 50 90W10 CC14-M4-5050 HK4
50 35 90W10 CC14-M4-5035 HK4
50 25 90W10 CC14-M4-5025 HK4
10 mm Ø 10 mm Ø 115W10 CC14-M4-1010SC HK4
70 70 115W10 CC14-M4-7070 HK4
70 50 115W10 CC14-M4-7050 HK4
70 35 90W10 CC14-M4-7535 HK4
70 25 90W10 CC14-M4-7025 HK4
95 95 150W10 CC14-M4-9595 HK4
95 70 150W10 CC14-M4-9570 HK4
95 50 150W10 CC14-M4-9550 HK4
95 35 115W10 CC14-M4-9535 HK4
120 120 200W10 CC14-M4-120120 HK4
120 95 200W10 CC14-M4-12095 HK4
120 70 200W10 CC14-M4-12070 HK4
120 50 150W10 CC14-M4-12050 HK4

66 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to Earth Rod CR1

A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
Ø Ø
12.7 1⁄2 “ 16* 65W10 CR1-M4-12716 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 65W10 CR1-M4-12725 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 35 65W10 CR1-M4-12735 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 65W10 CR1-M4-12750 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 8 mm Ø 65W10 CR1-M4-1278SC HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 70 90W10 CR1-M4-12770 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 95 90W10 CR1-M4-12795 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 120 90W10 CR1-M4-127120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 16* 65W10 CR1-M4-14216 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 65W10 CR1-M4-14225 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 35 65W10 CR1-M4-14235 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 90W10 CR1-M4-14250 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 8 mm Ø 90W10 CR1-M4-1428SC HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 70 90W10 CR1-M4-14270 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 95 90W10 CR1-M4-14295 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 120 90W10 CR1-M4-142120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 150 115W10 CR1-M4-142150 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 185 115W10 CR1-M4-142185 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 240 150W10 CR1-M4-142240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 16* 65W10 CR1-M4-17216 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 25 65W10 CR1-M4-17225 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 35 65W10 CR1-M4-17235 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 90W10 CR1-M4-17250 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 8 mm Ø 90W10 CR1-M4-1728SC HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 70 90W10 CR1-M4-17270 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 95 90W10 CR1-M4-17295 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 120 90W10 CR1-M4-172120 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 150 115W10 CR1-M4-172150 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 185 115W10 CR1-M4-172185 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 240 150W10 CR1-M4-172240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 300 200W10 CR1-M4-172300 HK4

EARTHING SYSTEMS
67
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to Earth Rod CR2

A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
Ø Ø
12.7 1⁄2 “ 16* 90W10 CR2-M4-12716 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 90W10 CR2-M4-12725 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 35 90W10 CR2-M4-12735 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 90W10 CR2-M4-12750 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 8 mm Ø 90W10 CR2-M4-1278SC HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 70 90W10 CR2-M4-12770 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 95 115W10 CR2-M4-12795 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 120 150W10 CR2-M4-127120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 16* 90W10 CR2-M4-14216 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 90W10 CR2-M4-14225 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 35 90W10 CR2-M4-14235 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 90W10 CR2-M4-14250 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 8 mm Ø 90W10 CR2-M4-1428SC HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 70 115W10 CR2-M4-14270 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 95 115W10 CR2-M4-14295 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 120 150W10 CR2-M4-142120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 150 200W10 CR2-M4-142150 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 185 200W10 CR2-M4-142185 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 240 250W10 CR2-M4-142240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 16* 90W10 CR2-M4-17216 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 25 90W10 CR2-M4-17225 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 35 90W10 CR2-M4-17235 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 115W10 CR2-M4-17250 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 8 mm Ø 115W10 CR2-M4-1728SC HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 70 115W10 CR2-M4-17270 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 95 115W10 CR2-M4-17295 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 120 150W10 CR2-M4-172120 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 150 200W10 CR2-M4-172150 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 185 200W10 CR2-M4-172185 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 240 250W10 CR2-M4-172240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 300 2 x 150W10 CR2-M5-172300 HK5

68 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to Earth Rod CR3

A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
Ø Ø
12.7 1⁄2 “ 16* 90W10 CR3-M9-12716 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 90W10 CR3-M9-12725 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 35 90W10 CR3-M9-12735 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 115W10 CR3-M9-12750 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 8 mm Ø 115W10 CR3-M9-1278SC HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 70 115W10 CR3-M9-12770 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 95 115W10 CR3-M9-12795 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 120 150W10 CR3-M9-127120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 16* 90W10 CR3-M9-14216 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 90W10 CR3-M9-14225 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 35 90W10 CR3-M9-14235 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 115W10 CR3-M9-14250 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 8 mm Ø 115W10 CR3-M9-1428SC HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 70 115W10 CR3-M9-14270 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 95 115W10 CR3-M9-14295 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 120 150W10 CR3-M9-142120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 150 150W10 CR3-M9-142150 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 185 200W10 CR3-M9-142185 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 240 2 x 200W10 CR3-M9-142240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 16* 90W10 CR3-M9-17216 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 25 90W10 CR3-M9-17225 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 35 90W10 CR3-M9-17235 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 115W10 CR3-M9-17250 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 8 mm Ø 115W10 CR3-M9-1728SC HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 70 150W10 CR3-M9-17270 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 95 150W10 CR3-M9-17295 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 120 200W10 CR3-M9-172120 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 150 250W10 CR3-M9-172150 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 185 2 x 200W10 CR3-10-172185 HK5
17.2 3⁄4 “ 240 2 x 250W10 CR3-10-172240 HK5
17.2 3⁄4 “ 300 3x 300W10 CR3-10-172300 HK5

[6

EARTHING SYSTEMS
69
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

)UDPH
)UDPHVFRPHDGGLWLRQLQWRWKHSURFHVVWRKDQGOHFODPSZKLOHXVLQJWKUHHPROGSDUWV

Part No Description
HKF4 Frame for use with Handle Clamp HK4
HKF5 Frame for use with Handle Clamp HK5

70 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to Earth Rod CR17

A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
Ø Ø
12.7 1⁄2 “ 16* 90W10 CR17-M4-12716 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 90W10 CR17-M4-12725 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 35 90W10 CR17-M4-12735 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 115W10 CR17-M4-12750 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 8 mm Ø 115W10 CR17-M4-1278SC HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 70 150W10 CR17-M4-12770 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 95 200W10 CR17-M4-12795 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 120 250W10 CR17-M4-127120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 16* 90W10 CR17-M4-14216 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 90W10 CR17-M4-14225 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 35 90W10 CR17-M4-14235 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 115W10 CR17-M4-14250 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 8 mm Ø 115W10 CR17-M4-1428SC HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 70 200W10 CR17-M4-14270 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 95 250W10 CR17-M4-14295 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 120 250W10 CR17-M4-142120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 150 250W10 CR17-M4-142150 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 185 2 x 150W10 CR17-M4-142185 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 240 2 x 200W10 CR17-M4-142240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 16* 115W10 CR17-M4-17216 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 25 115W10 CR17-M4-17225 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 35 115W10 CR17-M4-17235 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 150W10 CR17-M4-17250 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 8 mm Ø 150W10 CR17-M4-1728SC HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 70 200W10 CR17-M4-17270 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 95 250W10 CR17-M4-17295 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 120 250W10 CR17-M4-172120 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 150 2 x 150W10 CR17-M4-172150 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 185 2 x 150W10 CR17-M4-172185 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 240 2 x 200W10 CR17-M4-172240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 300 2 x 250W10 CR17-M5-172300 HK5

EARTHING SYSTEMS
71
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to Earth Rod CR24

A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
Ø Ø
12.7 1⁄2 “ 16* 90W10 CR24-M4-12716 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 90W10 CR24-M4-12725 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 35 90W10 CR24-M4-12735 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 115W10 CR24-M4-12750 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 8 mm Ø 115W10 CR24-M4-1278SC HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 70 150W10 CR24-M4-12770 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 95 200W10 CR24-M4-12795 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 120 250W10 CR24-M4-127120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 16* 115W10 CR24-M4-14216 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 115W10 CR24-M4-14225 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 35 115W10 CR24-M4-14235 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 200W10 CR24-M4-14250 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 8 mm Ø 200W10 CR24-M4-1428SC HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 70 250W10 CR24-M4-14270 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 95 250W10 CR24-M4-14295 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 120 2 x 150W10 CR24-M4-142120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 150 2 x 150W10 CR24-M4-142150 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 185 2 x 200W10 CR24-M4-142185 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 240 2 x 200W10 CR24-M4-142240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 16* 115W10 CR24-M4-17216 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 25 115W10 CR24-M4-17225 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 35 115W10 CR24-M4-17235 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 250W10 CR24-M4-17250 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 8 mm Ø 250W10 CR24-M4-1728SC HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 70 2 x 150W10 CR24-M4-17270 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 95 2 x 150W10 CR24-M4-17295 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 120 2 x 150W10 CR24-M4-172120 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 150 2 x 200W10 CR24-M4-172150 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 185 2 x 200W10 CR24-M4-172185 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 240 2 x 250W10 CR24-M4-172240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 300 2 x 250W10 CR24-M5-172300 HK5

72 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to Reinforcing Bar CRE1

A
B
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle Packing
mm 2
Ø
10-40 16* 45W10 CRE-M1-3-16 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 25 45W10 CRE-M1-3-25 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 35 45W10 CRE-M1-3-35 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 8 mm Ø 90W10 CRE-M1-3-8SC HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 50 90W10 CRE-M1-3-50 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 10 mm Ø 90W10 CRE-M1-3-10SC HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 70 90W10 CRE-M1-3-70 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 95 90W10 CRE-M1-3-95 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 120 90W10 CRE-M1-3-120 HK3-B PACK-A

&DEOHWR5HLQIRUFLQJ%DU&5(3DUW

A
B
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm 2
Ø
16 16* 90W10 CRE2-M4-16R16 HK4
16 25 90W10 CRE2-M4-61R25 HK4
16 35 90W10 CRE2-M4-16R35 HK4
16 8 mm Ø 115W10 CRE2-M4-16R8SC HK4
16 50 115W10 CRE2-M4-16R50 HK4
16 10 mm Ø 115W10 CRE2-M4-16R10SC HK4
16 70 115W10 CRE2-M4-16R70 HK4
16 95 150W10 CRE2-M4-16R95 HK4
16 120 150W10 CRE2-M4-16R120 HK4
16 150 200W10 CRE-2M16-4R150 HK4
16 185 200W10 CRE-2M16-4R185 HK4
16 240 250W10 CRE-2M16-4R240 HK4
16 300 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M16-4R300 HK4
18 16* 115W10 CRE-2M18-4R16 HK4
18 25 115W10 CRE-2M18-4R25 HK4
18 35 115W10 CRE-2M18-4R35 HK4
18 8 mm Ø 150W10 CRE-2M18-4R8SC HK4
18 50 150W10 CRE-2M18-4R50 HK4
18 10 mm Ø 150W10 CRE-2M18-4R10SC HK4
18 70 150W10 CRE-2M18-4R70 HK4
18 95 150W10 CRE-2M18-4R95 HK4

EARTHING SYSTEMS
73
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

&DEOHWR5HLQIRUFLQJ%DU&5(3DUW

A
B
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm 2
Ø
18 120 200W10 CRE2-M4-18R120 HK4
18 150 200W10 CRE2-M4-18R150 HK4
18 185 200W10 CRE2-M4-18R185 HK4
18 240 250W10 CRE2-M4-18R240 HK4
18 300 2 x 150W10 CRE2-M4-18R300 HK4
20 16* 115W10 CRE2-M4-20R16 HK4
20 25 115W10 CRE2-M4-20R25 HK4
20 35 115W10 CRE2-M4-20R35 HK4
20 8 mm Ø 150W10 CRE2-M4-20R8SC HK4
20 50 150W10 CRE-2M20-4R50 HK4
20 10 mm Ø 150W10 CRE-2M20-4R10SC HK4
20 70 200W10 CRE-2M20-4R70 HK4
20 95 200W10 CRE-2M20-4R95 HK4
20 120 200W10 CRE-2M20-4R120 HK4
20 150 200W10 CRE-2M20-4R150 HK4
20 185 250W10 CRE-2M20-4R185 HK4
20 240 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M20-4R240 HK4
20 300 2 x 200W10 CRE-2M20-5R300 HK5
25 16* 250W10 CRE-2M25-4R16 HK4
25 25 250W10 CRE-2M25-4R25 HK4
25 35 250W10 CRE-2M25-4R35 HK4
25 8 mm Ø 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M25-4R8SC HK4
25 50 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M25-4R50 HK4
25 10 mm Ø 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M25-4R10SC HK4
25 70 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M25-4R70 HK4
25 95 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M25-4R95 HK4
25 120 2 x 200W10 CRE-2M25-4R120 HK4
25 150 2 X 200W10 CRE-2M25-4R150 HK4
25 185 2 X 250W10 CRE-2M25-5R185 HK5
25 240 3 X 200W10 CRE-2M25-5R240 HK5
25 300 3 x 200W10 CRE-2M25-5R300 HK5
30 16* 250W10 CRE-2M30-4R16 HK4
30 25 250W10 CRE-2M30-4R25 HK4
30 35 250W10 CRE-2M30-4R35 HK4
30 8 mm Ø 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M30-4R8SC HK4
30 50 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M30-4R50 HK4

74 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

&DEOHWR5HLQIRUFLQJ%DU&5(3DUW

A
B
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm 2
Ø
30 10 mm Ø 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M30-4R10SC HK4
30 70 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M30-4R70 HK4
30 95 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M30-5R95 HK5
30 120 2 x 200W10 CRE-2M30-5R120 HK5
30 150 2 X 200W10 CRE-2M30-5R150 HK5
30 185 2 X 250W10 CRE-2M30-5R185 HK5
30 240 3 X 200W10 CRE-2M30-5R240 HK5
30 300 3 X 200W10 CRE-2M30-5R300 HK5

[6

Cable to Reinforcing Bar CRE3

A
B
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle Packing
mm 2
Ø
10-40 16* 45W10 CRE3-3-3-16 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 25 45W10 CRE3-3-25 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 35 45W10 CRE3-3-3-35 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 8 mm Ø 90W10 CRE3-3-8SC HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 50 90W10 CRE3-3-50 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 10 mm Ø 90W10 CRE3-3-10SC HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 70 90W10 CRE3-3-70 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 95 90W10 CRE3-3-95 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 120 90W10 CRE3-3-120 HK3-A PACK-A

EARTHING SYSTEMS
75
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Cable to Reinforcing Bar CRE6

A
B
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle Packing
mm 2
Ø
10-40 16* 45W10 CRE6-3-3-16 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 25 45W10 CRE6-3-25 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 35 45W10 CRE6-3-3-35 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 8 mm Ø 65W10 CRE6-3-8SC HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 50 65W10 CRE6-3-50 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 10 mm Ø 90W10 CRE6-3-10SC HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 70 90W10 CRE6-3-70 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 95 90W10 CRE6-3-95 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 120 115W10 CRE6-3-120 HK3-A PACK-A

Cable to Reinforcing Bar CRE17

A
B
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle Packing
mm 2
Ø
10-40 16* 45W10 CRE17-3-3-16 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 25 45W10 CRE17-3-25 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 35 45W10 CRE17-3-3-35 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 8 mm Ø 90W10 CRE17-3-8SC HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 50 90W10 CRE17-3-50 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 10 mm Ø 90W10 CRE17-3-10SC HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 70 90W10 CRE17-3-70 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 95 90W10 CRE17-3-95 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 120 90W10 CRE17-3-120 HK3-B PACK-A

76 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6

A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2

16* 45W10 CS1-M4-16 HK4


25 45W10 CS1-M4-25 HK4
35 45W10 CS1-M4-35 HK4
8 mm Ø 90W10 CS1-M4-8SC HK4
50 90W10 CS1-M4-50 HK4
10 mm Ø 90W10 CS1-M4-10SC HK4
70 90W10 CS1-M4-70 HK4
95 115W10 CS1-M4-95 HK4
120 115W10 CS1-M4-120 HK4
150 150W10 CS1-M4-150 HK4
185 200W10 CS1-M4-185 HK4
240 200W10 CS1-M4-240 HK4
300 200W10 CS1-M4-300 HK4

&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6

A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2

16* 45W10 CS2-M4-16 HK4


25 45W10 CS2-M4-25 HK4
35 45W10 CS2-M4-35 HK4
8 mm Ø 90W10 CS2-M4-8SC HK4
50 90W10 CS2-M4-50 HK4
10 mm Ø 115W10 CS2-M4-10SC HK4
70 115W10 CS2-M4-70 HK4
95 115W10 CS2-M4-95 HK4
120 150W10 CS2-M4-120 HK4
150 200W10 CS2-M4-150 HK4
185 250W10 CS2-M4-185 HK4
240 2 x 150W10 CS2-M5-240 HK5
300 2 x 200W10 CS2-M5-300 HK5

EARTHING SYSTEMS
77
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6

A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2

16* 45W10 CS3-M4-16 HK4


25 45W10 CS3-M4-25 HK4
35 45W10 CS3-M4-35 HK4
8 mm Ø 65W10 CS3-M4-8SC HK4
50 65W10 CS3-M4-50 HK4
10 mm Ø 90W10 CS3-M4-10SC HK4
70 90W10 CS3-M4-70 HK4
95 115W10 CS3-M4-95 HK4
120 115W10 CS3-M4-120 HK4
150 115W10 CS3-M4-150 HK4
185 200W10 CS3-M4-185 HK4
240 200W10 CS3-M4-240 HK4
300 250W10 CS3-M4-300 HK4

&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6

A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2

16* 65W10 CS7-M4-16 HK4


25 65W10 CS7-M4-25 HK4
35 65W10 CS7-M4-35 HK4
8 mm Ø 90W10 CS7-M4-8SC HK4
50 90W10 CS7-M4-50 HK4
10 mm Ø 150W10 CS7-M4-10SC HK4
70 150W10 CS3-M4-70 HK4
95 200W10 CS7-M5-95 HK4
120 200W10 CS7-M5-120 HK4
150 250W10 CS7-M5-150 HK4
185 2 x 150W10 CS7-M9-185 HK4
240 2 x 150W10 CS7-M9-240 HK4
300 2 x 200W10 CS7-10-300 HK5

78 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6

A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2

16* 45W10 CS8-M2-16 HK2


25 45W10 CS8-M2-25 HK2
35 45W10 CS8-M2-35 HK2
8 mm Ø 45W10 CS8-M2-8SC HK2
50 45W10 CS8-M2-50 HK2
10 mm Ø 65W10 CS8-M2-10SC HK2
70 65W10 CS8-M2-70 HK2
95 90W10 CS8-M5-95 HK2
120 115W10 CS8-M4-120 HK4
150 150W10 CS8-M4-150 HK4
185 200W10 CS8-M4-185 HK4
240 200W10 CS8-M4-240 HK4
300 250W10 CS8-M4-300 HK4

&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6

A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2

16* 45W10 CS9-M2-16 HK2


25 45W10 CS9-M2-25 HK2
35 45W10 CS9-M2-35 HK2
8 mm Ø 90W10 CS9-M4-8SC HK4
50 90W10 CS9-M4-50 HK4
10 mm Ø 115W10 CS9-M4-10SC HK4
70 115W10 CS9-M4-70 HK4
95 115W10 CS9-M4-95 HK4
120 150W10 CS9-M4-120 HK4
150 200W10 CS9-M4-150 HK4
185 250W10 CS9-M4-185 HK4
240 2 x 150W10 CS9-M4-240 HK5

EARTHING SYSTEMS
79
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6

A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2

16* 45W10 CS25-M4-16 HK4


25 45W10 CS25-M4-25 HK4
35 45W10 CS25-M4-35 HK4
8 mm Ø 65W10 CS25-M4-8SC HK4
50 65W10 CS25-M4-50 HK4
10 mm Ø 90W10 CS25-M4-10SC HK4
70 90W10 CS25-M4-70 HK4
95 115W10 CS25-M4-95 HK4
120 115W10 CS25-M4-120 HK4
150 150W10 CS25-M4-150 HK4
185 200W10 CS25-M4-185 HK4
240 200W10 CS25-M4-240 HK4
300 250W10 CS25-M4-300 HK4

&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6

A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2

16* 45W10 CS27-M4-16 HK4


25 45W10 CS27-M4-25 HK4
35 45W10 CS27-M4-35 HK4
8 mm Ø 65W10 CS27-M4-8SC HK4
50 65W10 CS27-M4-50 HK4
10 mm Ø 115W10 CS27-M4-10SC HK4
70 115W10 CS27-M4-70 HK4
95 150W10 CS27-M4-95 HK4
120 150W10 CS27-M4-120 HK4
150 200W10 CS27-M5-150 HK5
185 250W10 CS27-M5-185 HK5
240 2 x 150W10 CS27-M5-240 HK5
300 2 x 200W10 CS27-M5-300 HK5

80 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6

B
A
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
Ø
2.5 <125 15W10 CS32-M1-2.5-A HK1
2.5 >125 15W10 CS32-M1-2.5-B HK1
4 <125 15W10 CS32-M1-M4-A HK1
4 >125 15W10 CS32-M1-M4-B HK1
6 <125 15W10 CS32-M1-6-A HK1
6 >125 15W10 CS32-M1-6-B HK1
10 <125 25W10 CS32-M1-10-A HK1
10 >125 25W10 CS32-M1-10-B HK1
16 <125 45W10 CS32-M2-16-A HK2
16 >125 45W10 CS32-M2-16-B HK2
25 <70 25W10 CS32-M1-25-C HK1
25 70-165 25W10 CS32-M1-25-D HK1
25 >165 25W10 CS32-M1-25-E HK1
35 <70 45W10 CS32-M2-35-C HK2
35 70-165 45W10 CS32-M2-35-D HK2
35 165-250 45W10 CS32-M2-35-F HK2
35 >250 45W10 CS32-M2-35-G HK2
50 <70 45W10 CS32-M2-50-C HK2
50 <125 45W10 CS32-M2-50-D HK2
50 70-165 45W10 CS32-M2-50-F HK2
50 165-250 45W10 CS32-M2-50-G HK2
70 <70 65W10 CS32-M2-70-C HK2
70 70-165 65W10 CS32-M2-70-D HK2
70 165-250 65W10 CS32-M2-70-F HK2
70 >250 65W10 CS32-M2-70-G HK2

EARTHING SYSTEMS
81
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6

B
A
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
Ø
2.5 <125 15W10 CS34-M2-2.5-A HK2
2.5 >125 15W10 CS34-M2-2.5-B HK2
4 <125 15W10 CS34-M2-M4-A HK2
4 >125 15W10 CS34-M2-M4-B HK2
6 <125 15W10 CS34-M2-6-A HK2
6 >125 15W10 CS34-M2-6-B HK2
10 <125 32W10 CS34-M2-10-A HK2
10 >125 45W10 CS34-M2-10-B HK2
16 <125 45W10 CS34-M2-16-A HK2
16 >125 45W10 CS34-M2-16-B HK2
25 <70 32W10 CS34-M1-25-C HK2
25 70-165 32W10 CS34-M1-25-D HK2
25 >165 32W10 CS34-M1-25-E HK2
35 <70 45W10 CS34-M2-35-C HK2
35 70-165 45W10 CS34-M2-35-D HK2
35 165-250 45W10 CS34-M2-35-F HK2
35 >250 45W10 CS34-M2-35-G HK2
50 <70 65W10 CS34-M2-50-C HK2
50 70-165 65W10 CS34-M2-50-D HK2
50 165-250 65W10 CS34-M2-50-F HK2
50 >250 65W10 CS34-M2-50-G HK2

6WXGWR6WHHO6XUIDFH56

M6 25W10 RS1-M4-M6 HK4 RSSM6


M8 32W10 RS1-M4-M8 HK4 RSSM8
M10 45W10 RS1-M4-M10 HK4 RSSM10
M12 65W10 RS1-M4-M12 HK4 RSSM12
M16 115W10 RS1-M4-M16 HK4 RSSM16

82 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS

Handle Clamps :

Part No. Description

HK1 Handle Clamp 1


HK2 Handle Clamp 2
HK3 Handle Clamp 3
HK4 Handle Clamp 4
HK5 Handle Clamp 5
HK6 Handle Clamp 6
HK7 Handle Clamp 7
HK8 Handle Clamp 8
HK9 Handle Clamp 9

)UDPHV

Part No. Description

HKF4 Frame for use with Handle Clamp HK4


HKF5 Frame for use with Handle Clamp HK5

Accessories:

Part No. Description

HCCB Cable cleaning brush


HMCB Mold cleaning brush
HTCB Tape cleaning brush
HFG Flint gun
HFGR Replacement Flints (Pack of 100)
HMCS Mold cleaning scraper
HWT Welding toolbox

EARTHING SYSTEMS
83
)RU0RUH,QIRUPDWLRQ
3OHDVH9LVLW
ZZZEDKUDFDEOHVFRPHDUWKLQJ
J0902003 Cover 2008 10/12/08 10:35 Page 1

A.N. WALLIS - Earthing & Lightning Protection Product Catalogue

Earthing & Lightning Protection


A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd
Greasley Street, Bulwell, Nottingham, East Midlands, NG6 8NG, United Kingdom
Product Catalogue
Tel +44 (0) 115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0) 115 875 6630
e-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com FM 73972
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 2

Welcome to our
latest Earthing
& Lightning
Protection catalogue
We hope you will find your
catalogue both informative
and easy to use. We have
included much more
information within the tables
and drawings to help you
select the products you require.

There are both new products and a wider selection of


existing ranges included within this new catalogue.

Many existing Wallis products have undergone design


changes which have improved their mechanical
performance and resistance to corrosion.

Wallis Earthing & Lightning Protection materials supplied


from our manufacturing facilities in Nottingham, UK are
used on projects throughout the world.

Hospitals in Kuwait, telecoms towers in Thailand, schools in


Oman, railways in Hong
Kong, residential towers
in the UAE, petro
chemical facilities in
Malaysia and
substations in Saudi
Arabia all use Wallis
Earthing & Lightning
Protection.

We are constantly working


to improve our literature, so
if you have any suggestions
for us to improve this
catalogue in the future, we
would be pleased to hear
from you.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 3

CONTENTS

Introduction 2–3

Product Locator 4–5

Alphabetical Product Index 6–8

Earthing 9 – 40

Lightning Protection 41 – 86

Conductors 87 – 104

Fasteners & Fixings 105 – 111

Part Number Index 112 – 115

How to Order 116

0A. N. WALLIS
A. N. WALLIS
& Co. Ltd
& Co.
• Tel
Ltd +44
• Tel
(0)115
+44 (0)115
927 1721
927•1721
Fax +44
• Fax
(0)115
+44 (0)115
875 6630
875•6630
E-mail
• E-mail
info@an-wallis.com
info@an-wallis.com
• Website
• Website
www.an-wallis.com 1
www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 4

INTRODUCTION

Welcome to Wallis A commitment to excellent customer service also drives what


we do. Part of this is ensuring that we maintain good stock
levels so you can rely on same-day despatch for many of our
products.

Founded over 60 years ago, we have a long tradition of


providing first class earthing and lightning protection
products. What’s more, we believe we have as wide a range
of products as can be found in the industry.

We also deliver reassuring levels of quality. All of our


equipment is designed, manufactured and tested to meet
British, European and International standards at our own
facilities in Nottingham, UK, which include a non-ferrous
foundry and machine shops. We are quality approved and
accredited to BS EN ISO 9001:2000.

2 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 5

INTRODUCTION

With extensive experience and technical expertise, we can also The Wallis Cu-nnect exothermic welding system is a simple,
design and advise on earthing and structural lightning protection economical method of making permanent, very high quality
schemes to suit individual requirements. We have designed and electrical connections mainly between copper to copper or
supplied materials for projects including high-rise commercial copper to steel. The system is completely portable and
and residential buildings, bridges, telecommunication requires no outside source of power or heat.
installations, transmission lines and substations.
We also offer a comprehensive range of surge protection
Such is our reputation for high standards that Wallis devices for mains power, data, signal and telephone lines, to
equipment is used around the world, including the Middle protect sensitive electronic equipment from damage caused
East and Far East, with stocking distributors in key areas. by transient over-voltages.
If you’ve selected Wallis for structural lightning protection Please contact our sales office for further details.
products, why not make us your choice for exothermic
welding and surge protection equipment too.

Product Product Name


Using This Catalogue Chapter
Product Section
This catalogue is designed to be as easy to
use as possible. To help find the product
you need, there is an alphabetical product Dimensions
index, a part number index and a product
locator. Every product featured has its own
technical and application drawings and a Product
detailed product table. Materials Illustration
Part Number -
specifications are also included. Full Index
See Pages
112 to 115.

Application
Example
Material -
Specification
& Finishes

Technical
Drawing

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 3
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 6

PRODUCT LOCATOR

THIS ILLUSTRATION IS NOT INTENDED TO


REPRESENT A LIGHTNING PROTECTION OR
EARTHING SYSTEM CONFORMING TO ANY
RELEVANT SPECIFICATION, STANDARD OR
CODE OF PRACTICE

4 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 7

PRODUCT LOCATOR

KEY
Item Product Page Item Product Page

1 Bare Copper Tape 90 14 Air Terminal Fixings 45-47, 62,


2 Bare Aluminium Tape 96 72-74
3 PVC Covered Tape 91, 96 15 Slate Holdfasts 15
4 Solid Circular Conductor 98, 99 16 Air Terminals 44, 62, 72
5 Bare Stranded Copper Conductor 100 17 Earth Rods 12, 14, 16,
6 PVC Insulated Stranded 18-19
Copper Conductor 101 18 Earth Rod Clamps 21
7 Conductor Fixings 48-51, 64-65 19 Earth Rod Clamps 20
8 Strike Pads / Interceptor Plates 79 20 Earth Inspection Housings 27-29
9 Square Tape Clamps 57 21 Earth Plates & Lattice Mats 25
10 Bi-Metallic Connectors 60, 68 22 Earth Rod Couplings 13, 15, 17
11 Test Clamps 58-59 23 Earth Bars & Disconnecting Link 32-33
12 ‘MV’ Clamps 66 24 Flexible Copper Braid Bonds 36
13 Bonding Clamps 60-61, 68-71 25 Earth Bonding Points 31

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 5
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 8

ALPHABETICAL PRODUCT INDEX

A ‘G’ Type 21
‘A’ Clamps 20 ‘MV’ Type 66
Adhesive DC Clips 54 ‘U’ Bolt 22
Air Rod Brackets, Side Mounting 47 Interface Test 67
Air Rod Saddles Metalwork Bonding 68
Cable 74 Multi-Purpose ‘B’ Bonds 70
Flat 46 Oblong Test 58
Free-Standing 85 Parallel Groove 35
Light Duty 45 Plate Type Test 59
Multi-Purpose 62 Screw Down Test
Ridge 46 Split Connector 23
Air Rods 44, 62, 72, 84 Square Cable 77
Air Terminal Saddles Square Tape 57
Cable 74 ‘T’ Connector 66
Flat 46 Tower Earth 35, 70, 78
Free-Standing 85 Cleaning Solution 55
Light Duty 45 Clips
Multi-Purpose 62 Adhesive DC 54
Ridge 46 Bitumen Felt DC 55
Air Terminals 44, 62, 72, 84 Metallic Cable 76
Aluminium Conductors, Solid Circular 98-99 Metallic Conductor 64
Aluminium Tapes 96 Metallic DC 48
Anti-Vandal Non-Metallic DC 49
Cable Guards 103 Non-Metallic DC with Plug 50
Tape Guards 97 Non-Metallic Down Conductor 65
One Hole 64
Push-In Roof Conductor 65
B Tape 51
‘B’ Bonds 60, 69, 70
Weldable DC 53
Back Plate Holdfasts 56
Compound, Low-Resistance Earthing 26
Bare
Compression Connectors
Aluminium Tapes 96
‘C’ Crimp 38
Copper Flat Braids 95
Terminals 39, 40
Copper Round Braids 104
Concrete
Copper Tapes 90
Bases 86
Hard Drawn Copper Bars 94
Earth Inspection Housings 29
Perforated Copper Tape 97
Conductors
Solid Circular Conductors 98-99
Solid Circular 98-99
Stranded Copper Conductors 100
Stranded Copper 100-103
Bentonite 26
Connectors
Bi-Metallic Connectors 60, 68
‘C’ Crimp 38
Bitumen Felt
‘T’ Clamp 66
DC Clips 55
Bi-Metallic 60, 68
Roll 82
Cable to Tape 78
Blocks, Earth 34
Solid Circular to Tape 67
Bonding Clamps
Universal Cable 77
‘B’ Bonds 60
Copperbond Earth Rods 12
Circular ‘B’ Bonds 69
Copper Bars 94
Metalwork Bonding 68
Copper Conductors
Multi-Purpose ‘B’ Bonds 70
Solid Circular 98-99
Parallel Groove 35
Stranded 100-103
Rainwater Pipe 61, 69
Copper Braids
Tower Earth 35, 70, 78
Flat 95
Watermain Pipe Bond 61
Round 104
Bonding Points 31
Copper Nails, Round Head 111
Bosses, Earth 34
Copper Tapes
Brackets, Side Mounting Air Rod 47, 73
Bare 90
Braid Bonds 36
Green & Yellow PVC Insulated 92
Braids
Lead Covered 92
Flat 95
LSOH Covered 92
Round 104
Perforated Bare 97
PVC Covered 91
C Tinned 93
‘C’ Crimp Connectors 38
Couplings
Cable Guards, Anti-Vandal 103
Rod to Cable 74
Cable Shoes 74
Rod to Tape 47
Cable to Tape Connectors 78
Threaded 13
Circular ‘B’ Bonds 69
Countersunk
Circular Conductors 98-99
Machine Screws 110
Circular Conductor Shoes 71
Wood Screws 109
Clamps
Coupling Dowels 15, 17
‘A’ Type 20
Crimp Connectors 38
‘B’ Bonds 60
Cross-Profile Galvanised Steel Earth Rod 19

6 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 9

ALPHABETICAL PRODUCT INDEX

D Cross-Profile 19
DC Clips Galvanised Steel Earth Rod Set 18
Adhesive DC 54 Glazing Bar Holdfasts 56
Bitumen Felt DC 55 Green & Yellow Insulating Tape 82
Metallic 48 Green & Yellow PVC Insulated
Non-Metallic DC 49 Copper Tapes 92
Non-Metallic DC with Plug 50 Stranded Copper Conductors 101
Non-Metallic Down Conductor 65 Guards, Anti-Vandal
Push-In Roof Conductor 65 Cable 103
Weldable DC 53 Tape 97
Disconnecting Link 33
Down Conductor Clips, Non-Metallic 65 H
Dowels Heavy Duty Earth Inspection Housings 27
for Solid Copper Earth Rods 15 Hexagon
for Stainless Steel Earth Rods 17 Head Set Screws 106-107
Driving Heads Nuts 107
for Copperbond Earth Rods 13 Hard Drawn Copper Bars 94
for Solid Copper Earth Rods 15 Holdfasts
for Stainless Steel Earth Rods 17 Back Plate 56
Driving Spikes Glazing Bar 56
for Solid Copper Earth Rods 15 Pyramid 71
for Stainless Steel Earth Rods 17 Slate 52, 63

E I
Earth Bar Insulators 30 Inhibiting Compound 80
Earth Bar Link 33 Inspection Housings
Earth Bars Concrete 29
for Earth Inspection Housings 27, 28, 29 Heavy Duty 27
Standard Range 32, 33 Light Duty 28
Static 37 Inspection Housing Earth Bars
Earth Blocks 34 Concrete 29
Earth Bonding Points 31 Heavy Duty 27
Earth Bosses 34 Light Duty 28
Earth Clamps Insulators 30
‘A’ Type 20 Insulating Tape Green & Yellow 82
‘G’ Type 21 Interceptor Plates 79
‘U’ Bolt Type 22 Interface Test Clamps 67
Split Connector Type 24
Parallel Groove Type 35 J
Tower Earth Type 35, 70 Junction Clamps 57, 59, 66, 67, 77, 78
Earth Inspection Housings
Concrete 29 L
Heavy Duty Plastic 27 Lattice Mats 25
Light Duty Plastic 28 Lead Covered
Earth Receptacle, Static 37 Copper Tapes 92
Earth Rod Clamps Stranded Copper Conductors 103
‘A’ Type 20 Light Duty
‘G’ Type 21 Air Rod Saddles 45
‘U’ Bolt Type 22 Earth Inspection Housings 28
Split Connector Type 24 Link, Disconnecting 33
Earth Rod Seals 30 Low-Resistance Earthing Compound 26
Earth Plates, Solid Copper 25 LSOH Covered Copper Tapes 92
Earth Rods
Copperbond 12
Solid Copper 14 M
Stainless Steel 16 ‘MV’ Clamps 66
Earthing Compound Mats, Solid Copper Lattice 25
Bentonite 26 Metallic Cable Clips 76
Low-Resistance 26 Metallic Conductor Clips 64
Eyebolts 37 Metallic DC Clips 48
Metalwork Bonding Clamps 68
Multi-Point 45, 72
F Multi-Purpose ‘B’ Bonds 70
Flat Air Rod Saddles 46
Multi-Purpose Air Rod Saddles 62
Flat
Braids 95
Washers 108 N
Flexible Copper Braid Bonds 36 Nails, Copper Round Head 111
Flux 83 Non-Metallic DC Clips 49
Free-Standing Air Terminal Supports 85 Non-Metallic DC Clips with Plug 50
Free-Standing Air Terminals 84 Non-Metallic Down Conductor Clips 65

G O
Oblong Test Clamps 58
‘G’ Clamps 21
One Hole Cable Clips 75
Galvanised Steel Earth Rods

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 7
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 10

ALPHABETICAL PRODUCT INDEX

One Hole Conductor Clips 64 Split Bolt Connectors 36


Oxide Inhibiting Compound 80 Split Connector Clamps 24
Spring Washers 108
P Square Cable Clamps 77
Parallel Groove Clamps 35 Square Junction Clamps 57
Perforated Copper Tape 97 Square Tape Clamps 57
Pipe Bonds Stainless Steel Earth Rods 16
Rainwater 61, 69 Static
Watermain 61 Earth Bar 37
Plate Type Test Clamps 59 Earth Receptacle 37
Plates Stranded Copper Conductors 100-103
Interceptor 79 Strike Pads 79
Solid Copper 25 Surface Primer 55
Plastic Inspection Housings
Heavy Duty 27 T
Light Duty 28 ‘T’ Connector Clamps 66
Wall Plugs 110 Tape
Primer, Surface 55 Bare Aluminium 96
Protective Pad 86 Bare Copper 90
Puddle Flanges 80 Bare Perforated Copper 97
Push-In Roof Conductor Clips 65 Green & Yellow PVC Insulated Copper 92
PVC Covered Lead Covered Copper 92
Aluminium Tapes 96 LSOH Covered Copper 92
Copper Tapes 91 PVC Covered Aluminium 96
Solid Circular Conductors 98-99 PVC Covered Copper 91
PVC Insulated Green & Yellow Tinned Copper 93
Copper Tapes 92 Tape Clamps
Stranded Copper Conductors 101 ‘A’ Type 20
Pyramid Holdfast 71 ‘U’ Bolt 22
Square 57
R Tape Clips 51
Rainwater Pipe Bonds 61, 69 Tape Guards, Anti-Vandal 97
Re-bar Clamps 23 Taper Pointed Air Rods 44, 72
Receptacle, Static Earth 73 Terminals, Compression 39, 40
Ridge Saddles, Air Rod 46 Test Clamps
Rivets, Round Head 111 Interface 67
Rod to Cable Couplings 74 Oblong 58
Rod to Tape Couplings 47 Plate Type 59
Rods, Earth Screw Down 59
Copperbond 12 Threaded
Solid Copper 14 Copperbond Earth Rods 12
Stainless Steel 16 Couplings 13
Roof Conductor Clips, Push-In 65 Driving Heads 13
Round Head Tinmans Solder 83
Copper Nails 111 Tinned
Rivets 111 Copper Flat Braids 95
Wood Screws 109 Copper Tapes 93
Hard Drawn Copper Bars 94
S Stranded Copper Conductors 103
Saddles, Air Rod Tower Earth Clamps 35, 70, 78
Cable 74
Flat 46 U
Light Duty 45 ‘U’ Bolt Clamps 22
Multi-Purpose 62 Universal Cable Connectors 77
Ridge 46 Universal Welding Solvent 55
Screw Down Test Clamp 59 Unthreaded Copperbond Earth Rod 12
Screws 109-110
Sealing Tape 81
Seals 30 V
Set Screws, Hexagon Head Set 106-107 Vandal Guards
Side Mounting Air Rod Brackets 47, 73 Cable 103
Silfos 81 Tape 97
Slate Holdfasts 52, 63
Solder Tinmans 83 W
Solid Circular Conductors 98-99 Wall Plugs 110
Solid Circular to Tape Connectors 67 Wallis Sealing Tape 81
Solid Copper Washers, Flat & Spring 108
Earth Plates 25 Watermain Pipe Bond 61
Earth Rods 14 Weldable DC Clips 53
Lattice Mats 25 Welding Solvent 55
Solution, Cleaning 55 Wood Screws 109
Solvent, Universal Welding 55
Spikes
for Solid Copper Earth Rods 15
for Stainless Steel Earth Rods 17

8 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 11

EARTHING CONTENTS

EARTHING
Introduction 10 – 11

Earth Rods & Accessories 12 – 19

Earthing Products 20 – 36

Static Earthing Products 37

Compression Connectors 38 – 40

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 9
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 12

EARTHING INTRODUCTION

A well designed earthing system is essential to ensure Earth Terminations &


protection of personnel and equipment from danger Networks
associated with fault currents.
An earth electrode should be
connected to each down
Earthing System Design
conductor of a lightning protection
Considerations
system (LPS). Earth rods need an
To achieve an efficient earthing earth inspection housing for
system it is essential that a low periodic testing of earth
electrical resistance to earth is resistance.
achieved, using good quality
Earth rods are used in most applications and are driven into
conductors with sufficient cross
the ground as close as is practicable to the structure and the
sectional area to carry the expected current flow. The
down conductor. They are normally spaced at specified
conductors must also have a high corrosion resistance and
intervals corresponding to the
must meet internationally recognised European and British
spacing on the down conductors.
earthing standards.
The information contained in this section primarily refers to Resistance to Earth
Lightning Protection Earthing Systems (LPS) and does not
For an LPS the earth termination
detail all earthing requirements for electrical wiring, although
network as a whole should have a
there are some similarities. Please refer to the IEE 16th
combined resistance of not more
edition wiring regulations for more details.
than ten ohms, before bonding to building metalwork.
Other factors to consider when designing an earthing However, the maximum resistance value for earthing systems
system are: is application specific.
A survey is required to A single earth rod may not achieve the required resistance
determine ground figure and several may be need to be fitted to achieve this;
resistivity. their combined resistance is proportional to the reciprocal of
the individual rod resistances to earth. This rule holds true as
Soil moisture content:
long as each rod is situated outside the resistance area of
more moisture always
any other. To ensure this is the case, it is generally accepted
reduces soil resistance.
that the minimum spacing between rods should not be less
Chemical composition of than their driven length.
soil: certain salts and
The expected number of rods required to obtain a particular
minerals affect soil
resistance value, e.g. ten ohms, can be roughly calculated.
resistivity.
To do this the soil resistivity needs to be taken into
Temperature: if the ground consideration. A soil resistivity test will need to be performed.
is frozen its resistance
There are several methods used to obtain a lower
becomes much higher.
resistance value:
The extent of any buried services which could affect
More rods can be driven.
the earth termination networks.
Rods can be driven deeper.
Details of metallic service pipes, rails, tanks etc. which
may need bonding into the earth system to prevent the Ring conductors connecting rods
danger of side flashing. together underground can
be used.
The area available to place earth electrodes, this may
be limited. Rods of a larger diameter can
be used.

10 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 13

EARTHING INTRODUCTION

Where deep driving is not possible shorter rods with a larger The information contained in this
diameter can be used; copper earth mats and earth plates section is intended as a guide and
can be used in place of earth rods. should not be used to perform
designs. A.N.Wallis does not
A “crow’s foot” configuration can be used where parallel
accept responsibility for errors or
connection is not possible.
omissions. Detailed information on
Where high resistance soil conditions are a problem soil earthing design is contained in
conditioning agents can be used to internationally recognised
backfill rod holes. Conductive concrete European and British earthing
can be used to backfill an earth mat. Both standards.
effectively increase an electrodes cross
sectional area and therefore reduce its
resistance to earth.
The international standards also specify
the recommended materials used for all
earthing conductors and their dimensions.

Equipotential Bonding
It is common practice to use the buildings natural structural
steelwork and bonding it to the LPS to further improve its
ability to conduct lightning and fault currents to earth; prior
permission may be required.

Joints
Joints should be
mechanically effective,
all joints other than
welded ones are a
potential discontinuity,
and care should be
taken to ensure
contact surfaces are
clean and that fixing
clamps are tight and well protected from corrosion, which
can occur if dissimilar metals are joined. Ideally there should
be as few joints as possible in an earthing design.

Maintenance & Life of an Earth System


It is important to properly maintain an earth circuit to ensure
it retains its ability to conduct the same current carrying
capacity as it did when it was originally installed. Earth rod
resistances should be regularly checked. Corrosion and fault
currents can cause high resistance joints leading to
overheating. However, if an earth system is correctly installed
and maintained it should last for many years.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 11
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 14

EARTHING EARTH RODS & ACCESSORIES

Copperbond Earth Rods


Wallis copperbond earth rods offer installers the most economical
method of achieving a low earth resistance.
1/2"
Each rod has a high tensile strength, low carbon steel core. 99.95%
pure copper is applied electrolytically and forms a metallurgical bond
between the steel core and the copper. This combination makes the rod
ideal for deep driving whilst also provides lasting resistance to corrosion.
The threads are formed by a cold rolling process which ensures strength
and maintains the molecularly bonded copper covering along the full
length of the threads. Cold-rolled threads are stronger than cut-threads.
5/8"
The standard copper thickness is 0.25mm. Greater copper thicknesses
are also available. Please contact our sales office for further information.
Threaded
Nominal L Thread Size Shank L1 Unit Pack Part
Size mm (UNC-2A) D mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg

3/4" 1200 1.18 ERB 412


1500 1.55 ERB 415
1 /2 ” 9/16” 12.7 30 5
1800 1.76 ERB 418
2400 2.36 ERB 424
1200 1.53 ERB 112
1500 1.88 ERB 115
3/8" 5 /8 ” 1800 5 /8 ” 14.2 30 2.29 5 ERB 118
2400 3.00 ERB 124
3000 3.79 ERB 130
1200 2.19 ERB 212
1500 2.73 ERB 215
3 /4 ” 1800 3 /4 ” 17.2 35 3.27 5 ERB 218
2400 4.35 ERB 224
3000 5.44 ERB 230

Material: Pure copper molecularly bonded onto a steel core.

Unthreaded

Nominal L Shank Unit Pack Part


Size mm D Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
3 /8 ” 1200 9.5 0.62 5 ERB 012

Material: Pure copper molecularly bonded onto a steel core.

L1 D L1

Thread
Size

12 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 15

EARTHING EARTH RODS & ACCESSORIES

Threaded Couplings
These Wallis high-strength couplings are used for joining copperbond
threaded earth rods together. They facilitate deep driving and ensure
continual contact between the rods both during and after installation.
The coupling also protects the earth rod threads during installation with the
threaded driving head. There is a lead-in for ease of assembly and a hex on the
outside for grip and keeping the coupling tight when driving into the ground.
All Wallis couplings are manufactured from a high copper content alloy 3/4"
ensuring excellent corrosion resistance.
5/8"
Type L D Unit Pack Part
mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
1 /2 ” 70 20 0.07 ERBO 12
5 /8 ” 70 20 0.09 25 ERBO 16
3 /4 ” 80 24 0.14 ERBO 20

Material: Aluminium Bronze.

Threaded Driving Heads


These Wallis re-usable threaded driving heads are suitable for driving
copperbond threaded earth rods by hand or with a power hammer.
The driving head screws into the threaded coupling to allow deep
driving of the earth rods.
Type L D Unit Pack Part
mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
3/4"
1 /2 ” 50 20 0.05 ERBD 12
5 /8 ” 55 22 0.08 25 ERBD 16
5/8"
3 /4 ” 60 25 0.13 ERBD 20

Material: Steel.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 13
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 16

EARTHING EARTH RODS & ACCESSORIES

Solid Copper Earth Rods


These earth rods are designed for use where extremely high corrosion
15 resistance and exceptionally long life are required. Solid copper earth
rods are produced from solid copper bar and are internally threaded
for jointing. When deep driving a solid copper earth rod the usual
practice is to insert the rod into a bore hole and backfill with either
Low-Resistance Earthing Compound or Bentonite, (see page 26 for
further details).
16
Shank L Thread L1 Unit Pack Part
D mm Size mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
15 1200 M10 20 1.88 5 ERC 112
1500 2.66 ERC 115
1800 3.20 ERC 118
20 16 M10 20 5
2400 4.28 ERC 124
3000 5.36 ERC 130
1200 3.34 ERC 212
1500 4.18 ERC 215
20 1800 M10 20 5.03 5 ERC 218
2400 6.71 ERC 224
25
3000 8.40 ERC 230
1200 5.23 ERC 312
1500 6.54 ERC 315
25 1800 M12 25 7.86 1 ERC 318
2400 10.5 ERC 324
3000 13.1 ERC 330

Material: Copper to BS EN 13601.

D Thread
Size

L1 L1

14 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 17

EARTHING EARTH RODS & ACCESSORIES

Driving Heads
The driving head protects the internal thread and the top of the solid
copper earth rod from damage when being driven into the ground.

D L Thread L1 Unit Pack Part


mm mm Size mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
16 38 M10 20 0.03 ERCD 16
20 41 M10 20 0.06 25 ERCD 20 ERCD 16

25 45 M12 25 0.10 ERCD 25

Material: Steel.
L

Thread
Size D

L1

Driving Spikes
These driving spikes enable solid copper earth rods to be driven easily
into the ground.
D L Thread L1 Unit Pack Part
mm mm Size mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
16 42 M10 20 0.03 ERCS 16
20 51 M10 20 0.06 25 ERCS 20
25 60 M12 25 0.10 ERCS 25

Material: Steel. ERCS 16


L

Thread D
Size

L1

Coupling Dowels
The phosphor bronze coupling dowel is used for joining solid copper
earth rods together.

Thread L Unit Pack Part


Size mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
M10 40 0.02 ERD 01
25 ERD 01
M12 50 0.04 ERD 02

Material: Phosphor Bronze.

Thread
Size

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 15
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 18

EARTHING EARTH RODS & ACCESSORIES

Stainless Steel Earth Rods


These earth rods are designed for use where problems may be caused
by galvanic corrosion due to dissimilar metals being buried in close
16
proximity. They are produced from stainless steel rod and are internally
threaded for jointing. They are highly resistant to corrosion.

Shank L Thread L1 Unit Pack Part


D mm Size mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
1200 1.87 ERZ 112
20
1500 2.35 ERZ 115
16 1800 M10 20 2.83 5 ERZ 118
2400 3.79 ERZ 124
3000 4.75 ERZ 130
1200 2.95 ERZ 212
25
1500 3.71 ERZ 215
20 1800 M10 20 4.46 5 ERZ 218
2400 5.96 ERZ 224
3000 7.46 ERZ 230
1200 4.64 ERZ 312
1500 5.81 ERZ 315
25 1800 M12 25 6.99 1 ERZ 318
2400 9.34 ERZ 324
3000 11.69 ERZ 330

Material: Stainless Steel to BS EN 10088.

D Thread
Size

L1 L1

16 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 19

EARTHING EARTH RODS & ACCESSORIES

Driving Heads
The driving head protects the internal thread and the top of the stainless
steel earth rod from damage when being driven into the ground.

D L Thread L1 Unit Pack Part


mm mm Size mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
16 38 M10 20 0.03 ERCD 16
20 41 M10 20 0.06 25 ERCD 20
25 45 M12 25 0.10 ERCD 25 ERCD 16

Material: Steel. L

Thread
Size D

L1

Driving Spikes
These driving spikes enable stainless steel earth rods to be driven easily
into the ground.

D L Thread L1 Unit Pack Part


mm mm Size mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
16 42 M10 20 0.03 ERCS 16
20 51 M10 20 0.06 25 ERCS 20
25 60 M12 25 0.10 ERCD 25

Material: Steel. L
ERCS 16

Thread D
Size

L1

Coupling Dowels
The stainless steel coupling dowel is used for joining stainless steel
earth rods together.

Thread L Unit Pack Part


Size mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
M10 40 0.02 ERD 16
25
M12 50 0.04 ERD 25
Material: Stainless Steel.
ERD 16

Thread
Size

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 17
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 20

EARTHING EARTH RODS & ACCESSORIES

Galvanised Steel Earth Rod Set


This galvanised steel earth rod has a male thread at the top and a female
thread at the bottom enabling rods to be joined together.
After machining, the rod is hot-dip galvanised with a coating of zinc not
less than 610 g/m2. The rod is supplied as a standard set complete with
toughened steel driving head, hardened steel driving spike and
galvanised steel wire rope grip.

Nominal L Thread D L1 L2 Unit Pack Part


Size mm Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
(BSF) kg
5 /8 ” 1200 3 /8 ” 16.5 - 17.0 30 25 2.10 5 ERG 112

Material: Mild Steel galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461.

D Thread
Size
Thread
Size

L1 L2

18 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 21

EARTHING EARTH RODS & ACCESSORIES

Cross Profile Galvanised Steel Earth Rods


Wallis cross profile galvanised steel earth rods are ideally suited for
installation in earth termination systems of temporary structures such as
antennas or distribution boards on construction sites.
These x-shaped rods are manufactured in steel with a minimum average
zinc coating of 70μm. Each earth rod has a splice plate with three
connecting holes.

Section L Splice Plate Unit Pack Part


mm mm Holes Weight Quantity Number
No. x Ø kg
mm
1000 2.34 ERX 310
1500 3.51 ERX 315
50 x 50 x 3 2000 3 x 11 4.61 5 ERX 320
2500 5.85 ERX 325
3000 7.03 ERX 330
1000 3.90 ERX 510
1500 5.85 ERX 515
50 x 50 x 5 2000 3 x 11 7.80 5 ERX 520
2500 9.75 ERX 525
3000 11.75 ERX 530

Material: Carbon steel galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461.

3 or 5

50 3 or 5

50

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 19
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 22

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

Earth Rod to Tape ‘A’ Clamps


These clamps are used for joining earth rods to different sizes of copper
tape. The clamps have a high resistance to corrosion and are
mechanically strong to ensure a lasting connection.

Earth Rod Maximum L W H Unit Pack Part


Shank Ø Tape Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm mm kg
ERA 1625 26 x 15 43 37 17 0.10 50 ERA 1625
12.7 32 x 15 43 45 18 0.20 25 ERA 1631
39 x 15 44 51 22 0.25 25 ERA 1638
26 x 14 43 37 17 0.10 50 ERA 1625
32 x 14 43 45 18 0.20 25 ERA 1631
ERA 2525 14.2
39 x 14 44 51 22 0.25 25 ERA 1638
51 x 16 47 64 20 0.21 25 ERA 1650
26 x 13 43 37 17 0.10 50 ERA 1625

ERA 1631 32 x 13 43 45 18 0.20 25 ERA 1631


15.0
39 x 13 44 51 22 0.25 25 ERA 1638
51 x 15 47 64 20 0.21 25 ERA 1650
26 x 12 43 37 17 0.10 50 ERA 1625
32 x 12 43 45 18 0.20 25 ERA 1631
16.0
39 x 12 44 51 22 0.25 25 ERA 1638
ERA 1650
51 x 14 47 64 20 0.21 25 ERA 1650
26 x 11 43 37 17 0.10 50 ERA 1625
32 x 11 43 45 18 0.20 25 ERA 1631
17.2 39 x 11 44 51 22 0.25 25 ERA 1638
51 x 13 47 64 20 0.21 25 ERA 1650
26 x 18 55 40 25 0.20 10 ERA 2525
26 x 8 43 37 17 0.10 50 ERA 1625
32 x 8 43 45 18 0.20 25 ERA 1631
20.0 39 x 8 44 51 22 0.25 25 ERA 1638
51 x 10 47 64 20 0.21 25 ERA 1650
26 x 16 55 40 25 0.20 10 ERA 2525
25.0 26 x 11 55 40 25 0.20 10 ERA 2525

Material: Aluminium Bronze with M10 x 25mm Phosphor Bronze Set Screw.

The aluminium version is mainly used for connecting aluminium tape to


a puddle flange rod as part of a lightning protection system.
Rod Maximum L W H Unit Pack Part
Shank Ø Tape Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm mm kg
16.0 26 x 12 44 40 19 0.60 25 ERA 1625A
ERA 1625A
Material: Aluminium with M10 x 25mm Stainless Steel Set Screw.

20 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 23

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

Earth Rod to Cable ‘G’ Clamps


These clamps are used for joining earth rods to different sizes of
stranded copper conductor. The clamps have a high resistance to ERR 1035
corrosion and are mechanically strong to ensure a lasting connection.

Earth Rod Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part


Shank Ø Range mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm mm2 kg
9.5 6 - 35 32 20 16 0.04 25 ERR 1035
6 - 35 34 25 15 0.05 25 ERR 1635
12.7
35 - 70 41 25 17 0.08 50 ERR 1670* ERR 1635

6 - 16 34 25 15 0.05 25 ERR 1635


14.2 16 - 70 41 25 17 0.08 50 ERR 1670*
70 - 185 48 30 19 0.10 50 ERR 2095*
6 - 16 34 25 15 0.05 25 ERR 1635
15.0 16 - 70 41 25 17 0.08 50 ERR 1670*
ERR 1670
70 - 150 48 30 19 0.10 50 ERR 2095*
6 - 70 41 25 17 0.08 50 ERR 1670*
16.0
70 - 120 48 30 19 0.10 50 ERR 2095*
17.2 6 - 95 48 30 19 0.10 50 ERR 2095*
20.0 6 - 70 48 30 19 0.10 50 ERR 2095*

Material: Gunmetal with M10 x 25mm Phosphor Bronze Set Screw.


ERR 2095
(ERR1035 in Naval Brass with M6 x 20mm Stainless Steel Set Screw).
* Suitable for use with 8mm Ø solid circular copper conductor.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 21
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 24

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

‘U’ Bolt Clamps


This versatile range of Wallis ‘U’ bolt clamps can be used to connect flat tapes
and stranded cables to earth rods, reinforcing bars (re-bar), hand rails etc.
Single Plate Type for Horizontal Flat Tapes
Used to connect flat tapes in a horizontal position on the rod.
Maximum Hole L W H Unit Pack Part
Rod Ø Centres mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm mm kg
16 30 58 62 33 0.15 20 ERU 016
25 37 70 62 33 0.15 20 ERU 025
31 41 85 68 33 0.28 10 ERU 031
38 46 90 75 33 0.28 10 ERU 038
50 63 100 90 33 0.45 10 ERU 050

ERU 025
Material: Gunmetal plate with M10 threaded Copper ‘U’ Bolt.

Double Plate Type for Vertical Flat Tapes


Used to connect flat tapes in a vertical position on the rod.
Maximum Tape L W H Unit Pack Part
Rod Ø Width mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm mm kg
16 68 62 33 0.21 20 ERU 216
25 70 62 33 0.23 20 ERU 225
31 25 85 68 33 0.33 10 ERU 231
38 90 75 33 0.38 10 ERU 238
50 100 90 33 0.58 10 ERU 250
ERU 216
Material: Gunmetal plate with M10 threaded Copper ‘U’ Bolt.

Double Plate Type for Vertical Stranded Cables


Used to connect stranded cables in a vertical and horizontal position on
the rod.
Maximum Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Rod Ø Range mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm mm2 kg
16 - 150 57 51 0.21 20 ERU 470
16 40
150 - 300 73 68 0.34 10 ERU 570
16 - 70 57 51 0.21 20 ERU 470
20 40
70 - 300 73 68 0.34 10 ERU 570
ERU 470
16 - 70 85 80 0.45 ERU 670
25 40 10
70 - 300 98 93 0.54 ERU 770

Material: Gunmetal plates with M10 threaded Copper ‘U’ Bolt.

22 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 25

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

Re-bar Clamps
This versatile range of Wallis Re-bar clamps is used to connect re-bar to
re-bar or re-bar to stranded cable. They provide a strong mechanical
connection along with excellent resistance to corrosion.

Maximum Re-bar Unit Pack Part


Re-bar Ø Range Ø Weight Quantity Number
mm mm kg
10 6 - 10 0.21 20 RBC 010
20 12 - 20 0.34 20 RBC 020
25 20 - 25 0.21 10 RBC 025
32 25 - 32 0.34 10 RBC 032
40 32 - 40 0.54 10 RBC 040

Material: Gunmetal plates with Copper ‘U’ Bolt.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 23
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 26

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

Split Connector Clamps


Split connector clamps are used to connect cable lugs onto earth rods.
The clamps are designed to suit our full range of earth rods. All clamps
are assembled with an M12 x 50mm set screw and fittings, except
ERS010 which has an M8 x 40mm set screw and fittings. ERC24 also
has a wing nut.
For use with Copperbond Earth Rods (on rod thread)
Nominal Thread L W H Unit Pack Part
Rod Size Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
(UNC-2A) kg
5 /8 ” 5 /8 ” 42 26 26 0.22 ERS 016
10
3 /4 ” 3 /4 ” 50 29 29 0.31 ERS 020

ERS 016 Material: Gunmetal or Naval Brass.

For use with Copperbond Earth Rods (on rod shank)


Rod L W H Unit Pack Part
Shank Ø mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
9.5 27 18 20 0.08 ERS 010
10
14.2 42 25 25 0.27 ERC 24

Material: Gunmetal or Naval Brass.


ERC 24
For use with Solid Copper & Stainless Steel Earth Rods (on rod shank)
Rod L W H Unit Pack Part
Shank Ø mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
15 42 26 25 0.22 ERC 26
16 42 26 25 0.21 10 ERSS 16
20 50 29 29 0.28 ERSS 20

ERSS 20 Material: Gunmetal or Naval Brass.

24 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 27

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

Solid Copper Earth Plates


Solid copper plates provide a long lasting earthing solution in places
where driving earth rods might be impractical. They are often installed
in conjunction with Low-Resistance Earthing Compound or Bentonite.

LxW H Surface Unit Pack Part


mm mm Area Weight Quantity Number
m2 kg
1.5 4.80 EMP 601
600 x 600 0.73 1
3.0 9.60 EMP 603
1.5 10.80 EMP 901
900 x 900 1.63 1
3.0 21.60 EMP 903

Material: Copper to BS EN 12163 (formerly BS 2874).

Solid Copper Lattice Mats


Solid copper lattice mats offer a more economical cost option to
installing solid copper plates.
They are often used for potential grading and are a preferred option on
installations such as telecommunication towers, where touch and step
potential could cause problems.

LxW H Surface Grid Unit Pack Part


mm mm Area Weight Quantity Number
m2 kg
600 x 600 3.0 0.31 5 Bar 4.0 1 EML 603
0.55 6 Bar 7.2 EML 903
900 x 900 3.0 1
0.46 5 Bar 6.1 EML 903 SPC

Material: Copper to BS EN 13601 (formerly BS 1432).

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 25
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 28

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

Low-Resistance Earthing Compound


Wallis low-resistance earthing compound is an electrically conductive
aggregate. It is a grey, fine granular material used in place of other
concrete aggregates such as sand. When mixed with cement and
water it forms a permanent electrically conductive concrete.
The conductive concrete is ideal for use in difficult ground conditions.
It is a permanent, stable and maintenance free solution to obtaining a
low resistivity earth. The typical mixing ratio of low-resistance earthing
compound to cement is 3:1 by weight.

Type Unit Pack Part


Weight Quantity Number
kg
Low-Resistance Earthing Compound Only EMA 25
Low-Resistance Earthing Compound Pre-Mixed 25 1 Bag
EMA 26
with Cement

Low
Resistance
Earthing
Compound

Bentonite
Bentonite is a moisture retaining clay used as an earth electrode back-fill
to help lower soil resistivity. The clay is a sodium activated montmorillonite,
which when mixed with water swells to many times its original dry volume.
Bentonite can be supplied in granular or powder form. The granular
form is easier to handle as the powder can cause dust in windy
conditions. Granular is the preferred option for filling trenches as the
substance can be mixed in the trench. Powder is the preferred option
for pouring into bore holes to ensure the mixture is a thin enough
consistency to reach the bottom of the hole.
The typical expansion ratio when mixed with water is 2:1.

Type Unit Pack Part


Weight Quantity Number
kg
Bentonite Granular Form EBG 25
25 1 Bag
Bentonite Powder Form EBG 25P

Bentonite

26 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 29

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

Heavy Duty Earth Inspection Housings


The Wallis heavy duty earth housing is designed, shaped and sized to fit
easily into brick paved walkways. The lip of the base makes a flush fit with
standard-sized bricks making the housing blend in without the need for a
cement surround.
The housing will withstand loads of up to 6,000 kilograms and is suitable
for most commercial and industrial applications. The lid locks into the base
and can be opened with a standard flat screwdriver. The base has three
built-in slots for locating earth bars.

Lid LxW H L1 x W1 H1 Unit Pack Part


Colour mm mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg EPP 001 W

Black EPP 001 W


306 x 306 216 260 x 260 55 3.0 1
Grey EPP 002 W

Material: Polypropylene base with GRP lid.

H1

EPP 002 W
H

H1

W1
W

L1

Inspection Housing Earth Bars


(for Heavy Duty Earth Inspection Housings)
These earth bars fit into the slots provided in the heavy duty earth
inspection housings and are used when multiple connections to the
earth rod are required.

No. Hole L W H Unit Pack Part


Holes Ø mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg EBC 35
5 0.24 EBC 35
11 203 25 6 1 EBC 37
7 0.22 EBC 37

Material: Copper to BS EN 13601.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 27
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 30

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

Light Duty Earth Inspection Housings


The Wallis light duty earth inspection housing has a maximum safe
working load of 2,000 kilograms. It is UV stabilised against degradation
by sunlight and non-brittle to prevent cold weather damage.
The unique, detachable easy-locking lid ensures security of equipment
as the locking mechanism can only be operated by the special key
provided with the housing. The base has built-in slots for locating earth
bars.
Its lightweight feature allows easy handling, storage and transportation.
ERH 20 The termination depth is increased 100% by simply locking two units
together, allowing deeper earth electrode connections to be made.

Lid LxW H L1 x W1 Unit Pack Part


Colour mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
Black ERH 20
260 230 200 1.50 1
Grey ERH 21

Material: Polypropylene.

ERH 21

W1

L1

L W

Inspection Housing Earth Bars


(for Light Duty Earth Inspection Housings)
These earth bars fit into the slots provided in the light duty earth
inspection housings and are used when multiple connections to the
earth rod are required.
No. Hole L W H Unit Pack Part
EBC 25 Holes Ø mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
5 0.42 EBC 25
EBC 27 11 250 30 6 1
7 0.39 EBC 27

Material: Copper to BS EN 13601.

28 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 31

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

Concrete Earth Inspection Housing


The Wallis concrete earth inspection housing is load rated to 4,000
kilograms and is suitable for most industrial applications. The housing
can have an internal earth bar fitted diagonally across in slots provided
in the base.
L W H Unit Pack Part
mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
310 310 170 28.00 1 ERH 01W

Material: Concrete.

Inspection Housing Earth Bars


(for Concrete Earth Inspection Housings)
These earth bars fit into the slots provided in the concrete inspection
housings and are used when multiple connections to the earth rod are
required.
No. Hole L W H Unit Pack Part
Holes Ø mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg EBC 05
5 0.49 EBC 05
11 285 30 6 1 EBC 07
7 0.50 EBC 07

Material: Copper to BS EN 13601.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 29
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 32

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

Insulators
These Wallis insulators are supplied with or without studs and locking
nuts.
Type Thread W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
Insulator only 0.08 EBI 001
Insulator with 2 M10 40 40 10
studs & 3 nuts 0.16 EBI 002
EBI 001
EBI 002 Material: Reinforced Polyester.

Thread Size

Earth Rod Seals


The earth rod seal is fitted when the earth rod connection is below the
water level and where there is a possibility of water entering the
inspection housing from below ground. The seal is particularly useful
where internal earths are required such as in a basement building.
Both single and double flange seals can be adapted to suit our full
range of earth rod diameters by use of special compression rings and
seals. The seals are used in conjunction with the Wallis heavy duty
earth inspection housings shown on page 27.
Single Flange
PES 001 Earth Rod Flange Pipe Unit Pack Part
PES 002
Type Ø Length Weight Quantity Number
mm mm kg
15mm Ø PES 001-15
16mm Ø PES 001-16
20mm Ø 366 300 2.00 1 PES 001-20
5/8” UNC Threaded PES 001-58
3/4” UNC Threaded PES 001-34
Material: Plastic.

Double Flange (for deep concrete slab applications)


Earth Rod Flange Pipe Unit Pack Part
Type Ø Length Weight Quantity Number
mm mm kg
15mm Ø PES 002-15
16mm Ø PES 002-16
20mm Ø 366 1200 3.20 1 PES 002-20
5/8” UNC Threaded PES 002-58
3/4” UNC Threaded PES 002-34

Material: Plastic.

30 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 33

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

Earth Bonding Points


These Wallis earth bonding points are installed to provide a convenient
earth system connection point in concrete structures. When cast into
concrete they connect the re-bar to the earthing or lightning protection
system.
EGP 01
Earth Bonding Points only

No. Hole Size Plate Size Stem Ø L Unit Pack Part


Holes mm mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
1 38 x 38 0.16 EPG 01
10.7 EGP 02
2 M10 x 20 70 x 35 75 0.29 10 EPG 02
(70mm2)
4 65 x 65 0.54 EPG 04

Material: Gunmetal.

L
EGP 04

Earth Bonding Points with Pre-welded Tails

No. Type Unit Pack Part


Holes Weight Quantity Number
kg

1 EGP 01 with pre-welded 500mm long


0.64 1 EGP 01 500
tail of 70mm2 PVC insulated cable
EGP 02 with pre-welded 500mm long EGP 01 500
0.77 EGP 02 500
tail of 70mm2 PVC insulated cable
EGP 02 with pre-welded 1000mm long
2 1.14 1 EGP 02 1000
tail of 70mm2 PVC insulated cable
EGP 02 with pre-welded 1500mm long
1.50 EGP 02 1500
tail of 70mm2 PVC insulated cable
EGP 04 with pre-welded 500mm long
1.02 EGP 04 500
tail of 70mm2 PVC insulated cable
EGP 04 500
4 EGP 04 with pre-welded 1000mm long
1.39 1 EGP 04 1000
tail of 70mm2 PVC insulated cable
EGP 04 with pre-welded 1500mm long
1.75 EGP 04 1500
tail of 70mm2 PVC insulated cable

Material: Gunmetal body with PVC insulated copper cable tail.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 31
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 34

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

Earth Bars
Earth bars are available in a variety of sizes and specifications. Our
standard earth bars are shown in the tables below. Special earth
bars manufactured to customer requirements are also available.
Recommended fixing by countersunk wood screw 11/2” x No. 12
and No. 12 wall plug.
Earth Bars
No. L W H Unit Pack Part
Terminations mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
6 400 2.00 EBC 006
8 500 2.30 EBC 008

EBC 006 10 650 3.20 EBC 010


12 750 4.00 EBC 012
14 850 4.90 EBC 014
16 950 5.80 EBC 016
18 1100 90 60 6.70 1 EBC 018
20 1250 7.60 EBC 020
22 1300 8.50 EBC 022
24 1400 9.40 EBC 024
26 1550 10.30 EBC 026
28 1650 11.20 EBC 028
EBC 010 30 1800 12.10 EBC 030

Earth Bars with Single Disconnecting Link


No. L W H Unit Pack Part
Terminations mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
6 485 2.50 EBC 106
8 585 3.00 EBC 108
10 735 3.90 EBC 110
EBC 106 12 835 4.70 EBC 112
14 935 5.60 EBC 114
16 1035 6.50 EBC 116
18 1185 90 60 7.40 1 EBC 118
20 1335 8.30 EBC 120
22 1385 9.20 EBC 122
24 1485 10.10 EBC 124
26 1635 11.00 EBC 126
28 1735 11.90 EBC 128
30 1885 12.80 EBC 130
EBC 108

L W

32 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 35

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

Earth Bars (continued)


Earth Bars with Double Disconnecting Links.

No. L W H Unit Pack Part


Terminations mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
6 570 3.10 EBC 206 EBC 206
8 670 3.70 EBC 208
10 820 4.50 EBC 210
12 920 5.30 EBC 212
14 1020 6.20 EBC 214
16 1120 7.10 EBC 216
18 1270 90 60 8.00 1 EBC 218
20 1420 8.90 EBC 220
22 1470 9.80 EBC 222
24 1570 10.70 EBC 224
26 1720 11.60 EBC 226
28 1820 12.50 EBC 228
30 1885 13.40 EBC 230

Material:
Bar: 50 x 6mm hard drawn copper bar to BS EN 13601.
Base: Plastic.
Fittings: M10 Hexagon Head Set Screws, Nuts & Washers.

Disconnecting Link
The disconnecting link provides a temporary break in the earth
connection to allow inspection and testing of the earth electrode.

L W H Unit Pack Part


mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
120 45 45 0.6 1 EBC 100
EBC 100
Material:
Bar: 50 x 6mm hard drawn copper bar to BS EN 13601.
Base: Plastic.

W
L

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 33
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 36

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

Earth Blocks
These Wallis blocks allow earth conductor termination, or live conductor
termination with a suitable, fully insulated housing.

EBB 004 Type L W H Unit Pack Part


mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
EBB 008 4-Way Single 54 9 0.06 EBB 004/1
4-Way Double 51 18 12 0.09 10 EBB 004
8-Way Single 88 18 0.15 EBB 008
EBB 004/1
Material: Tinned Brass.

Earth Bosses
The earth boss is designed to provide an earth connection point on a
steel structure. The boss is welded onto steel vessels, tanks and other
structures
D L Thread Unit Pack Part
mm mm Size Weight Quantity Number
kg
50 50 0.77 EPB 5050
50 40 0.62 EPB 5040
50 30 M10 0.47 1 EPB 5030
40 40 0.47 EPB 4040
40 30 0.35 EPB 4030

Material: Mild Steel with Stainless Steel fittings.

Thread
D Size

34 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 37

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

Tower Earth Clamps


Tower earth clamps are used for bonding copper conductors onto steel
surfaces.
The double-plate design provides a robust fixing in areas where cladding
may be installed or where the complete clamp will be covered by
concrete. The clamp is fixed by drilling a hole in the steelwork and
securing with the set screw provided.

Conductor L W H Set Unit Pack Part


Range mm mm mm Screw Weight Quantity Number
mm2 kg BTC 120

16 - 70 45 30 17 M10 x 50mm 0.12 BTC 070


70 - 120 48 35 22 M12 x 60mm 0.23 BTC 120
BTC 070
120 - 185 55 40 28 M12 x 75mm 0.30 10 BTC 185
185 - 240 63 45 35 M12 x 80mm 0.40 BTC 240
240 - 300 70 53 42 M12 x 90mm 0.60 BTC 300

Material: Gunmetal.

H
L

Parallel Groove Clamps


Wallis Parallel Groove Clamps, for stranded copper cable connections,
are manufactured from high-strength, corrosion-resistant copper alloy
and assembled with two stainless steel set screws.

Conductor L W H Set Unit Pack Part


Range mm mm mm Screws Weight Quantity Number
mm2 kg
25 - 70 50 40 7 M8 x 35mm 0.38 PGC 070
70 - 95 54 45 8.5 M10 x 45mm 0.46 PGC 095
PGC 095
95 - 185 65 57 12.5 M10 x 55mm 0.55 10 PGC 185
185 - 240 78 71 14 M10 x 55mm 0.66 PGC 240
240 - 300 94 85 16 M10 x 60mm 0.78 PGC 300

Material: Gunmetal.

H
W

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 35
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 38

EARTHING EARTHING PRODUCTS

Split Bolt Connectors


The high strength split bolt connectors will accept a wide range of stranded
copper conductors. No specialist tools are required for installation.
Main Tap H W Unit Pack Part
Conductor A Conductor B mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm2 mm2 kg
10 1.5 - 10 20 4.1 0.02 200 SBC 010
16 2.5 - 16 23 5.3 0.03 150 SBC 016
25 2.5 - 25 28 6.8 0.04 100 SBC 025
35 2.5 - 35 29 7.9 0.05 80 SBC 035
SBC 120 SBC 025 50 2.5 - 50 35 9.5 0.08 50 SBC 050
70 2.5 - 70 39 10.7 0.12 35 SBC 070
95 2.5 - 95 45 13.5 0.15 20 SBC 095
120 10 - 120 47 14.7 0.18 20 SBC 120
150 10 - 150 51 16.2 0.23 10 SBC 150
185 50 - 185 57 17.8 0.35 10 SBC 185
240 95 - 240 64 19 0.46 10 SBC 240
Material: Gunmetal.

W
B
W

Flexible Copper Braid Bonds


These flexible copper braid bonds are used for bonding metal gates,
doors, fences etc. Other lengths and sizes are available on request.

Size Hole Hole Unit Pack Part


WxH Centres L Size Weight Quantity Number
mm mm mm kg
200 0.04 BFE 200
25 x 3.5 300 11 0.07 10 BFE 300
400 0.15 BFE 400

BFE 400 Material: Copper.

BFE 300

BFE 200
H

36 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 39

EARTHING STATIC EARTHING PRODUCTS

Static Earth Receptacle


This receptacle is used in open areas where a temporary earthing point
may be required, such as airfields or petrol stations. Provides a static
discharge point for aircraft, tankers, vehicles and boats.
H D Unit Pack Part
mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
135 125 6.50 1 ERX 05

Material: Gunmetal.

Eyebolts
Provides a static earth point when attached to the top of a threaded
copperbond earth rod.
Thread H Unit Pack Part
Size mm Weight Quantity Number
(UNC-2A) kg
5/8” 0.62 EYE 058
135 1
3/4” 0.55 EYE 034

Material: Gunmetal.

Thread
Size

Static Earth Bar


This wall-mounted bracket provides a temporary earth point.

L H Unit Pack Part


mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
350 100 1.52 1 ERY 10

Material: Phosphor Bronze.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 37
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:45 Page 40

EARTHING COMPRESSION CONNECTORS

‘C’ Crimp Connectors


These range-taking ‘C’ Crimp Connectors are specifically designed for
tap and parallel connections of stranded copper cables in earthing
applications.

Main Tap L W H Unit Pack Part


Conductor A Conductor B mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm2 mm2 kg
10 4 - 10 12 9 13 0.01 100 CCC 010
CCC 035
10 - 16 10 - 16 17 12 19 0.01 100 CCC 016
16 4 17 12 19 0.01 100 CCC 016
16 - 25 1.5 - 10 12 13 20 0.02 100 CCC 25-10
25 10 - 16 19 12 21 0.02 50 CCC 25PM
25 10 - 25 20 15 24 0.04 50 CCC 025
35 1.5 - 16 20 15 24 0.04 50 CCC 025
35 25 - 35 20 15 27 0.05 50 CCC 035
50 4 - 16 20 15 27 0.05 50 CCC 035

CCC 070
50 16 - 50 20 17 27 0.07 50 CCC 050
70 1.5 - 25 20 17 27 0.07 25 CCC 050
50 - 70 4 - 35 28 21 33 0.09 25 CCC 70-35
50 - 70 35 - 70 28 21 34 0.10 25 CCC 070
70 - 95 35 - 70 30 26 41 0.10 25 CCC 075
95 4 - 35 30 26 41 0.11 25 CCC 95-35
70 - 95 95 30 26 41 0.12 25 CCC 095
120 35 - 120 30 28 45 0.12 25 CCC 120
150 6 - 70 30 28 45 0.12 25 CCC 120
150 95 - 150 30 28 45 0.15 10 CCC 150
CCC 240
120 - 185 95 - 185 35 33 54 0.20 10 CCC 185
150 - 185 70 - 150 35 33 54 0.20 10 CCC 185
240 95 - 120 37 34 54 0.24 10 CCC 240-120
240 150 - 240 40 34 54 0.24 10 CCC 240

Material: Copper.

L
B H

38 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:45 Page 41

EARTHING COMPRESSION CONNECTORS

Compression Terminals
Wallis cable terminals are manufactured from high-conductivity seamless
copper tube and feature bell mouth entry for cables up to 500mm2 and
chamfered entry for cables 500m2 to 1000mm2.
All terminals are annealed, to avoid cracking and splitting when crimped,
and electro-tin plated to combine maximum electrical conductivity with
mechanical strength. An inspection hole is provided to check cable
location prior to crimping.

Conductor Palm Hole L W Unit Pack Part


Size Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm2 mm kg
4 21 9 CLG 64
5 24 10 CLG 65
6 6 24 11 0.01 100 CLG 66
CLG 68
8 25 12 CLG 68
10 26 12 CLG 610
5 26 11 CLG 105
6 26 11 CLG 106
10 8 29 13 0.01 100 CLG 108
CLG 1010
10 39 16 CLG 1010
12 39 18 CLG 1012
6 30 11 CLG 166
8 30 13 CLG 168
16 0.01 100
10 35 15 CLG 1610
12 42 18 CLG 1612 CLG 258
6 32 14 CLG 256
8 32 14 CLG 258
25 0.01 50
10 38 16 CLG 2510
12 38 18 CLG 2512
6 35 15 CLG 356
8 35 15 CLG 358 CLG 506

35 10 40 15 0.01 50 CLG 3510


12 40 18 CLG 3512
14 43 20 CLG 3514
6 37 17 CLG 506
8 37 17 CLG 508
50 10 42 17 0.02 50 CLG 5010
CLG 9510
12 42 17 CLG 5012
14 45 20 CLG 5014
6 40 21 CLG 706
8 40 21 CLG 708
10 46 21 CLG 7010
70 0.04 50 W
12 46 21 CLG 7012
14 50 21 CLG 7014
L
16 50 21 CLG 7016
6 47 25 CLG 956
8 49 25 CLG 958
10 49 25 CLG 9510
95 0.06 25
12 49 25 CLG 9512
14 56 25 CLG 9514
16 56 25 CLG 9516
Table continues on page 40.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 39
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:45 Page 42

EARTHING COMPRESSION CONNECTORS

Compression Terminals (continued)


Conductor Palm Hole W H Unit Pack Part
Size Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm2 mm kg
8 50 27 CLG 1208
10 56 27 CLG 12010
12 56 27 CLG 12012
120 0.07 25
14 56 27 CLG 12014
16 60 27 CLG 12016
CLG 1208
20 66 27 CLG 12020
8 66 30 CLG 1508
10 68 30 CLG 15010
12 68 30 CLG 15012
150 0.09 25
14 68 30 CLG 15014
16 70 30 CLG 15016
20 75 30 CLG 15020
CLG 15012 10 67 33 CLG 18510
12 68 33 CLG 18512
185 14 68 33 0.10 10 CLG 18514
16 70 33 CLG 18516
20 75 33 CLG 18520
10 88 38 CLG 24010
12 88 38 CLG 24012
240 14 88 38 0.14 10 CLG 24014
16 88 38 CLG 24016
CLG 24014
20 88 38 CLG 24020
10 97 41 CLG 30010
12 97 41 CLG 30012
300 14 97 41 0.17 10 CLG 30014
16 97 41 CLG 30016
20 97 41 CLG 30020
12 108 47 CLG 40012
14 108 47 CLG 40014
400 0.20 10
16 108 47 CLG 40016

CLG 30016 20 108 47 CLG 40020


16 117 53 CLG 50016
500 18 117 53 0.50 5 CLG 50018
20 117 53 CLG 50020
16 127 63 CLG 63016
W 630 18 127 63 0.8 5 CLG 63018
20 127 63 CLG 63020
L
16 164 70 CLG 80016
800 18 164 70 1.00 5 CLG 80018
20 164 70 CLG 80020
18 164 77 CLG 100018
1000 1.30 5
20 164 77 CLG 100020

Material: Tin Plated Copper.

40 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 1

LIGHTNING PROTECTION CONTENTS

LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Introduction 42 – 43

Flat Tape System 44 – 61

Solid Circular System 62 – 71

Cable & Wire System 72 – 78

Miscellaneous Products 79 – 83

Free-Standing Air Terminals 84 – 86

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 41
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 2

LIGHTNING PROTECTION INTRODUCTION

Structural Lightning Protection termination; the “zone of protection” is used for buildings up
to 20 metres; for buildings above this height the “rolling
Introduction sphere” method is used.
If correctly installed, fitting a lightning protection system
Down Conductors
(LPS) will minimise the risk of damage to structures and
injury to personnel by conducting high discharge currents The recommended spacing between down conductors
safely to earth. Protection against the secondary effects of varies according to risk and is detailed in internationally
lightning to internal electrical equipment, known as transient recognised European and British lightning protection
over voltage protection is achieved by the use of transient standards. E.g., conductors may be spaced at 20 metres for
over voltage protectors; this is in addition to the LPS. some buildings but this distance could be reduced to 10
metres for tall or high risk buildings. Down conductors
A LPS cannot protect against over voltage transients. Over
should be positioned as evenly as possible around the
voltage transient protectors cannot protect against direct
outside walls of the structure, starting from the corners.
lightning strikes. Both are required for total structural and
equipment protection. Minimum distances must be maintained to prevent side
flashing. Re-entrant loops are also to be avoided.
Lightning Protection Strategy
Earth Terminations & Networks
The normal strategy in
achieving protection is to The information contained in this section primarily refers to
capture the lightning at a Lightning Protection Earthing Systems (LPS) and does not
preferred point by the use of detail all earthing requirements for electrical wiring, although
air terminations and there are some similarities. Please refer to the IEE 16th
conducting it via low edition wiring regulations for more details.
impedance down conductors An earth electrode should be connected to each down
and earth electrodes to a low conductor of a lightning protection system (LPS). Earth rods
resistance earth of less than may need an earth inspection housing for periodic testing of
ten ohms. Air terminations earth resistance.
and down conductors are
Earth rods are used in most applications and are driven into
spaced at regular intervals to
the ground as close as is practicable to the structure and the
form a mesh of conductors around the perimeter of the
down conductor. They are normally spaced at specified
building and roof, known as a Faraday cage, and are joined
intervals corresponding to the spacing on the down
together by specially produced clamps and fixings or
conductors.
welding.
Resistance to Earth
Lightning Protection System Design Considerations
For an LPS the earth termination network as a whole should
An LPS is designed according to geographical location, local
have a combined resistance of not more than ten ohms,
terrain, soil conditions, size and height of building, type of
before bonding to building metalwork. However, the
material used in construction, type of material stored in the
maximum resistance value for earthing systems is
building, use of building and is based on established
application specific.
standards for risk assessment.

Air Termination Networks


The recommended spacing between conductors varies
according to risk and is detailed in internationally recognised
European and British lightning protection standards. E.g., a
mesh of conductors of 10 by 20 metres is considered
sufficient for most applications; however, a high risk structure
may require a 10 by 10 mesh.
There are two methods used to calculate the area
immediately around a building protected by the air

42 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 3

LIGHTNING PROTECTION INTRODUCTION

A single earth rod may not achieve the required resistance clamps are tight and well
figure and several may be need to be fitted to achieve this; protected from corrosion, which
their combined resistance is proportional to the reciprocal of can occur if dissimilar metals are
the individual rod resistances to earth. This rule holds true as joined. Ideally there should be as
long as each rod is situated outside the resistance area of few joints as possible in an LPS
any other. To ensure this is the case, it is generally accepted design.
that the minimum spacing between rods should not be less
than their driven length. Maintenance & Life of an LPS
The expected number of rods It is important to properly maintain
required to obtain a particular an LPS to ensure it retains its
resistance value, e.g. ten ohms, can ability to conduct the same current carrying capacity as it did
be roughly calculated. To do this when it was originally installed. Earth rod resistances should
the soil resistivity needs to be taken be regularly checked. Corrosion and fault currents can cause
into consideration. A soil resistivity high resistance joints leading to overheating. However, if an
test will need to be performed. LPS is correctly installed and maintained it should last for
many years.
There are several methods used to
obtain a lower resistance value: The information contained in this section is intended as a
guide and should not be used to perform designs. A.N.Wallis
More rods can be driven. does not accept responsibility for errors or omissions.
Rods can be driven deeper. Detailed information on LPS design is contained in
Rods of a larger diameter can be used. internationally recognised European
and British LPS standards.
Ring conductors connecting rods together
underground can be used.
Where deep driving is not possible shorter rods with a larger
diameter can be used; copper earth mats and earth plates
can be used in place of earth rods.
A “crow’s foot” configuration can be used where parallel
connection is not possible.
Where high resistance soil conditions are a problem soil
conditioning agents can be used to backfill rod holes.
Conductive concrete can be used to backfill an earth mat.
Both effectively increase an electrodes cross sectional area
and therefore reduce its resistance to earth.
The international standards also specify the recommended
materials used for all earthing conductors and their
dimensions.

Equipotential Bonding
It is common practice to use the buildings natural structural
steelwork and bonding it to the LPS to further improve its
ability to conduct lightning and fault currents to earth; prior
permission may be required.

Joints
Joints should be mechanically effective, all joints other than
welded ones are a potential discontinuity, and care should
be taken to ensure contact surfaces are clean and that fixing

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 43
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 4

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

ATC 120M
Taper Pointed Air Rods
Air rods form an important part of the air termination network of a
lightning protection system. All of our air rods are supplied with a
locknut enabling the rod to be locked tight against the conductor.
ATC 220M Please see pages 45 - 47 for further information on our range of
saddles, brackets and couplings.
Copper Air Rods
Thread L L1 Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
300 0.53 ATC 112M
500 0.85 ATC 120M
M16 1000 41 1.70 5 ATC 139M
1500 2.59 ATC 160M
2000 3.47 ATC 179M
300 0.80 ATC 212M
ATA 120M
500 1.34 ATC 220M
M20 1000 41 2.68 5 ATC 239M
1500 4.02 ATC 260M
2000 5.36 ATC 279M
ATA 112M
Material: Copper.

Aluminium Air Rods


Thread L L1 Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
300 0.18 ATA 112M
500 0.29 ATA 120M
M16 1000 41 0.57 5 ATA 139M
1500 0.98 ATA 160M
2000 1.09 ATA 179M

Material: Aluminium.

Thread Size

L1

44 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 5

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Multi-Point
Used in conjunction with the taper pointed copper air rods.
Air H W Unit Pack Part
Rod Ø mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
16 & 20 156 72 0.30 5 MPC 16

Material: Gunmetal base with Copper spikes.

Light Duty Air Rod Saddles


Light duty saddles are used to support air rods on flat roof surfaces.
For use with Copper Air Rods
Thread L H Unit Pack Part ASGL 16M
Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
M16 ASGL 16M
101 37 0.43 5
M20 ASGL 20M

Material: Gunmetal.

For use with Aluminium Air Rods


Thread L H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number ASAL 16M
kg
M16 101 37 0.15 5 ASAL 16M
Material: Aluminium.

L
Thread
Size

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 45
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 6

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Air Rod Ridge Saddles


Ridge saddles are used to support air rods on roof ridges.

ASGR 16M For use with Copper Air Rods


Thread L H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
M16 137 34 0.70 5 ASGR 16M

Material: Gunmetal.

For use with Aluminium Air Rods

ASAR 16M Thread L H Unit Pack Part


Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
M16 137 34 0.70 5 ASAR 16M

Material: Aluminium.
L

Thread
Size

Flat Air Rod Saddles


Flat saddles are used to support air rods on flat roof surfaces.
For use with Copper Air Rods
ASGF 16M
Thread L H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
M16 137 40 0.60 5 ASGF 16M

Material: Gunmetal.

For use with Aluminium Air Rods

ASAF 16M Thread L H Unit Pack Part


Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
M16 137 40 0.20 5 ASAF 16M

Material: Aluminium.

Thread
Size

46 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 7

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Side Mounting Air Rod Brackets


These brackets provide a 75mm projection from the building face and
are used where it is not possible to fit a saddle onto the building roof.
The brackets are used in conjunction with the rod to tape coupling
used to secure the flat tape to the air rod.
For use with Copper Air Rods
Rod Ø L W Unit Pack Part
mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
16 0.39 AMBG 16
97 120 5
20 0.43 AMBG 20 AMBG 16
AMBA 16
Material: Gunmetal.

For use with Aluminium Air Rods


Rod Ø L W Unit Pack Part
mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
16 97 120 0.12 5 AMBA 16
Material: Aluminium.
W W

Rod to Tape Couplings


Enables the flat tape to be connected to the air rod. Used in conjunction
with the side mounting air rod brackets.
For use with Copper Air Rods
Thread L D Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
M16 AOG 16M
80 40 0.22 5
M20 AOG 20M
AOG 16M
Material: Gunmetal.
AOA 16M
For use with Aluminium Air Rods
Thread L D Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
M16 80 40 0.10 5 AOA 16M

Material: Aluminium.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 47
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 8

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Metallic DC Clips
DCB 253
Metallic DC clips secure the flat tape conductor to the building surface.
Fix using countersunk woodscrew 11/2” x No. 10 and No. 10 wall plug.
For use with Bare Copper Tapes
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
DGG 383
20 x 3 50 10 0.06 50 DCG 203
25 x 3 50 10 0.06 50 DCB 253
25 x 4 50 10 0.06 50 DCG 254
25 x 6 50 12 0.06 50 DCG 256
31 x 3 60 10 0.08 25 DCG 313
DCB 506 31 x 6 60 13 0.09 25 DCG 316
38 x 3 64 20 10 0.08 25 DCG 383
38 x 5 64 13 0.10 25 DCG 385
38 x 6 64 13 0.10 25 DCG 386
50 x 3 80 10 0.10 25 DCG 503

DCA 253 50 x 4 80 11 0.10 25 DCG 504


50 x 6 80 14 0.14 25 DCB 506
50 x 8 80 14 0.14 25 DCG 508
Material: Gunmetal.

For use with PVC Covered Copper Tapes


Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
25 x 3 55 14 0.06 DGP 253
25 x 6 58 20 18 0.11 25 DGP 256
50 x 6 91 19 0.20 DGP 506
Material: Gunmetal.

For use with Lead Covered Copper Tape


Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
25 x 3 77 27 25 0.34 25 DCL 253
Material: Phosphor Bronze.

L For use with Bare Aluminium Tapes


D
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
W mm kg
25 x 3 55 10 0.02 DCA 253
H 25 x 6 50 20 13 0.03 25 DCA 256
50 x 6 80 16 0.04 DCA 506
L
Material: Aluminium.

For use with PVC Covered Aluminium Tapes


W Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
25 x 3 55 20 0.03 DAP 253
20 25
L 50 x 6 85 23 0.04 DAP 506
Material: Aluminium.

48 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 9

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Non-Metallic DC Clips
This one-piece clip, with integral hinged lid, means no lost or dropped
lids. The clips are UV stabilised to prevent degradation from sunlight
and are non-brittle to protect against cold weather.
Fix using countersunk woodscrew 11/2” x No. 10 and No. 10 wall plug.
For use with Bare Copper Tapes
Conductor L W H Colour Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg NP 253 BL
20 x 3 55 18 16 NM 203 B
25 x 3 50 18 16 Brown 0.01 100 NM 253 B
50 x 6 80 25 26 NM 506 B*

Material: Polypropylene.
* NM506B is a two-piece clip
NP 253 W

For use with Bare Aluminium Tapes


Conductor L W H Colour Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
20 x 3 NM 203 G NP 253 G
50 18 16 Grey 0.01 100
25 x 3 NM 253 G
Material: Polypropylene.

For use with PVC Covered Copper & Aluminium Tapes


Conductor L W H Colour Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
Brown NP 253 B NP 253 GR
Black NP 253 BL
Grey NP 253 G
25 x 3 50 18 16 0.01 100
Green NP 253 GR
Stone NP 253 S
White NP 253 W NP 253 B

Material: Polypropylene.

NP 253 S

L W

W H

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 49
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 10

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Non-Metallic DC Clips with Plug


These one-piece clips have an integral fixing plug for ease of installation.
The clips are UV stabilised to prevent degradation from sunlight and are
non-brittle to protect against cold weather.
Fix using countersunk woodscrew 11/2” x No. 10.
NPP 253 BL For use with Bare Copper Tapes
Conductor L W H Colour Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
20 x 3 NMP 203 B
50 18 16 Brown 0.01 100
25 x 3 NMP 253 B
NPP 253 W Material: Polypropylene.

For use with Bare Aluminium Tapes


Conductor L W H Colour Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
NPP 253 G mm kg
20 x 3 NMP 203 G
50 18 16 Grey 0.01 100
25 x 3 NMP 253 G
Material: Polypropylene.

For use with PVC Covered Copper & Aluminium Tapes


NPP 253 GR
Conductor L W H Colour Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
Brown NPP 253 B
Black NPP 253 BL
NPP 253 B
Grey NPP 253 G
25 x 3 50 18 16 0.01 100
Green NPP 253 GR
Stone NPP 253 S
White NPP 253 W
Material: Polypropylene.

NPP 253 S

L W

H W

50 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 11

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Tape Clips
Wallis tape clips hold the flat tape conductor flush to the building surface.
Fix using countersunk woodscrews 11/2” x No. 10 and No. 10 wall plugs.
For use with Bare Copper Tapes
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg MTB 253
20 x 3 68 7 0.03 MTB 203
25 x 3 70 20 7 0.03 50 MTB 253
50 x 6 73 8 0.05 MTB 506
Material: Copper.

For use with PVC Covered Copper Tapes


MPB 253
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
25 x 3 70 20 7 0.03 50 MPB 253
Material: Copper.

For use with Bare Aluminium Tapes


Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part MTA 253
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
20 x 3 68 MTA 203
20 7 0.01 50
25 x 3 70 MTA 253

Material: Aluminium.

For use with PVC Covered Aluminium Tapes MAP 253

Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part


Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
25 x 3 70 20 7 0.01 50 MAP 253
Material: Aluminium.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 51
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 12

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Slate Holdfasts
Wallis slate holdfasts provide a method for fixing the tape above the
roof tiles without any drilling.
The aluminium tail slides underneath the tile and is fixed to the wooden
beam with a nail, the non-metallic DC clip then protrudes from under
HSAL 253BL the tile and offers a fixing for the tape.
For use with Bare Copper & Aluminium Tapes
Conductor L W H Clip Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
Brown HSAL 253 BM
25 x 3 300 50 16 0.04 50
Grey HSAL 253 GM

Material: Polypropylene clip with Aluminium tail.


HSAL 253G
For use with PVC Covered Copper & Aluminium Tapes
Conductor L W H Clip Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
Brown HSAL 253 B
Black HSAL 253 BL
25 x 3 300 50 16 Grey 0.04 50 HSAL 253 G
HSAL 253B Stone HSAL 253 S
White HSAL 253 W

Material: Polypropylene clip with Aluminium tail.

HSAL 253S

HSAL 253W

W
L
H

52 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 13

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Weldable DC Clips
Comprises a weldable base assembled with a non-metallic DC clip. For
use on PVC roofing membranes. See page 55 for details of Universal
Welding Solvent.
For use with Bare Tape
Conductor D H Clip Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
25 x 3 65 23 Grey 0.03 50 WDC 080

Material: PVC base with Polypropylene clip.


For use with PVC Covered Tapes WDC 080

Conductor D H Clip Unit Pack Part


Size mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
Black WDC 120
25 x 3 65 23 0.03 50
Grey WDC 140

Material: PVC base with Polypropylene clip.

WDC 120

H D

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 53
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 14

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Adhesive DC Clips
Comprises an adhesive base assembled with a non-metallic DC clip.
For use on surfaces other than PVC roofing. See page 55 for details of
Surface Primer.

For use with Bare Copper & Aluminium Tapes

Conductor D H Clip Unit Pack Part


Size mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
Brown ADC 060
25 x 3 65 23 0.03 50
Grey ADC 080
ADC 080
Material: Polycarbonate base with Polypropylene clip.

For use with PVC Covered Copper & Aluminium Tapes


Conductor D H Clip Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
ADC 060 Brown ADC 100
Black ADC 120
25 x 3 65 23 Grey 0.03 50 ADC 140
Stone ADC 160
White ADC 180

Material: Polycarbonate base with Polypropylene clip.

ADC 180

ADC 120

ADC 160

H D

54 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 15

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Universal Welding Solvent, Cleaning Solution


& Surface Primer
Type Unit Pack Part
Weight Quantity Number
kg
Universal Welding Solvent 500ml spray
applicator for use with weldable DC clips 0.57 UWS 001
Sufficient for application of approx. 200 clips
Cleaning Solution (Acetone)
500ml spray applicator for cleaning 0.62 1 CSA 001
lacquered roofing membranes
Surface Primer 250ml spray applicator
for use with adhesive DC clips 0.24 PRIMER
Sufficient for application of approx. 500 clips

CoSHH datasheets are available on request.


PRIMER

UWS 001

CSA 001

Bitumen Felt DC Clips


For use on bitumen felt roofing only.
For use with Bare Copper & Aluminium Tapes
Conductor L W H Clip Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
Brown BDC 060
25 x 3 100 100 23 0.06 50
Grey BDC 080

Material: Bitumen Felt base with Polypropylene clip.

For use with PVC Covered Copper & Aluminium Tapes


BDC 060
Conductor L W H Clip Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
Brown BDC 100
Black BDC 120
Grey BDC 140
25 x 3 100 100 23 0.06 50
Stone BDC 160
White BDC 180
Green BDC 200

Material: Bitumen Felt base with Polypropylene clip.

L
H

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 55
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 16

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Glazing Bar Holdfasts


Originally designed to be used on glazing units but can be installed
wherever conductor has to be fixed onto a narrow flange. The holdfast
is assembled with a fixing screw for use with a metallic or non-metallic
DC clip.
For use with Copper Tapes
HGG 253 L W H Unit Pack Part
mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
35 22 20 0.12 10 HGG 253
Material: Gunmetal.

For use with Aluminium Tapes

HGA 253
L W H Unit Pack Part
mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
35 22 20 0.04 10 HGA 253
Material: Aluminium.

H W

Back Plate Holdfasts


Designed to be used where it is necessary to hold the conductor away
from the building surface. The holdfast is assembled with a fixing screw
for use with a metallic or non-metallic DC clip.
For use with Copper Tapes
L D Unit Pack Part
HBG 001
mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
74 63 0.33 5 HBG 001
Material: Gunmetal.
For use with Aluminium Tapes
L D Unit Pack Part
mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
74 63 0.15 5 HBA 001
Material: Aluminium.

56 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 17

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Square Tape Clamps


These Wallis four-way connectors are suitable for making cross, straight
through or tee joints in flat tape. The base has a countersunk hole in the
middle for securing the clamp to the building surface and the lid is fixed
by means of four screws.
Fix using countersunk woodscrew 11/2” x No. 10 and No. 10 wall plug.
JG253
For use with Bare Copper Tapes
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
25 x 3 50 50 13 0.15 25 JG 253
25 x 6 50 50 20 0.25 25 JG 256
31 x 3 60 60 14 0.22 25 JG 313 JG 506
38 x 6 71 71 22 0.59 25 JG 386
50 x 3 80 80 16 0.50 10 JG 503
50 x 6 79 79 22 0.52 10 JG 506
Material: Gunmetal.

For use with Lead Covered Copper Tape


Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg JPB 253L

25 x 3 70 70 25 0.86 25 JPB 253 L


Material: Phosphor Bronze.

For use with Bare Aluminium Tape


Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg JA 253

25 x 3 50 50 13 0.07 25 JA 253
Material: Aluminium.

W W

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 57
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 18

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Oblong Junction Clamps


Designed to join a range of tape sizes in a straight through position. In
many applications the clamp enables tapes to be overlapped and
secured by the two set screws.
For use with Bare Copper Tapes
Maximum L W H Unit Pack Part
Conductor Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
JGO 253 W mm kg
26 x 8 68 40 23 0.34 JGO 253 W
10
51 x 10 90 63 26 0.58 JGO 506 W
Material: Gunmetal.

For use with Lead Covered Copper Tape


Maximum L W H Unit Pack Part
Conductor Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
26 x 8 90 45 24 0.34 10 JPBO 253 L
JGO 506 W
Material: Phosphor Bronze.

For use with Bare Aluminium Tape


Maximum L W H Unit Pack Part
Conductor Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
26 x 8 68 40 23 0.11 10 JAO 253
Material: Aluminium.

JPBO 253 L

JAO 253

58 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 19

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Plate Type Test Clamps


This Wallis clamp is used to form a disconnecting joint between the
down conductor and earthing system.
There are two wall fixing holes on the bottom plate. Fix using JPA 253
countersunk woodscrews 11/2” x No. 10 and No. 10 wall plugs.
For use with Copper Tapes
Maximum D H Unit Pack Part
Conductor mm mm Weight Quantity Number
Size kg
mm
26 x 15 70 38 0.40 5 JPG 253
Material: Gunmetal.
For use with Aluminium Tapes JPG 253
Maximum D H Unit Pack Part
Conductor mm mm Weight Quantity Number
Size kg
mm
26 x 15 70 38 0.10 5 JPA 253

Material: Aluminium.

Screw Down Test Clamp


The screw down test clamp allows easy access to copper conductors
where frequent inspection and testing may be necessary.
For use with Copper Tapes
Maximum D Unit Pack Part
Conductor Size mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
26 x 8 61 0.72 5 JSG 253

Material: Gunmetal.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 59
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 20

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Bimetallic Connectors
These connectors are used to join aluminium and copper tapes
together. They are a neat and practical jointing method without the
need for tinning, riveting or wrapping the joint.
Fix using countersunk woodscrew 11/2” x No. 10 wall plug.

Conductor Material L W H Unit Pack Part


Size Type mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
Aluminium &
Copper 98 29 25 0.20 BIM 253
25 x 3 10
BSS 253
Stainless Steel 76 21 20 0.16 BSS 253

BIM 253

L W

‘B’ Bonds
This Wallis ‘B’ bond is used for bonding aluminium and copper tapes to
flat metal surfaces.
For use with Copper Tapes

Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part


Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
25 x 3 35 35 10 0.03 10 BBG 253 SS

BBG 253 SS Material: Gunmetal with M10 x 35mm Stainless Steel Set Screw.

For use with Aluminium Tapes


Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
25 x 3 35 35 10 0.01 10 BBA 253

Material: Aluminium with M10 x 35mm Stainless Steel Set Screw.


BBA 253

60 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 21

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Watermain Pipe Bond


Designed to bond large diameter metallic pipes into the earthing and
lightning protection systems.
For use with Bare Copper Tapes
Maximum L W Unit Pack Part
Conductor mm mm Weight Quantity Number
Width kg
mm
26 45 36 0.21 10 BWG 253

Material: Gunmetal with M10 x 35mm Phosphor Bronze Set Screw.

W L

Rainwater Pipe Bond


This pipe bond can be used on any application where tape can be
wrapped around circular objects such as pipes or rails.
For use with Bare Copper Tapes
Maximum L W H Unit Pack Part
Conductor mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
Width kg
mm BRG 253
26 32 32 16 0.20 10 BRG 253

Material: Gunmetal with M10 x 40mm Stainless Steel Set Screw.

For use with Bare Aluminium Tapes


Maximum L W H Unit Pack Part
Conductor mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
Width kg
mm
BRA 253
26 32 32 16 0.10 10 BRA 253

Material: Aluminium with M10 x 40mm Stainless Steel Set Screw.

H
W

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 61
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 22

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SOLID CIRCULAR SYSTEM

Air Rods
These air rods are used as part of the lightning protection system. They
are manufactured from 10mm diameter rod and are supplied with a
locknut.
Copper Air Rods
Thread L Unit Pack Part
Size mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
500 0.35 ARC 102
M10 5
ARC 102 1000 0.70 ARC 105
Material: Copper.

Aluminium Air Rods


ARA 102
Thread L Unit Pack Part
Size mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
500 0.11 ARA 102
M10 5
1000 0.22 ARA 105
Material: Aluminium.

Thread
Size

Multi-Purpose Air Rod Saddles


These saddles can be installed horizontally on roofs or vertically on
walls or parapets and are used in conjunction with the air rods shown
above. The saddles are suitable for use with 8mm diameter solid circular
conductor as well as 25 x 3mm flat tape.

UAG 253 For use with Copper Air Rods


Thread L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
M10 54 54 38 0.30 5 UAG 253

Material: Gunmetal.
For use with Aluminium Air Rods
Thread L W H Unit Pack Part
UAA 253 Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
M10 54 54 38 0.10 5 UAA 253

Material: Aluminium.

W
H

L L

62 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 23

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SOLID CIRCULAR SYSTEM

Slate Holdfasts
Wallis slate holdfasts provide a method of fixing solid circular conductor
above roof tiles without any drilling.
The aluminium tail slides underneath the tile and is fixed to the wooden
beam with a nail, the push-in roof clip then protrudes from under the
tile and offers a fixing for the conductor.
For use with Bare Solid Circular Conductors
Conductor L W H Clip Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
Brown HA 08 B
8 320 18 14 0.04 50
Grey HA 08 G

Material: Polypropylene clip with Aluminium tail.

For use with PVC Covered Solid Circular Conductors HA 08 B


Conductor L W H Clip Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
Brown HA 10 B
Black HA 10 BL
8 320 18 14 0.04 50
Grey HA 10 G
Stone HA 10 S HA 10 BL
White HA 10 W

Material: Polypropylene clip with Aluminium tail.

HA 10 G

HA 10 S

HA 10 W

W
H

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 63
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 24

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SOLID CIRCULAR SYSTEM

One Hole Conductor Clips


One hole conductor clips provide an easy method of fixing copper and
aluminium conductors to surfaces.
Fix using round head woodscrew 11/2” x No. 10 and No. 10 wall plug
For use with Solid Circular Copper Conductors
PCC 001
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size & mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
Type kg
8mm Bare 31 12 12 PCC 001
0.01 50
8mm PVC 41 20 15 PCC 002

Material: Copper.

PCA 001
For use with Solid Circular Aluminium Conductors
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size & mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
Type kg
8mm Bare 31 12 12 PCA 001
0.01 50
8mm PVC 41 20 15 PCA 002

Material: Aluminium.

L W

Metallic Conductor Clips


Metallic conductor clips secure the solid circular conductor to the
building surface. The larger sizes can also be used to support the
10mm air rods shown on page 62. Fix using countersunk
woodscrew 11/2” x No. 10 and No. 10 wall plug.
DCG 810
For use with Solid Circular Copper Conductors
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size & mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
Type kg
8mm Bare DCG 810
48 17 20 0.06 25
8mm PVC DCG 815

Material: Gunmetal.
DCA 810 For use with Solid Circular Aluminium Conductors
Conductor Unit
Size & L W H Weight Pack Part
Type mm mm mm kg Quantity Number

8mm Bare DCA 810


48 17 20 0.03 25
8mm PVC DCA 815

Material: Aluminium.

H W

L
L

64 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 25

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SOLID CIRCULAR SYSTEM

Non-Metallic Down Conductor Clips


A one-piece fold over clip designed for easy installation of solid circular
conductor. The clips are UV stabilised to prevent degradation from
sunlight and are non-brittle to protect against cold weather.
For use with Bare Solid Circular Conductors
Conductor L W H Clip Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg CP 08 BL CM 08 B
Brown CM 08 B
8 34 23 33 0.01 100
Grey CM 08 G
Material: Polypropylene.
For use with PVC Covered Solid Circular Conductors
Conductor L W H Clip Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg CP 08 S

Brown CP 08 B
Black CP 08 BL
8 34 23 33 Grey 0.01 100 CP 08 G
Stone CP 08 S
White CP 08 W

Material: Polypropylene. L

H
W

Push-in Roof Conductor Clips RM 08 B


A one-piece single screw fixing clip designed for easy installation of solid
circular conductors. The clips are UV stabilised to prevent degradation
from sunlight and are non-brittle to protect against cold weather.
For use with Bare Solid Circular Conductors
Conductor L W H Clip Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
Brown RM 08 B RP 08 G
8 29 18 14 0.01 100
Grey RM 08 G
Material: Polypropylene.
For use with PVC Covered Solid Circular Conductors RP 08 W
Conductor L W H Clip Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
Brown RP 08 B
Black RP 08 BL
8 29 18 14 Grey 0.01 100 RP 08 G
Stone RP 08 S
White RP 08 W

Material: Polypropylene. W

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 65
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 26

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SOLID CIRCULAR SYSTEM

‘MV’ Clamps
MVG 08
These Wallis four-way connectors are suitable for crossing over, making
straight joints and tee connections in solid circular conductor.
For use with Bare Solid Circular Copper Conductor
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 40 40 18 0.05 10 MVG 08

MVA 08 Material: Copper.

For use with Bare Solid Circular Aluminium Conductor


Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 40 40 18 0.01 10 MVA 08

Material: Aluminium.

‘T’ Connector Clamps


This purpose-designed ‘T’ connector clamp is ideal for connecting the
roof network to the down conductors of an 8mm solid circular lightning
TCG 08 protection system.

For use with Bare Solid Circular Copper Conductor


Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 45 45 19 0.11 10 TCG 08
TCA 08 Material: Gunmetal.
For use with Bare Solid Circular Aluminium Conductor
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 44 25 20 0.06 10 TCA 08

Material: Stainless Steel.

66 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 27

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SOLID CIRCULAR SYSTEM

Interface Test Clamps


This Wallis clamp is used for connecting flat tape to solid circular
conductor, for example where the lightning protection system has been
designed in 8mm copper conductor but the connection to the earth rod
is made using 25 x 3mm copper tape.
It will also serve for making through joints and tee connections in 8mm
solid circular conductor.
For use with Bare Copper Conductors
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg JYG 08
8 & 25 x 3 70 34 15 0.25 25 JYG 08
JYA 08
Material: Gunmetal.
For use with Bare Aluminium Conductors
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 & 25 x 3 70 34 15 0.09 25 JYA 08

Material: Aluminium.
H

Solid Circular to Tape Connectors


This Wallis four-way connector is suitable for crossing over flat tape and JOM 253
solid circular conductor. It will also serve for making straight through
joints and tee connections.
For use with Bare Copper Conductors
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Sizes mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg JOA 253

8 & 25 x 3 52 52 14 0.28 25 JOM 253


Material: Gunmetal.

For use with Bare Aluminium Conductors


Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Sizes mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 & 25 x 3 52 52 14 0.09 25 JOA 253
Material: Aluminium.

H
W

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 67
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 28

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SOLID CIRCULAR SYSTEM

Metalwork Bonding Clamps


These clamps are designed for bonding 8mm solid circular conductors
onto metal surfaces.
For use with Bare Solid Circular Copper Conductor
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 82 40 25 0.14 10 MBG 08

Material: Copper.

For use with Bare Solid Circular Aluminium Conductor


MBG 08 Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
MBA 08 8 82 40 25 0.09 10 MBA 08

Material: Aluminium.

Bimetallic Connectors
BIM 25308
These connectors are used to join 8mm aluminium and copper solid
circular conductors together. They are a neat and practical jointing
method without the need for tinning, riveting or wrapping the joint.

Conductor Type L W H Unit Pack Part


Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
Aluminium &
Copper 78 28 28 0.25 BIM 08
8 10
BIM 08 Stainless Steel 71 22 19 0.09 BSS 08

We also offer a connector suitable for joining 8mm aluminium solid


circular conductor to 25 x 3mm copper tape.

Conductor Type L W H Unit Pack Part


Sizes mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 to Aluminium &
Copper 78 28 29 0.20 10 BIM 25308
25 x 3

H L
H

L W

68 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 29

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SOLID CIRCULAR SYSTEM

Rainwater Pipe Bonds


This pipe bond can be used on any application where the perforated
tape can be wrapped around circular objects such as pipes or rails etc.
For use with Bare Solid Circular Copper Conductor
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 55 32 17 0.37 5 BRG 08

Material: Gunmetal with Perforated Copper Tail.

For use with Bare Solid Circular Aluminium Conductor


BRG 08
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 51 31 16 0.09 5 BRA 08

Material: Aluminium with Perforated Steel Tail.

W
H

Circular ‘B’ Bonds


This Wallis bond is used for bonding 8mm solid circular conductors to BBG 08
flat metal surfaces. BBA 08

For use with Bare Solid Circular Copper Conductor


Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 52 33 18 0.14 10 BBG 08

Material: Gunmetal.

For use with Bare Solid Circular Aluminium Conductor


Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 52 33 18 0.09 10 BBA 08

Material: Aluminium.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 69
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 30

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SOLID CIRCULAR SYSTEM

Tower Earth Clamps


These single-plate tower earth clamps are used for bonding copper and
aluminium conductors onto steel surfaces. The clamp is fixed by drilling
a hole in the steelwork and securing with the set screw provided.
BTC 008
For use with Bare Solid Circular Copper Conductor
Conductor L W H Set Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Screw Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 34 23 33 M10 x 50mm 0.09 10 BTC 008
Material: Gunmetal.

For use with Bare Solid Circular Aluminium Conductor


Conductor L W H Set Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Screw Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 40 22 12 M10 x 50mm 0.05 10 BTA 008
Material: Aluminium.

Multi-Purpose ‘B’ Bonds


This Wallis Multi-Purpose ‘B’ Bond can be used for bonding both 25 x 3mm
flat tape and 8mm diameter solid circular conductor to flat metal surfaces.
For use with Bare Copper Conductors
BBG 25308 Conductor L W H Set Unit Pack Part
Sizes mm mm mm Screw Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 & 25 x 3 34 34 13 M8 x 25mm 0.09 25 BBG 25308
Material: Gunmetal.

For use with Bare Aluminium Conductors


Conductor L W H Set Unit Pack Part
Sizes mm mm mm Screw Weight Quantity Number
BBA 25308 mm kg
8 & 25 x 3 34 34 13 M8 x 25mm 0.04 25 BBA 25308
Material: Aluminium.

W
H

70 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 31

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SOLID CIRCULAR SYSTEM

Pyramid Holdfast
The Pyramid Holdfast is designed to support 8mm diameter bare solid
circular conductors on flat roofs.
Manufactured from black weather-resistant plastic and filled with frost-
proof concrete. The lip around the base enables the holdfast to be
installed onto bitumen type roofs.
For use with Bare Solid Circular Conductors
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 180 130 70 1.00 12 HPY 008
Material: Plastic filled with Concrete.

W L

Circular Conductor Shoes


Used to bond 8mm bare solid circular conductors to metal surfaces.

For use with Bare Solid Circular Copper Conductor


Conductor Palm L W H Set Unit Pack Part GCS 008
Size Hole Ø mm mm mm Screws Weight Quantity Number
mm mm kg
8 12 61 23 25 M6 x 12mm 0.10 25 GCS 008
Material: Gunmetal.

For use with Bare Solid Circular Aluminium Conductor


Conductor Palm L W H Set Unit Pack Part
Size Hole Ø mm mm mm Screws Weight Quantity Number ACS 008
mm mm kg
8 12 61 23 25 M6 x 12mm 0.04 25 ACS 008
Material: Aluminium.

H W

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 71
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 32

LIGHTNING PROTECTION CABLE & WIRE SYSTEM

ATC 120M Taper Pointed Air Rods


Air rods form an important part of the air termination network of a
lightning protection system. All of our copper air rods are supplied with
a brass locknut enabling the rod to be locked tight against the
ATC 220M conductor. Please see pages 73 - 74 for further information on our range
of saddles, brackets and couplings.
Thread L L1 Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
300 0.53 ATC 112M
500 0.85 ATC 120M
M16 1000 41 1.70 5 ATC 139M
1500 2.59 ATC 160M
2000 3.47 ATC 179M
Material: Copper.

Thread Size

L1

Multi-Point
Used in conjunction with the taper pointed copper air rods.
Air H W Unit Pack Part
Rod Ø mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
16 156 72 0.30 5 MPC 16

Material: Gunmetal base with Copper spikes.

72 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 33

LIGHTNING PROTECTION CABLE & WIRE SYSTEM

Side Mounting Air Rod Brackets


These brackets provide a 75mm projection from the building face and
are used where it is not possible to fit a saddle onto the building roof.
The brackets are used in conjunction with the rod to cable coupling
used to secure the cable to the air rod.
For use with Copper Air Rods
Rod Ø L W Unit Pack Part
mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
16 97 120 0.39 5 AMBG 16
AMBG 16
Material: Gunmetal.

W W

Rod to Cable Couplings


Enables the stranded cable to be connected to the air rod. Used in
conjunction with the side mounting air rod brackets.

Conductor Thread L D Unit Pack Part


Size Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm2 kg
50 0.25 AOG 050
70 M16 80 40 0.25 5 AOG 070
95 0.22 AOG 070

Material: Gunmetal.

AOG 070

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 73
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 34

LIGHTNING PROTECTION CABLE & WIRE SYSTEM

Air Rod Cable Saddles


These saddles are used to support the copper taper pointed air rods on
flat roof surfaces.

Conductor Thread L W H Unit Pack Part


Size Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm2 kg
50 1.10 ASGF 050
70 M16 85 85 65 1.00 5 ASGF 070
95 0.90 ASGF 095
Material: Gunmetal.

ASGF 050

L
H

Cable Shoes
Used to bond stranded copper conductors to metal surfaces.

Conductor Palm L W H Set Unit Pack Part


Size Hole Ø mm mm mm Screws Weight Quantity Number
mm2 mm kg
50 23 25 0.10 GCS 050
70 12 61 25 27 M6 x 12mm 0.12 25 GCS 070
95 27 29 0.14 GCS 095
Material: Gunmetal.

H W

74 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 35

LIGHTNING PROTECTION CABLE & WIRE SYSTEM

One Hole Cable Clips


Wallis one hole cable clips provide an easy method of fixing stranded
copper conductors to surfaces.
For use with Bare Stranded Copper Conductors
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm2 kg
6 10 10 5 0.01 PCC 006
10 10 10 5 0.01 PCC 010
PCC 010
16 15 10 5 0.01 PCC 016
25 15 10 8 0.01 PCC 025
35 18 10 8 0.01 PCC 035
50 18 10 10 0.01 PCC 050
70 22 10 10 0.01 50 PCC 070
95 22 10 13 0.01 PCC 095
120 25 15 15 0.01 PCC 120
150 25 15 15 0.02 PCC 150
185 30 15 20 0.02 PCC 185
240 30 20 20 0.02 PCC 240
300 35 20 25 0.02 PCC 300 PCC 050

Material: Copper.

For use with PVC Insulated Stranded Copper Conductors


Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm2 kg
6 10 10 5 0.01 PCP 006
10 10 10 7 0.01 PCP 010
16 15 10 7 0.01 PCP 016
25 15 10 10 0.01 PCP 025
35 18 10 10 0.01 PCP 035
50 18 10 15 0.01 PCP 050 PCP 300

70 22 10 15 0.01 50 PCP 070


95 22 10 15 0.01 PCP 095
120 25 15 20 0.01 PCP 120
150 25 15 20 0.02 PCP 150
185 30 15 25 0.02 PCP 185
240 30 20 25 0.02 PCP 240
300 35 20 30 0.02 PCP 300

Material: Copper.

L W

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 75
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 36

LIGHTNING PROTECTION CABLE & WIRE SYSTEM

Metallic Cable Clips


Metallic cable clips secure the stranded copper conductor to the
building surface.
Fix using countersunk woodscrew 11/2” x No. 10 and No. 10 wall plug.
DCG 006
For use with Bare Stranded Copper Conductors
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm2 kg
6 35 15 12 0.03 50 DCG 006
10 35 15 12 0.03 50 DCG 010
16 35 15 15 0.04 50 DCG 016
25 35 15 15 0.04 50 DCG 025
35 46 17 17 0.05 50 DCG 035
DCG 025
50 46 17 17 0.05 50 DCG 050
70 46 17 19 0.06 25 DCG 070
95 46 17 21 0.06 25 DCG 095
120 60 20 23 0.07 25 DCG 120
150 60 20 24 0.07 25 DCG 150
185 60 20 26 0.08 25 DCG 185
240 60 20 29 0.09 25 DCG 240
300 60 20 31 0.09 25 DCG 300

Material: Gunmetal.
DCG 150
For use with PVC Insulated Stranded Copper Conductors
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm2 kg
6 35 15 14 0.03 50 DGP 006
10 35 15 14 0.03 50 DGP 010
16 35 15 17 0.04 50 DGP 016
25 35 15 17 0.04 50 DGP 025
35 46 17 19 0.05 50 DGP 035
50 46 17 19 0.05 50 DGP 050
70 46 17 21 0.06 25 DGP 070
95 46 17 23 0.06 25 DGP 095
120 60 20 25 0.07 25 DGP 120
150 60 20 26 0.07 25 DGP 150
185 60 20 28 0.08 25 DGP 185
240 60 20 31 0.09 25 DGP 240
300 60 20 33 0.09 25 DGP 300

Material: Gunmetal.

H W

L
L

76 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 37

LIGHTNING PROTECTION CABLE & WIRE SYSTEM

Square Cable Clamps


These Wallis four-way connectors are suitable for making cross, straight
through or tee joints in stranded copper conductor.

Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part


Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm2 kg
50 50 50 30 0.30 JGC 050
70 53 53 33 0.27 25 JGC 070
95 55 55 35 0.22 JGC 095

Material: Gunmetal.

JGC 070

L
H

Universal Cable Connectors


This connector is suitable for joining cables in a test point as part of the
lightning protection system.
The base has a countersunk hole in the middle for securing the
connector to the building surface. Fix using countersunk woodscrew
11/2” x No. 10 and No. 10 wall plug.

Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part


Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm2 kg
50 0.15 UCC 050
70 71 21 19 0.17 25 UCC 070
95 0.19 UCC 095
UCC 070
Material: Naval Brass.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 77
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 38

LIGHTNING PROTECTION CABLE & WIRE SYSTEM

Tower Earth Clamps


These double-plate tower earth clamps are used for bonding stranded
copper conductors onto steel surfaces. The clamp is fixed by drilling a
hole in the steelwork and securing with the set screw provided.

Conductor Range L W H Set Unit Pack Part


mm2 mm mm mm Screw Weight Qty Number
16 - 70 45 30 17 M10 x 50mm 0.12 BTC 070
10
70 - 120 48 35 22 M12 x 60mm 0.23 BTC 120
BTC 120
Material: Gunmetal.

BTC 070

H
L

Cable to Tape Connectors


This Wallis four-way connector is suitable for crossing over flat copper
tape and bare stranded copper cable. It will also serve for making
straight through joints and tee connections.

Cable Tape L W H Unit Pack Part


JOM 050
Size Size mm mm mm Weight Qty Number
mm2 mm
50 52 52 14 0.28 JOM 050
70 25 x 3 54 54 16 0.33 25 JOM 070
95 56 56 18 0.39 JOM 095

Material: Gunmetal.

H
H
W

78 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 39

LIGHTNING PROTECTION MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

Strike Pads
This Wallis strike pad is used where it is not possible to install conductor
on the roof or side of a building. A typical application would be on the
roof of a car park where the conductor is laid underneath the tarmac SC 01
and the strike pads fitted on top. Supplied with a 40mm dowel and nut.
For use with Copper Conductor
D H Unit Pack Part
mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
122 40 0.60 5 SC 01
SA 01
Material: Gunmetal.

For use with Aluminium Conductor


D H Unit Pack Part
mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
122 40 0.20 5 SA 01
Material: Aluminium.

Interceptor Plates
These Wallis interceptor plates fit under the roof tile and are connected
into the lightning protection system. The square plate protrudes from the
tile and provides the interception point.
For use with Copper Conductor
L L1 W Unit Pack Part
mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
500 50 50 0.40 5 SPC

Material: Gunmetal. SPC

For use with Aluminium Conductor


L L1 W Unit Pack Part
mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
SPA
kg
500 50 50 0.11 5 SPA

Material: Aluminium.
L1

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 79
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 40

LIGHTNING PROTECTION MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

Oxide Inhibiting Compound


We recommend the use of an oxide inhibitor whenever aluminium
fittings are installed on a lightning protection system.
Penetrox electrical joint compound is a natural-petroleum based grease
that seals out oxygen and moisture on aluminium to aluminium and
aluminium to copper connections. It is not recommended for use with
rubber or polyethylene materials.

Description Unit Pack Part


Weight Quantity Number
kg
8oz plastic squeeze bottle 0.23 1 IC 08

CoSHH datasheet available on request.

Puddle Flanges
The puddle flange is used where the down conductor must pass
through a roof or waterproof membrane. The flats of the flange are
made waterproof by fixing with glue, concrete or specialist roofing
materials. See page 20 for our range of clamps suitable for use with
puddle flanges.
For use with Copper Conductor
L W Unit Pack Part
mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
600 150 x 150 1.68 1 PFC 01

PFC 01 Material: Copper.


For use with Aluminium Conductor
L W Unit Pack Part
mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
600 150 x 150 0.54 1 PFA 01

Material: Aluminium.

W L

80 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 41

LIGHTNING PROTECTION MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

Wallis Sealing Tape


A waterproof tape for wrapping joints to provide protection
against corrosion.

Description Unit Pack Part


Weight Quantity Number
kg
50mm wide x 10m length roll 0.75 1 DT 510

Silfos
Silfos is an alloy of silver, phosphorous and copper. It is used to braze
copper to copper in air without the use of flux.
Description Unit Pack Part
Weight Quantity Number
kg
50mm x 0.12 x 8m length roll 0.50 1 SILFOS

CoSHH datasheet available on request.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 81
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 42

LIGHTNING PROTECTION MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

Bitumen Felt Roll


Supplied in rolls for use on asphalt roofs.

Description Unit Pack Part


Weight Quantity Number
kg
100mm wide x 10m length roll 2.64 1 BFR 001

Green & Yellow PVC Insulating Tape


General-purpose insulating tape for electrical applications.

Description Unit Pack Part


Weight Quantity Number
kg
25mm wide x 33m length roll 0.14 1 GYT 2533

82 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 43

LIGHTNING PROTECTION MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

Tinmans Solder
Tinmans commercial grade solder supplied by the kilogram
(4 sticks).

Description Unit Pack Part


Weight Quantity Number
kg
Tinmans Solder (4 sticks) 1.00 1 TMS 004

Material: 60% Tin, 40% Lead.

Flux
A well-established and reliable multi-purpose flux paste. It is designed
for engineering and sheet metal work, and is equally as effective for
soldering of copper products. Use with Tinmans Solder.

Description Unit Pack Part


Weight Quantity Number
kg
Fluxite soldering paste 100g tin 0.10 1 FLX 100

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 83
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 44

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FREE-STANDING AIR TERMINALS

Free-Standing Air Terminals


A range of free-standing lightning interception terminals for the
protection of roof-mounted equipment on surfaces where no penetration
of the roof structure for anchoring is allowed.
A multi-component, stackable system with screw retention to achieve
protection heights of up to 12m.
The Free-Standing Air Terminal system is designed to withstand wind
speeds of up to 190kmh (118mph). The table on page 86 details the
required components for installation in different wind speed zones. We
recommend that all concrete bases are installed using the Protective
Roof Pads (Wallis part number PRP 001).

Terminal Components Unit Pack Part


Height m Weight Qty Number
m kg

3.0 Two-piece: 1.5 + 1.5 5.0 ATF 030


3.5 Two-piece: 2.0 + 1.5 5.5 ATF 035
4.0 Two-piece: 2.5 + 1.5 7.0 ATF 040
4.5 Two-piece: 3.5 + 1.0 9.2 ATF 045
5.0 Two-piece: 3.5 + 1.5 10.0 ATF 050
5.5 Two-piece: 4.0 + 1.5 10.6 ATF 055
6.0 Three-piece: 2.0 + 2.0 + 2.0 18.0 ATF 060
6.5 Three-piece: 2.5 + 2.0 + 2.0 21.2 1 ATF 065
7.0 Three-piece: 3.0 + 2.0 + 2.0 23.5 ATF 070
7.5 Three-piece: 3.5 + 2.0 + 2.0 26.0 ATF 075
8.0 Three-piece: 4.0 + 2.0 + 2.0 28.7 ATF 080
9.0 Three-piece: 4.0 + 2.5 + 2.5 30.5 ATF 090
10.0 Three-piece: 5.0 + 2.5 + 2.5 35.5 ATF 010
11.0 Three-piece: 5.0 + 3.5 + 2.5 37.8 ATF 011
12.0 Three-piece: 6.0 + 3.5 + 2.5 42.9 ATF 012
Material: Stainless Steel with Aluminium tip.

84 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 45

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FREE-STANDING AIR TERMINALS

Free-Standing Air Terminal Supports


A range of supports to suit the free-standing air terminals shown on
page 84. See table on page 86 for recommended component
configuration.
Square Plate Support
For use with air terminals up to 4m. Used in conjunction with square
concrete bases.
Terminal Terminal Required No. of Unit Pack Part ATS 001
Height Barrel Ø Mounting Concrete Weight Quantity Number
m mm Space Supports kg
mm
up to 4.0m 42 650 x 650 4 or 8 7 1 ATS 001
Material: Stainless Steel.

Tripod Supports
For use with air terminals between 4.5m and 10m. Used in conjunction
with round concrete bases.
Terminal Terminal Required No. of Unit Pack Part
Height Barrel Ø Mounting Concrete Weight Quantity Number
m mm Space Supports kg ATT 001
mm
4.5 - 5.5 42 1350 x 1350 3 8 ATT 001
6.0 - 8.0 60 1850 x 1850 6 25 1 ATT 002
9.0 - 10.0 60 1850 x 1850 10 40 ATT 003
Material: Stainless Steel.

Quad Support
For use with air-terminals between 11m and 12m. Used in conjunction with
round concrete bases. ATT 002

Terminal Terminal Required No. of Unit Pack Part


Height Barrel Ø Mounting Concrete Weight Quantity Number
m mm Space Supports kg
mm
11.0 - 12.0 60 3400 x 3400 17 159 1 ATQ 001
Material: Stainless Steel.

ATT 003

ATQ 001

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 85
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 46

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FREE-STANDING AIR TERMINALS

Concrete Bases
Square
Used in conjunction with the Square Plate Support.
Base Size Height Pack Part
Weight mm mm Quantity Number
kg
12 60 SCB 012
SCB 012 300 x 300 1
16 80 SCB 016

Material: Concrete.
Round
Used in conjunction with the Tripod and Quad Supports. Integral M16
Thread.
Base Ø Height Pack Part
Weight mm mm Quantity Number
kg
SCB 016
12 380 75 RCB 012
16 380 93 RCB 016
1
20 380 105 RCB 020
25 420 105 RCB 025

Material: Concrete.
Protective Roof Pad
Suit all sizes of round and square concrete bases. Protects waterproof
PRP 001 roofing membrane from damage.
Size Pack Part
mm Quantity Number
Ø 445 / 300 x 300 1 PRP 001

Material: Rubber.

Free-Standing Air Terminal System

Wind Speeds
Terminal Terminal
Height Part Up to 130 kmh (81 mph) Up to 150 kmh (93 mph) Up to 170 kmh (106 mph) Up to 190 kmh (118 mph)
m Number
Support Concrete Support Concrete Support Concrete Support Concrete
Bases Bases Bases Bases
3.0 ATF 030 ATS 001 SCB 012 x 4 ATS 001 SCB 012 x 4 ATS 001 SCB 012 x 4 ATS 001 SCB 012 x 4
3.5 ATF 035 ATS 001 SCB 012 x 4 ATS 001 SCB 012 x 4 ATS 001 SCB 016 x 4 ATS 001 SCB 016 x 4
4.0 ATF 040 ATS 001 SCB 012 x 4 ATS 001 SCB 016 x 4 ATS 001 SCB 012 x 8 ATS 001 SCB 016 x 8
4.5 ATF 045 ATT 001 SCB 016 x 3 ATT 001 RCB 020 x 3 ATT 001 RCB 025 x 3 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6
5.0 ATF 050 ATT 001 SCB 016 x 3 ATT 001 RCB 020 x 3 ATT 001 RCB 025 x 3 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6
5.5 ATF 055 ATT 001 SCB 020 x 3 ATT 001 RCB 025 x 3 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6
6.0 ATF 060 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 016 x 6
6.5 ATF 065 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 016 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 025 x 6
7.0 ATF 070 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 016 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 020 x 6 * *
7.5 ATF 075 ATT 002 RCB 016 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 020 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 025 x 6 * *
8.0 ATF 080 ATT 002 RCB 020 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 025 x 6 ATT 003 RCB 025 x 10 * *
9.0 ATF 090 ATT 003 RCB 025 x 10 ATT 003 RCB 025 x 10 ATT 003 RCB 025 x 10 * *
10.0 ATF 010 ATT 002 RCB 025 x 10 ATT 002 RCB 025 x 10 * * * *
11.0 ATF 011 ATQ 001 RCB 025 x 17 ATQ 001 RCB 025 x 17 * * * *
12.0 ATF 012 ATQ 001 RCB 025 x 17 ATQ 001 RCB 025 x 17 * * * *
*Please contact our sales office for information and advice.

86 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 47

CONDUCTORS CONTENTS

CONDUCTORS
Introduction 88 – 89

Flat Tape System 90 – 97

Solid Circular System 98 – 99

Cable & Wire System 100 – 104

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 87
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 48

CONDUCTORS INTRODUCTION

Introduction Copper Conductor Ratings


The conductor is a vital component of any earthing and Fault current capacities, for one and three second durations,
for a wide selection of standard sizes of copper tapes are
lightning protection system.
shown in the table below. These conductor ratings are based
Wallis offers an extensive range of different types of upon the recommendations of BS 7430 with an initial
conductors manufactured in both copper and aluminium conductor temperature of 30°C and a maximum temperature
of 250°C.
which conform to the main British, European and world
earthing and lightning protection standards. Conductor C.S.A. kA for kA for
Size mm2 1 second 3 seconds
mm
There are several important
12.5 x 1.5 18.75 3.3 1.9
criteria to consider
12.5 x 3 37.5 6.6 3.8
when selecting a 20 x 1.5 30 5.3 3.0
conductor: 20 x 3 60 10.6 6.1
25 x 1.5 37.5 6.6 3.8
The conductor must 25 x 3 75 13.2 7.6
be resilient to the environmental 25 x 4 100 17.6 10.2
conditions in which it is installed. In particular it should be 25 x 6 150 26.4 15.2
30 x 2 60 10.6 6.1
capable of withstanding mechanical damage and
30 x 3 90 15.8 9.1
corrosion. It should also be compatible with 30 x 4 120 21.1 12.2
the material of other connected 30 x 5 150 26.4 15.2
components. 31 x 3 93 16.4 9.5
31.5 x 4 126 22.2 12.8
Secondly, the conductor 31 x 6 186 32.7 18.9
should have sufficient 38 x 3 114 20.1 11.6
38 x 5 190 33.4 19.3
cross-sectional area to be
38 x 6 228 40.1 23.2
capable of carrying, 40 x 3 120 21.1 12.2
without sustaining damage 40 x 4 160 28.2 16.3
or deterioration, any 40 x 5 200 35.2 20.3
40 x 6 240 42.2 24.4
currents that may
40 x 6.3 252 44.4 25.6
reasonably be expected. 50 x 3 150 26.4 15.2
50 x 4 200 35.2 20.3
50 x 5 250 44.0 25.4
50 x 6 300 52.8 30.5
50 x 6.3 315 55.4 32.0

88 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 49

CONDUCTORS INTRODUCTION

PVC Covered Conductors


Wallis offers a range of UV-stabilised PVC covered tapes BLACK 18B29*
and solid circular conductors in a range of different
colours. These colours have been chosen to
match the most common structural GREEN 06C39*
materials and will reduce the visual
impact of a lightning
protection conductor.
GREY 00A07*

STONE 08B23*

WHITE 10B15*

BROWN BS 6746C

*PVC colours to BS 5252

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 89
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:06 Page 50

CONDUCTORS FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Bare Copper Tapes


Wallis high conductivity bare copper tape is used on both lightning
protection and earthing applications. It is annealed for ease of use and
has radiused edges.
All our standard bare copper tapes are marked ‘Wallis U.K. -
BS EN 13601’.

TC 506 Size C.S.A. Weight per Standard Part


WxH mm2 Metre Coil Size Number
mm kg m
12.5 x 1.5 18.75 0.17 100 TC 121
12.5 x 3 37.5 0.33 100 TC 123
TC 406 20 x 1.5 30 0.27 100 TC 201
20 x 3 60 0.53 100 TC 203
25 x 1.5 37.5 0.33 100 TC 251
25 x 3 75 0.67 25 & 50 TC 253
TC 303 25 x 4 100 0.89 50 TC 254
25 x 6 150 1.33 40 TC 256
30 x 2 60 0.53 50 TC 302
TC 256 30 x 3 90 0.80 50 TC 303
30 x 4 120 1.07 40 TC 304
30 x 5 150 1.33 40 TC 305
31 x 3 93 0.83 50 TC 313
TC 253
31.5 x 4 126 1.13 40 TC 3154
31 x 6 186 1.65 30 TC 316
38 x 3 114 1.01 50 TC 383
TC 203 38 x 5 190 1.69 30 TC 385
38 x 6 228 2.02 25 TC 386
40 x 3 120 1.06 40 TC 403
40 x 4 160 1.42 30 TC 404
40 x 5 200 1.78 25 TC 405
40 x 6 240 2.16 25 TC 406
40 x 6.3 252 2.24 25 TC 4063
50 x 3 150 1.33 40 TC 503
50 x 4 200 1.78 30 TC 504
50 x 5 250 2.22 20 TC 505
50 x 6 300 2.68 20 TC 506
50 x 6.3 315 2.80 20 TC 5063
50 x 8 400 3.60 15 TC 508

Material: Copper to BS EN 13601 (formerly BS 1432).

90 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:06 Page 51

CONDUCTORS FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

PVC Covered Copper Tapes


Wallis PVC covered copper tapes are mainly used as down conductors
on a building’s structural lightning protection system.
The copper is manufactured to BS EN 13601 and is annealed for ease
of use.
There is a choice of six standard PVC colours to match the most
common building materials and provide an aesthetic finish to the
external lightning protection system. All PVC coverings are UV stabilised
although some discolouration may occur over time.
Other PVC colours are also available to order. These may be subject to
minimum order quantities and lead times. Please contact our sales
office for further information. TP 253 B

Size Colour C.S.A. Weight Standard Part


WxH mm2 per Metre Coil Sizes Number
mm kg m
12.5 x 1.5 Black 18.75 0.21 100 TP 121 BL TP 253 G

Brown TP 253 B
Black 25 TP 253 BL
Grey & TP 253 G TP 253 W
25 x 3 75 0.77
Green 50 TP 253 GR
Stone TP 253 S
White TP 253 W
25 x 6 Green 150 1.33 40 TP 256 GR
TP 253 BL
50 x 3 Green 150 1.33 40 TP 503 GR
50 x 6 Green 300 2.68 20 TP 506 GR

Material: Copper to BS EN 13601 (formerly BS 1432).


PVC colours to BS 5252 except green to BS 6746C. TP 253 GR

TP 506 GR

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 91
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:06 Page 52

CONDUCTORS FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Green & Yellow PVC Insulated Copper Tape


Size C.S.A. Weight Standard Part
WxH mm2 per Metre Coil Size Number
mm kg m
25 x 3 75 0.79 25 & 50 TP 253 GY
Material: Copper to BS EN 13601 (formerly BS 1432).
PVC colour to BS 6746C.

Lead Covered Copper Tape


Size C.S.A. Weight Standard Part
WxH mm2 per Metre Coil Size Number
mm kg m
25 x 3 75 2.56 25 TL 253

Material: Copper to BS EN 13601 (formerly BS 1432).

LSOH Covered Copper Tapes


Size Colour C.S.A. Weight Standard Part
WxH mm2 per Metre Coil Size Number
mm kg m
25 x 3 75 0.77 25 & 50 TP 253 GRLSF
25 x 6 Green 150 1.53 40 TP 256 GRLSF
50 x 6 300 2.95 20 TP 506 GRLSF

Material: Copper to BS EN 13601 (formerly BS 1432).


PVC colours to BS 6746C.

TP 253 GRLSF
W

92 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:06 Page 53

CONDUCTORS FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Tinned Copper Tapes


Size C.S.A. Weight Standard Part
WxH mm2 per Metre Coil Size Number
mm kg m
12.5 x 1.5 18.75 0.17 100 TT 121
12.5 x 3 37.5 0.33 100 TT 123
20 x 1.5 30 0.27 100 TT 201
20 x 3 60 0.53 100 TT 203
25 x 1.5 37.5 0.33 100 TT 251
25 x 3 75 0.67 50 TT 253
25 x 4 100 0.89 50 TT 254
25 x 6 150 1.33 40 TT 256 TT 506
30 x 2 60 0.53 50 TT 302
30 x 3 90 0.80 50 TT 303
TT 406
30 x 4 120 1.07 40 TT 304
30 x 5 150 1.33 40 TT 305
31 x 3 93 0.83 50 TT 313
TT 313
31.5 x 4 126 1.13 40 TT 3154
31 x 6 186 1.65 30 TT 316
38 x 3 114 1.01 50 TT 383 TT 256

38 x 5 190 1.69 30 TT 385


38 x 6 228 2.02 25 TT 386
TT 253
40 x 3 120 1.06 40 TT 403
40 x 4 160 1.42 30 TT 404
40 x 5 200 1.78 25 TT 405
TT 203
40 x 6 240 2.16 25 TT 406
40 x 6.3 252 2.24 25 TT 4063
50 x 3 150 1.33 40 TT 503
50 x 4 200 1.78 30 TT 504
50 x 5 250 2.22 20 TT 505
50 x 6 300 2.68 20 TT 506
50 x 6.3 315 2.80 20 TT 5063
50 x 8 400 3.60 15 TT 508

Material: Copper to BS EN 13601 (formerly BS 1432).

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 93
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:06 Page 54

CONDUCTORS FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Bare Hard Drawn Copper Bars


Size C.S.A. Weight Standard Part
WxH mm2 per Metre Length Number
mm kg m
20 x 3 60 0.53 HD 2003
25 x 3 75 0.67 HD 2503
25 x 4 100 0.89 HD 2504
25 x 6 150 1.33 HD 2506
38 x 6 228 2.03 4 HD 3806

HD 2503 50 x 6 300 2.68 HD 5006


75 x 6 450 4.02 HD 7506
100 x 5 500 4.48 HD 10005
100 x 6 600 5.38 HD 10006

Material: Copper to BS EN 12163 (formerly BS 2874).


HD 2506

HD 5006 H

Tinned Hard Drawn Copper Bars


Size C.S.A. Weight Standard Part
WxH mm2 per Metre Length Number
mm kg m
25 x 3 75 0.67 HDT 2503
25 x 6 150 1.33 4 HDT 2506
50 x 6 300 2.68 HDT 5006

Material: Copper to BS EN 12163 (formerly BS 2874).


HDT 2503

HDT 2506

HDT 5006

94 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:06 Page 55

CONDUCTORS FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Bare Copper Flat Braids


Wallis copper braids are utilised as flexible earth bonding leads.
Other sizes and constructions are available on request. Please contact
our sales office for further information.
Nominal Nominal Size Braid Current Weight Standard Part
C.S.A. WxH Construction Rating per Metre Coil Size Number
mm2 mm Amps kg m
6 12 x 1.0 24/8/0.2mm 66 0.06 100 FB 121
10 15 x 1.5 48/7/0.2mm 90 0.10 50 FB 151 FB 192

16 19 x 2.5 48/11/0.2mm 120 0.16 50 FB 192


25 23 x 2.0 48/17/0.2mm 160 0.25 50 FB 232
35 25 x 3.5 48/23/0.2mm 200 0.34 50 FB 253
50 30 x 5.0 48/33/0.2mm 250 0.48 50 FB 305 FB 253

70 32 x 6.0 48/46/0.2mm 300 0.63 50 FB 326

Material: Copper wire to BS EN 13602 (formerly BS 4109).


FB 326

Tinned Copper Flat Braids


Wallis tinned copper braids are utilised as flexible earth bonding leads
with additional corrosion protection
Other sizes, materials and constructions are available on request. Please
contact our sales office for further information.

Nominal Nominal Size Braid Current Weight Standard Part


C.S.A. WxH Construction Rating per Metre Coil Size Number
mm2 mm Amps kg m FBT 192
6 12 x 1.0 24/8/0.2mm 66 0.06 100 FBT 121
10 15 x 1.5 48/ 7/0.2mm 90 0.10 50 FBT 151
16 19 x 2.5 48/11/0.2mm 120 0.16 50 FBT 192
25 23 x 2.0 48/17/0.2mm 160 0.25 50 FBT 232 FBT 253
35 25 x 3.5 48/23/0.2mm 200 0.34 50 FBT 253
50 30 x 5.0 48/33/0.2mm 250 0.48 50 FBT 305
70 32 x 6.0 48/46/0.2mm 300 0.63 50 FBT 326
FBT 326
Material: Copper wire to BS EN 13602 (formerly BS 4109).

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
95
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:06 Page 56

CONDUCTORS FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Bare Aluminium Tapes


Wallis bare aluminium tapes are used on lightning protection system
applications. The aluminium is annealed for ease of use and has radiused
edges.

Size C.S.A. Weight Standard Part


WxH mm2 per Metre Coil Size Number
mm kg m
12.5 x 1.5 18.75 0.05 TA 121
TA 253
20 x 3 60 0.15 TA 203
25 x 3 75 0.21 TA 253

TA 203 30 x 3 90 0.25 50 TA 303


25 x 6 150 0.42 TA 256
40 x 6 240 0.67 TA 406
50 x 6 300 0.85 TA 506
TA 506
Material: Aluminium to BS2898.

PVC Covered Aluminium Tapes


Wallis PVC covered aluminium tapes are available in a choice of six standard
colours to match the most common building materials and provide an
aesthetic finish to the external lightning protection system. All PVC coverings
are UV stabilised although some discolouration may occur over time.
Other PVC colours are also available to order. These may be subject to
minimum order quantities and lead times. Please contact our sales office for
further information.

Size Colour C.S.A. Weight Standard Part


WxH mm2 per Metre Coil Size Number
mm kg m
TAP 253 BL 12.5 x 1.5 Black 0.09 50
18.75 TAP 121 BL
20 x 3 Black 60 0.25 50 TAP 203 BL
Brown TAP 253 B

TAP 253 B Black TAP 253 BL


25 x 3 Grey 75 0.30 50 TAP 253 G
Green TAP 253 GR
Stone TAP 253 S
TAP 253 GR White TAP 253 W

Material: Aluminium to BS 2898.


PVC colours to BS 5252 except green to BS 6746C.

96 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:06 Page 57

CONDUCTORS FLAT TAPE SYSTEM

Anti-Vandal Tape Guards


Wallis anti-vandal tape guards provide protection from accidental
damage, vandalism and theft for flat tapes up to 40mm wide.
Easy to secure, the guard has a low profile and the galvanised finish
offers long lasting resistance to corrosion.

L W W1 H Unit Pack Part


mm mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
2000 1.98 AVG
72 40 17 1
3000 2.72 AVG 3 AVG

Material: Galvanised Steel.

L W W1 H Unit Pack Part


mm mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
2000 1.98 AVP AVP
72 40 17 1
3000 2.72 AVP 3

Material: Galvanised Steel with black powder coating.

W1
H
W

Bare Perforated Copper Tape


Wallis perforated copper tape is used for bonding of lightning protection
systems. It is annealed for ease of use and has radiused edges.

Size C.S.A. Weight Standard Part


WxH mm2 per Metre Coil Size Number
mm kg m
25 x 1.5 37.5 0.33 100 PCT 251
Material: Copper to BS EN 13601 (formerly BS 1432).

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 97
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 58

CONDUCTORS SOLID CIRCULAR SYSTEM

Bare Solid Circular Copper Conductor


Wallis bare 8mm diameter solid circular copper conductor is used on
lightning protection systems. It is annealed for ease of use.

D C.S.A. Weight Standard Part


mm mm2 per Metre Coil Size Number
kg m
8 50.27 0.44 50 CSC 08

Material: Copper to BS EN 13601 (formerly BS 1433).

PVC Covered Solid Circular Copper Conductors


Wallis PVC covered 8mm diameter copper conductors are mainly used as
down conductors on a building’s structural lightning protection system.
There is a choice of five standard PVC colours to match the most
common building materials and provide an aesthetic finish to the external
lightning protection system. All the PVC coverings are UV stabilised
although some discolouration may occur over time.
Other PVC colours are available to order but may be subject to minimum
order quantities and lead-times. Please contact our sales office for further
information.
D Colour C.S.A. D1 Weight Standard Part
CPC 08G mm mm2 mm per Metre Coil Size Number
kg m
Brown CPC 08 B
Black CPC 08 BL

CPC 08S 8 Grey 50.27 10 0.49 50 CPC 08 G


Stone CPC 08 S
White CPC 08 W

Material: Copper to BS EN 13601 (formerly BS 1433).


CPC 08W PVC colours to BS 5252.

D D1
D

98 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 59

CONDUCTORS SOLID CIRCULAR SYSTEM

Bare Solid Circular Aluminium Conductor


Wallis bare 8mm diameter solid circular aluminium conductor is used on
lightning protection systems. It is annealed for ease of use.

D C.S.A. Weight Standard Part


mm mm2 per Metre Coil Size Number
kg m
8 50.27 0.12 50 CSA 08

Material: Aluminium to BS 2898.

D
D

PVC Covered Solid Circular Aluminium


Conductors
Wallis PVC covered 8mm diameter aluminium conductors are used as
down conductors on a building’s structural lightning protection system.
There is a choice of five standard PVC colours to match the most
common building materials and provide an aesthetic finish to the external
lightning protection system. All the PVC coverings are UV stabilised
although some discolouration may occur over time.
Other PVC colours are available to order but may be subject to minimum
order quantities and lead-times. Please contact our sales office for further
information.
CPA 08B
D Colour C.S.A. D1 Weight Standard Part
mm mm2 mm per Metre Coil Size Number
kg m
Brown CPA 08 B
Black CPA 08 BL
8 Grey 50.27 10 0.18 50 CPA 08 G CPA 08BL
Stone CPA 08 S
White CPA 08 W

Material: Aluminium to BS 2898.


PVC colours to BS 5252.
CPA 08BW

D D1
D

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 99
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 60

CONDUCTORS CABLE & WIRE SYSTEM

Bare Stranded Copper Conductors


Wallis bare stranded copper conductor is used on both lightning
protection and earthing systems.
Available as soft drawn (copper wire that has been heat treated) and
hard drawn (copper wire that has not been annealed after drawing).
Soft Drawn
C.S.A. Stranding Nominal Maximum Weight Part
CBS 016 mm2 No. x Ø Ø Resistance per Metre Number
mm mm @ 20oC Ω/km kg
6 7 x 1.04 3.12 3.080 0.05 CBS 006
10 7 x 1.35 4.05 1.830 0.09 CBS 010
16 7 x 1.70 5.10 1.150 0.15 CBS 016
CBS 025
25 7 x 2.14 6.42 0.727 0.23 CBS 025
35 19 x 1.53 7.65 0.524 0.32 CBS 035
50 19 x 1.78 8.90 0.387 0.43 CBS 050
70 19 x 2.14 10.70 0.268 0.62 CBS 070
CBS 050
95 19 x 2.52 12.60 0.193 0.86 CBS 095
120 37 x 2.03 14.21 0.153 1.09 CBS 120
150 37 x 2.25 15.75 0.124 1.33 CBS 150
185 37 x 2.52 17.64 0.099 1.67 CBS 185
240 61 x 2.25 20.25 0.075 2.20 CBS 240
300 61 x 2.52 22.68 0.060 2.76 CBS 300
CBS 150
400 61 x 2.85 25.65 0.047 3.53 CBS 400

Material: Copper to BS 6360.

Hard Drawn
C.S.A. Stranding Nominal Maximum Weight Part
mm2 No. x Ø Ø Resistance per Metre Number
mm mm @ 20oC Ω/km kg
35 7 x 2.52 7.65 0.540 0.32 CHS 035
50 7 x 3.00 8.90 0.399 0.43 CHS 050
70 7 x 3.55 10.72 0.276 0.62 CHS 070
95 37 x 1.78 12.60 0.199 0.86 CHS 095

Material: Copper to BS 6360.

100 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 61

CONDUCTORS CABLE & WIRE SYSTEM

Green & Yellow PVC Insulated


Stranded Copper Conductors
A range of single core stranded class 2 plain annealed copper
conductors with a heat resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC) outer sheath.
These non-armoured single insulation cables are often referred to as
6491X and are manufactured in accordance with specification BS 6004.
Harmonised code H07V-R. Voltage rating 450/750V (designated
suitable 600/1000V systems). Heat resistant PVC insulation complying
with BS 7655 Type TI 1. Operating temperatures 0oC to +70oC.
CPS 016
Installation is not recommended for PVC below 0oC as the compound
may become brittle.

C.S.A. Stranding Nominal Maximum Weight Part


mm2 No. x Ø Ø Resistance per Metre Number
mm mm @ 20oC Ω/km kg CPS 035
6 7 x 1.04 4.8 3.800 0.07 CBS 006
10 7 x 1.35 6.1 1.830 0.12 CBS 010
16 7 x 1.70 7.1 1.150 0.19 CBS 016
25 7 x 2.14 8.9 0.727 0.29 CBS 025
35 19 x 1.53 10.1 0.524 0.41 CBS 035
CPS 095
50 19 x 1.78 11.8 0.387 0.53 CBS 050
70 19 x 2.14 13.6 0.268 0.73 CBS 070
95 19 x 2.52 15.9 0.193 1.00 CBS 095
120 37 x 2.03 17.5 0.153 1.16 CBS 120
150 37 x 2.25 19.4 0.124 1.54 CBS 150
185 37 x 2.52 21.7 0.099 2.01 CBS 185 CPS 240
240 61 x 2.25 24.5 0.075 2.49 CBS 240
300 61 x 2.52 27.5 0.060 3.05 CBS 300
400 61 x 2.85 30.9 0.047 3.90 CBS 400

Material: Copper to BS 6360.


PVC Colour to BS 6746C.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 101
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 62

CONDUCTORS CABLE & WIRE SYSTEM

Tinned Stranded Copper Conductors


C.S.A. Stranding Nominal Maximum Weight Part
mm2 No. x Ø Ø Resistance per Metre Number
mm mm @ 20oC Ω/km kg
6 7 x 1.04 3.12 3.110 0.05 CTS 006
10 7 x 1.35 4.05 1.840 0.09 CTS 010
16 7 x 1.70 5.10 1.160 0.15 CTS 016
25 7 x 2.14 6.42 0.734 0.23 CTS 025
CTS 006
35 19 x 1.53 7.65 0.529 0.32 CTS 035
50 19 x 1.78 8.90 0.391 0.43 CTS 050
70 19 x 2.14 10.70 0.270 0.62 CTS 070
95 19 x 2.52 12.60 0.195 0.86 CTS 095
CTS 025
120 37 x 2.03 14.21 0.154 1.09 CTS 120
150 37 x 2.25 15.75 0.126 1.33 CTS 150
185 37 x 2.52 17.64 0.100 1.67 CTS 185
240 61 x 2.25 20.25 0.076 2.20 CTS 240
CTS 070
300 61 x 2.52 22.68 0.061 2.76 CTS 300
400 61 x 2.85 25.65 0.048 3.53 CTS 400

Material: Copper to BS 6360.

CTS 185

102 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 63

CONDUCTORS CABLE & WIRE SYSTEM

Lead Covered Stranded Copper Conductors


C.S.A. Stranding Nominal Weight Part
mm2 No. x Ø Diameter per Metre Number
mm mm kg
185 37 x 2.52 21.64 2.71 CLS 185
240 61 x 2.25 24.25 3.58 CLS 240
300 61 x 2.52 26.68 4.49 CLS 300 CLS 185
400 61 x 2.85 29.65 5.74 CLS 400

Material: Copper to BS 6360.

CLS 240

Anti-Vandal Cable Guards


Wallis anti-vandal cable guards provide protection from accidental
damage, vandalism and theft for cables up to 50mm diameter.
For installation on walls etc.
These guards have flat flanges and are supplied with screw fixing holes
for ease of installation.
L W D Colour Unit Pack Part
mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
3000 105 50 Grey 2.40 1 AVC 001

Material: Plastic.
For installation on wooden telegraph poles
These guards have angled flanges and are supplied with screw fixing
holes for ease of installation.
L W D Colour Unit Pack Part
mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
3000 95 50 Black 2.40 1 AVC 002

Material: Plastic.

L
D

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 103
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 64

CONDUCTORS CABLE & WIRE SYSTEM

Bare Copper Round Braids


Wallis copper round braids are utilised as flexible earth bonding leads.
Other sizes and constructions are available on request. Please contact
our sales office for further information
Nominal Nominal Wire Strand Current Weight Standard Part
C.S.A. Ø Ø Rating per Metre Coil Size Number
mm2 mm mm Amps kg m
RBB 006 6 5.0 69 0.05 100 RBB 006
10 7.0 97 0.08 50 RBB 010
16 8.0 132 0.13 50 RBB 016
0.15
25 10.0 178 0.22 50 RBB 025
35 12.0 223 0.30 50 RBB 035
RBB 016
50 15.0 282 0.44 50 RBB 050

Material: Copper wire to BS EN 13602 (formerly BS 4109).

RBB 035

RBB 050

Tinned Copper Round Braids


Wallis tinned copper round braids are utilised as flexible earth bonding
leads with additional corrosion protection.
Other sizes and constructions are available on request. Please contact
our sales office for further information.
Nominal Nominal Wire Strand Current Weight Standard Part
C.S.A. Ø Ø Rating per Metre Coil Size Number
mm2 mm mm Amps kg m
RBT 006
6 5.0 69 0.05 100 RBT 006
10 7.0 97 0.08 50 RBT 010
16 8.0 132 0.13 50 RBT 016
0.15
25 10.0 178 0.22 50 RBT 025
35 12.0 223 0.30 50 RBT 035
RBT 016
50 15.0 282 0.44 50 RBT 050

Material: Copper wire to BS EN 13602 (formerly BS 4109).

RBT 035

RBT 050

104 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 65

FASTENERS & FIXINGS CONTENTS

FASTENERS & FIXINGS


Hexagon Head Set Screws 106 - 107

Hexagon Nuts 107

Flat Washers 108

Spring Washers 108

Countersunk Wood Screws 109

Round Head Wood Screws 109

Countersunk Machine Screws 110

Plastic Wall Plugs 110

Round Head Copper Nails 111

Round Head Rivets 111

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 105
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 66

FASTENERS & FIXINGS

Hexagon Head Set Screws


Phosphor Bronze
Thread Length Weight Pack Part
Size mm per 100 Quantity Number
kg
10 1.20 OSP 0610
12 1.30 OSP 0612
M6 100
16 1.50 OSP 0616
20 1.90 OSP 0620
16 1.75 OSP 0816
20 2.00 OSP 0820
M8 100
25 2.30 OSP 0825
30 2.90 OSP 0830
16 1.95 OSP 1016
20 2.20 OSP 1020
M10 25 2.75 100 OSP 1025
30 3.10 OSP 1030
35 3.40 OSP 1035
25 4.50 OSP 1225
30 4.75 OSP 1230
M12 35 5.00 100 OSP 1235
40 5.70 OSP 1240
50 6.30 OSP 1250
Material: Phosphor Bronze.

Brass
Thread Length Weight Pack Part
Size mm per 100 Quantity Number
kg
10 1.20 OSB 0610
12 1.30 OSB 0612
M6 100
16 1.50 OSB 0616
20 1.90 OSB 0620
16 1.75 OSB 0816
20 2.00 OSB 0820
M8 100
25 2.30 OSB 0825
30 2.90 OSB 0830
16 1.95 OSB 1016
20 2.20 OSB 1020
M10 25 2.75 100 OSB 1025
30 3.10 OSB 1030
35 3.40 OSB 1035
25 4.50 OSB 1225
30 4.75 OSB 1230
M12 35 5.00 100 OSB 1235
40 5.70 OSB 1240
50 6.30 OSB 1250
Material: Brass.

106 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 67

FASTENERS & FIXINGS

Hexagon Head Set Screws (continued)


Stainless Steel
Thread Length Weight Pack Part
Size mm per 100 Quantity Number
kg
10 1.20 OSS 0610
12 1.30 OSS 0612
M6 100
16 1.50 OSS 0616
20 1.90 OSS 0620
16 1.75 OSS 0816
20 2.00 OSS 0820
M8 100
25 2.30 OSS 0825
30 2.90 OSS 0830
16 1.95 OSS 1016
20 2.20 OSS 1020
M10 25 2.75 100 OSS 1025
30 3.10 OSS 1030
35 3.40 OSS 1035
25 4.50 OSS 1225
30 4.75 OSS 1230
M12 35 5.00 100 OSS 1235
40 5.70 OSS 1240
50 6.30 OSS 1250
Material: Stainless Steel.

Hexagon Nuts
Phosphor Bronze
Thread Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
M6 0.35 ONP 06
M8 0.90 ONP 08
100
M10 1.15 ONP 10
M12 1.65 ONP 12
Material: Phosphor Bronze.
Brass
Thread Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
M6 0.25 ONB 06
M8 0.80 ONB 08
100
M10 1.15 ONB 10
M12 1.65 ONB 12
Material: Brass.
Stainless Steel
Thread Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
M6 0.25 ONS 06
M8 0.80 ONS 08
100
M10 1.15 ONS 10
M12 1.65 ONS 12
Material: Stainless Steel.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 107
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 68

FASTENERS & FIXINGS

Flat Washers
Phosphor Bronze
Thread Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
M6 0.05 OWP 06
M8 0.15 OWP 08
100
M10 0.25 OWP 10
M12 0.50 OWP 12
Material: Phosphor Bronze.
Brass
Thread Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
M6 0.05 OWB 06
M8 0.15 OWB 08
100
M10 0.25 OWB 10
M12 0.50 OWB 12
Material: Brass.
Stainless Steel
Thread Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
M6 0.05 OWS 06
M8 0.15 OWS 08
100
M10 0.25 OWS 10
M12 0.50 OWS 12
Material: Stainless Steel.

Spring Washers
Phosphor Bronze
Thread Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
M6 0.04 OTP 06
M8 0.10 OTP 08
100
M10 0.20 OTP 10
M12 0.20 OTP 12
Material: Phosphor Bronze.
Stainless Steel
Thread Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
M6 0.04 OTS 06
M8 0.10 OTS 08
100
M10 0.20 OTS 10
M12 0.20 OTS 12
Material: Stainless Steel.

108 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
FASTENERS & FIXINGS

Countersunk Wood Screws


Brass
Size Weight Pack Part
per 100 Quantity Number
kg
11/4” x No. 10 0.20 OAB 132
11/4” x No. 12 0.30 OAB 133
1 1 /2 ” x No. 10 0.50 OAB 138
100
11/2” x No. 12 0.60 OAB 139
2” x No. 10 0.80 OAB 151
2” x No. 12 1.00 OAB 152

Material: Brass.
Stainless Steel
Size Weight Pack Part
per 100 Quantity Number
kg
11/4” x No. 10 0.20 OAS 132
11/4” x No. 12 0.30 OAS 133
1 1 /2 ” x No. 10 0.50 OAS 138
100
11/2” x No. 12 0.60 OAS 139
2” x No. 10 0.80 OAS 151
2” x No. 12 1.00 OAS 152

Material: Stainless Steel.

Round Head Wood Screws


Brass
Size Weight Pack Part
per 100 Quantity Number
kg
11/4” x No. 10 0.20 ORB 132
11/4” x No. 12 0.30 ORB 133
11/2” x No. 10 0.50 ORB 138
100
11/2” x No. 12 0.60 ORB 139
2” x No. 10 0.80 ORB 151
2” x No. 12 1.00 ORB 152

Material: Brass.
Stainless Steel
Size Weight Pack Part
per 100 Quantity Number
kg
11/4” x No. 10 0.20 ORS 132
11/4” x No. 12 0.30 ORS 133
1 1 /2 ” x No. 10 0.50 ORS 138
100
11/2” x No. 12 0.60 ORS 139
2” x No. 10 0.80 ORS 151
2” x No. 12 1.00 ORS 152

Material: Stainless Steel.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 109
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 70

FASTENERS & FIXINGS

Countersunk Machine Screws


Brass
Thread Length Weight Pack Part
Size mm per 100 Quantity Number
kg
12 0.30 OMB 0612
M6 16 0.40 100 OMB 0616
20 0.50 OMB 0620
16 0.45 OMB 0816
M8 20 0.55 100 OMB 0820
25 0.65 OMB 0825
25 0.75 OMB 1025
M10 30 0.85 100 OMB 1030
35 0.95 OMB 1035
Material: Brass.
Stainless Steel
Thread Length Weight Pack Part
Size mm per 100 Quantity Number
kg
12 0.30 OMS 0612
M6 16 0.40 100 OMS 0616
20 0.50 OMS 0620
16 0.45 OMS 0816
M8 20 0.55 100 OMS 0820
25 0.65 OMS 0825
25 0.75 OMS 1025
M10 30 0.85 100 OMS 1030
35 0.95 OMS 1035

Material: Stainless Steel.

Plastic Wall Plugs


Screw Colour Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
Black OP10 BLA
Blue OP10 BLU
No. 10 – 14 0.15 100
Brown OP10 BRO
Red OP10 RED

Material: Plastic.

110 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 71

FASTENERS & FIXINGS

Round Head Copper Nails


Length Weight Pack Part
mm per 100 Quantity Number
kg
50 0.70 100 OCN 050

Material: Copper.

Round Head Rivets


Copper
Size Weight Pack Part
mm per 100 Quantity Number
kg
5 x 12 0.35 ORC 512
100
5 x 20 0.45 ORC 520

Material: Copper.

Aluminium
Size Weight Pack Part
mm per 100 Quantity Number
kg
5 x 12 0.12 ORA 512
100
5 x 20 0.15 ORA 520

Material: Aluminium.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 111
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 72

PART NUMBER INDEX

A ATF 035 . . . . . . 84 BTA 008 . . . . . . 70 CLG 100018. . . 40 CLG 50018. . . . 40


ATF 040 . . . . . . 84 BTC 008 . . . . . . 70 CLG 100020 . . 40 CLG 50020 . . . 40
ACS 008 . . . . . . 71 ATF 045 . . . . . . 84 BTC 070. . . 35, 78 CLG 1010 . . . . . 39 CLG 5010 . . . . . 39
ADC 060. . . . . . 54 ATF 050 . . . . . . 84 BTC 120. . . 35, 78 CLG 1012 . . . . . 39 CLG 5012 . . . . . 39
ADC 080. . . . . . 54 ATF 055 . . . . . . 84 BTC 185 . . . . . . 35 CLG 105 . . . . . . 39 CLG 5014 . . . . . 39
ADC 100 . . . . . . 54 BTC 240 . . . . . . 35 CLG 106 . . . . . . 39 CLG 506 . . . . . . 39
ADC 120 . . . . . . 54 ATF 060 . . . . . . 84 BTC 300 . . . . . . 35 CLG 108 . . . . . . 39
ATF 065 . . . . . . 84 CLG 508 . . . . . . 39
ADC 140 . . . . . . 54 ATF 070 . . . . . . 84 BWG 253 . . . . . 61 CLG 12010 . . . . 40 CLG 610 . . . . . . 39
ADC 160 . . . . . . 54 ATF 075 . . . . . . 84 CLG 12012 . . . . 40 CLG 63016. . . . 40
ADC 180 . . . . . . 54 ATF 080 . . . . . . 84 C CLG 12014 . . . . 40 CLG 63018. . . . 40
AMBA 16 . . . . . 47 CLG 12016 . . . . 40 CLG 63020 . . . 40
AMBG 16 . . 47, 73 ATF 090 . . . . . . 84 CBS 006. . . . . 100 CLG 12020. . . . 40
ATQ 001 . . . . . . 85 CBS 010 . . . . . 100 CLG 64 . . . . . . . 39
AMBG 20 . . . . . 47 ATS 001 . . . . . . 85 CBS 016 . . . . . 100 CLG 1208 . . . . . 40 CLG 65 . . . . . . . 39
AOA 16M . . . . . 47 ATT 001 . . . . . . 85 CBS 025. . . . . 100 CLG 15010 . . . . 40 CLG 66 . . . . . . . 39
AOG 050 . . . . . 73 ATT 002 . . . . . . 85 CBS 035. . . . . 100 CLG 15012 . . . . 40 CLG 68 . . . . . . . 39
AOG 070. . . . . . 73 CLG 15014 . . . . 40 CLG 7010 . . . . . 39
AOG 070. . . . . . 73 ATT 003 . . . . . . 85 CBS 050. . . . . 100 CLG 15016 . . . . 40
AVC 001 . . . . . 103 CBS 070 . . . . . 100 CLG 7012 . . . . . 39
AOG 16M . . . . . 47 AVC 002 . . . . . 103 CBS 095. . . . . 100 CLG 15020. . . . 40 CLG 7014 . . . . . 39
AOG 20M . . . . . 47 AVG . . . . . . . . . . 97 CBS 120 . . . . . 100 CLG 1508 . . . . . 40 CLG 7016 . . . . . 39
ARA 102 . . . . . . 62 AVG 3 . . . . . . . . 97 CBS 150 . . . . . 100 CLG 1610 . . . . . 39 CLG 706 . . . . . . 39
ARA 105 . . . . . . 62 CLG 1612 . . . . . 39 CLG 708 . . . . . . 39
ARC 102 . . . . . . 62 AVP . . . . . . . . . . 97 CBS 185 . . . . . 100 CLG 166 . . . . . . 39
AVP 3 . . . . . . . . 97 CBS 240 . . . . . 100 CLG 80016. . . . 40
ARC 105 . . . . . . 62 CBS 300. . . . . 100 CLG 168 . . . . . . 39 CLG 80018. . . . 40
ASAF 16M . . . . 46 B CBS 400. . . . . 100 CLG 18510 . . . . 40 CLG 80020 . . . 40
ASAL 16M . . . . 45 CCC 010. . . . . . 38 CLG 18512 . . . . 40 CLG 9510 . . . . . 39
ASAR 16M . . . . 46 BBA 08 . . . . . . . 69 CLG 18514 . . . . 40 CLG 9512 . . . . . 39
ASGF 050 . . . . . 74 BBA 253 . . . . . . 60 CCC 016. . . . . . 38 CLG 18516 . . . . 40
BBA 25308 . . . 70 CCC 016. . . . . . 38 CLG 9514 . . . . . 39
ASGF 070 . . . . . 74 BBG 08. . . . . . . 69 CCC 025. . . . . . 38 CLG 18520. . . . 40 CLG 9516 . . . . . 39
ASGF 095 . . . . . 74 BBG 253 SS . . 60 CCC 025. . . . . . 38 CLG 24010 . . . . 40 CLG 956 . . . . . . 39
ASGF 16M . . . . 46 CCC 035. . . . . . 38 CLG 24012 . . . . 40 CLG 958 . . . . . . 39
ASGL 16M . . . . 45 BBG 25308 . . . 70 CLG 24014 . . . . 40 CLS 185 . . . . . 103
ASGL 20M . . . . 45 BDC 060. . . . . . 55 CCC 035. . . . . . 38 CLG 24016 . . . . 40
BDC 080. . . . . . 55 CCC 050. . . . . . 38 CLS 240 . . . . . 103
ASGR 16M . . . . 46 BDC 100. . . . . . 55 CCC 050. . . . . . 38 CLG 24020. . . . 40 CLS 300 . . . . . 103
ATA 112M . . . . . 44 BDC 120 . . . . . . 55 CCC 070. . . . . . 38 CLG 2510 . . . . . 39 CLS 400 . . . . . 103
ATA 120M . . . . . 44 CCC 075. . . . . . 38 CLG 2512 . . . . . 39 CM 08 B . . . . . . 65
ATA 139M . . . . . 44 BDC 140 . . . . . . 55 CLG 256 . . . . . . 39 CM 08 G . . . . . . 65
ATA 160M. . . . . 44 BDC 160. . . . . . 55 CCC 095. . . . . . 38 CLG 258 . . . . . . 39
BDC 180. . . . . . 55 CCC 120. . . . . . 38 CP 08 B . . . . . . 65
ATA 179M . . . . . 44 BDC 200. . . . . . 55 CCC 120. . . . . . 38 CLG 30010. . . . 40 CP 08 BL . . . . . 65
ATC 112M . 44, 72 BFE 200 . . . . . . 36 CCC 150. . . . . . 38 CLG 30012. . . . 40 CP 08 G . . . . . . 65
ATC 120M . 44, 72 CCC 185. . . . . . 38 CLG 30014 . . . . 40 CP 08 S . . . . . . 65
ATC 139M . 44, 72 BFE 300 . . . . . . 36 CLG 30020 . . . 40 CP 08 W . . . . . . 65
ATC 160M . 44, 72 BFE 400 . . . . . . 36 CCC 185. . . . . . 38 CLG 30061. . . . 40
BFR 001 . . . . . . 82 CCC 240. . . . . . 38 CPA 08 B . . . . . 99
ATC 179M . 44, 72 BIM 08 . . . . . . . 68 CCC 240-120 . . 38 CLG 3510 . . . . . 39 CPA 08 BL . . . . 99
ATC 212M . . . . 44 BIM 253 . . . . . . 60 CCC 25-10 . . . . 38 CLG 3512 . . . . . 39 CPA 08 G . . . . . 99
ATC 220M . . . . 44 CCC 25PM. . . . 38 CLG 3514 . . . . . 39 CPA 08 S . . . . . 99
ATC 239M . . . . 44 BIM 25308 . . . . 68 CLG 356 . . . . . . 39 CPA 08 W. . . . . 99
ATC 260M . . . . 44 BRA 08 . . . . . . . 69 CCC 70-35 . . . . 38 CLG 358 . . . . . . 39
BRA 253 . . . . . . 61 CCC 95-35 . . . . 38 CPC 08 B . . . . . 98
ATC 279M . . . . 44 BRG 08. . . . . . . 69 CHS 035. . . . . 100 CLG 40012. . . . 40 CPC 08 BL . . . . 98
ATF 010. . . . . . . 84 BRG 253. . . . . . 61 CHS 050. . . . . 100 CLG 40014 . . . . 40 CPC 08 G . . . . . 98
ATF 011. . . . . . . 84 CHS 070. . . . . 100 CLG 40016. . . . 40 CPC 08 S . . . . . 98
ATF 012. . . . . . . 84 BSS 08 . . . . . . . 68 CLG 40020 . . . 40 CPC 08 W . . . . 98
ATF 030 . . . . . . 84 BSS 253 . . . . . . 60 CHS 095. . . . . 100 CLG 50016. . . . 40 CPS 006 . . . . . 101

112 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 73

PART NUMBER INDEX

CPS 010 . . . . . 101 DCG 240. . . . . . 76 EBC 100 . . . . . . 33 EMP 603. . . . . . 25 ERC 318 . . . . . . 14
CPS 016 . . . . . 101 DCG 254 . . . . . 48 EBC 106 . . . . . . 32 EMP 901. . . . . . 25 ERC 324 . . . . . . 14
CPS 025 . . . . . 101 DCG 256 . . . . . 48 EBC 108 . . . . . . 32 EMP 903. . . . . . 25 ERC 330 . . . . . . 14
CPS 035 . . . . . 101 DCG 300. . . . . . 76 EBC 110 . . . . . . 32 EPB 4030 . . . . . 34 ERCD 16. . . 15, 17
CPS 050 . . . . . 101 DCG 313. . . . . . 48 EBC 112 . . . . . . 32 EPB 4040 . . . . . 34 ERCD 20 . . 15, 17

CPS 070 . . . . . 101 DCG 316. . . . . . 48 EBC 114 . . . . . . 32 EPB 5030 . . . . . 34 ERCD 25 . . 15, 17
CPS 095 . . . . . 101 DCG 383 . . . . . 48 EBC 116 . . . . . . 32 EPB 5040 . . . . . 34 ERCS 16 . . . 15, 17
CPS 120 . . . . . 101 DCG 385 . . . . . 48 EBC 118 . . . . . . 32 EPB 5050 . . . . . 34 ERCS 20. . . 15, 17
CPS 150 . . . . . 101 DCG 386 . . . . . 48 EBC 120 . . . . . . 32 EPP 001 W . . . . 27 ERCS 25. . . 15, 17
CPS 185 . . . . . 101 DCG 503 . . . . . 48 EBC 122 . . . . . . 32 EPP 002 W. . . . 27 ERD 01 . . . . . . . 15

CPS 240 . . . . . 101 DCG 504 . . . . . 48 EBC 124 . . . . . . 32 ERA 1625 . . . . . 20 ERD 02 . . . . . . . 15
CPS 300 . . . . . 101 DCG 508 . . . . . 48 EBC 126 . . . . . . 32 ERA 1625A . . . 20 ERD 16 . . . . . . . 17
CPS 400 . . . . . 101 DCG 810. . . . . . 64 EBC 128 . . . . . . 32 ERA 1631 . . . . . 20 ERD 25 . . . . . . . 17
CSA 001 . . . . . . 55 DCG 815. . . . . . 64 EBC 130 . . . . . . 32 ERA 1638 . . . . . 20 ERG 112 . . . . . . 18
CSA 08 . . . . . . . 99 DCL 253 . . . . . . 48 EBC 206 . . . . . . 33 ERA 1650 . . . . . 20 ERH 01W . . . . . 29

CSC 08 . . . . . . . 98 DGP 006. . . . . . 76 EBC 208 . . . . . . 33 ERA 2525. . . . . 20 ERH 20 . . . . . . . 28


CTS 006 . . . . . 102 DGP 010 . . . . . . 76 EBC 210 . . . . . . 33 ERB 012 . . . . . . 12 ERH 21 . . . . . . . 28
CTS 010 . . . . . 102 DGP 016 . . . . . . 76 EBC 212 . . . . . . 33 ERB 112 . . . . . . 12 ERR 1035 . . . . . 21
CTS 016 . . . . . 102 DGP 025. . . . . . 76 EBC 214 . . . . . . 33 ERB 115 . . . . . . 12 ERR 1635 . . . . . 21
CTS 025 . . . . . 102 DGP 035. . . . . . 76 EBC 216 . . . . . . 33 ERB 118 . . . . . . 12 ERR 1670 . . . . . 21

CTS 035 . . . . . 102 DGP 050. . . . . . 76 EBC 218 . . . . . . 33 ERB 124 . . . . . . 12 ERR 2095. . . . . 21
CTS 050 . . . . . 102 DGP 070 . . . . . . 76 EBC 220 . . . . . . 33 ERB 130 . . . . . . 12 ERS 010 . . . . . . 24
CTS 070 . . . . . 102 DGP 095. . . . . . 76 EBC 222 . . . . . . 33 ERB 212 . . . . . . 12 ERS 016 . . . . . . 24
CTS 095 . . . . . 102 DGP 120 . . . . . . 76 EBC 224 . . . . . . 33 ERB 215 . . . . . . 12 ERS 020 . . . . . . 24
CTS 120 . . . . . 102 DGP 185 . . . . . . 76 EBC 226 . . . . . . 33 ERB 218 . . . . . . 12 ERSS 16 . . . . . . 24

CTS 150 . . . . . 102 DGP 240 . . . . . . 76 EBC 228 . . . . . . 33 ERB 224 . . . . . . 12 ERSS 20 . . . . . . 24
CTS 185 . . . . . 102 DGP 253. . . . . . 48 EBC 230 . . . . . . 33 ERB 230 . . . . . . 12 ERU 016 . . . . . . 22
CTS 240 . . . . . 102 DGP 256. . . . . . 48 EBC 25 . . . . . . . 28 ERB 412 . . . . . . 12 ERU 025 . . . . . . 22
CTS 300 . . . . . 102 DGP 300. . . . . . 76 EBC 27 . . . . . . . 28 ERB 415 . . . . . . 12 ERU 031 . . . . . . 22
CTS 400 . . . . . 102 DGP 506. . . . . . 48 EBC 35 . . . . . . . 27 ERB 418 . . . . . . 12 ERU 038 . . . . . . 22

D DT 510. . . . . . . . 81 EBC 37 . . . . . . . 27 ERB 424 . . . . . . 12 ERU 050 . . . . . . 22


EBG 25 . . . . . . . 26 ERBD 12 . . . . . . 13 ERU 216 . . . . . . 22
DAP 253 . . . . . . 48 E EBG 25P. . . . . . 26 ERBD 16 . . . . . . 13 ERU 225 . . . . . . 22
DAP 506 . . . . . . 48 EBI 001 . . . . . . . 30 ERBD 20. . . . . . 13 ERU 231 . . . . . . 22
DCA 253. . . . . . 48 EBB 004 . . . . . . 34 EBI 002 . . . . . . . 30 ERBO 12. . . . . . 13 ERU 238 . . . . . . 22
DCA 256. . . . . . 48 EBB 004/1 . . . . 34
DCA 506. . . . . . 48 EBB 008 . . . . . . 34 EGP 01 . . . . . . . 31 ERBO 16. . . . . . 13 ERU 250 . . . . . . 22
EBC 006 . . . . . . 32 EGP 01 500 . . . 31 ERBO 20. . . . . . 13 ERU 470 . . . . . . 22
DCA 810 . . . . . . 64 EBC 008 . . . . . . 32 EGP 02 . . . . . . . 31 ERC 112 . . . . . . 14 ERU 470 . . . . . . 22
DCA 815 . . . . . . 64 EGP 02 1000 . . 31 ERC 115 . . . . . . 14 ERU 570 . . . . . . 22
DCB 253. . . . . . 48 EBC 010 . . . . . . 32 EGP 02 1500 . . 31 ERC 118 . . . . . . 14 ERU 570 . . . . . . 22
DCB 506. . . . . . 48 EBC 012 . . . . . . 32
DCG 006. . . . . . 76 EBC 014 . . . . . . 32 EGP 02 500 . . . 31 ERC 124 . . . . . . 14 ERU 670 . . . . . . 22
EBC 016 . . . . . . 32 EGP 04 . . . . . . . 31 ERC 130 . . . . . . 14 ERU 770 . . . . . . 22
DCG 010 . . . . . . 76 EBC 018 . . . . . . 32 EGP 04 1000 . . 31 ERC 212 . . . . . . 14 ERX 05 . . . . . . . 37
DCG 016 . . . . . . 76 EGP 04 1500 . . 31 ERC 215 . . . . . . 14 ERX 310 . . . . . . 19
DCG 025. . . . . . 76 EBC 020 . . . . . . 32 EGP 04 500 . . . 31 ERC 218 . . . . . . 14 ERX 315 . . . . . . 19
DCG 035. . . . . . 76 EBC 022 . . . . . . 32
DCG 050. . . . . . 76 EBC 024 . . . . . . 32 EMA 25. . . . . . . 26 ERC 224 . . . . . . 14 ERX 320 . . . . . . 19
EBC 026 . . . . . . 32 EMA 26. . . . . . . 26 ERC 230 . . . . . . 14 ERX 325 . . . . . . 19
DCG 070. . . . . . 76 EBC 028 . . . . . . 32 EML 603. . . . . . 25 ERC 24 . . . . . . . 24 ERX 330 . . . . . . 19
DCG 095. . . . . . 76 EML 903. . . . . . 25 ERC 26 . . . . . . . 24 ERX 510 . . . . . . 19
DCG 120. . . . . . 76 EBC 030 . . . . . . 32 EML 903 SPC . 25 ERC 312 . . . . . . 14 ERX 515 . . . . . . 19
DCG 185. . . . . . 76 EBC 05 . . . . . . . 29
DCG 203 . . . . . 48 EBC 07 . . . . . . . 29 EMP 601. . . . . . 25 ERC 315 . . . . . . 14 ERX 520 . . . . . . 19

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 113
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 74

PART NUMBER INDEX

ERX 525 . . . . . . 19 HA 10 W . . . . . . 63 JSG 253 . . . . . . 59 OAS 139 . . . . . 109 ORS 151 . . . . . 109
ERX 530 . . . . . . 19 HBA 001 . . . . . . 56 JYA 08. . . . . . . . 67 OAS 151 . . . . . 109 ORS 152. . . . . 109
ERY 10 . . . . . . . 37 HBG 001. . . . . . 56 JYG 08 . . . . . . . 67 OAS 152 . . . . . 109 OSB 0610. . . . 106
ERZ 112 . . . . . . 16 HD 10005 . . . . . 94 OCN 050. . . . . 111 OSB 0612. . . . 106
ERZ 115 . . . . . . 16 HD 10006 . . . . . 94 M OMB 0612 . . . 110 OSB 0616. . . . 106

ERZ 118 . . . . . . 16 HD 2003 . . . . . . 94 MAP 253. . . . . . 51 OMB 0616 . . . 110 OSB 0620 . . . 106
ERZ 124 . . . . . . 16 HD 2503 . . . . . . 94 MBA 08. . . . . . . 68 OMB 0620 . . . 110 OSB 0625 . . . 106
ERZ 130 . . . . . . 16 HD 2504 . . . . . . 94 MBG 08 . . . . . . 68 OMB 0816 . . . 110 OSB 0812. . . . 106
ERZ 212 . . . . . . 16 HD 2506 . . . . . . 94 MPB 253. . . . . . 51 OMB 0820 . . . 110 OSB 0816. . . . 106
ERZ 215 . . . . . . 16 HD 3806 . . . . . . 94 MPC 16 . . . 45, 72 OMB 0825 . . . 110 OSB 0820 . . . 106

ERZ 218 . . . . . . 16 HD 5006 . . . . . . 94 MTA 203 . . . . . . 51 OMB 1025 . . . 110 OSB 0825 . . . 106
ERZ 224 . . . . . . 16 HD 7506 . . . . . . 94 MTA 253 . . . . . . 51 OMB 1030 . . . 110 OSB 0830 . . . 106
ERZ 230 . . . . . . 16 HDT 2503. . . . . 94 MTB 203. . . . . . 51 OMB 1035 . . . 110 OSB 1016 . . . . 106
ERZ 312 . . . . . . 16 HDT 2506. . . . . 94 MTB 253. . . . . . 51 OMS 0612. . . . 110 OSB 1020. . . . 106
ERZ 315 . . . . . . 16 HDT 5006. . . . . 94 MTB 506. . . . . . 51 OMS 0616. . . . 110 OSB 1025. . . . 106

ERZ 318 . . . . . . 16 HGA 253 . . . . . 56 MVA 08 . . . . . . . 66 OMS 0620 . . . 110 OSB 1030. . . . 106
ERZ 324 . . . . . . 16 HGG 253 . . . . . 56 MVG 08. . . . . . . 66 OMS 0816. . . . 110 OSB 1035. . . . 106
ERZ 330 . . . . . . 16 HPY 008 . . . . . . 71 OMS 0820 . . . 110 OSB 1225. . . . 106
EYE 034 . . . . . . 37 HSAL 253 B. . . 52 N OMS 0825 . . . 110 OSB 1230. . . . 106
EYE 058 . . . . . . 37 HSAL 253 BL. . 52 OMS 1025 . . . 110 OSB 1235. . . . 106
NM 203 B. . . . . 49
F HSAL 253 BM . 52 NM 203 G. . . . . 49 OMS 1030 . . . 110 OSB 1240. . . . 106
HSAL 253 G. . . 52 NM 253 B. . . . . 49 OMS 1035 . . . 110 OSB 1250. . . . 106
FB 121. . . . . . . . 95 HSAL 253 GM . 52 NM 253 G. . . . . 49 ONB 06. . . . . . 107 OSP 0610 . . . . 106
FB 151. . . . . . . . 95 HSAL 253 S . . . 52 NM 506 B. . . . . 49 ONB 08. . . . . . 107 OSP 0612 . . . . 106
FB 192 . . . . . . . 95 ONB 10 . . . . . . 107 OSP 0616 . . . . 106
FB 232 . . . . . . . 95 I NMP 203 B . . . 50
FB 253 . . . . . . . 95 NMP 203 G . . . 50 ONB 12 . . . . . . 107 OSP 0620. . . . 106
IC 08 . . . . . . . . . 80 NMP 253 B . . . 50 ONP 06 . . . . . . 107 OSP 0625. . . . 106
FB 305 . . . . . . . 95 NMP 253 G . . . 50 ONP 08 . . . . . . 107 OSP 0812 . . . . 106
FB 326 . . . . . . . 95 J NP 253 B . . . . . 49 ONP 10 . . . . . . 107 OSP 0816 . . . . 106
FBT 121 . . . . . . 95 ONP 12 . . . . . . 107 OSP 0820. . . . 106
FBT 151 . . . . . . 95 JA 253. . . . . . . . 57 NP 253 BL . . . . 49
FBT 192 . . . . . . 95 JAO 253 . . . . . . 58 NP 253 G . . . . . 49 ONS 06 . . . . . . 107 OSP 0825. . . . 106
JG 253 . . . . . . . 57 NP 253 GR. . . . 49 ONS 08 . . . . . . 107 OSP 0830. . . . 106
FBT 232 . . . . . . 95 JG 256 . . . . . . . 57 NP 253 S . . . . . 49 ONS 10 . . . . . . 107 OSP 1016 . . . . 106
FBT 253 . . . . . . 95 JG 313. . . . . . . . 57 NP 253 W. . . . . 49 ONS 12 . . . . . . 107 OSP 1020. . . . 106
FBT 305 . . . . . . 95 OP10 BLU. . . . 110 OSP 1025. . . . 106
FBT 326 . . . . . . 95 JG 386 . . . . . . . 57 NPP 253 B . . . . 50
FLX100 . . . . . . . 83 JG 503 . . . . . . . 57 NPP 253 BL. . . 50 OP10 BRO . . . 110 OSP 1030. . . . 106
JG 506 . . . . . . . 57 NPP 253 G. . . . 50 OP10 RED . . . 110 OSP 1035. . . . 106
G JGC 050 . . . . . . 77 NPP 253 GR . . 50 ORA 512 . . . . . 111 OSP 1225. . . . 106
JGC 070 . . . . . . 77 NPP 253 S . . . . 50 ORA 520 . . . . . 111 OSP 1230. . . . 106
GCS 008 . . . . . . 71 ORB 132. . . . . 109 OSP 1235. . . . 106
GCS 050 . . . . . . 74 JGC 095 . . . . . . 77 NPP 253 W . . . 50
GCS 070 . . . . . . 74 JGO 253W . . . . 58 ORB 133. . . . . 109 OSP 1240 . . . . 106
GCS 095 . . . . . . 74 JGO 506W . . . . 58 O ORB 138. . . . . 109 OSP 1250. . . . 106
GYT 2533. . . . . 82 JOA 253 . . . . . . 67 ORB 139. . . . . 109 OSS 0610 . . . . 107
JOM 050. . . . . . 78 OAB 132. . . . . 109 ORB 151 . . . . . 109 OSS 0612 . . . . 107
H OAB 133. . . . . 109 ORB 152. . . . . 109 OSS 0616 . . . . 107
JOM 070. . . . . . 78 OAB 138. . . . . 109
HA 08 B . . . . . . 63 JOM 095. . . . . . 78 OAB 139. . . . . 109 ORC 512 . . . . . 111 OSS 0620. . . . 107
HA 08 G . . . . . . 63 JOM 253. . . . . . 67 OAB 151 . . . . . 109 ORC 520 . . . . . 111 OSS 0625. . . . 107
HA 10 B . . . . . . 63 JPA 253 . . . . . . 59 ORS 132. . . . . 109 OSS 0812 . . . . 107
HA 10 BL . . . . . 63 JPB 253 L. . . . . 57 OAB 152 . . . . . 109 ORS 133. . . . . 109 OSS 0816 . . . . 107
HA 10 G . . . . . . 63 OAS 132 . . . . . 109 ORS 138. . . . . 109 OSS 0820. . . . 107
JPBO 253 L . . . 58 OAS 133 . . . . . 109
HA 10 S . . . . . . 63 JPG 253 . . . . . . 59 OAS 138 . . . . . 109 ORS 139. . . . . 109 OSS 0825. . . . 107

114 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 75

PART NUMBER INDEX

OSS 0830. . . . 107 PCP 010 . . . . . . 75 RCB 012 . . . . . . 86 TC 203 . . . . . . . 90 TT 256 . . . . . . . 93


OSS 1016 . . . . 107 PCP 016 . . . . . . 75 RCB 016 . . . . . . 86 TC 251 . . . . . . . 90 TT 302 . . . . . . . 93
OSS 1020 . . . . 107 PCP 025 . . . . . . 75 RCB 020. . . . . . 86 TC 253 . . . . . . . 90 TT 303 . . . . . . . 93
OSS 1025 . . . . 107 PCP 035 . . . . . . 75 RCB 025. . . . . . 86 TC 254 . . . . . . . 90 TT 304 . . . . . . . 93
OSS 1030 . . . . 107 PCP 050 . . . . . . 75 RM 08 B . . . . . . 65 TC 256 . . . . . . . 90 TT 305 . . . . . . . 93

OSS 1035 . . . . 107 PCP 070 . . . . . . 75 RM 08 G . . . . . . 65 TC 302 . . . . . . . 90 TT 313. . . . . . . . 93


OSS 1225 . . . . 107 PCP 095 . . . . . . 75 RP 08 B . . . . . . 65 TC 303 . . . . . . . 90 TT 3154 . . . . . . 93
OSS 1230 . . . . 107 PCP 120 . . . . . . 75 RP 08 BL . . . . . 65 TC 304 . . . . . . . 90 TT 316. . . . . . . . 93
OSS 1235 . . . . 107 PCP 150 . . . . . . 75 RP 08 G . . . . . . 65 TC 305 . . . . . . . 90 TT 383 . . . . . . . 93
OSS 1240 . . . . 107 PCP 185 . . . . . . 75 RP 08 S . . . . . . 65 TC 313 . . . . . . . 90 TT 385 . . . . . . . 93

OSS 1250 . . . . 107 PCP 240 . . . . . . 75 RP 08 W . . . . . . 65 TC 3154 . . . . . . 90 TT 386 . . . . . . . 93


OTP 06 . . . . . . 108 PCP 300 . . . . . . 75 TC 316 . . . . . . . 90 TT 403 . . . . . . . 93
OTP 08 . . . . . . 108 PCT 251 . . . . . . 97 S TC 383 . . . . . . . 90 TT 404 . . . . . . . 93
OTP 10 . . . . . . 108 PES 001-15 . . . 30 TC 385 . . . . . . . 90 TT 405 . . . . . . . 93
OTP 12 . . . . . . 108 PES 001-16 . . . 30 SA 01 . . . . . . . . 79 TC 386 . . . . . . . 90 TT 406 . . . . . . . 93
SBC 010 . . . . . . 36
OTS 06 . . . . . . 108 PES 001-20 . . . 30 SBC 016 . . . . . . 36 TC 403 . . . . . . . 90 TT 4063 . . . . . . 93
OTS 08 . . . . . . 108 PES 001-34 . . . 30 SBC 025 . . . . . . 36 TC 404 . . . . . . . 90 TT 503 . . . . . . . 93
OTS 10 . . . . . . 108 PES 001-58 . . . 30 SBC 035 . . . . . . 36 TC 405 . . . . . . . 90 TT 504 . . . . . . . 93
OTS 12 . . . . . . 108 PES 002-15 . . . 30 TC 406 . . . . . . . 90 TT 505 . . . . . . . 93
OWB 06 . . . . . 108 PES 002-16 . . . 30 SBC 050 . . . . . . 36 TC 4063 . . . . . . 90 TT 506 . . . . . . . 93
SBC 070 . . . . . . 36
OWB 08 . . . . . 108 PES 002-20 . . . 30 SBC 095 . . . . . . 36 TC 503 . . . . . . . 90 TT 5063 . . . . . . 93
OWB 10 . . . . . 108 PES 002-34 . . . 30 SBC 120 . . . . . . 36 TC 504 . . . . . . . 90 TT 508 . . . . . . . 93
OWB 12 . . . . . 108 PES 002-58 . . . 30 SBC 150 . . . . . . 36 TC 505 . . . . . . . 90
OWP 06 . . . . . 108 PFA 01 . . . . . . . 80 TC 506 . . . . . . . 90 U
OWP 08 . . . . . 108 PFC 01 . . . . . . . 80 SBC 185 . . . . . . 36 TC 5063 . . . . . . 90
SBC 240 . . . . . . 36 UAA 253 . . . . . . 62
OWP 10 . . . . . 108 PGC 070. . . . . . 35 SC 01 . . . . . . . . 79 TC 508 . . . . . . . 90 UAG 253. . . . . . 62
OWP 12 . . . . . 108 PGC 095. . . . . . 35 SCB 012 . . . . . . 86 TCA 08 . . . . . . . 66 UCC 050. . . . . . 77
OWS 06 . . . . . 108 PGC 185. . . . . . 35 SCB 016 . . . . . . 86 TCG 08 . . . . . . . 66 UCC 070. . . . . . 77
OWS 08 . . . . . 108 PGC 240. . . . . . 35 TL 253 . . . . . . . 92 UCC 095. . . . . . 77
OWS 10 . . . . . 108 PGC 300. . . . . . 35 SILFOS . . . . . . . 81 TMS 004. . . . . . 83
SPA . . . . . . . . . . 79 UWS 001 . . . . . 55
OWS 12 . . . . . 108 PRIMER . . . . . . 55 SPC . . . . . . . . . . 79 TP 121 BL. . . . . 91
PRP 001 . . . . . . 86 TP 253 B . . . . . 91 W
P T TP 253 BL . . . . 91
R TP 253 G . . . . . 91 WDC 080 . . . . . 53
PCA 001 . . . . . . 64 TA 121. . . . . . . . 96 TP 253 GR . . . . 91 WDC 120 . . . . . 53
PCA 002 . . . . . . 64 RBB 006. . . . . 104 TA 203 . . . . . . . 96 WDC 140 . . . . . 53
PCC 001 . . . . . . 64 RBB 010 . . . . . 104 TA 253 . . . . . . . 96 TP 253 GRLSF 92
PCC 002. . . . . . 64 RBB 016 . . . . . 104 TA 256 . . . . . . . 96 TP 253 GY . . . . 92
PCC 006. . . . . . 75 RBB 025. . . . . 104 TA 303 . . . . . . . 96 TP 253 S. . . . . . 91
RBB 035. . . . . 104 TP 253 W . . . . . 91
PCC 010 . . . . . . 75 TA 406 . . . . . . . 96 TP 256 GR . . . . 91
PCC 016 . . . . . . 75 RBB 050. . . . . 104 TA 506 . . . . . . . 96
PCC 025. . . . . . 75 RBC 010 . . . . . . 23 TAP 121 BL . . . 96 TP 256 GRLSF 92
PCC 035. . . . . . 75 RBC 020. . . . . . 23 TAP 203 BL . . . 96 TP 503 GR . . . . 91
PCC 050. . . . . . 75 RBC 025. . . . . . 23 TAP 253 B . . . . 96 TP 506 GR . . . . 91
RBC 032. . . . . . 23 TP 506 GRLSF 92
PCC 070 . . . . . . 75 TAP 253 BL . . . 96 TT 121. . . . . . . . 93
PCC 095. . . . . . 75 RBC 040. . . . . . 23 TAP 253 G . . . . 96
PCC 120 . . . . . . 75 RBT 006 . . . . . 104 TAP 253 GR. . . 96 TT 123. . . . . . . . 93
PCC 150 . . . . . . 75 RBT 010 . . . . . 104 TAP 253 S . . . . 96 TT 201. . . . . . . . 93
PCC 185 . . . . . . 75 RBT 016 . . . . . 104 TAP 253 W . . . . 96 TT 203 . . . . . . . 93
RBT 025 . . . . . 104 TT 251. . . . . . . . 93
PCC 240 . . . . . . 75 TC 121 . . . . . . . 90 TT 253 . . . . . . . 93
PCC 300. . . . . . 75 RBT 035 . . . . . 104 TC 123 . . . . . . . 90
PCP 006 . . . . . . 75 RBT 050 . . . . . 104 TC 201 . . . . . . . 90 TT 254 . . . . . . . 93

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 115
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 76

HOW TO ORDER

SALES:
A. N. Wallis prides itself on its ability to respond to customer needs. Whether at the design stage of
a lightning protection system, the ordering of existing products or at the point of despatch, our
sales office staff will always provide the highest level of service.
For all orders, quotations and technical enquiries please contact:
Tel: +44 (0)115 927 1721
Fax: +44 (0)115 875 6630
E-mail: info@an-wallis.com

We offer credit accounts as well as payment by Visa and Mastercard.

Website: www.an-wallis.com
Visit www.an-wallis.com for the latest product
and technical information as well as worldwide
distributor details and downloads.

Other Literature
Cu-nnect Surge
Exothermic Protection
Welding Catalogue.
Catalogue. A range of products
A simple and designed to protect
economical sensitive electronic
method of making equipment from
permanent, high damage caused by
quality electrical transient over-voltages.
connections.

116 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 77

NOTES
Designed and produced by McConnells Advertising & PR, Derby

Copyright: This brochure is Copyrighted to A. N. Wallis & Co. Ltd. Product Development: It is A. N. Wallis’s policy to continuously
Unauthorised reproduction or storage without permission is an improve its products. Accordingly, A. N. Wallis reserves the right to
infringement of that Copyright. Infringement of Copyright will result amend product descriptions, specifications and performance
in legal actions. September 2008. without prior notice.

A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 117
J0902003 Cover 2008 10/12/08 10:35 Page 1

A.N. WALLIS - Earthing & Lightning Protection Product Catalogue

Earthing & Lightning Protection


A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd
Greasley Street, Bulwell, Nottingham, East Midlands, NG6 8NG, United Kingdom
Product Catalogue
Tel +44 (0) 115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0) 115 875 6630
e-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com FM 73972
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
ANNEX 9: CCTV SYSTEM

1. PELCO

2. AMERICAN-DYNAMICS

Page 39 of 44
IP Cameras for
Any Application
Limitless Possibilities
Any Lighting Condition. Any Environment. Any Application.
Pelco IP Cameras – Capture With Confidence
With thousands of IP camera options to choose from, there’s a Pelco™ by Schneider Electric™ IP camera suitable for
every lighting condition, environment, and application imaginable. From fixed, entry-level cameras to high-performance
pan/tilt/zoom (PTZ) and thermal imaging systems, Pelco has IP cameras that allow you to capture your important video
data with confidence.

Fixed IP Cameras Panoramic IP Cameras IP Positioning Systems Specialty IP Cameras


Sarix™ Value Range Evolution 360-Degree cameras Spectra™ HD dome ExSite™ explosion-proof
positioning systems camera systems
Sarix Professional Range
Esprit™ SE IP integrated Sarix TI thermal imaging cameras
Sarix Enhanced Range positioning systems

Pelco IP Camera Overview | 3


A Complete Line of
Fixed IP Cameras for
Any Lighting Condition,
Application, and Environment

4 | Pelco IP Camera Overview


Sarix Enhanced Range With SureVision 2.0

Designed for performance, premium experience, and mission-critical applications, the Sarix Enhanced Range with
SureVision™ 2.0 delivers the best possible image when the scene contains difficult lighting conditions such as bright areas,
shaded areas, and intense light. The optimized modular design, motorized zoom, built-in analytics, and advanced features
of the Sarix Enhanced Range provide a best-of-class user experience. Designed with superior reliability and fault
tolerance, these rugged fixed IP cameras ensure you always get the video that you need.

Features:
• SureVision 2.0 technology, including:
• True WDR

• Advanced low-light performance SureVision 2.0 —
• Anti-bloom technology
• Automatic adjustment for above lighting conditions
Box Cameras
For a Higher
• 3D noise filtering Quality Image
• Enhanced tone mapping
• Up to 30 images per second (ips) at 3 megapixel (MPx)
• Up to two 1080p, 30 fps video streams
• Power over Ethernet (PoE), IEEE 802.3af
• Built-in Pelco analytics suite
• Local storage (Micro SD)
• Compatible with Pelco and 3rd-party video systems Indoor Mini Domes
• ONVIF™ Profile S and Profile G conformant With SureVision 2.0

Models:
• Sarix IXE Series box cameras with SureVision 2.0
• Sarix IME Series environmental mini domes
with SureVision 2.0
• Sarix IME Series vandal mini domes with SureVision 2.0
Without SureVision 2.0
• Sarix IME Series indoor mini domes with SureVision 2.0 Environmental/Vandal Mini Domes

Pelco IP Camera Overview | 5


Sarix Professional Range IP Cameras
With selection, versatility, and affordability, Sarix Professional Range packs the most popular features and
functionality of Sarix technology into a variety of indoor and environmental IP cameras. Mix and match the technical
options and form factors you need for one of the widest selections of box, bullet, and mini dome cameras in the
industry. The Sarix Professional Range offers an extensive choice of models, one-stop shopping, and competitive
prices, so you will find the camera you need for almost any lighting condition, environment, or application.

Features:
• Up to 5 MPx resolution
• Up to 30 ips at 1080p
• Autofocus motorized remote zoom lens
(bullet and mini domes)
• Integrated adaptive infrared (IR) illumination
(bullet and mini domes)
• Multiple CS-mount lens options (box cameras)
Box Cameras Indoor Mini Domes
• Accessible edge storage with Micro SD card
• PoE and 24 Vac power input
• Compatible with Pelco and 3rd-party video systems
• ONVIF Profile S conformant

Models:
• Sarix IXP Series box cameras
• Sarix IBP Series environmental bullet cameras
• Sarix IMP Series indoor mini domes
• Sarix IMP Series environmental mini domes
• Sarix IMP Series environmental mini domes with IR
Bullet Cameras With Optional IR Environmental Mini Domes With Optional IR

6 | Pelco IP Camera Overview


Sarix Value Range IP Cameras
Sarix Value Range cameras are high-definition (HD), cost-effective, IP network cameras perfect
for most any indoor fixed video security application. The Sarix Value Range cameras produce high-
quality color HD video, and the integrated, prefocused, fixed focal length lens makes sharp scene
alignment and installation quick and easy.
The mini box camera models offer unique mounting flexibility, and the micro dome models ship with
quick snap-in ceiling mounts. Convenient network connectivity, PoE models, and a simple Web user
interface make for easy plug-and-play finalization of settings and positioning adjustment.

Features:
• 720p (1280x720) MPx resolution
• Up to 30 ips
• H.264 compression
• Minimum illumination down to 0.5 lux (color only)
• PoE or 24 Vac power input
• Web-based user interface for easy setup and configuration
• Compatible with Pelco and 3rd-party video systems
• ONVIF Profile S conformant

Models:
• Sarix IL10 Series indoor mini box cameras
• Sarix IL10 Series indoor micro domes

Pelco IP Camera Overview | 7


Panoramic IP Cameras for
360-Degree Surveillance

8 | Pelco IP Camera Overview


Evolution 360-Degree Cameras
Evolution cameras provide total situational awareness over a 360-degree field of view. They generate a number of
video streams at a choice of resolutions, as well as configurable privacy zones and video motion detection within
defined areas of interest.

There really are no limits to how 360-degree technology — coupled with the best patented 3D dewarping technology,
integrated into a video management system (VMS) — can add value. The many facets of the Evolution 360-Degree
camera and its forensic capabilities are literally limitless, ranging in every application imaginable from city surveillance
to retail, gaming, and more.

Features:
• Constant 360-degree surveillance, no blind spots
• Patented client-side 3D dewarping technology
• Compatible with popular VMS platforms
• 5 MPx 1/2.5 CMOS sensor
• 0.2 lux and WDR
• H.264/MJPEG multi-stream
• Silent operation, no moving parts
• PoE or 12 Vdc
• SD card slot, I/O, and audio line-in
• Indoor, IP66 outdoor, black and white options
• Ceiling/wall/table mount
• ONVIF Profile S compliant

Models:
• Evolution 360-Degree indoor camera
• Evolution 360-Degree indoor concealed camera
• Evolution 360-Degree outdoor dome camera

Pelco IP Camera Overview | 9


Pelco IP Positioning Systems Deliver
Unparalleled Image Quality

10 | Pelco IP Camera Overview


Spectra HD 1080
Incorporating the award-winning Sarix imaging technology platform, Spectra HD 1080 is an all-digital system that
delivers 2.0 MPx resolution (1920x1080 at 30 ips), high-profile H.264 compression, built-in analytics, and much more.
Featuring HD-optimized dome bubble technology, a revolutionary solid pendant design to eliminate vibration noise,
20X or 30X optical zoom, and precise 360-degree PTZ control, Spectra HD 1080 is setting the industry standard for
HD image quality and video security performance.

Features:
• Ability to control and monitor video over IP networks
• 9 built-in analytics, including auto tracker and adaptive ↘
motion detection
• Open IP standards
Endless Adaptability
Increased resolution over standard-
• ONVIF Profile S conformant
definition IP cameras delivers
• Two simultaneous video streams: dual H.264 and scalable MJPEG
unmatched forensic detail. An
• Supports: TCP/IP, UDP/IP (Unicast, Multicast IGMP), UPnP, DNS, ideal solution to view and identify
DHCP, RTP, NTP, and more specific features such as faces,
• USB expansion slots for Pelco alarm and audio accessories license plates, playing cards (gaming
• 16:9 aspect ratio, 1920x1080 resolution at 30/25 ips (NTSC/PAL) applications), etc.
• 2.0 MPx, 20X or 30X optical zoom, 12X digital zoom
• Commercial
• 360° continuous pan rotation at 280° per second
• Industrial
• 16 preset tours, 255 dome presets, 32 window blanks
• City surveillance
• WDR
• Traffic monitoring
• Gaming

Pelco IP Camera Overview | 11


A Critical Part of Your Site’s Security Infrastructure
12 | Pelco IP Camera Overview
Esprit SE IP – Integrated and Pressurized PTZ Systems
Esprit SE IP integrated PTZ camera systems are high-performance remote-positioning systems featuring an
integrated camera and lens, PTZ unit, multi-protocol receiver, and Sarix-based H.264 encoder. Designed and built for
continuous duty, Esprit SE IP offers dynamic remote-positioning capabilities and is capable of remaining completely
operational in 90-mile-per-hour wind conditions.

Features:
• Encoder, receiver, PTZ, and enclosure with integrated optics
package (IOP) or pressurized integrated optics cartridge (IOC),
NTSC/PAL
• Tilt range of +36° to -85° from horizontal
• H.264, MPEG-4, and MJPEG compression
• Auto tracking
• Internal scheduling clock
• Horizontal zone and window blanking
• On-screen compass and tilt display
• Compatible with Pelco and 3rd-party video systems
• ONVIF 1.02 conformant

Pelco IP Camera Overview | 13


Specialty IP Cameras to Handle Any
of Your Hazardous Environments or
Impossible Lighting Conditions

14 | Pelco IP Camera Overview


ExSite IP Series – Explosion-Proof Camera Systems

The ExSite Series offers network-based, explosion-proof PTZ and fixed camera systems with integrated camera/
lens/receiver for safe and efficient installation in hazardous locations. Featuring low-light technology, multiple
compression formats, and both upright and inverted operation, ExSite IP provides the image quality, performance,
and reliability you demand in the most challenging environments.

Features:
• Integrated Optics Package (IOP) with 36X optical zoom, 12X digital zoom
• H.264, MPEG-4, and MJPEG compression
• Compatible with Pelco and 3rd-party video systems
• ONVIF 1.02 conformant
• Up to 2 simultaneous video streams
• Electropolished 316L stainless steel construction
• -60°C to +60°C operating temperature range
• Upright or inverted operation
• Manual 200° pan and 180° tilt adjustments (EHXME Series)
• 360° continuous pan rotation with tilt range +90° to -90° from horizontal
(IPSXME Series)
• Password protection
• Optional window wiper

Pelco IP Camera Overview | 15


Visible Light Camera Sarix TI Camera

From borders and building perimeters to industrial pipelines, Sarix TI


can discover potential safety threats in any lighting condition,
maximizing the time you have to respond.
16 | Pelco IP Camera Overview
Sarix TI Thermal Imaging
Sarix TI excels in impossible light and automatic detection, especially in blinding sun, smoke, and total darkness. It has
enhanced image quality. Easy network integration. Advanced analytics. Unprecedented value. Sarix TI puts thermal
imaging within reach for any application. With cameras available in both fixed and pan/tilt models, Sarix TI is flexible
enough to fit into any new or existing system.

Features:
• Plug-and-play with the industry’s most common recording
and video management systems
• Fully integrated sensor, camera, enclosure,
and pan/tilt system
• Fixed and pan/tilt models
• Integration into any IP or analog system
• Sun-safe amorphous silicon sensor
• 5 built-in analytics
• Thermography (SMR) Standard Visible Light Camera
• Full and reduced frame rate options
• Multiple resolution options, up to 640x480
• Compatible with Pelco and 3rd-party video systems
• ONVIF 1.02 conformant

Sarix TI Camera

Pelco IP Camera Overview | 17


Empowering Customers With More Options
Pelco is committed to providing a range of products and integration options that is
unmatched in the industry.

Open Systems and Design


Pelco IP cameras and IP video management systems (VMS) are designed to easily
↘ Open and Integrated
integrate with the industry’s leading manufacturers, including Genetec®, Milestone, Pelco products are designed to easily integrate with the industry’s
Software House and Lenel. Our IP cameras seamlessly connect to Pelco IP and leading manufacturers.
hybrid systems such as Endura™, Digital Sentry™, and DX Series hybrid video
recorders. Pelco cameras also feature open architecture and conformance to
ONVIF Profile S for connectivity to 3rd-party software. Furthermore, Pelco offers
an application programming interface (API) and software development kit (SDK) for
interfacing with Pelco IP cameras and systems. The extensive range of integration
Data Analysis
options offered by Pelco gives customers the choice they demand.

POS
Partner First Integration

IP
With an industry-leading approach to open systems design and the development
of strategic alliances and partnerships, Pelco truly understands the value that
comes with working together to deliver fully integrated video security solutions. Our
groundbreaking Partner First program marks a new level of openness as we work
on a daily basis to identify and bring to market additional features, capabilities, and
solutions to our existing portfolio of video security solutions. Please see
Capture
pelco.com/partnerfirst to see a full directory of integration partners. Network Command and
Control

ONVIF
Support of ONVIF is a key part of our commitment to being an Open and Integrated
company. Pelco is a full member of ONVIF, actively participating in multiple ONVIF
working groups and committees driving interoperability between IP-based physical
security products regardless of manufacturer. ONVIF is a non-profit organization, open
industry forum, promoting and developing global standards for interfaces of Manage

IP-based physical security products.


Display
IP Driven – Ask for Genuine Pelco IP Camera Accessories
Whether you’re looking for specialized functionality, enhanced capabilities, or simply added peace of
mind, look to Pelco for the industry’s widest and most complete selection of IP camera accessories.
Engineered to the highest standards and tested extensively to ensure precise compatibility and
optimum performance, all of our accessories offer genuine Pelco quality, supported by the best
service and guarantees in the industry. Save time, money, and provide tested and proven solutions
for your customers — ask for genuine Pelco IP camera accessories.

New IP Accessories Include:


• Fortified camera enclosure systems
• IP-ready general-purpose enclosures
• IR and white light LED illumination
• IP fiber optic transmission
• Ethernet over coax/UTP transmission
• PoE midspan power transmission
• HD LCD monitors/displays
• Portable IP camera installation tool

Pelco IP Camera Overview | 19


Manage Your IP Cameras With Pelco VMS
With multiple platforms to choose from, there’s a Pelco video management system (VMS) to meet
your unique system requirements. From the flexibility of Digital Sentry for mainstream security
applications, to the powerful scalability of Endura for mission-critical surveillance, to cloud-based
video management solutions, Pelco IP VMS options provide a solid foundation from which you can
securely and efficiently operate your entire video security landscape.
Hybrid Video Recorders (HVRs)
Pelco DX Series HVRs meet the demands of customers migrating to IP video while
leveraging their existing analog video surveillance infrastructure. With support
for eight to 32 analog cameras, plus eight IP megapixel cameras (DX4700HD/
DX4800HD), and storage from 250 GB to 8 TB, these easy-to-use systems are
ready to record out of the box.

Digital Sentry VMS


With full-featured DSNVs video management software, a robust DSSRV network
video recorder, analog camera support via optional direct-attached or network
video encoders, multisite monitoring, and support for 3rd-party IP cameras, Digital
Sentry is a flexible VMS for mainstream security applications.

Endura VMS
The Endura IP VMS offers the scalability, performance, and reliability required for
mission-critical surveillance applications. Scalable to thousands of cameras, Endura
is designed to fit a wide range of customer applications — including airports,
casinos, and city surveillance — where unmatched fault tolerance and system
integrity are mandatory.

System Aggregation
With access to any video camera from any location on any device and featuring
a new intuitive desktop client for ease of operation, System Aggregation provides
simplified migration from Pelco VMS platforms. The Aggregation offers flexible
scalability that can empower and enable centrally managed users across
disparate systems.

20 | Pelco IP Camera Overview


IP Camera Tools Designed With You in Mind
From an array of online tools, calculators, and selection guides to quick-and-easy access to
product documentation, software downloads, licensing agreements, product marketing materials,
and more — Pelco has the valuable tools you need. These resources are part of the VantagePoint
offer – a portfolio of customer-focused programs, tools and services specifically designed to
elevate your success.
Pelco Presenter IP Camera Sales Tool
The Pelco Presenter Apple® iPad® app gives you real-time access to key product information on
the go. Showcasing some of the most popular Pelco products, this app gives you the information
you need, when you need it — all available for download from Pelco.com.

Camera Selector Tool


Our Camera Selector Tool makes it easy to find the right camera for your next installation. You
can quickly compare up to four cameras to ensure you have selected the camera that most
accurately suits your needs.

3D Design Tool
Pelco and Fortem have partnered to offer a unique tool to make 3D facility design and
management of video surveillance systems a reality. Make planning your next project a breeze
with this easy-to-use tool.

Pelco Camera Tool


The guessing game is over. With the Pelco Camera Tool, you can determine the ideal placement
of any Pelco camera in order to get optimal video coverage at any installation site. It also
integrates with Google Maps™ and Google Earth™, allowing you to actually see video coverage
over a physical location in just a few easy steps.

Pelco IP Camera Overview | 21


IP Driven. Customer Focused.
At Pelco by Schneider Electric, we are committed to the development and manufacturing of open IP video

©2014 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. Schneider Electric, Pelco, Digital Sentry, Endura, B.O.S.S., and Sarix are trademarks owned by Schneider Electric
Industries SAS or its affiliated companies. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners. • www.schneider-electric.com • 998-1239070_GMA-US
security systems coupled with an unparalleled level of customer service and support. From an expanded
selection of IP security cameras and video management systems to full HD displays, traditional surveillance
technologies, accessories and more, Pelco is your trusted video security partner.

As part of Schneider Electric, Pelco connects you to the global specialist in energy and security management,
and has the ability to deliver integrated security and building management solutions that let you control your
entire security landscape across enterprises, from a single user interface.


Be Sure to Ask or Search
Online for the Following:
• PGTI training
• B.O.S.S.™ 5.1 specification tool
• IP products compatibility guide
Capture. Manage. Display. • VMS overview
• Pelco Press case studies

For more information, please visit pelco.com or call (800) 289-9100 (United States and Canada) or
+1 (559) 292-1981 (international). For pricing information or to purchase Pelco products, please contact
your manufacturer’s representative or the Pelco office in your area.

Pelco by Schneider Electric Schneider Electric Industries SA


3500 Pelco Way 1415 South Roselle
Clovis, California 93612 USA Palatine, Illinois 60067 USA
Tel.: +1 (559) 292-1981 Tel.: 1-888-788-2733

September 2014
A Name You Can Trust - People and Products You Can Count On - American Dynamics

American Dynamics develops some of the world’s most needed video technologies. Technologies that help retailers thwart
organized crime to protect their bottom line, and universities provide peace of mind to parents of incoming students.
Technologies that help our governments secure ports and borders, and hospitals ensure the safety and privacy of their
patients. Technologies that move beyond security to become essential business-enabling tools. From its beginning in the
early 1970s as a DVR and matrix switcher company, to its proud stance today as a leading provider of IP solutions,
American Dynamics has always stood for reliability, customer commitment, and integrity. While technology and products
change at breakneck speeds, those values are steadfast and they are part of the American Dynamics vision.

A vision reflected in the applications engineer who finds a solution to a complex installation by staying on a 4 hour phone
call with a customer, in the product manager who tirelessly studies industry trends to ensure he brings exactly the right
products to market, at the right time. And, in the engineer who miraculously finds a way to make the impossible happen.

American Dynamics may mean cameras and recorders and sophisticated video management. But it’s the dedication and
insight of over 2,000 employees in 9 countries that enable our Dynamic Vision.

American Dynamics, a Tyco International company, embodies the values of trust, respect, innovation and quality, that Tyco is
known for, the world over. Valuing the legacy of a global corporation, American Dynamics is dedicated to providing state-of-
the-art video surveillance products to our customer’s, manufacturer’s representatives, and employees. It is this dedication
that we provide this comprehensive product guide, so that all who require knowledge of our products can obtain it readily,
to help those who are in need of security for their businesses, no matter the size.
Contents
IP Cameras
IP PTZ Dome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
IP Mini-Dome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
IP Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
IP Bullet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Analog Cameras
IP Domes and Cameras
PTZ Dome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Mini-Dome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Bullet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Pre-Packaged Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Camera Accessories
IP Dome Housings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Analog Dome Housings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Indoor Mounts and Adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Outdoor Mounts and Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Dome Drones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Megapixel Rated Lenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Analog Domes and Cameras Standard Resolution Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Housings, Housing Mounts and Adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Controllers and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

IP Video Encoders
IP Encoders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Network Video Recorders


VideoEdge Network Video Recorders (NVR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Digital Video Recorders


Intellex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Intellex Ultra. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Network Video Recorders Intellex Digital Video Management System (DVMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Intellex LT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Intellex IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Intellex Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
ADTVR Embedded Digital Video Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
ADTVR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
ADTVR-VS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Hybrid Video Recording Solutions


HDVR Hybrid Video Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Video Management Systems


victor Unified Video Management System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Network Client. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Intellex Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Video Management Solutions
Storage Solutions
Network Video and HDVR Storage Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Matrix Switcher Solutions


Matrix Switchers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Matrix Keyboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Matrix Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Monitors
Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Video Accessories
Matrix Switcher Solutions
Video Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

American Dynamics 1
IP Cameras
IP cameras are ideal for wide-

spread areas, such as parking

lots, university campuses, or

shopping plazas. For custom-

ers who need clear images of

events happening far away,

Illustra’s unique megapixel

wide angle feature fixes optical

distortions found at the image

edges in many other compa-

rable IP cameras.

American Dynamics 2
A
merican Dynamics’ powerful IP cameras and domes offer a unique blend of high performance

and excellent value. High resolution and true day/night capabilities ensure that the quality you

expect from American Dynamics carries right into the IP era. At D1 resolution, image clarity is superior.

MJPEG and MPEG-4 compression technologies provide flexible bandwidth management, allowing you to

tailor the image to meet your needs.

IP PTZ Dome Cameras can be positioned at exactly the angle you need. Choose from the
American Dynamics IP PTZ Domes leverage the best of the Illustra line of IP Mini-Domes for maximum resolution or our ADCIP
analog SpeedDome and add the power of IP. Extensive zooming line for compatibility with Intellex IP. Our economical, high quality
capabilities (up to 420x total zoom 35x optical), superior images line of ACDIP mini-domes for indoor and outdoor applications work
(540 T VL, Electronic Image Stabilization, True Day/Night, and with Intellex IP and feature 540 TVL.
Wide Dynamic Range), provide a superior camera solution that
IP Box Cameras
leverages your existing infrastructure for a low total cost of
American Dynamics IP Box cameras are of superior quality and
ownership.
provide the best image each and every time. Choose from a variety
American Dynamics IP cameras are ONVIF compliant, meeting the of models including the Illustra line with H.264 compression and
open standards criteria for IP-based physical security products. maximum resolution of 2/3 megapixel or the economical ADCIP
This compliance provides customers with greater flexibility in their featuring high D1 resolution and built in local SD card storage.
choice of recording platforms. Access and control your IP box camera from a web browser or the
latest version of NVR, HDVR, or Intellex IP, depending on model.
Unlike many other IP PTZ domes in the industry, our domes support
PoE technology which allows you to use standard category 5 cable
in a typical network environment. Other domes either require you to IP Bullet Cameras
run power cables to the dome or use PoE+, which is a drain on The Illustra 400 Series Bullet Camera has one of the most powerful
power and money. With PoE, a camera can still operate in the event sensor-processor combinations available on the market with a
of a power failure if the network is connected to a centralized power weatherproof IP66 sleek enclosure. Its 896 x 720 resolution sets it
backup. apart as a versatile device, bridging “standard resolution” with 650k
pixels for incredibly high resolution. This powerful resolution and
American Dynamics IP Domes offer full 360° PTZ capabilities, as
H.264 compression creates a blend of image quality and
opposed to most domes in the industry that pan, tilt, and zoom
bandwidth-friendly performance.
“almost” all the way around (355°), but leave just enough
unmonitored area (5° worth) to cause a lot of problems. They
support H.264, MJPEG, MPEG-4, and Active Content Compression
(ACC) technology and are compatible with VideoEdge Network
Video Recorder v3.0 and higher, as well as Intellex IP.

IP Mini-Domes
Our IP Mini-Domes deliver real value with a wide range of features
at bid-winning prices. High-resolution, vandal-resistant housings, IR
illuminators, and true day-night capabilities ensure that the quality
you expect from American Dynamics carries right into the IP era. IP
Mini-Domes feature an advanced pivoting three-axis gimbal that

American Dynamics 3
IP PTZ Dome Cameras

Most competitors’ domes will


pan, tilt, and zoom “almost”
all the way around (355°), but
leave just enough unmonitored
area (5° worth) to cause a lot
of problems. IP SpeedDome
offers full 360° PTZ capabilities,
letting you see more.

IP SpeedDome:

• PoE leverages existing network infrastructure • Dynamic privacy zones


• 22x and 35x optical zoom • Unique bandwidth throttling Model Numbers
ADVEIPSD22N.....22x, NTSC
• S
 upports H.264, MJPEG, MPEG-4, and Active • C
 ompatible with VideoEdge NVR v3.0 and
Content Compression (ACC) technology Intellex IP
ADVEIPSD22P.....22x, PAL
• 360° PTZ flexibility • ONVIF compliant
• Built-in web server ADVEIPSD35N....35x, NTSC

• Alarm management via the network


ADVEIPSD35P.....35x, PAL
• B i-directional audio and synchronized video

IP SpeedDome COMPARISON TABLE

IP SpeedDome 22x IP SpeedDome 35x

Total zoom 242x 420x


Optical zoom 22x 35x

Digital zoom 12x 12x

Day/Night No Yes

Wide Dynamic Range No Yes

Electronic Image Stabilization No Yes

Programmable presets (controller dependent) Up to 96 Up to 96

Programmable patterns 16 16

Programmable sequences 16 16

Preset, area, pattern naming Up to 19 characters (user-defined) Up to 19 characters (user-defined)

American Dynamics 4
IP Mini-Domes

Illustra Connect is an innovative


tool that intuitively finds all
of your connected cameras,
making Illustra IP some of the
easiest cameras to install and
configure in the industry.

Illustra 400 IP Indoor Mini-Dome:

• Leading low light clarity with true day/night functionality


• H.264 compression up to 30 ips Model Numbers
A D C i4 0 0 - D11 A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 3 3
• Maximum resolution of 2/3 megapixel
W h i te c l e a r I R I l l u m i n ato r N TS C B l a c k s m o ke I R I l l u m i n ato r N TS C
• Dual streaming video
• Remote access to onboard storage managed by schedule, A D C i4 0 0 - D 012 A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 3 4
motion detection, alarm or network loss W h i te c l e a r I R I l l u m i n ato r PA L B l a c k s m o ke I R I l l u m i n ato r PA L

• Lightweight for best recessed mounting performance


A D C i4 0 0 - D 013 A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 51
• 3.5 mm in/out audio jacks for external microphone S i l ve r c l e a r I R I l l u m i n ato r N TS C
W h i te s m o ke I R I l l u m i n ato r N TS C

A D C i4 0 0 - D 014 A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 52
W h i te s m o ke I R I l l u m i n ato r PA L S i l ve r c l e a r I R I l l u m i n ato r PA L

A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 31 A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 5 3
B l a c k c l e a r I R I l l u m i n ato r N TS C S i l ve r s m o ke I R I l l u m i n ato r N TS C

A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 32 A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 5 4
B l a c k c l e a r I R I l l u m i n ato r PA L S i l ve r s m o ke I R I l l u m i n ato r PA L

American Dynamics 5
IP Mini-Domes

896 x 720 resolution sets


Illustra 400 Series apart as
a versatile device bridging
“standard resolution” with 650k
pixels for very high resolution.

Illustra 400 IP Outdoor Mini-Dome:

• Wide dynamic range for clarity in backlit environments


• IP66, vandal resistant housing Model Numbers
ADCi400-D021 ADCi400-D044
• Striking clarity in low light
White clear IR illuminator NTSC Outdoor black smoke IR illuminator PAL
• Highly efficient H.264 compression up to 30 ips dual streaming
• Range of resolution options up to 2/3 megapixel ADCi400-D022 A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 61
Outdoor white clear IR illuminator PAL S i l ve r c l e a r I R i l l u m i n ato r N TS C
• Versatile remote onboard storage management
• 3.5 mm in/out audio jacks for external microphone ADCi400-D023 A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 62
Outdoor white smoke IR illuminator NTSC S i l ve r c l e a r I R i l l u m i n ato r PA L

ADCi400-D024 A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 6 3
Outdoor white smoke IR illuminator PAL S i l ve r s m o ke I R i l l u m i n ato r N TS C

ADCi400-D041 A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 6 4
Outdoor black clear IR illuminator NTSC S i l ve r s m o ke I R i l l u m i n ato r PA L

ADCi400-D042
Outdoor black clear IR illuminator PAL

ADCi400-D043
Outdoor black smoke IR illuminator NTSC

American Dynamics 6
IP Mini-Domes

The IP Mini-Domes feature an


advanced pivoting three-axis
gimbal that can be positioned
at exactly the angle you need.

IP Mini-Domes:
• ADCIP IP Mini-Domes (Indoor and Outdoor) for use with Intellex IP
Model NumberS
• D1 resolution
INDOOR OutDOOR
• Offers true day/night functionality for low light conditions ADCIPE3312ICN ADCIPE3712OCN
• Built-in IR illuminator for no light conditions
ADCIPE3312ISN ADCIPE3712OSN
• Supports MJPEG and MPEG-4 compression technologies
• Outdoor model features vandal resistant housing ADCIPE3712OCPE
ADCIPE3312ICPE
• Access and control the mini-domes from a web browser or the latest
version of VideoEdge NVR or Intellex IP ADCIPE3312ISPE ADCIPE3712OSPE
• Multiple level password-protected user access
ADCIPE3312ICPU ADCIPE3712OCPU
• USB interface for browser-based IP configuration
• Supports Power over Ethernet (PoE) for cost-savings and ease of ADCIPE3312ISPU ADCIPE3712OSPU
installation

Model Number Guide


Outlet
BRAND CAMERA protocol series Lens environment Bubble format
style

AD = C IP E 3312 = V ari-focal I = Indoor C = Clear N = NTSC E = Europe


American 3.3-12 mm O = Outdoor S = Smoked P = PAL U =UK
Dynamics 3712 = V ari-focal
3.7-12 mm

American Dynamics 7
IP Mini-Domes

IP mini-Domes Comparison table

ADCIPE3312Ixx ADCIPE37120xx Illustra 400 Illustra 400


(Indoor) (Outdoor) (Indoor) (Outdoor)

Housing Non Vandal resistant Vandal resistant Non vandal resistant Vandal resistant

Compression

1/3” Sony CMOS


Imager 1/3 in CCD 1/3 in CCD 1/3” Sony CMOS progressive scan
progressive scan
1.0 Vp-p +/- 10%,
1.0 Vp-p +/- 10%, 75 ohm,
75 ohm, composite,
Video Output 1.0 Vp-p/75-ohm, BNC 1.0 Vp-p/75-ohm, BNC composite,
negative,
negative, RCA x 1
RCA x 1
NTSC: 720x480, 720x240, NTSC: 720x480, 720x240,
352x240, 176x112 352x240, 176x112
Resolution CIF, D1, 896 x 720p CIF, D1, 896 x 720p
PAL: 720x576, 720x288, PAL: 720x576, 720x288, 352x288,
352x288, 176x112 176x112

NTSC: 768 x 494


Active Pixel Count (H x V) NTSC: 768 x 494 (PAL: 752 x 582) 896 x 720 896 x 720
(PAL: 752 x 582)

0.2 lux at F1.2 color 0.2 lux at F1.2 color


Typ2: 0.65 lux @ F1.2 Day: 0.65 lux @ F1.2
Minimum Illumination 0.01 lux b/w 0.01 lux b/w
Min3: 0.19 lux @ F1.2 Night: 0.07 lux @ F1.2
0.00 w/IR illuminator 0.00 w/IR illuminator

S/N Ratio 50 dB 50 dB 50 dB 50 dB

White Balance AWB AWB AWB AWB

Flickerless Mode Selectable on/off Selectable on/off NA NA

Digital Zoom N/A N/A Yes Yes

Bubble F-stop F1.0 (tinted); F0 (clear) F1.0 (tinted); F0 (clear) F1.0 (tinted); F0 (clear) F1.0 (tinted); F0 (clear)

3.3-12mm vari-focal auto iris DC 3.3-12mm vari-focal


Lens Options 3.3 – 12 mm auto iris lens 3.7 – 12 mm auto iris lens
drive lens auto iris DC drive lens

Housing Color White White White, black, or silver White, black, or silver

Environmental Rating Indoor Indoor/Outdoor None IP66

American Dynamics 8
IP Box Camera

The Illustra 400 Series Box


Camera features up to 32 GB of
available onboard storage for
alarm-based recording.

Illustra 400 IP Box Camera:

• H.264 compression with 30 ips


• Wide dynamic range for clarity in backlit environments Model Numbers
ADCi400-X001
• Low light clarity in color and black & white
W/Out lens TDN WDR POE NTSC
• Dual streaming video
• Access and control the cameras from a web browser or the NVR ADC i 400-X002
w/Out lens TDN WDR POE PAL
• PoE compliant
• Easy installation with existing American Dynamics mounts ADCi400-X201

• 3.5 mm in/out audio jacks for external microphone 1.7mm wide angle auto iris lens TDN WDR POE NTSC

ADCi400-X202
1.7mm wide angle auto iris lens TDN WDR POE PAL

American Dynamics 9
IP Standard IP
Resolution Box Camera
Box Cameras

IP Standard Resolution Box Camera:

• Economical, high quality box camera


IP box Cameras: Model Numbers
• D1 resolution
ADCIPEBPN
• Built-in local SD card storage PoE/12VDC, NTSC, w/PS
• Economical, high quality box camera • Lens options are 3-8mm (LIRC0308CS),
• Offers true day/night functionality for low light conditions
2.8-11mm (LIRC2811CS), 10-40mm PoE
• D1 resolution ADCIPEBPPE
• Architecture leverages MJPEG and MPEG-4 compression (LIRC1040CS)
ADCIPEBPN
technologies • Built-in local SD card storage PoE/12VDC, PAL, EU Plug, w/PS
• PoE and non-PoE versions available ADCIPEBPPE
• Access and control the cameras from a webtrue
• Offers browser or the
day/night latest for low
functionality
• Operates as a USB device for easy
ADCIPEBPPU ADCIPEBPPU
version of VideoEdge NVR or Intellex light
IP conditions
browser-based configuration
PoE/12VDC, PAL, UK Plug, w/PS
• Multiple level password protected user access leverages MJPEG and Non-PoE
• Architecture
• Can be used with analog box camera
MPEG-4 compression technologies ADCIPEBN
• 10/100 Base-T network support housings for outdoor use ADCIPEBN
• Access and control the cameras from a ADCIPEBPE
• Compatible with American24VAC/12VDC, NTSC, w/PS
Dynamics fixed
web browser or the latest version of the ADCIPEBPU
camera mounts, accessories, and lenses
VideoEdge NVR or Intellex IP
ADCIPEBPE
• Multiple level password protected user 24VAC/12VDC, PAL, EU Plug, w/PS
access
• 10/100 Base-T network support ADCIPEBPU
24VAC/12VDC, PAL, UK Plug, w/PS

Model Number Guide


branD Camera ProtoCol serIes style Poe Format out

aD = C IP e b P = Poe N = NTSC E = Eu
american {blank} = non-Poe P = PAL U=U
Dynamics

American Dynamics 10
IP Bullet Camera

Illustra 400 IP Bullet Camera:

• Maximum resolution of 2/3 megapixel


• H.264 compression with 30 ips Model Numbers
ADCi400-B021 ADCi400-B041
• Sleek IP66-rated weatherproof construction Black NTSC
White ntsc
• Adjustable sunshield with security screws
ADCi400-B022 ADCi400-B061
• Wide dynamic range for clarity in high contrast environments
White pal Silver NTSC
• Industry-leading low light clarity in color and black & white
• Dual streaming, progressive scan video ADCi400-B042 ADCi400-B062

• PoE compliant (802.11af) Black PAL Silver PAL

• Camera supplied with arm mount


• 3.5 mm in/out audio jacks for external microphone
• IR Illuminators

American Dynamics 11
Analog Cameras
Over 175 SpeedDome

programmable dome cameras

keep tabs on major traffic

arteries throughout central

Florida. From Orlando to Tampa

and out to Cape Canaveral,

American Dynamics domes

put state transportation officials

front and center at the scene

of an accident or suspicious

activity. Video feeds supply key

information to law enforcement

and news media during

emergency situations and daily

commutes.
Analog Cameras

P
TZ, programmable dome cameras give you a comprehensive view that you simply cannot get

from a fixed camera. Our technology delivers the details of your target, zooming in or out in

less than a second to capture the image you need the instant an alarm goes off. Our innovative Zoom-

Adjusted Programming (ZAP) lets you pan, tilt, and zoom in every direction, automatically adjusting the pan

and tilt speed in proportion to the zoom. Additional features enable you to conduct a virtual patrol of your

facility whether or not someone is manning the controls. Auto-focus with manual override renders a clear

picture every time. From the most distant corner of a parking garage to the maze of hallways throughout a

building, SpeedDome programmable dome cameras take you everywhere you need to see.

Analog PTZ Dome Cameras Unlike other dome housings in the industry, which are made of
SpeedDome Ultra 8 Programmable Dome Cameras are metal, the Discover series housing is made with extremely durable
equipped with Wide Dynamic Range, True Day/Night, and Electronic composite and polycarbonate materials that have “shape memory”.
Image Stabilization (EIS). With 35x and 540 TVL allows users to see An advanced pivoting axis lets you position the camera at exactly
farther and clearer than ever before. A 12x digital magnifier with 35x the angle you need, while optimal white balance provides the
optical zoom yields a total zoom of 420x. This series also features clearest, most color-perfect images possible.
privacy zones, on-screen programming, alarm inputs, and DirectSet
540 TVL and True Day/Night cameras provide super high resolution
for fast access to the most frequently used functions. A choice of
images in a variety of lighting conditions. The models with Night-
black or white camera assemblies is available.
Saver mode are the ideal choice for applications requiring 540 TVL
SpeedDome Ultra 8 with 22x delivers excellent color images in to provide super, high resolution images and true color rendition.
scenes as dim as .02 lux. This series combines 22x optical zoom The Night-Saver mode automatically switches the cameras to quasi
and 11x digital zoom for 242x total zoom and has low-light capability black and white in scenes with low lighting to provide better
of .004 lux. Like the SpeedDome Ultra 8 with 35x, this series also low-light detail performance. Internal and phase adjustable line lock
includes DirectSet, privacy zones, on-screen programming, and options are also included for roll-free switching. True Day/Night
alarm inputs. models include a moving mechanical IR cut filter and advanced
features such as on-screen menu programming, advanced pixel
SpeedDome Optima is powered with 22x optical zoom and 11x
correction, a focus adjust mode for focus accuracy, selectable
digital zoom for a total of 242x zoom, producing high quality color
4-zone Back Light Camera, manual shutter mode, and a monitor
images. The series includes an alarm input, 96 user-programmable
mode to optimize the camera output for CRT or LCD monitors.
presets three patterns, and a pre-wired harness for easy installation
and servicing. Compatible with any American Dynamics controller CCD Standard box cameras are ideal for a multitude of applications.
system, Optima is available in outdoor models only. We offer economical, efficient models for entry level and general
purpose installations where cost and reliability are paramount.
Optima LT includes many of the same features as the standard
Optima dome - all for an impressively low price.
Analog Pre-Packaged Cameras
Standard Pre-Packs include color, black & white, and
Analog Mini-Domes + Box Cameras
True Day/Night cameras (product dependent) with a choice of
The Discover series of Mini-Domes delivers a vandal resistant
lenses, as well as indoor and outdoor housing mounts. A variety of
camera solution at a non-vandal resistant price. This series of high
other Speciality Pre-Packs are also available.
performance mini-domes includes high impact, vandal resistant
dome housings built to withstand even the harshest environments.
American Dynamics 13
Analog Cameras

Analog DOME COMPARISON TABLE

SpeedDome Optima +
SpeedDome Ultra 8 22x SpeedDome Ultra 8 35x
Optima LT
Total zoom 242x 420x 242x
Optical zoom 22x 35x 22x

Digital zoom 11x 12x 11x

Day/Night No Yes No

Wide Dynamic Range No Yes No

Electronic Image Stabilization No Yes No


Programmable presets
Up to 96 Up to 96 Up to 96
(controller dependent)
Programmable patterns 16 16 3

Programmable sequences 16 16 No

Preset, area, pattern naming Up to 19 characters (user-defined) Up to 19 characters (user-defined) No

Motion detection No Yes No

Privacy zones Up to 8 Up to 8 No
Up to 4 inputs & outputs, base Up to 4 inputs & outputs, base
Alarm inputs & output One for Optima & N/A for Optima LT
dependent dependent
Auto focus/iris Yes Yes Yes

Password protection Yes Yes No

CCD imager (CCD center) 1/4 in, 470 TVL 1/4 in, 540 TVL 1/4 in, 470 TVL
Day Mode - 0.24 lux (AGC on) / 0.028
0.3 lux (AGC on) / 0.02 lux with 1/4 lux with 1/4 sec. open shutter B/W IR
Minimum illumination 1.5 Lux (AGC on)
sec. open shutter mode – 0.021 lux (AGC on) / 0.00041
lux with 1/2 sec. open shutter
Lens focal length 4 to 88 mm 3.4 to 119 mm 4 to 88 mm

Lens maximum aperture f1.6 f1.4 f1.6


RS-422/RS-485, Manchester, RS-422/RS-485, Manchester, RS-422/RS-485 (2-Wire: for Optima
Communication Protocols
SensorNet, & AD-UTC SensorNet, & AD-UTC LT only), Manchester & SensorNet

American Dynamics 14
Analog PTZ Dome Cameras

Two Ordering Options


Available
1. Order each component individually
2. O rder a pre-configured dome kit
which includes: Camera Module,
Mounting Base, Mount, and Indoor
or Outdoor Housing, plus Bubble.

SpeedDome Ultra 8 Dome Cameras:


22x series: • S
 upports SensorNet, RS-422, Manchester, 35x series; includes ALL the features (listed
• 2
 2x optical zoom with 11x digital magnifier AD UTC, NTCIP, and other protocols* left) PLUS the following:
(242x total zoom) • D
 ome-generated on-screen text including • 3
 5x optical zoom with 12x digital magnifier
direction indicators (420x total zoom)
• A
 dvanced digital signal processing (DSP)
CCD camera • U p to eight privacy zones • W ide dynamic range
• F
 reeze frame on presets (user-selectable • P
 rogrammable presets, patterns, and area • D ay/night color-to-monochrome mode
on/off) names • E lectronic Image Stabilization (EIS)
• O
 pen shutter to capture images in very low • D
 irectSet feature provides fast access to • D imensions:
directional light the most frequently used dome features Height: 205 mm (8 in)
• S
 elect from two housing/eyeball assembly • U p to 96 presets (controller dependent) Diameter: 120 mm (4.7 in)
colors: black or white
• A larm inputs and outputs • Weight:
• Continuous auto focus Housing and Eyeball: 1.18 kg (2.6 lbs)
• A utomatic home position Base (with I/O board): .16 kg (.35 lbs)
• Zoom adjusted programming
• A
 utomatic proportional flip and automatic
• D ome usage statistics gain control, line-lock and white balance
• Password protection (user-selectable on/off)

• Integrated Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP)


simplifies wiring and installation
• S
 tore presets and patterns with I/O base
memory

* Compatibility with other manufacturers is based upon known current protocols and controllers at time of test. However, compatibility may be affected if other manufacturers make changes to their products.

American Dynamics 15
Analog PTZ Dome Cameras

SpeedDome Ultra 8 (order each component):

22x Zoom, Housing /Eyeball Assembly without I/O Mounting Base ADSDU835ION

ADSDU822N ADSDU835WION

ADSDU822WN ADSDU835IOP

ADSDU822P ADSDU835WIOP

ADSDU822WP I/O Mounting Base without Housing /Eyeball Assembly

22x Zoom, Housing/Eyeball Assembly with I/O Mounting Base ADSDUIOB

ADSDU822ION ADSDUIOBW

ADSDU822WION Accessories

ADSDU822IOP > H ousings

ADSDU822WIOP > Mounts

35x Zoom, Housing /Eyeball Assembly without I/O Mounting Base > Controllers

ADSDU835N > J -Boxes

ADSDU835WN > Installation/Removal tool

ADSDU835P > P ower supplies

ADSDU835WP

35x Zoom, Housing/Eyeball Assembly with I/O Mounting Base

Model Number Guide


BRAND CAMERA camera body color Mounting Base format

ADSDU8 = 22 = 22x Zoom {blank} = Black {blank} = N one, Order N = NTSC


American Dynamics 35 = 3
 5x Zoom, Wide Dynamic Range, W = White Separately P = PAL
SpeedDome Ultra 8 True Day/Night, Electronic Image IO = I/O Mounting
Stabilization (EIS) Base Included

With the SpeedDome Ultra 8, the True Day/Night feature provides

enhanced infrared capability for night time viewing. Excellent color

video is seen by day, then automatically switches to monochrome

in the dark. This powerful feature enables you to capture scenes in

extreme darkness, undetectable to the human eye.

American Dynamics 16
Analog PTZ Dome Cameras
SpeedDome Ultra 8 preconfigured Kits

A Camera Module - C Housing (Environ- D Mount E Bubble


A Pre-configured 22x or 35x (Color with ment)
SpeedDome Ultra Day/Night mode)
8 Kit Includes:
A Camera Module

B I/O Board Mounting Base Clear


C Housing (Environment)
1) Top Hat (Indoor) 1) Hard Ceiling (Indoor)
D Mount
b I/O Board Mounting
Base (if applicable)
E Bubble 2) 2' x 2' Drop Ceiling
(Indoor) Smoked

2) Environmental
(Indoor & Outdoor)

3) Long Wall (Outdoor)

Pre-Configured SpeedDome Ultra 8 Kits:

22x Zoom, Indoor Dome Kits ADSDU835IHSP

ADSDU822IHN ADSDU835I2X2N

ADSDU822IHP ADSDU835I2X2P

ADSDU822IHSN ADSDU835I2X2SN

ADSDU822IHSP ADSDU835I2X2SP

ADSDU822I2X2N 35x Zoom, Outdoor Dome Kits, (with 540 TVL WDR,

ADSDU822I2X2P Day/Night + EIS)

ADSDU822I2X2SN ADSDU835OPCN

ADSDU822I2X2SP ADSDU835OPCP

22x Zoom, Outdoor Dome Kits ADSDU835OPCWN

ADSDU822OPCN ADSDU835OPCWP

ADSDU822OPCP Accessories
ADSDU822OPCWN > Controllers

ADSDU822OPCWP > J-Boxes

32x Zoom, Indoor Dome Kits, (with 540 TVL WDR, Day/Night + EIS) > Installation/Removal tool

ADSDU835IHN > Power supplies

ADSDU835IHP

ADSDU835IHSN

Model Number Guide


BRAND CAMERA ENVIRONMENT MOUNT BUBBLE FORMAT

ADSDU8 = 22 = 22x Zoom I = Indoor H = Hard Ceiling {blank} = Clear N = NTSC


American 35 = 3
 5x Zoom, Wide dynamic range, OPC = Outdoor W = Long Wall S = Smoked P = PAL
Dynamics True Day/Night, Electronic Image 2x2 = 2 x 2 ft, Drop Ceiling
SpeedDome Stabilization (EIS) {blank} = N one, Order
Ultra 8 Separately

American Dynamics 17
Dome Assembly

We offer an I/O Board Mounting Base which

makes installation as easy as screwing in a

light bulb in just three simple steps:

1. Connect the composite

cables for power, 1

communication, and

video to the I/O PC board

in the mounting base. 2

2. Secure the mounting

base to the ceiling or

desired location. 3

3. Connect the housing

and eyeball assembly to

the base by aligning the

cap and base tabs, then

turn, push, and click the


4
housing clockwise.

4. Dome is mounted and ready-to-go. Wait a

few seconds for dome to begin its homing

routine.

American Dynamics 18
Analog PTZ Dome Cameras

SpeedDome Optima + Optima LT Dome Cameras:


• C
 olor camera with up to 242x zoom • Three user-definable patterns • B
 elow ceiling: 92.7 x 178 mm
(22x optical, 11x digital) (3.65 x 7 in)
• Power-on functional tests
• 470+ TVL horizontal resolution • In-ceiling series weight: 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs)
• LED diagnostics
• Zoom adjusted programming • Integral housing series dimension:
• Easy to install and service
303 x 243.5 mm (11.9 x 9.6 in)
• Auto focus and auto iris
• P
 riced comparably to a PTZ, with
• Integral housing series weight: 2.7 kg
• Auto white balance more features and easier to install
(6.1 lbs)
• Automatic gain control • S tepper motors with micro-step control
• Line-lock • A utomatic home position
• S
 upports Manchester, SensorNet, and • In-ceiling series dimensions:
Simplex RS-422 protocols Total: 301 x 190.5 mm (11.9 x 7.5 in)
• Up to 96 user-definable presets • A
 bove ceiling: 207.4 x 190.5 mm
(8.2 x 7.5 in)

American Dynamics 19
Analog PTZ Dome Cameras

A Color Camera b Housings c Bubbles


A Pre-configured Module
SpeedDome Optima
+ optima lt Dome
Kit Includes:

A Color Camera Module

B Housing Smoked Clear


In-ceiling Pendant
(Indoor) (Indoor/Outdoor)
C Bubble (smoked or clear)

Pre-Configured Optima Dome Kits (Outdoor):

RASONPC RASONPS
O u td o o r Pe n d a n t M o u n t, C l e a r B u b b l e ( N TS C) O u td o o r Pe n d a n t M o u n t, S m o ke d B u b b l e ( N TS C)
RASONPC-1 RASONPS-1
O u td o o r Pe n d a n t M o u n t, C l e a r B u b b l e ( PA L ) O u td o o r Pe n d a n t M o u n t, S m o ke d B u b b l e ( PA L )

Pre-Configured Optima LT Dome Kits (Indoor):

RASELHC I n d o o r Pe n d a n t M o u n t, C l e a r B u b b l e ( PA L )
I n d o o r C e i l i n g M o u n t, C l e a r B u b b l e ( N TS C) RASELPS

RASELHC-1 I n d o o r Pe n d a n t M o u n t, S m o ke d B u b b l e ( N TS C)

I n d o o r C e i l i n g M o u n t, C l e a r B u b b l e ( PA L ) RASELPS-1

RASELHS I n d o o r Pe n d a n t M o u n t, S m o ke d B u b b l e ( PA L )

I n d o o r C e i l i n g M o u n t, S m o ke d B u b b l e ( N TS C) Accessories
RASELHS-1 > Controllers
I n d o o r C e i l i n g M o u n t, S m o ke d B u b b l e ( PA L ) > J-Boxes
RASELPC > Installation/Removal tool
I n d o o r Pe n d a n t M o u n t, C l e a r B u b b l e ( N TS C) > Power supplies
RASELPC-1

American Dynamics 20
Analog PTZ Dome Cameras

NUMBER OF PRESETS PER DOME

SpeedDome Ultra 8 22x + 35x SpeedDome Optima + Optima LT

Controller, DVR or Protocol Number of Presets


Matrix Switcher
SensorNet 96 96
ADTT16E
RS-422* 94 96

AD-UTC 96 96
MegaPower LT
SensorNet 96 96

SensorNet 96 96
MegaPower 48 Plus
Manchester 64 64

RS-422 96 96

Manchester** 64 64

MegaPower 3200 SensorNet 64 64

RS-422 †
60 60

SensorNet ‡
96 96
Intellex
RS-422§ 96 96

TVR RS-422 96 96

RS-485 N/A N/A


Third party interfaces
RS-422 N/A N/A

supported protocols

SpeedDome Optima: Yes


RS-485/RS-422 Yes
SpeedDome Optima LT: Yes, Simplex only

NTCIP Yes No

SensorNet Yes Yes

Manchester Yes Yes

AD-UTC Yes No

Pelco Coaxitron Yes No

Pelco “P” Yes No

Panasonic UTC Yes No

Vicon RS-422 Yes No

* Using SensorNet-to-RS-422 converter (model number RCSN422). ‡ Using USB CCTV Control Module (Model number ADACSNET).
** Using Sensornet/Manchester code dist Model # ADACSNETD § Requires USB to RS-422 adaptor.
† Using RS422/485 code dist model # ADAC422D

American Dynamics 21
Analog Mini-Domes

discover mini-Dome Fixed Camera Comparison table

ADCD(B)W ADCD(B)EH ADCD(B)T ADCIEH ADCD600 ADCD200


Indoor/Outdoor Indoor/Outdoor Indoor/Outdoor Indoor Indoor/Outdoor Indoor

Wide Dynamic Super High Super High


Camera True Day/Night True Day/Night High resolution
Range Resolution Resolution

Non-vandal Non
Housing Vandal resistant Vandal resistant Vandal resistant Vandal-resistant
resistant vandal-resistant

Imager Pixim orca sensor 1/3 in CCD 1/3 in CCD 1/3 in CCD 1/3 inch CCD 1/3 inch CCD

1.0 Vp-p/75-ohm, 1.0 Vp-p/75-ohm, 1.0 Vp-p/75-ohm, 1.0 Vp-p/75-ohm, 1.0 Vp-p/75 ohm, 1.0 Vp-p/75 ohm,
Video Output
BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC

Horizontal 540 TVL (NTSC)


504+ TVL 540 TVL 540 TVL 540 TVL 480 TVL
Resolution 520 TVL (PAL)

Active Pixel Count Universal: 720 x NTSC: 768 x 494 NTSC: 768 x 494 NTSC: 768 x 494 768 x 494 NTSC 768 x 494 NTSC
(H x V) 540 (PAL: 752 x 582) (PAL: 752 x 582) (PAL: 752 x 582) 752 x 582 PAL 752 x 582 PAL

Typ*: 0.65 lux @ Day: 0.65 lux @ Typ1: 0.65 lux @


Minimum F1.2 F1.2 F1.2 0.0 lux (f/1.4 lens,
0.95 lux @ F1.2 1.2 lux
Illumination Min**: 0.19 lux @ Night: 0.07 lux @ Min2: 0.19 lux @ AGC on, IR on)
F1.2 F1.2 F1.2

Digital Slow
2x (default) – 32x N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Shutter (DSS)

Line-lock, phase- Line-lock, Line-lock, Line-lock,


Sync System adjustable or adjustable or adjustable or adjustable or Internal Internal
internal internal internal internal

S/N Ratio >42 dB 50 dB 50 dB 50 dB 48 dB 48 dB

Automatic white
balance (AWB),
White Balance AWB AWB AWB AWB AWB
One-touch &
manual

AWB Ranges- 2200 – 7500 K 2700 – 11000 K 2700 – 11000 K 2700 – 11000 K
2500 - 9500 K 2500 - 9700 K
Normal (Extended) (2000 – 11000 K) (2000 – 18000 K) (2000 – 18000 K) (2000 – 18000 K)

WDR Metering
1-zone adjustable N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Zone

Backlight Center weighted Center weighted Center weighted


N/A On/Off On/Off
Compensation on/off on/off on/off

Flickerless Mode Selectable on/off Selectable on/off Selectable on/off Selectable on/off On/Off N/A

Night-Saver Selectable on/off Selectable on/off N/A Selectable on/off On/Off On/Off

DVR-Saver Mode Selectable on/off N/A Selectable on/off N/A N/A N/A

Digital Zoom Scalable, up to 2x N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F1.0 (tinted); F0 F1.0 (tinted); F0 F1.0 (tinted); F0


F1.0 (tinted); F0
Bubble F-stop (clear) (clear) (clear) F0 (clear) F0 (clear)
(clear)
2.6-6mm 2.6-6mm 2.6-6mm

3.0 – 9.0 mm or 3.0 – 9.0 mm or 2.9 – 10 mm or 3.0 – 9.0 mm or


4 – 9 mm, F/1.6
Lens Options 9.0 – 22 mm auto 9.0 – 22 mm auto 9.0 – 22 mm auto 9.0 – 22 mm auto 3.7 - 12mm
fixed
iris lens iris lens iris lens iris lens

Housing Color Black or White Black or White Black or White White White White

Environmental
Indoor/Outdoor Indoor/Outdoor Indoor/Outdoor Indoor Only Indoor/Outdoor Indoor Only
Rating

* Specified at 178mV (for comparison purposes)


** Specified at 78mV (usable signal level)

American Dynamics 22
Analog Mini-Domes

When light levels drop, the camera


automatically switches on the
built-in IR illuminators and
switches from color to black and
white to capture images in very
low light.

Discover 600 Vandal-Resistant Mini-Domes with IR Illumination:

• Super high resolution 540 TVL NTSC True Day/ Night (520 TVL PAL)
• Removable IR Cut Filter Model Numbers
A D C D 6 0 0 - D 0 0 01
• 3X vari-focal lens
Va n d a l re s i s t a n t m i n i d o m e,
• Auto Iris, IR corrected, 3.7 - 12 mm varifocal lense 5 4 0T V L, 3.7-12m m, I R , 12 /24V,

• Built-in IR illumination c l e a r, w h i te, N TS C

• Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) option


A D C D 6 0 0 - D 0 0 02
• IP67-rated housing for outdoor use Va n d a l re s i s t a n t m i n i d o m e,

• Provides recessed mounting or surface mounting options as 520T V L, 3.7-12m m, I R , 12 /24V,


standard c l e a r, w h i te, PA L

Ac c e s s o r i e s
A D C1121A
Powe r s u p p l y 12V D C/1 a m p
A D C124
Powe r S u p p l y 24VAC

American Dynamics 23
Analog Mini-Domes

For businesses that are


cost-sensitive, the 200 Series
offers a powerful price/
performance ratio.

Discover 200 Indoor Mini-Domes:


• High resolution 480 TVL camera
• 1/3 inch format CCD Model Numbers
A D C D20 0 - D 0 0 01
• 4-9 mm auto iris lens
3” m i n i - d o m e, 4 8 0T V L, 4- 9 m m, 12V D C, c l e a r, w h i te, N TS C
• 3 axis gimbal
• 12VDC or 12VDC/24VAC option (201 series) A D C D20 0 - D 0 0 02
3” m i n i - d o m e, 4 8 0T V L, 4- 9 m m, 12V D C, c l e a r, w h i te, PA L
• Optional mounting accessories

A D C D201- D 0 0 01
4” m i n i - d o m e, 4 8 0T V L, 4- 9 m m, 12 /24V, c l e a r, w h i te, N TS C

A D C D201- D 0 0 02
4” m i n i - d o m e, 4 8 0T V L, 4- 9 m m, 12 /24V, c l e a r, w h i te, PA L

Mounting Accessories ADCD200-D ADCD201-D

ADCPWMWALL Yes Yes

ADCPWMPEND No Yes

ADCPWMRMK No Yes

ADCPWMPWM No Yes

ADCPWMCRNR No Yes

ADCPWMELEC Yes Yes

American Dynamics 24
Analog Mini-Domes

Vandal-Resistant
The vandal resistant Indoor/Outdoor
Discover Mini-Domes are ideal for
areas where surveillance equipment is
subject to abuse. Three camera types
are available, Wide Dynamic Range,
High Resolution, and True/Day Night.

Discover ADCD(B) Indoor/Outdoor Mini-Domes:


• H igh-impact, vandal • IP66 and NEMA 4X-rated
resistant polycarbonate for -30° to 50°C (-22° to
bubble (clear and tinted); 122°F)
plus snap-on bubble
• Discover Drone option Mounts
liner for an extra level of
available
covertness White Black
Wall mount w/pendant
• E
 asy installation with eight ADCDMWALL ADCBMWALL cap
• A
 dvanced pivoting axis
mounting options (surface,
provides greater viewing
flush, pendant, wall, wall- Outside corner adapter for
flexibility
pole, wall-exterior corner, ADCDMCRNRO ADCBMCRNRO use with ADCDMWALL or
• T
 wo auto iris lens options inside corner, electrical ADCBMWALL
for better image quality box)
Pendant cap, three-quarter
and improved low-light ADCDMPEND ADCBMPEND
inch thread
• A
 DCD and ADCB series
performance
dimensions:
• M
 ultiple camera options, [height x bubble diameter]: ADCDMCRNR ADCDBCRNR Corner mount
including WDR model with 93 x 95 mm (3.6 x 3.7 in)
Pixim ® technology High resolution camera Pole mount for use
weight: 1.0 kg (2.2 lbs) ADCDMPOLE ADCBMPOLE with ADCDMWALL or
• N ight-Saver mode ADCBMWALL
WDR & standard resolution
for extreme low-light
camera weight: 0.9 kg (1.9
conditions (high resolution Drone, no camera or lens
lbs) ADCDMELEC ADCBMELEC
capability
& WDR models only)

Accessories

Heater, 24V AC only,


7W
ADCDHTR
(Not used in WDR
models)

Video service lead


ADCDSLC
cable

Model Number Guide


BRAND Finish TYpe LENS BUBBLE FORMAT

AD = CD = V andal resistant, EH = H igh 2606 = 2.6 – 6.0 mm C = Clear N = NTSC | P = PAL


American White Resolution 0309 = 3.0 – 9.0 mm | 0922 = 9.0 – 22 mm T = Tinted
Dynamics CB = V andal resistant, W=W
 ide Dynamic 0309 = 3.0 – 9.0 mm | 0922 = 9.0 – 22 mm U = Universal
Black Range
T = True Day/Night 2910 = 2.9 – 10 mm | 0922 = 9.0 – 22 mm N = NTSC | P = PAL

American Dynamics 25
Analog Mini-Domes

Discover ADCI Indoor Mini-Domes:


• E
 conomical, high quality camera for • S
 nap-on bubble liner for covert
indoor applications where vandalism is appearance Model Numbers A D C I E H 26 0 6 T N
not a concern ADCIEH0309CN
• A
 dvanced pivoting axis provides A D C I E H 26 0 6 T P
• 5
 40 TVL super high resolution 1/3 greater viewing flexibility
in camera provides superior image ADCIEH0309CP ADCIEH0922CP
• M
 ounting options include pendant,
quality and color reproduction
inside corner, and electrical box
• N
 ight-Saver mode for low light ADCIEH0309TN ADCIEH0922TN
• D imensions:
conditions
[height x bubble diameter]:
• Two vari-focal auto iris lens options 100 x 95 mm (3.9 x 3.7 in) ADCIEH0309TP ADCIEH0922TP

• Weight: 0.3 kg (0.7 lbs)


ADCIEH0922CN Accessories
A D C I E H 26 0 6 C N ADCDSLC
( Video ser vice lead
A D C I E H 26 0 6 C P
c a b l e)

Mounts

Pendant cap, three-


ADCPWMPEND
quarter inch thread

ADCPWMCRNR Corner mount

4S electrical box
ADCPWMELEC
adapter

Accessories

Video service lead


ADCDSLC
cable

Model Number Guide


BRAND Finish Type LENS BUBBLE FORMAT

AD = CI = White, Indoor EH = High Resolution 2606 = 2.6 - 6.0 mm C = Clear N = NTSC


American 0309 = 3.0 - 9.0 mm T = Tinted P = PAL
Dynamics 0922 = 9.0 - 22 mm

American Dynamics 26
Analog Bullet Cameras

bullet cameras

Camera ADCD200-B ADCD601-B

Interline transfer 1/3-inch Interline transfer 1/3-inch


Imager
CCD array CCD array

Video Output 1.0 Vp-p / 75 Ohm, composite 1.0 Vp-p / 75 Ohm, composite

Horizontal Resolution 380 TVL 520 TVL

Active Pixel Count NTSC 768 x 494 pixels 768 x 494 pixels

Active Pixel Count PAL 752 x 582 pixels 752 x 582 pixels

Lens 6mm, f/2.0 fixed 3-9mm, f/1.6

Min. Scene Illumination 0.0 lux (f/2.0 lens, AGC on, IR on) 0.0 lux (f/1.6 lens, AGC on, IR on)

S/N Ratio 48 dB 48 dB

Synchronization Internal Internal

IR Wavelength 850nm 850nm

IR distance Up to 25m (80ft) Up to 25m (80ft)

White Balance Auto (2,500°K to 9,500°K) Auto (2,500°K to 9,500°K)

Auto (1/60 (1/50) ~ Auto (1/60 (1/50) ~


Electronic Shutter
1/100,000 sec.) 1/100,000 sec.)

Backlight Compensation Auto (Centre weighting) Auto (Centre weighting)

Day/Night Auto Auto

DC Voltage 12VDC (±10%) 12VDC (±10%)

Power 4.5 Watts maximum 5.5 Watts maximum

Construction Metal Metal

Ingress protection IP66 IP66

Color Gray Gray

American Dynamics 27
Analog Bullet Cameras

Discover 600 Bullet Cameras:

• Super high resolution 520 TVL camera


• Day/Night switching for low light conditions Model Numbers
A D C D 6 01- B 0 0 01
• IR corrected, 3X vari-focal lens
B u l l e t c a m, 520T V L, 3 - 9 m m, I R , 12V D C, N TS C
• Built-in infrared illumination
• IP66-rated housing for outdoor use A D C D 6 01- B 0 0 02
B u l l e t c a m, 520T V L, 3 - 9 m m, I R , 12V D C, PA L
• Complete with lens and universal mount
• Provided with a wall/ceiling mount fitted Ac c e s s o r i e s
A D C1121A
Powe r s u p p l y fo r D i s c ove r 20 0/6 0 0 S e r i e s, 12V D C,
1 amp

American Dynamics 28
Analog Bullet Cameras

Discover 200 Bullet Cameras:

• High resolution 380 TVL camera


Model Numbers
• Day/Night switching for low light conditions
A D C D20 0 - B 0 0 01
• Complete with lens and universal mount B u l l e t c a m, 3 8 0T V L, 6 m m, I R , 12V D C,
• Built-in IR illumination array N TS C

• IP66-rated housing for outdoor use


A D C D20 0 - B 0 0 02
• Low power consumption
B u l l e t c a m, 3 8 0T V L, 6 m m, I R , 12V D C,
PA L

Accessories
A D C11211A
P o w e r s u p p l y 12 V D C, 1 a m p

American Dynamics 29
Analog Box Cameras

Analog Box Camera Comparison table

ADCTDN ADCSHR
ADC733 ADC660N/P
Series Series

Camera True Day/Night Standard Standard Standard

B&W or Color Color Color Color B&W

NTSC or PAL NTSC or PAL EIA or CCIR


Video Format NTSC
model dependent model dependent model dependent

Format 1/3 in interline CCD 1/3 in interline CCD 1/3 in interline CCD 1/3 in interline CCD

Resolution 540 TVL 540 TVL 330 TVL 580 TVL

Minimum Scene Illumination


0.4 lux 0.7 lux 0.5 lux N/A
Color

Minimum Scene Illumination


0.02 lux 0.5 lux N/A 0.03 lux
B&W

Light Level 0.04 lux 0.7 lux 0.5 lux 0.03 lux

24 VAC/12 VDC or 230 24 VAC/12 VDC or 230


Input Voltage 24 VAC or 12 VDC 24 VAC or 12 VDC
VAC model dependent VAC model dependent

DC-type or DC-type or DC-type or


Standard Lens DC-type auto iris
EE-type auto iris EE-type auto iris EE-type auto iris

Wide Dynamic Range No No No No

Night-Saver Mode Yes Yes No No

True Day/Night (Moving IR


Yes No No No
Cut Filter)

Automatic Backlight
Yes, plus 4-zones Yes Yes Yes
Compensation

Automatic Electronic Shutter Yes Yes Yes Yes

Digital Slow Shutter No No No No

Automatic Gain Control Yes Yes Yes Yes

Sensitive to IR Illumination Yes No No Yes

Body Color Light Gray Light Gray Light Gray Light Gray

American Dynamics 30
Analog Box Cameras
Super High Resolution, True Day/Night Camera, 1/3 in, 540 TVL, 0.02 lux:

• 5
 40 TVL True Day/Night with • A
 uto white balance (AWB)
moving mechanical IR cut adjusts for accurate colors MODEL NUMBERS
filter across a multitude of lighting
ADCTDN2412N
conditions
• A
 vailable in 24 VAC/12 VDC
NTSC, 24 VAC/12 VDC PAL • A
 utomatic gain control ADCTDN2412P
or mains 230 VAC PAL (AGC), automatic electronic
shutter (AES), and backlight
• F
 ocus adjust mode for ease ADCTDN0230P
compensation (BLC)
of installation and focus
accuracy • P
 hase adjustable line-lock or
internal synchronization
• O
 n-screen menu display for
easy programming (such as • C
 ompatible with C/CS
camera titles) lenses, video or DC auto Iris
versions, including American
• M
 onitor mode to optimize
Dynamics IR corrected
output for CRT or LCD
lenses (vari-focal length)
monitors
• A
 vailable as camera pre-
• Advanced pixel correction
packs for easy ordering and
• Factory default settings installation

• Auxiliary input and output • D imensions:


67 x 63 x 126 mm
• Selectable 4-zone BLC (2.56 x 2.48 x 4.96 in)
• Manual shutter mode • A DCTDN2412 series:
• L
 ow-light performance down Unit weight: 480 g (1.06 lbs)
to 0.02 lux • A DCTDN0230 series:
Unit weight: 700 g (1.54 lbs)

Super High Resolution, 1/3 in, 540 TVL, 0.5 lux:

• 5
 40 TVL with Night-Saver • C
 ompatible with C/CS
mode lenses, video or DC auto iris MODEL NUMBERS
versions
• A
 vailable in 24 VAC/12 VDC ADCSHR2412N
NTSC, 24 VAC/12 VDC PAL • A
 vailable in camera pre-
or mains 230 VAC PAL packs for easy ordering and ADCSHR2412P
installation
• Superior low-light
performance • A DCSHR2412 series: ADCSHR0230P
Dimensions:
• A
 uto white balance adjusts
52 x 58 x 126 mm
for accurate colors across
(2.0 x 2.28 x 4.96 in)
a multitude of lighting
Unit weight: 370 g (0.82 lbs)
conditions
• A DCSHR0230 series:
• A
 utomatic gain control,
Dimensions:
automatic electronic shutter,
67 x 63 x 126 mm
and backlight compensation
(2.56 x 2.48 x 4.96 in)
• P
 hase adjustable line-lock or Unit weight: 713 g (1.57 lbs)
internal synchronization

American Dynamics 31
Analog Box Cameras
Standard Resolution Camera, 1/3 in, 330 TVL, 0.5 lux, CCD, DSP:

• 1/3 in interline color CCD • Backlight compensation


MODEL NUMBER
• D igital Signal Processing • Phase adjustable line-lock
ADC733
• 330 TVL resolution • Internal isolation transformer
• .5 lux low light sensitivity • L
 ow 3.6 watt power
consumption
• E
 xceptional Auto White
Balance (2,300°K to • 24 VAC or 12 VDC input
10,000­­° K)
• D imensions:
• S
 upports DC-type auto iris 58 x 50 x 126 mm
lenses (2.28 x 1.97 x 4.96 in)
• C/CS lens mount • Unit weight: .360 kg
(0.79 lbs)
• A utomatic electronic shutter
• D
 ual (H & V) edge
enhancement
• Automatic gain control

Black & White Camera, 1/3 in, 580 TVL, 0.03 lux:

• 1
 /3 in interline black & • 24 VAC or 12 VDC input
white CCD MODEL NUMBERS
• D imensions:
• 580 TVL resolution 55 x 55 x 120 mm ADC660N
(2.16 x 2.16 x 4.72 in)
• .03 lux low light sensitivity
• Unit weight: .400 kg (0.9 lbs ADC660P
• Sensitive to IR illumination
• S
 upports DC-type or
EE-type auto iris lenses
• CS lens mount
• A utomatic backlight
compensation

“The American Dynamics cameras and the integration between them

and the DVR have been instrumental to the success of the surveillance

department here at Black Bear Casino.”

-Dennis Painter

Surveillance Manager

Black Bear Casino and Resort

American Dynamics 32
When custom camera

configurations and installations

are not required, our

pre-packaged cameras are an

excellent choice. Each package

comes pre-assembled, and

includes the camera, lens,

housing mount, and mounting

hardware.
Analog Pre-Packaged Cameras

Integrated Camera,
Housing & Lens Saves
You Money
Pre-packs save you time and money.
Arriving at your door pre-assembled
and ready to go, they offer high level
performance and advanced camera
features.

Standard Camera Pre-packs:

• C
 hoice of camera, lens, housing, and • Assembled, adjusted, and tested • NTSC and EIA (Electronic Industries
mount combinations Association) versions only
• Quick and easy installation
• S
 ome versions also available without • S ome versions include heater and blower
• Indoor and outdoor versions
housing

A Camera b Lens c Housing D Mount


contents of
A standard
pre-pack:

A Camera
B Lens
C Housing (either indoor or
outdoor environments)

C Mount

American Dynamics 34
Analog Pre-Packaged Cameras

Standard Pre-Packaged Cameras


Color, True Day/Night, 540 TVL
Auto Iris Lens Housing Mount Format Model Number
Discover 601 Box Camera ADCTDN2412
2.8 - 11 mm, IR Outdoor Wall NTSC CPAKOTDN2-11N

10 - 40 mm, IR Outdoor Wall NTSC CPAKOTDN10-40N


3- 8 mm, IR Outdoor Pole NTSC CPAKOPTDN3-8N
2.8 - 11 mm, IR Outdoor Pole NTSC CPAKOPTDN2-11N

10 - 40 mm, IR Outdoor Pole NTSC CPAKOPTDN10-40N

Color, 540 TVL


Discover 600 Box Camera ADCSHR2412
3.5 - 8 mm Indoor Wall NTSC CPAKISHR3-8N

2.8 – 12 mm Indoor Wall NTSC CPAKISHR3-12N

3.5 - 8 mm Indoor Pole NTSC CPAKIPSHR3-8N

2.8 - 11 mm Indoor Pole NTSC CPAKIPSHR2-12N

3.5 – 8 mm Outdoor Wall NTSC CPAKOSHR3-8N

2.8 – 12 mm Outdoor Wall NTSC CPAKOSHR2-12N

5 – 50 mm Outdoor Wall NTSC CPAKOSHR5-50N

3.5 – 8 mm Outdoor Pole NTSC CPAKOPSHR3-8N

2.8 – 12 mm Outdoor Pole NTSC CPAKOPSHR2-12N

5 – 50 mm Outdoor Pole NTSC CPAKOPSHR5-50N

3.5 - 8 mm N/A Wall NTSC CPAKIWSHR3-8N

2.8 – 12 mm N/A Wall NTSC CPAKIWSHR2-12N

5 – 50 mm N/A Wall NTSC CPAKIWSHR5-50N

Color, 330 TVL


ACD733 Box Camera
3.5 - 8 mm Indoor Wall NTSC CPAKI3303-8

2.8 - 12 mm Indoor Wall NTSC CPAKI3302-12

3.5 - 8 mm Indoor Pole NTSC CPAKIP3303-8

2.8 - 12 mm Indoor Pole NTSC CPAKIP3302-12

3.5 - 8 mm Outdoor Wall NTSC CPAKO3303-8

2.8 - 12 mm Outdoor Wall NTSC CPAKO3302-12

5 - 50 mm Outdoor Wall NTSC CPAKO3305-50

3.5 - 8 mm Outdoor Pole NTSC CPAKOP3303-8

2.8 - 12 mm Outdoor Pole NTSC CPAKOP3302-12

5 - 50 mm Outdoor Pole NTSC CPAKOP3305-50


3.5 - 8 mm N/A Wall NTSC CPAKIW3303-8
2.8 - 12 mm N/A Wall NTSC CPAKIW3302-12

5 - 50 mm N/A Wall NTSC CPAKIW3305-50

American Dynamics 35
Analog Pre-Packaged Cameras
Micro-Camera Pre-Pack:

• 4 in micro-dome • Automatic gain control


• 1
 /3 in interline color imager, • For indoor use only MODEL NUMBERS
NTSC format ADC720D
• Auto tracing white balance
• 330 TVL - color
• 1
 2 VDC input via included ADC720DW
• 1
 /3 in, 3.6 mm lens; regulated power supply
92˚ horizontal FOV
• Diameter: 100 mm (3.94 in)
• 2.0 lux - color
• H eight: 57 mm (2.2 in)
• Sharp picture
• Weight: .18 kg (.40 lbs)
• Automatic electronic shutter

Bullet Camera Pre-Pack:


• 1
 /3 in interline color imager, • Automatic gain control
NTSC format MODEL NUMBER
• For indoor/outdoor use
• 330 TVL - color ADC722WP
• Auto tracing white balance
• 1
 /3 in, 6 mm lens;
• 1
 2 VDC input via included
54˚ horizontal FOV
regulated power supply
• 2.0 lux - color
• Diameter: 65 mm (2.5 in)
• Sharp picture
• Height: 105 mm (4.1 in)
• S
 ensitive to IR illumination and
• Weight: .55 kg (1.2 lbs)
weather resistant
• Automatic electronic shutter

Motion Detector Camera Pre-Pack:

• N
 on-functional PIR detector • Automatic electronic shutter
housing MODEL NUMBER
• Automatic gain control
• 1
 /3 in interline color imager, ADC723PIR
• For indoor use only
NTSC format
• Auto tracing white balance
• 330 TVL - color
• 1
 2 VDC input via included
• 1
 /3 in, 3.7 mm lens;
regulated power supply
90˚ horizontal FOV
• D imensions:
• 2.0 lux - color
70 x 110 x 49 mm
• Sharp picture (2.7 x 4.3 x 1.9 in)
• For indoor use only • Weight: .18 kg (.40 lbs)

Warehouse managers can watch loading docks and platforms - the places

most vulnerable to theft - 24/7 with fixed cameras from American Dynamics,

even when the lights are low.

American Dynamics 36
Camera Accessories
Even the very best cameras can

only take you so far without the

right accessories. From housings,

to mounts, to the highest

resolution lenses, we have the

accessories that will give you the

best images.
IP Dome Housings
IP SpeedDome Outdoor Housings:

• Temperature-controlled interior • Meets IP66/NEMA 4


environment specifications MODEL NUMBERS
A DV ES D H O C
• A
 utomatic defog and defrost • R
 einforced high impact design
heater cycle modes with vandal resistant option A DV E S D H O S
A DV E S D H OV R S
• Temperature controlled heater/ • D imensions:
blower, prevents excessive ice Height: 321 mm (12.64 in)
buildup, removing accumulation Diameter: 244 mm (9.61 in)
within 60 minutes.
• Weight:
• O
 n-demand menu through the With dome: 3.15 kg (6.95 lbs)
web interface displays housing Without dome: 2.06 kg (4.54 lbs)
temperature and humidity

IP SpeedDome Indoor Housings:

• P recision-crafted bubbles • R
 einforced high impact design
maintain the integrity of light and with vandal resistant option MODEL NUMBERS
image
• D imensions: A DV ES D H I C
• Four alarm inputs, one output Height: 321 mm (12.64 in) A DV E S D H I S
Diameter: 244 mm (9.61 in) A DV E S D H I C V R
• S
 urge and lightning protection
of video, data, alarm input and • Weight (ADVESDHIC, A DV E S D H I S V R
output, and power ADVESDHIS):
With dome: 2.86 kg (6.3 lbs)
• P
 lug and play connectors enable
Without dome:1.7 kg (3.75 lbs)
easy servicing of environmental
board • Weight (ADVESDHICVR,
ADVESDHISVR):
• C
 eiling, pole, roof, wall, and
With dome: 3.46 kg (7.63 lbs)
corner mounts available
Without dome: 2.3 kg (5.07 lbs)

IP Top Hat Housing:

• Metal enclosure houses a dome


MODEL NUMBERS
• Includes trim ring and plastic base
A DV ES D H R D C LG C
• Mounts directly to a ceiling or Clear
indoor mounting structure
• Plenum rated A DV ES D H R D C LG S
S m o ke d

A DV E S D B A S E
D i r e c t to C e i l i n g

American Dynamics 38
Analog Dome Housings
SpeedDome Ultra Pressurized Outdoor Housings*:

• D
 urable engineered plastic top, • Includes integrated I/O base
UV protected with diagnostic power and MODEL NUMBERS
communications LEDs (Note: I/O
• Temperature-controlled interior RHODULP-01
base used does not currently
environment R H O D U L P- 0 2
support storage of presets/
• Heater and blower standard patterns/programming)
Accessories
• IP67/NEMA 4x • S
 urge and lightning protection
of video, communications, alarm W M 2 0 G ( Wa l l m o u n t)
• P
 ressurized to 5 psi with a input and output, and power AC A 2 (C o r n e r m o u n t)
Schrader valve A P M 3 ( P o l e m o u n t)
• C
 hoose from clear or smoked
• Low pressure alarm bubble RHONKIT**
( N i t r o g e n r e c h a r g e k i t)
• P
 endant, wall, or corner mount • D imensions:
available RHONREG
Pressure relief valve Height: 325 mm (12.8 in)
Diameter: 409 mm (16.1 in) ( R e g u l a r & H o s e)
• B
 ubble assembly affixed to the top
R H O N TA N K
with nine screws • Weight with dome: 3.63 kg (8.0 lbs)
(Nitrogen recharge tank)

Outdoor Housings:

• Reinforced high-impact design • Integrated Unshielded Twisted


Pair (UTP) simplifies wiring and MODEL NUMBERS
• Temperature-controlled interior
installation
environment ADSDUHOC
• D imensions:
• C
 hoose from clear or smoked
Height: 321 mm (12.64 in) ADSDUHOS
bubble
Diameter: 244 mm (9.61 in)
• IP66/NEMA 4
• Weight: ADSDUHOVC
• C lass 2 LPS certified With dome: 3.15 kg (6.95 lbs)
Without dome: 2.06 kg (4.54 lbs)
• Includes integrated I/O base ADSDUHOVS
that can store presets/patterns
Vandal Resistant Series:
programming to base Upgrade Kits
• V
 isually identical to the outdoor
• F
 our tamper-resistant screws with version to maintain consistent RHCLRVRKIT
driver bit included appearance
• S
 urge and lightning protection RHSMKVRKIT
• Includes integrated I/O base
of video, communications, alarm that can store presets/patterns
input and output, and power programming to base
• O
 n demand fog and defrost • Four alarm inputs, one output
heater cycle modes prevent and
quickly remove accumulated ice • Weight:
With dome: 3.86 kg (8.49 lbs)
• Four alarm inputs, one output Without dome: 2.80 kg (6.20 lbs)

* Note: For proper performance, this dome housing must be pressurized using 99.998% dry nitrogen.
** Contact your salesperson for recharge kit availability in your geographic region.

American Dynamics 39
Analog Dome Housings
Indoor Housings:

• Reinforced high-impact design • Weight:


With dome: 2.80 kg (6.20 lbs) MODEL NUMBERS
• C hoose from clear or smoked bubble
Without dome: 1.60 kg (3.50 lbs)
ADSDUPIHC
• Four tamper-resistant screws with
driver bit included Vandal Resistant Series:
ADSDUPIHS
• S
 urge and lightning protection of • V
 isually identical to the outdoor
video, communications, alarm input version to maintain consistent
appearance ADSDUPIVRC
and output, and power included
• Integrated Unshielded Twisted Pair • Includes integrated I/O base that can
ADSDUPIVRS
(UTP) simplifies wiring and installation store presets/patterns programming
to base
• S tainless steel bubble cage and Upgrade Kits
choose from clear or smoked bubble • Four alarm inputs, one output
RHCLRVRKIT
• D
 urable bubble meets impact • Weight:
standard ANSI 87.1 With dome: 3.50 kg (7.70 lbs) RHSMKVRKIT
Without dome: 2.30 kg (5.10 lbs)
• R
 etrofit kit available to upgrade
existing SpeedDome Ultra housings
• D imensions:
Height: 321 mm (12.64 in)
Diameter: 244 mm (9.61 in)

Indoor Top Hat Housings:

• Metal enclosure houses a dome • D imensions:


157 x 175 x 175 mm MODEL NUMBER
• Includes trim ring and plastic base
(6 x 7 x 7 in) RHIUTH
• M
 ounts directly to a ceiling or
• Weight: .77 kg (1.77 lbs)
indoor mounting structure
• Plenum rated

American Dynamics 40
Indoor Mounts and Mount Adapters

indoor mounting options


Model
Mount Description Compatibility Construction Dimensions Weight
Number
I-Beam Mount This assembly allows the dome to be
Assembly suspended from an I-beam; and includes
a clamp, pipe tee nipple, and flange.
SpeedDome Steel and 6 m [max.] x
The clamp attaches to a 1.25 inch pipe, 2.9 kg
Ultra Series and Galvanized 293 x 127 mm RHIUIBM
provided by the customer, then affixes (6.4 lbs)
IP SpeedDome steel (20 ft [max.] x 12 x 5 in)
to the pendant hardware. The housing
or dome assembly also mounts to the
structure.
Indoor Pendant This mount suspends a SpeedDome
Mount Ultra or a SpeedDome Optima housing SpeedDome
Powder-coated
from a ceiling or horizontal surface. It can Ultra, Optima 115 x 120 x 120 mm 1.8 kg
aluminum and RHopn
be installed using either 1.25 inch NPT Series, and IP (4 .5 x 5 x 5 in) (4 lbs)
ABS plastic
threaded pipe or rigid conduit, new or SpeedDome
existing, up to 10' (3 meters) in length.
Hard Ceiling This bracket enables the Top Hat
Bracket housing to be recessed in the ceiling
(requires RHIUTH Top Hat). The bracket
is mounted to the Top Hat and installed
in a hole cut in the ceiling - perfect for SpeedDome Galvanized 212 x 179 x 56 mm 70 kg
RHIUHC
sheet rock, plaster or solid ceilings. The Ultra Series steel (8 x 7 x 2 in) (1.6 lbs)
hard ceiling bracket can be installed
entirely from below the ceiling; the
installer will not have to access the area
above the ceiling to install it.
Fixed Bracket Used with the RHIUTH Top Hat, this
bracket enables the housing to be
recessed in the ceiling or in a 2-foot drop
ceiling tile. The bracket is mounted to the
Top Hat housing and installed in a hole SpeedDome Galvanized 180 x 632 x 100 mm 1.8 kg
RHIUFB
cut in the ceiling. The bracket distributes Ultra Series steel (7 x 24 x 4 in) (4 lbs)
the weight of the dome and Top Hat
housing across the T-bar framework of
the ceiling. It is also very useful for sheet
rock, plaster, or solid ceilings.
Adjustable Used with the RHIUTH Top Hat, this
Bracket bracket enables the housing to be
recessed in drop ceilings that utilize
anything other than 2-foot grids. The SpeedDome Galvanized 180 x 1219 x 100 mm 2.3 kg
RHIUAB
bracket distributes the weight of the Ultra Series steel (7 x 48 x 4 in) (5 lbs)
dome and the Top Hat housing across
the T-bar framework of the ceiling and is
adjustable from 632-1219 mm (24-48 in)
2’ x 2’ Tile This mount enables the Top Hat housing
Mount to be recessed in a 2' x 2' drop tile
Powder-coated
ceiling. The ceiling tile is removed and SpeedDome 190 x 607 x 607 mm 2.7 kg
aluminum and RHIU2X2M
the white tile mount is simply dropped in Ultra Series (7 x 24 x 24 in) (6 lbs)
ABS plastic
its place. A Top Hat housing and plastic
base are included in the kit.
2’ x 2’ Tile This mount enables the pendant mount
Pendant to be installed in a 2' x 2' drop tile ceiling.
Mount The Top Hat housing/dome assembly
also mounts to the structure. The
mounting kit includes a 2' x 2' plate and
SpeedDome Powder-coated
pendant hardware. The plate attaches 47 x 605 x 605 mm 5.4 kg
Ultra and Optima aluminum and RHIU2X2P
to a 1.25 inch pipe, provided by the (2 x 23 x 23 in) (12 lbs)
Series ABS plastic
customer, then affixes to the Top Hat
housing/dome assembly. If mounting a
SpeedDome Optima with this model,
a RHOPN ceiling pendant mount kit is
required.
2’ x 2’ Tile
Mount Plate This mount enables the dome to be
recessed in a 2' x 2' drop tile ceiling. The SpeedDome Painted 47 x 605 x 605 mm 1.7 kg
RH2X2
ceiling tile is removed and the tile mount Optima Series aluminum (2 x 23 x 23 in) (3.8 lbs)
is simply dropped in its place.

American Dynamics 41
Indoor Mounts and Mount Adapters

indoor mounting options


Model
Mount Description Compatibility Construction Dimensions Weight Number
3.5 inch x 3.5 This mounting plate attaches
inch Mounting the dome to a standard
Plate SpeedDome Ultra
3.5 inch x 3.5 inch duplex electrical 2 x 90 x 90 mm .09 kg
Series and IP Galvanized steel RHIU3X3
box that is installed in the ceiling. The (.08 x 3 x 3 in) (.2 lbs)
SpeedDome
Top Hat housing/dome assembly also
mounts to the structure.

4 inch x 4 inch
Mounting Plate This mounting plate attaches the
dome to a standard 4 in x 4 in duplex
electrical box that is installed in SpeedDome Ultra 2 x 105 x 105 mm .14 kg
Galvanized steel RHIU4X4
the ceiling. The Top Hat housing/ Series (.08 x 4 x 4 in) (.3 lbs)
dome assembly also mounts to the
structure.

Wall/Corner This mounting structure attaches


Mount-Short directly to a flat wall, inside corner, With dome installed
or outside corner. The Top Hat SpeedDome Ultra 1.8 kg
Galvanized steel 224 x 101 x 201 mm RHIUCM
housing/dome assembly mounts to Series (4 lbs)
(9 x 4 x 8 in)
the structure for a quick and easy
installation.

Wall/Corner This mount, .6 m (24 in), positions the


Mount -Long dome away from the wall, enabling
it to see over furniture, shelving, and With dome installed
SpeedDome Ultra 2.7 kg
displays. It attaches directly to a flat Painted steel 413 x 123 x 772 mm RHIULWM
Series (6 lbs)
wall, inside corner, or outside corner. (17 x 5 x 31 in)
The Top Hat housing/dome assembly
also mounts to this structure.
Wall Mount This mounting structure attaches
with Short directly to a flat wall. When used with
End Cap the RHOWCA corner bracket adapter SpeedDome Powder-coated With dome installed
Assembly or RHOWPA pole strap adapter it Ultra, aluminum, ABS 1.3 kg
366 x 218 x 282 mm RHOSW
can be affixed to corners as well as Optima Series, and plastic, and fiber- (3 lbs)
(14 x 9 x 11 in)
poles. A mounting cover conceals the IP SpeedDome filled PVC
mounting plate for a more attractive
appearance.
Wall Mount This mount attaches directly to a
with Long flat wall, positioning the dome away
End Cap from the wall, so that it can see over
Assembly furniture, shelving, and displays. SpeedDome Powder-coated With dome installed
When used with the RHOWCA corner Ultra, aluminum, ABS 1.7 kg
366 x 218 x 282 mm RHOLW
bracket adapter or RHOWPA pole Optima Series, and plastic, and fiber- (3.9 lbs)
(14 x 9 x 23 in)
strap adapter it can be affixed to IP SpeedDome filled PVC
corners as well as poles. A mounting
cover conceals the mounting plate for
a more attractive appearance.

indoor adapter options


Model
Adapter Description Compatibility Construction Dimensions Weight Number
Corner This adapter attaches the long
Bracket and short wall mounts (RHOSW & SpeedDome
Adapter RHOLW) to outside corners. Powder- Ultra, Optima Powder-coated 185 x 210 x 125 mm .79 kg RHOWCA
coated aluminum construction Series, and IP aluminum (7 x 8 x 5 in) (1.75 lbs)
ensures an extremely sturdy SpeedDome
installation.
Pole Strap This adapter attaches the long 138 x 79 x 27 mm
Adapter and short wall mounts (RHOSW SpeedDome (5 x 3 x 1 in)
& RHOLW) to outside corners. Powder-coated
Ultra, Optima Straps support .5 kg
This kit contains stainless steel aluminum and RHOWPA
Series, and IP 53 to 951 mm (1.1 lbs)
straps that can be daisy-chained to stainless steel
SpeedDome (2 to 30 in)
accommodate any size pole and all pole diameter
the necessary mounting hardware.
SpeedDome This adapter retrofits a SpeedDome
Housing Ultra into an existing SpeedDome
Adapter housing via snap-hinge mounts, SpeedDome Ultra Anodized 106 x 205 x 250 mm 1.4 kg
making installation fast and easy. RHSDA
Series aluminum (4 x 8 x 10 in) (3 lbs)
This kit includes a skirt assembly
to compensate for the smaller
dimensions of the SpeedDome Ultra.
End Cap This mounting assembly retrofits any
Assembly existing outdoor SpeedDome wall,
pole, corner, or over-the-roof mount SpeedDome
to accommodate newer outdoor Ultra, Optima 64 x 103 x 194 mm .32 kg
housings. A modular design lets you Fiber-filled PVC ROENDC
Series, and IP (3 x 4 x 8 in) (.7 lbs)
mount the housing to the end cap on SpeedDome
the ground, before installing it on the
mounting pole, making the process
safe and easy.

American Dynamics 42
Outdoor Mounts and Mount Adapters
outdoor mounting options
Model
Mount Description Compatibility Construction Dimensions Weight
Number
Short Wall This mounting structure attaches
Mount with directly to a flat wall. When used with
End Cap the RHOWCA corner bracket adapter Powder-coated
SpeedDome Ultra With dome installed
Assembly or RHOWPA pole strap adapter it aluminum, ABS 1.3 kg
Series and IP 366 x 218 x 282 mm RHOSW
can be affixed to corners as well as plastic, and fiber- (3 lbs)
SpeedDome (14 x 9 x 11 in)
poles. A mounting cover conceals the filled PVC
mounting plate for a more attractive
appearance.
Long Wall This mount attaches directly to a
Mount with flat wall, positioning the dome away
End Cap from the wall, so that it can see over
Assembly furniture, shelving, and displays. Powder-coated
SpeedDome Ultra With dome installed
When used with the RHOWCA corner aluminum, ABS 1.7 kg
Series and IP 366 x 218 x 587 mm RHOLW
bracket adapter or RHOWPA pole plastic, and fiber- (3.9 lbs)
SpeedDome (14 x 9 x 23 in)
strap adapter it can be affixed to filled PVC
corners as well as poles. A mounting
cover conceals the mounting plate for
a more attractive appearance.
Outdoor This mount suspends an outdoor
Pendant dome housing from an outdoor
Mount ceiling or horizontal surface. It can be SpeedDome Ultra Powder-coated
115 x 120 x 120 mm 1.8 kg
installed using either new or existing Series and IP aluminum, ABS RHOPN
(4.5 x 5 x 5 in) (4 lbs)
1.25 inch NPT threaded pipe or rigid SpeedDome plastic
conduit up to 3 meters (10 feet) in
length.

Over-the -Roof
Mount This mount affixes directly to any wall,
with rooftop wall, or parapet, positioning
End Cap the dome away from the wall, so that Powder-coated
SpeedDome Ultra
Assembly it can see over awnings, soffits, and aluminum, ABS 1098 x 243 x 473 mm 5.7 kg
Series and IP RHOTR
landscaping. Opposing wing brackets plastic, and fiber- (43 x 10 x 19 in) (12.7 lbs)
SpeedDome
secure installation to the roof filled PVC
surface, while allowing the pole to be
repositioned for easy service access.

outdoor adapter options


Model
Adapter Description Compatibility Construction Dimensions Weight
Number
Corner This adapter attaches the long
Bracket and short wall mounts (RHOSW
SpeedDome Ultra
Adapter & RHOLW) to affix to outside Powder-coated 185 x 210 x 125 mm 79 kg
Series and IP RHOWCA
corners. Powder-coated aluminum aluminum (7 x 8 x 5 in) (1.75 lbs)
SpeedDome
construction ensures an extremely
sturdy installation.
Pole Strap This adapter attaches the long
Adapter and short wall mounts (RHOSW 138 x 79 x 27 mm
& RHOLW) to outside corners. SpeedDome Ultra Powder-coated (5 x 3 x 1 in)
.5 kg
This kit contains stainless steel Series and IP aluminum and Straps support RHOWPA
(1.1 lbs)
straps that can be daisy-chained to SpeedDome stainless steel 53 to 951 mm (2 to 30
accommodate any size pole and all in) pole diameter
the necessary mounting hardware.
Floor Adapter for This adapter installs the RHOTR
RHOTR over-the-roof mount on horizontal
SpeedDome Ultra
and vertical roof/parapet surfaces. Powder-coated 369 x 240 x 240 mm 2.59 kg
Series and IP ROTRF
Multiple fastening positions provide aluminum (15 x 10 x 10 in) (5.75 lbs)
SpeedDome
versatility for mounting on any
combination of surfaces and angles.

End Cap This mounting assembly retrofits any


Assembly existing outdoor SpeedDome wall,
pole, corner, or over-the-roof mount
to accommodate newer outdoor SpeedDome Ultra
64 x 103 x 194 mm .32 kg
housings. A modular design lets you Series and IP Fiber-filled PVC ROENDC
(3 x 4 x 8 in) (.7 lbs)
mount the housing to the end cap on SpeedDome
the ground, before installing it on the
mounting pole, making the process
safe and easy.

American Dynamics 43
American Dynamics SpeedDomes

are pivotal to the integrated

security system that help Aetna Inc.

streamline operations at nearly 100

field offices and consequently cut

costs.
Dome Drones
Analog SpeedDome Ultra Fixed Camera Drone 3 (with Camera/Lens):

• Identical in appearance to the full-featured


SpeedDome Ultra MODEL NUMBERS
• Friction bearings hold camera in set position ADSDUDH2506N ADSDUDH3895IOP

• Powerful visual deterrent


ADSDUDH2506P ADSDUDH3895PTN
• 540 TVL color camera inside
• N ight-Saver mode for low light conditions ADSDUDH2506ION ADSDUDH3895PTP

• Interchangeable with SpeedDome Ultra and fits


I/O board mounting base ADSDUDH2506IOP ADSDUDH0922N

• T
 hree auto iris lens options: 2.5 to 6 mm,
ADSDUDH2506PTN ADSDUDH0922P
3.8 to 9.5 mm and 9 to 22 mm
• .65 lux minimum illumination ADSDUDH2506PTP ADSDUDH0922ION
• D imensions:
Total height: 205 mm (8 in) ADSDUDH3895N ADSDUDH0922IOP
Eyeball diameter: 120 mm (4.7 in)
• Weight with chassis and camera: 1.36 kg (3 lbs) ADSDUDH3895P ADSDUDPTB

ADSDUDH3895ION ADSDUIOB

Analog SpeedDome Ultra Dummy Drone (No Camera/Lens Capability):

• Identical in appearance to the full-featured


SpeedDome Ultra MODEL NUMBER
• Interchangeable with SpeedDome Ultra (fits RDULTRA
standard and I/O board mounting bases)
• D imensions:
Height: 205 mm (8 in)
Eyeball diameter: 120 mm (4.7 in)
• Weight: .66 kg (1.45 lbs)

Drones look identical in appearance to programmable dome

cameras, creating the same deterrence for less money. Install them

wherever the appearance of surveillance matters more than the

ability to follow a moving target.

American Dynamics 45
Dome Drones
Analog SpeedDome Optima Fixed Camera Drone Housing Ceiling Mounts:

• S
 ingle fixed camera • Indoor only
applications MODEL NUMBERS
• H
 ard ceiling and drop
• Smoked bubble ceiling mount versions RHDR2X2

• C amera/lens ordered • Diameter: 254 mm (10 in)


separately R H D R CA N

• S
 imple installation and
camera positioning

Analog SpeedDome Optima Fixed Camera Drone Housing Pendant Mount:

• S
 ingle fixed camera • S
 imple installation and
applications camera positioning MODEL NUMBER
• Smoked bubble • Indoor only R H D R PEN10

• C amera/lens ordered • Diameter: 254 mm (10 in)


separately

Fixed Camera Drone Housing (Pendant and Ceiling Mount):

• S mall attractive appearance • M ultiple mounting options


• Powerful visual deterrent • Eyeball diameter: MODEL NUMBERS
RD500
190 mm (7.5 in) ( Ph oto n ot ava i l a b l e)
• S peedDome look-alike
• P
 lease refer to data sheets
• C amera/lens ordered R D 5 0 0A
for dimensions
separately
• R D500:
• S
 moked bubble with black
Weight: 2 kg (4.4 lbs)
inner liner
• R D500A:
• Snap-hinge chassis
Weight: 1.2 kg (2.6 lbs)
• F its any type ceiling

American Dynamics 46
MegaPixel-Rated Lenses

MegaPixel-Rated Lenses:

• Theia’s patented Linear Optical Technology®


provides an ultra wide field of view without barrel MODEL NUMBERS
distortion ADSY110M ADSL183A
• Wide angle lenses concentrate light to the center Theia SY110 1.7mm lens manual iris CS Theia SL183 auto-iris 1.8-3mm vari-focal
of the image, and dissipate it at the edges mount IR corrected 3MP lens 5MP

• Theia lenses create smooth, consistent


images that can be relied upon for mission-critical ADSY110A ADSL183M
applications, like analytics. Theia SY110 1.7mm lens auto iris CS mount Theia SL183 manual iris 1.8-3mm vari-focal
IR corrected 3MP lens 5MP

ADSY125M ADSL940A
Theia SY125 1.3mm lens manual iris CS Theia SL940 auto-iris 9-40mm day/night
mount 5MP corrected lens 5MP

ADSY125A ADSL940M
Theia SY125 1.3mm lens auto iris CS mount Theia SL940 manual-iris 9-40mm day/night
5MP corrected lens 5MP

American Dynamics 47
Standard Resolution Lenses
Auto Iris Lenses:

• 1/3 in and 1/2 in formats


• CS mounts
• Color corrected optics
• Fixed and variable focal lengths
• Neutral Density (ND) filters
• S
 lip clutch on lens mount for easy 3-8 mm lens
positioning
• IP + Analog compatible Wide angle lens appropriate for large
expanses.

Manual Iris Lenses:

• 1/3 in and 1/2 in formats


• CS mounts
• Color corrected optics
2-12 mm lens
• High quality, compact design
• Fixed and variable focal lengths Normal lens appropriate for viewing wide to intermediate
scenes with more detail.
• S
 lip clutch on lens mount for easy
positioning
• IP + Analog compatible

IR Corrected, Auto Iris Lenses:

• 1/3 in formats
• CS mounts 5-50 mm lens
• A
 dvanced optical design eliminates shifts of
focus in near infrared range Normal to telephoto lens appropriate for
viewing large areas and zooming in for
• M
 ulti-layer coating prevents transmittance greater detail.
fall off in the infrared range
• S
 pecifically designed for True Day/Night
The importance of selecting the right lens for
cameras and any high optical performance
color camera
any application is often overlooked. The rule
• A
 spherical lens design provides
outstanding image quality of thumb: shorter focal length or wide lenses

• B
 uilt-in slip mount and ring locking (2 mm) provide wide angle views. Longer focal
mechanisms
• IP + Analog compatible length or telephoto lenses (16 mm or greater)

narrow the view and bring objects closer.

Lens/Camera, C/CS Adapter Ring:

• Spare lens/camera C/CS adapter ring


MODEL NUMBER
RVCADAP

American Dynamics 48
Standard Resolution Camera Lenses

Auto Iris Comparison Table (IP + Analog compatible)


Aperture View Angle - View Angle - Minimum Object
Size (D x L) Weight Model Number
(F-stop) Horizontal Vertical Distance
1/3 in Auto Iris Vari- 42.6 x 43.5
Focal 3.5 to 8 mm f1.4 to 360 77.5˚ - 35.4˚ 57.6˚ - 26.6˚ 0.40 m (1.31 ft) mm (1.67 x 48 g (1.71 oz) LD35814CS
1.71 in)
1/3 in Auto Iris Vari- 37.5 x 56 mm
f1.3 to 360 98.2˚ - 23.8˚ 73.6˚ - 17.8˚ 0.30 m (0.98 ft) 69 g (2.40 oz) ADCLVF3212DC
Focal 2.8 to 12 mm (1.48 x 2.20 in)
1/3 in Auto Iris Vari- 57.5 x 57.7 mm 140 g (4.94
f1.3 to 360 51.8˚ - 5.60˚ 39.2˚ - 4.30˚ 0.80 m (2.62 ft) LD55013CS
Focal 5 to 50 mm (2.26 x 2.27 in) oz)
1/3 in Auto Iris Fixed- 32 x 34.7 mm
f1.6 to 360 98.7˚ 74.9˚ 0.10 m (0.32 ft) 47 g (1.66 oz) LD2616CS
Focal 2.6 mm (1.26 x 1.37 in)
1/3 in Auto Iris Fixed- 32 x 33 mm
f1.2 to 360 63.9˚ 49.1˚ 0.20 m (0.65 ft) 38 g (1.34 oz) LD0412CS
Focal 4 mm (1.26 x 1.30 in)
1/3 in Auto Iris Fixed- 32 x 33 mm
f1.2 to 360 34.7˚ 25.9˚ 0.20 m (0.65 ft) 39 g (1.37 oz) LD0812CS
Focal 8 mm (1.26 x 1.30 in)
1/2 in Auto Iris Vari- 42.6 x 43.5
Focal 4.5 - 10 mm f1.6 to 360 81.3˚ - 36.2˚ 60.4˚ - 28.7˚ 0.30 m (0.98 ft) mm (1.67 x 50 g (1.75 oz) LD41016CS
1.71 in)
1/2 in Auto Iris Fixed- 32 x 33 mm
f1.6 to 360 99.2˚ 74.1˚ 0.20 m (0.65 ft) 40 g (1.40 oz) LD3616CS
Focal 3.6 mm (1.26 x 1.30 in)
1/2 in Auto Iris Fixed- 32 x 33 mm
f1.4 to 360 58.3˚ 44.3˚ 0.20 m (0.65 ft) 37 g (1.30 oz) LD0614CS
Focal 6.0 mm (1.26 x 1.30 in)

IR Corrected, AUTO IRIS Comparison Table (IP + Analog compatible)


Aperture View Angle - View Angle - Minimum Object
Size (D x L) Weight Model Number
(F-stop) Horizontal Vertical Distance
1/3 in Vari-Focal Iris 33 x 47 mm
f1.0 to 360 90.8˚ - 36.2˚ 66.6˚ - 27.0˚ 0.20 m (0.65 ft) 47 g (1.66 oz) LIRC0308CS
3.0 - 8 mm (1.30 x 1.85 in)
1/3 in Vari-Focal Iris 40 x 62.8 mm
f1.4 to 360 97.4˚ - 26.2˚ 72.4˚ - 19.7˚ 0.30 m (0.98 ft) 87 g (3.07 oz) LIRC2811CS
2.8 - 11 mm (1.57 x 2.47 in)
1/3 in Vari-Focal Iris 43 x 71 mm
f1.4 to 360 27.6˚ - 7.0˚ 20.4˚ - 5.3˚ 0.40 m (1.31 ft) 87 g (3.07 oz) LIRC1040CS
10 - 40 mm (1.69 x 2.80 in)

Manual Iris Comparison Table (IP + Analog compatible)


Aperture View Angle - View Angle - Minimum Object
Size (D x L) Weight Model Number
(F-stop) Horizontal Vertical Distance
1/3 in Manual Iris Vari- 34 x 43.5 mm
f1.4 to C 77.5˚ - 35.4˚ 57.6˚ - 26.6˚ 0.40 m (1.31 ft) 38 g (1.34 oz) L35814CS
Focal 3.5 to 8 mm (1.34 x 1.71 in)
1/3 in Manual Iris Vari- 40.7 x 56 mm
f1.3 to C 9.28˚ - 23.8˚ 73.6˚ - 17.8˚ 0.30 m (0.98 ft) 64 g (2.27 oz) ADCLVF3212MI
Focal 2.8 to 12 mm (1.60 x 2.21 in)
1/3 in Manual Iris Vari- 47 x 57.7 mm 150 g (5.30
f1.3 to C 51.5˚ - 5.60˚ 39.2˚ - 4.3˚ 0.80 m (2.62 ft) L55013CS
Focal 5 to 50 mm (1.85 x 2.27 in) oz)
1/2 in Manual Iris Vari- 45 x 54.6 mm
f1.6 to C 81.3˚ - 38.2˚ 60.4˚ - 28.7˚ 0.30 m (0.98 ft) 40 g (1.41 oz) L41016CS
Focal 5 to 50 mm (1.77 x 2.15 in)
1/2 in Manual Iris
34.5 x 33 mm
Fixed-Focal 5 to 50 1.4 to 16C 30.4˚ 22.7˚ 0.30 m (0.98 ft) 33 g (1.16 oz) L1214CS
(1.36 x 1.30 in)
mm

American Dynamics 49
American Dynamics fixed cameras

let you know whether it is perception

or reality when anyone gives

even the vaguest appearance of

wrongdoing.
Housings, Housing Mounts, and Adapters
Indoor Wedge Camera Housing:

• L ow-profile wedge shape Above ceiling:


76.2 x 85.7 x 231.8 mm MODEL NUMBERS
• Easy installation (3.0 x 3.38 x 9.13 in)
Housings
• S
 uitable for use in open plenum B elow ceiling:
AD1301
ceilings 88.9 x 120.7 x 295.3 mm
(3.5 x 4.75 x 11.63 in)
• All metal construction Weight: 1.82 kg (4 lbs) AD1303

• A
 D1301 has 231 mm (9.1 in) • A
 D1303 series dimensions:
maximum camera/lens length Total: Mounts
208 x 158.8 x 377.8 mm AD1301DCM
• A
 D1303 has 304 mm (12 in)
maximum camera/lens length (8.19 x 6.25 x 14.88 in)
Above ceiling: AD1303DCM
• Tamper-resistant 102 x 127 x 317.5 mm
(4.0 x 5.0 x 12.5 in) AD1303RK
• D
 istortion free Lexan ® viewing Below ceiling:
window 106 x 158.8 x 377.8 mm
• A
 D1301 series dimensions: (4.25 x 6.25 x 14.88 in)
Total: 165.1 x 120.7 x 295.3 mm
(6.6 x 4.75 x 11.63 in) • Weight: 3.75 kg (8.25 lbs)

Indoor Corner Camera Housing:


• Corner-mounted • Perfect for use in elevators
• H eavy-gauge steel • Easy to install MODEL NUMBER
construction AD1305
• D imensions:
• 2
 03 mm (8 in) maximum 238.1 x 242.9 x 241.3 mm
camera/lens length (9.37 x 9.6 x 9.5 in)
• Tamper-resistant • Weight: 4.13 kg (9.1 lbs)
• D
 istortion-free Lexan viewing
window

Indoor Tamper-Resistant Housing/Mount Kit:

• Includes housing, wall • 3/16 in thick Lexan window


mount, and mounting MODEL NUMBER
• A
 djustable head with
hardware RH410
360° pan and 90° tilt
• T
 amper-resistant screws in
• Sturdy steel construction
housing and mount
• 2
 54 mm (10 in) maximum
camera/lens length

Indoor/Outdoor 10 in (241 mm) Universal Camera Housing:

• Indoor/outdoor housings • Tamper-resistant


• A ccommodates • D imensions: MODEL NUMBERS
most camera/lens 163 x 146 x 348 mm Housings Housing & Mount
combinations (6.50 x 5.75 x 13.75 in) ADch10 ADch10MT8

• C
 over opens 180° for • U nit weight:
easy camera access W ithout sunshield: ADch10B ADch10HBMT8
1.4 kg (3 lbs)
• Tough high-impact
W ith sunshield: ADch10H Accessory
polymer construction
1.9 kg (4.4 lbs)
ADCH10SS
• IP4/NEMA-3R protection
ADch10HB
• 2
 4 VAC blower and
heater options available

American Dynamics 51
Housing Mounts
Indoor/Outdoor 12 in (304 mm) Universal Camera Housing:
• Indoor/outdoor housings • 2
 4 VAC blower and
heater options available MODEL NUMBERS
• A ccommodates
most camera/lens • Tamper-resistant Housings
combinations AD1314
• D imensions:
• C
 over opens 180° for 41 x 158 x 449 mm
easy camera access (5.56 x 6.2 x 17.68 in) AD1314-HB24

• Tough high-impact • U nit Weight:


polymer construction W ithout sunshield: Accessories
1.8 kg (4 lbs) AD1314-B24
• IP4/NEMA-3R protection
W ith sunshield:
3.2 kg (7 lbs) AD1314-H24

AD1314-SS

Housing Mounts:

• I ndoor/outdoor mounts • B
 eige or black enamel
finish to complement MODEL NUMBERS
B C • L
 oad capacity: up to 8
housing
A kg (18.6 lbs) ADCHMTCRNR
• C oncealed cabling
• Adjustable swivel head
ADCHMTPED

E D ADCHMTPOLE does not ADCHMTCEIL


include straps to attach to
pole.
ADCHMTPOLE

ADCHMTWALL

Indoor/Outdoor 12 in (304.8 mm) Housing/Mount Kit:

• I ncludes universal • C
 over opens 180° for
camera housing, wall easy camera access MODEL NUMBER
mount, 120 VAC to
• Tough high-impact RTHOUTDR
24 VAC transformer,
polymer construction
mounting hardware, and
cable • IP4/NEMA-3R protection
• A ccommodates • 2
 4 VAC blower and
most camera/lens heater included
combinations
• Tamper-resistant

American Dynamics 52
Mounts and Mount Adapters

Illustra Ip mini-dome mounts


Dimensions
Mount Environment Color Weight Model Number
(H x W x D)
Flush Black, silver, 155 (H) x 75 (W) x 26 (D) mm 1.2 lbs
Indoor ADCiM4FLUSH (W, B, S)
white (6.09 x 2.93 x 1.02in) (.0554 kg)
Pendant Cap Black, silver, 65 (H) x 55 (W) x 150 (D) mm
Indoor 14.5 oz ADCiM4PENDCAP (W, B, S)
white (2.55 x 2.16 x 5.9 in)
Hard Surface Black, silver, 39 (H) x 187 (L) x 148 (W) mm
Indoor 9.0 oz ADCIM4HARD (W, B.S)
white (1.54 (H) x 7.36 (L) x 5.82 (W) in)
Wall Mount Black, silver, 134 (H) x 13 (W) x 225 (D) mm
Indoor 3.2 lbs ADCiM4WALL (W, B, S)
white (5.28 x 0.51 x 8.86 in)
Electrical Box Adapter Black, silver, 19 (H) x 148 (R) mm
Indoor 2.5 oz ADCiM4ELEC (W, B.S)
white (0.76 (H) x 5.8 (R) in)

ADCIP Mini-Dome Mounts


Dimensions
Mount Environment Color Weight Model Number
(H x W x D)
Wall 187.96 (H) x 127 (D) x 124.46 (W) mm 1 lb
Indoor/Outdoor White ADCEMWALL
(7.4 (H) x 5.0 (D) x 4.9 (W) in) (.0454 kg)
Flush 63.5 (H) x 165.1 (R) mm 1 lb
Indoor/Outdoor White ADCEMFLUSH
(2.5 (H) x 6.5 (R) in) (.0454 kg)
Pendant Cap 63.5 (H) x 147.32 (W) mm 1 lb
Indoor/Outdoor White ADCEMPENDCAP
(2.5 (H) x 5.8 (W) in) (.0454 kg)
Surface 25.4 (H) x 165.1 (R) mm 1 lb
Indoor/Outdoor White ADCEMHS
(1.0 (H) x 6.5 (R) in) (.0454 kg)
Corner 177.8 (H) x 254 (W) mm 1 lb
Indoor/Outdoor White ADCEMCRNR
(7 (H) x 10 (W) in) (.0454 kg)

American Dynamics 53
Camera Accessories

Discover Mini-Dome Mounts + Mounts Adapters


Dimensions
Mount Compatibility Environment Color Model Number
(H x W x D)

ADCD(B)W ADCDMWALL
153.8 x 112.5 x 222.9 mm
ADCD(B)EH Indoor/Outdoor White or Black
(6.055 x 4.430 x 8.775 in) ADCBMWALL
ADCD(B)T

Wall Mount with


Pendant Cap

ADCD(B)W ADCDMPEND
68.6 x 140.5 x 140.5 mm
ADCD(B)EH Indoor/Outdoor White or Black
(2.7 x 5.53 x 5.53 in) ADCBMPEND
Pendant Cap, ADCD(B)T
Three-Quarter
Inch Thread

ADCD(B)W
169.5 mm
ADCD(B)EH Indoor/Outdoor White or Black ADCDMELEC
(6.67 in)
ADCD(B)T
4S Electrical Box
Adapter

ADCD(B)W ADCDMPOLE
ADCD(B)EH Indoor/Outdoor White or Black N/A
ADCD(B)T ADCBMPOLE

Pole Mount
Adapter

ADCD(B)W ADCDMCRNR
221.60 x 33.79 mm
ADCD(B)EH Indoor/Outdoor White or Black
(8.725 x 1.330 in) ADCBMCRNR
ADCD(B)T

Inside Corner

ADCD(B)W ADCDMCRNRO
192.53 x 131.57 x 93.47 mm
ADCD(B)EH Indoor/Outdoor White or Black
(7.58 x 5.18 x 3.68 in) ADCBMCRNRO
ADCD(B)T

Outside Corner

76.70 x 126.0 x 50.8 mm


ADCD201-D0001 Indoor White ADCPWMPWM
(3.02 x 4.96 x 2.00 in)

Pendant Wall
Mount Cap

(201.9 x 96.0 x 14.80 mm


ADCD201-D0001 Indoor White ADCPWMRMK
(7.95 x 3.78 x 0.58 in)

Recessed Mount

American Dynamics 54
Mounts and Mount Adapters

Indoor Box Camera Mounts (IP + Analog compatible)

Mount Color Dimensions Weight Model Number

Black N/A up to 2.2 kg (5 lbs) C2122-14

Flex Arm Clip

Black N/A up to 2.2 kg (5 lbs) C2116-14

Flex Arm Magnetic Base,

19 cm (7.5 in)
Beige up to 2.2 kg (5 lbs) ADMC1365
adjustable swivel head

J-type Ceiling

Silver 7.6 cm (3 in) up to 2.2 kg (5 lbs) ADCM100T


T-bar -Short

7.6 to 15.3 cm (3 to 6 in)


Beige up to 2.2 kg (5 lbs) RHTBAR3-6
adjustable
T-bar -Long

Beige 23 cm (9 in) up to 2.2 kg (5 lbs) RHTBAR-9


T-bar -Telescopic

180 degree tilt,


Beige up to 4.53 kg (10 lbs) ADCMU
universal with two mount heads

Tile Mount with 2 Mount


Heads

American Dynamics 55
Mounts and Mount Adapters

Indoor Box Camera Mounts (IP + Analog compatible)

Mount Color Dimensions Weight Model Number

20.3 cm (9 in)
Black up to 2.2 kg (5 lbs) ADMC1361
adjustable swivel head

Wall-Long

Non-metallic gray or 18.7 cm (7.375 in) ADMC1366


up to 2.2 kg (5 lbs)
Beige adjustable swivel head RH311

Wall-Short

19to 30.5 cm (7.5 to 12 in)


Beige up to 2.2 kg (5 lbs) ADMC1363
adjustable

Wall-Telescopic

19 cm (7.5 in)
Beige up to 2.2 kg (5 lbs) ADMC1362
adjustable swivel head

Wall/Ceiling

Includes a 191 mm (7.5 in)


adjustable wall mount, mounting
Beige up to 2.2 kg (5 lbs) RTHINDR
hardware, and 20 VAC to 24 VAC
power supply

Box Camera
Mount Kit

American Dynamics 56
Our video solutions are built to

withstand the harshest environments.

Vandal resistant housings,

weatherproof bubbles, and rugged

cameras all ensure you have a

durable solution on which you can

depend.
Controllers and Accessories

Maximize your
Surveillance
You can operate as many as 64
domes from one central point with the
ADTT16E Touch Tracker Controller,
maximizing your surveillance while
keeping capital costs to the bare
minimum.

ADTT16E Touch Tracker Controller:


• C ontrols up to 64 cameras/domes • O ne programmable sequence
• C
 ompatible with SensorNet domes • U p to four simultaneous dome input alarms MODEL NUMBERS
(SpeedDome Ultra, SpeedDome Optima, and ADTT16E
• E
 asily interfaces with Intellex digital video
Optima LT series)
management systems for dome control
• V
 ariable-speed control stick for pan/tilt Kit
• Supports ten languages RVEIMKIT
functions
• Backlit LCD
• U p to 96 programmable presets per dome
• D imensions:
• T hree programmable patterns per dome
130 x 194 x 260 mm
• T hree levels of password protection (5.12 x 7.63 x 10.24 in)
• DirectSet control • Weight: 1 kg (2.2 lbs)

USB Control Module:


• C
 ontrol a SpeedDome Optima or Ultra series • C
 an be used in existing SensorNet installations
programmable dome using a PC with all - anywhere a SensorNet connection is available MODEL NUMBER
the features of an ADTT16E Touch Tracker
• D imensions: ADACSNET
Controller - including DirectSet
Length: 102 mm (4 in)
• M
 onitor SensorNet communication links for Width: 70 mm (2.8 in)
testing and troubleshooting purposes Thickness: 25 mm (1 in)
• U
 pgrade domes to the latest firmware via • Weight: .5 kg (1.1 lbs)
SensorNet without needing physical access to
the dome

American Dynamics 58
Controllers and Accessories
SensorNet J-Boxes:

• P rovides data • Surge protection


communication via MODEL NUMBERS
• H
 ardware or line cord power
SensorNet and supplies 24
connection RJ6SN
VAC to the dome
• R
 J6SN series dimensions:
• S upports SpeedDome RJ1SNUD
320 x 210 x 160 mm
series domes
(12.6 x 8.27 x 6.30 in)
• C
 hoose between 1-position Weight: 8.5 kg (18.7 lbs) RJ1SNUD-1
RJ6SN and 6-position J-Boxes
• R J1SNUD series
• M
 eets Class 2 LPS power dimensions:
requirements 200 x 200 x 132 mm
(7.87 x 7.87 x 5.19 in)
• 1
 20 VAC or 230 VAC input
Weight: 3.7 kg (8.25 lbs)
versions available
• D
 iagnostic LEDs mounted
on PC board
RJ1SNUD
• F
 ront cover can be secured
with a captive screw

RS-422 J-Boxes:

• P rovides data • Q uick-release lockable


communication via RS-422 cover latch MODEL NUMBERS
and supplies 24 VAC to the RJ860AP
• Surge protection
dome
• C
 inch jones connector
• S upports SpeedDome RJ856UD
(2107-0006-01) available for
series domes
use with the RJ860AP
• C
 hoose between 1-position Accessory
• R J860AP series
and 10-position J-Boxes 2107-0006-01
dimensions:
• M
 eets Class 2 LPS power 514 x 310 x 150 mm (C i n c h j o n e s c o n n e c to r
requirements (20.25 x 12.25 x 6 in) fo r R J 8 6 0A P)
Weight: 16.3 kg (36 lbs)
RJ860AP • C an be configured for either
120 VAC or 230 VAC input • R J856UD series
dimensions:
• H ardware or line cord
200 x 200 x 132 mm
power latch
(7.87 x 7.87 x 5.19 in)
• Diagnostic LEDs Weight: 3.7 kg (8.25 lbs)

Note: Use the RPPJ-M to adapt older series SpeedDomes to current J-Boxes.
RJ856UD

Adapter:
• K
 it for adapting older series SpeedDomes to
current J-Box MODEL NUMBER
RPPJ-M

American Dynamics 59
Accessories
SpeedDome Ultra Bases:
• A
 ttaches to hard ceilings, tile ceilings, or • Includes I/O base for use with SpeedDome
mounting structures Ultra 8 and SpeedDome Ultra Fixed Camera MODEL NUMBERS
Drone 3 ADSDUIOB
• C ompact and attractive design
Black Base
• Available in a white or black base

ADSDUIOBW
White Base

Surge Protectors:
• P rotect your systems against failures • L ightning surge protector for power (RXPP)
• L ightning surge protector for video (RXVP) • L ightning surge protector for data (RXDP)

LED Kit:
• P
 rovides additional visual deterrent (for
SpeedDome Ultra series, indoor only) MODEL NUMBERS
RHIULED

Dome Installation & Removal Tool:


• M
 akes it easy to position the SpeedDome • For use with I/O board base configurations
Ultra series in a ceiling mount without a MODEL NUMBERS
ladder
RHIRT

Bubbles:
• F
 or use with SpeedDome Ultra • D iameter: 176 mm (6.93 in)
series domes (Indoor only) MODEL NUMBERS
• Depth: 86.5 mm (3.4 in)
• R
 equires RHIUTH Top Hat indoor ADSDUCLR
• Weight: 13 kg (4.4 oz) with trim
housing Clear Bubble
ring
• P rovides attractive finish ADSDUSMK
Smoked Bubble
• A
 vailable in clear, silver, smoked
RUGIDGold Bubble
and gold finishes
RUSW
Silver Bubble

Outdoor Dome Power Supply


Install SpeedDome Ultra domes outside of your building and be able to service them on the spot without going inside. Learn more about our Outdoor
Dome power supply (ADSPOT) on p. 117

American Dynamics 60
IP Video Encoders
IP Encoders allow you to

transform analog video into high

quality IP video streams.

American Dynamics 61
Encoders

IP Encoders Comparison table

8-Channel 4-Channel

Number of channels Eight composite video inputs Four composite video inputs

Via Intellex IP:


704 x 480, 704 x 240, 352 x 240
Resolution D1, 2CIF, CIF
Via Browser:
See list above; also
640 x 480, 640 x 240, 320 x 240

H.264 (ADEIP8H)
Compression (Model) Active Content Compression (ACC)
MPEG-4, MJPEG (ADEIP8M)

Frame Rate 1-30 ips on each channel + dual encode 4CIF NTSC up to 30 ips per channel

Connector type Eight BNC Four BNC

Network Interface Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet 10/100 Base-T

Supported Recording Devices VideoEdge NVR, Intellex IP, HDVR HTTP, TCP, DHCP, (client)

Supported Protocols RTP, RTSP, HTTP, UDP, TCP/IP HTTP, TCP, DHCP (client)

American Dynamics RS422


BBV Star Card American Dynamics
Cyberscan1 Pelco P
Supported Camera Protocols Pelco D Pelco D,
Pelco P Bosch,
Phillips TC7560 BBV Star Card
RS422 Dome

141 x 439.5 x 43.6 mm 221 x 113 x 43 mm


Dimensions
(5.55 x 17.3 x 1.71 in) (8.7 x 4.4 x 1.7 in)

Weight 2.4 kg (5.3 lbs) 0.6 kg (1.3 lb)

Operating Temperature 0°C - 50°C (32°F -122°F) 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F)

USA: FCC part 15 Class A


Canada: ICES-003/NMB-003 Class A
Europe: EN55022 Class A, EN50130-4
Certifications UL, FCC, CE Australia/New Zealand: AS/NZS CISPR22
UL: UL60950-1, CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1
TUVGS: EN60950-1
CB: IEC60950-1

62

American Dynamics 62
IP Encoders

Preserve your investment in


Sensornet with our add-on
USB module.

8-Channel:

• Video streaming over IP network • 30 ips on every channel at D1


8-Channel:
MODEL NUMBERS
• S
 upports two-way audio to enable • Dual streaming
audio streaming applications A D EI P8 M
• Built-in de-interlacing M PEG - 4, MJ PEG
• E • Video streaming
 asy-to-use over interface
built-in web IP network • MPEG-4/MJPEG compression
• Gigabit Ethernet 8-Channel
lets• you control all aspects of video
Supports two-way audio to enable audio • 30 ips on every channel @ D1
encoding A D EI P8 H - U S
streaming applications • 8 audio in/out ADEIP8M
• Dual streaming ( 8 -H.
C h26
a 4n n e l I P e n c o d e r )
• A wide range of PTZ
• Easy-to-use camera
built-in web interface lets you • RS232 + RS422/485 for PTZ control
protocols • Built-in de-interlacing
controlis all
supported
aspects ofand an encoding
video
open API is included for application • Compatible with VideoEdge NVR SNETH-US
• Gigabit Ethernet
• A wide and
integration range of PTZ
future cameraofprotocols is
support Ad d o n U S B m o d u l e to e n a b l e
supported
other formats and an open API is included for • 8 audio in/out S e n s o r n e t (fo r A D EI PH o n l y)
application integration and future support
• 8 analog video
of other sources
formats • RS232 + RS422/485 for PTZ control

• 1U•198 in rack video


analog mountsources • Compatible with VideoEdge NVR

• H
 .264
• 1Uand MPEG-4/MJPEG
19 in rack mount models
available

American Dynamics 63
IP Encoders

Preserving Your Camera


Investment
Keep your analog cameras as you
migrate to an IP solution. Easily
transform analog video into high quality
IP video streams.

4-Channel:
• D
 eveloped to leverage Active • Video loss detection
Content Compression (ACC) MODEL NUMBERS
• C
 amera PTZ, focus, aperture
technology
adjustment, preset, and pattern ADEIP4
• Power over Ethernet controls for selected cameras 4- C h a n n e l I P e n c o d e r

• M
 anage network bandwidth • Text stream input
usage through individual stream ADEIP4PS
• M
 ulti-level password protected user
configuration 4- C h a n n e l I P e n c o d e r w i th p owe r s u p p l y
access
• Compatible with Intellex IP and the
• 10Base-T/100Base-TX network Accessories
Intellex Management Suite (Network
support
Client, Intellex Policy Manager, ADEIP4RM
Intellex Archive Manager, and • 1
 U form factor for shelf, wall, or rack Rack mount kit
Browser Client) mounting
• 30 ips NTSC/25 ips PAL at 4CIF ADEIP4WM

• A
 ccess and control the IP encoder Wa l l m o u n t k i t
from a web browser or Intellex IP
user interface ADEIP4PWRS

• W
 atchdog system monitoring with 12V D C Powe r s u p p l y k i t
auto-reset
ADEIP4RS232
R S -232 C a b l e Ad a pte r

American Dynamics 64
Network Video Recorders
The National Policing

Improvement Agency (NPIA)

chose a VideoEdge Network

Video Management System as the

backbone of their security system,

as well as the integral part of their

Practical Training Block.

“We are delighted with the

solutions; the individual systems

are effective and efficient, as a

whole they add unbeatable value

to our overall facilities and a centre

we believe is now an exemplar in

its field worldwide”.

Tim Arnold, Lead Design Architect

for the NPIA


Network Video Recorders

V
ideoEdge is a high-performance NVR that supports multi-channel audio and dual streaming for

a robust enterprise video management solution. Pre-configured bundled server solutions utilize

an embedded Linux operating system, web server, as well as user, camera, network and storage

management applications. The unique victor unified video management solution allows you to view and

manage all of your VideoEdge NVRs, as well as any Intellex DVRs you may have, all from one intuitive

interface.

VideoEdge Network Video Recorder (NVR)


VideoEdge NVR has a true server-client architecture designed to With the powerful victor unified client, you get the unique ability to
manage video very efficiently and achieve superior performance. view, manage, and control recorded video from Intellex DVRs,
The processor, memory, and disk space overhead typically VideoEdge NVRs, as well as live streams from analog and IP
associated with commercially available operating systems do not cameras. Display video simultaneously with a common feature set,
apply to VideoEdge NVR. VideoEdge systems provide unique built-in no matter what the codec (H.264, ACC, MJPEG, MPEG-4); even
virtualization so that any number of NVRs and cameras from one or mixing and matching technologies. All in one location without
more sites looks like one logical NVR. This enables you to better toggling between client applications!
manage a large number of devices and/or locations.
VideoEdge NVR analyzes video streams and generates motion
As the number of cameras increase at a facility, resolution and meta-data to be used in connection with victor to enable forensic ad
frame rate performance can become a challenge. VideoEdge NVR hoc motion-based smart searches. Operators are able to get results
features many unique algorithms to achieve maximum read and for their investigations of recorded video for objects, individuals,
write performance. Innovative techniques enable VideoEdge NVR to vehicles, or other anomalous activities in hours to days video in a
achieve the highest possible performance while supporting more matter of seconds.
devices and storage for the lowest total cost-of-ownership.

American Dynamics 66
Network Video Recorders

Meta-Data for
Mega-Fast Results!
Unlike many NVRs in the
market, VideoEdge uses
meta-data to deliver
lightning-fast, on-the-fly
searches of recorded video on
IP and analog cameras in the
same interface

VideoEdge NVR:

• Essential part of the victor unified video • Synchronizes live and recorded audio
management system and video streams, supports G.726, MODEL NUMBERS
G.711, and AAC audio compressions A l l m o d e l n u m b e r s fo r V i d e o Ed g e
• Supports H.264, MPEG-4 N V R b e l ow i n c l u d e 16 I P c a m e r a
and MJPEG compression and dual- • Email notification of health l i c e n s e s, 1T B b o ot d r i ve, p l u s:
streaming cameras alerts directly from NVR to assigned
personnel
• Generates and analyzes video motion A DV E4 0 R 01D710
scene meta-data for forensic victor • Integrates with a variety of applications 1T B v i d e o s to r a g e
unified client Smart Searches including Software House C∙CURE
9000 access control systems
• Supports dual streaming cameras A DV E4 0 R 0 3 D710
enabling multiple video streams to be • Open platform supports many third 3T B v i d e o s to r a g e
used for live, record, alarm bump and party devices and hardware
meta-data collection optimization
• Remote management from standard A DV E4 0 R 0 5D710
• Embedded Linux® kernel provides web browsers or client software 5 T B v i d e o s to r a g e
the highest level of security and
• Scalable architecture supports
performance in tandem with low total
on-demand upgrades for additional A DV E4 0 R10 D710
cost of ownership
video and storage devices 10T B v i d e o s to r a g e
• Internal storage up to 10 TB or
• Chain-of-custody feature provides
expandable with external storage up to
indisputable video evidence
104 TB per NVR
• Live and recorded streaming video

American Dynamics 67
Digital Video Recorders
Performances at the 293,000

square foot Walt Disney Concert

Hall in Los Angeles can draw

up to 10,000 attendees.

Intellex, Network Client Remote

Management Software,

MegaPower Matrix Switcher/

Controllers and 97 SpeedDome

Ultra programmable dome

cameras form the core of the

integrated security system that

safeguards them.
Digital Video Recorders

A
merican Dynamics offers the most comprehensive range of digital video recorders on the

market. Available in a range of hardware platforms, including an IP-based platform, there is

system tailored to fit nearly any application. Both the Intellex and ADTVR are integrated with Software

House and Kantech access control systems.

Intellex Digital Video Recorders TVR Series of Digital Video Recorders


From smaller installations (Intellex LT) to mid-size applications ADTVR and ADTVR-VS series of embedded digital video recorders
(Intellex DVMS) and now to more demanding applications requiring utilize the latest technologies, including H.264 video compression
higher resolution and performance (Intellex Ultra), there is a solution and TCP/IP network access to ensure superior recording and
for any situation. Plus, we provide the flexibility of IP-based video remote management. The embedded Linux OS provides extremely
surveillance (Intellex IP) and every platform can be remotely reliable digital video recording in an economical package.
managed using Network Client Remote Management Software.
ADTVR and ADTVR-VS are widely used in banking, transportation,
But Intellex does more than just record. You can simultaneously government, retail and other applications because of their
record and play back video, text, and audio while using simplicity. Whether used as a standalone unit or as a remotely
sophisticated search functions to define and find only those managed system with a web client or iPhone mobile device, the
important events meeting your criteria. Our patented Active Content ADTVR series offer a powerful, yet affordable, solution.
Compression (ACC) technology lets you easily play back video
frame by frame, forward or reverse. For added flexibility and control, The ADTVR Viewer iPhone application allows remote camera control
install Network Client on ta Windows-based PC with a network and viewing, giving users peace-of-mind, as they monitor their
connection and you’ll have control of every Intellex on your system, premises from anywhere. Email on alarm can send three snapshots
no matter how distributed or decentralized the operation. directly to any other email enabled SmartPhone.

American Dynamics 69
Intellex

Intellex Digital Video Management Systems Comparison table


Intellex Ultra Intellex DVMS Intellex IP
Intellex LT
(Premier) (Standard, Deluxe & Premier) (Premier)
Maximum Images per
Second (NTSC/PAL):
4CIF 480/400 240/200 120/100 240/200
2CIF 480/400 480/400 240/200 240/200
1CIF 480/400 480/400 480/400 480/400
1.0 TB, 2.0 TB,
Storage Capacity 3.0 TB, 4.0 TB 250 GB, 500 GB, 1.0 TB, 1.5 TB 250 GB, 500 GB 1.0 TB, 2.0 TB, 4.0 TB
(RAID5 3.0 TB)
Windows XP Pro
®
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Linear or Circular/ Linear or Circular/ Linear or Circular/
Record Mode Linear or Circular/Continuous
Continuous Continuous Continuous
Pre-Alarm Recording Yes (up to 5 minutes) Yes (up to 5 minutes) Yes (up to 60 seconds) Yes (up to 5 minutes)
Alarm Indexing Yes (15 minutes) Yes (15 minutes) No Yes (15 minutes)
Alarm/Event Notification:
Yes (via Network Client) Yes (via Network Client) Yes (via Network Client) Yes (via Network Client)
Remote
Local Yes Yes Yes Yes
Email Yes Yes Yes Yes
Video Resolutions
Available:
4CIF
704 x 480/704 x 576 704 x 480/704 x 576 704 x 480/704 x 576 704 x 480/704 x 576
(NTSC/PAL)
2CIF 704 x 240/704 x 288 704 x 240/704 x 288 704 x 240/704 x 288 704 x 240/704 x 288
1CIF 352 x 240/352 x 288 352 x 240/352 x 288 352 x 240/352 x 288 352 x 240/352 x 288
Text Insertion
Yes (16 channels) Yes (up to 8 channels) Yes (up to 8 channels) Yes (16 channels)
(Via Serial Port)
Video Analysis Tools
(Size, Speed, Direction of Yes Yes, Premier Edition only No No
Motion)
Smart Search Yes Yes Yes Yes
Custom Schedule/
Yes, with IntelleCord Yes, with IntelleCord Yes, with IntelleCord Yes, with IntelleCord
Weekends
Multi-Screen Playback Yes Yes No Yes
Covert Camera Yes Yes Yes Yes
Via Network Client,
Via Network Client, Browser Via Network Client, Via Network Client, Browser Browser Client, or Intellex
Client, or Intellex GUI Browser Client, or Intellex GUI Client, or Intellex GUI GUI (via ADTT16E,
(via ADTT16E, ADACSNET, (via ADTT16E, ADACSNET, (via ADTT16E, ADACSNET, ADACSNET, MP48, MP168,
Dome Control
MP48, MP168, MP1024, MP48, MP168, MP1024, MP48, MP168, MP1024, MP1024,
MP3200, or other third party MP3200, or other third MP3200, or other third party MP3200, other third party
switchers) party switchers) switchers) switchers, or any IP
422-compatible device)
Alarm-Triggered Camera
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Action
User-Defined Matrix &
Dome Control Camera Yes Yes Yes Yes
Handler
Activity Log
Yes Yes Yes Yes
(Who, When, What)
3rd Party Integration via
Yes Yes Yes Yes
API
Chassis Configuration 3U, Desktop/Rack Mount 4U, Desktop or Rack Mount 4U, Desktop 1U, Rack Mount
Alarm Quality & Sensitivity
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Settings
Camera-Selectable Frame
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Rate
One-Click Clip Export Yes, CD-RW/DVD-RW Yes, CD-RW/DVD-RW Yes, CD-RW/DVD-RW Yes, CD-RW/DVD-RW

Extended Storage Devices Yes Yes Yes Yes

Support for Remote


Configuration & Yes Yes Yes Yes
Management
NTSC/PAL Toggle Yes Yes Yes N/A

American Dynamics 70
Intellex Ultra

Forward/Reverse
Playback
Closely examine recorded video of
suspicious activities one frame at a
time, forward or reverse-something
that is difficult to do with MPEG-4
solutions.

Intellex Ultra:
• G
 ain the ability to multiplex, detect alarms and • U
 se 3rd party applications-such as access
events, record video, audio and text, and much control from Software House and Kantech as Model Numbers
more well as video forensics, virtual matrix, remote
Desktop/Rack Mount Models
monitoring, and more-integrated with Intellex
• S
 et dome presets, patterns, and ADD600ULPV100
via the powerful application programming
configurations right from the Intellex GUI
interface (API)
• S
 earch for specific clips using video analysis ADD600ULPV200
• W indows XP Professional operating system
tools and advanced text
• 4CIF at 480 ips** ADD600ULPV300
• O
 perate Intellex like a virtual matrix via Network
Client with CCTV keyboard-based camera • S eparate solid-state system drive
control and an expanded capacity to stream ADD600ULPV400
• Front accessible, swappable drives
video simultaneously from multiple cameras*
• S pace-saving 3U chassis
• R
 eact faster to potential emergencies with RAID 5 Model
immediate email notification of system events • O ptional RAID 5 protection ADD600URP300
and alarms
• S
 teel-reinforced door provides unsurpassed
• C ustomize camera views for flexible monitoring durability and drive protection A D D 6 0 0 U R P V3 0 0

• R
 espond to events with alarm-triggered dome • Includes one license of Network Client
positioning
• D esktop/rack mount configurable
• R
 ecord higher frame rates per second for
certain cameras and assign the remainder to • D imensions:
less critical cameras 130 x 429 x 546 mm (5.125 x 16.895 x 21.5 in)

• E
 asily export video, audio, and text to CD-RW • Weight: 17.3 kg (38 lbs)
or DVD-RW with one click of the mouse
• S
 tore more video than MPEG-4 and MJPEG-
based systems using patented American
Dynamics Active Content Compression (ACC)
technology

* Requires Network Client v4.04 or higher and supports the ADTT16E Touch Tracker Controller, ControlCenter 1100, ControlCenter 200, 300, AD2088 and AD2089.
** All ips measurements reflect NTSC format 120 ips NTSC=100 ips PAL.

American Dynamics 71
Intellex DVMS

Intellex DVMS:
Standard: • U
 se 3rd party applications-such as access Deluxe:
• S et dome presets, patterns, and control from Software House and Kantech Includes ALL the Standard features PLUS the
configurations right from the Intellex GUI as well as video forensics, virtual matrix, following:
remote monitoring, and more-integrated
• O
 perate Intellex like a virtual matrix via with Intellex via the powerful application • Fourth monitor output
Network Client with CCTV keyboard-based programming interface (API) (analog call/spot monitor)†
camera control and an expanded capacity • Export capabilities to CD-RW/DVD-RW
to stream video simultaneously from multiple • Smart Search (motion, perimeter, light)
cameras* • S earch based on date, time, camera, alarm Premier:
• R
 eact faster to potential emergencies with • W indows XP Professional operating system Includes ALL the Deluxe features PLUS the
immediate email notification of system following:
events and alarms • Covert camera
• Includes one USB to RS-232 converter
• C
 ustomize camera views for flexible • Includes one license of Network Client
monitoring • V
 ideo analysis tools (size, speed, direction
• Supports up to 20 Network Client users of motion)
• R
 espond to events with alarm-triggered
dome positioning • C
 ontrol domes from Intellex and • S ingle channel of live and recorded audio
Network Client**
• R
 ecord higher frame rates per second for • T
 ext-based searching and exception
certain cameras and assign the remainder • D esktop dimensions: recording
to less critical cameras 172 x 432 x 464 mm
(6.75 x 17.0 x 18.25 in) • S upport for remote text-based searching
• E
 asily export video, audio, and text to Weight: 14.50 kg (31.90 lbs) • S upport for remote video analysis tools
CD-RW/DVD-RW with one click of the
mouse • R
 ack mount dimensions: • S
 ingle channel of RS-232 text recording
175 x 432 x 521 mm (expandable to 8 with additional hardware)
• S
 tore over 9 times more video than MPEG-4 (6.875 x 17.0 x 20.5 in)
and MJPEG-based systems using patented Weight: 20.39 kg (44.95 lbs) • Export capabilities to DVD-RW
American Dynamics Active Content
Compression (ACC) technology

MODEL NUMBER CONFIGURATION FOR INTELLEX ULTRA, DVMS AND LT PLATFORMS

Brand Family Channels Chassis Platform Features Video Card Storage

OA 100
D UL
OA = Desktop/ V 100 = 1 TB
Example AD Digital Video 6 UL = Ultra P
Rack V = Enhanced 200 = 2.0 TB
Ultra AD Management 6 = 16 Channels UR = Ultra P = Premier
Mount Video Card 300 = 3.0 TB
Systems RAID13
Configuration 400 = 4.0 TB
02514
S
6 OA 025 = 250 GB
Example DV S = Standard
AD D 8 = 8 Channels OA = Desktop V 050 = 500 GB
DVMS DV = DVMS D = Deluxe
6 = 16 Channels RA = Rack Mount 100 = 1.0 TB
P = Premier
150 = 1.5 TB
4
025
Example 4 = 4 Channels OA LT
AD D P V 025 = 250 GB
LT 8 = 8 Channels OA = Desktop LT = LT
050 = 500 GB
6 = 16 Channels
* Requires Network Client v4.04 or higher and supports the ADTT16E Touch Tracker Controller, ControlCenter 1100, ControlCenter 200, 300, AD2088 and AD2089.
** Requires ADTT16E Touch Tracker Controller, AD168, AD1024, MP48, MP3200, or USB Control Module.
† Available only with 16 channel systems.

American Dynamics 72
Intellex LT

All Intellex Platforms Work


Seamlessly Together
Whatever platform you choose, Intellex lets
you customize your system and Network Client
lets you manage them all from the same user
interface.

Intellex LT:

• M
 ultiplex, detect alarms and • C
 onnect up to three External
events, record video, audio and Storage Modules (ESM) to expand MODEL NUMBERS
text, and much more the local storage capacity 4-Channel
ADD400LTPV025
• S
 et dome presets, patterns, and • U
 se 3rd party applications-
configurations right from the such as access control from ADD400LTPV050
Intellex GUI Software House and Kantech as
well as video forensics, virtual 8-Channel
• S
 earch for specific clips
matrix, remote monitoring, and
using video analysis tools and ADD800LTPV025
more-integrated with Intellex
advanced text ADD800LTPV050
via the powerful application
• R
 eact faster to potential programming interface (API)
emergencies with immediate 16-Channel
• C
 ontrol domes from Intellex and
email notification of system ADD600LTPV025
Network Client
events and alarms ADD600LTPV050
• S
 ingle channel of live and
• C
 ustomize camera views for
recorded audio
flexible
monitoring • S
 ingle channel of RS-232 text
recording (expandable to 8 with
• R
 espond to events with alarm-
additional hardware)
triggered dome positioning
• T
 hird monitor output (analog call/
• E
 asily export video, audio, and
spot monitor)
text to CD-RW/DVD-RW with one
click of the mouse
• S
 tore over 9 times more video
than MPEG-4 and MJPEG-based
systems using patented American
Dynamics Active Content
Compression (ACC) technology

American Dynamics 73
Intellex LT

Desktop Models

8-Channel: 16-Channel:

Standard Deluxe Premier Standard Deluxe Premier


ADD800DVSV025 ADD800DVDV050 ADD800DVPV050 ADD600DVSV025 ADD600DVDV050 ADD600DVPV050

ADD800DVSV050 ADD800DVDV100 ADD800DVPV100 ADD600DVSV050 ADD600DVDV100 ADD600DVPV100

Deluxe Premier
ADD6R0DVDV050 ADD6R0DVPV050

ADD6R0DVDV100 ADD6R0DVPV100

ADD6R0DVDV150 ADD6R0DVPV150

Storyboard and Streaming Playback Features

Storyboard and Network Client:

Network Client provides


the ability to concatenate
exported video clips and
then play a series of
related clips, creating an
“incident storyboard”,
when video evidence
and auditing of incidents is required.

Streaming Playback:

You can view video from


Our storyboard and streaming playback
any external source -
features provide security professionals the
ability to do more with their systems. CD, DVD, network drive,
or flash drive, directly
from Intellex. Click on
the “External” button,
and select the appropriate drive, then view your
stored video.

American Dynamics 74
Intellex IP

Intellex IP:

• S
 upports IP cameras and the • T
 hird party applications such as
4-channel IP encoders, allowing you access control from Software House MODEL NUMBERS
to plug analog outputs into the units and Kantech can be integrated with
ADDIP100
surveillance environment Intellex via application programming
interface (API)
• C apture up to 4CIF resolution ADDIP200
• A larm notification to remote software
• D ual embedded Gigabit NIC
• P
 re-alarm recording and activity
• Integrated recording and storage in a
logging
1U rack mount chassis
• Image printing and enhancement
• K
 eyboard, video, monitor (KVM) port
tools
on front
• Individual camera settings for
• W indows XP operating system
sensitivity, quality, and scheduling
• 1
 .0 TB, 2.0 TB, and 4.0 TB SATA hard with IntelleCord (record all, alarmed
drive configurations recording, and so on)

• 16 video inputs • A larm quality and sensitivity setting

• S
 imultaneously record, play back, • C overt camera
view remotely, conduct a search, and
• S electable frame rates
more
• S
 upports external storage (via
• T
 ext-based searching and exception
FireWire ®) or iSCSI
recording
• S
 eamless integration with other
• S
 earch based on date, time, camera,
Intellex products
alarm
• Includes one license of Network
• S
 mart Search (motion, perimeter,
Client Remote Management Software
light)
• S
 upport for up to 20 simultaneous
• S
 ingle channel of live and recorded
Network Client users
audio
• C
 ontrol domes from Intellex and
• S
 ingle channel RS-232 text recording
Network Client*
(expandable to 8 with additional
hardware) • D imensions:
44 x 447 x 546 mm
• C D-RW/DVD-RW combo drive
(1.75 x 17.6 x 21.5 in)
• M ulti-screen playback
• Weight: 11.82 kg (26 lbs)

* Requires the ADTT16E Touch Tracker Controller or an AD1024, MP48, or MP3200.

American Dynamics 75
Intellex Ultra, DVMS and LT
S ystem D iagram

Digital Video Storage Devices* Analog Fixed Cameras,


SpeedDomes, or
Mini-Domes

Audio
In/Out

Printer

Intellex
(Ultra, DVMS & LT) I/O Alarm Devices
USB Control
Module

ADTT16E Touch Tracker


Network Client & Controller
Browser Client Ethernet Modem
Cash Register TCP/IP

USB Devices
(CD-RW or Thumbdrive)

API Intellex Policy Manager &


Intellex Archive Manager

Whatever platform you choose, Intellex lets you customize your system. Add fixed cameras and SpeedDomes and operate them with the
ADTT16E Touch Tracker Controller. Display video on a variety of monitors, integrate I/O alarm devices, stream in audio or ASCII text from cash
registers. Even add a printer. Need more storage capacity? Install up to three External Storage Modules (ESMs) for each Intellex DVMS or LT, or
the RAID Storage System for Intellex Ultra. Want to integrate your video with 3rd party software? The Intellex API provides a set of programming
interfaces that enable interoperability with access control and business management software applications.

* ESM compatible with only Intellex DVMS, LT, or IP; RAID Storage System is compatible with Intellex Ultra v4.0 Service Pack 1 (v4.03) or higher.

American Dynamics 76
Intellex IP
System Diagram

Input and Output


Alarms

4-channel IP Encoder

IP Fixed Cameras,
SpeedDomes, or
Mini-Domes
Switch Analog Fixed Cameras,
SpeedDomes, or
Mini-Domes

Network Client
Intellex API

Intellex IP

Audio ADTT16E Touch


In/Out Tracker Controller

KVM Switch Network and Digital Video


Monitor Storage Devices*

With Intellex IP, you can connect both IP cameras and - via video encoders - analog fixed cameras and SpeedDome programmable dome
cameras. Network Client lets you access surveillance video directly from your computer network while a switched network minimizes the impact
on bandwidth by segregating the traffic generated by the cameras and video encoders from the rest of the system. You can expand your storage
capacity by adding up to three ESMs and get interoperability with 3rd party software for access control, point of sale systems, and other
applications that integrate with the Intellex API. Intellex IP is compatible with all Intellex platforms and the Intellex API.

* ESM compatible with only Intellex DVMS, LT, or IP; RAID Storage System is compatible with Intellex Ultra v4.0 Service Pack 1 (v4.03) or higher.

American Dynamics 77
Intellex Accessories
Rack Mount Kits:

• S teel-constructed DVMS or LT desktop


platforms only MODEL NUMBERS
• R
 equires DVMS v2.0 or
higher • Intellex BNC rack mount DVRM-01
extension kit enables BNC
• Intellex rack mount kit
video and alarm board UHRM09
for Intellex with desktop
installation on the back
chassis; 16-channel DVMS
of the rack and connect
or LT platforms only
it to Intellex using flexible
• Intellex BNC rack mount extension ribbon cables
extension kit for 16-channel

Looping Panels:

• Includes a BNC looping • A


 vailable for Intellex Ultra
board, ribbon cable, right only MODEL NUMBER
angle audio adapters, and ADACHULP
mounting hardware

USB to RS-232 Adapter:

• Intellex USB to RS-232 • S


 oftware; Intellex v2.4 or
adapter; includes 1.83 m higher MODEL NUMBER
(6 ft) cable
RDVUSB23201
• H
 ardware; Intellex v2.1 or
higher

Intellex Accessories*:

Intellex Ultra hard drive replacement, 500 GB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADACHDDC500


Intellex Ultra hard drive replacement, 1 TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADACHDDC1000
Intellex 1 to 4 Text Data Port Expander, ext USB, hardware
systems v2.1 & higher, software v2.4 & higher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RDVEXP01
Intellex 1 to 8 Text Data Port Expander, ext USB, hardware
systems v2.1 & higher, software v3.1 & higher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RDVEXP02
Intellex speakers, pair, external, for hardware systems v2.1 & higher,
software v2.4 & higher, 120 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RDVSPK01
Anti-Virus Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . available at www.americandynamics.net

Software and Firmware Upgrades*:

• U
 pgrades provide an ever-increasing return on your initial investment; visit
www.americandynamics.net

* Check the data sheet at www.americandynamics.net for the current minimum requirements.

American Dynamics 78
ADTVR Embedded Digital Video Recorders

ADTVR Comparison Chart

ADTVR ADTVR-VS

Video Inputs 4, 8, and 16 4


Audio Inputs 4, 8, and 16 1

Alarm Inputs 4 Ch 4
4
Alarm Inputs 8 & 16 Ch 16

Alarm Outputs 4 Ch 2
1
Alarm Outputs 8 & 16 Ch 4

Compression H.264 H.264

Looping Video Outputs Yes No

Video Spot Monitor 1 (route alarms to spot monitor) 1

USB 2.0 3 1

DVD RW Yes No

HDD 4 Ch 4 SATA
1 SATA
HDD 8 & 16 Ch 8 SATA

Network 4 Ch 1 RJ45 10M/100M NIC


1 RJ45 10M/100M NIC
Network 8 & 16 Ch 1 RJ45 10M/100M/1000M NIC

Chassis 19” Rack Mount Small Chassis (Single HDD)


95 mm x 450 mm x 450 mm 45 mm x 315 mm x 230 mm
Dimensions (H x W x D)
(3.7 in x 17.7 in x 17.7 in) (1.8 in x 12.4 in x 9.1 in)
Compression H.264 H.264

CIF: 30ips(NTSC); 25ips(PAL)


Frame Rate 4 Ch 2CIF: 30ips(NTSC); 25ips(PAL)
4CIF: 8ips(NTSC & PAL)
CIF: 30ips(NTSC); 25ips(PAL)
2CIF: 12ips(NTSC & PAL)
CIF: 30ips(NTSC); 25ips(PAL) 4CIF: 6ips(NTSC & PAL)
Frame Rate 8 & 16 Ch 2CIF: 30ips(NTSC); 25ips(PAL)
4CIF: 12ips(NTSC & PAL)

Simultaneous Playback 4 Ch 4 Channel Playback (local)


1 Channel Playback (local)
Simultaneous Playback 8 & 16 Ch 8 Channel Playback (local)

Email Notification Yes No

File Lock Yes No

Reverse Playback Yes No

American Dynamics 79
ADTVR Embedded Digital Video Recorders

Remote Client - Multi-Camera Play-


back of Recorded Video

Remote Client - Manage up to


256 ADTVR Devices

Common ADTVR Remote Client supports


entire ADTVR series providing centralized
operation, alarm monitoring, and system
maintenance.

ADTVR:
• 4, 8, and 16 video input models • Local or remote PTZ control,
available (NTSC/PAL)* multiple dome protocols available MODEL NUMBERS
• Each channel has independent, • TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, DNS, ADTVR04050 ADTVR16050
H.264 hardware compression DDNS, NTP, and SADP 4 channel, 500GB 16 channel, 500GB
support
• Audio for all channels
• Supports unicast & multicast IP ADTVR04100 ADTVR16100
• Multi-zone motion detection
technologies 4 channel, 1TB 16 channel, 1TB
• Email alarm image upon motion or
• Web client operator interface using
alarm ADTVR16200
Internet Explorer ADTVR08050
• Option to select the number of days 8 channel, 500GB 16 channel, 2TB
• ADTVR Viewer iPhone Mobile Client
to retain recorded video
Application
• Lock and unlock option to secure ADTVR08100 ADTVR16400
• Full featured remote client software
critical video events 8 channel, 1TB 16 channel, 4TB
• Centralized alarm interaction at
• Simultaneous playback - upto
remote host PC
8 cameras from local interface ADTVR08200
8 channel, 2TB
• Export video clips with player
• Export and import configuration
settings
• Log management system with
powerful query options

* The number of video inputs varies with different models.

American Dynamics 80
ADTVR-VS

Remote Client - Electronic Maps


(add camera icons, monitor alarms)

Remote Client - Live View Display

The single hard drive chassis is ideal for


standalone, as well as remotely man-
aged, low camera count applications in
support of small to mid-sized business
applications.

ADTVR-VS:

• 4 video inputs (NTSC/PAL) • Local or remote PTZ control, multiple


dome protocols available MODEL NUMBERS
• Each channel has independent, H.264
hardware compression • TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, DNS, DDNS, A DT V RVS 0 4 025
NTP, and SADP support 4 C h a n n e l, 25 0 G B
• 1 audio input
• Supports unicast & multicast IP
• Supports 4CIF, 2CIF, CIF, and QCIF A DT V RVS 0 4 0 5 0
technologies
record resolutions
4 C h a n n e l, 5 0 0 G B
• Web client operator interface using
• Supports both variable bit & frame rate
Internet Explorer
• Multi-zone motion detection A DT V RVS 0 410 0
• TVR Viewer iPhone Mobile Client
4 C h a n n e l, 1T B
• Flexible Recording Options: by schedule, Application
manual, motion, alarm, motion & alarm,
• Full featured remote client software A DT V RVS 0 4 0 0 0
motion or alarm
• Flexible management of user access 4 C h a n n e l, N o H a rd D r i ve
• Support video loss, camera tamper
privileges
alarm and privacy mask function
• Centralized alarm interaction at remote
• Option to select the number of days to
host PC
retain recorded video
• Local and remote firmware upgrade
• Export video clips with player onto
capability
removable USB pen drive
• VGA or Composite Main monitor output
• Export and import configuration settings
• Composite Spot monitor output
• Log management system with powerful
query options

American Dynamics 81
ADTVR Embedded Digital Video Recorders
System Diagram

ADTVR or ADTVR-VS

2-Way
Audio
Support

Common Remote
Client for TVR Series
I/O Alarm of Products
Analog Fixed Cameras, Devices
Ethernet Mobile
SpeedDomes, or
TCP/IP Export to USB Devices
Mini-Domes
IE Web Devices (SATA
Browser DVD-RW)

ADTVR Remote Client


The simplicity of operation as a standalone unit or as a “fully scalable” remotely managed system allow the ADTVR and ADTVR-VS to be widely
used in banking, transportation, government, retail and other video recording applications. The included Remote Client software provides
complete operation, maintenance and management functions including:

• Common Remote Client for entire TVR series • Live viewing of up to 64 cameras from single Remote Client

• Multiple camera playback of recorded video • Manage up to 256 TVR devices from single Remote Client

• Centralized remote alarm monitoring • Interactive electronic maps (add camera icons, monitor alarms)

• Popup live camera view on event • Dual LCD display support from single Remote Client

• 2-way audio support • Upload event triggered video recording to centralized Remote Client

• Remote configuration and maintenance • Remote export / import system configuration files

• Advanced H.264 based network optimization tools • Main Stream and Sub Stream encoding parameter support

American Dynamics 82
Hybrid Video Recording
Solutions
Retailers around the world

are recognizing the benefits of

deploying megapixel cameras in

security-critical locations while

utilizing less expensive analog

cameras in other places. Hybrid

video recording solutions from

American Dynamics bring it all

together.
HDVR Hybrid Video Recorders

A
merican Dynamics Hybrid Video Recording Solutions protect your customers’ analog camera

investment while they either consider transitioning to IP cameras, or enjoy the benefits of a

mixed environment. HDVR supports a long list of IP and analog cameras and uses H.264 compression on

both analog (one of the only in the industry!) and IP inputs, providing customers with superior storage

capabilities. HDVR is integrated with both Kantech and Software House access control solutions.

HDVR
Protect your analog investment with HDVR hybrid video recording Each HDVR server includes up to 32 analog inputs and 8 IP inputs,
solutions from American Dynamics. HDVR provides seamless which can be easily expanded to up to 64 IP cameras per server.
integration and recording of both analog and IP video surveillance The unique hardware platform supports H.264 technology on all
cameras on an enterprise class chassis. analog channels and MJPEG, and MPEG-4 on IP channels. A RAID
5 option on the 4U model provides additional storage capacity.
The powerful, yet easy to operate client user interface installs on
HDVR features a removable backplane, making it extremely easy to
any standard computer running Windows, Linux, or Mac OS X and
perform maintenance on the server without disrupting service.
can connect to multiple servers. A single HDVR client license can
BNCs remain intact by removing the backplane; allowing you to
be deployed on multiple computers. Each HDVR client can support
replace only the front of the unit. HDVR provides a powerful security
up to 4 monitor displays to support cameras or maps in a variety of
solution that protects your entire business.
user specified configurations. Video from all HDVR systems can
also be accessed with web browsers and mobile de­v ices with
access to the Internet.

Video from all HDVR systems can also be accessed with web
browsers and mobile devices with access to the Internet. The
optional Enterprise software license enabled at the server level,
adds unique user administration functionality that is useful in an
enterprise deployment. Supported features include: Active
Directory Integration, Multi-Level Mapping, and Enterprise User
Administration.

American Dynamics 84
HDVR Hybrid Video Recorders

HDVR Hybrid Video Recorders:


• R
 ecord analog and IP cameras • E
 asy-to-use multi-camera view
from an intuitive interface playback and export MODEL NUMBERS ADSHSSAENTR Software
ADHD160100 HDVR, 2U, 16 ch. Update Subscription for
• T
 wo flexible configurations • U
 ser–definable permissions and HDVR Enterprise feature
analog/ 8 ch. IP, 1TB
available: 16 analog/8 IP privileges
cameras; 32 analog/8 IP ADHD160200 HDVR, 2U, 16 ch. ADSH16SSA Software Update
• A
 ccess video with most web
cameras analog/ 8 ch. IP, 2TB Subscription for 16/8 HDVR
browsers and mobile devices
• E
 ach server is expandable to up ADHD160300 HDVR, 2U, 16 ch. ADSH32SSA Software Update
• E
 asily analyze search results
to 64 IP cameras analog/ 8 ch. IP, 3TB Subscription for 32/8 HDVR
with configurable color-coding
• S
 upports H.264 and MJPEG on
• RAID 5 storage optional ADHD160400 HDVR, 2U, 16 ch. ADSHSSAIP01X Software
analog cameras; H.264, MPEG- analog/ 8 ch. IP, 4TB Update Subscription for
4, MJPEG on IP cameras • Integrated with the following single IP camera license -
access control platforms: ADHD16R300 HDVR, 2U, 16 ch. Expired
• U
 nique removable backplane
analog/ 8 ch. IP, 3TB, RAID5
improves serviceability • Kantech EntraPass v4.04 or ADSHSSAENTRX Software
higher ADHD320200 HDVR, 4U, 32 ch. Update Subscription for
• 2U and 4U rack-mountable
analog/ 8 ch. IP, 2TB HDVR Enterprise feature -
servers • Sofrtware House C*CURE 9000 Expired
or higher ADHD320400 HDVR, 4U, 32 ch.
• S
 upports a wide variety
of IP cameras including analog/ 8 ch. IP, 4TB ADSH16SSAX Software
• Compatible with American
Update Subscription for
multi-megapixel Dynamics Illustra 400 and IP ADHD320600 HDVR, 4U, 32 ch. 16/8 HDVR - Expired
fxed cameras analog/ 8 ch. IP, 6TB
• E
 asily and cost-effectively add IP
camera licenses ADSH32SSAX Software
• Review all user activity with audit
ADHD320800 HDVR, 4U, 32 ch. Update Subscription for
trail functionality
• C
 ommon client allows you to analog/ 8 ch. IP, 8TB 32/8 HDVR - Expired
connect to an unlimited number
of HDVR servers ADHD32R600 HDVR, 4U, 32 ch. ADSHIP01 Single HDVR IP
analog/ 8 ch. IP, 6TB, RAID5 Camera License
• U
 se multi-monitor and wide-
screen client display for easy ADSHSSAIP01 S of t ware U pdate ADSHENTR HDVR Enterprise
viewing S ubscription for single IP camer a Software License
license
• E
 asy-to-use, powerful video and
audio export features

American Dynamics 85
Hybrid Video Recording Solutions
System Diagram

IP Fixed Cameras,
SpeedDomes, or
Mini-Domes Analog Fixed Cameras,
SpeedDomes, or
Mini-Domes

Digital Video Storage Devices

Audio
In/Out

Printer
HDVR

I/O Alarm
Devices

Remote Client
and Web Client USB Joysticks

Cell Phones
Cash Register and PDAs USB Devices
Ethernet TCP/IP
API (CD-W or
Thumbdrive)

Whether you use IP cameras, analog cameras, or a mixture of both, HDVR brings it all together in one seamless interface. Each HDVR supports
up to 32 analog inputs and 8 IP inputs, which can be easily expanded to up to 64 IP cameras per server.

American Dynamics 86
Video Management Systems
American Dynamics offers the

most comprehensive range of

video management solutions on

the market. From the industry-

renowned Network Client for

digital video management, to

the game-changing victor unified

video management solution,

managing video has never been

more intuitive.
Video Management Systems

A
network or digital video recorder is only as powerful as the applications that allow you to

monitor and control the video data. American Dynamics’ video management applications make

your VideoEdge or Intellex recorders important business-enablers. The intuitive client interfaces provide

tiled displays of multiple video feeds and allow you to configure the viewing panes in different sizes to

display some cameras in a larger resolution than others. Our feature-rich applications offer remote

management, multi-monitor, user-specific layouts and innovative smart search and investigation tools.

victor Unified Client and Site Manager Network Client


for VideoEdge & Intellex for Intellex
Maximize your existing investments in analog technology while Combining the reliability of matrix switchers with the power of a
adding NVRs and IP cameras over time. With the powerful victor virtual matrix, Network Client Remote Management Software lets
unified video management software, you get the unique ability to you easily manage your Intellex DVRs from one streamlined user
view, manage, and control recorded video from Intellex digital interface. Leverage your existing matrix switcher investment
video recorders and VideoEdge network video recorders. while adding the powerful capability of a virtual matrix. Perform
multi-camera playback, camera switching, camera sequencing
Display analog and IP video simultaneously with common feature
and macros with a wide range of American Dynamics CCTV
set, no matter what the codec (H.264, ACC, MJPEG, MPEG-4);
keyboards making any security system flexible, scalable, and
even mixing and matching technologies. All-in-one location
easy to use.
without toggling between separate client applications! The
intuitive interface includes advanced Windows 7-like features Network Client gives you control of every Intellex on your system,
such as tear off, snap, auto hide, tab, and dock windows no matter what Intellex platform or how far-flung or decentralized
providing a truly customizable operator experience. Drag and the operation.
drop cameras and devices into a nearly limitless number of video
layouts on up to four monitors for the ultimate in video Intellex Applications
surveillance. An easy to use tree structure literally puts Intellex Policy Manager provides additional security for a
everything at your fingertips. collective network of Intellex units and remote workstations
running either Network Client or third party software applications
The victor site manager is the brains of the operation - storing
that use the Intellex Application Programming Interface (API).
data, operator profiles, roles and camera/recorder information.
victor also journals and tracks what has happened on your video Intellex Archive Manager works seamlessly with Intellex to
systems such as operators activities, search and export history. manage and organize stored video, audio, and text data on
You may restrict access to what devices and features an network-attached storage (NAS) devices.
operator can access by assigning them to a role using
Intellex Browser Client lets you view live Intellex video through a
embedded policy management.
web browser. This free software package makes it easy for IT
administrators to set up a dedicated website to view Intellex
video, define which Intellex units to make available for viewing,
and set up and administer a group of authorized users.

American Dynamics 88
victor Unified Video Management Systems

U
nifying Video Platforms. The victor is a unified interface that lets you manage and control your

Intellex DVRs, VideoEdge NVRs, and associated IP and analog cameras. It is a platform for the

future that will unify other security and business applications such as access control, intrusion, fire, and more.

IP Cameras

Analog Cameras

Intellex

VideoEdge

victor unified video management system

American Dynamics 89
victor Unified Video Management System
FO R V ID EO ED G E A N D IN T EL L E X

Intuitive Operator
Experience
Easily create multi-monitor,
user-specific layouts to
increase operator efficiency.
With one click of the mouse,
you can switch to a different
layout that better suits the
needs of a new situation.

victor Unified Client and Site Manager:

• Manage live and recorded video • Create, store, and manage camera
from Intellex* DVRs and VideoEdge views Model NumberS
NVRs; analog and IP cameras all ADVC10S05SQL
• Organize and customize screen ADVC10S02
from one intuitive client
layouts for different operators’ victor site manager/ victor site manager/client
• Robust motion-based smart needs client sof t ware base base-5 connections w/SQL
search uses meta-data to Ser ver 20 08
• Built using Microsoft WPF with 2 concurrent client
provide fast video searching
(Windows Presentation Foundation) connections
and analysis
ADVS10S01
• Supports XP, Vista, and Windows 7
• Display H.264, ACC, MJPEG, victor site manager, 1
(32 / 64 bit support) ADVC10S05
MPEG-4 video simultaneously
victor site manager/client additional concurrent client
• Conduct time and date search sof t ware base with 5 connection
on up to ten cameras across
concurrent client connections
ten Intellex/VideoEdge recorders
ADVS10S05
at once
ADVC10S02SQL victor site manager, 5
• Includes advanced integrated
victor site manager/client base- additional concurrent client
policy management to control
2 connections w/SQL Ser ver connections
access to cameras, recorders, PTZ
controls, search, export, and more 20 08

• Built-in Virtual Matrix capabilities to


manage up to four monitors from
variety of CCTV keyboards
• Easy to use interface and controls,
mix live and recorded video within
the same window for real-time
response
• Intelligent Switch Layout feature
enables multiple monitors to
quickly change screen layout for
fast response to situations

*Supports Intellex v3.2 and higher, and VideoEdge v4.0

American Dynamics 90
Network Client for Intellex

Network Client puts you in


Control
Install Network Client on any PC
with a network connection and you’ll
have control of every Intellex on your
system, no matter how far-flung or
decentralized the operation.

Laptop and monitors sold separately.

Network Client:
• R eceive alarm • V iew recorded video
notifications from several in streaming playback MODEL NUMBERS
Intellex units regardless of without having to ADDSNC43 ADDSNCSI
whether Network Client download individual video N e t wo r k C l i e n t m g t /c o n f i g.v i ew i n g, N e t wo r k C l i e n t, S n a p - I n M a n a g e r,
is active clips Single license single license
• R
 emotely use video • S
 imultaneously view live
analysis tools for or recorded video from ADDSNC43UL ADDSNCSIUL
scheduling cameras to multiple cameras on one N e t wo r k C l i e n t m g t /c o n f i g / v i ew i n g, N e t wo r k C l i e n t, S n a p - I n M a n a g e r,
record and specifying or more Intellex units u n l i m i te d l i c e n s e c o r p o r ate l i c e n s e
search criteria based
• P
 lay back video from one
on the size, speed, and A D D S N CV M K A DAC K B P C20 0 0
or multiple cameras with
direction of an object in N e t wo r k C l i e n t, v i r tu a l m ati r i x / Key b o a rd a c c y, key b o a rd to P C
both audio and text
motion key b o a rd c o n tro l w i th M e g a Powe r c o n n e c ti o n k i t, fo r A D20 0 0 s e r i e s
• U se the network m atr i x sw i tc h e r i n te g r ati o n, s i n g l e key b o a rd s
• R emotely use the
bandwidth limiter to license
advanced text tool for
download or transfer A DAC K B P C M P C C
scheduling cameras to
video without overtaxing A D D S N CV M K U L Key b o a rd a c c y, key b o a rd to P C
record and specifying
your system N e t wo r k C l i e n t, v i r tu a l m atr i x / c o n n e c ti o n k i t, fo r M e g a Powe r
search criteria based on
the contents and contexts • R emotely synchronize key b o a rd c o n tro l w i th M e g a Powe r C o n tro l C e n te r key b o a rd s
of a text transaction all Intellex units on your m atr i x sw i tc h e r i n te g r ati o n, c o r p o r ate
network by the hour, license ADDSNCICB
• R emotely search for video N e t wo r k C l i e n t, I n c i d e n t C l i p B u i l d e r,
minute, and second
using standard or Smart single license
ADDSNCSIVMK
Search tools • E mail or export video N e t wo r k C l i e n t S n a p - I n M a n a g e r
segments on CD and
• O rganize camera icons w i th v i r tu a l m atr i x key b o a rd ADDSNCICBUL
DVD in AVI or proprietary
on your computer screen a n d M e g a Powe r m atr i x sw i tc h e r N e t wo r k C l i e n t, I n c i d e n t C l i p B u i l d e r,
format converted via
as easily as you would i n te g r ati o n c o r p o r ate l i c e n s e
Network Client
arrange files and folders
on a PC • S upports video analytics ADDSNCSIVMKUL
with integrated snap-in N e t wo r k C l i e n t S n a p - I n M a n a g e r,
• C reate video incident
interface w i th v i r tu a l m atr i x key b o a rd
storyboards with the
incident clip builder a n d M e g a Powe r m atr i x sw i tc h e r
feature for video evidence i n te g r ati o n
or auditing

American Dynamics 91
Intellex Applications
Intellex Archive Manager:

• M
 anages the storage of • S
 pecify archive data (alarms,
video, audio, and text data schedules, specific cameras) MODEL NUMBERS
to network-attached storage
• P
 rovides Network Client ADDSAM43U10
devices
access to network stored ( U p to 10 I n te l l ex U n i ts)
• Integrates with Intellex Policy data
Manager for securing access
• U
 ser interface provides ADDSAM43U25
to network stored data
real-time storage status and ( U p to 25 I n te l l ex U n i ts)
• Increases storage capacity, reports
allowing you to retain video
• L everages Microsoft ADDSAM43UUL
longer
Management Console (MMC) ( U n l i m i te d I n te l l ex U n i ts)
• P
 rovides the ability to assign technologies Upgrades provide an ever-
storage space per Intellex
increasing return on your
unit and controlwhich
storage devices are online initial investment; visit www.
americandynamics.net

Intellex Policy Manager:

• E
 nables advanced security • S implified configuration
for Intellex Ultra, DVMS, by applying security MODEL NUMBERS
LT, or IP templates to multiple
ADDSPM43U10
Intellex systems
• T ighter access ( U p to 10 I n te l l ex U n i ts)
management of Intellex • M
 onitor availability of
functions with login Intellex units and access
ADDSPM43U25
credentials and access violations by using the logs
( U p to 25 I n te l l ex U n i ts)
privileges per user per in Windows Event Viewer
group generated by Intellex
Policy Manager ADDSPM43UUL
• Integrate physical security
with IT security via • L everages Microsoft ( U n l i m i te d I n te l l ex U n i ts)
Windows network security Management Console Upgrades provide an ever-
(MMC) technologies increasing return on your
• C entral management
of security accessible initial investment; visit www.
anywhere through the americandynamics.net
Admin Client

Intellex Browser Client:

• R emote dome control • E


 asy 1-2-3 step installation
and viewing of live and setup for the Available free at
Intellex video through a administrator www.americandynamics.net
web browser (requires
• S
 elf-installing web browser
Windows operating system
plug-in software upon
and Internet Explorer)
connection
• A
 ccess to multiple Intellex
• Password protected
units
• Online help
• Similar GUI to Network
Client

American Dynamics 92
Storage Solutions
As demand for digital video

applications grows, so too

does the need for reliable, high

volume network video storage

solutions. Although modern video

compression techniques help

to reduce the size of video files,

video remains extremely storage-

intensive, especially in applications

like video surveillance where more

HD or megapixel cameras are

capturing video continuously,

24 hours a day.
Video Storage

I
ntegrated and scalable, our storage solutions offer the best-in-class system fault tolerance, and

include an intuitive and integrated browser-based storage interface. Our high-performance storage

solutions can store video from HD or megapixel cameras. Choose the storage solution that is right for you

and your organization.

NVR and HDVR Video Storage Solutions Digital Video Storage Solutions
The second generation American Dynamics iSCSI and Fibre RAID The American Dynamics RAID Storage System is a highly reliable
Storage solutions are designed for high-performance recording storage device that offers high-density, high-performance storage
devices such as the VideoEdge Network Video Recorder or HDVR. expansion for Intellex Ultra digital video management systems. This
They are secure and highly scalable storage solutions that provide low-cost-per-terabyte storage solution features high drive density in
SAN storage for virtually any network and application. a rack-mountable 2U form factor complete with twelve (12) hot-
swappable drive bays. Powerful direct attached storage (DAS) or
The new RAID Tower models are designed for projects requiring a
storage attached network (SAN) configurations provide scalable,
smaller amount of iSCSI storage. They are available in three
high-availability video storage for Intellex Ultra.
different capacities and all come standard with an LCD monitor plus
eight hot-swappable drives that can be locked to provide additional Retain more video over a longer period of time with an Extended
security. Storage Module (ESM). Ideal for Intellex DVMS and LT systems,
each ESM seamlessly expands your database capacity by an
The new Rack Mount models are available in a variety of
additional 640 GB or 1000 GB. You can triple the capacity by
configurations and capacities. There are iSCSI RAID, 4 GB Fibre
cascading up to three ESM units per Intellex DVMS or LT. Both
RAID, and Expansion models which have been uniquely designed to
ESM640 and ESM1000 are compatible with desktop and
utilize the same 3U chassis. These storage solutions come standard
rack-mount installations.
with robust power supplies and fans, and nearly every component
is hot-swappable, including sixteen lockable drives. An optional
battery backup module is also available for the iSCSI and Fibre
RAID units.

American Dynamics 94
NVR and HDVR Video Storage Solutions

NVR and HDVR Storage Solutions table

iSCSI RAID Fibre RAID RAID Expansion


iSCSI RAID Tower
Rack Mount Rack Mount Unit Rack Mount
Form-Factor Tower 3U 19 in Rack Mount 3U 19 in Rack Mount 3U 19 in Rack Mount

Category Entry / Low-Cost Advanced / Flexible Advanced / Flexible Advanced / Flexible


(8) 3.5 in 500 GB SATA-II
N/A N/A N/A
(1) DG and (4) VD
Drive Quantity & Capacity & Type (8) 3.5 in 1 TB SATA-II (16) 3.5 in 1 TB SATA-II 3.5 in 1 TB SATA-II 3.5 in 1 TB SATA-II
Total Disk Groups & Virtual Disks (1) DG and (7) VD (2) DG and (14) VD (2) DG and (14) VD (2) DG and (14) VD
(8) 3.5 in 2 TB SATA-II (16) 3.5 in 2 TB SATA-II (16) 3.5 in 2 TB SATA-II (16) 3.5 in 2 TB SATA-II
(1) DG and (13) VD (2) DG and (26) VD (2) DG and (26) VD (2) DG and (26) VD
Number of Hardware RAID
Single Single Single Single
Controller
Processors Intel XScale IOP331 Intel XScale IOP342 Intel XScale IOP341 LSI SAS Expander

Memory 1 GB DDR333 1 GB DDR667 1 GB DDR667 N/A


0,1,0+1,3,5,6,10,30,50,60, 0,1,0+1,3,5,6,10,30,50,60, 0,1,0+1,3,5,6,10,30,50,60, 0,1,0+1,3,5,6,10,30,50,60,
RAID Levels Supported
JBOD, Chassis Hot Spare JBOD, Chassis Hot Spare JBOD, Chassis Hot Spare JBOD, Chassis Hot Spare
Drives per Enclosure 8 16 16 16

Disk Groups (RAID Sets) Up to 8 Up to 80 Up to 80 Managed by ADxRS2Rxxxx

Virtual Disks (Volumes) Up to 256 Up to 1024 Up to 1024 Managed by ADxRS2Rxxxx

S.M.A.R.T. Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Auto Disk Spin Down Supported Supported Supported Supported

LCD Display Standard Standard Standard Standard

LED Indicators HDDs, LCD, Fans, PSU HDDs, LCD, Fans, PSUs HDDs, LCD, Fans, PSUs HDDs, LCD, Fans, PSUs
(4) 1 GbE iSCSI (Data)
(2) 4 Gb Fibre Channel (Data)
(2) 1 GbE iSCSI (Data) (1) 100 Mbit (Management) (2) 12 Gb Mini-SAS (In-RAID)
(1) 100 Mbit (Management)
External Interfaces (Rear) (1) 100 Mbit (Management) (1) 12 Gb SAS (1) 12 Gb Mini-SAS
(1) 12 Gb SAS (Out-Expansion)
(1) RS-232 (Out-Expansion) (Out-Expansion)
(2) RS-232
(2) RS-232
160 TB RAW
Maximum Expansion Capacity 160 TB RAW Up to 4 Managed by
N/A 80 HDDs with (4)
(Rear) 80 HDDs with (4) ADERS2Rxxx ADxRS2Rxxxx
ADERS2Rxxx
Hot-Swappable & Lockable Hard Drives Hard Drives Hard Drives Hard Drives

Hot-Swappable & Redundant N/A Power Supplies & Fans Power Supplies & Fans Power Supplies & Fans

Power Supply Single 300W Dual 500W Dual 500W Dual 500W

Battery Backup Module N/A Optional Accessory Optional Accessory Optional Accessory
185 x 315 x 335 mm 447 x 498 x 116 mm 447 x 498 x 116 mm 447 x 498 x 116 mm
Dimensions (W x D x H)
(7.3 x 12.4 x 13.2 in) (17.6 x 19.6 x 4.6 in) (17.6 x 19.6 x 4.6 in) (17.6 x 19.6 x 4.6 in)
Weight (with Maximum Drives) 15.4 kg, (34 lbs) 29.5 kg, (65 lbs) 29.5 kg, (65 lbs) 29.5 kg, (65 lbs)
100-240 VAC, 100-240 VAC, 100-240 VAC, 100-240 VAC,
Voltage
50-60 Hz, 4-2A 50-60 Hz, 7-4A 50-60 Hz, 7-4A 50-60 Hz, 7-4A
BTU 1,800 BTU 2,400 BTU 2,400 BTU 2,400 BTU

American Dynamics 95
Network Video Storage Solutions

RAID RackRAID
5-Drive and 3Tower
Expansion Mount Units

RAID Rack Mount Unit

5-Drive RAID Tower Unit

Fibre and iSCSI RAID Storage:

• S upports up to 8 drives (Racks) • iSCSI 1 Gb/s ports (Dual for Towers & Quad • U
 p to 160 TB of RAW Storage per Server
for Racks) Connection (Racks with 2 TB HDDs)
• W
 rites data to a SAN at block-level for
superior performance • T
 hree configuration options: iSCSI, Fibre or • R
 ack models support daisy-chaining up to
Expansion four Expansion Units for a scalable storage
• L
 everages industry-standard Intel ®
solution
architecture • D edicated fast Ethernet management port
• Q
 uad iSCSI ports or Dual 4 Gb/s Fibre
• D
 esigned with latest high-performance • E
 asy-to-install setup wizard with common
ports for main RAID unit
hardware RAID controller GUI (Tower & Racks)
• 16 and 32 channel HDVR support*
• M
 ultiple RAID levels for robust fault • R
 edundant and modular design with hot-
tolerance swappable components (Racks)

Model Number Guide


EXAMPLE BRAND TYPE GENERATION FORM-FACTOR TOTAL CAPACITY

iSCSI RAID Tower AD IRS 2 T xxxx


(8-Drive RAID Tower with iSCSI American iSCSI RAID 2 nd Generation Tower 0400 = 4 TB RAW (8x500 GB)
Interface) Dynamics Storage 0800 = 8 TB RAW (8x1 TB)
1600 = 16 TB RAW (8x2 TB)

iSCSI RAID Rack Mount AD IRS 2 R xxxx


(16-Drive 3U RAID Rack with American iSCSI RAID 2 nd Generation Rack Mount 1600 = 16 TB RAW (16x1 TB)
iSCSI Interface) Dynamics Storage 3200 = 32 TB RAW (16x2TB)

Fibre RAID Rack Mount AD FRS 2 R xxxx


(16-Drive 3U RAID Rack with American Fibre RAID 2 nd Generation Rack Mount 1600 = 16 TB RAW (16x1 TB)
4Gb Fibre Channel Interface) Dynamics Storage 3200 = 32 TB RAW (16x2 TB)

Expansion RAID Rack Mount AD ERS 2 R xxxx


(16-Drive 3U RAID Rack with American Expansion RAID 2 nd Generation Rack Mount 1600 = 16 TB RAW (16x1 TB)
SAS Expansion Interface) Dynamics Storage 3200 = 32 TB RAW (16x2 TB)

* Note: Additional Model Numbers will be added to the Price List to offer additional RAID Set and Virtual Disk configuration options to support HDVR, Intellex, VideoEdge NVR, as well as other
products that require reliable and high-performance storage at competitive prices.

American Dynamics 96
Digital Video Storage Solutions

Digital Video Storage Solutions Comparison table

iSCSI RAID Storage (RSS) IEEE 1394 Extended Storage Modules (ESM)
Direct Attached Storage (DAS) or
Drive Type Extended Storage Module
Network Attached Storage (SAN)

1 VGA Port/2 Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 Ports


Input/Output Connector IEEE 1394 (Fire Wire) Compatible
(iSCSI)

Compatibility Intellex Ultra and Intellex IP Intellex DVMS and Intellex LT

Configuration Rack Mount and Desktop Rack Mount and Desktop

482.6 x 520.7 x 88.9 mm 429 x 406 x 43 mm


Dimensions (W x D x H)
(19 x 20.5 x 3.5 in) (17 x 16 x 1.75 in)

Voltage 115/230 VAC, 8.0/5.0 A 95 to 264 VAC, 50/60 Hz

UL, CE, FCC (Class A) TUV and C-Tick, RoHS,


Regulatory UL, CE, FCC (Class A) TUV and C-Tick, RoHS, WEEE
WEEE

iSCSI RAID Storage (RSS):

• O
 ffers high-density, high-
performance storage MODEL NUMBERS
expansion for Intellex Ultra ADRSS090TBHPH
ADRSS030TB
and Intellex IP digital video
management systems
ADRSS060TB ADHDRSS750
• Low cost per terabyte
• H
 igh drive density in a rack- ADRSS030TBH ADHDRSS1000
mountable 2U form factor
complete with twelve (12) hot-
ADRSS060TBH ADHDRSS250
swappable drive bays
• P
 owerful direct attached ADRSS120TBHP ADHDRSS400
storage (DAS) or storage
attached network (SAN)
ADRSS120TBHPH ADHDRSS500
configurations

ADRSS090TBHP

IEEE 1394 Extended Storage Modules (ESM):

• E
 xpands the Intellex Digital • Rack mount or desktop
Video Management System MODEL NUMBERS
• T
 he ESM allows you to
database capacity
cascade up to 3 units per ESM640
• A
 vailable in either 640 GB or Intellex for a total of 1,960
1000 GB models GB for the ESM640 and ESM1000
3,000 GB for the ESM1000 **
• A
 single ESM640 provides
an additional 350 days • 1U rack height
of recording and a single
• H
 igh-speed IEEE 1394
ESM1000 provides an
(FireWire) interface
additional 545 days of
recording*

* Assumes 30 ips NTSC and 25 ips PAL at minimal activity in all cameras. Actual record duration will vary based on Intellex settings such as motion within the scene and video quality.
**
Each Intellex requires a minimum of 512 MB of RAM.

American Dynamics 97
Matrix Switcher Solutions
“The capital expenditure is not the

issue. It is one thing to purchase

a matrix switcher; it is another

thing to maintain it. We bought

ours from American Dynamics

and have no regrets. I’m very

appreciative of the training

classes. The quality of instruction

and technical

support have helped us

immensely.”

- Ron Ackerman

Security Consultant

Regina Airport Authority, Canada


Matrix Switchers

O
ur matrix switchers give you the basic building blocks for developing a video surveillance

system tailored to the dimensions your situation dictates. Every one of our matrix switchers

are full cross point, equipped with dome control and sophisticated alarm handling. You can program a

variety of responses from one or multiple alarms to include any combination of salvos, presets, patterns,

auxiliary actions, and more. The greatest strength of our matrix switchers besides proven reliability, lies

with in their scalability, they start as small as 16 inputs by 4 outputs and grow your system to

accommodate thousands of cameras and domes.

We also provide a complete selection of keyboards, from basic to the most feature-rich. Macros,

multifunction keys, and smart cards make them easy to use. Whether you prefer a small footprint or a

traditional industrial design, we have the right keyboard for you.

MegaPower LT MegaPower 3200


Created for busy environments like retail stores, hospitals, and The MegaPower 3200 is the ultimate modular, scalable video matrix
schools, the MegaPower LT provides a complete video surveillance switcher/controller system. This full-featured, pre-packaged system
system at an affordable price. Small and versatile, it features is designed for the largest and most sophisticated users of CCTV’s
advanced alarm handling capabilities usually reserved for larger such as airports, corporate or government complexes, casinos, and
systems as well as video loss detection on all channels. Ideal for large medical centers. The system can start with a single CPU and
sites that require retrofitting, the MegaPower LT is compact and fits switcher bay. It will support upgrades and enhancements, including
just about anywhere - in racks or on walls, even under a desk. more inputs and outputs, and is a bridge to the hybrid analog/digital
Choose from 16 and 32 input models with 4 or 8 outputs. future. The MegaPower 3200 expands upon the time-proven
MegaPower 1024 matrix switcher technology, providing up to 3200
MegaPower 48 Plus video inputs and 256 video outputs. The MegaPower 3200 supports
Scaled to small and mid-sized operations, the MegaPower 48 Plus up to 64 keyboards in the single CPU configuration and 128
incorporates features you would expect only in the largest of keyboards in the dual CPU configuration. Hot switch capability no
systems: video loss detection with programmable responses, longer requires the accessory Hot Switch unit. New features include
wireless text messaging on alarm, a choice of keyboards, and more. the re-designed EASY CPU configuration and monitoring software,
With our recorder control devices, you can integrate DVRs and play, activity logging, and snap shot. The MegaPower 3200 supports up
pause, stop, record, rewind, fast forward, and eject without ever to 30 satellite systems.
leaving the console. This matrix switcher provides 48 inputs, which
can be expanded to 288. Eight of its 16 video outputs include text
overlay.

American Dynamics 99
Matrix Switchers

matrix Switchers Comparison table

MegaPower LT MegaPower 48 Plus MegaPower 3200

Maximum System Size 288 x 8


32 x 8 3200 x 256
(video input x video output) (192 x 12 or 144 x 16)
Minimum System Size
16 x 4 48 x 16 (8 with text) 16 x 4
(video input x video output)
Modular Design No No Yes, (16 x 4)

Looping Inputs Yes, Auto Termination No Yes, with ADULP

Maximum Keyboards/Users 8 244 (32 per unit) 128

Internal Video Loss Detection Yes Yes Yes (AD2010DBVL)

CPU Hot Switch Option No No Yes, inherent

Windows Setup Package No Yes Yes

System Programming Back-up Yes Yes Yes

Macro Control Via ADCC1100 & AD2089 Via ADCC1100 & AD2089 Via ADCC1100 & AD2089

Multiple Languages Yes Yes Yes

Multi-Site Control Yes Yes Yes


512
(16 via patch panel, 4,096 via AD2096,
Alarm Inputs 16 or 32
144 via domes, 48 via video loss AD2083 or RS-232
and 512 via RS-232)
Alarm Tables 1 10 10

Alarm Titles Yes Yes Yes

Text Messaging on Alarm No Yes Yes

On Screen Text Yes Yes Yes

Preset Titles No 4,096 No

Views/View Titles Yes No No

Individual Monitor Tours No Yes Yes

Universal Tours 16 64 64

Salvo Switching No 64 64

System Partitioning Yes Yes Yes

Priority Levels 8 8 8

User Passwords No 64 64

Event Timers No 35 (also includes alarm table) 35

Monitor Status Menu No Yes No


SensorNet, AD RS-422, Manchester, Manchester,
Dome Protocol
AD-UTC, and FSK SensorNet, and AD RS-422 SensorNet, and AD RS-422
American Dynamics Data Line No No Yes

American Dynamics 100


Matrix Switchers

Merchants get the goods on

shoplifting and internal theft with

the MegaPower LT and 48 Plus,

reducing shrinkage and increasing

their bottom line.

MegaPower LT:

• E
 mbedded menus support English, • N
 etwork up to three matrix systems
French, Spanish, German, and Italian on ADnet (RS-485) bus MODEL NUMBERS
• 16 x 4 or 32 x 8 models • D ome ping test ADMPLT16 ADMPLT32

• L ooping inputs, auto terminated • S ystem partitioning


ADMPLT16C2 ADMPLT32C2
• S
 ensorNet or American Dynamics • V ideo loss detection on all channels (w i th C o n tro l C e n te r (w i th C o n tro l C e n te r
UTC
• 1
 6 alarm inputs with 1 relay output 20 0 Key b o a rd ) 20 0 Key b o a rd )
• C
 ontrol of RS-422 domes using the (16 channel model) 32 alarm inputs
SensorNet to RS-422 converter with 2 relay outputs (32 channel ADMPLT32C3
ADMPLT16C3
model)
• D
 irectSet function for changing dome (w i th C o n tro l C e n te r (w i th C o n tro l C e n te r
settings • A larm titles 3 0 0 Key b o a rd ) 3 0 0 Key b o a rd )

• 1
 28 views (camera/preset and • F ive alarm display modes
camera/pattern)
• T hree alarm response modes
• 16 sequences/tours
• S
 end alarm messages to other
• A
 Dnet (RS-485) and RS-232 networked matrix systems
communication protocols
• 255 event messages
• K
 eyboard generated (soft alarm) and
• D imensions:
RS-485 network events
90 x 445 x 185 mm (3.5 x 17.5 x 7.3 in)
• U
 p to eight keyboards with priority
• Weight: 3.5 kg (7.7 lbs)
settings
• Password protection for menu entry
Matrix Switchers

MegaPower 48 Plus:

• 3
 flexible expansion modes using a • O
 ptional Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP)
primary/secondary configuration of up adapter module allows installation with MODEL NUMBERS
to 7 systems and 288 cameras simple UTP cable for video
ADMP48-E
• Ethernet
 Cat 5 IP connection for multi- • F
 ull embedded system menus for easy
matrix communications and system system setup Accessory
setup
• R
 emovable flash memory module for VR48KIT
• E
 ASY 48 configuration and monitoring data backup without a PC ( R a c k m o u n t k i t fo r M e g a Powe r 4 8)
software for Windows based systems
• User-defined macros
• D ome ping test and status display VRCMKIT
• S
 upports wireless text messaging on
( M atr i x c a b l e m a n a g e m e n t k i t, r a c k o r
• Improved legacy RS-422 dome alarm for pagers and cellular phones
support, including simplex RS-422 wa l l m o u n t a b l e, i n c l u d e s 3 b r a c ke ts)
• 4096 preset titles, 250 alarm titles
• S
 ensorNet/RS-232 command for
• D
 edicated alarm programming tables
DirectSet dome control menu with
that differentiate between alarm
ControlCenter 200 and 300 series
sources
keyboards
• E
 ight flexible RS-232 inputs,
• M
 odular microprocessor-based, high-
expandable to 32 (per system)
density matrix
• 64 system tours and 64 salvos
• 4
 8 video inputs by 16 video outputs, 8
video outputs with text overlay • D imensions:
508 x 438 x 89 mm
• S
 upports both NTSC and PAL video
(20 x 17.3 x 3.5 in)
standards
• Weight:
• S
 lim, vertical wall-mount design;
Main Electronics Unit: 2.72 kg (6 lbs)
optional rack mount kit available
Wall Bracket: 1.54 kg (3.4 lbs)
• T
 ool-free removability of main Patch Panel Assembly: 1.72 kg (3.8 lbs)
electronics unit (MEU) keeps system
wiring intact

American Dynamics 102


Matrix Switchers

Scalable and Flexible


for a Future-Proof
System
The MegaPower 3200 expands
upon the time proven MegaPower
1024 matrix switcher, providing
up to 3200 video inputs and 256
outputs.

MegaPower 3200:

• S
 ingle CPU with 16 RS-232 ports • 1
 0/100 Base-T Ethernet network connection entries for inputs or optional Internal video
supporting up to 64 keyboards via for PC - based configuration, firmware loss detection
American Dynamics port expanders updates, activity logging, snapshot, and
• 1
 28 alarm text messages can be defined
email text messaging
• D
 ual units connected together via cross with 25 alarm display/clearance modes, and
over cables provide 32 RS-232 ports • A
 ctivity logging and reporting of user 16 email messages
supporting up to 128 keyboards with control, alarms, and configuration changes
• L
 CD for CPU status and LED indicators for
American Dynamics port expanders to a network PC
port activity
• D
 ual CPU mode provides redundant CPU • S
 ingle CPU systems with up to 128 video
• E
 asy swap out of CPU modules without
backup protection with fault detection and outputs and dual CPU systems of up to 256
removing system cables
hot-switch failover to ensure uninterrupted video outputs
system operation • S
 tore snapshot of important scenes to
• U p to 3200 video inputs
network PC upon request
• E
 nhanced Administration SYstem (EASY)
• S
 atellite-connection of up to 30 systems
configuration and monitoring software • M
 ultilingual software supports English,
provides full cross-point video matrix of up
tool to retrieve, archive, and load back French, Italian, German, Spanish, and
to 38,528 video inputs by 256 video outputs
MegaPower CPU data Portuguese
• A
 utomatic call-up of alarms defined by four
time-controlled tables each with 4,096

Model Number Guide


BRAND FAMILY SYSTEM INPUTS Remote Inputs OUTPUTS FORMATS

AD MPR V xxxx -- yyy X


American MegaPower {blank} = standard system # of inputs, – = s tandard BNC inputs # of outputs, N = 1 20 VAC (+ or
Dynamics V = factory install video increments of on VIM Back Panels increments of - 10%), 50-60
loss detection 16, up to 3200 S = a ll VIM4 & Remote 4, up to 256 Hz, UL & CSA
(i.e. 16, 32... Panels (30 inch (i.e. 4, 8...256) P = 1 00-240 VAC,
3200) cables) 50-60 Hz, CE
L = a ll VIM4 & Remote
Panels (96 inch
cables)

American Dynamics 103


Matrix Switchers
MegaPower 3200 Accessories:
Central Processing Unit
• MegaPower CPU for MegaPower systems, 100-240 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADMPCPU
• RJ45 to screw terminal connector (quick-on connector for easy and clean installation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADACQORJ45

Switcher Bays
• Matrix standard bay for MP3200 system, includes AD2010PS & AD2010DB, 120 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2010N
• Matrix bi-level bay for MP3200 system, includes AD2010PS & AD2010DB, 120 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2020N
• Matrix standard bay for MP3200 system, includes AD2010PS, AD2010PS-1 & AD2010DB, 100-240 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2010P
• Matrix bi-level bay for MP3200 system, includes AD2010PS, AD2010PS-1 & AD2010DB, 100-240 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2020P

Video Input
• Matrix input card for MP3200 systems (no back panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016PC
• Matrix input module for single level MP3200 systems, w/back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016AVIM-1*
• Matrix input module for level 1 of multi-level MP3200 systems, w/back panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016AVIM-2
• Matrix input module for level 2 of multi-level MP3200 systems, w/back panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016AVIM-3
• Matrix input module for additional multi-level MP3200 systems, w/back panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016AVIM-4
• Matrix back panel for AD2016AVIM-1 for MP3200 systems (no input card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016BP-1*
• Matrix back panel for AD2016AVIM-2 for MP3200 systems (no input card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016BP-2
• Matrix back panel for AD2016AVIM-3 for MP3200 systems (no input card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016BP-3
• Matrix back panel for AD2016AVIM-4 for MP3200 systems (no input card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016BP-4

Video Output
• Matrix output module for 960 input MP3200 system, w/single-width back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2024BVOM-1*
• Matrix output module for 1920 input MP3200 system, w/double-width back panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2024BVOM-3
• Matrix output module for 3200 input MP3200 system, w/double-width back panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2024BVOM-4
• Matrix back panel for AD2024BVOM-1, for MP3200 systems (no output card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2024BP-1*
• Matrix back panel for AD2024BVOM-3, for MP3200 systems (no output card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2024BP-3
• Matrix back panel for AD2024BVOM-4, for MP3200 systems (no output card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2024BP-4
• Matrix output card for AD2024BVOM, for MP3200 systems (no back panel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2024BPC

Data Buffers
• Matrix data receiver/buffer module for MP3200 systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2010DB
• Matrix video loss detector module for 256 inputs for MP3200 (upgrade kit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2010DBVLKIT

Power Supply
• Matrix power supply module for MP3200 systems, 120 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2010PS
• Matrix power supply module for MP3200 systems, 100-240 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2010PS-1*

Looping Panel Accessories


• Matrix cable, 76 cm (30 in), for looping between AD168 & MP3200 system levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016CB
• Matrix cable, 244 cm (96 in), for looping between AD168 & MP3200 system levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016CB8
• Matrix universal looping panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADULP
• Matrix universal looping panel, two 76 cm (30 in) coaxial ribbon cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADULP-30
• Matrix universal looping panel, two 244 cm (96 in) coaxial ribbon cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADULP-96
• Matrix terminator cap for AD2016AVIM-3, AD2016AVIM-4, & AD168VIM-4 (16 inputs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016TERM

Upgrade Kits
• Matrix upgrade for 8 input cards, AD2016PC/VIM-x, for more than 1024 inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016FWKIT
• Matrix upgrade for 2 DBVL cards, AD2010DBVL, for more than 1024 inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2010VLFWKIT
• Expansion labels for VOM-1 systems greater than 128 outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADVOM-1LABEL
• Expansion labels for VOM-3 systems greater than 1024 input x 128 outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADVOM-3LABEL
• Expansion labels for VOM-4 systems greater than 1024 input x 128 outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADVOM-4LABEL

* In this case, 1 does not signify PAL.

American Dynamics 104


Matrix Switchers

ADTTE

AD2089

ADTTE Touch Tracker + AD2089:

ADTTE Touch Tracker Keyboard AD2089 System Keyboard


• V
 ariable-speed tracker ball control of • V
 ariable-speed, vector-solving, twist-to- MODEL NUMBERS
pan/tilt zoom joystick for pan/tilt/zoom control ADTTE

• C
 amera, monitor, and satellite site • C
 amera, monitor, recorder, and satellite
selection site selection AD2089

• Preset, pattern, and auxiliary control • 1000 user-defined macros


AD2089-1
• Tour and salvo control • Preset, pattern, and auxiliary control
• Alarm control • Tour and salvo control AD2089R

• D imensions: • D imensions:
130 x 194 x 260 mm 76.2 x 419 x 133 mm AD2089R-1
(5.12 x 7.63 x 10.24 in) (3 x 16.5 x 5.25 in)
• Weight: 1 kg (2.2 lbs) • Weight: 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs)

American Dynamics 105


Matrix Keyboards

Double Duty
You can use ControlCenter
200 & 300 Keyboards with our
MegaPower Matrix Switcher/
Controller systems. Get all of the
basic functions at an affordable
price plus the versatility to control
all system activities from one
keyboard.

ADCC0200 series

ADCC0300 series

ControlCenter 200 + ControlCenter 300:

• C
 hoice of models with variable- • P
 asscode protection for
speed and vector solving joysticks programming functions MODEL NUMBERS
• S
 electable keyboard protocols, • D
 irect control of RS-232 devices via ADCC0200
RS-232 or ADnet (RS-485) for remappable keys (ADnet – RS-485 N o p owe r s u p p l y
control of various matrix switching Mode)
systems
• M
 egaPower 3200, 48, 168, and ADCC0200P
• LCD with adjustable contrast 1024 control (RS-232 Mode) I n c l u d e s p owe r s u p p l y

• T
 actile, color-coded elastomeric • C
 ontrolCenter 200 allows no
keys programming access – “operate ADCC0300
only” (RS-232 Mode) N o p owe r s u p p l y
• P reset, pattern, and auxiliary control
• D imensions:
• L ens, alarm, tour, and salvo control
80 x 340 x 132 mm ADCC0300P
• N
 ew DirectSet dome function (3.1 x 13 x 5.2 in) I n c l u d e s p owe r s u p p l y
control
• Weight: 1.5 kg (3.3 lbs)
Remote Kits
ADCCACPSP

American Dynamics 106


Matrix Switchers

MegaPower ControlCenter 1100:


• L
 ean and sophisticated design with • C
 amera, monitor, recorder, and satellite
adjustable tilt feet site selection MODEL NUMBERS
• S
 mart card access provides three levels • P reset, pattern, and auxiliary control ADCC1100
of user access: operator, supervisor, and
• L ens control keys
administrator Accessories
• A larm management MP1000SC3
• 6
 4 customizable macro keys with
8 keys per named macro family group • R
 emappable iris and focus keys allow one- (S m a r t c a rd 3 - p a c k )
handed camera control
• 1
 000 user-defined macros stored on smart
cards • Tour and salvo control MP1000SCA
(S p a re a d m i n i s tr ato r c a rd )
• L arge back-lit LCD with brightness control • Rack mount kit included
• C
 amera view, camera control, and monitor • D imensions: MP-PSU
partitioning via the smart card 451 x 203 x 73 mm ( Powe r s u p p l y u n i t)
(17.8 x 8 x 2.9 in)
• U ser ID options via the smart card
• Weight: 2.4 kg (5.3 lbs) MP-CBL
• Integrated smart card programmer/reader
(C a b l e)
• S oft-key driven menu options
• V
 ariable-speed, vector-solving, twist-to- MP-KMI
zoom joystick for pan/tilt/zoom control ( E x te r n a l i n te rc o n n e c t m o d u l e)

American Dynamics 107


Matrix System Accessories
Matrix System Accessories
Protocol Devices
• Matrix code generator, 1 HighSpeed Data input to 64 Manchester outputs, 120 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2091
• Matrix code generator, 1 HighSpeed Data input to 64 Manchester outputs, 230 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2091-1
• Matrix code distributor, 1 HighSpeed Data or Manchester to 16 RS-422, 120 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2083-02C
• Matrix code distributor, 1 HighSpeed Data or Manchester to 16 RS-422, 230 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2083-02C-1
• Matrix code distributor upgrade kit AD2083 -02 to -02C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2083-02CKIT
• SensorNet /Manchester Distribution Panel, no power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADACSNETD
• SensorNet Distribution Panel, w/power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADACSNETDP
• RS-422 Distribution Panel, no power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADAC4222D
• RS-422 Distribution Panel, w/power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADAC4222DP
• Matrix code converter, SensorNet to RS-422, 120 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCSN422
• Matrix port expander, expands 1 RS-232 port to 4 RS-232 ports, 120 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2081
• Matrix port expander, expands 1 RS-232 port to 4 RS-232 ports, 230 VAC. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2081-1

Auxiliary Follower Devices


• Matrix switcher/follower, provides 32 relays to follow video switching, 120 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2031
• Matrix switcher/follower, provides 32 relays to follow video switching, 230 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2031-1
• Matrix auxiliary follower, provides 32 relays to follow aux outputs, 120 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2033
• Matrix auxiliary follower, provides 32 relays to follow aux outputs, 230 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2033-1

Alarm Devices
• Matrix alarm interface unit, provides 64 alarm inputs, 120 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2096A
• Matrix alarm interface unit, provides 64 alarm inputs, 230 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2096-1
• Matrix alarm responder, provides 32 relays to follow alarm monitor, 120 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2032
• Matrix alarm responder, provides 32 relays to follow alarm monitor, 230 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2032-1

Power Supply
• Additional power supply120/230 VAC for ADAC1100, ADMPLT16/32, ADMP48-E or ADMPCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP-PSU

There are few places where security is more crucial

than a prison. Matrix switchers from American

Dynamics give corrections officials time-tested

technology they can rely on to keep everything

under lock and key.

American Dynamics 108


MegaPower LT
System Diagram

Video Outputs

Fixed Cameras,
Intellex Digital Video
SpeedDomes, or
Management Systems
Mini-Domes

MegaPower LT

Alarm Inputs RS-232 Inputs


ADTTE Touch Tracker,
MegaPower 1100,
ControlCenter 200, & 300,
& AD2089 Keyboards

Integrate up to three MegaPower LT units and control everything from any keyboard on the network. By forming a distributed system, you can
view and control cameras installed at different points throughout your property as well as receive and acknowledge any alarm events that they
generate.

American Dynamics 109


MegaPower 48 Plus
System Diagram

Video Outputs

Fixed Cameras,
SpeedDomes, or
Intellex Digital Video Mini-Domes
Management Systems

MegaPower 48 Plus

RS-232 Inputs
Alarm Inputs ADTTE Touch Tracker,
System Setup
MegaPower 1100,
and Programming
ControlCenter 200 & 300,
& AD2089 Keyboards

Choose from one of three expansion modes that increase your system’s capacity by up to 288 cameras and 8 monitors using 8, 12, or 16 video
trunks. The MegaPower 48 Plus can function either as a standalone unit or as part of a network, making it the perfect choice for anyone who
needs flexibility for future growth.

American Dynamics 110


MegaPower 3200
System Diagram

Video Outputs

Fixed Cameras,
SpeedDomes, or
Mini-Domes

Intellex Digital Video


Management Systems

MegaPower 3200

Enhanced Administration
System (EASY) Configuration and Monitoring
ADTTE Touch Tracker,
Software
MegaPower 1100,
ControlCenter 200 & 300,
& AD2089 Keyboards
Alarm Inputs

The MegaPower 3200 matrix switcher supports up to 3200 video inputs, 256 video outputs, 128 keyboards, 4096 alarms, and 30 satellite
systems. The MP3200 provides Intellex DVR control using the AD2089 keyboard and Network Client software, and hot switch capabilities using
a second MPCPU unit with no hot switch accessory unit required. The EASY CPU configuration and monitoring software allows remote
configuration and monitoring.

American Dynamics 111


Integrated Switcher Solution
System Diagram

SpeedDomes,
Mini-Domes,
& Fixed Cameras

Intellex Ultra &


Matrix Switchers Network Client

Live
Recorded
Video
Video Intellex Policy
CCTV Keyboards
Video Analytics Manager, Intellex
Archive Manager
& Browser Client

POS Integration

RAID Storage System or Software House Access Control


Kantech Access Control Third Party Storage

Matrix Switcher Integration Virtual Matrix


Situation: A large casino currently uses analog hardware for their Situation: A business has multiple mid-sized facilities around the
surveillance system, such as matrix switchers, keyboards, and country with cameras monitoring areas like parking lots, visitor
monitors. entrance ways, and loading docks.

Challenge: The casino wants to add the ability to play back recorded Challenge: The security administrator wants to be able to
video on analog monitors and control cameras via a matrix keyboard simultaneously display as many cameras from remote locations as
without having to retrain the operator (no PC keyboard or mouse). possible. However, because each location only needs to monitor a
few areas, installing a matrix switcher at each location is not a
Solution: Add a PC running Network Client and use a serial
cost-effective option.
connection for the AD2089 keyboard – a powerful, easy to use
solution that’s transparent to the operator. Solution: Network Client displays up to 64 cameras with four monitors
using the customers existing network infrastructure on which the
Intellex digital video management systems are installed. A single
mouse-click or stroke of the keyboard will manage the “wall of
monitors” via Network Client.

American Dynamics 112


Monitors
Retailers everywhere are

adopting American Dynamics

LCD monitors. Our sleek new

PVMs blend in beautifully

where visual appeal matters

most: on the sales floor. But

even more impressive are

the results they produce.

Install them and watch as

employee fraud and error

drop dramatically - the kind

of losses that are impossible

to detect without this

technology.
LCD Monitors

W
e provide a comprehensive range of monitors. Our screen resolution and crystal clear

imaging make surveillance easier to perform and more accurate. Whether you require

single or multiple inputs, a shallow profile or heavy duty metal cabinet, American Dynamics can deliver the

right monitor for the job. Every monitor we offer complies with universal mounting standards so you can

install our products wherever you need them.

General Purpose LCD Monitors Public View Monitors (PVM)


Minimize your spatial requirements and get brighter, better pictures Some of our monitors are designed specifically for public view
with our flat panel LCD Monitors. At less than 2-inches thick, these applications, and feature a white or black case, tempered shatter-
monitors are so light they can be mounted on a wall, ceiling, or resistant glass screen, integrated camera module, and remote
equipment rack. Featuring easy to use on-screen menus, the LCD control for the convenient adjustment of display settings. PVM
monitors automatically configure and calibrate screen resolution and models also include a 12 volt power outlet that lets customers plug
can be manually adjusted as well. Choose from a wide variety of in a second camera directly for ease of installation.
video display sizes and mounting options, to get the best solution for
your application.

American Dynamics 114


Monitors

Monitor Comparison table

Type Screen Size Resolution Video Interface VESA Mounting Monitor Model
General
Purpose 17 in 1280 x 1024 VGA & DVI 75 mm ADCMLCD17
LCD
General
Purpose 19 in 1280 x 1024 VGA & DVI 75 mm ADCMLCD19
LCD
VGA, looping
Multiple
15 in 1024 x 768 Composite (BNC), 75 mm ADMNM1LCD15
Input LCD
looping S-Video
VGA, looping
Multiple
17 in 1280 x 1024 Composite (BNC), 75 mm ADMNM1LCD17
Input LCD
looping S-Video
VGA, 2 looping
Multiple
17 in 1280 x 1024 Composite (BNC), 75 mm & 100 mm ADMNM17LCDP
Input LCD
S-Video
VGA, 2 looping
Multiple
19 in 1280 x 1024 Composite (BNC), 75 mm & 100 mm ADMNM19LCDP
Input LCD
S-Video
VGA, DVI, Composite
Multiple
20 in 1600 x 1200 (RCA), S-Video, 100 mm ADDELL2007
Input LCD
Component
HDMI, DisplayPort,
Multiple VGA, DVI, Composite
24 in 1920 x 1200 100 mm ADDELL2410
Input LCD (RCA), S-Video,
Component

VGA, 2 looping
Multiple
20 in 800 x 600 Composite (BNC), 100 mm ADMNLCD20RK
Input LCD
looping S-Video

VGA, 2 looping ADMNLCD20


Public View
20 in 800 x 600 Composite (BNC), 100 mm
LCD ADMNLCD20W
looping S-Video

Public View
LCD with VGA, 2 looping ADMCA1LCD20B
Integrated 20 in 800 x 600 Composite (BNC), 100 mm
Auto-Iris looping S-Video ADMCA1LCD20W
Camera

LCD, PVM Mounts, and Accessories:


• Auto Iris Camera module, 480 TVL, 1/4 inch, multi-mode inputs for ADMNLCD20 (20 inch) white monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADMCAMODULE
• Auto Iris Camera module, 480 TVL, 1/4 inch, multi-mode inputs for ADMNLCD20 (20 inch) black monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADMCAMODULEB
• Auto Iris memory card reader, multi-format for ADMNLCD20 (20 inch) monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADMLCD20CARD
• Dual LCD monitor mount, VESA 75 & 100mm, pendant, black, with lanyard, 80 lbs max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDUALLCDPL
• Dual LCD monitor mount, VESA 75 & 100mm, pendant, white, with lanyard, 80 lbs max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDUALLCDPWL
• LCD & PVM mount, VESA 75 & 100mm, pendant mount, black, with lanyard, 40 lbs max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADMMTLCDPL
• LCD & PVM mount, VESA 75 & 100mm, pendant mount, white, with lanyard, 40 lbs max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADMMTLCDPWL
• LCD & PVM mount, VESA 75 & 100mm, wall mount, with lanyard, 18 lbs max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADMMTLCDWL
• LCD & PVM mount, VESA 75 & 100mm, wall mount, articulating arm, with lanyard, black, 25 lbs max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADMNMTLCDWAL
• LCD & PVM mount, VESA 75 & 100mm, pivot wall mount, black, with lanyard, 25 lbs max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RHSP730PL2
• 19” Rack Mount Kit in support of LCD monitors ADMNM1LCD15 and ADMNM1LCD17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADMNLCDRKMNT
• 19” Rack Mount Kit in support of LCD monitor ADMNM17LCDP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADMNRKT17
• 19” Rack Mount Kit in support of LCD monitor ADMNM19LCDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADMNRKT19

Check with your sales representative for special monitor applications.

American Dynamics 115


Video Accessories
Get the most out of your video

security equipment with our

full line of accessories and

watch theft and other problems

disappear
Video Accessories
Video Line Amplifier
• Video accessory, video line amplifier, 120 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD1422

Video Distribution Amplifiers


• Video accessory, distribution amplifier, 1 input/4 output, 120 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD1421

Video Adapters
• Cable accessory, twisted pair to BNC adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADACTP01BNC

Fixed Camera + Dome Power Supplies


• 16 outputs, 120 VAC to 24 VAC (168 VA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADC1624UL
• 8 outputs, 120 VAC to 24 VAC (84 VA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADC824UL
• 1 output, 120 VAC to 24 VAC (30 VA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADC124
• 1 output, 230 VAC to 12 VDC (.5A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADC112
• 1 output, 120/240 VAC to 24 VAC for Optima/Ultra domes, outdoor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADSPOT
• 1 output, 12 VDC (1A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADC1121A

Parking garages become safer places when American

Dynamics SpeedDome programmable dome cameras are

on the job.

American Dynamics 117


Index
2107-0006-01 . . . . . . . . . . 59 ADACTP01BNC . . . . . . . . 117 ADD400LTPV025 . . . . . . . . 73
AD1301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 ADC124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ADD400LTPV050 . . . . . . . . 73
AD1301DCM . . . . . . . . . . . 51 ADC660N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 ADD600DVDV050 . . . . . . . 74
AD1303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 ADC660P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 ADD600DVDV100 . . . . . . . 74
AD1303DCM . . . . . . . . . . . 51 ADC720D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 ADD600DVPV050 . . . . . . . 74
AD1303RK . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 ADC720DW . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 ADD600DVPV100 . . . . . . . 74
AD1314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 ADC722WP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 ADD600DVSV025 . . . . . . . 74
AD1314-B24 . . . . . . . . . . . 52 ADC723PIR . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 ADD600DVSV050 . . . . . . . 74
AD1314-H24 . . . . . . . . . . . 52 ADC733 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 ADD600LTPV025 . . . . . . . . 73
AD1314-HB24 . . . . . . . . . . 52 ADC824UL . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ADD600LTPV050 . . . . . . . . 73
AD1314-SS . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 ADC1362 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 ADD600ULPV100 . . . . . . . . 71
AD1421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ADC1624UL . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ADD600ULPV200 . . . . . . . . 71
AD1422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ADCBMCRNR . . . . . . . . . . 54 ADD600ULPV300 . . . . . . . . 71
AD2010DB . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADCBMCRNRO . . . . . . . . . 54 ADD600ULPV400 . . . . . . . . 71
AD2010DBVLKIT . . . . . . . 104 ADCBMPEND . . . . . . . . . . 54 ADD600URP300 . . . . . . . . 71
AD2010N . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADCBMPOLE . . . . . . . . . . . 54 ADD800DVDV050 . . . . . . . 74
AD2010P . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADCBMWALL . . . . . . . . . . . 54 ADD800DVDV100 . . . . . . . 74
AD2010PS . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADCC0200 . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 ADD800DVPV050 . . . . . . . . 74
AD2010PS-1 . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADCC0200P . . . . . . . . . . 106 ADD800DVPV100 . . . . . . . 74
AD2010VLFWKIT . . . . . . . 104 ADCC0300 . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 ADD800DVSV025 . . . . . . . 74
AD2016AVIM-1 . . . . . . . . 104 ADCC0300P . . . . . . . . . . 106 ADD800LTPV025 . . . . . . . . 73
AD2016AVIM-2 . . . . . . . . 104 ADCC1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 ADD800LTPV050 . . . . . . . . 73
AD2016AVIM-3 . . . . . . . . 104 ADCCACPSP . . . . . . . . . . 106 ADD900ULPV100 . . . . . . . . 71
AD2016AVIM-4 . . . . . . . . 104 ADCDMCRNR . . . . . . . . . . 54 ADD900ULPV200 . . . . . . . . 71
AD2016BP-1 . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADCDMCRNRO . . . . . . . . . 54 ADD900ULPV300 . . . . . . . . 71
AD2016BP-2 . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADCDMELEC . . . . . . . . . . . 54 ADD900ULPV400 . . . . . . . . 71
AD2016BP-3 . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADCDMPEND . . . . . . . . . . 54 ADDELL2007 . . . . . . . . . . 115
AD2016BP-4 . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADCDMPOLE . . . . . . . . . . . 54 ADDIP100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
AD2016CB . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADCDMWALL . . . . . . . . . . 54 ADDIP200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
AD2016CB8 . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADCDSLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 ADDSAM43U10 . . . . . . . . . 92
AD2016FWKIT . . . . . . . . . 104 ADCEMCRNR . . . . . . . . . . 53 ADDSAM43U25 . . . . . . . . . 92
AD2016PC . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADCEMFLUSH . . . . . . . . . . 53 ADDSAM43UUL . . . . . . . . . 92
AD2016TERM . . . . . . . . . 104 ADCEMHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 ADDSPM43U10 . . . . . . . . . 92
AD2020N . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADCEMPENDCAP . . . . . . . 53 ADDSPM43U25 . . . . . . . . . 92
AD2020P . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADCEMWALL . . . . . . . . . . . 53 ADDSPM43UUL . . . . . . . . . 92
AD2024BP . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADch10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 ADEIP4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
AD2024BP-1 . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADch10H . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 ADEIP4PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
AD2024BP-3 . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADch10HB . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 ADEIP4PWRS . . . . . . . . . . 64
AD2024BP-4 . . . . . . . . . . 104 ADch10MT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 ADEIP4RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
AD2024BVOM-1 . . . . . . . 104 ADCH10SS . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 ADEIP4RS232 . . . . . . . . . . 64
AD2024BVOM-3 . . . . . . . 104 ADCHMTCEIL . . . . . . . . . . 52 ADEIP4WM . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
AD2024BVOM-4 . . . . . . . 104 ADCHMTPED . . . . . . . . . . . 52 ADEIP8M . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 97
AD2031 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ADCHMTPOLE . . . . . . . . . . 52 ADHDRSS250 . . . . . . . . . . 97
AD2031-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ADCHMTWALL . . . . . . . . . 52 ADHDRSS400 . . . . . . . . . . 97
AD2032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ADCIEH0309CN . . . . . . . . . 26 ADHDRSS500 . . . . . . . . . . 97
AD2032-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ADCIEH0309CP . . . . . . . . . 26 ADHDRSS750 . . . . . . . . . . 97
AD2033 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ADCIEH0309TN . . . . . . . . . 26 ADHDRSS1000 . . . . . . . . . 97
AD2033-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ADCIEH0309TP . . . . . . . . . 26 ADMC1361 . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
AD2081 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ADCIEH0922CN . . . . . . . . . 26 ADMC1363 . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
AD2081-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ADCIEH0922CP . . . . . . . . . 26 ADMC1365 . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
AD2083-02C . . . . . . . . . . 108 ADCIEH0922TN . . . . . . . . . 26 ADMC1366 . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
AD2083-02C-1 . . . . . . . . . 108 ADCIEH0922TP . . . . . . . . . 26 ADMCA1LCD20B . . . . . . . 115
AD2083-02CKIT . . . . . . . . 108 ADCLVF3212DC . . . . . . . . . 49 ADMCA1LCD20W . . . . . . 115
AD2089-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 ADCLVF3212MI . . . . . . . . . 49 ADMCAMODULE . . . . . . . 115
AD2089R . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 ADCM100T . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 ADMLCD20CARD . . . . . . 115
AD2089R-1 . . . . . . . . . . . 105 ADCMLCD17 . . . . . . . . . . 115 ADMNLCD20 . . . . . . . . . . 115
AD2091 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ADCMLCD19 . . . . . . . . . . 115 ADMNLCD20RK . . . . . . . . 115
AD2091-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ADCMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 ADMNLCD20W . . . . . . . . 115
AD2096-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ADCSHR0230P . . . . . . . . . 31 ADMNM1LCD15 . . . . . . . 115
AD2096A . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ADCSHR2412N . . . . . . . . . 31 ADMNM1LCD17 . . . . . . . 115
ADAC4222D . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ADCSHR2412P . . . . . . . . . 31 ADMNM17LCD . . . . . . . . 115
ADAC4222DP . . . . . . . . . 108 ADCTDN0230P . . . . . . . . . 31 ADMNM19LCD . . . . . . . . 115
ADACHDDC500 . . . . . . . . . 78 ADCTDN2412N . . . . . . . . . 31 ADMP48-E . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
ADACHDDC1000 . . . . . . . . 78 ADCTDN2412P . . . . . . . . . 31 ADMPCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
ADACHULP . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 ADD6R0DVDV050 . . . . . . . 74 ADMPLT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
ADACQORJ45 . . . . . . . . . 104 ADD6R0DVDV150 . . . . . . . 74 ADMPLT16C2 . . . . . . . . . 101
ADACSNET . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 ADD6R0DVPV050 . . . . . . . 74
ADACSNETD . . . . . . . . . . 108 ADD6R0DVPV100 . . . . . . . 74
ADACSNETDP . . . . . . . . . 108 ADD6R0DVPV150 . . . . . . . 74

American Dynamics 118


Index
ADMPLT16C3 . . . . . . . . . 101 ADSDUHOC . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 LIRC2811CS . . . . . . . . . . . 49
ADMPLT32 . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 ADSDUHOS . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 MP1000SC3 . . . . . . . . . . 107
ADMPLT32C2 . . . . . . . . . 101 ADSDUHOVC . . . . . . . . . . . 39 MP1000SCA . . . . . . . . . . 107
ADMPLT32C3 . . . . . . . . . 101 ADSDUHOVS . . . . . . . . . . . 39 MP-CBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
ADRSS030TB . . . . . . . . . . 97 ADSDUIOB . . . . . . . . . . 16, 45 MP-KMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
ADRSS030TBH . . . . . . . . . 97 ADSDUIOBW . . . . . . . . . . . 16 MP-PSU . . . . . . . . . . 107, 108
ADRSS060TB . . . . . . . . . . 97 ADSDUPIHC . . . . . . . . . . . 40 RASELHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ADRSS060TBH . . . . . . . . . 97 ADSDUPIHS . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 RASELHC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ADRSS090TBHP . . . . . . . . 97 ADSDUPIVRC . . . . . . . . . . 40 RASELHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ADRSS090TBHPH . . . . . . . 97 ADSDUPIVRS . . . . . . . . . . . 40 RASELHS-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ADRSS120TBHP . . . . . . . . 97 ADSPOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 RASELPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ADRSS120TBHPH . . . . . . . 97 ADTT16E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 RASELPC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ADSDU822I2X2N . . . . . . . . 17 ADTTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 RASELPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ADSDU822I2X2P . . . . . . . . 17 ADULP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 RASELPS-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ADSDU822I2X2SN . . . . . . . 17 ADULP-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 RASONPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ADSDU822I2X2SP . . . . . . . 17 ADULP-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 RASONPC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ADSDU822IHN . . . . . . . . . . 17 ADVEIPSD22N. . . . . . . . . . . . 6 RASONPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ADSDU822IHP . . . . . . . . . . 17 ADVESDHIC . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 RASONPS-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ADSDU822IHSN . . . . . . . . 17 ADVOM-1LABEL . . . . . . . 104 RCSN422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
ADSDU822IHSP . . . . . . . . . 17 ADVOM-3LABEL . . . . . . . 104 RDULTRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
ADSDU822ION . . . . . . . . . . 16 ADVOM-4LABEL . . . . . . . 104 RDVEXP01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
ADSDU822IOP . . . . . . . . . . 16 C2116-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 RDVEXP02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
ADSDU822N . . . . . . . . . . . 16 C2122-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 RDVSPK01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
ADSDU822OPCN . . . . . . . . 17 CPAKI3302-12 . . . . . . . . . . 35 RDVUSB23201 . . . . . . . . . 78
ADSDU822OPCP . . . . . . . . 17 CPAKI3303-8 . . . . . . . . . . . 35 RH2X2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
ADSDU822OPCWN . . . . . . 17 CPAKIP3302-12 . . . . . . . . . 35 RH311 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
ADSDU822OPCWP . . . . . . . 17 CPAKIP3303-8 . . . . . . . . . . 35 RH410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
ADSDU822P . . . . . . . . . . . 16 CPAKIPSHR2-12N . . . . . . . 35 RHCLRVRKIT . . . . . . . . 39, 40
ADSDU822WION . . . . . . . . 16 CPAKIPSHR3-8N . . . . . . . . 35 RHIU2X2M . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
ADSDU822WIOP . . . . . . . . 16 CPAKISHR3-8N . . . . . . . . . 35 RHIU2X2P . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
ADSDU822WN . . . . . . . . . . 16 CPAKISHR3-12N . . . . . . . . 35 RHIU3X3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
ADSDU822WP . . . . . . . . . . 16 CPAKIW3302-12 . . . . . . . . 35 RHIU4X4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
ADSDU835I2X2N . . . . . . . . 17 CPAKIW3303-8 . . . . . . . . . 35 RHIUAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
ADSDU835I2X2P . . . . . . . . 17 CPAKIW3305-50 . . . . . . . . 35 RHIUCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
ADSDU835I2X2SN . . . . . . . 17 CPAKIWSHR2-12N . . . . . . . 35 RHIUFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
ADSDU835I2X2SP . . . . . . . 17 CPAKIWSHR3-8N . . . . . . . . 35 RHIUHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
ADSDU835IHN . . . . . . . . . . 17 CPAKIWSHR5-50N . . . . . . 35 RHIUIBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
ADSDU835IHP . . . . . . . . . . 17 CPAKO3302-12 . . . . . . . . . 35 RHIULWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
ADSDU835IHSN . . . . . . . . 17 CPAKO3303-8 . . . . . . . . . . 35 RHIUTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
ADSDU835IHSP . . . . . . . . . 17 CPAKO3305-50 . . . . . . . . . 35 RHOLW . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43
ADSDU835ION . . . . . . . . . . 16 CPAKOP3302-12 . . . . . . . . 35 RHopn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
ADSDU835IOP . . . . . . . . . . 16 CPAKOP3303-8 . . . . . . . . . 35 RHOPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ADSDU835N . . . . . . . . . . . 16 CPAKOP3305-50 . . . . . . . . 35 RHOSW . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43
ADSDU835OPCN . . . . . . . . 17 CPAKOPSHR2-12N . . . . . . 35 RHOTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ADSDU835OPCP . . . . . . . . 17 CPAKOPSHR3-8N . . . . . . . 35 RHOWCA . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43
ADSDU835OPCWN . . . . . . 17 CPAKOPSHR5-50N . . . . . . 35 RHOWPA . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43
ADSDU835OPCWP . . . . . . 17 CPAKOPTDN2-11N . . . . . . 35 RHSDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
ADSDU835P . . . . . . . . . . . 16 CPAKOPTDN3-8N . . . . . . . 35 RHSMKVRKIT . . . . . . . 39, 40
ADSDU835WION . . . . . . . . 16 CPAKOPTDN10-40N . . . . . 35 RHTBAR3-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
ADSDU835WIOP . . . . . . . . 16 CPAKOSHR2-12N . . . . . . . 35 RHTBAR-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
ADSDU835WN . . . . . . . . . . 16 CPAKOSHR3-8N . . . . . . . . 35 RJ1SNUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
ADSDU835WP . . . . . . . . . . 16 CPAKOSHR5-50N . . . . . . . 35 RJ1SNUD-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
ADSDUDH0922ION . . . . . . 45 CPAKOTDN2-11N. . . . . . . . 35 RJ6SN . . . . 59, 60, 63, 64, 67
ADSDUDH0922IOP . . . . . . 45 CPAKOTDN10-40N . . . . . . 35 RJ856UD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
ADSDUDH0922N . . . . . . . . 45 DVRM-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 RJ860AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
ADSDUDH0922P . . . . . . . . 45 L1214CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 ROENDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 43
ADSDUDH2506ION . . . . . . 45 L35814CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 ROTRF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ADSDUDH2506IOP . . . . . . 45 L41016CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 RPPJ-M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
ADSDUDH2506N . . . . . . . . 45 L55013CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 RTHINDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
ADSDUDH2506P . . . . . . . . 45 LD0412CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 RTHOUTDR . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
ADSDUDH2506PTN . . . . . . 45 LD0614CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 RVCADAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
ADSDUDH2506PTP . . . . . . 45 LD0812CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 RVEIMKIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
ADSDUDH3895ION . . . . . . 45 LD2616CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 UHRM09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
ADSDUDH3895IOP . . . . . . 45 LD3616CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 VR48KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
ADSDUDH3895N . . . . . . . . 45 LD35814CS . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 VRCMKIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
ADSDUDH3895P . . . . . . . . 45 LD41016CS . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
ADSDUDH3895PTN . . . . . . 45 LD55013CS . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
ADSDUDH3895PTP . . . . . . 45 LIRC0308CS . . . . . . . . . . . 49
ADSDUDPTB . . . . . . . . . . . 45 LIRC1040CS . . . . . . . . . . . 49
w w w . a meric a ndy n a mic s .n et

© 2011 Tyco International Ltd. and its Respective Companies. All Rights Reserved.

The trademarks, logos, and service marks displayed on this document are registered in the United States [or other countries]. Any misuse of the trademarks is strictly prohibited and Tyco International Ltd. will aggressively enforce its intellectual property rights to the fullest extent of the law, including pursuit of criminal prosecution
wherever necessary. All trademarks not owned by Tyco International Ltd. are the property of their respective owners, and are used with permission or allowed under applicable laws.

Product offerings and specifications are subject to change without notice. Actual products may vary from photos. Not all products include all features. Availability varies by region; contact your sales representative.

AD0200-PG-201101-R01-LT-EN
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
ANNEX 10: METEO STATION DATASHEETS

1. MET ONE

2. STEVENS

Page 40 of 44
MSO Weather Sensor
Wind Speed and Wind Direction are measured using
conventional cup and vane techniques. All other
measurements are housed in a multi-plate naturally aspirated
radiation shield to reduce solar radiation errors. The shield is
constructed of a series of concentric white aluminum plates,
which allow air to flow through the shield, while blocking
direct solar rays.

The temperature sensor is a platinum RTD class 1/3B.


relative humidity is a based on our very accurate solid
state sensor designed for continuous exposure to adverse
climates. The barometric pressure sensor is a piezo-resistive
device designed for robustness, high accuracy needs, as
well as long term stability.

Digital outputs are presented as a data stream every second,


or upon command by data system.

Options:
-- 10600 USB and power interface.
-- WMO compliant external tipping bucket rain gauge
connects simply and allows for correct installation
and siting per industry guidelines.
-- Solar radiation sensors are connected easily and integrate
seamlessly into the SWS data record.

Key Features
• Wind Speed and Direction
• Rugged All Metal Housing
• Temperature
• SDI12, RS232, RS485 Outputs
• Humidity
• Met One 7500 Protocol
• Barometric Pressure
• Integrated Mount and 50ft Cable
• Rain and Solar Radiation Options

Measurements & Specifications


Wind Speed
Range: 0 to 50 m/sec (0 to 112 mph)
Accuracy: ±2% of reading
Resolution: 0.1 m/s
Threshold : 1m/sec
Wind Direction
Range: 0° to 360°
Accuracy: ± 5°
Resolution: 1.0°
Threshold: 1m/sec

1600 Washington Blvd. • Grants Pass, Oregon 97526 • 541.471.7111 • www.metone.com

sales@metone.com
MSO Weather Sensor
Measurements & Specifications (continued)
Temperature
Range: -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F)
Accuracy: ±0.4°C
Resolution: 0.1°C
Relative Humidity
Range: 0 to 100%
Accuracy: ±4% (1)
Resolution: 1.0%
Pressure
Range: 500 to 1100 hPa
Accuracy: ±2 hPa (3)
Resolution: 0.1 hPa
Electrical
Measurement Rate Output: 1 Hz
Signal Output: RS-232C, RS-485, SDI-12
8-36 VDC Supply, 10mA typical @ 12VDC, option dependent
Environmental
Temperature: -40°C to +60°C (-40 to +140 °F)
Humidity: 0 to 100%
Notes:
1. At 25°C

REV OCT. 2013

1600 Washington Blvd. • Grants Pass, Oregon 97526 • 541.471.7111 • www.metone.com

sales@metone.com
Met Station One (MSO)
Five Parameter Weather Station
Features
• Five Weather Parameters:
• Wind Speed
• Wind Direction
• Air Temperature
• Barometric Pressure
• Relative Humidity
• Built-in solar radiation shield
• English or Metric unit outputs
• SDI-12 or RS-232 outputs standard
• RS-485 or RS-422 outputs optional
• Pre-assembled and ready to deploy
out of the box

Applications
Description • Weather stations
• Site surveys
The new Met Station One (MSO) weather station combines five of the most popular
meteorological measurements into one simple, economical package, allowing for • Mobile weather measurement
efficient and accurate comprehensive weather monitoring to be added to any exist- • Verification of weather data from
ing site or new installation. other instruments

The MSO features wind speed, wind direction, temperature, relative humidity,
and barometric pressure sensors. A rainfall measurement option can be added by
integrating a tipping bucket rain gage directly into the serial message being output-
ted by the MSO, or by simply connecting it to another port on a data logger shared
with the MSO.

The pre-assembled MSO is ready for immediate deployment and includes u-bolt
hardware for mounting to a pole, mast, or pipe. The air temperature, humidity, and
barometric pressure sensors are housed in a solar radiation shield positioned below
the mechanical wind direction and speed sensor.

www.stevenswater.com 1.800.452.5272
Met Station One (MSO)
Corporate Headquarters
12067 NE Glenn Widing Drive
Technical Specifications
Suite 106
Portland, Oregon 97220
Power Requirments
800.452.5272 Tel 9 to 17 VDC @ 4 mA
503.445.8000 Communications
503.445.8001 Fax SDI-12 and RS-232 standard
info@stevenswater.com (RS-485 and RS-422 optional)
www.stevenswater.com
Operating Temperature
-40°C to +60°C
Since 1911, Stevens Water
Monitoring Systems, Inc. has Wind Speed and Direction Specifications
provided complete water Speed Range: 0 – 50 m/sec (111.8 mph)
Speed Resolution: 0.1 m/sec (0.22 mph)
monitoring solutions including:
Speed Accuracy: ± 2%
• Water Level Sensors Direction Range: 0 – 360°
• Water Quality Sensors Direction Resolution: 1°
• Soil Moisture Sensors Direction Accuracy: ± 5°
• Chart Recorders Threshold, both Speed & Direction: 1 m/sec (2.23 mph)
• Staff Gages Temperature and Humidity Specifications
• Telemetry Systems Temperature Range: -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F)
• Data Collection Platforms Temperature Resolution: 0.1°C
Temperature Accuracy: ± 0.5°C
Relative Humidity Range: 0 - 100%
Relative Humidity Resolution: 1%
Relative Humidity Accuracy: ± 4%
Barometric Pressure Specifications
Range: 500 – 1100 mbars (14.76 - 32.48 inHg)
Resolution: 0.1 mbar (0.002 inHg)
Accuracy: ± 2 mbars (0.059 inHg)

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part # Description
Met Station One, SDI-12 and RS-232 output
51127
Includes 50 feet of cable and mounting hardware
Met Station One (MSO)
Installation Instructions
Siting
• Find suitable location within cable length of recording electronics / display.
• Locate true north.

Mounting
• Use quick mount u-bolts to install on vertical or horizontal mast, pole or pipe.
• Tighten nuts, keeping sensor level.

Direction Alignment
• Install alignment shoulder screw into wind direction vane hub.
• Align sensor so wind direction counterweight is to the South, vane tail is to true North.

Check Operation
• Check that the vane and cups rotate freely.

RS-232 Configuration
• 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, and no flow control

SDI-12 Configuration
• Default address 0
• Conforms to SDI-12 V1.3

Output String Format


• SSS.S, DDD, +TTT.T, HHH, PPP.P, RRR.RR, XXXX, VV.VV, *CCCC<CR><LF>
• SSS.S = Wind Speed
• DDD = Wind Direction
• +TTT.T = Temperature
• HHH = Relative Humidity
• PPP.P = Barometric Pressure
• RRR.RR = Rain (Optional)
• XXXX = Solar (Future Option)
• VV.VV = Battery Voltage
• *CCCC = Message Checksum

www.stevenswater.com 1.800.452.5272
Met Station One (MSO)
Installation Instructions
Connections
• Run cable to recorder or computer
• Connect using included screw-terminal DB-9 adaptor or solder DB-9 or DB-25.

Wiring
• RED +9 TO +17 VOLTS DC @ 4mA
• BLK POWER COMMON
• WHT RS-232 TX
• BRN RS-232 RX
• GRN RS-232 / SDI-12 COMMON
• BLU SDI-12
• WHT/BRN SHIELD (must be grounded for transient protection to function)

www.stevenswater.com 1.800.452.5272
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
ANNEX 11: PROJECT SCHEDULE

Page 41 of 44
C100-1 Photovoltaic power station 20 MW Project - Guinea-Bissau - - Tender Schedule - Print Date : 26-Sep-18 18:59 Page 1 of 2
Activity ID Activity Name Orig Month
Dur
-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Photovoltaic power station 20 MW Project - Guinea-Bissau 304 Photovoltaic power station 20 MW Project - Guinea-Bissau
A1000 LNTP 0 LNTP
A1020 Site Boundries With Co-ordinates 7 Site Boundries With Co-ordinates
A1030 Geotech Survey 35 Geotech Survey
A1010 Receiving of NTP 0 Receiving of NTP
DESIGN & ENGINEERING
E SUBMISSIONS & APPROVALS 214 DESIGN & ENGINEERING SUBMISSIONS & APPROVALS
DESIGN & ENGINEERING SUBMISSIONS 87 DESIGN & ENGINEERING SUBMISSIONS
A1050 MDL Finalization 7 MDL Finalization
A1060 Bill of Material Finalisation 11 Bill of Material Finalisation
A1070 Desing & Engineering Submissions 30 Desing & Engineering Submissions
A1140 Authority Approvals & Permits 40 Authority Approvals & Permits
A1080 Priority-1 Drawing Submissions 30 Priority-1 Drawing Submissions
A1090 Priority-1 Drawing Approvals 30 Priority-1 Drawing Approvals
A1100 Priority-2 Drawing Submissions 30 Priority-2 Drawing Submissions
A1110 Priority-2 Drawing Approvals 30 Priority-2 Drawing Approvals
A1120 Technical Submissions based on Geotech 30 Technical Submissions based on Geotech
A1130 TechnicalApprovals based onGeotech 30 TechnicalApprovals based onGeotech
A1150 IFC Drawing Release 30 IFC Drawing Release
ORDERING OF MATERIAL 35 ORDERING OF MATERIAL
A1170 MMS 7 MMS
A1190 String Combiner Box 7 String Combiner Box
A1210 Inverters 7 Inverters
A1180 Solar Cable 7 Solar Cable
A1200 PV Module 9 PV Module
A1220 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer 7 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer
A1230 MV Panel & RMUs 7 MV Panel & RMUs
A1240 DC, LT & HT Cable 7 DC, LT & HT Cable
A1250 Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system 14 Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system
A1260 Earthing & other Miscellaneous items 14 Earthing & other Miscellaneous items
SUBCONTRACTING AND SERVICES ORDERING
SUBCONT 57 SUBCONTRACTING AND SERVICES ORDERING
A1280 Order for Tempory Works 15 Order for Tempory Works
A1290 Order for Execution Work 7 Order for Execution Work
MC , MANUFACTURING,
MANU INSPECTION & MDCC 118 MC , MANUFACTURING, INSPECTION & MDCC
A1310 MMS 100 MMS
A1330 String Combiner Box 60 String Combiner Box
A1350 Inverters 85 Inverters
A1320 Solar Cable 50 Solar Cable
A1360 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer 65 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer
A1370 HT Panel 90 HT Panel
A1380 RMUs 80 RMUs
A1340 PV Module 80 PV Module
A1390 DC, LT & HT Cable 70 DC, LT & HT Cable
A1400 Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system 90 Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system
A1410 AC & DC Components & Accessories, FFP, Earthing & other Miscellaneous items 65 AC & DC Components & Accessories, FFP, Earthing & other Miscellaneous items
TRANSPORTATION FROM EX-WORKS TO ON-SITE STORE DELIVERY
TRANSPO 145 TRANSPORTATION FROM EX-WORKS TO ON-SITE STORE DELIVERY
A1460 String Combiner Box -1s Lot 35 String Combiner Box -1s Lot
A1480 PV Module- 1st Lot 45 PV Module- 1st Lot
A1450 Solar Cable 35 Solar Cable
A1470 String Combiner Box Final Lot 35 String Combiner Box Final Lot
A1510 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer 35 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer
A1540 DC, LT & HT Cable 35 DC, LT & HT Cable

Date Revision Checked Approved


TASK filter: All Activities C100-1 - Photovoltaic power station 20 MW Project - Guinea-Bissau 26-Sep-18 TENDER / 00 Planning / Control Depart...
© Primavera Systems, Inc.
C100-1 Photovoltaic power station 20 MW Project - Guinea-Bissau - - Tender Schedule - Print Date : 26-Sep-18 18:59 Page 2 of 2
Activity ID Activity Name Orig Month
Dur
-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

A1500 Inverters 35 Inverters


A1530 RMUs 35 RMUs
A1490 PV Module Final Lot 49 PV Module Final Lot
A1560 Earthing & other Miscellaneous items 35 Earthing & other Miscellaneous items
A1520 HT Panel 35 HT Panel
A1430 MMS & Tracker 1st Lot 35 MMS & Tracker 1st Lot
A1550 Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system 15 Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system
A1440 MMS Last lot 35 MMS Last lot
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
STR WORKS 210 CIVIL & STRUCTURALWORKS
A1580 Site Mobalization 20 Site Mobalization
A1590 Site Preparation Work 35 Site Preparation Work
A1600 Perimeter Construction Fencing 70 Perimeter Construction Fencing
A1610 Site Clearance, Marking and Excavation 100 Site Clearance, Marking and Excavation
A1660 Foundation of Invertor, RMU &Inverter Transformer 65 Foundation of Invertor, RMU &Inverter Transformer
A1700 Civil Work Related of Other Facilities Road, Drainage - Earthing,Perimeter Lighting etc 90 Civil Work Related of Other Facilities Road, Drainage - Earthing,Perimeter Lighting etc
A1710 Transfer Line Structural Works 90 Transfer Line Structural Works
A1680 Civil Work for Main Control Room 70 Civil Work for Main Control Room
A1670 Civil Works ForAuxiliary Transformer 30 Civil Works ForAuxiliary Transformer
A1620 Bottom leg Foundation 70 Bottom leg Foundation
A1650 Civil Foundation For SCB 30 Civil Foundation For SCB
A1640 Cable trench Work 70 Cable trench Work
A1630 Structure Installation 60 Structure Installation
A1690 Foundation for HT Panel 20 Foundation for HT Panel
PV PLANT INSTALLATION
I WORKS 108 PV PLANT INSTALLATION WORKS
A1735 String Combiner Box 50 String Combiner Box
A1740 Solar Panel / PV Module 70 Solar Panel / PV Module
A1755 Transfer Line Cabling 60 Transfer Line Cabling
A1760 Solar Cabling 30 Solar Cabling
A1770 Invertors 30 Invertors
A1810 Earthing installation 55 Earthing installation
A1790 Installation of RMUs 25 Installation of RMUs
A1820 DC & LT Cabling Works 27 DC & LT Cabling Works
A1780 Inverter &Auxilary Transformers 10 Inverter &Auxilary Transformers
A1800 Installation of HT Panels 20 Installation of HT Panels
A1830 HT Cabling & Terminations 20 HT Cabling & Terminations
A1840 Installation of Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system 25 Installation of Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system
A1850 Electromechanical Checks & Verifications 1 Electromechanical Checks & Verifications
A1860 Mech Completion of 100 % Work 1 Mech Completion of 100 % Work
TESTING & COMISSIONING / HO 55 TESTING & COMISSIONING / HO
A1880 Testing of Equipments 25 Testing of Equipments
A1900 Testing of SCADA 20 Testing of SCADA
A1940 As Built Document & Punch Point closure 35 As Built Document & Punch Point closure
A1890 GridAvailaibility 1 GridAvailaibility
A1910 Grid Synchronisation and Stabilisation 5 Grid Synchronisation and Stabilisation
A1920 PR Test 7 PR Test
A1930 Commercial Operation Date 0 Commercial Operation Date
A1950 Site Demobilization 10 Site Demobilization
A1960 Project Handing Over 0 Project Handing Over

Date Revision Checked Approved


TASK filter: All Activities C100-1 - Photovoltaic power station 20 MW Project - Guinea-Bissau 26-Sep-18 TENDER / 00 Planning / Control Depart...
© Primavera Systems, Inc.
C100 - Photovoltaic power station 30 MW Project - Guinea-Bissau - Tender Schedule - Print Date : 26-Sep-18 19:00 Page 1 of 2
Activity ID Activity Name Orig Month
Dur
-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Photovoltaic power station 30 MW Project - Guinea-Bissau


Photovolt 365 Photovoltaic power station 30 MW Project - Guinea-Bissau
A1000 LNTP 0 LNTP
A1020 Site Boundries With Co-ordinates 7 Site Boundries With Co-ordinates
A1030 Geotech Survey 35 Geotech Survey
A1010 Receiving of NTP 0 Receiving of NTP
DESIGN & ENGINEERING
E SUBMISSIONS & APPROVALS 214 DESIGN & ENGINEERING SUBMISSIONS & APPROVALS
DESIGN & ENGINEERING SUBMISSIONS 97 DESIGN & ENGINEERING SUBMISSIONS
A1050 MDL Finalization 7 MDL Finalization
A1060 Bill of Material Finalisation 11 Bill of Material Finalisation
A1070 Desing & Engineering Submissions 35 Desing & Engineering Submissions
A1140 Authority Approvals & Permits 45 Authority Approvals & Permits
A1080 Priority-1 Drawing Submissions 35 Priority-1 Drawing Submissions
A1090 Priority-1 Drawing Approvals 35 Priority-1 Drawing Approvals
A1100 Priority-2 Drawing Submissions 35 Priority-2 Drawing Submissions
A1110 Priority-2 Drawing Approvals 35 Priority-2 Drawing Approvals
A1120 Technical Submissions based on Geotech 35 Technical Submissions based on Geotech
A1130 TechnicalApprovals based onGeotech 35 TechnicalApprovals based onGeotech
A1150 IFC Drawing Release 35 IFC Drawing Release
ORDERING OF MATERIAL 35 ORDERING OF MATERIAL
A1170 MMS 7 MMS
A1190 String Combiner Box 7 String Combiner Box
A1210 Inverters 7 Inverters
A1180 Solar Cable 7 Solar Cable
A1200 PV Module 9 PV Module
A1220 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer 7 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer
A1230 MV Panel & RMUs 7 MV Panel & RMUs
A1240 DC, LT & HT Cable 7 DC, LT & HT Cable
A1250 Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system 14 Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system
A1260 Earthing & other Miscellaneous items 14 Earthing & other Miscellaneous items
SUBCONTRACTING AND SERVICES ORDERING
SUBCONT 62 SUBCONTRACTING AND SERVICES ORDERING
A1280 Order for Tempory Works 15 Order for Tempory Works
A1290 Order for Execution Work 7 Order for Execution Work
MC , MANUFACTURING,
MANU INSPECTION & MDCC 118 MC , MANUFACTURING, INSPECTION & MDCC
A1310 MMS 100 MMS
A1330 String Combiner Box 60 String Combiner Box
A1350 Inverters 85 Inverters
A1320 Solar Cable 50 Solar Cable
A1360 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer 65 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer
A1370 HT Panel 90 HT Panel
A1380 RMUs 80 RMUs
A1340 PV Module 80 PV Module
A1390 DC, LT & HT Cable 70 DC, LT & HT Cable
A1400 Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system 90 Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system
A1410 AC & DC Components & Accessories, FFP, Earthing & other Miscellaneous items 65 AC & DC Components & Accessories, FFP, Earthing & other Miscellaneous items
TRANSPORTATION FROM EX-WORKS TO ON-SITE STORE DELIVERY
TRANSPO 145 TRANSPORTATION FROM EX-WORKS TO ON-SITE STORE DELIVERY
A1460 String Combiner Box -1s Lot 35 String Combiner Box -1s Lot
A1480 PV Module- 1st Lot 45 PV Module- 1st Lot
A1450 Solar Cable 35 Solar Cable
A1470 String Combiner Box Final Lot 35 String Combiner Box Final Lot
A1510 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer 35 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer
A1540 DC, LT & HT Cable 35 DC, LT & HT Cable

Date Revision Checked Approved


TASK filter: All Activities C100 - Photovoltaic power station 30 MW Project - Guinea-Bissau 26-Sep-18 TENDER / 00 Planning / Control Depart...
© Primavera Systems, Inc.
C100 - Photovoltaic power station 30 MW Project - Guinea-Bissau - Tender Schedule - Print Date : 26-Sep-18 19:00 Page 2 of 2
Activity ID Activity Name Orig Month
Dur
-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A1500 Inverters 35 Inverters


A1530 RMUs 35 RMUs
A1490 PV Module Final Lot 49 PV Module Final Lot
A1560 Earthing & other Miscellaneous items 35 Earthing & other Miscellaneous items
A1520 HT Panel 35 HT Panel
A1430 MMS & Tracker 1st Lot 35 MMS & Tracker 1st Lot
A1550 Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system 15 Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system
A1440 MMS Last lot 35 MMS Last lot
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
STR WORKS 239 CIVIL & STRUCTURALWORKS
A1580 Site Mobalization 20 Site Mobalization
A1590 Site Preparation Work 44 Site Preparation Work
A1600 Perimeter Construction Fencing 90 Perimeter Construction Fencing
A1610 Site Clearance, Marking and Excavation 120 Site Clearance, Marking and Excavation
A1660 Foundation of Invertor, RMU &Inverter Transformer 65 Foundation of Invertor, RMU &Inverter Transformer
A1700 Civil Work Related of Other Facilities Road, Drainage - Earthing,Perimeter Lighting etc 110 Civil Work Related of Other Facilities Road, Drainage - Earthing,Perimeter Lighting etc
A1710 Transfer Line Structural Works 90 Transfer Line Structural Works
A1680 Civil Work for Main Control Room 70 Civil Work for Main Control Room
A1670 Civil Works ForAuxiliary Transformer 30 Civil Works ForAuxiliary Transformer
A1620 Bottom leg Foundation 70 Bottom leg Foundation
A1640 Cable trench Work 80 Cable trench Work
A1650 Civil Foundation For SCB 30 Civil Foundation For SCB
A1630 Structure Installation 60 Structure Installation
A1690 Foundation for HT Panel 20 Foundation for HT Panel
PV PLANT INSTALLATION
I WORKS 100 PV PLANT INSTALLATION WORKS
A1735 String Combiner Box 50 String Combiner Box
A1740 Solar Panel / PV Module 70 Solar Panel / PV Module
A1755 Transfer Line Cabling 60 Transfer Line Cabling
A1810 Earthing installation 55 Earthing installation
A1820 DC & LT Cabling Works 27 DC & LT Cabling Works
A1760 Solar Cabling 30 Solar Cabling
A1770 Invertors 30 Invertors
A1790 Installation of RMUs 25 Installation of RMUs
A1780 Inverter &Auxilary Transformers 10 Inverter &Auxilary Transformers
A1800 Installation of HT Panels 20 Installation of HT Panels
A1830 HT Cabling & Terminations 20 HT Cabling & Terminations
A1840 Installation of Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system 25 Installation of Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system
A1850 Electromechanical Checks & Verifications 1 Electromechanical Checks & Verifications
A1860 Mech Completion of 100 % Work 1 Mech Completion of 100 % Work
TESTING & COMISSIONING / HO 79 TESTING & COMISSIONING / HO
A1880 Testing of Equipments 30 Testing of Equipments
A1900 Testing of SCADA 20 Testing of SCADA
A1940 As Built Document & Punch Point closure 49 As Built Document & Punch Point closure
A1890 GridAvailaibility 1 GridAvailaibility
A1910 Grid Synchronisation and Stabilisation 5 Grid Synchronisation and Stabilisation
A1920 PR Test 7 PR Test
A1930 Commercial Operation Date 0 Commercial Operation Date
A1950 Site Demobilization 10 Site Demobilization
A1960 Project Handing Over 0 Project Handing Over

Date Revision Checked Approved


TASK filter: All Activities C100 - Photovoltaic power station 30 MW Project - Guinea-Bissau 26-Sep-18 TENDER / 00 Planning / Control Depart...
© Primavera Systems, Inc.
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
ANNEX 12: PROJECT SAFETY MANAGEMENT

Page 42 of 44
2018

1x30 (Bula) + 1 x 20 (Mafanco) MWAC PV


Power Plants, Guinea Bissau
Project Safety Management
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 September 2018 HSE

Safety Management
1x30 (Bula) + 1 x 20 (Mafanco) MWAC PV
Power Plants, Guinea Bissau
(September 2018)

1
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

Index
GENERAL

SAFETY POLICY
1) HSE POLICY OF HASSAN ALLAM CONSTRUCTION
2) H. A. CONSTRUCTION GOALS
3) ORGANIZATION AND RESPONSABILITIES

SAFETY Training
1) EMPLOYEE SAFETY ORIENTATION
2) HSE PRE-MEETINGS
3) HSE MEETINGS

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)


Permit to Work

CHEMICAL HAZARDS
1) CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
2) MATERIALS SAFETY DATA SHEET (MSDS)

ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION AND HOUSKEEPING


1) SITE MANAGEMENT
2) COMPULSORY PRODUCT LABEL
3) HOUSEKEEPING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT
4) GENERAL PHILOSOPHY
5) GENERAL REQUIREMENT

FOCUS ON AREAS
1)
FABRICATION AND ERECTION STEEL WORKS
2) CIVIL WORK
3) FINE TRADES
4) METAL TRADES
5) PAINTINGS
6) INSULATION
7) WASTE HANDLING

HSE NOTES
1) LIFTING OPERATIONS
2) MOTOR VEHICLES AND HEAVY EQUIPMENT
3) HAND TOOLS AND PORTABLE POWER TOOLS
4) SCAFFOLDS
5) EXCAVATION
6A) GAS WELDING AND CUTTING
6 B) ARC WELDING AND CUTTING
7) DEMOLITION WORK
8) CONFINED SPACE ENTRY
9) ACCESS TO ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION AND OTHER TECHNICAL ROOMS

2
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

RADIOGRAPHY

ELECTRICAL HAZARDS
1) IMPLEMENTATION PROCEDURES
2) RECORDS
3) COLOR CODE DESIGNATION

EMERGENCY/FIRE PROTECTION
1) INTRODUCTION
2) FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
3) EMERGENCY ALARM /SIGNALS

PLANNED INSPECTION AND AUDITES


1) REGULAR INSPECTION
2) ENVIRONMENT INSPECTION

ACCIDENT REPORTING
1) ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION PROCEDURE
2) COLLECTING FACTS

HEALTH / SAFETY REGULATIONS


1) SANITARY CONVENIENCES/SEWAGE DISPOSAL
2) WATER SUPPLY
3) DISPOSAL OF GARBAGE

MEDICAL CARE

3
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

GENERAL

Hassan Allam Holding is one Egypt’s largest and best known construction and property groups, serving customers at home and
throughout the region. We operate through two distinct and wholly-owned subsidiaries, H. A. CONSTRUCTION and Hassan
Allam Properties, with a successful network of subsidiaries in strategic regional markets such as the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia,
Libya and Algeria.

Renowned Egyptian entrepreneur, Hassan Mohamed Allam, founded the company in the 1930s as a fledgling construction
business serving the Egyptian market. Today, the group is a household name in Egypt and a strong and rapidly growing player
in the Arab regions.

All Hassan Allam employees who work for and with H. A. CONSTRUCTION are considered responsible for health, safety and
environment.

SAFETY POLICY:

H. A. CONSTRUCTION has formulated its own HSE policy taking into consideration the international standards and worldwide
codes applied. Also the “Owner’s Health, Safety and Environment Policy” stated in Section 6.4 of the Owner’s EPC Contract
Technical Specification. Company is always keeping to:

 Comply with Egyptian regulation and legalizations as regards to health, safety and environment protection so as to
achieve owner’s requirements.

 Get both management and employees committed to health, safety, and environment protection.

 Put all HSE matters in line with other such critical business activities as production, Q.C, cost control…etc.

 Conform to HSE standards and codes of storage and transportation as regards chemical substances, materials and
equipment.

 Confirm safe plants, procedures and systems of work.

 Assure minimization of environment pollution and the effective use of all energy resources.

 Consult with, listen, and respond openly to our clients, employees and/or neighbor companies.

 Establish an effective HSE management system, which sets and manually review HSE objectives and targets with the
purpose of continual improvement of our performance.

4
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

1) HSE POLICY OF H. A. CONSTRUCTION


Our Commitment:
Everyone who works in Hassan Allam Company at all locations adheres that HSE is his own responsibility and commit to do
his utmost and produce at record capacity to achieve the highest performance standards in the domain of HSE. Our business
plan includes SMART HSE objectives and all of us are committed to fulfill them in order to eliminate risks at work places
and achieve our Supreme Goals of

NO ACCIDENTS
NO HARM TO PEOPLE
NO DAMAGE TO THE ENVIRONMENT

The success of our business is completely tied to distinguished HSE performance in all our operations and provides health,
safe (physically and emotionally) and secured workplace for everyone who works with us. We also commit to produce
products that can meet the required standards by using hazards-free means of production and can be used safely by our
customers. We committed to align and comply with all HSE legislations specially the Egyptian OHS & environmental laws.
We will work in continues improvements to spare no efforts to eradicate the harmful impacts of occupational health, work
incidents on our people and our operations by adopting appropriate action that leads to manage and control the risks, reduce
wastes, emissions and discharges, and using energy rationally and efficiently.

In all projects we are:

 Fully participate in pinpointing, assessment, eliminating and managing risks as well as giving high concern to potential
hazards and near miss reports and removing their risks as quickly as possible.
 Activating safety audits and safety self-inspection programs and will be prompt and immediately responsive to their results
and recommendations.
 Ensure that all our employees, contractors and others are well informed, well trained and committed continually to HSE
improvement process.
 Use clean technology and improve the efficiency of our older facilities.
 Periodically do internal self-assessment and external assessment to assure that the HSE process is working effectively and
use results to improve our HSE performance.
 Recognize those who contribute to improve HSE performance.
 Maintain accurate information and documentation on all our activities.

5
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

2) H. A. CONSTRUCTION GOALS:

Our goals are briefed in Three Items:

 No harm to people
 No property damage
 No damage to the environment
In order to attain aforementioned goals, H. A. CONSTRUCTION committed itself to develop Health and safety programs and
procedures (HSE Manual) based on personnel selection, training employees and enforcing safety regulations.
H. A. CONSTRUCTION has got a joint responsibility for health and safety between managers, supervisors and employees. It is
a responsibility on all levels to support and promote programs which prevent accidents, to maintain safe working conditions, to
protect the surrounded environment, to give proper safety instructions on every job assigned so as to be acquainted with hazards
and potential hazards relevant to the job; thus avoids injury.
Every employee is responsible for the safety of work, materials and equipment. He has to follow this policy.
Everybody working for H. A. CONSTRUCTION and with H. A. CONSTRUCTION has the authority to stop any
unsafe act.

ALL CONSTRUCTION MANAGERS, DEPARTMENT MANAGERS, ENGINEERS AND SUPERVISORS ARE


RESPONSIBLE FOR ENFORCING AND ADMINISTERATING SAFETY PROGRAMS.
ALL EMPLOYEES COMPLY WITH THIS POLICY

3) Organization & Responsibilities:

1.0 INTRODUCTION
This Company Safety Procedure describes the structure and responsibilities for the management of health, safety
and the environment within the Company.
2.0 SCOPE
This procedure shall apply to all activities and places of work under the control of the company.
3.0 DEFINITIONS
HSE - Health, Safety and Environment
LEL - Lower Explosive Limit
HEL - Higher Explosive Limit
PPE - Personal Protective Equipment

3.1 WORKING ENVIRONMENT

The term working environment is to be understood as encompassing:


 The physical working environment.
 The social working environment.

3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
This term is to be understood to mean the control of emissions to atmosphere, discharges to water Table, disposal of
solid waste materials outside the site boundary and impacts on local communities such as noise , vibration…… etc.

6
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

3.3 EMISSIONS AND DISCHARGES


Emissions to air and discharge to land and / or water (e.g. dust, spent oil, sewage water, construction waste and
chemicals)

3.4 HAZARDS
Source or situation with a potential harm in terms of injury or ill health, damage to property, damage to work place
environment, or a combination of these.

3.5 HAZARD INDENTIFICATION


Process of recognizing that; hazard exist and defining its characteristics.

3.6 RISK
It is the chance low or high which somebody or something can be harmed by the hazard and it's the combination of
the like hood and consequences.

3.7 RISK ASSESSMENT


Risk assessment is the process of identifying hazards, characterizing the hazards, analyzing the risks, evaluating the
risked and determining the appropriate options for risk control.
3.7.1 Task Risk Assessment:
3.7.2 The number and variety of tasks can be carried during civil works are very large, and there is a correspondingly wide
range of risks involved. All levels of risk should be considered to the same extent and depth.
3.7.3 A common way of assessing task risks is by the use of a permit to work. This is adequate for the majority of tasks.

However, other types of assessment methods must be used to cover work situations where the permit is either not
appropriate, or the hazard associated with the risk is such that the permit has to be supplemented by a more
comprehensive approach.
3.7.4 Most jobs contain tasks which are normally carried out without the need for a permit. Routine operating tasks,
Housekeeping, catering and cleaning, are example. In this type of work, Risk is usually assessed through day to day
supervision and periodic general analysis of Training needs.

3.8 AS LOW AS REASONABLY PRACTICABLE (ALARP)


This means you must do everything that can be done to reduce a risk to its lowest possible level, except that you
don’t have to do something where its cost is clearly excessive, compared to the size of the risk reduction.
3.9 AREA AUTHORITY
The area authority shall be HASSC construction manager and / or site superintendent for the area in which work is
proceed.
3.10 PERFORMING AUTHORITY
The performing authority will normally be disciplines engineers and / or subcontractors.

4.0 REQUIREMENTS

4.1 The Company recognizes and subscribes to the belief that Safety is a line management responsibility and an essential
function of organizational management. Accordingly, key personnel within the organizations management team are
assigned particular Safety responsibilities.

4.2 An overview of the functional and reporting structure for Safety is described within an organizational chart provided.
Similarly, the functional and reporting structure for Safety for individual Projects shall also be described in an
appropriate organizational chart.

7
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

5.0 RESPONSIBILITIES
The following statements are provided to summaries individual Safety responsibilities.

Executive Management

Executive Management is required to:


 Ensure that Safety receives proper consideration at executive level and retains a high profile in relation to
other priority business objectives.
 Set policy and strategic objectives for the promotion and continuous improvement of Safety.
 Demand positive action in respect to Safety related concerns.
 Demonstrate a personal commitment to Safety and by example encourage others to work safely.
 Be conversant with their responsibilities under Safety regulations relevant to their work.
 Ensure the provision of adequate resources to facilitate the achievement of Company Safety objectives.

Project Managers

Project Managers are required to:


 Actively support and apply the Company Safety policy and procedures.
 Demonstrate a personal commitment to Safety and by example encourage others to work safely.
 Be conversant with their responsibilities under Safety regulations relevant to their work.
 Ensure the provision of adequate resources to facilitate the achievement of Project Safety objectives.
 Ensure that employees under their control at all levels receive adequate Safety training to enable them to
carry out the duties and responsibilities placed upon them.

Construction Managers

Construction Managers are required to:


 Actively support and apply the Company Safety policy and procedures.
 Demonstrate a personal commitment to Safety and by example encourage others to work safely.
 Be conversant with their responsibilities under Safety regulations relevant to their work.
 Gave due consideration to the Safe order of the work and methods to be employed at the planning stage and
ensure that this is carried forward into contraction.
 Contribute to the development of relevant Safety plans, procedures and instructions and ensure that works
is carried out in their accordance. Confirm that sub-contractors are in possession of relevant Safety
information to the extent of their responsibilities for the works.
 Provide leadership and a personal commitment to the achievement of Company and Project Safety
objectives.
 Ensure a timely and effective response to any non-conformances raised.

Discipline Engineers

Discipline Engineers are required to:


 Actively support and apply the Company Safety policy and procedures.

8
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

 Demonstrate a personal commitment to Safety and by example encourage others to work safely.
 Be conversant with their responsibilities under Safety regulations relevant to their work.
 Ensure that works are carried out in accordance with any relevant plans, procedures or instructions and
prohibit any non-technical improvisations.
 Incorporate Safety instructions when giving orders.
 Assess the risks in any design for which they are responsible with the objective of eliminating or mitigating
potential hazards which otherwise will be carried forward to construction.
 Ensure that relevant personnel are notified of known hazards.

Health, Safety and Environmental Manager

Health, Safety and Environmental Managers are required to:


 Actively support and apply the Company Safety policy and procedures.
 Demonstrate a personal commitment to Safety and by example encourage others to work safely.
 Promote Safety awareness at strategic and operational levels.
 Take a leading role in the assessment of workplace risks advice senior management and staff at all levels
on the steps necessary to secure a Safe working environment.
 Review and assess the impact on the Company of new legislation or other agreed performance standards
and prepare any plans, procedures and instructions necessary for their implementation.
 Develop and implement systems for communicating Safety information and reporting.
 Ensure that any necessary statutory notifications are made and any necessary safety records pertaining to
the safety and health of employees are maintained.

Health, Safety and Environmental Supervisors

Health, Safety and Environmental Advisers are required to:


 Actively support and apply the Company Safety policy and procedures.
 Demonstrate a personal commitment to Safety and by example encourage others to work safely.
 Take a leading role in the promotion of Safety awareness at an operational level.
 Take a leading role in the assessment of workplace risks and advise management and staff at an operational
level of the steps necessary to secure a Safe working environment.
 Report on Safety performance in accordance with project requirements.
 Investigate and report on Safety related incidents.
 Inspect work situations and work equipment to ascertain that they conform to relevant performance
standards.
 Contribute to the assessment of training needs through liaison with relevant members of the management
team, thereafter organize and assist in Safety training development.

Safety Officers

Safety Representatives or officers (where appointed or elected) will be recognized by the Company and are
encouraged to participate in appropriate consultation. The Company shall provide appropriate assistance and
facilities.

9
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

Site Supervisors

Supervisors are required to:


 Actively support and apply the Company Safety policy and procedures.
 Demonstrate a personal commitment to Safety and by example encourage others to work safely.
 Be conversant with relevant Safety precautions applying to their work and insist that persons under their
control observe safe working practices.
 Incorporate Safety instructions when giving work orders.
 Prohibit the use of and report any defects in work equipment.
 Ensure that new employees are warned of hazards and the need for Safety precautions.
 Consult where necessary with the Company Health, Safety and Environmental Manager or Adviser and act
on his recommendations.

Site Employees

Employees are required to:


 Perform their duties in a Safe manner and not endanger themselves or others through their acts or omissions.
 Co-operate with management on Safety matters and to use anything provided in the interests of Safety
correctly.
 Promptly report any loss or defect found in any work or personal protective equipment provided.
4) SAFETY TRAINING:

Introduction
Members of the Project Team in areas such as have already undertaken significant HSE Awareness training:
 Project staff Induction,
 Fire Warden Duties,
 Safety Representative Duties,
 Pre-job Planning,
 HSE Management System,
 HSE Risk Assessment / Hazard Spotting,
 Manual Handling,
 Slips Trips & Falls,
 Environmental Aspects,
 Waste Management,
 PPE - Use & Maintenance,
 Office Fire Safety Training.
HSE Construction Training Programmers
Covering Managerial and Supervisory legal responsibilities related to the health and safety of the employees require that the
following is known and understood as part of their competencies:

 Know the health, safety and environmental legislation,


 Know the hazards in their workplace,
 Ensure that workers follow HSE procedures required by the Project.
 Ensure that their workers comply with regulations/requirements.

10
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

In addition, they are expected to be conversant with:


 promote awareness of HSE,
 establish and enforce healthy and safe work practices,
 report certain injuries and accidents and dangerous occurrences to the appropriate regulatory body,
 Report all HSE incidents to the Project.
 Risk Assessment & Safe Systems of Work (including PTW),,
 Slips, Trips and Falls,
 Ergonomics,
 Workplace Inspection,
 Accident Investigation,
 Emergency Preparedness,
 Review and Implementation.
HSE Orientation / Induction
All Personnel working during the construction phase of the project will be required to attend an HSE Orientation / Induction
briefing before commencing work.

This HSE Orientation / Induction will be developed and implemented by HSE Department and taking place in a suitably
equipped training facility within the workplace, all attendees will be assessed to ascertain their level of understanding of the
Induction content and will sign an attendance log following satisfactory completion of the induction program.

The program will be repeated at a minimum of 6 monthly intervals or following major changes to legislative or on-site
condition / working arrangements, whichever is the sooner.
Subjects to be covered in the H&S Orientation / Induction and ongoing work related training will include:
 Overview of the project and scope of work
 The organization on site
 The main site HSE hazards
 Site Rules
 The HSE Policy and Objectives of the safety program - Zero Accident Performance,
 Behavior Based Safety – Employee involvement in safety and process improvement,
 The role of the individual in the Toolbox Talk and Post Task briefing program,
 South Hook Project’s expectations of employees, - Alcohol and substance abuse policy.
 PPE, including clothing, minimum requirements and maintenance,
 Reporting of incidents, personal injury and near-misses,
 Medical facilities & Personal Health,
 Fire prevention and suppression,
 Housekeeping,
 HSE signs,
 Safe access and egress,
 Noise,
 Manual Handling,
 Fire precautions and procedures,
 First aid (basic),
 Waste management,
 Permit to Work systems,
 Hot work, Welding, Burning and Grinding,
 Hazardous materials (COSHH – Control of Substances Hazardous to Health),
 Portable tools and equipment,
 Radiation hazards,
 Working in Confined Spaces,
 Excavations,
 Operating equipment i.e. cranes, forklift trucks etc.
 Office & Site Environment,

11
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

 Waste minimization and segregation,


 Use of Ladders,
 Electrical Hazards,
 Social awareness
Visitors
All visitors to any Project site will also undergo a limited HSE Orientation / Induction. Hassan Allam Company will
develop this HSE Orientation / Induction which will be approved by the Project Team.

Notes: No visitor(s) will be allowed onto the site unless accompanied at all times. There will be no dispensation for this
rule, should a visitor attend site on a regular basis he/she will attend the site’s full HSE Orientation / Induction.

As all sites will have specific differences, visitors will attend each site’s limited or full HSE Orientation / Induction
program. Regular visitors will be issued with permanent ID cards’ while irregular visitors will be issued with ‘Temporary’
Passes.
Note: Due to the amount of training to be provided it is imperative that training is scheduled and coincides with the scope of
work to be performed.

5) PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE):

 General:
Personal protective equipment is the last defensive line after the engineering protection so the personal protective equipment
must be met with requirement of ANSI or equivalent standards.
a. Safety Helmets
Safety hats or helmets are rigid headgear made of materials designed to protect the head from impact, flying particles, electric
shock, etc and each helmet consists of a shell, a suspension cradle, and a chin strap.
Employees working in areas where there is danger of head injury from impact; from failing or flying objects; or from electrical
shock and burns, shall be protected by protective helmets.
Ancillary equipment such as ear muffs, welder's shields, etc. can be obtained to fit on helmet shells and holes should not be
drilled into helmet to facilities use of such equipment as this can seriously impair both the mechanical strength and the
electrical resistance of the helmet.
Safety hats or helmets shall not be painted.
The complete helmet should be cleaned regularly with soap and water.
Helmets should be scrapped following any penetration, high impact, or subjection to extreme heat.
Should be worn by all persons at all times when on a construction job site, in an operation plant area, or whenever there are
overhead hazards.
Metal hard hats do not afford proper impact or electrical protection and, therefore, are prohibited from all clients from all client
work areas.
Helmet color coding:
 White color helmet for engineer and visitors.
 Red color helmet for safety and security staff.
 Green color helmet for supervisor and foramens.
 Yellow color helmet for all other workers on site.

12
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

b. Foot Wear
Foot protection used must be met with American national standardization institute (ANSI) standard.
Comfort is particularly important for the wearer, so safety footwear must fit properly.
Approved safety footwear is sturdy work shoes with leather uppers and/or leather composition with steel toe
caps.

c. Eye Protection
The most common occupational hazards to the eye are the risk of foreign bodies’ intrusion.
As a minimum standard for eye protection, safety glasses with side shields are required. For further eye protection, extensive
safety equipment must be provided and used for any operation whenever significant risks are recognized such as goggles and
full-face visors used in welding during grinding.
d. Ear Protection
Exposure to high noise can cause hearing loss or impairment. There is no cure for noise-induced hearing loss, so the prevention
of excessive noise exposure is the only way to avoid hearing damage. Specifically designed protection is required, depending
on the type of noise encountered and the auditory condition of the employee.
Some earplugs are disposable, to be used one time and then thrown away. The non-disposable type should be cleaned after each
use for proper protection. Plain cotton is ineffective as protection type against hazardous noise.
Earmuffs need to make a perfect seal around the ear to be effective. Glasses, long sideburns, long hair, and facial movements,
such as chewing, can reduce protection. Special equipment is available for use with glasses.
e. Welders Protection Clothes
Clothes being worn during welding operations must be resistant to heat, free from oil, grease, or any other flammable material.
f. Hand Protection
Wearing correct type of gloves is mandatory whenever required.
Types of gloves are:
1. Fabric gloves: These gloves can protect against dirt, slivers, chafing, and abrasion. These
gloves do not provide sufficient protection, however, to be used with rough, sharp, or heavy
materials.
2. Leather gloves: Leather gloves protect against sparks, moderate heat, blows, chips, and rough
objects. Welders in particular need the durability of higher-quality leather gloves.
3. Insulated rubber gloves provide protection against electricity.
4. Chemical-and liquid-resistance Gloves : made of rubber (latex, nitrite, or butyl), plastic, or
synthetic rubber-like material such as neoprene protect workers from burns, irritation, and
dermatitis caused by contact with oils, greases, solvents, and other chemicals..

g. Respiratory Protection Equipment


 Air purifying devices: Which used for removing dust, mists, metal fumes, and smoke and specific gases and vapors
and also particulate matters at certain levels depending on the type of the devices like gas mask. but they couldn’t
protect from oxygen deficiency and work only at area the oxygen percentage not less than 19.5 %
 Air supplying devices:
Which used when there is deficient of oxygen percentage at the area of work to offer the needed limit oxygen.

13
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

 Combination-air purifying and air supplying devices: Which used for both (deficient of oxygen or contaminated air).
Respirators shall be used in the following circumstances:
Types of respirator and their cases
 Where exposure levels exceed the permissible exposure limit (PEL), during the time period necessary to install or
implement feasible engineering and work practice controls.
 In those maintenance and repair activities and during those brief or intermittent operations where exposures exceed
the PEL and engineering and work practice controls are not feasible or are not required.
 Where the employer has implemented all feasible engineering and work practice controls and such controls are not
sufficient to reduce exposures to or below the PEL

h. Fall Arrest Equipment


There are several types of fall restraining devices used throughout the construction industry. The two most
commonly used ones are the full body safety harness and the safety belt. Working at or above 1.8 m height.
1. Harnesses are used for above ground work, where fall restraining and arresting protection is required
2. Safety belts should not be used as part of the fall arrest system at height more than 10m above the ground.
3. Full body harnesses may be required when working in areas with no guard rails at height above 1.82 meters
(6 feet) or for potential falls of six feet or greater.
4. No fall restraining or arresting device is any stronger than the point of attachment. Therefore, all users
should be carefully instructed in the important in the important of a firm anchorage.
5. Fall restraining / arresting devices must be stored in clean and dry conditions away from sunlight, and must
be thoroughly inspected both on issue and at the start of each shift.
6. The maximum length of standard lanyards shall be limited to provide for a falloff no greater than 1.82
meters (6feet).
7. The lanyard shall have a minimum breaking strength of 2,450 kilograms (5,400 pounds).
8. All fall arresting / restraining devices and hardware shall be manufactured to ANSI / OSHA.
9. During all operations conducted by a personnel platform (man basket) at any height above ground level,
fall protection devices (lanyards) shall be secured to an anchorage point or a structural member located on
the basket.
10. Any worker 1.82 m above ground without the protection of a guard rail system shall wear a full body harness
and standard lanyard. But as per the Clint can be use 1.20m.

6) PERMIT TO WORK

The permit to work is a means of giving approval for specific work to proceed, safely, involved the protection of the environment
and the prevention of damage to Client assets and production.
The PTW system is intended to ensure:
 Tasks are clearly defined.
 The risks associated with a task are identified by competent persons (from the department which required the permit).
 Suitable precautions to manage those risks are identified.
 Potential clashes with other ongoing work are considered.

14
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

 All necessary preparatory work is complete and confirmed.


 The timescale within which work can take place is defined.
 Approval for the work to proceed is given by supervision in control of the work area.
 The persons who will undertake the work understand the precautions they must take.
 Normal operations can be resumed safety once work has been completed.

7) CHEMICAL HAZARDS

 Control of Hazardous Materials:


The control of hazardous substances is a critical factor in HSE Programs and shall be achieved through establishing the safe
working systems and securing handle/disposal of such Hazard substances.
Hazardous materials are those, which may have adverse reactions on health when being ingested, inhaled, injected, or even
absorbed in the body. They can also damage environment if being discharged.
ALL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS WITH MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET (MSDS).Adopting the safe working
system, H. A. CONSTRUCTION is to provide all relevant personal protective equipment (PPE) so as to ensure minimization
of the risks associated with the use, handling, and/or disposal of such materials.

 Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)


HSE department keeps all MSDS respecting hazardous materials and there is a copy of this MSDS at the location where
people handling the chemicals.

8) ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION AND HOUSE KEEPING:

H. A. CONSTRUCTION projects are executed in accordance with the Egyptian Environment Laws and the project
environment protection system. Management of wastes and pollution control plans are being recognized with extreme
emphasis on:
 Assessment of potential impact of work activities on environment.
 Complying with the environmental protection measures listed in environmental law.
 Site Management

Site is managed to ensure pollution at any stage during execution of the project. Precautions are taken to prevent soil, air,
plant, and water pollution. Any accident caused contamination is to be reported under accident/incident report.
 Compulsory Product Label

To prevent injury or damage caused by chemical substances. The system comprises, but not limited to, the following:
 Marking/turnover requirements stated for chemical substances and other hazardous products, which can be a health
risk.
 Lists of contents, regulations, and safety measures...etc. required for minimizing relevant risks. Depending on the
MSDS of each chemical substances handling at the site.
 Labeling regulations for products containing organic solvents.
 Labeling regulations for flammable and explosive materials

15
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

 Personnel protective regulations.


 Chemical health hazards.
 Waste Management & Housekeeping:

3-a) General philosophy

 Individuals, working on site, should clean up their workplace.

 Each department is responsible for its own housekeeping.

 Housekeeping is closely aligned with HSE performance, which is considered as a parameter to the success of a project.

 Good housekeeping is derived from good pre-work planning. All appropriate facilities are available to support the
work activities. Such facilities require good planning.

 Good housekeeping is fundamental for the safety of working area. It ensures all operations carried out safely.

3-b) General requirement

 Locations of work, equipment, must be kept clean and tidy all the time.

 Cables and hoses must not be left randomly through the work place causing accidents.

 All loose materials must be stored in a clean and tidy manner.

 All kind of waste and scrape should be sorted in a designated area.

 Cleaning of locations should be done continuously.

 UNDER SUPERVISORS INSPECTION

 EACH PERSON IS RESPONSIBLE FOR KEEPING HIS OWN AREA CLEAN AND TIDY

FOCUS ON AREAS

Fabrication and Erection Steel Works


SCOPE AND APPLICATION FIELD
The scope of this safety procedure is to identify dangers and risks related to structural steel works execution
(prefabrication and/or assembly of vessels, pipes, piles, miscellaneous structures either completed or to be assembled
at yard) and to establish measures to be adopted for completely removing them (when possible) or, in any case, for
minimizing them to acceptable levels.
Risks linked to the nature of activities carried out and to specific working environments (confined spaces, works at
heights, overlapping activities, etc.) are not taken into consideration.
The provisions of this procedure shall not be considered exhaustive and shall in any case be accompanied by the
application of any other "good practice" standards as required by the specific situation

16
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

LIST OF CONTENTS

1. RESPONSIBILITIES
2. REFERENCES
3. GENERALS
4. RISKS RELATED TO THE SPECIFIC ACTIVITY
5. SAFETY PROCEDURE
6. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)
7. HEALTH MONITORING

RESPONSIBILITIES

The person in charge of supervising production activities (workshop manager, erection supervisor, foreman, shift foreman,
yard manager, persons in charge of specific activities, etc.) is responsible for correctly arranging working activities and
proper working tools and personal protective equipment (PPE).
The person in charge of maintenance operations shall make sure that equipment, plants and working premises are kept in
perfect working conditions.
Every worker is responsible for using working tools and PPE supplied by the Company to the best effect and for complying
with this procedure and with work instructions received from their supervisors.
Moreover, all workers are responsible for notifying any anomalies concerning machines, plant, equipment, work procedures
or anything else that might endanger safety at work.

Reference

NATIONAL AND LOCAL LEGISLATION

GENERALS

Structural steel works (welding activities excluded) include several working phases such as:
• Handling of pipes, plates, structural shapes, flanges, etc.
• Cutting and flame-shaping of pipes, structural shapes and plates
• Plates shearing
• Bending and forming by means of bending presses
• Rolling
• Assembly and tack-welding
• Grinding
• Chipping, brushing, and hammering by means of pneumatic tools.
Said activities, depending on the specific case, may be carried out either at workshop or in the open air, at heights or in
confined spaces, etc.
As to problems related to the specific activity or work place, reference should be made to relevant specific procedures.

17
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

RISKS RELATED TO THE SPECIFIC ACTIVITY

The main hazards related to structural steel works are the following. The main risks for the operators include:

• Risk of fingers or limbs being crushed during bending, shearing, rolling, handling and lifting of work pieces
• Risk of sprains caused by the operator moving between work pieces or climbing up to/descending from work stations
• Risk of electric shocks caused by faulty insulation of parts carrying live voltage
• Risk of being struck by flying chips during grinding or chipping operations using electric or pneumatic tools
• Risk of caused by noise produced during grinding, chipping, hammering operations, etc.
• Risks stemming from the use of gas for oxy-cutting or from the use of compressed air
• Risk of cutting or abrasion of the limbs or body due to the use of grinding machines or due to manual handling of
materials or tools, etc.
• Risk of irritation or respiratory pathologies caused by fumes and dust produced during operations execution
• Risk of disturbances or pathologies arising from the use of vibrating tools, in general pneumatic tools (neurological
disturbances in the feet and hands, Reynaud’s symptom, “hand-arm vibration” syndrome)
• Risks arising from bad posture during the performance of particular tasks due to the weight of tools.

SAFETY PROCEDURE

To minimize the risks involved in structural steel works always adopt the following preventive measures:
• use working equipment and devices prescribed by the manufacturer and avoid, in any case, modifying them, removing
parts (functional, structural or protective) or exceeding the prescribed performance limits;
• keep the work place free from foreign materials;
• wear, according to the different kinds of risks, the proper personal protective equipment provided by the company;
• make sure that the item has been correctly positioned and that it is held firmly in place in the prescribed manner;
• make sure that only specialized operators carry out the most hazardous handling operations; always check the weight
of the items to be lifted or moved;
• in order to prevent flying chips, never clean the items by blowing;
• When using abrasive portable grinders or cutting grinders, special attention should be paid when fitting the grinding
wheel and checking the relevant specifications. All grinding wheels shall be made to rotate at the maximum speed
before coming into contact with the work piece. Grinding wheels shall never be used for operations for which they
have not been designed.

In particular, the following safety precautions shall be adopted when using portable grinding machines:

 Never use grinding machines unless guards have been fitted. This precaution does not apply if the grinding wheel is
entirely contained in the item (e.g. internal grinding of pipes);
 always use goggles and gloves during grinding;
 never accidentally knock the grinding wheels against obstacles or allow them to bounce;
 do not knock the grinding wheel against the item, against edges or on the floor in order to dress it;

18
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

 do not drop the grinding machine on the floor or on the work bench and do not carelessly lay it aside during work breaks
or after completing the task;
 never use the grinding wheel under uncertain balance conditions;
 whenever it is not possible to adopt an effective suction and aeration system, masks or respiratory protective equipment
shall be worn;
 if the plug (for electrically driven grinding machines) is in poor conditions, or if the power cable is not insulated, inform
the person in charge so that the situation can be restored;
 at the beginning of the task, do not apply all the pressure on the cold grinding wheel;
 do not press the item down on one side of the grinding wheel in order not to break it as fragments might be projected;
 hold the item firmly so that it is not pulled away by the rotating wheel;
 A use proper plier to hold the item in the case it is very small-sized.
 the use of vibrating tools shall be kept to the absolute minimum; proper gloves shall be used (that is to say that gloves
shall not increase vibrations);
 when using compressed air tools, check that the quick-release hoses are properly fitted;
 consult the area supervisor (department head, foreman, workshop manager, etc.) if a non-routine work situation arises;
 wherever possible, fit protective screens around each work station in order to prevent flying chips from reaching
neighboring work stations and to stop noise from spreading throughout the workplace;
 When using light tools (hammers, mallets, chisels, spanners, metal saws, files, cutting nippers, square and compass) pay
the greatest attention. In particular:
 before beginning a job, place yourself in such a position so that if the tool does slip it will not hit the person using it or a
colleague;
 Always use the right tool for the job. Never adopt makeshift solutions;
 always keep the tools in a state of perfect working efficiency and cleanness and have unsuitable tools replaced;
 make sure that tools handles are not dirty with oil or grease;
 do not use tools with makeshift extensions;
 for all tasks in which there is a risk of flying chips, the use protective equipment such as: goggles, screens, gloves, etc.
is compulsory;
 when approaching the work area, especially if it is in an elevated area and during work on ladders, keep hand tools in
appropriate bags or fasten them to prevent them from falling;
 when using spanners and pipe wrenches:
 Make sure that they are in perfect working order and intact. Reject, therefore, spanners with welded handles or in poor
conditions;
 check that they are the right size for the job in hand;
 never use them as hammers;
 Never hit the arm of a spanner and never stand on an extension used to increase pressure on the tool.
 when using hammers and mallets:
 make sure that the handle has been well fixed in order to prevent the metal body from slipping out;
 check that the head of the mallet or hammer does not have dangerous burrs;

19
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

 Check that the handles of the hammers and mallets are intact. Replace cracked or chipped hammers and mallets that have
been repaired with strips of wire or nails;
 Never use the hammer on tools that are harder than it because it could bounce back dangerously or chips could fly off it.
 when using chisels, make sure that:
 they have been properly sharpened and that the head is not excessively dented;
 the heads are free of burrs because if they break off they could cause serious injury;
 They are kept in the tool-box and that the cutting parts are, if possible, protected in order to remove a potential
hazard for those who have to use them.

Personal PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)

The main PPE to be compulsorily worn by carpenters are the following:


• safety shoes with ankle and metatarsus shield, quick release device, steel toe cap, anti-oil and anti-static sole;
• eye goggles or mask to protect against foreign bodies and flying chips during grinding, chipping operations, etc.;
• Ear protective equipment (ear plugs, ear muffles, etc.);
• leather gloves against abrasions, cold and vibrations;
• safety helmet for those operators working outside or at risk due to falling objects
• Dust mask to protect the respiratory airways from particles produced during grinding operations.

HEALTH MONITORING

Operators in charge of structural steel works ding, arc-air gouging and flame cutting shall undergo a general periodical
medical check-up carried out by the company physician at least every twelve months.
An audiometric test shall be carried out once a year and a chest X-ray taken every four years.
The company physician is responsible for requesting any in-depth follow-up specialist medical examinations. He is also
responsible for issuing certification regarding total/partial/temporary or definitive suitability for a specific task.

20
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

1) Civil work

 Spoils not required after re-instatement are removed from the job site at the end of each working day.

 Access to a work area should be clean at all the time.

2) Fine trades

 All cable tie trimmings are collected and removed from job location at the end of each work period.
 When installed, cables are to be trimmed off the rest, coiled up and securely tied.
 Only materials required for each work are to be taken to job site.
 Cable drum is to be removed from job site as soon as possible.
3) Metal trades

 Such consumable materials and small particles, which are no longer required as old bolts and gaskets etc. are to be
placed in suitable containers and removed till the end of the work period.
 Large components such as equipment parts, piping parts, steel parts etc. are to be stacked neatly to facilitate the
movement at the work site
 Wastes containing hazardous materials are to be segregated from other kinds of waste.

 Welding consumables are to be kept in appropriate containers and all used rod ends are to be collected and disposed of
at the end of each work period.

 When not in use, pneumatic tools are to be turned off, depressurized and the hoses coiled neatly.

 After consultation with the construction manager, consideration is to be given to lay down areas in large jobs.

4) Paintings

 Paints and solvent must be stored in separate storages, all installation should be explosion-proof and far from any
ignition source like welding.
 Only the needed amounts of painting substances are to be brought in work place, (no storage at the work place).
 The work place & storage places must be kept clean from any spillage of the painting materials and cleaned immediately.
 The storage area must be surrounded with barriers.
5) Insulation

 All new bulk insulation materials such as claddings are to be stored neatly in the work place without blocking access or
egress.
 Once removal is taken place, areas are to be taped off with barriers and insulation and cladding is to be bagged up and
removed at the end of the work period.
 All off-cuts and bonding materials ends are swept up and disposed of at the end of the work period.
 After consultation with operation department, consideration is to be given to lay down staging areas for large jobs.
 Left over bandages will be removed at the end of each work period.

21
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

6) Waste Handling

 Non hazard waste: This section covers types of waste to be derived from offices like paper card board plastics etc.., and
wasted without special requirement (office - cleaning)
 Hazardous waste: Batteries, oil, filters, and other equipment which can contain even traces of hazardous substances are
classified and treated as hazardous waste. These are kept in specified close places according to their risk until sending
to the main office.
HSE NOTES

1) Lifting Operations:
Lifting equipment may be categorized as follows:
 Lifting appliance includes any machine which, by means of lifting gear can raise, lower or suspend a load (e.g.
crane, side boom, fork lift truck or boom truck). Lifting appliances may be fixed or portable.
 Portable lifting gear includes any device which is used directly or indirectly to connect a load to a lifting appliance, and
which does not form part of the load (e.g. rope sling, chain
 Sling, ring, link, hook, plate clamp, shackle, swivel, or eyebolt. Periodically lubricating and greasing for all lifting
tackles must be applied.
 Fixed lifting gears such as pad-eyes, runway beams, etc, must be designed according to a specific safe working load
(SWL), all welds to be according to standard welding safe instruction, NDT inspection must be considered. Pad-eyes
holes to be machined according to the designed diameters.

* Undertaking the lifting operations:


Prior to carrying out any lifting operation certain precautions shall be observed. They are applicable to any lifting operation
and include holding a tool box talk at which the details of the task are discussed.
Specific responsibilities will be allocated to nominated persons at the toolbox talk and this will include the identification of
the competent person who will co-ordinate and control all aspects of the lifting operation.

The nominated persons will:


 Ensure pick up and lay down areas are within the crane radius for the load being lifted.
 Ensure that there is no body under the load while lifting.
 Ensure that a clear and effective communication system is employed and understood by all personnel involved with the
lifting operation.
 Ensure that there is adequate lighting in the pickup and lay down areas and there exists effective and unobstructed access
ways and escape routine.
 Ensure that the lifting equipment is certified for current use.
 Ensure that any restrictions to the lift are removed.
 That shackle bolts are tight and adequately secured.

22
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

 Never use slings for more than SWL (SAFE WORKING LOAD) rating. Each sling should have an SWL
approximately equal to the gross weight of the load.
 Ensure the hook is positioned above the load's centre of gravity.
 Only one container is lifted at each time.
 Slings of equal length shall be used when handling tubular.
 Tag lines are utilized where appropriate.
 All lifting equipment which inspected must have the current color code.

* General lifting equipment precautions:


 All personnel who use rigging equipment must have completed a rigging training course appropriate to the operational
needs of the site.
 Pre-slung loads must not be accepted, unless the supplier/owner produces a current examination certificate for slinging
arrangements, which will be monitored at supply base prior to shipping.
 A lifting appliance must not be loaded beyond the safe working load marked on it, except for the purpose of proof
testing by a Competent Person.
 Safe working load indicators or alarms fitted to lifting appliances must not be made unserviceable or disconnected at
any time whilst the equipment is in service.
 It is the responsibility of the Crane Driver/Operator not to continue to lift a load, which causes the safe load indicators
to alarm.
 All lifting gear provided from rigging stores shall be visually inspected by a Competent Person immediately before
issue.
 Care must be taken when calculating the weight of equipment prior to lifting, especially when the equipment may
contain liquid used for pressure/leak testing,
 Where the lift is complicated, due to access or no vertical lifting, then a qualified expert must be involved in the planning
and execution of that lift.
 Ensure that all Items of lifting gear are properly color coded as per the project documentation instructions and that a
board showing the current color code is permanently displayed at the approved rigging store and other appropriate
places.
 A rigging study shall be prepared and approved by contractor for all lifts of 50 tones or more and for multi – crane lifts.
* Supervision of the lifting operation:
The degree of supervision is dependent upon the type of lifting operation to be undertaken and is therefore proportionate to
the risk. Non- routine operations will always require supervision. This supervision will be provided by the competent person
who has undertaken the risk assessment and produced the lifting plan. For routine operations, dedicated supervision of the
operation may not be required but a competent person must be in control of the operation. This competent person will co-
ordinate and control all aspects of the lifting operation, for example this competent person could be the crane operator. In

23
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

addition someone will also need to be in control of the toolbox talk/ pre-job meeting to ensure all personnel are aware of the
task, the documented safe instructions to be followed and their responsibilities.

* Tubular Slinging:
 The slings should be double wrapped with a choke hitch taking care not to cross over the wires on the bottom of pipe
or tubular bundle. The choke hitch should be pulled tight (never use anything to hammer hitch down tight). And a
bulldog clip fitted. Secure the hitch with a tie to prevent eye slipping over bulldog clip during transit.
 Never sling different sizes (mixture) of tubing, or items. Of different shapes together. Smaller items will tend to slip
out.
 Do not pull a sling from under a load while load is resting on the sling.
 When using multi-legged slings the maximum recommended angle between the two legs is 90 degrees.
 When racking pre slung tubular, use stripping between layers to prevent slings from being crushed.

* STORAGE:
 Should be stored by hanging up in a warm dry place, not in the sling cargo basket.
 Wire rope along with end attachments should be slightly oiled.
* CRANES PRECAUTIONS:

 Only persons with good sight (corrected by spectacles if necessary) and good hearing shall be selected for employment
as Crane Drivers.

 Crane Drivers small have a working knowledge of safe slinging practice.

 Cranes shall only be operated by persons properly trained, qualified and authorized.
 The hoisting mechanism of a crane shall not be used for any purpose other than raising or lowering a load vertically.

 Cranes must not be used to transport loads, unless specifically designed for this purpose.
 A crane shall not be used unless a pre-use inspection of the crane has been carried out by a Crane Driver within the
previous 24 hours. This inspection should cover electrical cables, wire ropes, fittings, drums, brakes, hooks and guards,
etc limit switches must be tested to ensure that they are operating correctly.

 Cranes shall not be operated in wind speeds in excess of manufacture's recommended limitations. Installations may
impose lower limits as a result of operating experience. These limitations will be conspicuously displayed in the crane
cabin.

 A table, showing the safe working load/radius limitations of the crane, shall be available in every crane cabin and at
every site and installation.
 The crane driver/operator must be advised of the weight of each load be lifted and shall operate within the limits
mentioned by the safe working load/radius tables displayed within the crane cabin. Drivers/Operators must use the
load/radius alarms as indication of working within safe limits.

24
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

 Crane activities shall stop (even the load has been made safe) in the event of a general alarm or emergency.
 Whilst the crane is in operation, the Crane Driver/Operator must not perform other work, and must not leave his position
at the controls until the load has been safely landed.
 Man-riding on loads, hooks or buckets intended for general cargo movement is not permitted.

 A fire extinguisher should also be sited in or near the cab.


 After erection, re-erection or any removal or adjustment to the crane structure. Which may affect its ability to lift loads
safely, the crane must be retested in the approved manner by a Competent Person.
2) Motor Vehicles and Heavy Equipment

 Before being brought onto site, must have applicable licenses, certification and/or other documentation required by law
(Such licenses are kept in the vehicle /equipment at all times) .and must be inspected so as to make sure that they are
in good and safe working condition.

 Accidents are being immediately reported to HSE project.

 All construction equipment shall have a back alarm.

 No person is to be permitted on/off a moving vehicle or equipment.

 Engine is kept shut off during fueling or maintenance operations.

 Drip tray is used whenever required to prevent environment damage.

 Persons ride on fixed seats. Riding on forklifts, tailgates, etc. is completely prohibited.

 Seatbelts are being worn in all cases where fitted.

 Driver must commit with the allowable speed at the site.

 All machinery and equipment are being inspected and maintained by competent persons periodically. Inspection results
are recorded in documents where defects are recommended for reparation and/or replacement.

 All equipment should have a powder Fire Extinguisher.

3) Hand Tools and Portable Power Tools

General requirement:

 All hand tools and portable power tools are to be maintained for a safe and proper condition.

 Defective tools are removed from service for reparation.

 New employees are trained and instructed for the proper use of tools.

 Tools are daily inspected for damage (as a recommendation of T.B.T)

25
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

 Extension cords and air hoses are being protected from damage and routed in such a way as not causing a hazard of
trimming or being subject to damage by vehicles or construction activities.

4-Scaffolds

Scaffold is intended to allow people working at height in a safe way.


Main Requirements:
Equipment inspections.
 All scaffolding equipment should be inspected on visual defects each work shift by a competent person.
 Bent or damaged scaffold tubes shall not be used.
 split or damaged boars shall not be used and taken out of service
 All completed scaffolds shall be inspected by competent scaffold inspector before being issued with a green scaffold
tag and re -inspected periodically.
 Each scaffold must have Scaffold tag, scaffold register, and do not use scaffold if it has any defect and that kept with
the scaffold inspector.

Storage
 All scaffolding equipment shall be stored in a central compound and returned when dismantled and not in use
 All scaffold boards shall be stored flat to prevent warping.
 Ladders should be stored correctly, either flat or hung on suitable hook straining.
Erection of scaffolds
 Only competently trained (scaffold operators) scaffolders and supervisor shall erect or dismantle any scaffold.
 A continuing training shall be implemented for all operators to ensure their competency, and familiarity with the
standards required.
 Each scaffold platform shall be fully board with no gaps between boards to prevent persons or tools falling through
and the boards secured against movement.
 a suitable ladder shall be fitted to every scaffold and should be secured be positioned at an angle of 14 against the
scaffold the head of the ladder shall be secured to the scaffold to prevent movement the head of the ladder shall extend
at last 1 meter above the landing platform for safe access.
 guard rails and toe boards shall be fitted to all open edges of the scaffold platform
 Were a guard rail on a leading edge cannot be maintained operators working on the platform shall wear suitable fall
protection equipment.
 scaffold platforms shall be kept free of waste materials and should be kept clean by a persons required to work on
them
 no person shall interfere with a scaffold once it is erected, and any modifications shall only be carried out by trained
competent scaffolding operators ( scaffolders) and it must done according to the project documentation .
 It is the ultimate responsibility of the scaffolding supervisor to ensure that all scaffold platforms are erected to the
required standard.
 Scaffold platform MUST NEVER be overloaded with materials, tools or other equipment
 The Scaffold Must Be Braced To Prevent Lateral Movement.
5) Excavation
This procedure means any man-made cut, trench, or depression in an earth surface formed by earth removal

26
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

General requirement needed:


1) The following site condition take into accounts for safe excavations :

 The following specific site conditions should be taken into accounts for safe excavations (Traffic, Soil , Surface and ground
water , Overhead and underground utilities, Weather
 Before any excavation actually begins, the standard requires the employer to determine the estimated location of utility
installations: sewer, telephone, fuel, electric, water lines or any other underground installations that may be encountered
during digging

 No employee should operate a piece of equipment without first being properly trained to handle it and fully alerted to its
potential hazards
 The standard requires that a competent person inspect, on a daily basis, excavations and the adjacent areas for possible
cave-ins, failures of protective systems and equipment, hazardous atmospheres, or other hazardous conditions

 Adequate protective systems will be utilized to protect employees. This can be accomplished through sloping, shoring, or
shielding

 Workers must be supplied with and wear any personal protective equipment deemed necessary to assure their protection

 All spoil piles will be stored a minimum of two (2) feet from the sides of the excavation. The spoil pile must not block the
safe means of egress
 If a trench or excavation is 4 feet or deeper, stairways, ramps, or ladders will be used as a safe means of access and egress.

 No employee will work in an excavation where water is accumulating unless adequate measures are used to protect the
employees.

 A competent person will inspect all excavations and trenches daily, prior to employee exposure or entry, and after any
rainfall, soil change, or any other time needed during the shift. The competent person must take prompt measures to
eliminate any and all hazards.

 Excavations and trenches 4 feet or deeper that have the potential for toxic substances or hazardous atmospheres will be
tested at least daily. If the atmosphere is inadequate, protective systems will be utilized.
 All personnel near the road must wear orange reflective vests. Signs and barricades need to be provided.
 Soil classification:

 Soil of excavation classified depending on the stability from the high stability to low stability as following:
 Stable rock: Is defined as natural solid mineral matter that can be excavated with vertical sides and remain intact while
exposed. (Example: granite or sandstone).
 Type a soil:
Are cohesive soils with unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 tons per square foot or greater. (Example: clay, silty clay,
sandy clay, clay loam)
 Type b soil:
Are cohesive soils with an unconfined compressive strength greater than 0.5 tons per square foot but less than 1.5tsf
(example: angular gravel, silt, silt loam)
 Type c soil:
Are cohesive soils with an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 t/sf or less. (Example: gravel, sand and loamy sand,
submerged soil, soil from which water is freely seeping.

27
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

6) –WELDING AND CUTTING:


Important factors for the safe execution of electric and gas welding, cutting, brazing and soldering operations are:
 Properly trained personnel.
 Equipment well maintained and functional.
 Good ventilation and lighting.
 A tidy work area.
 Adherence to good work practices and safety Safe Instructions Welding, bumming or other operations that generate heat
or sparks, e.g. abrasive cutting in hazardous areas shall be carried out under a hot work permit.
 as general the welder shall wear:
 Face and eye protection with correct filters, integrated into the safety helmet.
 welder's gloves ( gauntlets )
 Long sleeved flame retardant overall.

A) GAS WELDING & CUTTING:

Fume and Gas Risks in Welding and Cutting Operations:


Welding, cutting and brazing operations etc. can produce mixtures of fumes and gases, the composition of which depends
on the welding temperature, arc intensity, electrode material and the gas mixture being used. Many of the fumes and gases
produced are toxic.

 General Safety Precautions. :

 At operational units/sites, all tanks vessels and equipment on which welding cutting, burning , brazing and soldering work is
carried out, must be either free from flammable gases and vapors, and cleaned of all traces of liquid, wax or solid
hydrocarbons.
 Consideration should be given to the build-up of toxic or flammable gases when vessels and tanks are being welded or burned
on the outside and suitable precautions taken.
 Where flammable materials may be found inspection by the operating authority will be necessary including the need to gas
test to ensure it is gas free.
 Before cutting the bottom plates of any tanks, test holes must be first drilled and gas tests taken, to ensure that conditions are
safe under the tank floor.
 No welding or burning will be permitted on pipelines where mechanical seal plugs are to be used, or where hot tapping Safe
Instructions are to be employed on live lines, without written authorization.
 All welding, burning and cutting shall be carried out only by suitable qualified personnel, using only equipment of an approved
type, which must be in a serviceable condition.
 Where gases/fumes are produced. They must be effectively disposed of either by natural ventilation or forced mechanical
extraction ventilation the aim being to draw away the gas/fume from the operator. Suitable respiratory protection should be

28
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

available as a backup to the ventilation system employed, in case of inadequate air mixing or the failure of the forced
ventilation system.
 No fuel or oxygen gas cylinders shall be taken into any confined space. Cylinders, hoses and fittings must be checked for leaks.
 Work must be screened to prevent sparks from flying outside the immediate welding area and all combustible material must
be removed if there is danger of ignition. Any drains in the area must be covered with fire resistant material. And loop seal
stopped up with water.
 In addition to the color coding, cylinder and cylinder fittings are different for the oxygen and fuel gases.
- Oxygen fittings have right-hand threads, and the cylinder fitting has a plain hexagon nut; whereas:
- Fuel gas fittings have left-handed threads, and cylinder fitting has a grooved hexagon nut. Oxygen and fuel gas hoses and
their associated equipment are designed for safety with their own gases and are not interchangeable.
 Safety Features That Must Be Incorporated In Gas Burning/Welding Equipment.
The following safety features must be incorporated:
- Pressure regulators that filter the gas and provide a constant delivery pressure in accordance the international standards.
- Pressure gauges with safety backs, which deflect the bursting, gases.
- Hose check valves (non-return valves) which allow gases to the blowpipe, but not back from it.
- Flashback arrestors which quench flashback flames and cut off the gas flow automatically, must be incorporated in both
oxygen and fuel gas lines.

B) ARC WELDING AND CUTTING:

 Apart from the hazard of fumes and gases described in gas welding & cutting two additional hazards are introduced
with electric arc welding, namely radiations from the welding arc and electrocution.

 These hazards can be eliminated be adhering to simple effective safety rules.

 Radiation from welding arcs consists of ultraviolet light, infrared rays and visible light. The effects and the protection
required are as follows:

 Ultraviolet and infrared rays are irritating to the skin, producing a condition similar to sunburn. Protective clothing worn
will adequately shield welder.

 Ultraviolet rays are extremely irritating to the conjunctive and cornea of the eye, even short exposures to the welding
arc produces a condition known as ‘arc eye’ or ‘eye flash’. It normally appears a few hours after exposure, producing
symptoms of pain, sand/grit in the eye feeling and watering of the eyes. With treatment, the effect normally wears off
after 24 hours.

 Eye protection must be worn incorporating suitable filters, as to overcome this problem.

 Visible light from the arc is so intense that the welder must wear eye protection.

 Regarding electrocution, this is normally caused by defective equipment or improper wiring. There is also, the added
danger when working at heights of falling as a result of electric shock.

 All welding sets, cables connectors and terminators must be maintained in good condition, and be of adequate capacity.

29
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

 Electrical supply and earthing connections to welding transformers and generator sets, must be made, inspected and
maintained by an authorized/competent person.

 Electrode holders shall be provided with a handle of tough insulating non-ignitable material.

 A fully insulated holder or hook should be provided to accommodate the live electrode holder when not in use.

7) Demolition Work

 Demolition work will always be considered of a high risk. Thus, specifically appointed competent and
experienced supervisors are to conduct supervision of such work.

 Any demolition work is subject to the risk assessment and methods of statement

8) Confined Space Entry:

- The meaning of confined space is defined as any area that is not designed for human occupancy, is large enough to
enter and has limited means of access or egress, or has the potential for oxygen deficiency or enrichment or the
accumulation of hazardous materials
* General Requirements:
 Work Permit (Confined Space / Vessel Entry) according to the project documentation at the site.
 A work permit is required before a person can either enter or partially enter a confined space.

*Construction Personnel
 The personnel involved must be fully aware of any dangers or risks involved.
 The H.S.E Department rules, procedures and instructions must be observed, including Work Permit Systems.

* Assessment:

 The Project HSE Manager, Construction Manager and the immediate Supervisor of the work must carry out an assessment
in conjunction with any additional personnel who are experienced in the work. The Area Authority (Construction
Manager) assisted by the HSE Department, must be allowed sufficient time to consider each job and personally check
each stage of the action required in the issue of the permit .
 The process of assessment must involve consideration of the work required to be done, the methods by which the work
can be done and the hazards inherent in the plant in relation to the work and to all personnel directly involved with the
works.
 In assessing the work and methods available, the first object should be to see whether entry into the plant by personnel is
really necessary. Entry should only be considered when no alternative method is available.
 The object of the assessment is to determine what steps should be taken to make the job safe and what precautions should
be adopted during the actual working.

* Withdrawal from Service & Isolation:


 Before equipment/area is prepared for entry it must be withdrawn from service and isolated so that personnel cannot
carry out other activities, open valves or activate machinery whilst others are inside or working on it.

30
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

 Warning notices, as appropriate, must be displayed. Full discussion shall take place with all personnel involved prior to
work commencing. Precautions must be taken to prevent potentially dangerous materials from entering it whilst persons
are inside.

* Cleaning and Purging:

 All materials, solid, liquid or gases, which are liable to present a hazard to persons inside the confined space, must be
removed.
 Special care must be exercised when cleaning, and the cleaning processes and methods must be adapted to meet each
separate set of circumstances.
 The cleaning process may have to be repeated several times to ensure that all potentially dangerous materials have been
removed.
 Extra care should be exercised if any sludge is suspected to be Radioactive.

A) Steam Cleaning:

 The method of cleaning to be used must depend on the nature of the materials concerned. In many cases, steam cleaning
will be found to give satisfactory results. If the material that is to be removed is not readily volatile or is corrosive,
preliminary treatment by repeated washing with water, other suitable solvents, or with a neutralizing agent, may precede
steaming.
 Where there is solid matter at the bottom of a vessel, a perforated steam pipe may be used to stir up the deposit and assist
in its removal.
 If the equipment/area has been left for more than a few hours after steaming, it is advisable to re-steam immediately before
entry to remove any vapors that may have been liberated from crevices or from small quantities or residues or sludge
remaining inside.

b) Other methods of cleaning:


 There is Other methods that might be used depend on the materials to be removed and could range from simple but
thorough washing with hot and cold water to the use of solvents or neutralizing agents.
 It is important that no secondary risk is created by the use of, for example, a toxic or flammable solvent and subsequent
failure to remove all trace of it from the confined space. In such a case steaming to remove the solvent may be necessary.

c) Purging:

 When cleaning has been completed all liquid remaining in the confined space must be run out and manholes opened to
allow ventilation.
 In the case of steam cleaning this must be done whilst the equipment is still hot, to take advantage of convection currents.
If natural ventilation is not sufficient to remove the last trace of the vapors, etc. then artificial means e.g. blower, exhaust
fan or compressed air, must be used.
 Equipment containing flammable gas or vapor may be purged with an inert gas (e.g. nitrogen) to avoid the formation of
an explosive mixture with air when it is open up.
 If persons must enter or even approach the equipment that has been purged with an inert gas, precautions must be taken
to ensure that there is adequate oxygen to support life.

31
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

d) Testing:

 A test on the atmosphere using a certified gas detector is not normally satisfactory for assessing possible toxic risks. In
the majority of cases, the safe working limits to prevent an explosion are many times greater than the toxic limits. Where
it is necessary to test for flammability or explosively using a certified gas detector (as, for example, when entry wearing
Breathing Apparatus “BA” is considered), then it is particularly important that the equipment used is well maintained
and calibrated before use. Any personnel using BA equipment shall be fully trained and competent in its use.
 Tests should be made from outside the confined space, drawing the air through long sample probes. It is essential
however that the tests must be made throughout the whole volume of the space. Any sludge present must be disturbed
before testing to release any trapped gases or vapors.
 If it is necessary for a person to enter a vessel to carry out a test, or before the conclusion of such a test, he must wear
suitable Breathing Apparatus). In addition a safety harness and lifeline, the loose end of which is held by a man keeping
watch outside, must be capable of pulling him out. Reviving (resuscitation) apparatus ready for immediate use should
be kept close at hand or within the site, during such operations.

* Certification:

 The responsible person who has been directing the operations must make a decision on the method of entry into the
confined space in conjunction with the Safety Officer. They must take account of all the factors likely to affect the
safety of the operation and decide in the light of their knowledge and experience. Consideration must be given to, but
not limited to, the effectiveness of isolation, the amount of sludge or other deposits remaining after cleaning, the results
of atmospheric testing, the work to be done and the nature of the equipment/area. In addition they must specify if: -
 The space is safe for entry without Breathing Apparatus for a specified period and with certain other precautions taken.
 Breathing apparatus and a lifeline should be worn and other precautions are also taken. No entry shall be allowed under
Breathing Apparatus until full backup is provided and a Breathing Apparatus controller is present.

They may then make out a Work Permit stating:


 The safety measures, which have been taken, e.g. isolation, cleaning, purging, testing
 The precautions that are considered necessary for entry into the space (e.g. ventilation, breathing apparatus, lifeline, and
reviving apparatus)
 The limitations of the permit regarding the equipment to which it refers.
 The type of operation to be carried out
 The time the permit expires.

 Precautions during Work - Entry without Breathing Apparatus :

 When work is being executed inside a confined space and Breathing Apparatus is not being worn, an adequate supply
of breathable air must be maintained. The purpose of this is to dilute any gases, etc. which might be evolved from the
operation, from deposits, seams and also to provide fresh air for the person or persons inside.
 The provision of ventilation in this manner is not an alternative to the use of Breathing Apparatus where the gases, etc.
are likely to be present to the extent that persons could be overcome.
 The method of ventilation and the quantity of air required depend on the individual circumstances and must be
prescribed by the person responsible. If a vessel has sufficient top and bottom openings then natural ventilation may be
sufficient, but in most cases some form of mechanical ventilation is to be preferred, for example:
 By introducing compressed air
 Using a blower fan and ducting
 By using an exhaust fan or ejector and ducting (provided there is an adequate supply of fresh air to replace the air
exhausted).
 In all cases the airline or ducting must be introduced at or extend to the bottom of the vessel to ensure removal of heavy
gas or vapor and effective circulation of air. Under no circumstances must oxygen be introduced to 'sweeten' the air.
 Oxygen enrichment renders certain substances (e.g. grease) liable to spontaneous combustion.

32
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

 When there is a danger of static discharge, earthing and bonding of ducting and/or airlines to the metalwork of the
confined space is necessary. At the discretion of the person responsible, it will be necessary to carry out further testing
of the atmosphere inside the confined space whilst work is in progress.
 Whilst a worker is inside a confined space he must be kept under constant observation by an attendant outside.
If the worker is wearing a lifeline, care should be taken to ensure that it does not become entangled on pipes and fittings
inside the confined space.
 According to the nature of the work and the risk, the working spell must be interrupted by rest periods during which the
worker is able to leave the space and be in the open air.
 He must leave the space prior to the time limit stated on the Work Permit expiring.

 Precautions during Work - Entry where Breathing Apparatus is Necessary :


 Breathing Apparatus should be well fitting and worn properly. When using an air-line type of breathing apparatus,
filtered air is taken from a supply at such a rate that a positive pressure is maintained inside the face-piece.
 Apparatus of the Canister Respirator or Cartridge type MUST NOT be used for any of the operations described in
this instruction. Such equipment does not provide adequate protection against high concentrations of contaminants,
and the equipment is useless in atmospheres where there is a deficiency of oxygen.
 In addition to wearing Breathing Apparatus the person entering the confined space must, where practicable, wear a
safety harness, lifeline and communications. An attendant outside the space must tend the lifeline.
 The person outside must be in constant attendance when work is being done inside the confined space, and that
person must be capable of pulling the person, inside the space, out of it in case of emergencies.
 The harness and lifeline must be worn so that the wearer can be drawn up headfirst through any manhole or opening.
 An armlet attached to the lifeline and fastened to the wrist or forearm of the wearer is one method of enabling this
to be done easily.
 The harness of the lifeline should be of suitable construction and the lifeline should be made of suitable rope so that
they are well able to stand the strain likely to be imposed on them.
 Flammable and/or explosive gases or vapors may pose special problems when persons wearing breathing apparatus
are doing work. Whilst protection may have been afforded against any toxic risk, there may be an equally serious
danger of the concentration of gas or vapor in the atmosphere rising above its lower explosive limit. This is the lowest
concentration of the gas or vapor at which it forms an explosive mixture with air.
 To prevent this happening it is essential that the concentration of a flammable gas or vapor is not allowed to rise
above one quarter (25%) of its lower explosive limit. This is done by adequate forced ventilation
 The precise rate is calculated with reference to the anticipated maximum rate of evolution of the gas or vapor. Testing
the atmosphere with a correctly calibrated gas detector will assess the adequacy of the ventilation.

 Rescue :
Equipment and trained personnel shall be readily available for rescue purposes at all times when a person is inside a
confined space.
- The equipment available shall include additional sets of Breathing Apparatus, lifelines and resuscitation
apparatus.
- Where limitations on entry have been specified, these must also be applied to entry for the purposes of rescue. If,
however, entry has been allowed without Breathing Apparatus, and the person inside has been overcome, it must be
assumed that entry for rescue is unsafe without Breathing Apparatus.
- The attendant and men likely to form a rescue team must be adequately trained in the risks involved and in the use of
Breathing Apparatus, lifelines, resuscitation apparatus and artificial respiration. Oxygen MUST NOT be used to
improve the atmosphere inside a confined space after a person has been overcome.

33
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

* Cancellation of Permit
A Work Permit must be cancelled when operations to which it refers have been completed. It must be returned to the person
responsible by the person to whom it was issued, who must sign a declaration that all personnel and equipment have been
removed from the confined space / area, and personnel warned that the space is no longer safe for entry.

Return to Service
When work has been completed, the Work Permit has been closed out and the equipment/area can be returned for service.
The responsible person (Area Authority) should first check that the Permit has been completed, then make the final entry on
the Permit for acceptance of the work/area from the Performer/Initiator of the job.

* Training
Effective training is necessary for:
- Supervisors
- Persons likely to enter confined spaces to carry out work in them
- Persons likely to act as attendants.
- Persons appointed to form a rescue team.

In practice, many of these functions will be fulfilled by the same persons, but it is important to appreciate that all persons in
such positions must be properly trained.
In this context training must include
- Use of the equipment provided, including a knowledge of its construction and operation
- Check instructions when donning apparatus
- How to deal with malfunctions and failures of equipment during use
- Emergency procedures
- Artificial respiration and resuscitation
 The object in every case should be to ensure that all personnel likely to be concerned with entry into confined spaces
are fully aware of the dangers involved and the precautions to be taken.
 The manufacturer can often usefully give instructions in the use of equipment. A manufacturer's instruction and
maintenance manual must be kept available.
 The training must be reinforced by practices, particularly rescue practices. Refresher course, talks, etc. should be given
as necessary.
 In addition to the types of training outlined above, there is a related need to ensure that persons who are likely to be
conducting tests under the Work Permit system are properly trained and competent in the use of the equipment provided.
Such training must include a basic understanding of how the equipment works, methods of use, its limitations,
interpretation of results, maintenance and calibration where appropriate.

34
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

 List of Approved Gas Testers names and specimen signatures should be at the site.

8) ACCESS TO ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION AND OTHER TECHNICAL ROOMS

Authorized persons are only allowed to enter electrical substations or technical rooms. Thereby a permit to work is mandatory.

RADIOGRAPHY

 This procedure covers all activities involving transportation, storage, or use of radioactive sources. Every effort is to be
exerted so as to ensure that radiography is only carried out whilst other jobs are not going on.

 Only a specialist technical that have governmental agreement is engaged in radiography.


 Work is not permitted within the area determined for radiography.
 (Area must be clear from people – (Always work at night))
 In all cases, a hot work permit and a radiography permit should be applied.
 Both constructor manager are responsible for provide the required safety measures.
 Sources are only stored and transported in appropriate sealed containers (special for radioactive sources).
 When radiography is conducted, an exclusion zone is to be established at a distance that assures an instantaneous dose
of no greater than the allowable limit .to any passerby. This zone is marked by black and yellow barriers showing that
the radiation danger of radiography is in progress and that individuals must keep out of signs. In addition, visible and
audible alarms are placed at appropriate points all along the perimeter to ensure that any person in vicinity is aware of
the work.
 In the event of any incident resulting in a loss of containment, the radiography technician immediately takes steps to
ensure that no person is exposed to potentially harmful levels of radiation. Once these steps are in hand, the HSE
department will report site with procedures required for such incidents.
1-Non Destructive Tests
The NDT contractor will assure radiography timing is fully known to all personnel in adjacent areas including safety
department. During operation, the radiography crew will conduct full area checks within the barriers, sign posted and let
area, and to be certain they are clear to start operation. Any violation to this work is reported to the construction manager.

Project safety department is to be furnished with the following notation prior NDT work:
 A copy of the radioactive materials licenses or registration.
 Type of exposure device, x-ray machine or source handling equipment to be used.
 A copy of the source decay certificate
 Description, design and location of the storage facility to be used
 A copy of the radiation operation document.
2-Radiography Emergency Procedure:
Generally speaking, an emergency situation arises when the source is jammed in its guide lube on the source or is accidentally
separated from the control.

35
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

Work should be conducted within a predetermined barrier and with constant monitoring of the radiation level using a survey
meter.
In the event this accident occurred, following actions are taken:
 Action by radiography
 Using a survey meter, measure the dose rate around the area and establish a new safe barrier beyond which the dose is
less than the allowable limit depending on the YEMGAS documentation.
 Restrict access to this barrier and display a warning light around it together with radiation warning notice.
 Carefully plan for actions to be taken. Prepare all equipment required for the recovery operation and store such materials
as long handling tongs shielding… etc in the dark room on site.
 Inform the persons in charge of the area and propose an action plan.
 Using tongs, attempt to place the source in its container as quickly as possible.

 Never try to pick the source with bare hands.


 In case of source falling through scaffolding/grating, if the competent person fails to deal with source, he must contact
the ATOMIC AUTHORITY IMMEDIATELY.

ELECTRICAL HAZARDS:
 Each cable set with such required attachment as cap, plug or receptacle and any equipment connected with cable
and plug, except those fixed but not exposed to damage are to be visually inspected before each day use. Not
only does inspection detect such external defects as deformed or missing pins and insulation damage but also
internal defects. Any damaged or defective equipment is to be removed from service till repaired.
 Following tests are made to all cable sets and receptacles apart from the permanent wiring of a building or
structure and other cable-plug connected equipment, which require grounding:
 Equipment grounding conductors are tested for continuity.
 Receptacles and relevant attachment such as caps or plugs are tested for correct equipment-grounding conductor.
The equipment-grounding conductor is to be connected to its proper terminal.
Required tests are to be performed in the following manner: -
 Before equipment enter into service.
 Before equipment is re-engaged into work after an incident.
All Cable, electrical equipment tested about the ground conduction, receptacles, caps, plugs have to be tested and labeling
acc. The color code
1) Implementation procedures.
 Before use of electrical tools and equipment, workers are responsible for visually inspecting defects. Visual inspection
shall is daily performed for tools that are in use. Defective tools or cables are removed from service to be repaired or
replaced.
 All electrical tools, equipment cables and receptacles are tested for ground continuity. Conductors are inspected for
defects. Upon passing all tests and inspections, the tools/equipment are to be color-coded as per the code scheme set
forth at the end of this procedure. As soon as electrical tools/equipment arrive at the job area, they are not moved to
the field until first checked by the competent person.

36
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

 Only competent persons or designated repairman repair electrical tools/equipment or cables. After being repaired,
tools shall be re-inspected and coded with a repair code.
2) Records:
Written records are made and kept on the job site. Such records are related to the grounding inspections, concluded results
and required repairs.
3) Color Code Designation:
Tools, cable, and equipment that have passed required inspections carry the color appropriate for the inspection period.
This code is placed adjacent to the tool on the power cable and adjacent to the plug on cables.

EMERGENCY/ FIRE PROTECTION

1) Introduction

 The project takes proactive measures to prevent any emergencies and/or fire. Requirement and applicable government
regulations are hereunder summarized: -
 All operations are conducted in a manner as to minimize the risk of emission, release, spill or discharge of hazardous
materials into the air, soils, water, sewers and fire. Minimization of risk can be achieved by:
 Storage of flammable and other hazardous materials in a systematically controlled way. Storage location and the use of
them is to be authorized by HSE manager of the project
 Good housekeeping. Areas are to be kept free from and wastes.
 Monthly inspection of all firefighting systems.
 Appropriate work practices like emergency drill.
 Use of containment methods at any potential source of ignition such as fireproof blankets around welding and flame
cutting operations.
 Locating appropriate fire extinguishers within 15 meters of hot works.
 Integrity of electrical equipment.
 Isolating flammable materials from ignition source.
 Use of fire prevention surveillance, alarms, fire detector.
 Keeping Emergency/fire protection and reports in the agenda of the weekly safety meeting.
 Bounding stores of flammable materials and substances that could damage the environment whilst regularly inspecting
them.
 Compliance with all legal requirements related to storage and use of flammable materials.
NOTE: should any circumstance be found of imminent potential danger to people, assets or environment, all work in the
area of danger is to be stopped until corrective actions are taken.

2) Fire Fighting Equipment


 Location of extinguishers is clearly marked and free access maintained.
Extinguisher is to be located as follow: -
 Fire extinguisher, hoses etc. should be 15 meter away from any welding in addition any welding machine should have
his own fire extinguisher.
 At least one permanent extinguisher is to be available in each building, near the door. Additional extinguishers should
be placed every 30 meters.

3) Emergency alarm siren :

A. Activation alarms are two types:


Emergency alarm : Interrupted siren
Signal safe/All clear : Continuous siren

37
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

B. The alarm is to be tested every week.


C. After any alarm, all individuals on site should react as follows:
 Stop work.
 Turnoff the engines and switch off lights & all explosion proof engines and equipment.
 Stop all welding and burning operations& Close all cylinders respecting welding activities.
 Keep roads free for fire trucks and other emergency transports.
 Evacuate all vessels.
 The camp should have an emergency alarm siren system and must be tested every week.

PLANNED INSPECTION AND AUDITS

Since activities may differ in one site, coordination of work is much important the safety of environment and protection of
work.
The aim of inspection is to identify the process of implementing HSE programs and if there is any chance for improving HSE
performance.

1) Regular Inspection
Project HSE department arranges safety tour around site periodically. The inspection include both unsafe acts and safety
performance.
The safety tour must have determined date and time and the report must cover the following point:
 Time and place of inspection,
 The conditions evaluated,
 The mistakes found,
 A short coming schedule for corrective actions and the persons responsible for such correction.

2) Environment inspection
 The HSE department arranges for an environmental inspection monthly so as to inspect the performance
towards environment inside the project.

The report must cover the following point:


 Time and place of inspection,
 The conditions evaluated,
 The mistakes found,
 A short coming schedule for corrective actions and the persons responsible for such correction.

ACCIDENT REPORTING

All accidents arising out of or related to PTJ operations, which may result in time lost, must be immediately reported to
client and project manager.
A brief incident report is made including the following information:
 Location and date of accident.
1) Names of persons involved
2) The employing company of persons involved.
3) Nature of accident.
Accident Investigation Procedure
All accidents are immediately reported to project manager by the safety department.
According to that investigation unsafe practices could be corrected or prevented.

Collecting facts:
 The injured persons are questioned as soon as possible.
 Photographs of the scene showing all angles are taken as required and labels with the date, stuck on each photo.
 Accident witnesses and other interested parties are questioned and statements, collected.

38
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department

Mosaab Mansoub Ahmed Rezk QA/ QC 0 August 2017 HSE

 Work area and weather are recorded.


 Prints, sketches, a written schedule, instructions and procedures pertaining work performed are collected.

HEALTH /SAFETY REGULATIONS

 HASSC health regulations are applied to all activities, buildings and other permanent premises belonging to or occupied
by HAS or any contractor authorized to work on behalf of HASSC.
 Also, mobile or temporary premises, construction sites and other areas where HASSC or its contractor carry out work
are subject to health regulations.
 Any deviation from base regulation for practical reasons is to be approved by HAS prior work or occupation of the
temporary premises.
 A sanitary squad performs such sanitary services as collection and disposal of garbage/wastes and cleaning roads,
building, living quarters and sanitary facilities. All necessary steps of good sanitary practices are to be taken so as to
keep the camp and work sites free from harmful insects, rodent and other pests. Only upon approval by company medical
officer, insecticides or other rodent killers can be used as a support to the sanitary program.

1) Sanitary Conveniences/Sewage Disposal


 Inside the work premises or areas, sufficient cleaning of sanitary conveniences is prodded into, especially in places
where access is frequent.
 Sanitary conveniences inside the compartment are to be kept clean and properly maintained. Lighting and ventilation
are to be provided. The floors, walls, and ceilings are to be structured in a way that can be easily cleaned. Closets,
lavatories, urinals, sinks and showers are to be made of materials that facilitate cleaning. All sanitary conveniences and
washrooms are provided with good ventilation.
 Showers and lavatories are to be provided with adequate water supply. The floor of the shower is to be designed for
good drainage so that fungus infection of the feet is prevented.
 Soap is to be available inside all communal sanitary conveniences.
 Where practical all sewage and waste effluents are to be connected with the main sewer and a proper septic tank.

2) Water supply

 Water is to be provided and maintained at suitable points conveniently accessible to employees. Contained in suitable
vessels, drinking water is to be supplied through fresh water and vessels from contamination. Portable water testing
regularly with report. All water supplied for domestic use is to be disinfected by chlorinating. Drinking water is clearly
marked “drinking water”. At all points, where drain connections are not practicable, arrangements should be made for
the disposal of wastes and overflow of water by means of sub-soil drainage system.
3) Disposal of Garbage
 A sufficient number of fly-proof bins are to be available inside food establishments, camps and work sites so as to clear
the area from flies.
 Waste and rubbish are to be disposed of in a disposal site downwind of the camp or work site. Garbage is burned or
buried.
 Waste stream (industrial, domestic, chemical, hazardous…etc) should be separated and disposed off on company agreed
disposal sites.

MEDICAL CARE

 In the big distant sites, staffs are to be trained internally on first aid.
 A physician is to be available on site.
 An ambulance is to be available for the project.

39
Safety and Health Manual

12.12.2016 A For REVIEW AND COMMENT Ahmed Rezk Sherif Kadry Hassan Allam

PREPARED CHECKED APPROVED


DATE REV. REVISION DETAILS
BY BY BY
Contents
1. STATEMENT OF POLICY .............................................................................................................. 4
1.1. OBJECTIVES .......................................................................................................................... 4
1.2. GOALS .................................................................................................................................... 4
1.3. STATEMENT OF POLICY ...................................................................................................... 4
1.4. PURPOSE AND SCOPE ........................................................................................................ 5
2. ADMINISTRATION AND ORGANIZATION .................................................................................... 6
2.1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE ........................................................................................................ 6
2.2. OBJECTIVE ............................................................................................................................ 6
2.3. PROGRAM EFFECTIVENESS ............................................................................................... 6
2.4. PROCEDURES ....................................................................................................................... 7
3. TRAINING ..................................................................................................................................... 10
3.1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE ...................................................................................................... 10
3.2. OBJECTIVE .......................................................................................................................... 10
3.3. RECORDS AND MINUTES .................................................................................................. 10
3.4. TRAINING ............................................................................................................................. 10
3.5. BULLETIN BOARD ............................................................................................................... 11
3.6. MEETINGS............................................................................................................................ 11
4. CONTROLS .................................................................................................................................. 12
4.1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE ...................................................................................................... 12
4.2. PROCEDURE ....................................................................................................................... 12
4.3. PLANNING ............................................................................................................................ 14
4.4. AUDITS ................................................................................................................................. 14
4.5. NOTIFICATION OF HAZARDS ............................................................................................. 14
4.6. EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES ............................................................................................ 14
5. VISITORS SAFETY ...................................................................................................................... 15
5.1. OBJECTIVE .......................................................................................................................... 15
5.2. PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................................... 15
6. GENERAL SAFETY AND HEALTH PROCEDURES.................................................................... 16
6.1. EXCAVATION ....................................................................................................................... 16
6.2. BLASTING............................................................................................................................. 17
6.3. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) ................................................................. 17
6.4. WALL AND FLOOR OPENINGS .......................................................................................... 18
6.5. SCAFFOLDS ......................................................................................................................... 19
6.6. LADDERS ............................................................................................................................. 19
6.7. GAS WELDING AND CUTTING ........................................................................................... 21
6.8. ARC WELDING AND CUTTING ........................................................................................... 21
6.9. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION AND EQUIPMENT .............................................................. 22
6.10. MOTOR VEHICLES, AND HEAVY MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT .................................... 24
6.11. CONCRETE AND CONCRETE FORMS .......................................................................... 26
6.12. STEEL ERECTION ........................................................................................................... 26
6.13. CRANE AND RIGGING SAFETY ..................................................................................... 27
6.14. ILLUMINATION ................................................................................................................. 32
6.15. PILE DRIVING ................................................................................................................... 32
6.16. CHAINS AND COME-A-LONGS ....................................................................................... 33
6.17. MATERIAL HANDLING AND STORAGE ......................................................................... 33
6.18. ABRASIVE BLASTING ..................................................................................................... 35
6.19. SIGNS, TAGS, AND BARRICADING................................................................................ 35
7. INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE ................................................................................................................ 37
7.1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE ...................................................................................................... 37
7.2. OBJECTIVE .......................................................................................................................... 38
7.3. PURPOSE ............................................................................................................................. 38
8. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES..................................................................................................... 41
8.1. OBJECTIVE .......................................................................................................................... 41
8.2. FACILTIES AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................. 41
9. LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURE ............................................................................................. 41
9.1. PURPOSE ............................................................................................................................. 41
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 2 of 64
9.2. PROCEDURE ....................................................................................................................... 42
10. WORK PERMIT SYSTEM ......................................................................................................... 43
10.1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE .................................................................................................. 43
10.2. OBJECTIVE ...................................................................................................................... 44
10.3. WORK PERMIT SYSTEM ................................................................................................. 44
10.4. HOT WORK PERMIT ........................................................................................................ 44
10.5. COLD WORK PERMIT ..................................................................................................... 44
10.6. CONFINED SPACE WORK PERMIT ............................................................................... 45
10.7. EXCAVATION WORK PERMIT ........................................................................................ 45
10.8. PERMIT ISSUING ............................................................................................................. 45
10.9. HANDLING OF ISSUING AND CLOSING OUT PERMIT................................................. 46
11. CUTTING AND WELDING PROCEDURES ............................................................................. 46
11.1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE .................................................................................................. 46
11.2. OBJECTIVE ...................................................................................................................... 46
11.3. PROCEDURE ................................................................................................................... 46
11.4. HOT WORK PERMITS ..................................................................................................... 47
12. FALL HAZARD CONTROL ....................................................................................................... 47
12.1. POLICY ............................................................................................................................. 47
12.2. PURPOSE ......................................................................................................................... 47
12.3. PROCEDURE ................................................................................................................... 47
12.4. INSPECTIONS, STORAGE, AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................... 48
13. CONFINED SPACE ENTRY ..................................................................................................... 49
13.1. PURPOSE ......................................................................................................................... 49
13.2. CONFINED SPACE .......................................................................................................... 49
13.3. PROCEDURE ................................................................................................................... 49
14. SELF PROPELLED WORK PLATFORMS (Aerial Lifts/Man lifts) .................. 56
14.1. OBJECTIVE ...................................................................................................................... 56
14.2. INSPECTION .................................................................................................................... 56
14.3. OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS................................................................................... 57
15. FIRE PROTECTION AND PREVENTION ................................................................................ 57
15.1. OBJECTIVE ...................................................................................................................... 57
15.2. GENERAL PROTECTION AND PREVENTION MEASURES .......................................... 57
15.3. HOUSEKEEPING.............................................................................................................. 58
15.4. BURNING OPERATIONS ................................................................................................. 58
15.5. FIRE CLASSIFICATION ................................................................................................... 58
15.6. FIRE EXTINGUISHER ...................................................................................................... 59
15.7. INSPECTION .................................................................................................................... 59
16. FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS ......................................................................... 59
16.1. SCOPE .............................................................................................................................. 59
16.2. DEFINITIONS.................................................................................................................... 59
16.3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................... 60
16.4. INDOOR STORAGE ......................................................................................................... 60
16.5. OUTSIDE STORAGE ........................................................................................................ 61
16.6. PORTABLE FIRE PROTECTION ..................................................................................... 61
16.7. SERVICING AND REFUELING AREA ............................................................................. 61
16.8. DISPENSING OF FLAMMABLE OR COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS ...................................... 61
16.9. COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS AND HANDLING ............................................................... 61
ATTACHMENT 1 ................................................................................................................................... 63

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 3 of 64


1. STATEMENT OF POLICY
1.1. OBJECTIVES
The elimination of accidents in all company Projects.

There are three sound reasons for this objective:

1.1.1. No endeavor is worthy if it should cause human suffering through disabling injury
or loss of life.
1.1.2. A good safety record reflects the quality of management, supervision and the
work force. It also serves to promote business and thereby contributes to the
continuing growth and success of the company.
1.1.3. Poor accident experience increases costs and results in a loss of profits.

1.2. GOALS
The safety goals of our company are to achieve zero fatalities, zero permanent
disabilities, zero lost- time accidents, and a safety performance level below 50% of
OSHA heavy construction average injury rates.

1.3. STATEMENT OF POLICY


1.3.1. H.A.C is guided by an established accident-prevention policy. This policy is
based on a sincere desire to eliminate personal injuries, occupational illnesses
and damage to equipment and property, as well as to protect the general public
whenever and wherever the public comes in contact with, or is affected by the
facilities construction activity.

1.3.2. H.A.C will maintain a safety and accident prevention program, which meets the
requirements of the Host Country, local codes, and all other authorities having
jurisdiction over the Work. As a supplement to the requirements of such
authorities, the Contractor shall comply with the pertinent provisions of the
“Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction” published by the Associated
General Contractors of ARE.

1.3.3. Management and supervision are charged with the responsibility of preventing
the occurrence of incidents or conditions that could lead to occupational injuries
or illness. While the ultimate success of the Safety, Health and Fire Prevention
Program depends upon the full cooperation of each individual employee, it is
management's responsibility to see that safety, health and fire prevention rules
and procedures are adequate and enforced, and to see that effective training and
education programs are employed to the best advantage.

1.3.4. Never should safety be sacrificed for production. It shall be considered an


integral part of quality control, cost reduction and job efficiency.

1.3.5. Every supervisor shall be held accountable for the safety performance
demonstrated by the employees under his supervision. Employees are
responsible to abide by procedures, use tools and equipment safely, follow the
rules and use personal protective equipment provided.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 4 of 64


1.3.6. Even though we believe our Program to be most effective, we also recognize that
as long as any possibility exists for even one person to suffer injury, we shall
continue to stress safety and to strive for improvement.

Our policy is to accomplish work in the safest possible manner consistent with
good practices. Management and supervision at every level is charged with the
task of translating this policy into positive actions.

1.4. PURPOSE AND SCOPE


1.4.1. H.A.C requires that a consistent Construction Safety, Health and Fire Prevention
Program be employed during all activities of its employees, agents, and
subcontractors. This Construction Safety, Health and Fire Prevention Manual
present the minimum requirements acceptable to H.A.C for efforts conducted by
itself and its subcontractors at all times.

1.4.2. In performance of contracting activity, commitment shall be established for


accident prevention and fire prevention. Safety shall take precedence over
schedule and production to eliminate personal injuries, occupational illnesses and
damage to equipment or property, as well as protecting the general public
whenever they may be affected by the work.

1.4.3. Management and supervision shall recognize the responsibility for compliance to
all established codes, regulations, standards and procedures. Enforcement
action is mandatory. Therefore, every supervisor shall be held accountable for
the safety performance demonstrated by the employees under his supervision.

1.4.4. In performance of the work H.A.C and its subcontractors shall meet the
requirements of the Host Country, local codes and all other authorities having
jurisdiction over the Work.

1.4.5. A training program shall be effectively established for each employee soliciting
their full cooperation with a belief that all accidents can be prevented.

1.4.6. H.A.C and its subcontractors shall have responsibility for the safe use, storage,
and disposal of any chemicals, refuse, waste, or other materials generated or
used in the performance of the work in accordance with this Safety, Health, and
Fire Prevention Manual.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 5 of 64


2. ADMINISTRATION AND ORGANIZATION

2.1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE


2.1.1. To establish, implement and execute a practical, sound and effective
Construction Safety, Health, and Fire Prevention Program to accomplish work in
the safest possible manner consistent with good work practices.

2.1.2. The Projects Safety, Health and Fire Prevention Program H.A.C been designed
to assist H.A.C Management and subcontractors and their supervision to
recognize, evaluate and control hazardous activities or conditions within their
scope of work.

2.1.3. The purpose of this Program is directed to the following:

a) Provide safe and healthy working conditions for all persons working on the
Company.
b) Maintain all Projects Fire Prevention Program to eliminate fire hazards and
provide adequate means to fight any fire that might occur and provide for
proper notification of the Engineer, Owner and local authorities.
c) Protection of the general public in case working in public area.
d) Reduction of accident costs.
e) To act as a guide for interpretation of current Egyptian Labor Laws, provincial
and local laws, statutes, ordinances, rules, regulations, requirements and
guidelines of government authorities and agencies bearing on the
performance of the work and agencies as outlined in this procedure.
f) H.A.C management & supervisory personnel shall assume direct
responsibility for employee safety for work directly under their control.
g) H.A.C management and supervisory personnel shall not assume or relieve
subcontractors from their direct responsibility for employees safety.

2.2. OBJECTIVE
Identify the Program and how it shall be administered, responsibilities and ensure
adequate Control.

2.3. PROGRAM EFFECTIVENESS


2.3.1. The effectiveness of the Safety Program depends upon the active participation
and sincere cooperation of all employees, and the coordination of their efforts in
carrying out the following basic responsibilities:

a) Proper planning of all work to minimize personal injury, property damage, and
the loss of productive efforts.

b) Establish and maintain a system for early detection and correction of unsafe
practices and conditions.

c) Provide adequate protection of adjacent employees and private properties to


ensure the safety at all times.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 6 of 64


d) Establish and conduct a Safety Program designed to gain, stimulate and
maintain the interest and active participation of all employees through:

i. Safety meetings and communications.


ii. Investigations of accidents and potential safety incidents to determine
cause and the taking of necessary corrective actions.
iii. Use of proper work procedures, personal protective equipment and
mechanical guards.
iv. Safety instruction to individual employees and group Safety Training
Programs.
v. Maintenance of records of accidents and losses and development of
accident/loss experience summaries.

2.4. PROCEDURES
2.4.1. Administration

a) H.A.C is responsible for monitoring all Projects Safety, Health and Fire
Prevention Program, which includes auditing the safety performance and
monitoring compliance of all subcontractors, with applicable Egyptian Labor
Laws, provincial, local and H.A.C Safety, Health and Fire Prevention
requirements.

b) H.A.C Safety Supervisors and field supervision management in conjunction


with all sites supervision shall conduct daily inspections. Inspections shall
include subcontracted work in conjunction with subcontractor’s site
supervision.

c) Whenever unsafe conditions and fire hazards are noted and immediate
corrective action cannot be obtained, the Safety Supervisors or
subcontractor shall be notified in writing of the unsafe condition and is
required to correct the situation and notify the H.A.C Safety Supervisor of
action taken within specified time.

d) Should there be a conflict between any applicable safety laws, rules, etc., the
most stringent shall apply. The H.A.C Safety Supervisor shall be the final
authority on any question or conflict that may occur regarding the
interpretation of, or the compliance with, any safety laws, rules, etc.

2.4.2. Subcontractors

Each subcontractor shall designate, in writing, a qualified person, knowledgeable


in safety, health and fire prevention whose responsibilities shall be solely
responsible for performing safety, health and fire prevention services under the
direction of the subcontractor's Project Managers. Any deviation from the above
shall be submitted for approval.

The subcontractor’s Safety Representative shall be certified as required by


the Egyptian Labor Law.

a) Upon award of a subcontract, and prior to commencing work on site, the


ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 7 of 64
subcontractors shall submit the following for review and approval:

(i) Company's safety policy statement based on compliance with the


Project’s Safety, Health and Fire Prevention Program.
(ii) Safety Program shall identify areas of compliance under their scope of
work, interfacing with all Projects Safety, Health and Fire Prevention
Program.

The review and approval of subcontractor’s Safety, Health and Fire


Prevention Program does not relieve H.A.C from any of the subcontractor’s
direct responsibility for employees and public safety.

b) Submit a history of experience and qualifications of the person who shall


manage their safety functions on sites. Once approved, the Safety
Representative shall not be changed except upon approval of H.A.C. Such
approval is not an acceptance of responsibility.

c) The subcontractor shall furnish all reasonable information concerning safety


of his operations on all Projects as may be required by the H.A.C Projects
Team.

d) All personnel working on the projects shall attend Weekly Tool Box Safety
Meetings provided by H.A.C or the subcontractor.

e) Each subcontractor shall indoctrinate his employees as to the safety, health


and fire prevention requirements and enforce adherence to safe working
practices and procedures.

f) Each subcontractor is responsible for planning and execution of all work in


harmony with the stated objectives of all Projects Safety Plan.

g) Each subcontractor shall conduct weekly "toolbox" safety meetings and


submit meeting minutes to the H.A.C Safety Supervisor.

h) Each subcontractor shall assist in accident investigations, and preparation


and submission of required reports.

i) Each subcontractor shall attend weekly safety meetings held by H.A.C. (This
meeting shall be in conjunction with weekly construction meeting.)

j) The subcontractor’s Safety Representative shall attend weekly safety


meetings held by H.A.C sites HSE Managers.

k) Each subcontractor shall provide and enforce the use of personal protective
equipment required by Egyptian Labor Law, Provincial, local and Projects
Safety regulations.

l) Each subcontractor shall fully comply with the Hazard Communication


Program as outlined in this Company Safety Manual.

m) Each subcontractor shall complete supervisory investigation reports on


accidents as required.

n) Each subcontractor shall conduct minimum daily safety inspections of the


work areas and take necessary and immediate corrective actions to
eliminate all unsafe acts and/or conditions.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 8 of 64


o) Each subcontractor shall hold weekly management safety inspections with
H.A.C construction supervision and safety.

p) Each subcontractor shall take all precautions to maintain a clean work sites.

q) Subcontractors, so notified, shall make all reasonable efforts to correct the


unsafe conditions or acts. Satisfactory corrective action shall be taken
within a specified time. If the subcontractor refuses to correct unsafe or
unhealthy conditions or acts, or eliminate fire hazards, H.A.C shall take one
or more of the following steps:

(i) Cease the operation or a portion thereof;

(ii) And STOP payment for the work being performed; and

(iii) Alternatively, correct the situation and back charge the subcontractor
for expenses incurred.

2.4.3. Employees

All employees shall comply with all safety rules and regulations
applicable to their work and to the general safety of the other workers on
the projects. It is the responsibility of each employee to support H.A.C in
providing a safe place to work, to protect themselves and co-workers
against injuries and to report all safety hazards at once to project
supervision.

2.4.4. Injury Reporting

Employees shall immediately report all injuries to their employer for first
aid and/or medical treatment. Should H.A.C select to provide onsite
medical, injury treatment shall be coordinated through H.A.C’s site Safety
Department.

2.4.5. Accident Reports

All accidents resulting in medical treatment to employees or property


damage shall be verbally reported immediately to H.A.C Safety
immediately, with a formal written accident report submitted within (24)
hours or end of working day. Filling out of accident reports carefully and
completely shall help in the analysis of the accident and be utilized in the
prevention of similar accidents in the future.

2.4.6. Guidelines for Corrective Action and Enforcement

a) Subcontractors shall be required, in accordance with projects safety


regulations to comply with all safety directives.

b) Repeated violations or lack of cooperation with regard to these procedures


may be cause for termination.

c) Should an imminent danger condition be discovered, all work in the area of


danger shall be stopped until corrective action is taken.

d) It is imperative that employees at every level comply with the provisions and
directives of the Safety Program at all times while working.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 9 of 64


e) Repeated violations by employees will indicate non-compliance, and can be
reason for removal from the Projects.

f) Flagrant violations of Projects Safety, Health and Fire Prevention


regulations can lead to immediate termination.

3. TRAINING

3.1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE


To establish and implement training procedures.

3.2. OBJECTIVE
To ensure that all employees, are properly trained in hazard recognition.

3.3. RECORDS AND MINUTES


All safety-related meetings, including "Tool-Box" shall be documented and the record
of the meeting transmitted to H.A.C Site Safety office within 24 hours of the meeting.

3.4. TRAINING
3.4.1. Regular and continuing training of employees is required. In addition, employees
shall receive special training prior to being assigned an unfamiliar task.

Listed below, but not limited to, are areas where training is required:

a) The recognition and avoidance of unsafe conditions; the regulations


applicable to their work environment regarding the safe handling and use of
poisons, caustics and other harmful substances when the employee is
required to handle or use them.

b) The employee shall also be made aware of any potential hazards, personal
hygiene and personal protective measures required.

c) Employees handling or using flammable gases, liquids or toxic materials shall


be instructed in the safe handling and use of these materials.

d) Employees required to enter into confined or enclosed spaces shall be


instructed as to the nature of the hazards involved, the necessary
precautions to be taken, and the use of protective and emergency
equipment required. No entry shall be permitted until a Confined Space
Entry permit is issued by the Safety Representative. H.A.C Safety
Department shall provide blank permits and shall specify the required
information necessary for completion of the permits. Atmospheric testing, if
required, shall be performed by the subcontractor’s Safety Representative.

e) Subcontractors shall provide their own atmospheric testing equipment. A


confined enclosed space is that space which H.A.C a limited means of
egress and is subject to the accumulation of toxic or flammable
contaminants or H.A.C an oxygen deficient atmosphere or as designated by
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 10 of 64
H.A.C.

f) Employees are to be trained in the recognition, selection, and use of proper


fire extinguishers to be used in the event of fire.

g) Employees, used as flagmen, shall be trained as to the method and manner


of proper flagging. In addition, flagmen shall be trained in the selection of
proper clothing and equipment.

h) Employees who are exposed to harmful dusts, mists, vapors, or gases shall
be trained in the selection, care, use and maintenance of respirators per the
approved written respiratory protection program before working in any such
conditions.

i) Employees used to direct cranes, backhoes, etc. shall be trained in the


proper method of giving signals.

j) All employees using aerial lifts or man lifts shall be trained. Documentation
shall be maintained and prior to training, the training program shall be
reviewed and accepted by the H.A.C Safety Department.

3.5. BULLETIN BOARD


3.5.1. HSE projects safety bulletin board shall be located at each major work site. The
bulletin boards shall be utilized for the posting of safety information and posters.

3.5.2. In addition, all subcontractors shall have a safety bulletin board located at their
office area for posting of safety information.

3.6. MEETINGS
3.6.1. Safety meetings shall be utilized on the projects for the achievement of a
successful Accident Prevention Program.

a) Construction Meetings
Safety shall have a prominent place on the agenda and records of the
meeting shall reflect specific items discussed.

b) Tool-Box Meetings
Weekly safety training meetings shall be conducted by supervisor or
foremen. Attendance is mandatory for all subcontractor employees at the
work site. The meeting provides an opportunity to point out any hazardous,
unhealthy conditions, or unsafe work practices that have been noticed. In
addition, safety rules and regulations, safe working procedures, analysis of
accidents and potential hazard shall be discussed. A record of these
meetings shall be maintained, and shall include topics discussed and the
names of employees and G.E.T. Badge number. The original forms shall
be maintained by the subcontractor with a copy sent to the H.A.C Safety
Department.

c) Special Meetings
H.A.C Safety Department may call such special meetings as necessary.
Attendees shall be notified and the meeting topic(s) noted in a memo.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 11 of 64


Attendance shall be mandatory.

d) Safety Representative Meetings


H.A.C Safety Department shall hold weekly mandatory safety meetings for
all subcontractors’ Safety Representatives prior to weekly toolbox safety
meetings.

4. CONTROLS
4.1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE
To establish and maintain a consistent HSA Projects Safety, Health, and Fire
Prevention Program through continuous safety audits by H.A.C and subcontractor
representatives.

4.2. PROCEDURE
In order to provide a continuous and consistent safety control, the following areas, not
inclusive, shall be reviewed and inspected on daily basis:

4.2.1. Personal Protective Equipment

H.A.C and subcontractors need to ensure that they have adequate quantities of
protective equipment available on sites, such as hearing protection, safety glasses,
hard hats, safety harnesses, etc.

4.2.2. General Order and Housekeeping

Check storage of new and waste materials. Keep walkway and traffic areas clear.
Management and supervision shall be fully responsible for ensuring that its
employees, subcontractors, and other persons performing the work at the site keep
work areas and adjoining premises free at all times from accumulations of all waste
materials, rubbish, debris, broken concrete, and other scrap resulting from the
performance of their work.

All non-hazardous waste material, rubbish, and debris shall be removed from the
building/ sites, trailers, lay down areas and placed in closed top containers. Such
containers shall be removed from the sites when full and shall be properly disposed
of at an off-site location in the nearest dump area assigned by the Governments
Environments Dept.

4.2.3. Work areas shall be kept clean and free of trash, rubbish and debris at all times.

4.2.4. Inspect ladders, stairs, handrails, fences, and barricades daily.

4.2.5. Inspect scaffolding and platforms noting strength of supports. Assure that
scaffolds over 1.8 meters high are protected with standard guardrails and toe
boards. All scaffold boards shall be checked for defects and equipped with cleats
to prevent them from sliding.

4.2.6. Tools

Check for burrs, dull points, heads are properly fitted on handles, and if power driven,
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 12 of 64
are in good working order.

4.2.7. Hoists, Hoisting Equipment, Cranes, and Derricks

Note condition of platforms of hoists, cable supports, signal arrangements, guarding


hoist ways, support of sheaves, strength of boom, condition of hoisting cables and
people. Employees SHALL NOT ride rigging or rigged loads.

4.2.8. Floors

Note strength and security, guards and hoist ways, and stairway openings.

4.2.9. Shoring if applicable in projects

Note whether excavations, trenches, tunnels, and adjacent buildings are properly
shored or sloped.

4.2.10. Electrical Equipment

Note condition of insulation on conductors, and guarding of live circuits. Assure the
use of Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI) as required and see that they are
operable.

4.2.11. Engines and Compressors

Note guarding of moving parts; inspect airline hoses, hose connectors and "dead-
man" controls.

4.2.12. Machines

Note guarding of gears, belts, pulleys, shafting, and method of oiling and greasing.

4.2.13. Welding and Burning Operations

Assure that welders and helpers wear proper personal protective equipment and that
welding machines are properly maintained. Check storage and transportation of
acetylene and oxygen tanks. Provide welding shield when other personnel are
working in the area or shield them from the area.

Welders and helpers should know that oxygen may not be used in place of
compressed air, as serious explosions and burns may result.

4.2.14. Flammable and Combustible Materials

Inspect work areas for proper placement or storage of flammable and combustible
materials. Burning, welding, or other fire generating work shall not be performed
unless storage of materials is properly protected.

4.2.15. Fire Protection Devices

Portable fire extinguishers shall be inspected and the inspection tag initialed monthly.
The subcontractor shall be responsible for his extinguishers and the contractor for the

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 13 of 64


contractor’s extinguishers.

4.2.16. Noise

Noise control at the source is required if feasibly possible, but properly fitted ear plugs
and/or ear muffs shall be worn when an employee is exposed to noise levels greater
than 85 dB time weighted average (TWA).

4.2.17. Automotive Vehicle Equipment

Check condition and maintenance of trucks, tractors, and passenger vehicles.


Assure that equipment is properly operated about the work area and assure that each
vehicle on the job site H.A.C a current, valid vehicle pass.

4.2.18. General Conditions

Assure that personal protective equipment and clothing is used as required. Check
for proper lighting at all points. See that nails are removed or bent over in old forms
and lumber, and other physical hazards are controlled.

4.3. PLANNING
Due to the complexity of all projects and the activities of other subcontractors,
construction operations shall be extensively planned to include safe construct ability
procedures.

4.4. AUDITS
Formal safety audits shall be periodically conducted by a composite audit team of
H.A.C and subcontractor management personnel.

4.5. NOTIFICATION OF HAZARDS


4.5.1. Each subcontractor shall notify H.A.C in writing of the existence of any hazardous
conditions, property, or equipment at the work. However, the subcontractor shall
take all necessary precautions against injury to any employees until corrected by
the responsible party.

4.5.2. If the premises are not cleaned as required, then H.A.C shall notify the
subcontractor that the premises are not being maintained in the condition
required. Should the subcontractor fail to initiate substantial progress toward
cleanup of the premises within twenty-four (24) hours following receipt of said
notice, H.A.C may elect to provide the necessary labor, materials, and equipment
to achieve the same and deduct the full cost thereof from any moneys due the
subcontractor.

4.6. EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES


All H.A.C and subcontractors operating equipment and facilities shall be used,
inspected by third party, and maintained as directed by this manual; as dictated by
the applicable safety and health regulations. In the event of conflict, the more
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 14 of 64
stringent requirement shall take precedence.

4.6.1. Removal of Debris

When cleaning up, do not throw or drop material from upper levels unless the area
below is properly barricaded and adequate warnings are posted. A standby person is
required.

4.6.2. Roadways

Clean up and dispose of all rubbish, soil resulting from the work on a daily basis or as
required by H.A.C or the Employer.

4.6.3. Slipping hazards

Clean up or eliminate slipping hazards such as grease, oil, or other liquids on


walkways, ladders, stairways, scaffolds, or other access ways or working areas.

5. VISITORS SAFETY
5.1. OBJECTIVE
To establish and maintain safety controls to protect the visitor during the execution of
any Projects related to H.A.C.

5.2. PROCEDURES
During construction of this project, the following measures will be taken to protect the
visitors from construction hazards. The Contractor and subcontractors will be
required to monitor their work for compliance.

5.2.1. When all or a portion of a roadway is blocked to traffic, excavated material will be
piled or fence barricades will be erected to direct traffic away from construction
hazards. Dimensions may be varied but the overall height of excavated material
or barricade will be at least 120 cm. When total closure is intended the barricade
will extend to the curb or ditch line on both sides.

5.2.2. Flagman will be used whenever traffic passing through the work area may be
required to stop because of conflicts with construction equipment or because the
safe travel path cannot accommodate two-way traffic. A flagman will not be
required to guard more than one conflict point. Where one-way traffic is required
for a distance of over 30 meters a flagman will be assigned to each end. Traffic
signs may also be required to alert traffic of the upcoming hazard.

5.2.3. Excavation work adjacent to thoroughfares or congested areas will be adequately


barricaded using piled excavated material or barricade tape to provide pedestrian
and child on-looker restraints. During hours of darkness, any open excavations
will have a security person posted to enforce public compliance with barricade
devices.

5.2.4. During loading, unloading and rigging activities, personnel will be posted as
watchmen to protect the public from swinging loads and similar hazards.

5.2.5. The visitor will be protected from all electrical hazards. Electrical cords that could

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 15 of 64


create a hazard to the public will be covered, elevated or otherwise protected
from damage. Distribution panels will have covers on them at all items.

5.2.6. All aspects of the projects safety plan are intended to provide visitor safety as
well as worker safety.

6. GENERAL SAFETY AND HEALTH PROCEDURES


6.1. EXCAVATION
6.1.1. H.A.C and all subcontractors shall comply with the standards of the
Egyptian Labor Laws for all Projects Safety, Health and Fire Prevention
Manual.

6.1.2. A trench is referred to as a narrow excavation in which the depth is greater than
the width; although the width is not greater than 5 meters. An excavation is any
man-made cavity or depression in the earth's surface. This can include
excavations for anything from cellars to highways.

6.1.3. The Projects requires that all excavations over 1.5 meters deep be sloped,
shored, benched, braced, or otherwise supported. When soil conditions are
unstable, excavations shallower than 1.5 meters also shall be sloped, supported,
or shored.

6.1.4. One method of ensuring the safety of workers in a trench or excavation is to


slope the sides to a safe angle. The angle varies with different kinds of soil and
shall be determined on each individual project. When excavation H.A.C water
conditions, silty material, or loose boulders, or when it is being dug in areas
where erosion or slide planes are apparent, the safe angle shall be flattened.

6.1.5. A second method of support is shoring sheeting, tightly placed timber shores,
bracing, trench jacks, piles, or other materials installed in manner strong enough
to resist the pressures surrounding the excavation.

6.1.6. A trench box, a prefabricated, movable trench shield composed of steel plates
welded to a heavy steel frame may also be used.

6.1.7. All excavations of a depth of one (1) meter or greater shall be reviewed by H.A.C
Safety and excavations greater than 1.5 meters, shall require a task safety
analysis prior to the work.

6.1.8. Underground lines, equipment and electrical cables shall be identified, located
and marked prior to beginning excavation work.

6.1.9. Physical barriers shall be placed around or over trenches and excavations.
Barriers shall be temporarily removed only when necessary to provide access to
personnel or equipment. Once the equipment or personnel have entered or
exited, the barrier shall be immediately replaced. Flash lighted barricades shall
be provided at night when work is performed or traffic is anticipated nearby at

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 16 of 64


night, or as designated.

6.1.10. A stairway, ladder, ramp or other safe means of egress shall be located in trench
excavation so as to require no more than 8 meters of lateral travel for employees.
Any ladder shall extend a minimum of 1.0 meter above the ground level.

6.1.11. When mobile equipment is operated adjacent to an excavation, and the operator
does not have clear and direct view of the excavation edge, a warning system
shall be used such as a spotter person(s) to warn the operator, barricades, or
mechanical signals, or stop log.

6.1.12. Employees shall not be permitted to work in excavations if there is an


accumulation of water or in excavations in which water is accumulating, unless
precautions have been taken to protect the employee.

6.2. BLASTING
Blasting or the use of explosives is not permitted on projects site.

6.3. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)


All employees shall use the protective equipment as prescribed by the Egyptian
Labor Law and rules and regulations as stated in the H.A.C Safety, Health and Fire
Prevention Manual to control or eliminate any hazard or other exposure to illness or
injury. Any employee who willfully refuses to use the prescribed protective equipment
designed to protect him or willfully damages such equipment shall be subject to
disciplinary action, which may include immediate removal from the job site.

6.3.1. Hearing Protection

Appropriate hearing protection shall be worn in work areas where noise levels exceed
85 dB time weighted average (TWA).

6.3.2. Eye and Face Protection

Eye protection includes approved safety glasses with side shields of monologues
meeting the standards specified in (ANSI) American National Standards Institute Z
87.1-1989, Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection or
equivalent approved by a recognized international testing organization. Eye
protection will be required as appropriate for the task being performed. Dark
protective eyeglasses shall not be worn inside buildings.

6.3.3. Hard Hats

All construction employees shall wear approved non-metallic hard hats. All
employees and visitors shall wear approved hard hats when entering areas of
construction or overhead hazards. Hard hats shall be void of any type of defects and
should not be altered.
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 17 of 64
6.3.4. Respirators

Approved respirator shall be used when excessive dusts, mists, gases or other
atmospheric impurities are determined to be harmful to health.

6.3.5. Safety Harness and Lifelines

Safety harnesses and secured with two safety lanyards and one chock absorbers
shall be used by all employees working from unguarded surfaces when falls to a
different level present a hazard. Each employee shall also wear a safety harness
with a safety lanyard secured to a separate life line while working from swing
scaffolds, boss’s chairs, or other suspended work platforms when a falling hazard is
present (See Fall Hazard Control, Section 12.0).

6.3.6. Foot Protection

All persons working in the construction site shall wear sturdy foot protection. It is
recommended that low-quarter footwear not be worn, due to inadequate ankle
support. At no times shall soft sole, canvas shoes or opened toed footwear
(sandals) be allowed on the construction site. Footwear shall be worn as shoes,
not as sandals.

6.3.7. Skin Protection

Protect your skin from sun, welding, hot pipe burns, and other hazards that exist in
the construction areas by wearing proper extremities clothing protection. THIS
INCLUDES LONG PANTS FOR LEG COVERING AND SHIRTS THAT HAVE
MINIMUM FOUR-INCH SLEEVES. NO SHORTS OR TANK TOPS (shirts without
sleeves and fully covering the torso) ARE ALLOWED ON SITE. Clothing shall be
kept in good repair and in clean condition.

6.4. WALL AND FLOOR OPENINGS


6.4.1. Floor, wall, deck, manhole and other like openings shall be immediately guarded
when made or opened by standard guardrails and toe boards, or covers that are
secured against accidental displacement. Floor covers shall to be stenciled
"HOLE COVER DO NOT REMOVE" and of sufficient strength to safely bear all
intended loads.

6.4.2. Manhole and temporary floor openings shall be immediately guarded by standard
covers. When the cover is not in place, the opening shall be immediately
protected by a standard guardrail.

6.4.3. Wall openings, from which there is a drop of 1.25 meters and the bottom of the
opening is less than l meter above the working surface, shall be guarded.

6.4.4. Runways shall be guarded by a standard railing, or the equivalent on all open
sides 1.25 meters or more above floor or ground level. Whenever tools, machine
parts, or materials are likely to be used on the runway, a toe board shall also be
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 18 of 64
provided on each exposed side. Trench crossings for equipment use shall be of
adequate strength to support equipment in area.

6.4.5. Regardless of height, open-side floors, walkways, platforms, or runways above or


adjacent to dangerous equipment and similar hazards, or designated by H.A.C
shall be guarded with a standard railing and toe board.

6.5. SCAFFOLDS
6.5.1. Lean-to scaffolds and makeshift platforms are prohibited.

6.5.2. Scaffolds shall not be used for the storage of material except material being
currently used that work shift.

6.5.3. All scaffolds shall be adequately designed to carry, without failure, four (4) times
the maximum intended load. At no time shall any scaffold be overloaded.

6.5.4. All scaffolds shall be maintained in safe condition and scaffolds damaged or
weakened, from any cause, shall be immediately repaired or dismantled.

6.5.5. Scaffolding or staging more than two (2) meters above the ground or floor,
suspended from an overhead support, or erected with stationary supports, shall
have standard guardrails and toe boards properly attached.

6.5.6. Scaffolds shall be provided with an access ladder or equivalent safe access.
Employees shall not climb or work from scaffold handrails, mid-rails or brace
members.

6.5.7. When freestanding manually propelled mobile scaffolds are used, the height shall
not exceed four times the minimum base dimension. They shall be equipped with
wheel brakes on a minimum of 2 wheels which shall be engaged at all times
employees are on the scaffold. Such scaffolds shall not be rolled or moved with
employees on them.

6.5.8. All work platforms on scaffolds shall be totally decked without unguarded
openings, and all decking shall be secured against displacement.

6.5.9. Whenever a scaffold cannot be erected with handrails, personnel working on said
scaffold shall be provided with safety harness and safety lanyard.

6.5.10. Guardrails shall be 5 cm by 10 cm or the equivalent, approximately one (1.5)


meter high with midriff. Supports shall be at intervals not to exceed 2.5 meters.
Toe boards shall be a minimum of 10 cm in height. Planking shall be cleared or
otherwise secured to prevent displacement. Scaffolds shall be brace and tied off
both horizontally and vertically at intervals specified in the pertinent regulations or
as specified by H.A.C.

6.5.11. H.A.C shall designate in writing its competent person for the erection,
daily inspection, repair, maintenance and dismantling of scaffolds.
Scaffolds shall be tagged denoting their status, whether complete or
incomplete. Employees shall not be permitted onto incomplete scaffold
except those required to complete the scaffold.

6.6. LADDERS

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 19 of 64


6.6.1. Employees shall be instructed and required to ascend/descend ladders in the
proper manner; that is, facing the ladders and holding the side rails with both
hands. Material shall be raised or lowered with a line hoisting equipment and
not carried in one hand while ascending or descending; when working from
ladders, three-point contact shall be maintained at all times.

6.6.2. Wood ladders shall not be painted as this may cover-up defects and
deterioration.

6.6.3. The areas at the base and top, side rails and cleats or rungs on ladders shall
be kept clean and free of lines, hoses, cables, wires, oil, grease, and debris.

6.6.4. If a ladder is to provide the only means of access or exit from a working area
for 25 or more employees, or simultaneous two-way traffic is expected, a
double cleat ladder shall be installed.

6.6.5. Portable ladders shall be placed so the horizontal distance at the bottom of
the ladder is not less than one quarter (1/4) of the vertical distance to the top
support. In case of necessity that, the ladder is placed more horizontal, it
shall be braced to prevent sagging. All ladders shall be secured at the top, to
prevent displacement.

6.6.6. Portable ladders shall be placed so that the side rails have a secure footing.
The top rest shall be rigid and have ample strength to support the applied
load.

6.6.7. Ladders with broken or missing rungs or steps broken or split side rails or
other faulty and defective construction shall not be used and shall be
immediately destroyed or immediately removed from the project site.

6.6.8. Single portable ladders over ten (10) meters in length shall not be used. If
greater heights are to be reached, separate ladders shall be used with
intermediate landing platforms provided.

6.6.9. Portable ladders, used on smooth floor or other smooth surfaces, shall be
equipped with non-slipping bases, or otherwise secured to prevent
displacement.

6.6.10. Ladders shall be sufficient length to protect not less than one (1) meter above
the top landing. When this is not practical, grab rails, which provide a secure
grip for an employee moving to or from the point of access, shall be installed.

6.6.11. Aluminum and/or metallic ladders are prohibited around energized electrical
panels and lines.

6.6.12. Persons shall not work off the top of a stepladder.

6.6.13. Subcontractors shall designate in writing a competent person to provide


training and inspection of ladders and their use.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 20 of 64


6.7. GAS WELDING AND CUTTING

6.7.1. All cutting and welding operations are required to have within easy reach a proper
fire extinguisher of a size and type to extinguish any fire that may ignite on
materials being cut or welded or materials immediately adjacent to cutting and
welding operation.

6.7.2. All oxygen/acetylene cylinders shall be kept in an upright position and secured by
chain or other suitable means to prevent accidental displacement. A cylinder
truck, with chain, is a preferred method of sacrament.

6.7.3. Full and empty cylinders of oxygen shall not be stored close to cylinder of
acetylene or other fuel gas. They shall be separated by a minimum of 7 meters,
or by a noncombustible barrier accepted by H.A.C Safety dept.

6.7.4. Oxygen cylinders, cylinder valves, couplings, regulators, hoses, and apparatus
shall be kept free from and away from oil and grease. Oil or grease in the
presence of oxygen under pressure will ignite violently.

6.7.5. Cylinders in storage shall be kept away from sources of heat and shall be
protected against the direct rays of the sun.

6.7.6. Empty cylinders shall have their valves closed. Valve protection caps shall
always be in place except where cylinders are in use or connected for immediate
use.

6.8. ARC WELDING AND CUTTING


6.8.1. All arc welding and cutting operation are required to have within easy reach a
proper fire extinguisher of a size and type to extinguish any fire that may ignite on
materials being cut or welded or materials immediately adjacent to cutting and
welding operations.

6.8.2. Welding current return circuits or grounds shall be attached to the welding as
close as possible and shall carry their current without hot or sparking contacts
and without passage of current through equipment or structures which might be
damaged or made unsafe by the welding current or its voltage. Specifically,
welding current shall not be allowed to pass through any of the following
materials:

a) Compressed gas cylinders.

b) Flammable or combustible material storage containers.

c) Conduits carrying electrical conductors.

d) Chains, wire ropes, cranes, hooks, hoisting or rigging equipment, metal hand
railings, ladders, machines, shafts, bearings, or weighing scales.

6.8.3. Noncombustible or flameproof screens shall shield all arc welding and cutting

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 21 of 64


operations. Warning signs shall be posted if shielding is not practical as
determined by and accepted by H.A.C’s Safety Dept.

6.8.4. The ground for the welding circuit shall be mechanically strong and electrically
adequate for the safe passage of workers.

6.8.5. Where it is necessary to couple, or uncouple, several lengths of cable for use as
a welding circuit, insulated cable connectors shall be used on both the ground
line and the electrode holder line. Coupler joints shall be fully insulated.
Welding machine supply lines shall be maintained in the shortest length
possible.

6.8.6. Cables with worn or damaged insulation shall not be used and shall be
immediately repaired or removed from the projects site.

6.8.7. An insulated electrode holder (stinger) of adequate rated current capacity shall be
used at all times.

6.8.8. Welding cables and gas hoses shall not be placed on stairs, walkways, ground or
floor where they are exposed to damage by foot traffic or create interference to
walking or work area access

6.9. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION AND EQUIPMENT


6.9.1. All temporary and permanent electrical work, installation, and capacities shall
conform to applicable Egyptian codes.

6.9.2. Only qualified electricians, familiar with code requirements, shall be allowed to
perform electrical work. Only qualified electricians shall repair electrical
equipment including power tools.

6.9.3. No employee shall be permitted to work close to unprotected electrical power


circuit so that he may contact the same in the course of his other work, unless the
employee is protected against electrical shock by de-energizing the circuit and
grounding it or guarding by effective insulation or other means accepted by H.A.C
Safety Dept.

6.9.4. Electrical equipment or machinery shall be de-energized and rendered


inoperative by the electrician locking out supply switches prior to performing work.
The only exception is when power shall be applied for the purpose of adjustments
or electrical troubleshooting.

6.9.5. Extension cords used with portable electrical tools and appliances shall be of the
three-wire type. Cords with the ground probe removed or rendered ineffective
shall be removed from service.

6.9.6. Electrical cords and trailing cables, which could create a hazard to employees or
other persons in the area, shall be covered, elevated or otherwise protected from
damage. Cords and cables shall not be placed on the ground or walking surface

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 22 of 64


in work areas unless first accepted by H.A.C.

6.9.7. The use of extension cords is limited as possible. Both male and female plugs
are of the dead front type.

6.9.8. Electrical cords and temporary wiring, when elevated, shall be secured with non-
metallic material. Tie-wire or other conductive material shall not be used. They
shall be elevated a minimum of 2.0 meters above the walking or work surface.

6.9.9. The great majority of electrical accidents result in burns.

6.9.10. Fire and explosion from sparks in flammable atmospheres can and does lead to
loss of life and serious damage to property.

6.9.11. The severity of electric shock is not entirely dependent upon the voltage of the
power source. The ratio of the voltage to resistance determines the current that
will flow through the body and the resulting injury.

6.9.12. H.A.C and Construction subcontractors are responsible for the temporary electric
supply system on a construction site and the safety measures associated with the
National Electrical Code.

6.9.13. Damaged or spliced cords are not acceptable.

6.9.14. Special care shall be taken to ensure that the correct fuse or breaker ratings are
strictly enforced and that the Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCIs) are
installed properly on all circuits.

6.9.15. All installation work must be carried out by qualified, experienced electricians.

6.9.16. Before connecting temporary electrical installations to existing Installations, prior


approval must be obtained from Client Proponent department. This is to ensure
that no overloading of Electrical devices will occur and system protection will not
be Compromised.

6.9.17. Portable electric tools, extension lights and cords should be inspected each time
they are issued and returned. This should be part of a tool store procedure.
Frequent random checks should be made where those tools, lights and plugs are
being used on site.

6.9.18. Many accidents occur when lower volt equipment is plugged into higher volt
systems. Before any portable tool or extension-light is plugged in, the voltage
required for the tool or light must be the same as the power source, and the plugs
must be checked for damage.

6.9.19. All non-current carrying metal parts of any electrical equipment must be properly
grounded. This will reduce the electrical shock hazard.

6.9.20. Work Permits must be obtained and the type of equipment to be used discussed
and agreed upon before the permit is issued.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 23 of 64


6.9.21. Employees must never work alone on live equipment. In addition to the man
doing the job, there must be another electrician standing by. A foreman or
supervisor should also be in attendance while this work is being carried out, and
he must know how to isolate the equipment.

6.9.22. Before starting a job, the exact voltages should be known. This is important as it
determines the type of personal protection required for the work and the
procedures established in the work permit. If there is any doubt about voltages, a
check must be made before the work is started.

6.9.23. High voltage or overhead lines are usually not insulated. Therefore, any kind of
metallic object coming near or in contact with them can cause a hazardous
situation so it should never be assumed that there is enough clearance; it should
always be proved. It should never be assumed that a cable or line is "dead"; it
should always be checked.

6.9.24. Underground cables, exposed during excavation work should be assumed to be


energized and not repositioned or moved until certified to be de-energized.

6.9.25. Grounding cables shall be connected to ground first, and then the equipment.
Grounding cables shall be installed and removed using hot sticks or insulating
gloves and protective apparel.

6.10. MOTOR VEHICLES, AND HEAVY MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT


6.10.1. All constructions vehicles and equipment before being brought on-site shall be
inspected, tested and certified to be in a safe operating condition, in writing by
H.A.C. Personnel operating motor vehicles shall give pedestrians right of
way and obey all signs and watch for blind intersections.

6.10.2. Equipment manufactured with one light, front or rear, such as motorized carts are
acceptable as long as manufactured devices are working.

6.10.3. Personnel may not be hoisted by forklifts unless an approved manufactured work
platform is used per contractors written procedure that has been accepted by
H.A.C prior to hoisting the personnel.

6.10.4. Only authorized drivers shall be permitted to operate vehicles assigned for use on
the project. Accidents shall be reported immediately to H.A.C’s Safety
Department.

6.10.5. All cab glass shall be safety glass, or equivalent, that introduces no visible
distortion affecting the safe operation of any machine covered by this part.
Missing, defective, damaged or glass not accepted by H.A.C shall be replaced
before the equipment or vehicle is used on the project site.

6.10.6. All constructions equipment and vehicles having an obstructed view to the rear

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 24 of 64


shall have a backup alarm, audible above the surrounding noise level 50
meters to the rear.

6.10.7. All track type construction equipment shall have a travel alarm, audible above
surrounding noise level.

6.10.8. No personnel shall be permitted to get off or on moving vehicles or equipment.

6.10.9. Heavy machinery, equipment, or parts thereof, which are suspended or held aloft
by use of slings, hoists, or jacks shall be substantially blocked or cribbed to
prevent falling or shifting before employees are permitted to work under or
between them. Bulldozer and scraper blades, end-loader buckets, dump
bodies, and similar equipment, shall be either fully lowered or blocked when
being repaired or when not in use. All controls shall be in neutral position, with
the motors stopped and brakes set, unless work is being performed required
otherwise.

6.10.10. All haulage vehicles, whose payload is loaded by means of cranes, power
Shovels, loaders, or similar equipment shall have a cab shield and/or Canopy
adequate to protect the operator from shifting or falling materials.

6.10.11. Engines shall be shut off during fueling or maintenance operations, except as
required for adjustment or testing.

6.10.12. Trip handles for tailgates of dump trucks and heavy equipment shall be so
arranged that, in dumping, the operator shall be in the clear.

6.10.13. No person shall be permitted to ride with arms or legs outside of the truck body,
in a standing position on the body, or on running boards or seated on side
fenders, cabs, cab shield, rear of truck, or on the load.

6.10.14. Personnel shall ride in fixed seats only, no riding on forklifts, tailgates, etc.
Ensure that personnel are properly trained on vehicles using hydraulic lift
gates.

6.10.15. No vehicle shall be driven at a speed greater than is reasonable and proper,
with due regard for weather, traffic, intersections, width and character of the
roadway, type of motor vehicle, and any other existing condition.

6.10.16. Only approved standard hand signals for crane, derrick, and boom equipment
shall be used. A copy of these hand signals shall be posted at the operating
position of each piece of equipment.

6.10.17. Rated load capacities, operating speeds, special hazard warnings shall be
conspicuously posted on all equipment. Instructions or warnings shall be
visible to the operator while he is at his control station.

6.10.18. All machinery and equipment shall be inspected by a competent person prior to
each use. The inspection shall be documented in writing and retained by the
subcontractor. Any deficiencies shall be repaired, or defective parts replaced,

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 25 of 64


before continued use.

6.10.19. Accessible areas within the swing radius of the rear of the superstructure of the
crane, either permanently or temporarily mounted, shall be barricaded in such a
manner as to prevent an employee from entering the swing radius areas and
being struck or crushed by the crane.

6.10.20. Swinging or hanging loads shall be lowered to the ground and detached from
the crane while the crane is being moved.

6.10.21. An accessible fire extinguisher of 5BC rating or higher shall be available at all
operator stations or cabs of equipment. Rollover protection (ROPS) is required
on all applicable equipment operated on the project.

6.11. CONCRETE AND CONCRETE FORMS


6.11.1. All equipment and materials used in concrete construction and masonry work
shall meet the applicable requirements as prescribed in the Egyptian Labor
Law, ANSI A10.9-1983 "Safety Requirements for Concrete Construction and
Masonry Work", Provincial regulations.

6.11.2. Employees working more than 2 meters above any adjacent working surface,
placing reinforcing steel in walls, piers, columns, etc. shall be provided with and
use safety harness and secured lanyard.

6.11.3. Employees shall not be permitted to work above vertically protruding reinforcing
steel unless such steel H.A.C been protected to eliminate the impalement
hazard.

6.11.4. Riding concrete buckets for any purpose shall be prohibited, and working crews
shall be kept out from under suspended concrete buckets.

6.12. STEEL ERECTION

6.12.1. Permanent Flooring

Permanent floors shall be installed as soon as practical following the erection of


structural members. At no time, shall there be more than four (4) floors or 15
meters of unfinished bolting or welding above the foundation or uppermost
secured floor.

6.12.2. Temporary Flooring

a) The erection floor shall be solidly planked over its entire surface except for
access openings. Planking shall not be less than five (5) cm thick, full size
undressed, and shall be laid tight and secured against movement.

b) On structures not adaptable to temporary floors or static lines, safety nets


shall be installed and maintained wherever the potential fall distance exceeds

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 26 of 64


two (2) stories or eight (8) meters.

c) Standard handrails, including top rail, mid-rail and toe board or equivalent
shall be installed around the periphery of all temporary planked floors during
structural steel erection. The erection subcontractor shall install turnbuckles
no less than every 30 meters to allow for tightening of cables. A minimum of
two cable clips shall be used at all securing points.

6.12.3. General Requirements

a) Bundles of sheets or small material shall be so secured as to prevent their


falling.

b) When setting structural steel, each piece shall be secured with not less than
two bolts at each connection and drawn up wrench tight before the load is
released from the crane or hoisting equipment.

c) Material should not be hoisted to a structure unless it is ready to be put into


place and secured. Hoisting of more than one piece of material at a time is
prohibited unless accepted in advance by H.A.C.

d) Avoid walking on the top flange of beams. Employees shall coon the steel by
using the lower flange. When engaged in work from a height of more than 2
meters or when exposed to processes or machinery, a safety harness with
safety lanyard shall be used.

e) When loads are being hoisted, avoid walking under the lift or permitting an
employee to be exposed to the swing of the lift. No one shall be permitted to
ride the load under any circumstances.

f) A tag line shall be used to control all loads.

g) For the protection of other employees on all projects, signs shall be posted in
the erection area.

6.13. CRANE AND RIGGING SAFETY

 General

Lifting operation is very dangerous and many accidents has been occurred during
this activity, majority of accident are resulted from lifting equipment, slings and
shackles, suspended load or crane operator so the following precautions
concerning lifting equipment, lifting gears should be considered during this
operation.

6.13.1. Equipment/Operator/Rigger Certification

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 27 of 64


Equipment requiring official initial and periodic inspection shall have the required
inspections and certifications current and in effect at all times while performing
work on this project. All the lifting equipment shall be duly certified. All operators
shall:

a) Be in possession of a current, valid Egyptian Movement license

b) Have successfully completed a medical examination of specified by


H.A.C

6.13.2. Lifting Plans

A Lifting Technical Study and Safety Plan shall be prepared and implemented for
those components for which one of the following lifting condition occurs:

a) The lift is executed with a heavy-lift crane (nominal capacity exceeding


50 tons);

b) The load exceeds 40 percent of rated load chart for crane;

c) The load exceeds 30 percent of rated load chart for crane and possible
failure would endanger existing facilities;

d) Two booms are required to make the lift;

e) Poles or derricks have been erected for the specific lift.

The Lifting Technical Study and Safety Plan shall be prepared and issued by
third party and submitted to the Clint for review and approval.

6.13.3. Manual Lift Operation

Use of cranes for hoisting of personnel should be avoided when possible. Prior to
requesting authorization for use of personnel platforms or aerial cages, the
responsible subcontractor’s supervisor will verify that all alternative access
methods have been reviewed and H.A.C determined that the use of such
equipment is the safest method available for performing the required work.

6.13.4. Competent person has good knowledge and experience shall supervise all lifting
operations.

6.13.5. Before beginning any crane operation, the supervisor and Operator should
review all lifting procedure requirements.

6.13.6. The lifting procedure shall include the following:

6.13.6.1. Crane radius.

6.13.6.2. Boom length.

6.13.6.3. Safe working limits of the crane (load chart).

6.13.6.4. Weight of the load.


ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 28 of 64
6.13.6.5. Ground and site conditions.

6.13.6.6. Placement of the crane.

6.13.6.7. Swing and tail clearances.

6.13.6.8. Necessary communication to be used.

6.13.6.9. Explanation of hand signals.

6.13.6.10. Rigging hardware.

6.13.6.11. Rigging sketch for critical or hazardous lifts.

6.13.6.12. Rated capacity of rigging components.

6.13.6.13. Sling angles.

6.13.6.14. Strain calculations.

6.13.6.15. Wind velocity.

6.13.6.16. Load moment indicator.

6.13.6.17. Other.

6.13.7. Cranes shall have a valid Crane Safety inspection sticker, crane Weekly
checklist shall be used by crane operator to ensure Regular inspection of crane
and the crane conditions still meet its Inspections certificates and site access
inspection.

6.13.8. Valid governmental heavy equipment license and H.A.C and / or Third
party Crane Operator Certificate are required for H.A.C and Subcontractors’
mobile crane operators.

6.13.9. Crane should be provided with valid calibration certificates from a third
party.

6.13.10. Hooks should be fitted with a safety catch on the hook opening so that the
slings cannot be displaced.

6.13.11. Hooks should be regularly inspected for signs of damage.

6.13.12. The hook shall be removed from service for the following Reasons (If there
are visible cracks, If it is twisted 10 degree out of place, If there is a 15% throat
opening beyond the Manufacturers specification).

6.13.13. There is an area surrounding every power line that is referred to as the
absolute limit of approach. It is strictly forbidden to move any crane boom or
load line or load into this area unless the line has been de-energized or
insulated (250.000 volt is 20 feet a safe distance and over 250,000 volt is 25
feet a safe distance).

6.13.14. When wind velocities are above 32 km/h (20 mph), the rated load and

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 29 of 64


boom lengths shall be reduced according to Manufacturer specifications.

6.13.15. Slings and other rigging equipment must be constructed according to a


recognized standard.

6.13.16. The safe working load of rigging equipment is the maximum load which the
equipment should be subjected to; this load should never be exceeded.

6.13.17. Calibration certificates from third party should be available for all lifting
gears.

6.13.18. Before use, all new equipment should be subjected to a proof Load test by
the manufacturer and certified. The safe working load and serial number shall
be clearly marked on the sling And the lifting gear, either by tagging, stamping,
engraving, or embossing. Riggers shall not use lifting gear unless the safe
working load is clearly visible.

6.13.19. Slings shall not be tagged with safe working load in the field. Approval by
the Inspection and department and subsequent review by the Loss Prevention
Department is required.

6.13.20. It is essential that each wire rope sling is properly constructed and used.

6.13.21. All wire rope slings shall be manufactured, inspected, and load tested by a
recognized manufacturer.

6.13.22. Homemade wire rope slings shall not be allowed at project site.

6.13.23. As the angle between the legs of a multiple sling increases, the safe
working load decreases. The included angle should be no more than 90 and
must never exceed under any circumstances

6.13.24. Before storage, chain and wire rope slings should be cleaned, lightly
lubricated, and inspected.

6.13.25. Slings must be stored in a location where they are not liable to Suffer
mechanical damage, away from extremes of heat, cold, and especially
dampness.

6.13.26. H.A.C and construction subcontractors shall maintain a job site log of slings
containing the following information: ID. Number; sate in service; safe working
load as stated in proof load certificate; full details of periodic inspections.

6.13.27. All rigging shall be inspected at least every six months per ANSI B30.9 and
a Sling Inspection Report shall be completed and filed for review by the Crane
Inspector

6.13.28. Slings which have been damaged or are defective with more than 10%
shall be immediately removed from service, cut up and destroyed

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 30 of 64


6.13.29. Color code shall be used with lifting gears to ensure regular inspection and
its safe operations.

6.13.30. All spreader bars shall be manufactured, tested, and inspected to ANSI
B30.20, permanently identified with the safe working load, manufacturer's name
and serial number

6.13.31. Spreader bars shall be stored away from moisture, and protected from
physical damage.

6.13.32. Shackles (clevis) are used for making connections in rigging; they should
be tested by the manufacturer and marked with the safe working load.

6.13.33. The pins are separate but matched parts of the shackles, so care must be
taken to use the correct pin for each shackle.

6.13.34. Rebar, mild steel bolts or similar items are not acceptable replacements for
shackle pins

6.13.35. H.A.C and construction subcontractors should assign banks man and he
must be well-acquainted with the hand signals, the different functions of lifting
gear, and the various methods of loading

6.13.36. H.A.C and construction subcontractors should avail competent crane


operator has (knowledge with maintenance, experience, valid license, have not
drugs, has good listening and good watching)

6.13.37. Suspended load should be tied with tag line to avoid hitting hazard
equipment or personnel

6.13.38. Center of gravity of suspended load should be determined to allocate the


lugs, which will be lifted from.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 31 of 64


6.14. ILLUMINATION
Constructions areas, ramps, runways, corridors, offices, shops, and storage areas
shall be lighted to not less than the minimum illumination intensities (listed below)
while any work is in progress.

Minimum
Area or Operation
Illumination
5 Foot-Candles General construction area lighting.
5 Foot-Candles Concrete placement, excavation and waste areas, access
ways, active storage areas, loading platforms, refueling,
and field maintenance areas.
5 Foot-Candles INDOORS: Warehouses, corridors, hallways, and exit ways.
5 Foot-Candles Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work areas:
(Exception; minimum of 10 foot candles is required at tunnel
and shaft heading during drilling, mucking and scaling.)
10 Foot-Candles General construction plant and shops, such as batch plants,
screening plants, mechanical and electrical equipment
rooms, trade shops such as carpenter-rigging-pipe-welding-
equipment-, active warehouses and storerooms, barracks
or living quarter, locker-shower-dressing rooms, mess halls,
indoor toilets, workrooms.
30 Foot-Candles First aid stations, Infirmaries, and offices.

Where the use of artificial light is required, it shall be maintained on while workers are
entering or leaving the areas.

Areas requiring the continuous use of artificial light shall be inspected at least once
daily and any defective lamps shall be immediately replaced.

6.15. PILE DRIVING


6.15.1. Pile driving areas shall be barricaded off to prevent unauthorized employees from
entering the work area.

6.15.2. Stop blocks shall be provided for the leads to prevent the hammer from being
raised against the head block.

6.15.3. A blocking device, capable of safely supporting the weight of the hammer, shall
be provided for placement in the leads under the hammer at all times while
employees are working under the hammer.

6.15.4. Guards shall be provided across the top of the head block to prevent the cable
from jumping out of the sheaves.

6.15.5. When the leads shall be inclined in the driving of batter piles, provisions shall be
made to stabilize the leads.

6.15.6. Air hammer hose shall be securely attached to the hammer with an adequate
length of at least 1/4-inch diameter chain or cable to prevent whipping in the
event the joint at the hammer is broken.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 32 of 64


6.15.7. Safety chains, or equivalent means, shall be provided for each hose connection
to prevent the line from thrashing around in case the coupling becomes
disconnected.

6.15.8. Engineers and winch men shall accept signals only from the designated
signalmen.

6.15.9. All employees shall be kept clear when piling is being hoisted into the leads.

6.15.10. When piles are being driven in an excavated pit, the walls of the pit shall be
sloped to the angle of repose or sheet piled and braced.

6.15.11. When steel tube piles are being "blown out", employees shall be kept well
beyond the range of falling materials.

6.15.12. Employees in pile driving operations shall wear appropriate personal protective
equipment.

6.16. CHAINS AND COME-A-LONGS


6.16.1. Safety latches shall be installed and functional on hanging hooks and load hooks.

6.16.2. Chains, cables, and hooks shall be in good physical condition. Hanging hooks
shall be free to pivot when lifting or pulling a load.

6.16.3. Load chains and cables shall not be used as slings.

6.16.4. Capacities of chain falls and come-a-longs shall be clearly marked and shall be
adequate for the load to be lifted or pulled. "Cheaters" shall not be used on the
handles of come-a-longs.
6.16.5. Chain falls and come-a-longs shall be inspected annually and the most recent
inspection date shall be clearly indicated on the equipment.

6.17. MATERIAL HANDLING AND STORAGE

6.17.1. Mechanical Material Handling

a) Use mechanical means, such as hoist, industrial truck, or conveyors


whenever possible, to transfer or lift heavy or large quantities of materials. If
manual handling shall be used, employees should be rotated frequently to
minimize injury or heat stress.

b) Where mechanical equipment is used, sufficient safe overhead and width


clearance shall be provided for aisles, at loading docks, through doorways
and whatever turns or passages shall be made.

c) Only stable, safety arranged and adequately secured loads shall be handled.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 33 of 64


6.17.2. Manual Material Handling

a) Every effort shall be made by supervision to limit the amount of heavy or


excessive lifting, pushing, or pulling done manually by employees.
Mechanical means of moving material shall be considered first. Rotating
employees shall also be considered to not over burden any one employee.

b) Proper hand protection in the form of gloves shall be provided for persons
doing manual lifting.

c) Proper lifting procedures shall be followed when manually lifting.

6.17.3. Material Storage

a) Material stored inside a building under construction shall not be placed within
2 meters of any hoist way or inside floor hole or opening, nor within 3 meters
of an exterior wall, which does not extend above the top of the material being
stored.

b) Non-compatible materials shall be segregated in storage.

c) Brick and concrete blocks shall not be stacked more than 2.5 meters in
height.

d) Used lumber shall have nails withdrawn before stacking.

e) Structural steel, poles, pipe, bar stock, and other cylindrical material, unless
racked, shall be stacked and blocked to prevent spreading or tilting.

f) All materials stored in tiers shall be stacked, racked, blocked, interlocked, or


otherwise secured to prevent sliding, falling, or collapse.

g) Maximum safe loading limits of floors shall be conspicuously posted in all


storage areas. Maximum safe loads shall not be exceeded.

h) Aisles and passageways shall be kept clear to provide free and safe
movement of material handling equipment and employees.

i) When a difference exists in working levels, means such as a ramp, blocking


or grading shall be used to ensure the safe movement of vehicles between
the two levels.

j) Smoking is prohibited inside storage areas.

k) Adequate portable fire extinguishers shall be provided.

6.17.4. Outside Storage


ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 34 of 64
a) Outside storage regulations are the same as 6.17.3 Material Storage.

b) Keep yard areas free of combustible materials and vegetation.

6.18. ABRASIVE BLASTING


6.18.1. The composition and toxicity of the dust from abrasive and surface coatings on
the materials blasted shall be considered in making an evaluation of the potential
health hazards to employees in blasting operations. Respiratory or hearing
protection may be required.

6.18.2. Respiratory hazard associated with abrasive blasting shall be analyzed and
proper protection provided as required.

6.18.3. Hearing hazard associated with abrasive blasting shall be analyzed and proper
protection provided as required.

6.18.4. Employees involved in abrasive blasting operations shall be equipped with heavy
canvas or leather gloves and aprons or equivalent protection to protect them from
the impact of abrasive.

6.18.5. Abrasive blasting equipment shall be inspected daily prior to use to ensure it is in
proper working condition. Defective equipment shall be tagged "Do Not Use"
and shall be immediately removed from service.

6.18.6. Dust accumulation shall be kept to a minimum through regular clean up and
proper disposal to ensure that other personnel are not unnecessarily exposed to
the respiratory, slipping and tripping hazards associated with abrasive blasting.

6.18.7. The area around the equipment to be cleaned shall be barricaded or roped off for
a distance of 10 meters. Shields may also be necessary to confine the dust and
silica.

6.18.8. Abrasive blasting in a defined confined space shall require a confined space entry
permit.

6.18.9. Prior to any abrasive blasting, a detailed blasting procedure shall be submitted to
H.A.C Safety for review and approval.

6.19. SIGNS, TAGS, AND BARRICADING


6.19.1. General Requirements
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 35 of 64
a) H.A.C and the subcontractor’s supervision shall evaluate the scope of work to
identify, insofar as possible, any safety sign and barricade concerns which
may be involved in the work to be performed.

b) Upon evaluation of the work to be performed, identify the necessary means to


minimize danger to employees.

c)All required Safety Signs shall be in both Arabic and English and erected prior to
the initiation of construction activities or as necessitated by the work
performed.

d) Follow-up surveys shall be conducted by the construction supervisor and


Safety Representative to evaluate job safety and the effectiveness of the
safety signs.

e) Where a hazard exists, ensure proper signs, tags, or barricades are in place
to identify the hazard and protect employees until corrective actions can be
accomplished.

6.19.2. Safety Signs - General

a)All safety signs shall be conspicuously posted in locations readily visible to


personnel preparing to enter an area requiring the sign. All signs shall be
in both Arabic and English.

(i) "DANGER" - Immediate hazard exists

(ii) "CAUTION" - Potential hazards exists

(iii) "NOTICE"- General instruction/suggestion

6.19.3. Safety Tags

a)Safety tags shall be used as a temporary means of warning employees of


existing hazards, such as defective tools, equipment, etc. Safety tags
shall not be used in place of or as a substitute for safety signs. Tags shall
be in both Arabic and English.

(i) "DANGER" tags shall be used in major hazard situations where an


immediate safety hazard exists.

(ii) "CAUTION" tags shall be used in minor hazard situations where a


non-immediate potential hazard or unsafe practice exists.

b) Other tags may be used in addition to those required by this procedure.

6.19.4. Flagging

a)Flagging shall be located in the field of vision (between approximately 1


meter to 1.3 meters above the ground, walk, or work surface) and used to
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 36 of 64
identify and warn personnel of general and specific hazards.

b)Tape and chain used as flagging shall have a minimum width of 3/4 inch; and
rope and bunting used as flagging shall have a minimum rope diameter of
1/4 inches. Safety signs shall be attached to the flagging to identify the
hazards.

c) Flagging shall be placed at least 2 meters laterally from the hazard being
identified.

d)Flagging shall not be used as a substitute for barricades or barriers; however,


when there is no imminent danger to personnel, the short term (less than
24 hours) use of flagging to identify new, unplanned hazards while
appropriate barricades or barriers are being created, is permissible.

6.19.5. Barricades

a)Barricade rails shall:

(i) Consist of 10, 16, 20, 30, or 40 cm lumber, plastic or metal.

(ii) Be at least 1 meter long.

(iii) Be mounted horizontally at least 1 meter above the ground.

(iv) Be marked with alternate orange/red and white diagonal stripes.

b)Barricade rails shall be supported by a stable base to prevent displacement


from wind. This does not replace requirements for guardrails around
potential fall hazards.

c) c) Barricades shall be used on or around work areas when it is necessary to


prevent the inadvertent intrusion of pedestrian or vehicle traffic.

d)Barricades shall be placed at least 0.75 meters from the edge of excavation.

7. INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE
7.1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE
To establish and implement a basic Industrial Hygiene Program to be used

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 37 of 64


unilaterally by all in the prevention of occupational illnesses.

7.2. OBJECTIVE
To assure all personnel are aware of occupational hazards associated with their
scope of work and precautionary means to protect against occupational illnesses.

7.3. PURPOSE
7.3.1. Respiratory Protection

When work activity warrants that employees wear respiratory protection, a


written Respiratory Protection Program shall be implemented. The subcontractor
shall submit its program to H.A.C Safety for review and approval before
respiratory protection is used.

7.3.2. Noise Exposure

Noise exposure is inherent in construction. Loud and prolonged noise can cause
loss of hearing, pain, nausea, and reduced muscular control. Employees shall
wear hearing protection in areas posted or as determined by H.A.C.

7.3.3. Hazardous Chemicals

a) All Supervisors and Subcontractors shall be solely responsible for the safe
use and storage in accordance with all applicable laws, of any chemicals or
other materials used in the performance of their work and shall be required
to provide a copy of the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) with 100%
disclosure for each chemical. All chemicals brought onto the construction
site shall bear a label stating the identity of the chemical, any hazards
associated with it, and the name of the responsible party bringing such
chemical onto the site (Attachment 4).

b) Any non-hazardous waste in any form, which results from the work shall be
properly disposed of in a safe manner, protective of the environment and in
accordance with all applicable laws.

c) Accurate records of the types and quantities of all waste, including but not
limited to hazardous wastes shall be maintained. Subcontractors shall
provide copies of all such records to the Contractor. No chemicals of any
kind shall be pumped or allowed to flow into any sewer.

d) Subcontractors shall not be permitted to clean its equipment or change


lubrication pneumatic fluids in areas that are not equipped with spill
containment and control facilities.

e) A Hazard Communication Right-To-Know Program shall be established and


submitted to the H.A.C Safety Department by the subcontractor for review
and comment. The Program shall include, but not be limited to, the

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 38 of 64


following:

(i) Hazardous Chemical List:

 The chemical name or common name used on the MSDS or


container label.

 The quantity usually stored on-site.

 Area where chemical storage, schematic drawing, and protection are


to be provided.

 The list shall be updated every 30 days minimum or whenever the


quantity stored changes sufficiently.

(ii) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)

Subcontractors shall submit to the H.A.C Safety Department prior to


introduction of said material on site, a copy of the most current MSDS on
the hazardous chemical.

(iii) Container Labels

All chemicals and hazardous materials shall arrive on site in original


manufacturer labeled containers.

7.3.4. Hazard Communications

a) Subcontractors, under the direction from the H.A.C Safety Department, shall
establish a written Comprehensive Hazard Communications Program, which
shall include the following:

(i) Provide for container labeling.

(ii) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

(iii) Employee Training Program.

(iv) Hazardous chemical list utilized in work place.

b) Labels

In the work area, each container shall be labeled, logged, or marked with
the identity of hazardous chemicals contained therein, and shall show
hazard warnings appropriate for employee protection. The hazard warning
can be any type of messages, words, pictures, or symbols, which convey
the hazard. Labels shall be legible in English and Arabic and be
prominently displayed.

c) Material Safety Data Sheets

Beyond the identity information, the Material Safety Data Sheets shall
provide information on:
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 39 of 64
(i) The physical and chemical characteristics of the hazardous chemicals.

(ii) Known acute and chronic health effects and related health information.

(iii) Exposure limits.

(iv) Whether the chemical is considered to be a carcinogen.

(v) Precautionary measures, emergency, and first aid procedures.

(vi) The name of the organization responsible for preparing the sheet.

(vii) Copies of the Material Safety Data Sheets are to be at the work site,
readily accessible to employees in that area.

d) Employee Information and Training

Subcontractors, under direction from the H.A.C Safety Department, shall


establish a training and information program for personnel exposed to
hazardous chemicals in their work area at the time of initial assignment and
whenever a new hazard is introduced into their work area. The discussion
topics shall include at least:

(i) The existence of this Hazard communication standard and the


requirements of the standard.

(ii) The components of the Hazard Communication Program in the work


place.

(iii) Operations in their work areas where hazardous chemicals are present.

(iv) Where the subcontractor shall be keeping the written hazard evaluation
procedures, Communications Program, lists of hazardous chemicals,
and the required material safety data sheets.

7.3.5. Toilet Facilities

Sanitation facilities for employees shall be provided in accordance with project


specifications or as determined by the Egyptian Labor Law, whichever is more
stringent.

7.3.6. Washing Facilities

a) Adequate washing facilities proportionate to the number of employees,


according to customary practice, shall be provided.

b) Hand soap and paper towels shall be provided. A trash container shall be
provided for the towels.

7.3.7. Consumption of Food and Beverages


ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 40 of 64
a) Areas for eating and drinking shall be in accordance with local customs.

b) Employees shall be prohibited to consume food or beverages in areas


exposed to hazardous materials.

c) Employees are not allowed to take lunch break or rest break in construction
areas. Breaks will be taken in accordance with local customs.

8. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

8.1. OBJECTIVE
To establish guidelines to be followed by all personnel during emergency situations.

8.2. FACILTIES AND EQUIPMENT


8.2.1 An area will be established at the main office complex to serve as the main
emergency station for all projects.

8.2.2 The area superintendent’s office will serve as the emergency station for each
work area.

8.2.3 A full time nurse will be stationed at the main emergency station. The nurse
will be available to travel to other sites or give guidance via telephone/radio if
an emergency arises.

8.2.4 The nearest local medical facilities will be used in emergency cases for
employees.

8.2.5 An ambulance will be designated and will be dedicated for that purpose. To
the main emergency station.

9. LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURE

9.1. PURPOSE

Establish Lockout/Tag out procedures for securing machinery and equipment, having
potentially hazardous energy sources, during construction period. It is essential that
all personnel are consistent with their lockout procedure to ensure the safety of all
employees. A lockout procedure is to render inoperative electrical systems, pumps,

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 41 of 64


pipelines, valves and all other such energy systems that may accidentally be
released, energized or started up while employees are working on them or before
they are mechanically ready and accepted for service.

9.2. PROCEDURE

9.2.1 Each subcontractor's Safety Representative shall administer the Lockout/Tag


out Program under direction from the H.A.C Safety Supervisor.

9.2.2 All locks and applicable tags shall be issued by the subcontractor's Safety
Representative to their applicable personnel as required.

9.2.3 The subcontractor's Safety Representative shall maintain a lock and tag log.
Sample log sheet attached.

9.2.4 All energy sources shall be locked out and a "DANGER" tag affixed to the
equipment or system indicating who installed the lock, craft, subcontractor's
name, phone number, and reason system is locked out.

9.2.5 No employee or subcontractor may work on a lock and tag belonging to


another employee.

9.2.6 Subcontractor’s supervision shall be responsible for assisting each employee


in locating the proper piece of equipment to be locked out and tagged.

9.2.7 Each employee involved with lockouts shall have a lock with an individual
key. No locks with duplicate or master keys shall be used. Craft or gang
locks shall not be used unless approved by the H.A.C Safety Department.

9.2.8 Subcontractors are required to identify their locks with name engraved on
locks.

9.2.9 Brass shank or combination locks are not permitted.

9.2.10 If more than one employee is required to lockout and tag a piece of
equipment, or circuit, a multiple padlock device shall be used.

Remember: ONE Personal lock for ONE personal exposure.

9.2.11 After locking out and tagging a circuit, an attempt to energize the equipment
shall be made by depressing or turning to "on" all starting stations before work
begins. In no case shall work begin before circuits and equipment is tested to
ensure that they are de-energized.

9.2.12 Any employee who removes a lock and tag belonging to another employee or
person, or overrides lock and tag in anyway, shall be removed from the job
site immediately.

9.2.13 Written authorization H.A.C to be obtained from the H.A.C Safety Department
or supervision of the responsible subcontractor when a lock H.A.C been left
on a piece of equipment and the originator is not available for its removal.
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 42 of 64
9.2.14 When locks and tags are required, the personnel working on that circuit shall
notify their supervisor. The supervisor, or his designee, shall see that
appropriate locks and tags are provided. Following completion of the work,
the supervisor is also to be notified for the removal of the locks and tags.

9.2.15 Electrical systems, which share a power source with a common main breaker,
may be worked as follows:

a) Where practical, the main breaker shall be opened (racked out) and
locked out per the Lockout Procedure.

b) In cases where breakers are used to sub feed branch circuits (more than
one circuit) being supplied from one main breaker, and the panel does
not accept a padlock with a buddy device, the beaker switch shall be
shut off, a piece of lockout tape shall be used to cover breaker switch
and tag shall be placed on shut breaker. Tags shall be entered in
Lockout log as a lock.

c) The responsible electrical subcontractor shall lock out electrical systems


as they are energized until they are released to the Owner's
Representative. Anytime repairs or modifications are made to electrical
systems, either temporary or permanent, they shall be locked out. Locks
shall be applied to the main disconnect switch whenever possible. All
locks shall be accompanied by a tag.

d) Electrical systems that provide electrical power to equipment, pumps and


electrical motors shall be locked out by the appropriate subcontractor
until such time that system is released.

e) Pipelines, valves, and other such sources that could be inadvertently


activated, causing a hazardous condition, shall be locked out, blanked off
or otherwise secured, to prevent accidental activation.

f) Lines, valves and similar systems that are being tested pneumatically or
with other gases such as nitrogen, shall be tagged and/or locked out to
prevent an accidental discharge of the pressure within the line. In
addition, areas affected by the pneumatic test shall be barricaded
against entry and inspected by the H.A.C Safety Department prior to
commencement of the test.

g) When equipment or systems have been turned over to the Owner,


no work or modifications shall be done without compliance with the
Owner’s Lockout/Tag out Program.

10. WORK PERMIT SYSTEM

10.1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE


The project Work Permit System shall be implemented in all project construction
areas to ensure that necessary communication takes place and hazards are
identified, risks are assessed and controlled. And it is important in maintaining a safe
work environment and is a requirement for all client jobs in existing facilities

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 43 of 64


10.2. OBJECTIVE
To establish and implement a work permit system to be used unilaterally by H.A.C
and all subcontractors in all Projects.

10.3. WORK PERMIT SYSTEM


10.3.1. Cold work permit.

10.3.2. Hot work permit.

10.3.3. Confined space entry permit

10.3.4. Excavation work permit.

10.3.5 Isolation certificate.

10.4. HOT WORK PERMIT

Hot work permits applies to work inside area has flammable and/or combustible
material and may generate during work one/or of the following:-

a) Naked flame.

b) Electric arc welding.

c) Pre-heating and electrical stress relieving.

d) Opening live electrical junction boxes or panels.

e) Use of steel wire power brushes.

f) Abrasive blasting & painting.

10.5. COLD WORK PERMIT

Cold work permits apply any work involving one or more of the -

a) Handling of dangerous substances (e.g. Toxic chemicals, flammable materials,


corrosives etc.)

b) High pressure water jetting.

c) Chemical cleaning.

d) Wet shot /grit blasting.

e) Work at high level above ground.

f) Digging of deep trenches/foundations, etc.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 44 of 64


g) Any work which directly affects the operation emergency systems.

h) Persons working over the side or underneath scaffolding.

i) Pressure testing of plant or equipment.

j) Maintenance activities for electrical and mechanical isolated equipment.

10.6. CONFINED SPACE WORK PERMIT

a) Work inside any confined space, tank, vessel or any non-operational, Non
ventilated area where dangerous or unknown concentrations of toxic, flammable
or hazardous gases, fumes or vapors could arise or Where the oxygen
content of the air could be reduced below 19.5% by volume.

b) Area authority shall issue confined space entry permit after completion pre-permit
work area checks.

c) Confined space entry procedure shall be drawn for all major works by the area
and performing authorities, with advice from project HSE Manager.

d) Gas test shall be applied mandatory.

e) Stand by man (attendant) shall be stay full time to monitor confined space entry
personnel by using Confined space entry log.

10.7. EXCAVATION WORK PERMIT

a) Excavation permit shall be required to ensure that all necessary precautions are
taken to avoid damage to underground services such as electrical cables, piping,
instrumentation and telecommunication.

b) All the required signatories for obtaining clearance of underground cables and
services have checked and signed.

c) Excavation permit will usually be accompanied by hot/cold work permit.

10.8. PERMIT ISSUING

a) Area authority and performing authority shall visit the work area to discuss
together all necessary preparatory work and HSE Requirements.

b) Gas testing shall applied by qualified gas tester which shall certify by signature
the gas testing results.

c) Site HSE manger shall specify any additional safety precautions required and
sign.

d) Performing authority shall prepare risk assessment to the work stated, discuss
work permit requirements, and risk assessment results with the persons who are
to perform the work.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 45 of 64


e) Throughout the period of validity of the permit, the performing authority shall be
responsible for ensuring that the stated conditions are observed.

f) After completion, all work permit requirement and gas testing, the area authority
and performing authority shall accept by signature that site preparation and
conditions are satisfactory for the work stated to proceed.

10.9. HANDLING OF ISSUING AND CLOSING OUT PERMIT

a) A work permit is valid for only one shift, but it may be extended for one additional
shift with proper approval.

b) Exceptions in excess of 16 hours may be granted in special cases, provided


certain precautions are taken.

c) The receiver of the work permit must keep the permit posted at the job location at
all times.

d) The receiver of a work permit must keep a copy in his possession or within view
of the job site for the duration of the job, so that it may be presented upon
request and if the receiver leaves the job site, he shall give the permit to a
responsible senior crew member to keep until he returns.

e) The issuer, receiver and the senior crew member must sign the work permit
transferring the work permit to the senior crew member.

f) At the end of the shift, each work permit must be closed out by both issuer and
receiver and the only exception shall be when the distance and remoteness
make signing impractical, and it is so stated when the work permit is issued.

11. CUTTING AND WELDING PROCEDURES

11.1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE


To establish and implement a basic Cutting and Welding Procedure to be used
unilaterally by H.A.C and all subcontractors in all Projects.

11.2. OBJECTIVE
To assure all personnel are aware of safe working practices during cutting and
welding operations.

11.3. PROCEDURE
11.3.1. Safety regulations as outlined in Section 6.7, Gas Welding and Cutting and

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 46 of 64


Section 6.8, Arc Welding and Cutting shall be followed.

11.3.2. All areas where cutting and welding is to be performed shall be inspected
prior to operations by Subcontractor's Safety Representative. Combustible
materials shall be either covered with noncombustible covers or removed
from area.

11.3.3. If cutting or welding is to be performed overhead, the area beneath shall be


either barricaded off or fire watch provided to notify personnel of overhead
activities.

11.3.4. Adequate portable fire extinguishers shall be provided in area for cutting and
welding.

11.4. HOT WORK PERMITS


11.4.1. During initial stage of constructions, Hot Work Permits shall not be required.
Hot Work Permit Procedures shall be implemented at the discretion of H.A.C
Safety Dept.

12. FALL HAZARD CONTROL

12.1. POLICY
Whenever performance of any task would allow a worker to fall a distance of two (2)
meters or more or any distance where the likelihood of a serious or fatal injury exists,
the hazards of falling shall be identified, evaluated and controlled.

12.2. PURPOSE
The purpose of this procedure is to ensure personnel working at an elevation where
they are exposed to a fall hazard have been properly trained and continuous fall
hazard protection is maintained.

12.3. PROCEDURE

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 47 of 64


12.3.1. 100 % fall protection in the form of a full body harness with a secured lanyard
shall be provided, worn, and used by employees when exposed to a fall
hazard of two (2) meters or greater. Listed below, not all-inclusive, are areas
where fall protection is required:

a) Performing task where employees is subjected to a fall of two (2) meters


or greater or any distance where the likelihood of a serious or fatal injury
exist.

b) Within two (2) meters of a roof's edge or roof opening, elevated open-
sided platform, screen guard and floors.

d) At all times while operating or working out of a man lift, high reach or
approved personnel lifting basket.

e) Working from ladder two (2) or more meters from the floor.

f) Erecting or dismantling scaffolds.

12.3.2. Continuous Fall Protection shall be required all times when working in
unprotected elevations and subjected to fall of two (2) meters or greater.
Continuous fall protection can be accomplished as follows:

a) Permanent vertical and horizontal static lines.

b) Temporary vertical and horizontal static lines.

c) Self-retracting lifelines.

d) Secure anchorage point.

e) Safety nets.

g) Use of two (2) lanyards so that one is attached at all times.


12.4. INSPECTIONS, STORAGE, AND MAINTENANCE
12.4.1. The user before each use shall inspect personal fall arrest system equipment.
Items to check for include, but not limited to:

a) Absence or illegibility of markings.

b) Evidence of defects to hardware.

c) Evidence of defects in ropes, or straps.

12.4.2. Defective fall protection equipment should be taken out of service and
destroyed.

12.4.3. Equipment shall be stored in a manner that shall prelude damage from
environment factors, such as heat, excessive moisture, oil, chemicals and
their vapors or other degrading elements.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 48 of 64


13. CONFINED SPACE ENTRY

13.1. PURPOSE
To establish safe operating procedures, to be used unilaterally by H.A.C and all
subcontractors, to protect employees who have to enter a confined space for work
tasks.

13.2. CONFINED SPACE


The definition of a confined space is any enclosure with limited or restricted means
for entry or exit that is not designed for continuous employee occupancy. Some
examples of confined space are dust collectors, ventilation ducts, sewers, and
trenches.

13.3. PROCEDURE
13.3.1. Hazard Identification

Before employees are permitted to enter a confined space, the hazards shall be
identified and evaluated. The severity of hazards shall be determined in order to
classify the confined space entry as a low hazard or high hazard entry (Sections
13.3.7 and 13.3.12). The confined space shall be evaluated when the conduct of
work is suspected of introducing new hazards into the space.

13.3.2. Atmospheric Testing

a) The air monitor shall perform atmosphere testing, and ensure proper
authorization of the Confined Space Entry Permit for all confined space
entries.

b) Atmosphere testing shall include, as a minimum, those for oxygen,


flammability, toxicity and radiation, as applicable. For low hazard entry, the
frequency of testing shall be specified on the permit. For high hazard entry,
constant monitoring during periods of occupation shall be maintained. If
applicable, re-testing of the spaces shall be performed after flushing or
purging of the confined space atmosphere. All testing shall be representative
for the entire work area of the confined space and shall include worst-case
areas and situations.

c) Retest confined space atmosphere a minimum of each eight (8) hour shift.
Frequency of re-testing shall be the decision of the H.A.C Safety Department
and authorized attendant. All atmospheric testing is the responsibility of the
subcontractor and the H.A.C Safety Department shall witness test.

13.3.3. Physical Hazard Control

In addition to atmospheric testing, the air monitor and authorized attendant shall

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 49 of 64


take positive steps to ensure that employees are protected from other physical
hazards, which would include, but are not limited to:

a) Entrance and egress hazards and obstructions.

b) Discharge of gasses, liquids, or solids into the confined space.

c) Structural failure of the confined space.

d) Falling objects.

e) Falls through, from the roof, or from scaffolds, stairs, or ladders.

f) Slipping and tripping hazards.

g) Burns from heated installations or fire.

h) Physical stress.

13.3.4. Isolation

Before employees are permitted to enter a confined space, the subcontractor’s


Safety Representative and authorized attendant shall take positive steps to:

a) Depressurize the confined space.

b) Prevent accidental introduction into the confined space of hazardous


materials.

d) De-energize, lockout, and tag out machinery, or other equipment containing


moving parts that are in the confined space.

13.3.5. Ventilation

a) Before employees are permitted to enter a confined space, the space shall be
mechanically ventilated, if necessary.

b) Prior to ventilating a confined space, the qualified person shall take positive
steps to ensure that no prophetic materials or work practices that shall ignite
flammable vapor in the presence of air are present in the confined space.

c) When necessary, confined spaces shall be mechanically ventilated to prevent


accumulation of:

(i) Flammables in the atmosphere at concentrations above 10% of the LEL.

(ii) Concentrations of combustible dusts.

(iii) Toxic contaminants in the atmosphere above the TLV.

(iv) Oxygen enriched or deficient atmosphere.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 50 of 64


d) Air or steam driven air movers shall be used to ventilate confined spaces. Use
of electric powered ventilators and all portable power equipment, cords, and
lighting shall be approved prior to use.

e) Pure oxygen shall not be used to ventilate a confined space.

f) The Authorized Attendant shall check periodically to ensure the contaminated


air from a confined space is exhausted to a location where it presents no
hazard.

g) Whenever possible, air movers shall be used with ducting to increase the
efficiency of ventilation in the confined space and to prevent recalculation of
contaminated air due to ventilation "short circuiting".

h) When two or more air movers are used for ventilation, all such units should be
operated in the same flow direction to maximize efficiency.

i) Low hazard confined spaces may be entered without mechanical ventilation


at the discretion of the subcontractor’s Safety Representative.

j) Use of ventilation shall not justify reclassification of the confined space.

13.3.6. Labeling and Posting

a) The Confined Space Entry Permit shall be posted as close to the point of
entry as possible, and shall remain there for the job duration.

b) All entrances to any confined space that could be inadvertently entered shall
be posted. Signs shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following
information:

DANGER
CONFINED SPACE
ENTER BY PERMIT ONLY
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY

c) Obvious confined spaces, such as manholes, do not require posting.


However, when work is performed in these places, barricades or caution tape
should be used.

d) When specific work practice is performed or specified safety equipment is


necessary, an additional statement should be added, in large letters to the
wording sign.

e) Signs shall be maintained in a legible condition and shall be both in English


and Arabic language.

13.3.7. Protective Equipment

a) No entry shall be permitted into confined spaces that have been found to
contain atmosphere which are flammable, oxygen deficient or immediately
dangerous to life and health.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 51 of 64


b) High Hazard Confined Space - When the atmosphere of the confined space
to be entered is found to contain contaminants at concentrations above the
TLV and PEL, and the concentration cannot be reduced by engineering
controls (mechanical ventilation), protective equipment shall be utilized in
accordance to applicable standards and regulations.

(i) Employees entering the confined space shall be equipped with airline
respirators operated in the pressure-demand mode with a 5-minute
escape air pack. The breathing air (minimum Grade D) shall be supplied
from air compressors or compressed air cylinders. The final decision on
respiratory protection shall be determined by the H.A.C Safety
Supervisor. A sign-in/sign-out log shall be used.

(ii) Employees entering the confined space shall be equipped with full body
harness and lifeline.

(iii) A man-rated hoisting device with fall arrest capability shall be provided
for lifting employees out of confined space with top entry. The retrieval
equipment shall be on-site and operational prior to entry.

(iv) The Authorized Attendant shall stand by on the outside of the confined
space ready to give assistance in case of an emergency. The attendant
shall not enter the confined space, but shall notify rescue personnel.
The attendant shall be present at all times during confined space entry.

(v) The Authorized Attendant shall also maintain and have available lifeline
and harness and all other protective gear required for entry.

(vi) All entrants shall use applicable protective equipment, such as head and
eye protection, gloves, boots, and imperious clothing, as required by the
nature of the potential hazards and atmosphere contaminants.
Protective clothing types shall be specified on the confined space permit.

c) Low Hazard Confined Space - When the atmosphere of the confined space is
found to be below the action level of the most toxic contaminant present, and
are acceptable LEL and oxygen levels, no special modification of the work
procedure should be necessary, except as indicated below:

(i) The nature of the work, such as mechanical cleaning of the tank
surfaces, may require the use of respiratory protection, head and eye
protection, gloves, boots and impervious clothing.

(ii) Other physical stresses such as temperature extremes and excessive


noise may require the use of specialized safety equipment in any
confined space.

(iii) Change in work activities, which may introduce hazardous chemicals, or


adjacent work, which may pose hazardous conditions.

13.3.8. Illumination

When temporary lighting is used in confined spaces, the following requirements


shall be met:

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 52 of 64


a) All lighting shall be approved for the location.

b) Extension cords used for temporary lighting shall be equipped with ground
fault circuit interrupter connectors. Switches shall be approved for the
location.

c) The lighting shall not be suspended by the electric cords, unless they are
designed for this method of suspension.

d) Electric cords shall be kept clear of working spaces and walkways or other
locations in which they may be exposed to damage.

13.3.9. Compressed/Gas/Flame Producing Equipment

a) Cylinders of compressed gas of any type shall not be taken into confined
spaces. Self-contained breathing apparatus equipment is the only
exception.

b) Welding, burning or cutting equipment shall not to be used in confined


spaces containing or potentially containing flammable gases, vapors,
combustible dusts or combustible materials.

c) Confined space entrants are not to carry matches or cigarette lighters into
space containing or possibly containing flammable gases, vapors or
combustible dusts.

13.3.10. Communication

a) An effective means of communication between the entrants inside a confined


space and the Authorized Attendant shall be provided and used whenever
atmospheric conditions of the confined space require the use of air supplied
respiratory protective equipment, lifelines and harnesses, or whenever
employees inside a confined space are out of sight of the Authorized
Attendant.

b) All affected employees shall be trained in the use of communication system


and the system shall be tested before each use to confirm its effective
operation prior to entry.

13.3.11. Duties of Authorized Attendant

a) Attendant never assigned to more than one confined space.

b) Attendant dedicated to that task alone.

c) Reviewed the entry permits with the supervisor-in-charge and/or service


supervisor and participated in the pre-entry briefing.

d) Monitoring activities inside and outside the confined space during work
operations to ensure that it is safe for authorized entrants to remain in the
space. Remains at entry point unless relieved by another authorized
attendant.

e) Maintaining an ongoing and precise accounting of all authorized entrants in

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 53 of 64


the confined space.

f) Recognizing and identifying potential confined space dangers such as


physical, health, environmental, and external hazards.

g) Ensuring barriers are installed, as necessary, to protect authorized


employees from hazards external to the confined space such as vehicles,
water runoff, unauthorized personnel, etc.

h) Maintaining effective and continuous contact with authorized entrants through


visual and/or audible methods.

i) Ordering authorized entrants to evacuate a confined space immediately


when:

(i) An alarm from an air testing or any other safety-related device is


activated.

(ii) The authorized attendant observes a condition, which is not allowed on


the entry permit.

(iii) The authorized attendant detects behavioral effects of hazard


exposure.

(iv) The authorized attendant shall leave the workstation.

(v) Additional hazards are suspected.

j) Takes the following actions, as necessary, when unauthorized persons


approach or enter a confined space while entry is underway:

(i) Warns the unauthorized person(s) away from or out of the space.

(ii) Requests the unauthorized person(s) to exit immediately if they have


entered the space.

(iii) Informs the authorized entrants and supervisor if unauthorized persons


have entered the space.

k) Summons rescue or other emergency services upon determination that


hazards internal or external to the confined space warrant an emergency
escape from the space.

l) Ensures that appropriate communication methods for summoning


emergency/rescue personnel is established prior to personnel entry into a
confined space.

13.3.12. Confined Space Hazard Determination

a)Hazard Information

(i) Hazards shall be identified for each confined space. The hazard
evaluation is based on overall risk associated with entry. The

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 54 of 64


evaluation shall be done by a qualified person. The hazard
identification process shall include, but not be limited to a review of the
following:

 Possible atmospheric contamination by toxic or flammable vapors,


or oxygen deficiency or excess.

 Possible physical hazards.

 The possibility of liquids, gases, or solids, being generated during


occupancy.

 The isolation of occupants from rescue personnel.

(ii) The past and current usage of the confined space, which may
adversely affect the atmosphere of the confined space, should be
reviewed. The usage review should include, but not be limited to a
review of the following:

 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) on materials currently or


previously held in the confined space.

 Protective coatings that could trap materials, decompose, or


deteriorate during work in the confined space.

 Decomposition of residues or reaction with cleaning agents or heat


from welding, brazing, or cutting operations.

 Operation of engine powered equipment in or adjacent to the


confined space.

(iii) The physical characteristics, configuration, and location of the


confined space should be reviewed.

b)Hazard Evaluation

(i) Scope of Hazard Exposure - How many and/or which employees are
exposed or may be affected.

(ii) Magnitude of the Hazard - How much energy may be released, how
toxic are the chemicals, quantity of materials which could be
inadvertently introduced, etc.

(iii) Likelihood of Hazard Occurrence - Range of probability for the


hazard to occur, i.e. certain to impossible.

(iv) Introduction of new hazards during work activity.

(v) Consequences of the Hazard Occurrence - Most likely outcome if


hazard occurs.

(vi) Strategies for Controlling the Hazards - Control strategies, such as


forced ventilation, use of personnel protective equipment, space

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 55 of 64


monitoring, and isolation.

(vii) Determine the Source of the Contaminant - If the source of the


contaminant cannot be determined, precautions shall be adequate
to deal with the worst possible condition, which the contaminant
could present in the confined space.

(viii) If there is the possibility that the confined space atmosphere can
become IDLE while the work is in progress, procedures and
equipment shall be provided to allow the employee to safely exit the
confined space.

14. SELF PROPELLED WORK PLATFORMS


(Aerial Lifts/Man lifts)
14.1. OBJECTIVE
To establish an operating procedure to ensure unilaterally safe working procedures
for the use of Self Propelled Work Platforms.

14.2. INSPECTION
14.2.1. Prior to daily use, all self propelled work platforms shall be inspected by the user.
Listed below are items that should be checked prior to use:

a) Ensure guardrails and safety chains are in place.

b) Check for visual oil and fuel leaks.

c) Controls shall be properly marked and legible.

e) Proper capacity ratings shall be posted.

f) Proper ignition system (key, etc.) shall be operational.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 56 of 64


g) Check ground and platform controls for proper operation.

14.3. OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

14.3.1. Lift controls shall be tested each day prior to use to determine that they are in
safe working order.

14.3.2. Brakes shall be set and outriggers positioned on flat, solid surfaces.

14.3.3. Wheel chocks shall be used on inclines.

14.3.4. Boom and basket load limits shall be checked and not exceeded (usually two (2)
employees and their necessary tools).

14.3.5. Employees shall tie-off with a full body harness and secured safety lanyard to the
basket, but never to adjacent pole, structure, etc.

14.3.6. Never place extended lifts in travel path of overhead cranes.


14.3.7. Employees shall stand on the floor of the basket. They should never be allowed
to sit or climb on its sides or use planks, ladders, etc., for a work position.

14.3.8. Scissor lifts shall never be moved with the platforms up.

14.3.9. Outriggers shall be in the stored position before any aerial lift is moved.

14.3.10. Do not operate lifts while batteries are being charged in place.

14.3.11. When lifts are used inside buildings, consideration shall be given to carbon
monoxide emissions. Lifts that are propane driven or have air purifying
scrubbers generate far less carbon monoxide.

14.3.12. Equipment being used should be free of leaks, however, if a leak should
develop install plastic type catch cloth under carriage of equipment. Repair leak
as soon as possible.

15. FIRE PROTECTION AND PREVENTION

15.1. OBJECTIVE
To establish a Fire Protection and Prevention Program to be used unilaterally by all
personnel on the job site.

15.2. GENERAL PROTECTION AND PREVENTION MEASURES


15.2.1. Arrange with local fire departments, private or municipal, to assist in onsite
construction fires.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 57 of 64


15.2.2. Emergency phone numbers shall be conspicuously posted throughout the project.

15.2.3. Subcontractors are responsible for the provision of adequate portable fire
protection for their scope of work.

15.2.4. Fire safety shall be a part of daily project inspections.

15.3. HOUSEKEEPING
15.3.1. Clear access to all available fire fighting equipment shall be maintained at all
times. The hanging of clothing, ropes, or other materials over fire protection
equipment shall be prohibited.

15.3.2. Daily cleanup of scrap material, sawdust, rags, oil paint, grease, flammable
solvents, and other residue of construction operations shall be required.

15.3.3. All constructions areas and storage yards shall be cleared of weeds, debris and
other combustible materials before lumber and other combustible construction
materials are delivered to the job site.

15.3.4. All rubbish shall be cleared from buildings at least daily and work areas shall be
kept free of accumulations of debris.

15.3.5. Areas beneath and within three meters of buildings should be free of
accumulation of debris and combustible vegetation.

15.3.6. All rags, waste, etc. soiled by combustible or flammable materials shall be placed
in tightly closed metal containers for daily disposal.

15.4. BURNING OPERATIONS


15.4.1. Material, debris, and/or rubbish may be disposed of by burning on the work-site
or any other site as permitted by local authorities. No burning shall take place
without the prior acceptance of H.A.C.

15.4.2. Burning sites shall be designated by H.A.C’s Safety Department.

15.5. FIRE CLASSIFICATION

Classification Materials
Ordinary combustible materials, such as wood, cloth, paper, rubber and
Class A
many plastics.
Flammable liquids, oils, grease, tars, oil base paints, lacquers, and
Class B
flammable gases.
Energized electrical equipment where the electrical non-conductivity of the
Class C
extinguishing media is of importance.
Class D Combustible metals, such as magnesium, titanium, etc.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 58 of 64


15.6. FIRE EXTINGUISHER

15.6.1. Following is a list of type and location of fire extinguishers to be provided by the
subcontractor. This list is not all inclusive of use:

a) One each 10 B: C rated fire extinguisher within 15 meters or wherever more


than 5 gallons of flammable or combustible liquids or 5 pounds of flammable
gas are being used.

b) One or more fire extinguisher rated 2A shall be placed within 3 meters of all
open yard storage areas of combustible materials.

c) One each 20 B: C rated fire extinguisher shall be located outside but within 3
meters of rooms storing over 60 gallons of flammable or combustible liquids.

d) One B: C rated fire extinguisher located between 8 and 25 meters from any
outside flammable liquid storage area.

e) One portable fire extinguisher rated 20 B: C shall be provided on all tank


trucks or other vehicles used for transporting and/or dispensing flammable
or combustible liquids.

f) Service or fueling areas shall have within 25 meters or each pump,


dispenser, underground fill pipe opening, and lubrication or service
area, one 20 B: C fire extinguisher.

15.7. INSPECTION
15.7.1. All portable fire protection equipment shall be maintained in operating order,
inspected, and documented in writing on a monthly schedule. Each piece of fire
protection equipment shall have the date of the inspection and initials of the
inspector for the current monthly inspection attached.

16. FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS


16.1. SCOPE

To establish a Flammable and Combustible Liquids Policy to be used unilaterally by


all persons on all job sites.

16.2. DEFINITIONS

16.2.1. Combustible Liquid - Liquid having a flash point at or above 37C. (100F.) and
subdivided as follows:

Flash Point
Classification
@ or above C [F] below C [F]
Class II 37 [100] 60 [140]
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 59 of 64
Class IIA 60 [140] 93 [200]
Class IIB 93 [200]

16.2.2. Flammable Liquids - Having flash point below 37C. (100F.) and a vapor
pressure not exceeding 40 psi at 37C. (100F.) and are of Class I which are
subdivided as follows:

Flash Point Boiling Point


Classification
below C [F] C [F]
Class IA 23 [73] below -11 [12]
Class IB 23 [73] @ or above 37 [100]
Class IC 23 [73]

16.3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


16.3.1. Only approved container shall be used for the storage and handling of flammable
liquids.

16.3.2. Signs prohibiting open flames such as smoking or spark generating tools or
equipment shall be posted.

16.3.3. Flammable and combustible material container shall be labeled.

16.3.4. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) shall be provided by the manufacturers,
vendors, or subcontractors for flammable or combustible materials brought on job
site.

16.3.5. Flammable and combustible liquids shall be kept 15 meters away from hot work,
open flames or other spark related activities.

16.3.6. Flammable debris shall be disposed of in approved metal containers with lids.

16.4. INDOOR STORAGE


16.4.1. Indoor storage of flammable and combustible liquids shall be kept to a minimum.
A maximum of 454 liters (120 gallons) of flammable and combustible liquids are
allowed in a flammable storage cabinet, and not more than 227 liters (60 gallons)
of the 454 liters (120 gallons) maximum can be Class I and/or Class II liquids.

16.4.2. There shall be no more than 3 flammable liquid storage cabinets in one area
unless separated by at least 30 meters.

16.4.3. All flammable and combustible storage cabinets shall be grounded.

16.4.4. Storage cabinets shall be marked “FLAMMABLE - KEEP AWAY”

16.4.5. Storage of liquefied petroleum gas is prohibited within a building.

16.4.6. Storage areas shall be kept free of debris and in good housekeeping order.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 60 of 64


16.5. OUTSIDE STORAGE

16.5.1. A minimum distance of 7 meters shall be maintained between flammable and


combustible liquid storage areas and any building.

16.5.2. The storage area shall be graded in a manner to divert spills away from buildings
and should be surrounded by a curb or earthen dike or container in the storage
areas to contain a spill or ruptured container.

16.5.3. Area within dikes shall be lined to prevent leakage of flammable and combustible
liquids into the soil.

16.5.4. Vegetation and debris shall be kept free form the storage area and in good
housekeeping order.

16.6. PORTABLE FIRE PROTECTION


16.6.1. A minimum 20 ABC dry chemical fire extinguisher shall be provided as follows:

a) Within 3 to 15 meters of outside storage area.

b) Not closer than 3 meters of inside storage.

c) On hazardous material dispensing vehicles.

16.7. SERVICING AND REFUELING AREA


16.7.1. All gasoline equipment shall have engines/motors shut off prior to and
during refueling.

16.7.2. Smoking, welding, cutting, burning or open flame is prohibited with 15


meters of where vehicles and/or equipment are being refueled.

16.8. DISPENSING OF FLAMMABLE OR COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS


16.8.1. Container shall be located a minimum of 15 meters from buildings.

16.8.2. Containers or tanks shall be grounded and bonded to the container the
material is being dispensed into.

16.8.3. An automatic self-closing nozzle is required which can be pad locked to


prevent tampering.

16.8.4. Containers shall be properly labeled for content.

16.8.5. Leaks from the nozzle into the drip pan shall be cleaned immediately.

16.9. COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS AND HANDLING

16.9.1. Storage areas shall be kept free of debris and maintained in good
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 61 of 64
housekeeping condition.

16.9.2. No combustible material shall be stored within 3 meters of a building.

16.9.3. Material storage indoor shall not obstruct or adversely affect means of exit.

16.9.4. Non-compatible materials shall be kept segregated.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 62 of 64


ATTACHMENT 1

H. A. CONSTRUCTION

PROJECTS SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS

THE FOLLOWING SAFETY AND HEALTH RULES ARE A PARTIAL LIST OF GENERAL
REGULATIONS THAT SHALL APPLY TO ALL CONSTRUCTIONS EMPLOYEES, VENDORS,
DELIVERY PERSONNEL, AND VISITORS ON THE H.A.C PROJECTS. ANY PERSON WHO
CARELESSLY DISREGARDS THESE OR ANY APPLICABLE SAFETY AND HEALTH
REGULATIONS SHALL BE SUBJECT TO DISCIPLINARY ACTION UP TO AND INCLUDING
REMOVAL FROM THE JOB SITE.

1. The following Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) is required to be worn by all persons, at all
times while on the construction site:

1.1. Approved safety glasses with side shields or mono-goggles.


1.2. Nonconductive hard hats.
1.3. Sturdy foot protection.
1.4. Safety harness if necessary.
1.5. Safety vests if necessary.
1.6. Safety Glass if necessary.

2. Smoking is prohibited in areas where flammable liquids are stored or being used and other
designated areas.

3. All occupational injuries and illnesses, no matter how slight, shall be reported to your
supervisor immediately. If you are injured on the job and do not report the occurrence to your
supervisor, the company shall not be responsible for medical expense incurred by you.

4. Submitting false or fraudulent information, when reporting an accident or injury, shall be cause
for removal from the job site.

5. Fighting, gambling, horseplay and other misconduct are not permitted, or threatening or
attacks upon another employee be tolerated and shall be cause for immediate removal from
the job site.

6. The use or possession of intoxicants or drugs on the job is prohibited. Any employee
reporting for work intoxicated or under the influence of intoxicating liquor or drugs shall not be
allowed to work and shall be administered disciplinary action which could result in immediate
removal from the job.

7. Keep clear of all equipment. Avoid pinch points and the blind areas. Be alert to avoid swinging
or suspended loads.

8. Be alert for and heed all information and warning signs at all times.

9. Do not use compressed air to dust-off yourself or clean about any area.

10. Unless authorized, do not attempt to repair or tamper with equipment that is not functioning
properly. Report malfunctions to your supervisor.

11. Whenever anyone is required to work on or in close proximity to electrical equipment or electrical
circuitry, appropriate tagging shall be placed to identify all controls deactivating the circuit, and
the circuit shall be locked out, when possible.
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 63 of 64
12. Jumping on or off equipment or vehicles, either moving or stationary is prohibited.

13. Misuse of tools and equipment or circumventing safety devices can result in injury to yourself or
others. Do not use makeshift or "jury-rigged" tools or equipment to perform your job.

14. Unless specifically authorized by H.A.C, firearms and explosives are prohibited on the job site.

15. Report all unsafe and unhealthy practices and conditions to your supervisor at once.

16. All fire protection and emergency equipment are plainly marked and shall be kept free of
obstruction at all times.

17. Only authorized and properly trained and supervised personnel are permitted to operate
equipment, vehicles, valves, electrical switches and similar machinery.

18. Ride only on vehicles designated and designed for transporting personnel.

19. Store and use gas cylinders in a secure, upright position, with their valve caps secure and the
cylinders shielded from the sunlight.

20. Maintain good housekeeping at all times. Keep waste, debris, and rubbish cleaned up. Place all
lunch papers, cups, cans and other litter in trash receptacles. Discard and/or store all oily
rags, waste and similar combustible materials in metal containers provided for that purpose.

21. Riding loads, slings, the ball, crane hook or other materials hoisting equipment is prohibited,
except in a life threatening emergency.

22. Keep all machinery guards, guardrails and other protective devices in place and in good operating
order.

23. Be alert at all times to conditions and work processes in your area and surrounding area and with
the presence of other workers and equipment so that you can foresee and avoid potential
dangers.

24. Work area guidelines and regulations for environmental protection shall be strictly followed. All
hazardous material shall be properly handled, stored and disposed of.

ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 64 of 64


Cairo in March 1st 2016
Company HSE Policy

HAC believe such key objectives benefit all persons involved in company activities will only be achieved through
continually improving of HSE performance through applying safe working practices and procedures, spread safety
awareness among employees and contractors and a commitment to safety regulations and rules in all activities
carried out.

To achieve these objectives HAC will pursue the following occupational health, safety & Environments policies:

* HAC is guided by an established accident-prevention policy. This policy is based on a sincere desire to eliminate
personal injuries, occupational illnesses and damage to equipment and property, as well as to protect the general
public whenever and wherever the public comes in contact with, or is affected by the facilities Operation activity.

* HAC will maintain a safety and accident prevention program which meets the requirements of the Host Country,
local codes, and all other authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. As a supplement to the requirements of such
authorities, the Contractor shall comply with the pertinent provisions of the “Manual of Accident Prevention in
Operation” published by the Associated General Contractors,

* Management and supervision are charged with the responsibility of preventing the occurrence of incidents or
conditions that could lead to occupational injuries or illness. While the ultimate success of the Safety, Health and
Fire Prevention Program depends upon the full cooperation of each individual employee, it is management's
responsibility to see that safety, health and fire prevention rules and procedures are adequate and enforced, and to
see that effective training and education programs are employed to the best advantage.

* Every supervisor shall be held accountable for the safety performance demonstrated by the employees under his
supervision. Employees are responsible to abide by procedures, use tools and equipment safely, follow the rules
and use personal protective equipment provide.

* HAC will comply with all applicable laws and regulations and promote the commitment and skills of its
personnel to ensure effective environmental management of its business.

* HAC recognizes its responsibility to protect the environment and to minimize, as far as is safe, practicable and
economically sound, any adverse environmental impact of its activities.

* HAC expects and will encourage its employees and contractors to take a responsible attitude towards their own
and their colleague’s impact on the environment.

* HAC will establish clear environmental targets and develop appropriate performance indicators.

* HAC will reduce and restrict the production of waste and, where possible, dispose of such wastes by recycling.

Hassan Allam

Chief Executive Officer

Yehia Zakaria Street, Industrial Zone – Lot 5, Sheraton Heliopolis Housing, Cairo, Egypt
Tel: +202 26785 917 Fax: +202 26785 920 www.allamsons.com
CERTIFICATE
OF REGISTRATION

This is to certify that the management system of: Certificate Number:


0081476 A

H.A.Construction Steel Initial Certification Date:


19 September 2015

Division Date of Certification Decision:


31 August 2018
Issuing Date:
Main Site: K.28 Alex-Cairo Desert Road, Alexandria-Egypt
31 August 2018
has been registered by Intertek as conforming to the requirements of:
Valid Until:
18 September 2021
ISO 14001:2015
The management system is applicable to:
Design, fabrication and erection of steel structures, vessels, storage
tanks and plate works.

Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
Intertek Certification Limited, 10A Victory
Park, Victory Road, Derby DE24 8ZF, United
Kingdom

Intertek Certification Limited is a


UKAS accredited body under
schedule of accreditation no. 014.

In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate͛s validity is subject to the organization maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek͛s requirements for systems certification. Validity may
be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the property of Intertek, to
whom it must be returned upon request.
CERTIFICATE
OF REGISTRATION

This is to certify that the management system of: Certificate Number:


0081476 B

H.A.Construction Concrete Initial Certification Date:


19 September 2015

Products Division,, Date of Certification Decision:


31 August 2018
Main Site: No. 19, A6 Industrial Zone-10th of Ramadan City-Egypt Issuing Date:
has been registered by Intertek as conforming to the requirements of: 31 August 2018
Valid Until:
ISO 14001:2015 18 September 2021

The management system is applicable to:


Production of various concrete masonry products, curb stones,
interlocks and pre-cast manholes

Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
Intertek Certification Limited, 10A Victory
Park, Victory Road, Derby DE24 8ZF, United
Kingdom

Intertek Certification Limited is a


UKAS accredited body under
schedule of accreditation no. 014.

In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate͛s validity is subject to the organization maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek͛s requirements for systems certification. Validity may
be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the property of Intertek, to
whom it must be returned upon request.
CERTIFICATE
OF REGISTRATION

This is to certify that the management system of: Certificate Number:


0081476 C

H.A.Construction Wood Initial Certification Date:


19 September 2015

Products Division Date of Certification Decision:


31 August 2018
Issuing Date:
Main Site: Block 21, 35, 36 CPC Industrial Park-6th of October City, Giza,
31 August 2018
Egypt
Valid Until:
has been registered by Intertek as conforming to the requirements of:
18 September 2021

ISO 14001:2015
The management system is applicable to:
Manufacturing and erection for all wooden works & fire rated doors.

Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
Intertek Certification Limited, 10A Victory
Park, Victory Road, Derby DE24 8ZF, United
Kingdom

Intertek Certification Limited is a


UKAS accredited body under
schedule of accreditation no. 014.

In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate͛s validity is subject to the organization maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek͛s requirements for systems certification. Validity may
be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the property of Intertek, to
whom it must be returned upon request.
CERTIFICATE
OF REGISTRATION

This is to certify that the management system of: Certificate Number:


0081476

H.A.Construction (H.A.C) Initial Certification Date:


19 September 2015
Date of Certification Decision:
Main Site: Yehia Zakaria St., Industrial Zone-Behind Sheraton Heliopolis
31 August 2018
Buildings Cairo-Egypt
Issuing Date:
has been registered by Intertek as conforming to the requirements of:
31 August 2018

ISO 14001:2015 Valid Until:


18 September 2021

The management system is applicable to:


Design and construction of all types of civil, infrastructure, electrical
and mechanical, erection works, building restoration, industrial,
petrochemical, chemical, power projects locally and internationally.
Design, fabrication and erection of steel structures, vessels, storage
tanks and plate works.
Production of various concrete masonry products, curb stones,
interlocks and pre-cast manholes.
Manufacturing and erection for all wooden works & fire rated doors.

Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
Intertek Certification Limited, 10A Victory
Park, Victory Road, Derby DE24 8ZF, United
Kingdom

Intertek Certification Limited is a


UKAS accredited body under
schedule of accreditation no. 014.

In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate͛s validity is subject to the organization maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek͛s requirements for systems certification. Validity may
be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the property of Intertek, to
whom it must be returned upon request.
CERTIFICATE
OF REGISTRATION

This is to certify that the management system of: Certificate Number:


0081486 A

H.A.Construction Steel Initial Certification Date:


19 September 2015

Division Date of Certification Decision:


31 August 2018
Issuing Date:
Main Site: K.28 Alex-Cairo Desert Road, Alexandria-Egypt
31 August 2018
has been registered by Intertek as conforming to the requirements of:
Valid Until:
11 March 2021
OHSAS 18001:2007
The management system is applicable to:
Design, fabrication and erection of steel structures, vessels, storage
tanks and plate works.

Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
Intertek Certification Limited, 10A Victory
Park, Victory Road, Derby DE24 8ZF, United
Kingdom

Intertek Certification Limited is a


UKAS accredited body under
schedule of accreditation no. 014.

In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate͛s validity is subject to the organization maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek͛s requirements for systems certification. Validity may
be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the property of Intertek, to
whom it must be returned upon request.
CERTIFICATE
OF REGISTRATION

This is to certify that the management system of: Certificate Number:


0081486 B

H.A.Construction Concrete Initial Certification Date:


19 September 2015

Products Division Date of Certification Decision:


31 August 2018
Main Site: No. 19, A6 Industrial Zone-10th of Ramadan City-Egypt Issuing Date:
has been registered by Intertek as conforming to the requirements of: 31 August 2018
Valid Until:
OHSAS 18001:2007 11 March 2021

The management system is applicable to:


Production of various concrete masonry products, curb stones,
interlocks and pre-cast manholes

Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
Intertek Certification Limited, 10A Victory
Park, Victory Road, Derby DE24 8ZF, United
Kingdom

Intertek Certification Limited is a


UKAS accredited body under
schedule of accreditation no. 014.

In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate͛s validity is subject to the organization maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek͛s requirements for systems certification. Validity may
be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the property of Intertek, to
whom it must be returned upon request.
CERTIFICATE
OF REGISTRATION

This is to certify that the management system of: Certificate Number:


0081486 C

H.A.Construction Wood Initial Certification Date:


19 September 2015

Products Division Date of Certification Decision:


31 August 2018
Issuing Date:
Main Site: Block 21, 35, 36 CPC Industrial Park-6th of October City, Giza,
31 August 2018
Egypt
Valid Until:
has been registered by Intertek as conforming to the requirements of:
11 March 2021

OHSAS 18001:2007
The management system is applicable to:
Manufacturing and erection for all wooden works & fire rated doors.

Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
Intertek Certification Limited, 10A Victory
Park, Victory Road, Derby DE24 8ZF, United
Kingdom

Intertek Certification Limited is a


UKAS accredited body under
schedule of accreditation no. 014.

In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate͛s validity is subject to the organization maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek͛s requirements for systems certification. Validity may
be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the property of Intertek, to
whom it must be returned upon request.
CERTIFICATE
OF REGISTRATION

This is to certify that the management system of: Certificate Number:


0081486

H.A.Construction (H.A.C) Initial Certification Date:


19 September 2015
Date of Certification Decision:
Main Site: Yehia Zakaria St., Industrial Zone-Behind Sheraton Heliopolis
31 August 2018
Buildings Cairo-Egypt
Issuing Date:
has been registered by Intertek as conforming to the requirements of:
31 August 2018

OHSAS 18001:2007 Valid Until:


11 March 2021

The management system is applicable to:


Design and construction of all types of civil, infrastructure, electrical
and mechanical, erection works, building restoration, industrial,
petrochemical, chemical, power projects locally and internationally.
Design, fabrication and erection of steel structures, vessels, storage
tanks and plate works.
Production of various concrete masonry products, curb stones,
interlocks and pre-cast manholes.
Manufacturing and erection for all wooden works & fire rated doors.

Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
Intertek Certification Limited, 10A Victory
Park, Victory Road, Derby DE24 8ZF, United
Kingdom

Intertek Certification Limited is a


UKAS accredited body under
schedule of accreditation no. 014.

In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate͛s validity is subject to the organization maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek͛s requirements for systems certification. Validity may
be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the property of Intertek, to
whom it must be returned upon request.
SAFETY STATISTICS UPDATE

1.1. Incident / Accident statistics

1.1.1 Company

2013 2014 2015 2016 2017


6,889,692.00 15,462,121.00 23,588,922.00 31,122,128.00 38,245,688.00 Number of worked hours
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Environmental incidents
72.00 62.00 215.00 405.00 805.00 Near miss accidents
65.00 18.00 86.00 233.00 975.00 Number of medical treatments (MT)
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Number of restricted work cases (RW)
0.00 0.00 2.00 3.00 8.00 Number of lost time accidents (LT)
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Number of fatal accidents (FA)
0.00 0.00 0.02 0.02 0.04 Lost Time Injury Rate (LTIR) (1)
1.89 0.23 0.75 1.52 5.14 Total Recordable Injury Rate (TRIR) (2)
0.00 0.00 12.00 54.00 71.00 Total number of lost calendar days (TLD)
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Rate of seriousness (Rs) (3)
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Workers compensation insurance rate (if applicable) (4)
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Experience Modification Rate (EMR) (if applicable)

1.1.2 Subcontractors
2013 2014 2015 2016 2017
24,146,033.00 37,321,114.00 63,329,403.00 93,366,384.00 90,109,934.00 Number of worked hours
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Environmental incidents
655.00 221.00 523.00 1,217.00 1,339.00 Near miss accidents
518.00 114.00 318.00 699.00 2,147.00 Number of medical treatments (MT)
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Number of restricted work cases (RW)
2.00 1.00 4.00 7.00 14.00 Number of lost time accidents (LT)
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Number of fatal accidents (FA)
0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.03 Lost Time Injury Rate (LTIR) (1)
4.31 0.62 1.02 1.51 4.80 Total Recordable Injury Rate (TRIR) (2)
12.00 4.00 64.00 161.00 161.00 Total number of lost calendar days (TLD)
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Rate of seriousness (Rs) (3)
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Workers compensation insurance rate (if applicable) (4)
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Experience Modification Rate (EMR) (if applicable)

Key
(1) LTIR = (LT+FA) x 200.000
Number of worked hours

(2) TRIR = (MT+RW+LT+FA) x 200.000


Number of worked hours

(3) Rs = TLD x 1,000


Number of total hours performed

(4) % of the annual amount of employees’ salaries

Notes:
1. Each case is to be counted one in the most severe category i.e. as an MT, RW, LW or FA.
2. A First Aid Case is not to be counted as a Medical Treatment Case.
3. A First Aid injury is any one-time treatment of a worker and subsequent observation of an injury, which does not ordinarily require medical treatment.
Such treatment is considered first aid, whether provided by a first aid provider or a medical professional.
4. MT - A medical evaluation or treatment done by a third party medical provider.
5. RW - Restricted work status occurs when, as the result of a work-related injury or illness, an employer or health care professional keeps, or recommends
keeping, an employee from doing the routine functions of his or her job or from working the full.
6. LW - Days away from work occur when, as the result of a work-related injury or illness, an employee is unable to be present in the workplace during the full
workday that the employee would have been scheduled to work before the injury or illness occurred.

Form:
Revision: 0 HSE Statistics Page 1 of 1
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
ANNEX 13: QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL
REQUIREMENTS

Page 43 of 44
1 x 30 (Bula) + 1 x 20 (Mafanco) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau

Quality Assurance and Quality


Control Requirements
Contents
1. SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................ 2
2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS .............................................................................................................. 2
3. PROJECT QUALITY OBJECTIVES .................................................................................................... 2
4. REQUIREMENTS FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN..................................................................... 3
5. REQUIREMENTS FOR QUALITY CONTROL PLAN ......................................................................... 3
6. OVERALL QUALITY RESPONSIBILITIES ......................................................................................... 4
7. APPROACH AND METHODOLOGY .................................................................................................. 5
7.1. Inspection and Test plan ..................................................................................................................... 5
7.2. Inspection Check Sheets ..................................................................................................................... 6
8. Quality Acceptance Criteria ................................................................................................................. 6
9. Quality Inspection Activities ................................................................................................................. 6
10. QUALITY DOCUMENTATION ............................................................................................................ 7
10.1. Project Quality Plan ............................................................................................................................. 7
10.2. Quality Control Plan ............................................................................................................................. 7
10.3. Quality Forms (or Inspection Checklist) .............................................................................................. 7
10.4. Quality Records ................................................................................................................................... 7
10.5. Punch-lists ........................................................................................................................................... 7
10.6. Certificates ........................................................................................................................................... 7
10.7. Quality Instructions .............................................................................................................................. 7
10.8. Non-conformance Register.................................................................................................................. 8
11. H.A.C’s STANDARD INSPECTION PLANS ........................................................................................ 8

Page | 1
1. SCOPE

This document defines the H.A. CONSTRUCTION (H.A.C) standard requirements for Quality Assurance and
Quality Control for all relevant construction activities of Guinea Bissau - EPC – 1 x 30 (Bula) + 1 x 20
(Mafanco) MWAC PV Power Plants

The general scope includes the following works:


• Solar PV modules
• Racking/Tracking Equipment/piles
• Inverters
• MV Transformers
• SCADA Equipment
• MET Station
• MV Switchgear
• DC & AC Cables
• Transmission line 17 km in Bula
• Transmission line 500 m in Mafanco
• Other works (Fence, Anti-Intrusion System, Operation and Ancillary Buildings)

The purpose of this document is to define the methodology and processes to be applied in the Project. It
contains only the activities pertinent to the project execution phase and contains:

• The quality standards and requirements to be applied in the project. This will include the quality
standards that should be followed by the subcontractors as well as the internal quality processes and
procedures;
• The quality responsibilities of the involved parties and the related reporting process;
• The quality documentation process. This will present the methodology, the timing and the
responsibilities of the quality documentation process;

The quality plan aims to make use of all available templates and quality recommendations H.A.C’s Quality
system. All stakeholders should be familiar with how quality shall be planned, assured and controlled
throughout all the project phases.

2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

The following standard and documents are relevant to this document:


• Standard ISO 9001 – Quality Management System – requirements

3. PROJECT QUALITY OBJECTIVES

The purpose of the Quality Control Plan is to achieve the following:

• Ensure that the installation of the plant is carried out according to precise specifications, which are
defined in contractual documents;
• Ensure that the construction and installation of the plant is carried out on a ‘right first time’ basis;
• Attain the aimed performance ratio of the plant;
• Comply with the relevant market standards;
• Ensure relevant stakeholders that the photovoltaic plant operates in accordance with the set
standards;
• Meet business expectations: enable the desired benefits to be achieved.

Page | 2
4. REQUIREMENTS FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

For all the works to be performed under the scope of work, H.A.C will establish and implement quality
assurance Plan which, as a minimum, meets the requirements set out in the relevant section of ISO 9001.

Our Project Quality Management submitted includes a general description of the scope of work and more
specifically the following items:

• Purposed Quality Assurance Plan


• Quality Policy and Objectives
• Quality Management Procedures including:
QMP Reference Procedure Description
QMP-245 Quality Plan
QMP-245-001 Inspection & Testing
QMP-245-002 Document and Data Control
QMP-245-003 Material Control
QMP-245-004 Non-Conformance Handling
QMP-245-005 Quality Audit
QMP-245-006 Evaluation of Sub-Contractors
QMP-245-007 Evaluation of Suppliers
QMP-245-008 Handing Over
• Template of quality inspection and test plans
• Template of inspection checklists and Process Flow Samples
• Template of Non-conformities report sheet
• Template of submittal for materials approval

5. REQUIREMENTS FOR QUALITY CONTROL PLAN

H.A. CONSTRUCTION will maintain Quality Control Plan (QCP) to check and enhance the quality of all
Construction activities in order to assure the fulfillment of the Contract quality requirements. Where
relevant, such document will include Quality Control Plans from sub-contractors.

The Quality Control Plan will identify at least the following:

• Purpose of the quality control plan


• Description of quality activities
• Quality Control Staff and their responsibilities
• Reference to specific procedures and methods statements
• Methods for dealing with changes of the QCP during the construction
• Inspection and Test Plan for all relevant activities
• Inspection Checklists
• Non-conformities report
• List of testing apparatus and associated certificates of calibration

Page | 3
6. OVERALL QUALITY RESPONSIBILITIES

The present Project Quality Plan is based on the following relevant tasks and responsibilities concerning the
Project quality themes:

Role Responsibilities Tasks

All Project participants Compliance with the quality Implementation of quality activities and
plan in the respective areas procedures in the respective areas of work.
H.A.C Project through of work.planning Quality
Quality • Define the overall Project Quality Plan
Quality Manager control including the Quality Control Plan.
Overall quality • Review and approve the detailed Project
communication Assurance of
Quality Plan and Quality Control Plan
overall project quality.
designed/elaborated by the Contractor
• Review and approval of Quality Control
Plans from suppliers and subcontractors.
• Maintenance of quality documentation.
• Maintenance and follow up of issue register.

Supplier/Subcontractor’s Quality planning Quality • Elaboration and overall implementation of


Project Manager through control H.A.C’s Quality Management Plan.
their Quality Manager Overall quality • Review and approval of Quality Plans from
communication Assurance of
suppliers and subcontractors.
overall project quality
• Maintenance of quality documentation.
• Maintenance and follow up of issue register.
Subject Matter Experts Expert advice Advise the project in specific quality issues that
may arise

Further role descriptions are to be defined in the Contractor’s Project Quality Management Plan.

Page | 4
7. APPROACH AND METHODOLOGY

The quality management of the project will continue to be ensured amongst others through the following
principles:

• Careful planning
• Team work and open discussion on issues
• Double check and side-control routines
• Use of new materials only
• Early warning of potential quality issues and early involvement of quality referees or experts
• Open dialog and observation of works and processes
• Fulfillment of quality control plan and the inspections therein
• Detailed planning of testing and commissioning of plant
• Internal and external quality audits as and when considered necessary

The methodology to be followed for the project quality management is based on the following activities and
documents:

7.1. Inspection and Test plan

The purpose of an Inspection and Test Plan is to put together in a single document that records all
inspection and testing requirements relevant to a specific process or element of work.

H.A. CONSTRUCTION will prepare and maintain Inspection and Test Plans (ITP) that identifies the items of
materials and work to be inspected or tested, by whom and at what stage or frequency, as well as Hold
and Witness Points, references to relevant standards, acceptance criteria and the records to be
maintained. Such plans must systematically list quality activities relating to the Works and will, where
relevant, include ITPs from sub-contractors. The ITPs must include:

• Control points (activities to be inspected/tested, including, if applicable, any Factory acceptance


test or Site acceptance test)
• Identification of witness points and hold points.
• Frequency of the control

Page | 5
• Identification of the person responsible for carrying out the control
• Reference to acceptance criteria for the activities
• Reference to applicable test and inspection procedures
• Reference to the record forms or inspection checklist
• Identification of the involvement of H.A. CONSTRUCTION and Third parties in inspection and test
activities
• List of Laboratories for external inspection

7.2. Inspection Check Sheets

H.A. CONSTRUCTION will provide records in various forms, such as checklists or record forms, test
certificates, certificates of compliance/conformity, survey data, written approvals to provide the documented
evidence necessary to verify that the work is in accordance with the contract requirements.

Inspection checklists will be developed to give confidence that the person doing the work is aware of all the
important steps, attributes and matters to be addressed, and the standards that should be complied with,
and that conformity is being verified.

The inspection checklist will include the date of inspection, the name / qualification and the signature of the
person who carries out the inspection.

8. Quality Acceptance Criteria

The quality acceptance criteria for components and works shall be described in the Quality Control Plan and
associated test sheets, as well as the measurements to be applied in case of non-compliance with the quality
criteria. Acceptance criteria shall also be described in the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan. Strict tolerance
and limits shall be adhered to at all times.

9. Quality Inspection Activities

The inspection and testing activities and the affected components and works are listed in the Quality Control
Plan. Where appropriate, inspection activities shall be described in detail in Quality Inspection Procedures or
inspection checklists and recorded in Quality Inspection Reports, which shall be approved and signed by the
respective responsible appointed in the Quality Control Plan. For all other inspections, the signature of the
responsible for the inspection on the respective document shall be sufficient for its approval. The Contractor
and all Contractor’s Personnel responsible for Quality Inspection Reports, shall ensure that all reports and
completed check sheets are drafted and approved within 72 hours of having witnessed any test, inspection or
conducted a factory visit. Where the signature of the Employer’s Representative or other Employer Personnel
is required as part of any quality inspection, Contractor shall ensure that the correct documentation is
presented for signing within 24 hours of the occurrence of a test.

Page | 6
10. QUALITY DOCUMENTATION

This section of the Project Quality Plan defines the quality documentation to be produced during execution of
the Works.

10.1. Project Quality Plan

The Project Quality Plan (PQP) is the document which sets out the basic guidelines for the quality
management for the project. The Contractor shall develop the Contractor’s Project Quality Plan in additional
detail outlining the documentation, organization, responsibilities, frequencies of inspection etc. This document
shall be submitted before the execution of any of the Works, within 14 days of the Commencement Date.

10.2. Quality Control Plan

The Quality Control Plan or Inspection and Testing Plan (in some industries) sets out on an activity level the
inspections to be carried out, the procedure or check lists to be used, the report or documentation to be
generated, the acceptance criteria and gives the Employer the opportunity to specify witness, hold or review
points. This document shall be submitted before the execution of any of the Works, within 14 days of the
Commencement Date.

10.3. Quality Forms (or Inspection Checklist)

Quality Forms shall be created by the Contractor to be used as templates for recording of inspection and
testing activities. Each inspection shall generate a Quality Record in the Quality Form template. Quality
Forms shall be submitted to the Employer for review prior to being issued for construction.

10.4. Quality Records

Records are established to provide evidence of conformity to requirements and the effective operation of the
Quality Management System. Scatec Solar has defined process that ensures the controls needed for the
identification, storage, protection, retrieval, retention time and disposition of records. Records shall also
remain legible, readily identifiable and retrievable.

10.5. Punch-lists

Overview on identified items which must be solved before the signature of a certificate

10.6. Certificates

Signed proof of quality activities and documentation having met specific requirements

10.7. Quality Instructions

When necessary, Quality Instructions will be created to describe procedures or quality activities. Quality
instructions will be linked to the correspondent quality activity or inspection in the Quality Control Plan.

Page | 7
10.8. Non-conformance Register

Non-conformance Register is a document that lists all the non-conformances in the project. It also gives the
status of the non-conformances. This is a separate document from the PQP.

11. H.A.C’s STANDARD INSPECTION PLANS

H.A. CONSTRUCTION provides attached sample plans and record forms as standard templates which
describe the minimum requirements for quality control of work. These minimum requirements will be taken
into account by all subcontractors when elaborating the Inspection and test plan and the inspection
checklists.

The following standard inspection plans are attached to this document as a sample:

Civil Works:

- HAC_QC_CIV_ITP-004 : Inspection plan for buried networks installation


- HAC_QC_ CIV_ITP-006 : Inspection plan for roads and platforms construction works
- HAC_QC_ CIV _ITP-008 : Inspection plan for piles and shallow foundations for PV structures

Page | 8
HAC_QC_CIV_ITP-004
INSPECTION PLAN FOR ELECTRICAL BURIED NETWORKS

Version Modifications Date Author Checker Approval

Nom Project / Project Name


(1x30 + 1x20) MW AC PV Power Plants, Guinea
Bissau
Proj. Code Type Disc. SER.

- - ITP - CIV 004


TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION

INSPECTION SCHEME
Form 1 : Control of Execution of Trenches
Form 2 : Control of Implementation of Cables without Ducts
Form 3 : Control of Implementation of Cables with Ducts

Version 00 2/10
1. SCOPE

This framework of quality inspection plan gives the minimum requirements for PV electrical buried
networks . The scope includes but not limited to, the following:
- the execution of the trenches
- the implementation of cables without ducts
- the implementation of cables with ducts

The minimum requirements specified in this documents will be taken into account by H.A.C when
elaborating his Quality Assurance and Quality Control Plan (QA/QC Plan).

In any case,the minimum requirements do not replace the obligations of self controls under the
responsibility of H.A.C as part of its activities.

All works shall be subjected to control under the responsibility of H.A.C and the surveillance of
EMPLOYER's representative.

2. REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DOCUMENTS


The reference standards and documents applicable for this inspection plan are given in Employer's
requirements. Where required, relevant local or national Standards should be applied.

3. INSPECTION PLAN

3. 1. Inspection scheme
The inspection scheme describes for each activity concerned by the quality control:
- the subject of control
- the purpose of control
- the witness point and Hold point
- the responsive of controls

Hold Point (H) : is a mandatory verification point beyond which a work cannot proceed without
approval by the Employer Representative or a Third party inspection body. The work cannot
proceed until the Employer Representative or a Third party inspection body is able to verify the
quality of the completed work and releases the Hold by means of Inspection Request approval.

Version 00 3/11
Witness Point (W) : is an identified point in the process where the Employer representative or
third party inspection body may review, witness, inspect method or process of work. The activities
however may proceed.

Version 00 4/11
3.2. Control forms
Control forms are provided as standard template and could be used by H.A CONSTRUCTION as a base
to elaborate the inspection Checklists

All the inspection Checklists must be co-signed by H.A.C and the EMPLOYER.

Version 00 5/11
INSPECTION SCHEME

Responsible of the controls


Hold Point (H) /
Subjects / Activities Object of control Witness Point
(W) Company in Employer
H.A.C Third Party
charge of work Representative

Layout of trenches W x x
Execution of trenches
Form 1
Geometry of trenches W x x

Conformity of cables H x x
Implementation of
cable without ducts
Form 2 Laying the cables in the trench H x x

Backfilling of the trenches W x x

Conformity of cables and ducts H x x

Implementation of
cables with ducts Layout of cables H x x
Form 3

Backfilling of the trenches W x x

Version 00 6/10
Form 1 - Execution of trenches

Project name :

Row (or Axis) N°:

Execution drawing Issuer (name of body) reference / revision Status

method of result of the acceptance


Control points C NC NA Observations
inspection inspection criteria

Layout of trenches

Check the trenches layout is visual


conform to drawing

Check the distance between the


trenches axis and concrete
measurement
foundation is conform to
specified requirements

Check the distance between the


trenches axis and existing
measurement
obstacle is conform to standard
and drawing

Dimensions of the trenches

Check the depth of the trench is


measurement
conform to drawing

Check the width of the trench is


measurement
conform to drawing

Check the dimensions of


chambers for cable pulling are measurement
conform to drawing

Check the distance between the


chambers for cable pulling is measurement
conform to drawing

CONTROLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

Version 00 7/11
H.A. CONSTRUCTION

EMPLOYER

Version 00 8/11
Form 2 - Implementation of cables without ducts

Project name :

Row (or Axis) N°:

Execution drawing Issuer (name of body) reference / revision Status

method of result of the acceptance


Control points C NC NA Observations
inspection inspection criteria

Conformity of cables

Check the type of cable is conform Cable data


to specifications sheet

check the diameter of cables is Cable data


conform to specifications sheet

Check the cables are not damaged visual

Laying of the cables

Check that a sand bed is


implemented at the bottom of the
visual
trench (thickness not less than 10
cm)

Check the arrangement of cables


visual
is conform to drawing

Check the number of cables is


visual
conform to drawing

Check the cables are correctly


identified with the required data visual
(HV, MV, LV)

Version 00 9/10
Backfilling of the trenches

Check that a sand layer of at least


visual
20 cm thick is placed over cables

Check that the warning grid is in


visual
place above the sand layer

Check that the final layer of penetrometer


backfill is well compacted test

CONTROLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A. CONSTRUCTION

EMPLOYER

Version 00 10/10
HAC_QC_CIV_ITP-006
INSPECTION PLAN FOR ROADS AND PLATFORM CONSTRUCTION WORKS

Version Modifications Date Author Checker Approval

Nom Projet / Project Name


(1x30 + 1x20) MW AC PV Power Plants,
Guinea Bissau
Code Proj. Typ Rep GED Ordre

- - ITP - CIV 006

Version: 01 1/1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SCOPE

2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

3. INSPECTION PLAN

3.1. Inspection Scheme

3.2. Controls forms

Roads
Form 1 - Assessment of documentation before start of works
Form 2 - Execution of roads earthworks
Form 3 - Execution of road layers : Subgrade / Structure layer / finishing layer
Form 4 - Control for acceptance of road works
Form 5 - Surface water drainage works

Platforms
Form 10 - Execution mounting platforms earthworks
Form 11 - Execution of platform layers : subgrade layer /structure layer / finishing layer
Form 12 - Control for acceptance of road works

Version: 01 1/1
1. SCOPE

This framework of quality inspection plan gives the minimum requirements for roads and platforms
construction works . The scope includes but not limited to, the following:
- the documentation
- the earthworks
- the subgrade layer
- the foundation (or base) layers
- the top layer
- Road drainage works

The minimum requirements specified in this documents must be taken into account by H.A.
CONSTRUCTION when elaborating his Quality Assurance and Quality Control Plan (QA/QC Plan).

In any case, Employer's minimum requirements do not replace the obligations of self controls under
the responsibility of H.A.C as part of its activities.

All works shall be subjected to control under the responsibility of H.A.C and the surveillance of the
Employer representative or any other Third party assigned by H.A.C/EMPLOYER.

2. REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DOCUMENTS


The reference standards and documents applicable for this inspection plan are given in Employer's
requirements. Where required, relevant local or national Standards should be applied.

3. INSPECTION PLAN

3. 1. Inspection scheme
The inspection scheme describes for each activity concerned by the quality control:
- the subject of control
- the purpose of control
- the witness point and Hold point
- the responsive of controls

Hold Point (H) : is a mandatory verification point beyond which a work cannot proceed without
approval by the Employer Representative or a Third party inspection body. The work cannot
proceed until the Employer Representative or a Third party inspection body is able to verify the
quality of the completed work and releases the Hold by means of Inspection Request approval.

Version: 01 1/2
Witness Point (W) : is an identified point in the process where the Employer representative or
third party inspection body may review, witness, inspect method or process of work. The
activities however may proceed.

3.2. Control forms


Control forms are provided as standard template and could be used by H.A.C. as a base to elaborate
his inspection Checklists

All the inspection Checklists must be co-signed by H.A.C. and the EMPLOYER's Representative in
charge of the work.

Version: 01 2/2
INSPECTION SCHEME

Domains / Activities Points of Control EMPLOYER (or


Hold point (H) /
H.A.C. appointed Third Party
Witness Point (W)
Representative)

Documentations Check approval and version of execution


H x x
Form 1 drawings before start of works

Check the means used are compliant


W x
with H.A.C's QA Plan and Procedures

Check the road layout is conform to


W x
execution drawings

Check the last levelling layer of


earthworks conforms to geotechnical W x
Road earthworks
forecasts
execution
Form 2
Check the bearing strength of the
levelling course of earthworks complies W x
with project specifications

Check geometry of road bed (last


W x
levelling course of earthworks)

Check drainage system is well


implemented (where drainage is required W x
for the road bed)

Check conformity of raw materials H x x

Execution of road
layers : subgrade /
structure layers Check conformity of materials for
(base, foundation) / stabilization (where stabilization is W x
finishing layer required)
Form 3
Check means used on site are conform
to those specified in H.A.C's Quality W x
Assurance Plan

Check the compaction of layers W x

Check the bearing capacity layers W x

Check the geometrical characteristics are


H x x
conform to execution drawings
Acceptance of road
works
Form 4 Check compaction and bearing capacity
of road is conform to specified H x x
requirements

Version: 01 1/2
Domains / Activities Points of Control EMPLOYER (or
Hold point (H) /
H.A.C. appointed Third Party
Witness Point (W)
Representative)

Check layout and geometry of ditches W x


Road surface water
drainage works Check implementation of underground
W x
Form 5 pipes

Check implementation of underground


W x
drain pipes

Check the outfalls for drained water W x

Check means used on site are conform


to those specified in H.A.C's Quality W x
Assurance Plan

Check the road layout is conform to


W x
execution drawings

Check the soil of the last levelling course


of earthworks is conform to geotechnical W x
Road earthworks
forecasts
execution
Form 10
Check the bearing capacity of the sol in
W x
place is conform to design assumptions

Check geometry of road bed (last


W x
levelling course of earthworks)

Check drainage system is well


implemented (where drainage is required W x
for the road bed)

Check the conformity of material with


H x x
specified requirements

Execution of platform
layers : subgrade / Check the conformity of materials for
structure layers stabilized layers (where stabilization is W x
(base, foundation) / required)
finishing layer
Form 11 Check means used on site are conform
to those specified in H.A.C's Quality W x
Assurance Plan

Check the compaction of layers W x

Check the bearing capacity layers W x

Check the geometrical characteristics are


H x x
conform to execution drawings
Acceptance of
platform works
Form 12 Check compaction and bearing capacity
of road is conform to specified H x x
requirements

Version: 01 2/2
Form 1 : Assessment of Documentation before Start of Works

Project Name:

Owner /
Document Third Party
Type of Documents Issuer Version Engineer Observation
Reference Approval
Approval

Study of the formulation for the


treatment of materials with
hydraulic binder or lime (where
stabilization is required to
improve the materials)

Suitability test to verify


compliance of stabilization with
specified requirements

Certificate of conformity of raw


materials (gravels, binder, lime,
drains,...)

Calculation notes of road and


platforms works

Calculation notes of surface


water drainage works

Execution drawings of platforms

Execution drawings of roads

Earthworks plane

H.A.C's Quality Assurance Plan

H.A.C's Procedures of execution

H.A.C's Quality Control Plan

CONTROLLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C.

EMPLOYER

Version: 01 1/1
Form 2 - Execution of Roads Earthworks

Project name :

Road section designation :


Status "For
Execution drawings Issuer Document reference
Construction"

Result of Acceptance
Control points Methods of inspection C NC Observation
control criteria
Check means provided by H.A.C to execute the works

Check manpower and equipment Visual inspection


used comply with H.A.C's QA Plan Examination of data
and Procedures sheets

Check the road layout is conform to the project specifications

Check reference points


Visual inspection
(benchmarks) are available on site
Topographic control
for the general layout of works

Check the road layout is conform Visual inspection


to drawing Topographic survey

Check the geotechnical forecasts

Check the last levelling course of


Visual inspection
earthworks conforms to
geotechnical forecasts

Plate test or Dynamic


Check bearing strength of the
plate
levelling course of earthworks
complies with project specifications
Deflectometer

Check geometric characteristics of road are compliant with specified requirements

Check minimum radius of curves Measurement


are conform to execution drawings Topographic survey

Check transverse/longitudinal
Visual inspection
slope are conform to execution
Topographic survey
drawing

Version: 01 1/2
Check the top level of earthworks Visual inspection
is conform to execution drawing Topographic survey

Check the levelling of top level of


Visual inspection
earthworks is within specified
Topographic survey
tolerance

Drainage requirements during earthworks

Check drainage system is well


implemented (where drainage is Visual inspection
required for earthworks)

C = Conformed NC = Non Conformed

CONTROLLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C.

EMPLOYER

Version: 01 2/2
Form 3 - Execution of road layers : Subgrade / Structure layer / finishing layer

Project name :

Road section designation :

Layer designation :

Subgrade Structure layer (Base, Fondation) Finishing layer

Status "For
Execution drawings Issuer Document reference
Construction"

Result of Acceptance
Control points Methods of inspection C NC Observation
control criteria

Check conformity of raw materials

Check the maximum size Dmax


of materials is conform to Sieve analysis
specified value
Check the resistance to
fragmentation of granular LA test
materials

Check the resistance to wear of


Micro Deval test
granular materials

Check resistance of materials to


Appropriate test
frost

Check water content of


Measurement of
materials is conform to
water content
specified requirement
Check the materials are not
VBS Test
sensitive to water

Check (ρdOPN, WOPN ) Proctor Test

Check CBR index is within


CBR Test
required limit

Version: 01 1/3
Check means provided by H.A.C to execute the works

Check manpower and


Visual inspection
equipment used comply with
Examination of data
H.A.C's QA Plan and
sheets
Procedures

Check conformity of materials for stabilization (where stabilization is required)

Check the binder is conform to Data sheet of


standard and specified Fabricant
requirements Lime reactivity Test

Check the water content of the


Measurement of
material to be stabilized is
water content
within the specified limit
Check the dosage of binder in
Weighing
within specified tolerance

Check the mixing of materials


(grinding degree, thickness of Visual inspection
the treated layer)

Check the compaction of elementary layer


Check that the compaction
methodology is conform to with Q/S method
standards (GTR)

Gamma density meter


(if material size D≤ 20
Check that the density of each à 31,5mm)
compacted layer is conform to
compaction requirement Densitometer
(materials with bigger
size)

Check the thickness of


compacted layers is conform to
specified value and the that the Penetrometer
compaction is homogeneous for
all layers

Check the ratio EV2/EV1 is


Static plate bearing test
inferior to specified value

Version: 01 2/3
Check the bearing strength of the layer

Check that the measured


Static plate bearing
modulus EV2 is conform to
test
specified value

Check that the measured Deflectometer


deflection is conform to Benckelmann beam
specified value (if applicable) test

C = Conformed NC = Non Conformed

CONTROLLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C.

EMPLOYER

Version: 01 3/3
Form 4 - Control for acceptance of road works

Projet name :

Road section designation :

Status "For
Execution drawings Issuer Document reference
Construction"

Result of Acceptance
Control points Méthods of inspection C NC Observation
control criteria
Check the geometrical carachteristics are conform to execution drawings

Check that the levelling of the Visual inspection


road surface is within specified Topographic survey
tolerances

Check that road width is


Measurement
conform to specified value

Check that the altimetry of road


surface is conform to specified Topographic survey
level

Check that the maximum slope


on longitudinal profile is Topographic survey
respected

Check that the transverse


slope meets the specified Topographic survey
requirements
Check compaction of road is conform to specified requirements

Gamma density
meter (if material size
Check the measured density of
D≤ 20 à 31,5mm)
compacted layers is conform to
compaction requirements
Penetrometer

Check the ratio EV2/EV1 is


conform to compaction Static plate bearing test
requirements
Check bearing strength of road is conform to specified requirements
Check that the measured
modulus EV2 is conform to Static plate bearing test
specified value
Check that the mesured
Measurement with
deflection is conform to
Deflectometer
specified value (if applicable)

C = Conformed NC = Non Conformed

CONTROLLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C.

EMPLOYER

Version: 01 1/1
Form 5 - Surface water drainage works

Projet name :

Road section designation :


Status "For
Execution drawings Issuer Document reference
Construction"

Méthods of Result of Acceptance


Control points C NC Observation
inspection control criteria
Implementation of ditches for water drainage
Check that the ditches are
properly implemented
according to drawings

Check depth of ditche is


conform to drawing

Check width of ditche is


conform to drawings
Check slope of ditche
longitudinal profile is
conform to drawings
Implementation of underground pipes
Check the pipe diameter is
correct
Check the pipe is laid on a
sand bed with minimum 10
cm thickness

Check depth of laying the


pipe is according to drawing

Check slope of pipe is


conform to drawings

Check size of the backfill


material above the pipes
meets the specified
requirements

Version: 01 1/2
Installation of drains pipes
Check drains pipes are
conform to standard
Check de diameter of the
drain pipe is conform to
specified requirements
Check depth of laying the
drain pipe is according to
drawing

Check slope of drain pipe is


conform to drawings

Check the size of the backfill


material above the pipes
meets the specified
requirements
Check size of the drainage
material or aggregate is
conform to specified
requirements
Check the outfalls for
drained water are
implemented and are
functional

C = Conforme NC = Non Coforme

CONTROLLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C.

EMPLOYER

Version: 01 2/2
Form 11 - Execution mounting platforms earthworks

Project name :

Platform designation :
Status "For
Execution drawings Issuer Document reference
Construction"

Result of Acceptance
Control points Méthods of inspection C NC Observation
control criteria
Check means provided by H.A.C to execute the works

Check manpower and equipments Visual inspection


used comply with H.A.C's QA Plan Examination of data
and Procedures sheets

Check the road layout is conform to the project specifications

Check reference points


Visual inspection
(benchmarks) are available on site
Topographic control
for the general layout of works

Check the road layout conforms to Visual inspection


the execution plan Topographic survey

Check the geotechnical forecasts

Check the last levelling course of


Visual inspection
earthworks conforms to
geotechnical forecasts

Plate test ou
Check bearing strength of the
Dynamic plate
levelling course of earthworks
complies with project specifications
Deflectometer

Version: 01 1/2
Check geometric characteristics of road are compliant with specified requirements
Check the slope of cutting (or
Measurement
embankment) is conform to
Topographic survey
execution drawings
Check the dimensions (Width,
Length) is conform to execution
drawings

- Check transverse/longitudinal
Visual inspection
slope are conform to execution
Topographic survey
drawing

Check the top level of erathworks Visual inspection


is conform to execution drawing Topographic survey

Check the levelling of top level of


Visual inspection
earthworks is within specified
Topographic survey
tolerance

Drainage requirements during earthworks

Check drainage system is well


implemented (where drainage is Visual inspection
required for earthworks)

C = Conforme NC = Non Coforme

CONTROLLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C.

EMPLOYER

Version: 01 2/2
Form 11 - Execution of Platform Layers : Subgrade Layer /Structure Layer / Finishing Layer

Project name :

Platform designation :

Layer designation :

Subgrade Structure layer (Base, Fondation) Finishing layer

Status "For
Execution Drawings Issuer Document reference
Construction"

Result of Acceptance
Control points Methods of inspection C NC Observation
control criteria

Check conformity of raw materials

Check the maximum size Dmax


of materials is conform to Sieve analysis
specified value
Check the resistance to
fragmentation of granular LA test
materials
Check the resistance to wear of
Micro Deval test
granular materials
Check resistance of materials
Appropriate test
to frost

Check water content of


Measurement of
materials is conform to
water content
specified requirement

Check the materials are not


VBS Test
sensitive to water

Check (ρdOPN, WOPN ) Proctor Test

Check CBR index is within


CBR Test
required limit

Check means provided by H.A.C to execute the works

Check manpower and


Visual inspection
equipment used comply with
Examination of data
H.A.C's QA Plan and
sheets
Procedures

Version: 01 1/2
Check conformity of materials for stabilization (where stabilization is required)

Check the binder is conform to Data sheet of


standard and specified Fabricant
requirements Lime reactivity Test

Check the water content of the


Measurement of
material to be stabilized is
water content
within the specified limit
Check the dosage of binder in
Weighing
within specified tolerance

Check the mixing of materials


(grinding degree, thickness of Visual inspection
the treated layer)

Check the compaction of elementary layer


Check that the compaction
methodology is conform to with Q/S method
standards (GTR)

Gamma density meter


(if material size D≤ 20
Check that the density of each à 31,5mm)
compacted layer is conform to
compaction requirement Densitometer
(materials with bigger
size)

Check the thickness of


compacted layers is conform to
specified value and the that the Penetrometer
compaction is homogeneous for
all layers

Check the ratio EV2/EV1 is


Static plate bearing test
inferior to specified value

Check the bearing strength of the layer


Check that the measured
Static plate bearing
modulus EV2 is conform to
test
specified value
Check that the measured Deflectometer
deflection is conform to Benckelmann beam
specified value (if applicable) test

C = Conform NC = Non Conform

CONTROLLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C.

EMPLOYER

Version: 01 2/2
Form 12 - Control for Acceptance of Road Works

Project name :
Platform Designation :

Ref. Documents Source Reference / Revision Status

Result of Acceptance
Control points Methods of inspection C NC Observation
control criteria
Check the geometrical characteristics are conform to execution drawings
Check that the levelling of the Visual inspection
road surface is within specified Topographic survey
tolerances
Check that platform
dimensions (length, width) are Measurement
conform to drawings
Check that the altimetry of
platform surface is conform to Topographic survey
specified level

Check that the slopes of


platform surface are conform to Topographic survey
specified values

Check compaction of road is conform to specified requirements

Gamma density meter


Check the measured density (if material size D≤ 20
of compacted layers is conform à 31,5mm)
to compaction requirements
Penetrometer

Check the ratio EV2/EV1 is


conform to compaction Static plate bearing test
requirements
Check bearing strength of road is conform to specified requirements

Check that the measured


modulus EV2 is conform to Static plate bearing test
specified value
Check that the measured
Measurement with
deflection is conform to
Deflectometer
specified value (if applicable)

C = Conformed NC = Non Conformed

CONTROLLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C.

EMPLOYER

Version: 01 1/1
HAC_QC_CIV_ITP-008
INSPECTION PLAN FOR PILES AND SHALOW FOUNDATIONS OF PV
STRUCTURES

Version Modifications Date Author Checker Approval

Nom Projet / Project Name


(1x30 + 1x20) MW AC PV Power Plants,
Guinea Bissau
Proj. Code Type Disc. SER.
- - ITP - CIV 008
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION
INPECTION SCHEME
Form 101 - Piles foundation documents evaluation and approvals
Form 102 - Piles erection inspection

Form 201 - Concrete foundations documents evalution and approvals


Form 202 - Concrete foundation earthworks inspection
Form 203 - Reinforcements installation inspection (Hold point)
Form 204 - Earthing inspection (Hold point)
Form 205 - Formworks installation inpection
Form 206 - Concrete pouring inspection
Form 207 - Completed works inspection

Version 00
1. SCOPE

This framework of quality inspection plan gives the minimum requirements for PV Structure
Foundation . The scope includes but not limited to, the following:
- Documentation
- Piles installation work
- Concrete foundation work

The minimum requirements specified in this documents must be taken into account by the Contractor
when elaborating his Quality Assurance and Quality Control Plan (QA/QC Plan).

In any case, Employer's minimum requirements do not replace the obligations of self controls under
the responsibility of H.A. CONSTRUCTION as part of its activities.

All works shall be subjected to control under the responsibility of H.A.C and the surveillance of the
Employer representative or any other Third party assigned by H.A.C / EMPLOYER.

2. REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DOCUMENTS


The reference standards and documents applicable for this inspection plan are given in Employer's
requirements. Where required, relevant local or national Standards should be applied.

3. INSPECTION PLAN

3. 1. Inspection scheme
The inspection scheme describes for each activity concerned by the quality control:
- the subject of control
- the purpose of control
- the witness point and Hold point
- the responsive of controls

Hold Point (H) : is a mandatory verification point beyond which a work cannot proceed without
approval by the Employer Representative or a Third party inspection body. The work cannot
proceed until the Employer Representative or a Third party inspection body is able to verify the
quality of the completed work and releases the Hold by means of Inspection Request approval.

Version 00
Witness Point (W) : is an identified point in the process where the Employer representative or
third party inspection body may review, witness, inspect method or process of work. The
activities however may proceed.

3.2. Control forms


Control forms are provided as standard template and could be used by H.A.C as a base to elaborate
his inspection Checklists

All the inspection Checklists must be co-signed by H.A.C and the EMPLOYER's Rep. in charge of
the work.

Version 00
Form 101 - Piles foundation documents evaluation and approvals

Project name :

Approval
Issuer (name revision of Approval
Object of control ref. of document Owner's Comments
of the body) document Third party
Engineer

Check documents of conformity of materials

Certificate of conformity of pile


protection product

Certificate of conformity of pile


steel

Check Design and Execution documents


Quality assurance plan for
piling works

Piles calculation notes

Piles layout drawings

Piles execution drawing

Procedures of execution of
piles

Quality control plan of piles

Trial piles tests report (pull-out


test and tensile test)

CONTROLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C

EMPLOYER

Version 00
Form 102 - Inspection of piles

Project name :

Foundation row n°:

Execution drawings Issuer (name of body) reference / revision Status

Method of Result of Acceptance


Control points C NC Observations
inspection inpection critera
Check piles layout is conform to drawings (Hold Point)

verify coordinate (x,y) of pile center


is correct

verify the distance from center to


center of piles is correct

Check compliance of constructed piles with project specification and relevant standards (Hold Point)
verify pile vertical deviation
(direction North-South) is within
specified tolerance
verify pile vertical deviation (in
direction East-West) is within
specified tolerance

verify pile horizontal deviation in


within specified tolerance

verify pile height is within specified


tolerance

check pile head is correct


(flatness, damages, etc)

verify pile plan location (direction


East-West) is within specified
tolerance

verify pile rotational twist is within


specified tolerance

CONTROLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C

EMPLOYER

Version 00
Form 201 - Concrete foundations documents evalution and approvals

Project name :

Approval
Issuer (name revision of Approval
Object of control ref. of document Owner's Comments
of the body) document Third party
Engineer
Check documents of conformity of materials
Quality Assurance Plan of
concrete plant

Certificate of conformity of
concrete mix components
(Cement, sand, crushed
stone, water, additives)

Concrete suitability test

Certificate of conformity of
concrete plant with
standards (if applicable)
Certificate of conformity of
steel reinforcements with
standards
Check Design and Execution documents
Calculation notes of
concrete foundation
Layout and formworks
drawings of foundation

Reinforcement drawings of
foundation

Quality Assurance Plan of


H.A.C

Procedures of execution of
works

Concrete works inspection


and test plan

CONTROLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C

EMPLOYER

Version 00
Form 202 - Concrete foundation earthworks inspection

Project name :

Foundation row n°:

Execution drawings Issuer (name of body) reference / revision Status

Method of Result of Acceptance


Control points C NC Observations
inspection inpection critera
Check layout of concrete foundations

verify coordinate (x,y) of foundation


center is correct

verify the distance from center to


center of foundation is correct

Check compliance of bottom of excavation with the geotechnical forecasts

visual inspection of the type of


soil in place

verify absence of water inside the


excavation

Check the geometry of the excavation

verify depth of excavation is


conform to formworks drawing

verify the dimensions of excavation


is conform to formworks drawing

Check the blinding concrete

verify the concrete delivered is


conform to the order
verify the quantity of poured
concrete is conform to specified
volume

CONTROLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C

EMPLOYER

Version 00
Form 203 - Reinforcements installation inspection (Hold point)

Project name :

Foundation row n°:

Execution drawings Issuer (name of body) reference / revision Status

Method of Result of Acceptance


Control points C NC Observations
inspection inpection critera

Check delivery of reinforcements is


conform to order

Check implementation of
reinforcement is conform to
drawings
- layout of bars
- length of bars
- diameter of bars
- number of bars
- spacement of bars
- overlaping of bars
- anchorage of bars

Check the minimum concrete cover


is conform to drawing

Check stiffness of whole assembly


of reinforcements to prevent any
movement during concrete pouring

CONTROLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C

EMPLOYER

Version 00
Form 204 - Earthing inspection (Hold point)

Project name :

Foundation row n°:

Execution drawings Issuer (name of body) reference / revision Status

Method of Result of Acceptance


Control points C NC Observations
inspection inpection critera

verify the section of bare copper is


conform to drawing
verify the number of connectors is
conform to drawing
verify the number of earthing loops
is conform to drawing
verify the correctness of the whole
earthing system

CONTROLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C

EMPLOYER

Version 00
Form 205 - Formworks installation inpection

Project name :

Foundation row n°:

Execution drawings Issuer (name of body) reference / revision Status

Method of Result of Acceptance


Control points C NC Observations
inspection inpection critera

Check the dimensions of formworks


are conform to drawing

Check stability and stiffness of


formworks

Check the joints of formworks are


correctly sealed

Check the surface of formworks are


clean

CONTROLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C

EMPLOYER

Version 00
Form 206 : Concrete pouring inspection

Project name :

Row n°:

Execution drawings Issuer (name of body) reference / revision Status

Method of Result of Acceptance


Control points C NC Observations
inspection inpection critera

Check weather conditions are favorable to concrete pouring

verify the outdoor temperature


is within the prescribed limit

Check delivery of concrete is conform to the order

verify concrete strength class


is conform to specified class

verify the temperature of fresh


concrete is within specified Measurement
limits

verify air content in the fresh


concrete is within specified Air test
value (if required)
verify consistancy of the fresh
concrete is conform to Slump test
specified requirements
verify samples for concrete
compressive tests are taken
according to project
specifications

Check the pouring process is compliant with H.A.C's Quality Assurance Plan

Verify the means used are


compliant with execution
procedure (equipments,
manpower, …)

Check that the fersh concrete


is vibrated correctly

verify the protection against


dry-out from concrete surface
is implemented correctly

CONTROLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C

EMPLOYER

Version 00
Form 207 - Completed works inspection

Project name :

Row n°:

Execution drawings Issuer (name of body) reference / revision Status

Method of Result of Acceptance


Control points C NC Observations
inspection inpection critera

Check geometry of the finished foundation

verify the height of the foundation


is within specified tolerance

verify flatness of top surface of


foundation is within specified
tolerance
Check absence of cracks on
concrete surface

Check concrete compressive strengh tests results are conform to standards

verify compressive strength at 7


days is conform to required value

verify compressive strength at 28


days is conform to required value

Check the foundation is correctly


backfilled

CONTROLER NAME DATE SIGNATURE

H.A.C

EMPLOYER

Version 00
2018
(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants,
Guinea Bissau
Project Quality Management
SIGNATURE

For Tender

PREPARED APPROVED
DATE REV. REVISION DETAILS CHECKED BY
BY BY

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 1 of 18


Contents

1. General .................................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Introduction: ............................................................................................................. 4
1.2 Purpose: ................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 References: .............................................................................................................. 4
1.4 Associated Procedures .............................................................................................. 4
1.5 Project Description and Scope of Work ....................................................................... 4
1.6 Definitions: ............................................................................................................... 4
1.7 Quality policy............................................................................................................. 5
1.7.1 Specific Solar PV Construction Issues ......................................................................... 5
1.7.1.1 Civil .................................................................................................................. 5
1.7.1.2 Mechanical ....................................................................................................... 5
1.7.1.3 Electrical .......................................................................................................... 6
1.7.1.4 Grid Connection ................................................................................................ 6
1.7.1.5 Logistical .......................................................................................................... 6
1.8 Quality Objectives ...................................................................................................... 7
1.9 Responsibilities of Key Persons on Site ...................................................................... 8
2. Project Quality Control System ..................................................................................................15
2.1. General ...................................................................................................................15
2.2. Document and Data Control ......................................................................................16
2.3. Purchasing...............................................................................................................16
2.4. Inspection and Testing..............................................................................................16
2.5. Control of Non-Conforming Products ..........................................................................17
2.6. Material Control .......................................................................................................17
2.7. Control of Quality Records.........................................................................................17
2.8. Internal Quality Audits...............................................................................................17
2.9. Reporting .................................................................................................................18

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 2 of 18


1. GENERAL

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 3 of 18


1. General
1.1 Introduction:
This Quality Plan describes the quality objectives the EMPLOYER has stated for this development and
the mechanisms to apply and ensure that these quality objectives are achieved.

It defines not only the process to assure the expected quality level, but also what should be done and
who should be responsible to control and track the pertinent corrections.

Even though the Plan states the main goals and some mechanisms to assure the quality, Consultants,
Suppliers and Contractors should exert the quality control according to their own policies, but
following this Plan and ensuring its achievement successfully, as a minimum, the quality goals the
client has stated.

The Quality Control Program is divided into narrative and associated Procedures

1.2 Purpose:
The Purpose of this document is to ensure that the requirements of the Control in relation to the
Quality Control are met and that the Contractor Quality Control System is planned, documented,
understood and implemented by project personnel.

1.3 References:
• Project Technical Specification
• EPC Term Sheet: “Quality Assurance, Inspection Commissioning and Commissioning Testing”
• ISO 9001:2015

1.4 Associated Procedures


1.4.1 Quality Management Procedure for Inspection and Testing (QMP-245-001).
1.4.2 Quality Management Procedure for Document and Data Control (QMP-245-002)
1.4.3 Quality Management Procedure for Material Control (QMP-245-003)
1.4.4 Quality Management Procedures for Control of Non-Conforming Products (QMP-245-004)
1.4.5 Quality Management Procedures for Quality Audit (QMP-245-005).

1.5 Project Description and Scope of Work


The 30 MW Solar power plant with 17 km transmission line is located in Bula 20 km from the capital
Bissau

The 20 MW Solar power plant with 500 meter transmission line is located in Mafanco 157 km
from the capital Bissau

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 4 of 18


1.6 Definitions:
: H. A. CONSTRUCTION (H.A.C)
CONTRACTOR
: Quality Management System
QMS
: Project Quality Plan
PQP
: Quality Management Procedure
QMP
ITP : Inspection & Test Plan- A document which defines or identifies in a
tabulated form the inspection, test method(s) , procedures, control forms
and acceptance criteria to be utilized during procurement , and
construction

1.7 Quality policy


1.7.1 Specific Solar PV Construction Issues
• From previous experience, we found out that the following common pitfalls that can occur
during the construction phase of a solar PV project. Most of these pitfalls can be avoided by
appropriate design, monitoring, quality control and testing on site.
1.7.1.1 Civil
• The civil works relating to the construction of a solar PV plant are relatively straightforward.
However, there can be serious and expensive consequences if the foundations and road
networks are not adequately designed for the site. The main risks lie with the ground
conditions. Importantly, ground surveys lacking in meticulous detailing or proper
interpretation could lead to risks such as unsuitable foundations.
• Used land also poses a risk during the civil engineering works. Due to the nature of digging
or pile driving for foundations, it is important to be aware of hazardous obstacles or
substances below the surface. This is especially important in former industrial sites or
military bases.
1.7.1.2 Mechanical
• The mechanical construction phase usually involves the installation and assembly of
mounting structures on the site.
• Some simple mistakes can turn out to be costly, especially if these include:
• Incorrect use of torque wrenches.
• Cross bracing not applied.
• Incorrect orientation.
• If a tracking system is being used for the mounting structure, other risks include:
• Lack of clearance for rotation of modules.

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 5 of 18


• Actuator being incorrectly installed (or as specified), resulting in the modules
moving or vibrating instead of locking effectively in the desired position.
• These mistakes are likely to result in remedial work being required before hand-over and
involve extra cost.
1.7.1.3 Electrical
• Cables should be installed in line with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Installation
should be done with care as damage can occur when pulling the cable into position. The
correct pulling tensions and bending radii should be adhered to by the installation contractor
to prevent damage to the cable. Similarly, cables attached to the mounting structure require
the correct protection, attachment and strain relief to make sure that they are not damaged.
• Underground cables should be buried at a suitable depth (generally between 500mm and
1,245mm) with warning tape or tiles placed above and marking posts at suitable intervals on
the surface. Cables may either be buried directly or in ducts. If cables are buried directly,
they should be enveloped in a layer of sand or sifted soil should be included to avoid damage
by backfill material.
• Comprehensive tests should be undertaken prior to energization to verify that there has
been no damage to the cables.
1.7.1.4 Grid Connection
• A third party over whom the project developer will have limited control will generally carry out
the grid connection. Close communication with the grid connection contractor is essential to
ensure that the grid requirements are met. Delay in the completion of the grid connection will
affect the energization date, which will delay the start of commercial operation.
1.7.1.5 Logistical
• Logistical issues can arise if designs or schedules have not been well thought through.
Issues that may arise include:
• Lack of adequate clearance
between rows of modules for
access.
• Constrained access due to
inclement weather conditions.
• For larger tracking systems and
central inverters, cranes may be
required.
Therefore, suitable access and maneuverability
room within the site is essential
(see Figure right).

Spacing between Module Rows

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 6 of 18


H.A.C’s leading position in the world of civil/solar construction is solidly based on a corporate policy
which considers customer specification its first and foremost objective.
• In practice, this means top quality performance, reliable on schedule deliveries, prices to
give the best possible cost performance ratio. In addition, a comprehensive range of
specialized services geared to maximize the customer’s use of our products.
• Top-quality products and services require advanced processes and the expertise and skill to
master and exploit their potential. Which is why a major share of our work is devoted to the
continuous improvement of our procedures. The internal standards of our control regime
provide for product properties, which exceed the specified requirements.
• The responsibility for our Company policy rests with the management. This includes the
definition of quality targets for the continuous improvement of our products and services.
Every employee contributes towards the realization of these targets.
• H.A.C is aware that customer satisfaction can only be achieved with dedicated contented
staffs, who take active pride in what they do. Therefore, H.A.C places great importance on
the preservation of jobs as well as the continuous improvement of occupational safety. A
comprehensive scheme of tailored training courses offers every employee the opportunity to
acquire the necessary know how and safety procedures for his / her specific job.
• H.A.C’s strong commitment to the environment is reflected in its sparing use of resources, an
approach that H.A.C also expects from its suppliers and subcontractors.
• For this purpose, H.A.C have assigned the following functions to a work-independent Quality
Department:
- Maintenance, updating and continuous improvement of the Quality Management system.
- Auditing of Head Office and projects
- Evaluation of the quality Management System in coordination with H.A.C management.
• To implement this policy, the management is responsible for taking the required measures
and for introducing, maintaining and continuously improving the Quality Management
system.

1.8 Quality Objectives


• To make clear the limits of responsibilities of project staff and reporting hierarchy.
• To establish a system for flow of information to all engaged departments.
• To control the delivered materials and executed works to be conformant to the project specs.
• To provide an organized work environment leads to higher productivity.
• To provide continual improvement to the process by training sessions, tool Box Talks, etc.
• To establish a measuring system for performance and objectives to be measurable as:

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 7 of 18


I. Radiograph Testing (RT) Statistics shall not exceed 5%
II. Welder Performance: Repair percentage for the welder shall not exceed 5%
In case the above ratios exceeded 5%, the welder to be trained and prequalified.
III. Piping Punch Points: shall not exceed 50 point.
IV. Requests for Inspection: Percentage of rejection for request of inspection (RFI’s) shall not
exceed 5%
V. Soil Compaction Tests: Rejection ratio shall not exceed 3%
VI. Concrete Compressive Tests: Failed to successful Tests ratio shall not exceed 3%
VII. Closure of open NCR’s shall be within 15 days of opening date.

1.9 Responsibilities of Key Persons on Site


Each Manager, Supervisor or Superintendent, is responsible of the correct management of his
own area of competence within the limits of authority and responsibilities established in this
Quality Plan and in the applicable procedures. Each Manager, Supervisor or Superintendent may
delegate the performance of any of his tasks to those who report directly to him; however, the
relevant responsibility cannot be delegated.

Each Manager, Supervisor or Superintendent, provided he is qualified, may perform the tasks and
assume the responsibility of those who report directly to him.

Project Manager (PM)


Reports to H.A.C Operations Director and is responsible for the following:
• Executing the project on time, within the approved budget and in accordance with the
contract specifications.
• Direct and manage project development in all execution stages.
• Planning, monitoring achieving construction activities to fulfill project looks (time, budget,
Specs.)
• Ensuring that the quality of materials and the installation of works are in accordance with the
criteria identified for the project.
• Receiving of all relevant information regarding design, drawings and Engineering.
• Reviewing with the Construction Manager and the Planning Engineer the detailed programs
for the execution of the project and ensure that the program is adhered to.
• Implement all aspects of the project Quality Management System.
• Ensuring that suitably qualified personnel required for the project are mobilized in a timely
manner, as required.
• Implement all HSE aspects related to the project.
• Reviewing the manpower requirements for the project.
• Ensure proper material planning, allowing for sufficient time for approval and processing of
Requisitions.
• Attending meetings with the client, consultant and Sub-contractors.

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 8 of 18


• Issuing instructions to the sub-contractors advising them of available work areas and
reviewing their progress of work.
• Identifying and taking the necessary corrective action to improve the progress and / or
quality of works.
• Handling of project petty cash, matters related to invoices, payments.
• Responsible for cost/time impacts and claims.
• Send / Receive and action project correspondence.
• Staff training and appraisal.

Construction Manager (CM)


Reports to the Project Manager and is responsible for the following:
• Complying with all H.A.C policies, quality procedures, statutory regulations and project
specifications.
• Ensuring that the quality of material and installation of work is in accordance with the
acceptance criteria identified for the project.
• Ensuring that the works is completed in accordance with the specified Project Quality and
Health, Safety & Environment Plans.
• Issuing instructions to the Site Engineers to complete the work in accordance with Project
Planning and Schedules and allocating resources.
• Monitoring all Sub-contractors work closely to ensure that the Quality of the work is as per
specification and is completed on the contracted time.
• Review of short-term planning and advising the project Manager on any problems.
• Material and equipment management.
• Monitoring and compiling relevant information on production rates.
• Identification of scaffolding excesses / shortages for all projects and subsequent purchase
/hire/buy back of scaffolding if required.
• Allocation of manpower to various projects & their re-allocation /shifting to other projects in
consultation with the concerned Projects Manager(s) and the Projects’ Co-coordinator.
• Monitoring productivity of laborers at various Project sites and working out remedial
measures (if required) in conjunction with Operations Manager& Project Manager to improve
productivity.

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 9 of 18


Technical Manager (TM)
Reports to the Project Manager and is responsible for the following:
• Replace the project director on all his duties on his absence.
• Ensure the receipt of all drawings and documents from the Consultant.
• Ensuring the technical documentation is properly produced, reviewed, controlled and
submitted in accordance with the project specified requirements.
• Ensuring, that the Owner’s requirements are fully and correctly understood, and are
effectively communicated to the project team.
• Ensuring that technical targets required by the client are attained.
• Maintaining detailed records of technical developments and variations.
• Organizing meetings with the EMPLOYER /consultant’s staff as necessary, in order to
interpret technical contract requirements or variations to those requirements correctly.
• Ensuring that construction program allows reasonable time for the completion of design and
approval of procedures. To progress design changes required by the project management
and the client to take advantages of more economical construction methods and alternative
suppliers.
• The co-ordination of all material and drawing submittals and related documentation.
• The co-ordination of preparation of As Built Drawings and O&M Manuals.
• Cost/time impacts and claims.
• Costing of variations to the design.
• Evaluating Sub-contract variations.
• Contractual correspondence in conjunction with the Project Manager.
• Handle contractual claim issues relating to client payment demands up to final account.
• Review of all sub-contractor claims issues and payment related thereto on an ongoing basis
and at the final account.
• Review future revisions to contract documents on an ongoing basis, to ensure claim issues
are identified and actioned.
• Review the initial Tender/contract comparison efforts by the tender cell and ensure claims
are raised where necessary.

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 10 of 18


QC Department
Reports functionally to H.A.C Quality Director in coordination with the project Manager, and is
responsible for the following:
• Responsible for all aspects of the project related to quality control, and the overall
implementation of the Quality Management System at site.
• Preparation of the Project Specific Quality Plan, Quality Control Procedures, Inspection & Test
Plans, Quality Control Checklists.
• Controlling all inspection activities at site — receiving (for permanent works items), in
process, final and off-site inspection activities.
• Completion of necessary documentation to verify the works performed.
• Ensuring that inspection requests are implemented and relevant logs maintained.
• Ensuring that all test reports are verified to meet the contract requirements.
• Issue of Non Conformance Reports (NCR’s) and the necessary follow-up for Corrective
actions & preventive Actions.
• Responsible for overseeing/ audits of Subcontractor Quality Management systems.
• Reviewing the method statement prepared by construction department.
• Raise suggestions for improving QMS.
• Initiate, implement, review and monitor Quality Objectives related to area of work.
• Certify welders’ qualification tests, according to WPS issued by Head Office.
• Performing all inspection required as provided by the project ITP on daily basis.
• Check that the latest approved engineering documents are utilized and followed during
construction
• Review the readiness of the IR’s submitted by the Construction Dept.
• Liaison with the consultant for daily inspection and release of works
• Assure that the necessary re-tests are made in event of failure of H.A.C to meet specification
requirements.
• Be present on the job site at all times when inspection works are being performed.
• Issue the NCR’s in case of non-conformant finished works and follows it up until its closure.
• Perform surveillance to works under construction to prevent potential defected works
• Have the authority to stop non-conforming works on reasonable reasons.
• Have no authority to change or deviate from the contract Specifications/Drawings.

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 11 of 18


Health, Safety and Environment Department
Reports functionally to H.A.C HSE Manager in coordination with the project Manager, and is
responsible for the following
• Implementation of the safety inductions, and training for all the safety personnel, project
team and workers
• Prevention of on-site accidents by monitoring the workers awareness and safety directions
• Ensuring the validity of the fire extinguishers and the firefighting systems (if available)
• Ensuring that the PPE are available
• Ensuring that the First Aid tools are available
• Registering any accident in an Incident Report form clarifying the reasons and the proper
methods for prevention

Site Engineer
Reports to the Construction Manager and is responsible for the following:
The Site Engineer supervises the activities of the Supervisors, Foremen and crew leaders and is
responsible for:
• Ensure that all information on drawings is conveyed to his subordinates in a proper manner
and details produced where required.
• Achieve the quality of work required by the specifications by proper supervision of work.
• As each activity is completed, mark up the ‘For Construction’ drawing with comments
relevant
• Preparation of the Method statements.
• Preparation of the Inspection Requests (IR’s) and submit it to the QC Dept.
• Ensure review to the ‘red-line’ drawings by H.A.C QC Engineer.
• Full awareness and implementation of project ITP’s.
• Awareness and effective handling of Client Complaints (internal and external).
• Review and action as required on internal audit reports.
• Verify and ensure measuring and monitoring equipment are calibrated and well maintained.
• Co-ordinate with the QC staff to carry out inspections.
• Awareness and related actions in case of incidents/Accidents and Near Miss.
• Prepare day work details, data related to subcontractor payment and preparation of client
payment valuation details.

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 12 of 18


• Effective and regular planning of work in line with the Baseline/Target programs. Plan and
execute the work to achieve the targets progress. Ensure that the materials, personnel and
plant are available on time for the execution of the work.
• Timely preparation of requisition for the materials required at site.

Planning Engineer
Reports to the technical manager and is responsible for the following:
• The assigned planning Engineer for a project will be responsible for:
• Preparing the Project Master Plan (PMP)
• Updating and reviewing of the PMP
• Identifying areas of concern /delays
• Preparing monthly cash flow
• Initiating Procurement schedule
• Initiating Engineering schedules
• Preparing bi-weekly/ monthly progress reports submitted to the EMPLOYER.
• Preparing manpower/ equipment requirements over the project's duration.
• Co-ordinate with site Engineers, procurement Engineer, cost control Engineer and quantity
surveyor in order to obtain a sound and a workable schedule.
• Attending weekly site meetings with client, main contractor and project construction
management.

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 13 of 18


2. Project Quality Control System

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 14 of 18


2. Project Quality Control System
2.1. General
The project quality Control System is implemented through two sets governing documents
• The project, specifications, procedures, etc.
• The project’s quality documents
The contractor’s quality documents (listed below) provide a system of quality assurance and
quality control to a level consistent with the requirements noted above.

Level 1 This Project Quality Plan (PQP) and Project Quality Management Procedures
(QMP’s) which specify the Management activities, responsibilities, quality
standards and provide instructions necessary to meet the specified quality
requirements of the Contract. (Prepared by Quality Department)

Level 2 Construction quality control documentation such as and Inspection & Test
Plans (ITP’s) which specify activities, responsibilities, specifications /
standards and instructions necessary to meet the detailed specified quality
requirements of the Contract. (Prepared by Quality Department)

Level 3 Construction Method Statements, which specify activities, responsibilities and


instructions to perform critical construction activities in accordance with the
requirements of the contract. (Prepared by Construction
Department/Technical office and reviewed by Quality department)

1. Revisions to Quality Management Procedures are originated by the department


manager concerned, reviewed by the QA/QC Manager and approved by the Project
Manager.

2. The project quality philosophy and system of CONTRACTOR embraces the activities of
its suppliers and subcontractors who are required to conform either to their own existing
quality control system or to defined CONTRACTOR procedures to ensure compliance to
project specifications. Where there is a difference between their own and the
CONTRACTOR procedure the latter shall rule.

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 15 of 18


2.2. Document and Data Control
2.2.1. The Project shall nominate a staff member to be responsible for document and
data control.
2.2.2. All documents coming as defined by this PQP shall be issued on controlled
distribution.
2.2.3. All controlled documents shall be coded and have the revision status marked
on them.
2.2.4. A distribution matrix shall be issued and maintained covering all addressees
and types of controlled documents.
2.2.5. Copies of superseded documents shall be destroyed. Superseded masters
shall be marked Superseded” and archived separately.
2.2.6. A database shall be maintained recording the revision status of all controlled
documents. Printouts of the database shall be issued regularly to heads
department unless they have read-only access to the database.
2.2.7. Project procedure QMP-245-002 also applies.

2.3. Purchasing
2.3.1. Quality Requirements shall be clearly specified in all purchase orders or sub-
contract agreements.
2.3.2. All purchase orders for permanent materials and quality related supplies such
as laboratory equipment, and sub-contract agreements shall be reviewed by
Project QC Manager.

2.4. Inspection and Testing


2.4.1. All works are to be inspected in accordance with an Inspection & Test Plan (ITP).
2.4.2. The ITP shall set out in matrix form the sequence of inspection steps, the
governing document (specification, standard, etc.), the standard to be
achieved, the persons witnessing and the supporting documents to be
produced. QCP’s shall be produced in addition to ITP’s if complexity or specific
inspection instructions so demand.
2.4.3. ITP’s and QCP’s shall be prepared before work starts.
2.4.4. Inspection and testing forms attached to the ITP’s shall be completed as work
proceeds and shall not be left until the end of the job. Signing off and
submission to the Consultant (as required) shall follow as soon as possible after
the work is completed. Prior to beginning of inspection of the works,
CONTRACTOR shall agree with all parties concerned the details and
coordination and notification of inspection, examination and testing activities.
(QMP-245-001) also applies.
2.4.5. All incoming products and materials are subject to receiving inspection as
detailed in (QMP-245-003). In-process and final inspection is addressed in the
project ITP’.

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 16 of 18


2.5. Control of Non-Conforming Products
2.5.1. The nonconformance system is under the responsibility of the project QC
Manager who carries out trend analysis of the nonconformance raised. The
Project QC Manager is responsible for implementing the non-conformance
system in accordance with (QMP-245-004)
2.5.2. Project QC Manager shall maintain a log of all non-conformances.

2.6. Material Control


2.6.1 Project specifications and instructions shall identify any special requirements.
Procedures for handling, storage, packaging and delivery shall be such as to
ensure they are suitable to prevent damage or deterioration.

2.6.2 Handling, Storage, Packaging, Preservation and Delivery is addressed and


controlled in accordance with QMP-245-003

2.7. Control of Quality Records


2.7.1 Project QC Manager is responsible for ensuring that all necessary documentation is
compiled to complete the handover data package.

2.7.2 Originals of Quality Records shall be maintained by the project quality Department who
shall be responsible for filing, indexing in a manner, which facilitates safekeeping and
easy retrieve.

2.7.3 Indexing system, format, number of copies, etc. of handover package and handover
procedure shall be reviewed and agreed with the Consultant at an early stage of the
Project.

2.7.4 Quality records shall normally be kept for a minimum of one year from date of final
handover of Project to the Consultant unless otherwise specified in the Contract. Hard
copies shall be stored in weatherproof room or container, fire protected and
environmentally controlled if necessary. Contents shall be indexed. Soft copies will be
stored, if required, on compact disks (CD) held in the respective Subcontractor Head
Office.

2.8. Internal Quality Audits


Internal Quality audits shall be carried out at Head Office in compliance with the Audit Plan
prepared by the QA Manager.
The QA Manager shall carry out internal quality audits at site on Site with a frequency of six
months.
The audits shall be informed in advance about the scope of audit and the scheduled date.

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 17 of 18


2.9. Reporting
Reporting procedures and formats shall be as per in accordance with the Contract
requirements as agreed with SCATEC SOLAR during mobilization.
The quality plans provided by H.A.C shall be approved by Scatec Solar prior to construction
start. The quality plan must comply at least with the requirements of this Project Quality Plan
and the annexed Quality Control Plan. For all sub-suppliers Scatec Solar remains free to issue
specific method statements regarding quality issues or perform quality audits. All quality
issues which arise during the project must be immediately addressed to Scatec Solar through
a non-conformance form. Quality issues are considered open points in the delivery.

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants, Guinea Bissau Page 18 of 18


EPC Contract for:
(1x30 + 1x20) MW AC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau

Quality Management Procedure


INSPECTION & TESTING

QMP-245-001
Rev. Date Revision Details
For Tender

Name Position Signature Date

Prepared By: QC Manager

Reviewed By: Sherif Kadry QA/QC Director

Approved By: Project Manager


INDEX

1. SCOPE

2. PURPOSE

3. REFERENCES

4. DEFINITIONS

5. RESPONSIBILITIES

6. PROCEDURE

7. ATTACHMENTS

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-001 Page 2 of 7


Inspection and Testing
1. SCOPE

This procedure applies to all H.A.C and its Supplier’s and Subcontractor’s scope as defined by
the Contract for (1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants in Guinea Bissau

2. PURPOSE

- To describe the inspection process and supporting documents.

- To ensure that the inspection and test status of all permanent materials and works are
controlled in accordance with the Project specification requirements and known at all
stages in the construction process, i.e. has item been inspected? Was it conforming?

3. REFERENCES

• PQP-245 Project Quality Plan


• QMP-245-002 Document and Data Control
• QMP-245-003 Material Control
• QMP-245-004 Control of Non-Conforming Product

4. DEFINITIONS

CONTRACTOR : H. A. CONSTRUCTION (H.A.C)

QMS : Quality Management System

PQP : Project Quality Plan

QCD : Quality Control Department

ITP : Inspection & Test Plan- A document which defines or identifies in a


tabulated form the inspection, test method(s) , procedures, control
forms and acceptance criteria to be utilized during procurement ,
and construction

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-001 Page 3 of 7


Inspection and Testing
5. RESPONSIBILITIES

5.1 The QC Manager is responsible for ensuring that the inspection system is set up in
accordance with the Contract requirements and for monitoring the system’s compliance
to these requirements. He is also responsible for training and updating this procedure
when required.

5.2 The QC Manager is responsible for managing the inspection program for reviewing and
approving Site generated revisions of ITP’s and QCP’s prior to start of work and for
approving ITP’s as completed and conforming after work is complete.

5.3 The respective Discipline QC Inspector is responsible for revising or updating ITP’s if
required, organizing inspections, informing the Client’s representatives of upcoming
inspections (as required), carrying out inspections as indicated in the ITP, and for
approving and signing off competed inspection forms.

5.4 QC Inspector is responsible for carrying out inspection as indicated on the ITP.

5.5 QC Document Clerk is responsible for maintain QC records and QC databases.

6. PROCEDURE

6.1 Preparation and Approval of ITP’s

6.1.1 The project QCD will obtain inspection requirements from specifications, drawings
and where applicable Method Statements to produce Inspection and Test Plans
(ITP’s).

6.1.2 ITP’s will list the quality related activities to be conducted, reference documents to
be used all characteristics to be briefed, acceptance criteria and the verifying
document on which to record the activity. It will further indicate the persons/ parties
to be present for witness/ percentage sampling etc.

6.1.3 ITPs are controlled documents (see QMP-245-002) and shall be coded as shown in
PQP-0XX. The draft document for submission to the Client shall be Revision 0.
Thereafter, revisions shall be numerical. The document shall be revised to the next
revision number whenever a change is made: this includes changes to any form
attached.

6.1.4 The ITP shall indicate the nature of inspection as follows:

S Surveillance: Define sampling basis if applicable (e.g. x% random once per time
interval).
W Witness- obligatory attendance but if no show work will proceed
H Hold mandatory Hold point – work shall not proceed until item is in
conformance or corrective action has been agreed.
R Document Review (applicable to Third Party Inspections)

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-001 Page 4 of 7


Inspection and Testing
6.1.5 ITP’s shall be issued by the H.A.C QC Director.

6.1.6 All ITP’s shall be sent to the discipline Construction Superintendents for review and
comment.

6.1.7 Subsequent revisions to ITP’s shall be prepared by the QC Director as necessary.

6.2 Use of ITP’s

6.2.1 Maintenance, updating of ITPs is the responsibility of the Discipline QC Manager.


The working copy of the ITP is held in the Site QC office by the QC Document Clerk.
The Discipline QC Inspector is responsible for ensuring the following actions on the
ITP:

a) All inspection/ tests are carried out and recorded on appropriate forms with all
relevant details.

b) All required personnel have signed and dated the verifying document attached
to the relevant ITP.

c) All supporting reports, documents, certificate, etc. are attached.

d) At the end of the job checking that a) to c) have been carried out and signed off
confirming the ITP as completed.

6.2.2 Twenty-four hours prior to each inspection or as otherwise agreed with the
Consultant, discipline QCM shall advise the Consultant’s representative in writing of
the upcoming inspection using Application for Inspection Form.

6.2.3 Inspections shall take place at the points defined on the ITP and shall be attended
and/or witnessed as indicated. Discipline QCE shall sign where indicated.

6.2.4 If the item is non- –conforming, a non-conformance report (NCR) shall be raised see
QCP-245-004.

6.2.5 When all inspections designated on the ITP have been completed and are in
conformance, and all H.A.C signature boxes on the Inspection Forms have been
signed the Discipline QCE pass it to the QC document clerk for filing.

6.3 Preparation and Approval of QCP’s

6.3.1 QCP’s – Quality Control Procedures-are prepared for the work packages within
each discipline, as required. QCP’s identify inspection and test requirements given
in the specifications and describe responsibilities, inspection and test procedure.
QCP’s are complementary to ITP’s and are issued as and when required as per the
H.A.C Quality Control System.

6.3.2 QCP’s are prepared, approved and issued as for ITP’s, see section 6.1.
QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-001 Page 5 of 7
Inspection and Testing
6.4 Inspection at Suppliers and Subcontractors

6.4.1 Inspection requirements are indicated to suppliers at requisition stage and


specified in Purchase Order or the Subcontract Agreement. Inspection will be
carried out according to an ITP in standard format prepared by the supplier or the
subcontractor. Witness points by H.A.C or Third Party Inspection will be indicated on
the ITP. Suppliers will submit the ITP to H.A.C for review and approval.

6.5 Independent Testing Laboratories

6.5.1 Testing Laboratory of concrete and earthworks will be delegated to an independent


testing laboratory to be approved by the Consultant.

6.5.2 The laboratory shall work to its own Quality Procedures concerning use,
maintenance and calibration of equipment in accordance with the Project
Specifications.

6.5.3 The test responsibilities shall be defined in the applicable ITP’s and QCP’s.

6.5.4 All test reports specified in the ITP and complied by the Laboratory shall be
transmitted to H.A.C

6.6 Inspection of Incoming Materials

6.6.1 Specific receiving procedure for incoming materials is given in QMP-0XX-003. Where
applicable receiving inspection requirements are detailed in the first item of the on
–site ITP for the work into which the product or material is to be incorporated. The
calibration status of inspection, measuring, and testing equipment shall be checked
upon received at Site. Status of which shall be recorded as per the attached form

6.7 Inspection and Test Records

6.7.1 Inspection Forms shall be filled in as the job proceeds. Entries and attachment of
reports shall not be left till later. Sign off and submission to Consultant shall follow
immediately after completion of each package of work.

6.7.2 The QC Document Clerk shall classify, store and maintain quality records while they
are current. Thereafter, they shall be handed over to Document Control Group for
storage as quality records.

6.7.3 An indexing system for quality records shall be developed and documents shall be
filed according to this system. Files shall be kept in a secure place, with controlled
access, protected from the environment and with fire protection. See QMP-0XX-002.

6.8 List of QCP’s and ITP’s

6.8.1 The QC Manager shall develop and maintain a list of QCP’s and ITP’s to be produced
for the Project, shall schedule their issue date and shall arrange for their
production.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-001 Page 6 of 7


Inspection and Testing
6.9 Inspection and Test Status

6.9.1 The inspection and test status of materials, fabrication items, and installations shall
be identified where necessary and practical to facilitate all personnel involved in the
installation / fabrication process.

6.9.2 The responsibility of the extent and type of identification markings lies with the
QCM. He will ensure that whichever approach is used is clearly explained to all
construction supervisors. Identification markings may include status indicators such
as color-coding, tags, and markings on the item with markers or paint, stamps etc.

6.9.3 Discipline QCE is responsible for ensuring that all permanent works have been
inspected, that inspection is recorded and that all non-conformances are closed out
before handover.

7. ATTACHMENTS

• Measuring and Testing Equipment List

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-001 Page 7 of 7


Inspection and Testing
(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau

MEASURING AND TESTING EQUIPMENT LIST


Serial No. Latest Next Calibration
Serial No. Description Make Model Certificate No. Owner Remarks Dept.
/ ID No. Calibration Date Due Date

1.1. CIVIL (Structures) Civil

1.2. CIVIL(Roads) Civil Str.

1.3.CIVIL( Batch Plant) SRMC

1.4.CIVIL(Site Laboratory) RGMR

1.5. CIVIL (Surveying) SURVEY

2. ELECTRICAL & INSTRUMENTATION E&I

3. MECHANICAL MECH.

Page 1 of 1
(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau

Quality Management Procedure


DOCUMENT AND DATA CONTROL

QMP-245-002
Rev. Date Revision Details

For Approval

Name Position Signature Date

Prepared By: QC Manager

Reviewed By: Sherif Kadry QA/QC Director

Approved By: Project Manager


INDEX

1. SCOPE

2. PURPOSE

3. REFERENCES

4. DEFINITIONS

5. RESPONSIBILITIES

6. PROCEDURE

7. INCOMING & OUTGOING CORRESPONDENCE & ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-002 Page 2 of 9


Document and Data Control Rev. 0
1. SCOPE

All project documents require controlled distribution. The procedure must include all documents
related to the engineering, procurement and construction, completion and maintenance of all
the components of (1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants in Guinea Bissau

2. PURPOSE

- To ensure that approved, valid and up to date copies of all necessary documents are
distributed to project staff concerned.

- To ensure that documents are securely filed and maintained, are easily retrievable and
can be readily compiled into the hand-over package and archives at the end of the
project.

3. REFERENCES

• PQP-245 Project Quality Plan.


• QMP-245-001 Inspection & Testing.
• QMP-245-003 Material Control.

4. DEFINITIONS

CONTRACTOR : H. A. CONSTRUCTION (H.A.C)


IFC : Issued For Construction
DCG : Document Control Group
Document : As used in this procedure, the word document means any instruction
in paper or electronic form, issued by H.A.C, the Project Manager
and/or the Engineer, Client, subcontractor or other, and containing
requirements or reports concerning the execution or performance of
the works.
All documents covered by this procedure are controlled.

5. RESPONSIBILITIES

5.1. Document Controller


Reports to the Technical Manager and is responsible for:

• Maintaining and updating this procedure

• Receipt, control, filing and issue of project documentation

• Supervising the establishment and maintenance of project central filing system.


• Establishment and control of the project reference library.

• Supervision and control of DCG printing facilities.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-002 Page 3 of 9


Document and Data Control Rev. 0
• Prepare DCG biweekly reports exhibiting the project documents list and status of
which.

5.2. Technical Office Manager


• Is responsible for overall control of technical documents and for deciding which
codes and standards need to be kept in the project reference library.

• Provides the DCG with the relevant contractual periods of replies by the CM for the
submitted documents by H.A.C in order to monitor the status of these documents
throughout the DCG Biweekly report.

6. PROCEDURE

6.1. Receipt and Registration


6.1.1 The project Manager shall decide and state in writing who receives incoming
documents

6.1.2 The receiver of incoming documents – if not DCG – shall immediately hand them
over to DCG.

6.1.3 If possible, DCG shall insist that documents from outside companies be sent
under transmittal note. This requirement shall be imposed on suppliers.
6.1.4 Receipt of transmittals will be acknowledged by the Document Controller.

6.1.5 The contents of the package received will be checked against the transmittal list
and any discrepancies to be reported with the acknowledgment.

6.1.6 The transmittal received with incoming documentation will be filed in an “Incoming
Transmittals” file, which will be divided into sections reflecting the originators of
the transmittals.

6.1.7 Upon receipt of documents from outside or from within H.A.C DCG shall:

• Stamp the document ‘SITE MASTER’ in red and enter the date.

• Enter it on the database register.

• Remove the previous revision that to be stamped “SUPERSEDED” and re-


filed in the superseded section.

• Make copies according to the distribution matrix.

• Stamp the copies “CONTROLLED COPY” in red.

• Prepare distribution under a transmittal.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-002 Page 4 of 9


Document and Data Control Rev. 0
6.1.8 A database register shall be set up and maintained by DCG. The following
information shall be recorded for incoming documents, both from outside and
from within H.A.C;

• Document number

• Document title

• Revision number

• Identification of sender

• Date received

• Status of document (i.e. whether for information, for review, IFC, etc.)

6.1.9 The Register will be issued weekly to project department’s managers to advise
them of the current revision status of documents that concern their work.
Managers are to advise DCG if any of the data is incorrect.

6.2. Distribution Matrix


6.2.1 The issue of controlled copies is controlled by a distribution matrix prepared by
DCG.

6.2.2 Document controller shall distribute the draft matrix for comment to all project
department heads.

6.2.3 The document controller, after agreement with all departmental heads on the
number of controlled copies required by each one of them, will distribute the
appropriate number of controlled copies to all the departmental managers
accordingly.

6.2.4 All controlled copies shall be numbered, and the number allocated to each
addressee shall be marked on the distribution matrix.

6.3. Issue and Distribution


6.3.1 There are four categories of document issue:

a) Documents generated within H.A.C and circulated for internal review. Normally this
is undertaken by the originator using an interdisciplinary check (IDC) system and is
not a DCG function.

b) Documents received by DCG from subcontractors / suppliers and issued for


internal review by H.A.C staff. This is controlled by DCG using the database
register or similar.

c) H.A.C or supplier / subcontractor documents requiring the owner / consultant


review. This is controlled by DCG using the database register or similar.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-002 Page 5 of 9


Document and Data Control Rev. 0
d) Issue of working copies of documents to project staff on controlled distribution.
See above DCG responsibility. Only IFC drawings shall be issued unless Document
Controller has instructions to do otherwise from Technical Manager.

6.3.2 Subsequent revisions of all controlled distribution documents shall be sent to the
same addresses as the previous revision.

6.3.3 All documents shall be issued under a transmittal and receipt acknowledgement

6.3.4 Upon receipt of controlled copies of documents, the recipient will: -

a) Check that the transmittal is complete and correct as listed on the transmittal and
refer all anomalies back to the DCG.

b) Return the transmittal signed.

c) Destroy copies of previous revision

6.3.5 DCG shall report to the Technical Manager for appropriate corrective action any
cases of recipient consistently or willfully failing to return the signed transmittal.

6.3.6 All requests for additional copies of controlled distribution documents must be
made in writing to DCG. Requests should be limited to exceptional circumstances
because of the difficulty of tracing and keeping up-to-date copies that are
additional to the distribution matrix.

6.3.7 Any print showing ‘CONTROLLED COPY’ in black is to be assumed as uncontrolled


and not valid.

6.4. Filing
6.4.1 Document Controller shall define and document a filing system to enable rapid
accessing of all documents under his responsibility.

6.4.2 Master documents shall be kept in the DCG office, shall be copied by DCG
personnel and shall not be removed from DCG.

6.4.3 Superseded copies of all documents will be stamped ‘SUPERSEDED’ in red and
filed separately.

6.4.4 One copy of each superseded revision of each document will be retained in the
DCG offices.

6.4.5 All cupboards, drawer's files, stick files, box files etc…, will be clearly marked to
show their contents.

6.4.6 Access to files shall be strictly controlled by DCG. Loan of master documents to
project staff is prohibited. Loan of any other document shall be limited to a strict
minimum and controlled by a sign-out register.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-002 Page 6 of 9


Document and Data Control Rev. 0
6.5. Coding and Numbering
6.5.1 The database register shall be used to allocate sequentially the code number of
all documents generated within H.A.C and originators shall contact DCG to obtain
the next sequential number.

6.5.2 Documents received from the CONTRACTOR or Subcontractor shall be registered


and filed according to the originators coding system.

6.5.3 The Technical Manager or Document Controller shall inform subcontractors about
coding requirements so that the documents they produce fit into the project
document control system without re-coding.

6.6. Copying and Reproducing Equipment


Document Controller is responsible for the good operation of all equipment in DCG
and for ensuring that maintenance schedules are drawn up and implemented for
each item of equipment.

6.7. Purchase Orders and Subcontracts


6.7.1 H.A.C purchase orders and subcontract agreements will be controlled by the
responsible project personnel.

6.7.2 Copies of vendor data books and certificates for material supplied by the
Project Manager / Engineer shall be kept by DCG.

6.7.3 The project shall specify at the outset which other purchasing / subcontract
documents – if any – will be kept by DCG.

6.8. Quality Records


Quality records generated by H.A.C its subcontractors / suppliers are the
responsibility of QC department up to time of hand-over to the CONSULTANT.

6.9. Codes and Standards


6.9.1 Technical Manager shall decide which codes and standards are to be obtained
and kept in the project reference library.

6.9.2 Document Controller is responsible for obtaining these codes and standards,
either directly from a supplier or via H.A.C Head Office

6.9.3 Details of all codes and standards held in the library will be entered on a database
list.

6.9.4 DCG are responsible for controlling loans of codes and standards to project staff
by a sign-out register or similar.

6.10. Storage and Security


6.10.1 DCG shall be under surveillance at all times during the normal working day and
kept locked outside working hours.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-002 Page 7 of 9


Document and Data Control Rev. 0
6.10.2 Unauthorized entry by non-DCG personnel into the DCG office area is prohibited. A
stable door or similar shall be provided to give messengers and other project staff
access to documents without having to go into the office area.

6.11. H.A.C Archiving


6.11.1 Before project completion, Technical Manager shall contact the H.A.C Head Office
to ascertain which documents are to be archived in each center and in what form
– e.g. hard, electronic. He shall also establish to where the Area Office wishes the
consignments to be sent.

6.11.2 Document Controller shall arrange for all necessary copying.

6.11.3 Documents shall be packed in robust and secured boxes clearly marked with
contract number and contents.

6.11.4 Perishable records such as radiographs should be stored in radiographic film


boxes and encased in waterproof storage chest.

6.11.5 Each box will be individually numbered consecutively, and an index compiled by
the Document Controller.

6.11.6 Document Controller will arrange for the documents to be shipped.

7. INCOMING & OUTGOING CORRESPONDENCE & ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS

7.1 Correspondence

7.1.1 All outgoing correspondence shall be addressed to the CONSULTANT

7.1.2 All correspondence must be, numbered as follows -00001 (first letter with
increasing sequence number for all following letters)

7.1.3 Correspondence may be transmitted by hard copy and/or facsimile. Emails used to
transmit scanned copies of signed and properly numbered- project correspondence
must follow.

7.1.4 Incoming correspondence shall be addressed to:

H. A. CONSTRUCTION
Yehia Zakaria St. Lot 5,
Sheraton Heliopolis Housing, Cairo, Egypt.
Attention: Project Manager

7.2 Engineering –Documents

7.2.1 All outgoing Engineering transmittals shall be addressed to the CONSULTANT

7.2.2 All outgoing Engineering transmittals must be numbered as follows:

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-002 Page 8 of 9


Document and Data Control Rev. 0
Origin/type of document/location/number/Rev.00

Sequential transmittal number

7.2.3 Transmittals shall be submitted by hard copy. Emails can be used to transmit
scanned copies of signed and properly numbered project Transmittals. For the
purpose of meeting the contractual dates, transmittal by email is acceptable
provided proper receipt by CONSULTANT is confirmed and Hard copies of the
transmittals are received no later than 5 days from email receipt. For details about
email usage refer to item 7.3.

7.2.4 The transmittal cover sheet shall note Contractor's transmittal no. to which the
transmittal is in response. For the purpose of meeting review period by the
CONSULTANT, transmittal by email is acceptable provided proper receipt by
Contractor is confirmed and Hard copies of the transmittals are received no later
than 5 days from email receipt. For details about email usage see Item 7.3 entitled
"Document Transmission via Email".

7.3 Document Transmission via E-mails

7.3.1 E-mails may be used to transmit scanned copies of signed and properly numbered
Project Correspondence and Transmittals; however, hard copies via regular mail
must also follow.

7.3.2 Emails may be used to expedite, clarify, or enhance information already contained
in official project documents (i.e. correspondence, drawings, etc.). Under no
circumstance shall emails override or circumvent hard copy communication.

7.3.3 Emails may not be used to originate new requirements, change scope of work,
make commitments, submit invoices, or alter any portion of the Contract.

7.3.4 All emails must be addressed one of the following personnel and copied to all the
others:

Title Name
(email Address)
1

7.4 Transmittal of Invoices

7.4.2 Invoices should be submitted via a letter numbered and transmitted as per item 7.1
above. However, original invoices should be submitted to CONTRACTOR. The invoice
review period will start from the date of receipt by CONTRACTOR of original invoices.

7.4.3 Contractor's invoices must clearly include the following:

▪ Contract No.
▪ Invoice No., date and amount. Contractor may use its own numbering system for
invoices.
▪ Mode of payment and banking instructions
▪ Relevant section of contract.
QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-002 Page 9 of 9
Document and Data Control Rev. 0
(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau
Documents Distribution Matrix
Document

Construction

Construction
Instruction
Work Site

Statement

Prequalif.
Drawings

Variation
Schedule
Method

Invoice
Report

MOM
(WSI)
Department

Order

MAR
Daily

QMP
Shop

NCR

MIR
PQP
RFI

ITP
JSI
Site Manager
Technical Office Mgr.
QC Mgr.
Planning
Cost Control
Quantity Survey
Surveying
Ware house
IT
Personnel
Accounting

Total

Legend
RFI: Request For Information MIR: Material Inspection Request QMP: Quality Management Procedure

NCR: Non Conformance Report MOM: Minutes of Meeting PQP: Project Quality Plan

MAR: Material Approval Request ITP: Inspection and Test Plan JSI: Job Site Instruction
Approved by
(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau

Quality Management Procedure


MATERIAL CONTROL

QMP-245-003
Rev. Date Revision Details

For Approval

Name Position Signature Date

Prepared By: QC Manager

Reviewed By: Sherif Kadry QA/QC Director

Approved By: Project Manager


INDEX

1. SCOPE

2. PURPOSE

3. REFERENCES

4. DEFINITIONS

5. RESPONSIBILITIES

6. PROCEDURE

7. ATTACHMENTS

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-003 Page 2 of 8


Material Control Rev. 0
1. SCOPE

This document defines the overall system for receipt, identification and inspection of
material to be incorporated into the permanent works for the project. In addition,
storage, handling, preservation, issue and control requirements are defined.

2. PURPOSE

The purpose of this document is to define the mechanism for receipt and verification of
material, as well as storage, handling, preservation, issue and control requirements that
will be used within this project.

3. REFERENCES

• PQP-245 Project Quality Plan


• QMP-245-001 Inspection, and Testing
• QMP-245-004 Control of Non-Conforming Products

4. DEFINITIONS

CONTRACTOR : H. A. CONSTRUCTION (H.A.C)


PO : Purchase Order
NCR : Non-Conformance Report
MIR : Material Inspection Report
BOM : Bill of Materials
MAR : Material Approval Request Submittal
FWR : Field Warehouse Requisition

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-003 Page 3 of 8


Material Control Rev. 0
5. RESPONSIBILITIES

5.1 The Procurement Manager is responsible for the operation of the material
department

5.2 The Storekeeper is responsible for the operations within the respective warehouse/
stores area and to implement the guidelines defined by this procedure.

5.3 He receives the material, checks it against the shipping documents and PO
requirements. He shall initiate the MIRs Reports as applicable and submits it to the
QC Department.

5.4 The QCE is responsible for inspection of the received materials against the approved
MAR, condition and expiry dates, review the adequacy of the shipment supporting
Documents (e.g. mill certificate) if any.

6. PROCEDURE

6.1 Receipt and Material

6.1.1 All Project materials to be incorporated into the permanent works will be
inspected and verified upon receipt at the job site. The Senior Storekeeper
will check the quantities and applicable physical and technical requirements.

6.1.2 Delivery note:

On receipt of the Delivery note, the Senior Storekeeper shall check that the
material, certification or release note, as applicable, relating to the specific
P.O. is available. If not, a nonconformance will be issued in accordance with
QMP-245-004.

6.1.3 Preparation for Off-Loading

On receipt of shipping advice information, the Senior Storekeeper shall


arrange for off-loading material at the estimated time of its arrival, including
provision of any special off-loading/ handling equipment.

6.1.4 Arrival of Material

Before off-loading, a visual inspection shall be carried out by the Senior


Storekeeper or designee to establish as far as possible that material/
packages in the consignment are correct to that advised by the carrier in
regard to quantity and description of the material and to determine any
obvious damage to all or part of the consignment.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-003 Page 4 of 8


Material Control Rev. 0
6.1.5 Off-Loading of Material

Material shall be off-loaded into an appropriate “Reception Area” for detailed


checking. Bulk construction material (such as soil) will normally be moved
directly to their stock piling area for sampling and working.

6.1.6 Detailed Checking

All material arriving at the Stores Area or job site shall be inspected by the
Storekeeper for the following:

- Transit Damage.
- Expiry date.
- Supplier applied preservation.
- Quantity against shipping documents and PO data.
- Availability of release note/ mill certificate.
Upon receipt of material at Stores area, packing shall be removed only so
far as to enable detailed checking for damage and verification of quantity
and quality. Upon completion of checking the packing should be carefully
replaced in order to maintain material preservation. Materials shall be
preserved as per the Vendor Supplier instructions.

In certain cases, packing shall only be removed at the time of installation.


This shall be noted on the MIR.

Care shall always be taken when opening cases boxes not to damage any
of the contents.

In the event of drummed material being delivered, the drums shall not be
opened unless there is apparent damage to the drums or their seals.

However, spot checks shall be made to the extent possible. The extent of
checking performed shall be described on the MIR.

Items must be checked to ensure that they are correctly tag marked, and/
or color coded in accordance with the PO, and its attendant requirement.

The detailed check against the shipping documents shall be carried out as
soon as possible, certainly within three working days of the delivery.

If the material is found to be non-conformant, a Non-Conformance Report


(NCR) will be issued by the responsible QC Inspector and a “Non-
Conformant- Not To Be Used” (red) tag/ sticker/ ribbon will be placed on
material.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-003 Page 5 of 8


Material Control Rev. 0
6.1.7 Reporting

Material Inspection Request (MIR)

When the consignment has been thoroughly checked, a Material Inspection


Request MIR- shall be completed (Note: only one purchase order number per
MIR). The MIR records receipt of a complete or partial shipment or ordered
material. It is used to support payment of the vendors invoice.
A partial Material Inspection Report is prepared to show specific quantities
received against the purchase order. When the final shipment is received, a
“Complete” MIR is prepared. Receiving records and supporting
documentation (Bill of Loading, packing list, freight bills, delivery tickets, mill
reports, etc.) are attached and distributed with Material Inspection Request.

6.2 Handling of Material

6.2.1 Vendor Instructions

Vendors shall be required under the terms of the Purchase Order, to provide
details of any special requirements including precautions to be taken during
off-loading and subsequent handling.

The Vendor recommendations, together with the weight and dimensional


details provided with the shipping specification, shall form the basis for
arranging the availability of necessary equipment and carrying out the off-
loading.

6.3 Storage Facilities

6.3.1 Storage areas shall be safe and tidy and all stored material shall be readily
identifiable.

6.3.2 Where the Purchase Order Specification makes special recommendations


regarding storage conditions, the Storekeeper shall be responsible for
ensuring that the materials are stored in accordance with the provisions of
the material preservation requirements and Safety Codes.

6.3.3 All areas where material is held pending use shall, wherever possible, be
restricted and access limited solely to authorized personnel.

6.3.4 Upon receipt of material but after completion of detailed checking against
the criteria of the purchase order and its attendant specifications, the
material will be moved from the “Reception Area” to one of the approved
storage area classifications.

6.3.5 Building and Compounds

The main stores location shall be detailed in HAC plan for auxiliary site
facilities.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-003 Page 6 of 8


Material Control Rev. 0
6.3.6 Open-air storage/lay down areas shall be detailed in HAC plan for auxiliary
site facilities.

6.3.7 Separate area for drums of chemicals shall be established with the
appropriate flash point warning signs displayed.

6.3.8 “No Smoking” signs and appropriate fire extinguishers shall be on site in
consultation with the Safety Officer.

6.4

6.4.1 Storage Conditions

A. for Materials:
When a purchase order has an attendant specification for material that
requires controlled temperature storage, it shall be stored in a warehouse
equipped with an air-conditioned facility.

B. For Equipment:
The equipment will be preserved at the duration between receiving on site
till erection in fits final place according to the Manufacturer
recommendations stated in its O&M Manual.

6.5 Material Requisition and Issuing

6.5.1 The Field Warehouse Requisition (FWR) shall be used to request material
from the Warehouse.

6.5.2 The FWR shall also be used as a form for returning material from the site to
the Warehouse as denoted and instructed on the form.

6.5.3 Returns of material to the Warehouse will be affected if material becomes


surplus on Site.

6.5.4 The Storekeeper shall check each FWR against his stock records and identify
any material shortages.

6.5.5 The Storekeeper will place a “Hold” on each FWR for which material
deficiencies are identified and the storekeeper shall be responsible for
ensuring that no materials are issued against that FWR until the Hold is
released.

6.5.6 If it proves to be possible to achieve substantial, completion of a work portion


with the available material the Storekeeper shall release the “Hold” on the
FWR. A new FWR shall be raised to cover the balance of the material required
and shall be cross-referenced to the original FWR.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-003 Page 7 of 8


Material Control Rev. 0
6.6 Stock Control of Material

6.6.1 The Stock Record Card (SRC) shall be used for all material movement. The
SRC shall indicate the following information:

 Tag Number of item Code.


 Product Description
 Storage Location
 Unit of Issue
 Date of Received
 Date of Issue
 Document Number Authorizing the Issue.
 Quantity Issued
 Balance Quantity in Stock

6.6.2 Material issues and returns shall be recorded on the SRC together with the
document number on which they were issued.

7. ATTACHEMENTS

• Material Inspection Report (MIR)

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-003 Page 8 of 8


Material Control Rev. 0
(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau

MATERIAL INSPECTION REPORT


Form No.: FM-000-3000 Rev.:
0
MIR #: - Sch/C/MIR # Rev. Date of Inspection : …...………………………
Description of items
Item Manufacturer / Received
Brand Name Approved MAR No. Unit
No. (Name,Type,Size,Capacity,Specific use,etc) Supplier Quantity

3
H.A.C Store Keeper: …………………………………………………
Inspection Report
Yes/No STATUS
1- Conforms to approved MAR? …………………….
2- Details given above correct ? ……………………. A. Approved
3- Expiry Date still due? ……………………. B. Approved with comments
4- Physical damage ? ……………………. C. Rejected
5- Accessories / Spare parts included ? (if any) …………………….
Remarks :
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
H.A.C QC Eng. Name: ………………………………………………… Sig. SS Name ……………………………………………. Sig.:
The above material has been inspected upon arrival on site and found to be :
SATISFACTORY / UNSATISFACTORY
FOR INCORPORATION IN THE PERMANENT WORKS AND/OR FOR PAYMENT AS MATERIAL ON SITE
(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau

Quality Management Procedure


NON-CONFORMANCE HANDLING

QMP-245-004

Rev. Date Revision Details

For Approval

Name Position Signature Date

Prepared By: QC Manager

Reviewed By: Sherif Kadry QA/QC Director

Approved By: Project Manager


INDEX

1. SCOPE

2. PURPOSE

3. REFERENCES

4. DEFINITIONS

5. RESPONSIBILITIES

6. PROCEDURE

7. ATTACHMENTS

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-000-004 Page 2 of 6


Non – Conformance Handling Rev. 0
1. SCOPE

The H.A.C nonconformance system will be used for non-conformances detected


during inspection in the following areas:

• H.A.C supplied material


• H.A.C construction works, installation or testing
• H.A.C subcontractor work

2. PURPOSE

2.1 To establish a procedure to ensure that:

• All non-conformances are identified, controlled and corrected (where approved


by the owner) to prevent non-conforming product / materials from being
delivered to site or incorporated onto the manufacture / fabrication /
construction works...

• Root causes of non-conformance are identified and corrective action(s) taken


where appropriate to prevent recurrence.

3. REFERENCES

• PQP-245 Project Quality Plan


• QMP-245-001 Inspection, and Testing

4. DEFINITIONS

CONTRACTOR : H. A. CONSTRUCTION (H.A.C)


QCD : Quality Control Department
NCR : Non-Conformance Report
ITP : Inspection & Test Plan- A document which defines or identifies in a
tabulated form the inspection, test method(s) , procedures, control
forms and acceptance criteria to be utilized during procurement ,
and construction
Material : All materials, equipment, and fabricated items to be incorporated
into the permanent works.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-000-004 Page 3 of 6


Non – Conformance Handling Rev. 0
5. RESPONSIBILITIES

5.1 The Project Quality Manager is responsible for maintaining and updating this
procedure.

5.2. The Project Quality Manager is responsible for operating the nonconformance
system.

5.3 It is the responsibility of every one to report to their supervisor any deficiencies /
discrepancies that are observed.

5.4 The Discipline Manager or Construction Superintendent is responsible for


correcting any non-conformance identified via non-conformance reports.

6. PROCEDURE

6.1 General

6.1.1 Where material or a component fails to meet the specified acceptance criteria
due to a material deficiency or faulty workmanship or insufficient QC
documentation, such circumstances constitute nonconformance and the
material, piece or item of equipment is described as non-conforming product.
The vehicle for recording and disposing of non-conforming product shall be the
Non-Conformance Report (NCR), see attachment 7.1

6.1.2 Any observation of a malpractice, deficiency, non-compliance to procedure,


should be corrected by addressing it firstly on a verbal basis. These observations
are normally raised by QC Inspectors with field engineers or field supervisors. The
Project Quality Manager, in the particular cases where the observation is
repeated, shall raise an NCR.

6.1.3 Where materiel is identified as non-conforming, it should be clearly marked as


non-conforming and, where practical, be removed to a quarantine area. If
segregation is impractical the item shall be clearly marked non-conforming.

6.1.4 Where non-conforming material is identified after delivery, incorporation into


work or project handover, the non-conforming product shall be identified as
above. Where practical, a non-conformance report (NCR) shall be completed.

6.2 Processing of NCRs

6.2.1 The Project QA Manager shall complete the requirements of section 1 of the
Non-Conformance Report form, upon advisement by discipline QC Inspectors
of identified non-conformances.

6.2.2 The Project Quality Manager shall complete the remaining requirements of
section 1, and register/file the NCR after forwarding the original to the
discipline manager or superintendent as applicable. However, if the
nonconformance is proved non-valid or already actioned the NCR shall be
filed but not issued.
QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-000-004 Page 4 of 6
Non – Conformance Handling Rev. 0
6.2.3 Section 2 shall be completed by the discipline manager or superintendent,
as applicable, who shall consider specification, fitness for purpose and
schedule requirements when deciding the disposition of the
nonconformance.

6.2.4 Section 3 shall be completed by the discipline Manager proposing in details


the corrective action intended to dispose the NCR. The original of the NCR
then returned to the Quality Manager.

6.2.5 Section 4 QCM for his review and acceptance. Rejection of the proposed
disposition will result in return of the NCR (rejected) with a further copy for
re-definition of proposed disposition.

6.2.6 Acceptance of the proposed disposition will result in return of the NCR
(accepted) to the discipline Manager or superintendent, as applicable, for
endorsement of completed action whilst

6.2.7 Section 5, once correction has been implemented and endorsed by the
discipline Manager or superintendent, the NCR to be returned to the QCD for
verification.

6.2.8 Section 6, the Project QC Engineer shall review (in the field) the action taken
and the documentation produced and report on its acceptability.

6.2.9 The verified / closed-out NCR shall be sent to the consultant for information.

6.2.10 The Project Quality Manager shall track all NCR’s, monitor the proposed
close out dates and follow up overdue actions.

7. ATTACHMENTS

Non-Conformance Report Form.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-000-004 Page 5 of 6


Non – Conformance Handling Rev. 0
(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau

NON-CONFORMANCE REPORT (NCR)


ITEM DESCRIPTION: NCR No:

DATE:

(1) DESCRIPTION OF NON-CONFORMANCE: (2) ROOT CAUSE

Manager / Engineer / QA Manager / Superintendent

PREPARED BY: SIGNATURE: DATE:

(3) RECOMMENDED COURSE OF ACTION:

DISPOSITION: USE AS IS REPAIR REJECT

APPROVED BY: SIGNATURE: DATE:


(4) QC REVIEW:

REVIEWED BY: DATE

(5) ACTION TAKEN:

SIGNATURE: DATE:

(6) VERIFICATION:

VERIFIED BY: DATE COMPLETED:

(7) COPIES TO:

Attachment to QMP-245-004 – Non-Conformance Report


(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau

Quality Management Procedure


QUALITY AUDIT

QMP-245-005
Rev. Date Revision Details

For Approval

Name Position Signature Date

Prepared By: QC Manager

Reviewed By: Sherif Kadry QA/QC Director

Approved By: Project Manager


INDEX

1. SCOPE

2. PURPOSE

3. REFERENCES

4. DEFINITIONS

5. RESPONSIBILITIES

6. PROCEDURE

7. RECORDS

8. ATTACHMENTS

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-005 Page 2 of 6


QUALITY AUDIT Rev. 0
1. SCOPE
This procedure applies to all the performed internal audits in the project including the
engineering, procurement and construction, completion and maintenance of all the
components of (1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants inn Guinea Bissau
2. PURPOSE
To describe the process of quality internal audit; preparation, execution, reporting and
closing of the audits.

3. REFERENCES
PQP-245 Project Quality Plan.

4. DEFINITIONS

CONTRACTOR : H. A. CONSTRUCTION (H.A.C)

CAR : Corrective Action Request

5. RESPONSIBILITIES

5.1 The QC Manager is responsible for the preparation of this project procedure, its
amendment and controlled distribution.
5.2 The Corporate Quality Manager is responsible for H.A.C’s internal audit schedule and for
undertaking internal audits according to the schedule. Individual audits are assigned to
members of the Corporate Quality Department. On a case-by-case basis, unless there is
a resident auditor on a project, when audits are his responsibility unless otherwise
advised.

6. PROCEDURE

6.1 General
6.1.1 The management system encompasses the entire core activities related to
construction and documentation.
6.1.2 The function of the Corporate Quality Department is to develop and maintain a
documented management system suitable for the H.A.C’s business.
6.1.3 The Corporate Quality Manager is responsible for the Corporate Quality Department
and is assisted by Quality Engineers. The role of the Quality Control Manager is
summarized below.
• To assist office and project staff to implement the quality-related elements of the
management system.
• To assist in the development and improvement of the management system.
• To perform internal audits of the system.
• To approve suppliers and subcontractors.
• Responsible for preparation of all records required for the project
QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-005 Page 3 of 6
QUALITY AUDIT Rev. 0
• Responsible for checking the material received and compare to the related material
approval request.
• Responsible to co-ordinate with site engineer for work inspections.
• Responsible to ensure that each activity is inspected & document release prior to
start next related activity.
• Ensure that the inspection is done with approved documents.

6.1.4 Internal audits are performed throughout H.A.C’s operations against the
documentation applicable to the area under audit to verify that the management
system is being implemented and to identify opportunities for improvement. A
suitably qualified auditor outside of the department audits the Corporate Quality
Department.

6.2 Internal Audit Schedule


6.2.1 Individual audit schedules shall be drawn up for the project, the schedule shall take
account of the relative importance of the applicable documents and, in the case of
projects, the timing of activities within each document’s scope. The Project Manager
shall receive a copy of the schedule relevant to his work scope.
6.2.2 The Corporate Quality Manager shall maintain a consolidated schedule of all internal
audits planned throughout H.A.C.
6.2.3 An individual schedule shall be revised as circumstances require and the
consolidated schedule shall be updated to reflect the revision.
6.2.4 The Corporate Quality Manager (see section 5.2) shall prepare all audit schedules
except where there is a resident auditor on a project, in which case the auditor shall
prepare the schedule.
6.2.5 A copy of a schedule prepared on a project shall be sent to the Corporate Quality
Manager immediately that it is issued.

6.3 Audit Preparation


6.3.1 At least seven days before a scheduled audit, the auditor shall send the completed
form Notification of an Internal Audit to the manager responsible for the area to be
audited. If no response is received the audit shall proceed as planned.
6.3.2 The auditor shall use the form Scope of an Internal Audit to prepare for the audit.
The auditor shall ensure that the scope covers adequately the document(s) to be
audited. Previous audits of the same or similar scope and the minutes of quality
meetings shall also be reviewed, where available, to take account of any relevant
findings.
6.3.3 The auditor shall always include in the scope the status of the system
documentation, if any, held by the person(s) who will be audited and any
recommendations (see section 7.4.3.2) given in the last audit.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-005 Page 4 of 6


QUALITY AUDIT Rev. 0
6.4 Execution of the Audit
6.4.1 At the appointed time, an opening meeting shall be held between the auditor and
the responsible manager to outline the scope of the audit and to discuss any
logistical arrangements.
6.4.2 The audit shall proceed according to the prepared program, although other aspects
of the implementation of the Management System may arise during the audit and be
included in the scope.
6.4.3 System deficiencies shall be reported by the following categories in order of
descending severity.
• A major deviation from system requirements.
• A cause for concern.
• An observation.
6.4.3.1 In the case of a major deviation from system requirements, the
auditor shall raise a Corrective Action Request.
6.4.3.2 A cause for concern shall be reported when a potentially serious
deviation from requirements has been observed or when a trend of poor
implementation has been detected. Causes for concern shall be detailed in
the report under the headings ‘Recommendations’ and the responsible
manager is required to address these recommendations satisfactorily before
the next audit.
6.4.3.3 An observation shall be reported to address an issue of relatively
minor significance, but which nevertheless may adversely affect the
satisfactory implementation of system requirements.
6.4.3.4 The auditor shall hold an exit meeting with the manager to discuss
the outcome of the audit and to explain any deficiencies and deviations
observed. Where possible, corrective actions shall be agreed at this meeting.
In every case, however, the date by which the deviation will be corrected
shall be agreed and entered on the Corrective Action Request.

6.5 Reporting and Closing the Audit


6.5.1 The report comprises the form Internal Audit Report (Report) and any Corrective
Action Requests raised. The auditor shall reference and register the Report in
accordance with the project procedure Control of Documents and Data. The Report
shall be issued within two weeks of the conclusion of the audit.
6.5.2 Each Corrective Action Request raised shall be given a reference according to the
format given in either section 7.5.3 or section 7.5.4 and entered in the register (see
project procedure Control of Documents and Data).
6.5.3 The format of the reference for a Corrective Action Request raised as the result of an
audit performed by the Corporate Quality Manager shall be
CORP-CAR-z
Where ‘CORP’ indicates that it is a corporate level document and ‘z’ is the next
available number taken from the Corporate Register of Corrective Action Requests.
QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-005 Page 5 of 6
QUALITY AUDIT Rev. 0
6.5.4 The format of the reference for a Corrective Action Request raised as the result of a
project audit or as the result of a complaint by the owner or consultant shall be
[A]-CAR-z
Where ‘[A]’ is the four-digit project number assigned by H.A.C and ‘z’ is the next
available number taken from the Project Register of Corrective Action Requests.
6.5.5 A copy of the Report shall be passed to the responsible manager immediately it is
issued. Where Corrective Action Requests have been raised, the auditor shall pass
the originals to the responsible manager for his action.
6.5.6 When all of the corrective actions, if any, have been completed and the Corrective
Action Requests have been closed, the auditor shall arrange a mutually convenient
time to review the audit with the responsible manager and close the Report.
6.5.7 In all cases, the Corporate Quality Manager shall file the original Report and the
original Corrective Action Requests in H.A.C archives and the responsible manager
and the Regional Manager responsible for the project shall be given a copy for his
reference. On a project with a resident auditor, the resident auditor shall also retain
a copy.
6.5.8 The notification of the audit and the completed Scope of an Internal Audit shall be
archived with the relevant Report.

7. RECORDS

7.1 The Corporate Quality Manager shall maintain a complete archive of internal audit
reports (including the notification and scope), Corrective Action Requests, the
annual performance report and any special performance reports for a minimum of
five years, following which he shall decide the disposition.
7.2 Departmental heads shall retain copies of audit reports for a period of five years,
after which they may be discarded.

8. ATTACHMENTS

STANDARD FORMS
Form Title Reference Rev. Pages
Notification of an Internal Audit FM-245-0051 0 1
Scope of an Internal Audit FM-245-0052 0 1
Internal Audit Report FM-245-0053 0 1

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-005 Page 6 of 6


QUALITY AUDIT Rev. 0
1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV)
Power Plants, Guinea Bissau
Notification of an Internal Audit
Audit Ref. Auditor Date of Audit
Work Area Manager
Duration of Audit hours / days Time of Entry Meeting

Audit Plan
Documentation Summary
Document Ref. Title

Outline of Scope

Additional Information

Issued by Signature Date

Form No. FM-245-0051 Rev. 0


1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV)
Power Plants, Guinea Bissau
Scope of an Internal Audit
Audit Ref. Auditor Date of Audit
Work Area Manager
Document Ref. Title
Section Scope Observations and Remarks

Prepared by Date
Sheet of
Form No.: FM-245-0052 Rev.0
1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV)
Power Plants, Guinea Bissau
Internal Audit Report
Audit Ref. Location
Auditor Date of Audit
Work Area Manager
Area of Audit
Summary of Audit

Corrective Action Requests Raised


Reference Subject

Prepared by Signature Date

Report closed on by

Form No.: FM-245-0053 Rev.0


(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau

Quality Management Procedure


Evaluation of Sub-Contractors

QMP-245-006
Rev. Date Revision Details

Name Position Signature Date

Prepared By: QA/QC Manger

Reviewed By: QA/QC Director


Sherif Kadry

Approved By: Project Director


1. SCOPE

This procedure applies to all H.A.C and its Supplier’s and Subcontractor’s scope
as defined by the Contract of the project.

2. PURPOSE:

The purpose of this measure is to set up an effective system to evaluate


the subcontractors eligible for the implementation of works, follow up their
performance during the period of implementation so as to either let them
continue working or to rule them out.

3. REFERENCES

PQP-245 Project Quality Plan

4. DEFINITIONS

CONTRACTOR : H. A. CONSTRUCTION (H.A.C)

5. RESPONSIBILITIES

Technical office manager is responsible for the implementation of this procedure

6 PROCEDURE

This measure applies to the subcontractors working in the project.

6-1 Evaluation of Subcontractors

6-1-1 The projects’ Managers shall evaluate the project subcontractors’


performance through reports in the form FM-805-1 on the evaluation of the
subcontractors and this is to be sent to the Contracts and subcontractors’
Department. These reports clarify the commitment of subcontractors to the
timetable as well as their approach of using materials, efficiency of their
labor force, degree of cooperation with the other subcontractors, quick
response to orders and quality of assigned works.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-006 Page 2 of 3


EVALUATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR Rev. 0
6-1-2 According to the quarterly reports submitted by the projects’ managers, the
directors of contracts and subcontractors shall evaluate the performance 4
times per year.
6-1-3 In case if any of the subcontractors scores less than 50% of the total score
at any time of the four yearly times, this subcontractor shall be ruled out of
the subcontractors’ record and dealing with him shall be ceased with his
name dragged in Subcontractor Ruling out Record Form no FM-805-02
6-1-4 At the end of every year, the Director of Contracts and Subcontractors
calculates the average points the subcontractor has got during all four times
of evaluations.
6-1-5 in case if the subcontractor gets an average of less than 70% during the
year, He will be ruled out, and dealing with him will be stopped and his name
will be included in the Subcontractors ruling out record.

7 ATTACHMENTS

1-Subcontractors Performance Evaluation Form FM 605-01


2-Subcontractors ruling out Record Form FM-605-02

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-006 Page 3 of 3


EVALUATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR Rev. 0
Assesment of a Subcontractor’s Performance for the Year ( )

(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power


Plants, Guinea Bissau
Information about the Subcontractor

Average Labor Number with the Subcontractor’s Name /


subcontractor ( ) Activity/
Maximum Number of workers of the Date of Contract/
subcontractor ( ) S/C Commencement Date /

Assessment Items and Degrees

(10) “Excellent “exceeding expectations (6) Fair “Needs Improvements”


(8) “Good” Meets expectations (4) Poor “Needs Much Efforts to improve”

1st 2nd 3rd 4th


Assessment Items Average
Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter
1. Quality of implemented works
2. Degree of commitment to deadlines
3. Rates and response to variation of orders and quantities
4. Technical expertise
5. Workers’ level
6. Sufficiency of equipment provided and their qualities
7. Boards provided by subcontractors
8. Subcontractor’s management at the site
9. Subcontractor’s ability to supervise workers
10. Subcontractor’s workers’ relations with other parts of the
project
11. Subcontractor’s comprehension to verbal orders
12. Subcontractor’s Quick response
13. Possession of industrial safety requirements
14. ……………………………………………
Total numbers

Average number= Total number


Assessed items (Applicable to subcontractor)

Final assessment (Average number (if fractional) leveled to


nearest non-fraction)
Excellent- Good- Fair- Poor
Remarks ad/or Comments
Is this sub-subcontractor is recommended for any future ) (Yes ) (Yes ) (Yes ) (Yes ) (Yes
works? ) (No ) (No ) (No ) (No ) (No
In Case if (No) is Chosen, please describe the unacceptable
work in separate
In charge of assessment
Name /
Signature/
Date/
Project Manager’s Approval
Name/
Signature/
Date/
A copy of this form is to be sent to contracts and subcontractors’ department every three months. In case if poor assessment of
the subcontractor is found, signatures and relevant required dates have to be fully filled and an enclosure of a note along with
the assessment form regarding the measure taken in this respect has to be done. Examples; Warning, change of some of
subcontractor’s workers, Change of equipments, Reduction of sums…. etc.

FM – 605-01 Issue date: 05/10/2011 I.R:2.1


Record of Ruling out Subcontractors
Name of Recorded
Assesment Types of activities/ services undertaken
Ser. Commercial Name Manager in Address of the company Phone no. Fax no. date of Remarks
degree by the subcontractor
Charge ruling out
1

10

11

12

13

14

15

Signature Director of Contracts and


subcontractors

FM-605-02 Issue Date : 05/10/2011 I.R:2.1


(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau

Quality Management Procedure


Evaluation of Suppliers

QMP-245-007
Rev. Date Revision Details
0 Client comment incorporation

Name Position Signature Date

Prepared By: QA/QC Manager

Reviewed By: QA/QC Director

Approved By: Project Director


1. SCOPE

This procedure applies to H.A.C and its Supplier’s scope as defined by the Contract of
the (1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants in Guinea Bissau

2. PURPOSE

To nominate best suppliers to supply the items, materials and equipment in addition to
evaluate those suppliers periodically.

3. REFERENCES

PQP-245 Project Quality Plan

4. DEFINITIONS

CONTRACTOR : H. A. CONSTRUCTION (H.A.C)

5. RESPONSIBILITIES

Procurement manger is responsible for the implementation of this procedure

6. PROCEDURE

6.1. Classification of different dealings of company with the suppliers:


6.1.1. The purchase manager classifies the company’s dealings with the suppliers in
accordance with form FM-704-01 if these dealings would should be classified in
accordance with the detailed classifications of materials and other items.
6.1.2. The mentioned classification has to be done on form FM-704-01 consequently.
6.1.3. This classification is to be updated annually according to the types of dealings
emerging from the company’s changing requirements.
6.2. Creating a list of the approved suppliers:
6.2.1. All suppliers dealing with the company prior to the issue of the current procedure are
considered to be approved suppliers who are to be registered in the approved
suppliers record Form (FM-704-02). Each classification of suppliers should have a
separate sheet in the record in accordance with the classification of different
dealings.
6.2.2. In case if need arises to seek a supplier other than those listed, the purchasing
officer should open a new file and fulfill all docs that the record requires i.e.; Previous
experience- commercial registration- taxation file- any catalogues for the supplier-

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-007 Page 2 of 3


EVALUATION OF SUPPLIER REV 0 Rev. 0
…etc.) explaining the reasons for dealing with the mentioned supplier in a note to be
submitted to the purchasing manager.
6.2.3. the purchasing manager approves dealing with the mentioned supplier and therefore
the supplier is included to the approved suppliers. In case of rejection the note will
receive” rejection”.
6.3. Evaluating the suppliers:
6.3.1. the purchasing manager prepares a quarterly report on the suppliers’ performance in
accordance with the warehouse supplies of this period (Abidance with the specified
quantities- supply periods and good quality of supplies should be in focus)
6.3.2. Based on the quarterly reports received by the purchasing manager, the purchasing
manager evaluates the performance of the suppliers 4 times annually in the form FM-
704-02 (Evaluation of a supplier).
6.3.3. In case if any supplier gets less than 50% out of the total score at any time of the
quarterly evaluations, this supplier is ruled out from the approved suppliers’ record and the
dealings with him should be ceased.
6.3.4. At the end of every year, the purchasing manager calculates the average score the
supplier recoded in all times of the four quarterly evaluations.
6.3.5. In Case if a supplier gets an average of less than 70% within a year, he should be
ruled out and dealings with him should therefore be ceased.
7. ATTACHMENTS

• Suppliers’ record Form FM-704-01


• Evaluation of supplier FM-704-02

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-007 Page 3 of 3


EVALUATION OF SUPPLIER REV 0 Rev. 0
Approved Suppliers’ Record
[a1]

Items Materials Admin. Purchases Services

Record
Commercial Manager In Phone Types Of Supplies Offered By
S. Company Address Fax No. Registration Remarks
Name Of Co. Charge No The Supplier
Date.

Purchase manager

FM-704-01.docx Issue Date : 01/01/2009 I.R.: 2.0


Evaluation of a Supplier
Activity:
Supplier’s name:
From / / 20 to / / 20

S Evaluation Item Max. Score Evaluation Average


From 01/01 to 31/03 From 01/04 to 30/06 From 01/07 to 30/09 From 01/10 to 31/12
1 Quantity 20
2 Supply duration 20
3 Supplies’ quality 30
4 Price level 20
5 Cost of transportation 10
Total 100
Calculations to conduct evaluation:

Quantity Score= Supplied Qty. / Required Qty. x 20

Supply Period Score= Required Supply Period/ Actual Supply Period x 20 ( Not Exceeding 20 )

Supplies’ Quality Score = Accepted Supplies’ Quality/ Actual Supplied Quality x 30 (Not Exceeding 30)

Price Level Score= (Least Price of Most Important Items/ Actual Price of Most Important Items) x 20 (Not Exceeding 20)

Transportation Cost Score= Least Price of Transporting The Unit/ Actual Price of Transporting The Unit x 10 ( Not Exceeding 10)

Prepared by /

Purchase Officer

FM-704-02.docx Issue Date : 01/01/2009 I.R.: 2.0


(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau

Quality Management Procedure


HANDING OVER

QMP-245-008
Rev. Date Revision Details
0 For Tender

Name Position Signature Date

Prepared By: QC Manager

Reviewed By: Sherif Kadry QA/QC Director

Approved By: Project Manager

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-008 Page 1 of 12


Handing Over Rev. 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................... 3
2. PURPOSE .......................................................................................................................................... 3
3. REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................... 3
4. ABBREVIATIONS / DEFINITIONS ..................................................................................................... 4
5. RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................................................................................................... 4
5.1 QA/QC TEAM:- .................................................................................................................................. 4
5.2 CONTRACTOR’S SUBCONTRACTORS AND / OR CONSTRUCTION TEAM ....................................... 4
5.3 QA/QC HANDOVER DOCUMENTATION TEAM ................................................................................. 4
5.4 THE ENGINEER ................................................................................................................................. 5
5.5 EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE ..................................................................................................... 5
5.6 ENGINEERING TEAM ........................................................................................................................ 5
6. PROCEDURE ..................................................................................................................................... 6
6.1 Handover Inspection Process:- ....................................................................................................... 6
Stage 1 – Internal Snagging........................................................................................................... 6
Stage 2 – External Snagging .......................................................................................................... 7
Stage 3 – Final Handover............................................................................................................... 8
6.2 Identification Methodology for Areas .............................................................................................. 8
6.3 Drawings and Matrices .................................................................................................................... 9
6.4 Identification of Areas ..................................................................................................................... 9
6.5 Construction Completion ............................................................................................................... 10
6.6 Snagging ......................................................................................................................................... 10
6.7 Final Handover ............................................................................................................................... 10
6.8 Binders ........................................................................................................................................... 11
6.9 Electronic Records ......................................................................................................................... 12
7. ATTACHMENTS ............................................................................................................................... 12

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-008 Page 2 of 12


Handing Over Rev. 0
1. SCOPE
1.1 This procedure covers the final inspection and handing over for all finished works including civil
works, internal finishing, external finishing, landscaping, MEP works ...etc.

1.2 This Procedure must be read in conjunction with the relevant Project Contract Specifications.

1.3 This procedure is applicable to the Contractor/Subcontractors scope of work at the project.

2. PURPOSE

2.1 The purpose of this procedure is to ensure that all activities pertinent to the inspection of finished
works are completed as per specified requirements and are carried out in a systematic manner. A
brief illustration of overall handover process is shown per Chart-01; Handover Process Flow Chart
(attached).

2.2 Works at the Project can be handed over to the Employer’s only when all the scope of works had
been accepted by the ENGINEER.

3. REFERENCES
PQP-245 Project Quality Plan

QMP-245-001 Inspection & Testing

QMP-245-002 Document & Data Control

QMP-245-003 Material Control

QMP-245-004 Non-conformance Handling

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-008 Page 3 of 12


Handing Over Rev. 0
4. ABBREVIATIONS / DEFINITIONS

CONTRACTOR : H. A. CONSTRUCTION (H.A.C)

CSC Construction Supervision Consultant

MIR Material Inspection Request

RFI Work Request for Inspection

NCR Non-Conformance Report

TOC Taking Over Certificate

PCC Partial Completion Certificate

MCC Mechanical Completion Certificate

DLP Defect Liability Period

5. RESPONSIBILITIES

5.1 QA/QC TEAM: -


• Monitors the QC Status of construction activities.
• Provides the necessary documents (Approved Procedures and Related Forms).
• Once the construction is completed, offers the clearance of the incomplete, outstanding works
and snag lists. The QC Team will start preparing internal snag lists and forwards them to
construction for rectification.
• Monitors and ensures the closing out of all open RFI's, MIR's & NCR's.
• Monitors and reviews preparation and close-out of internal snag lists.
• Prepares the Pre-Handover Checklist Forms and submit them to The ENGINEER for Inspection.

5.2 CONTRACTOR’S SUBCONTRACTORS AND / OR CONSTRUCTION TEAM: -


• Overall responsibility for assigning resources to all construction activities.
• Coordinates all activities among all subcontractors involved in the related area.
• Completes the construction activities in accordance with approved drawings, contract
specifications and applicable codes and standards.
• Clears the outstanding RFIs, MIRs, NCRs, & DRs.
• Designates the personnel to prepare the incomplete/outstanding works’ snag lists and to deal
with completing and clearing the identified snags “either their own or others’”.
• Submit the finished work to the QC Engineer for inspection and review.
QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-008 Page 4 of 12
Handing Over Rev. 0
• Provides all necessary data to the QA/QC Team.

5.3 QA/QC HANDOVER DOCUMENTATION TEAM: -


• Compiles the signed-off documentation sets into binders.
• Maintains the necessary binders.
• Makes binders available for inspection.
• Provides applicable subsets of binder content to specified parties.

5.4 THE ENGINEER: -


• Inspects relevant areas and compiles a punch list, when applicable.
• Provides punch list to Contractor QA/QC as required.
• Conducts the final inspection (any outstanding punch list items can be transferred to the Final
Handover Form).
• Confirms finished works readiness to Final Handover for EMPLOYER’S Representative ‘s Approval.

5.5 EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE


• Oversee the entire Handover Process.
• Sort out conflicts between Contractor and the ENGINEER.
• Review all Handover Documents and Records.

5.6 ENGINEERING TEAM


• Monitors the Engineering records status for the Project As Built drawings and Keying
Schedule & Provides approved Project As Built Drawing Registers & Keying Schedule.
• Provides the necessary documents needed for Handover processes related to Engineering
Scope.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-008 Page 5 of 12


Handing Over Rev. 0
6. PROCEDURE
6.1 Handing Over Process: -

Stage 1 – Internal Snagging Start


Stage 1 – Internal Snagging

Prepare an "Incomplete and Outstanding works list" for the subject ID

Contractor QA/QC Team

Complete the Unfinished Works, sign off the items on the list including
clearance of all related RFI's, MIR's and NCR's '. Submit to Contractor
QA/QC Department
Contractor Construction Team

Perform inspection,check the clearance of the incomplete and outstanding


works list with the related RFI's, MIR's and NCR's
Prepare the Contractor punchlist or "Internal Snag List", and distribute it
to the Contractor Construction Team for rectification

Contractor QA/QC Department

Resolve Snags and forward to the Contractor QA/QC to check


Contractor Construction Team

Review the resolution


Contractor QA/QC Department

Ready for PM/


Engineer
No Review
Yes
Prepare Pre-Handover snag list per discipline
Contractor QA/QC Department

Go to
Stage 2 – External Snagging

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-008 Page 6 of 12


Handing Over Rev. 0
Stage 2 – External Snagging Start
Stage2 – External Snagging

Submit the Pre-Handover checklists to The CSC/ENGINEER


Contractor QA/QC Department

Perform inspection and initiate external inspection report if required,


sign off the Pre-Handover snag list and return back to Contractor

QA/QC Document Controller

Ensure that CSC/Engineer snags are cleared and return details to


Contractor QA/QC
Contractor Construction Team

Review and check The CSC/Engineer snags clearance


Contractor QA/QC Department

No
All snags cleared?

Yes
Forward the Handover form attaching the signed Pre-Handover snag list
to the CSC/Engineer Inspection for approval
Contractor QA/QC

Review and check snags clearance and signoff


CSC/Engineer Inspection

No
All snags cleared?

Yes
Forward the Discipline Handover form signed-off by The CSC/Engineer
to the Handover Coordinator with all supporting documents
Contractor QA/QC Department

Go to
Stage 3 – Final Handover

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-008 Page 7 of 12


Handing Over Rev. 0
Stage 3 – Final Handover

Start Stage3 – Final Handover

Attach discipline Handover forms (QMP-0XX-008-01) complete with all supporting


documents (location plan, RFI's, MIR's and NCR's to the Final Handover Form
(QMP-0XX-008-03)
QA / QC Handover Coordinator

The final documentation binder shall include the following items :

a. General Index / Table of contents.


b. Project As Built Drawings Rejestar
c. RFI's, MIR's and NCR's.
d. Laboratory Test Reports

QA / QC Handover Coordinator

Contractor, The CSC/Engineer will confirm the clearance and acceptance on the Di
Handover form

QA / QC Handover Coordinator

Submit the cleared signed-off Final Handover Binder with all attachments to CSC/Engineer for final
acceptance & approval
QA / QC Handover Coordinator

Taking-Over Certificate Issuance

Defect Liability Period Stage (DLP)

End

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-008 Page 8 of 12


Handing Over Rev. 0
6.2 Identification Methodology for Areas

• The initial stage of defining completion scope is to identify the physical limit / content of the area
under consideration. This is usually a complete structure or a part of the project with a specific
function.

• The area boundaries have been identified and addressed as follows: -


➢ Zone.
➢ Area.
➢ Building.
➢ Function.
➢ Floor.
➢ Grids.
➢ I.D. Number
• For MEP systems and sub-systems under consideration the initial stage of defining completion
scope is to establish the System Definition. This is usually defined based on Pre-commissioning
and commissioning plans.

6.3 Drawings and Matrices

• Drawings will be developed to show all the area details with all boundaries marked with
distinctive colors, indexed and supported by an Excel matrix, e.g.:-

ZONE BUILDING FLOOR ID NO.


AREA FUNCTION GRIDS

6.4 Identification of Areas

• The area to be inspected shall be identified by the nearest grid lines the identification of areas will
be by grid lines. Key plan with hatching to show the exact area limits.

Note:
• When the area boundaries are not finally set, these can be adjusted to meet site requirements.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-008 Page 9 of 12


Handing Over Rev. 0
6.5 Construction Completion

• Contractor QA/QC Team (Civil/Architectural/MEP/Steel) shall each ensure that all RFI's and MIR's
have been completed and signed-off in accordance with the approved ITP's and contract
specifications for each area.

• Contractor QA/QC Team shall ensure that all NCRs are completed and closed out.

• Contractor Construction Team shall ensure that areas are thoroughly cleaned for inspection.

• Contractor Construction Team shall ensure that areas for inspection are according to
specifications and the area is fit for purpose.

6.6 Snagging

• Contractor Construction Team is required to carry out their Incomplete and Outstanding Works
List and ensure that all have been completed and signed off in accordance with approved
drawings, Remedial Works …etc.

• Contractor QA/QC Team shall carry out detailed inspection of each area to be handed over and
shall review and sign-off the pre-handover inspection checklist before offering to The ENGINEER
for Inspection.

• Contractor QA/QC Team will then request The ENGINEER for each discipline to carry out their
external Snagging.

• Contractor QA/QC Team will monitor close out and sign off The ENGINEER snags by liaising with
Contractor Construction Team.

• Contractor QA/QC Team will arrange for final Handover inspection by the ENGINEER.

6.7 Final Handover

• The Contractor Construction Team shall resolve all outstanding snags and advise the relevant
Senior QC Engineer.

• If the resolution is accepted by the Senior QC Engineer, a color copy of the original Discipline
Inspection Form will be used to obtain The ENGINEER sign-off (the original documents should not
be removed from the Handover Document files).

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-008 Page 10 of 12


Handing Over Rev. 0
• The signed-off colored copies of the Discipline Handover forms with all signed-off MIRs, RFIs,
NCRs, and DRs shall be attached to the Final Handover Form, signed-off by the Senior QC
Engineer and the ENGINEER.

• This confirms that the area is ready for Final Handover.

• The signed Final Handover Form will then be transmitted to the OWNER via EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE for final acceptance.

6.8 Binders

• The finished works Final Handover binders are compiled from traceable, signed-off
documentation provided by the QA/QC Handover Documentation Team. Each binder is scanned
into PDF file format and uploaded into the relevant Folder.

• The respective handover binders of data are delivered to the QA/QC Handover Documentation
Team for safekeeping.
1. Location Plan - This identifies the physical location of the specific item of finished work
within the project.
2. Final Handover Form (QMP-245-018-12): together with signed-off copies of the Civil,
Internal finishing, External Finishing, Landscaping, Steel Structure, and MEP Inspection
Forms, each listing outstanding snags (and anticipated dates of resolution of those
snags).
3. Discipline Inspection Handover Form (FM-245-008-01) including: -

▪ Discipline MIR’s Register - lists the Civil Material Inspection Reports relevant to the
finished work.
▪ Discipline RFIs Register - lists the Civil Work Inspection Reports relevant to the
finished work.
▪ Discipline NCR’s Register - lists the Civil Non-Conformance Reports relevant to the
finished work.
▪ Discipline Deficiency Register – lists the Structural defects observed on site (on a
daily basis) and any actions taken to rectify those defects.

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-008 Page 11 of 12


Handing Over Rev. 0
• The final documentation index for handing over shall include the following: -
1) General Index / Table of contents.

2) Project As-Built Drawings Register

3) Operation and maintenance data manuals with Training Certificates.

4) Testing and commissioning reports List.

5) Warranties and bonds register & Approved drafts.

6) Keys and keying schedule

7) Spare parts and materials extra stock registers & Asset Register.

8) List of Subcontractors, service organizations, and principal vendors

9) Laboratory Test Reports

10) Forms QMP -245-018/12, 13,14,15,16, and 17.

• Once a binder has been compiled (including lists of accepted outstanding snags), The ENGINEER
is notified through EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE of the availability of the binder for review; the
binder is retained in the offices of the QA/QC Handover Documentation Team.

• When all the packages applicable to the finished work have been fully signed-off, the Contractor
shall submit the Compiled Documents through EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE for EMPLOYER’S
Approval.

6.9 Electronic Records

• All forms will be scanned by Contractor to Electronic files after final acceptance from The
ENGINEER through EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE.

• The full Electronic Records will be transmitted to EMPLOYER’S/EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE.

7. ATTACHMENTS
7.1 FM-245-008-001 Discipline Handing Over Form.
7.2 FM-245-008-002 Buildings Internal Finishing Pre-Handover Snag list
7.3 FM-245-008-003 Final Handover Form

QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-008 Page 12 of 12


Handing Over Rev. 0
1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV)
Power Plants, Guinea Bissau
DISCIPLINE HANDING OVER FORM
ZONE BUILDING FLOOR ID NO.

AREA FUNCTION GRIDS

ITEMS QC ENGINEER

1. Close-out of All Related MIR's.

2. Close-out of All Related RFI's.

3. Clearance of NCR’s Log.

Civil Works are deemed ready for EMPLOYER’S Access

Final Handover is subject to the Listed Items in Form # (FM-245-008-03)1

(A Status) No Objection (B Status) No Objection - Pending Clearance (C Status) Not Recommended

POSITION NAME SIGNATURE DATE

QC

Engineer

Owner

Form No.: FM-245-008-01 Rev.0


1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV)
Power Plants, Guinea Bissau
PRE‐HANDOVER SNAG LIST ‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ WORKS
ZONE BUILDING FLOOR ID NO.

AREA FUNCTION GRIDS

SR QC ACCEPTANCE BY THE
NO. DESCRIPTION PRIORITY ENGINEER CSC/ENGINEER
SIGNATURE YES/NO/NA SIGNATURE

COMMENTS / OUTSTANDING: -

COMPLETE & CONFORMANT

POSITION NAME SIGNATURE DATE

JV QC

CSC /Engineer

Owner

Priorities (1) Before Testing and Commissioning (2) After Testing and Commissioning (3) After Operation

Form No.: FM-245-008-02 Rev.0


1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power
Plants, Guinea Bissau
FINAL HANDING OVER FORM
ZONE BUILDING FLOOR ID NO.

AREA FUNCTION GRIDS

FOR FOR
ITEMS STATUS A/B
CONTRACTOR THE CSC/ ENGINEER

1. Civil Handover Form (FM-245-008-01)

2. Internal Finishing Handover Form (FM-245-008-01)

3. External Finishing Handover Form (FM-245-008-01)

4. (Hard and Soft Landscaping Handover Form (FM-245-008-01

5. (MEP (Electrical, Mechanical) Handover Form (FM-245-008-01

6. Steel Structure Handover Form (FM-245-008-01)

This is to certify that the above subject area has been inspected and found acceptable for
Final Handing Over for immediate Use on ___/___/201__ at ___:___hrs. .

COMMENTS / OUTSTANDING: -

COMPLETE & CONFORMANT

(A Status) No Objection (B Status) No Objection - Pending Clearance

POSITION NAME SIGNATURE DATE

H.A.C QC

SCATEC SOLAR

Owner

Form No.: FM-245-008-03 Rev.0


Certificate Number:
16046-01
This is to certify that the management system of:
Original Certificate Issue Date:

H.A.Construction ( H.A.C )
27 June 2006
Last Certificate Expiry Date:
05 June 2018
Main Site: Yehia Zakaria St., Industrial Zone-Behind Sheraton Date of Last Recertification Audit:
Heliopolis Buildings Cairo-Egypt 13:16 May 2018
Certification Cycle Start Date:
has been registered by Intertek as conforming to the requirements of: 05 July 2018
Certificate Issue Date:
ISO 9001:2015 05 July 2018
Certificate Expiry Date:
5 June 2021
The management system is applicable to:

Design and Construction of all Types of civil, infrastructure, electrical and


mechanical erection works, building restoration, industrial,
petrochemical, chemical, power projects locally and internationally.
Design, fabrication and erection of steel structures, vessels, storage
tanks and plate works.
Production of various concrete masonry products, curb stones,
interlocks and pre-cast manholes and manufacturing and erection for all
wooden works & fire rated doors.

Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance

Intertek Certification Limited


10A Victory Park, Victory Road
Derby DE24 8ZF, United Kingdom

Intertek Certification Limited is a


UKAS accredited body under
schedule of accreditation no. 014.

In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate’s validity is subject to the organisation maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek’s requirements for systems certification.
Validity may be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the
property of Intertek, to whom it must be returned upon request.
Certificate Number:
16046-01-B
This is to certify that the management system of:
Original Certificate Issue Date:

H.A.Construction
27 June 2006
Last Certificate Expiry Date:
05 June 2018

Concrete Products Date of Last Recertification Audit:


14 May 2018

Division
Certification Cycle Start Date:
05 July 2018
Certificate Issue Date:
No.19, A6 Industrial Zone-10th of Ramadan City, Egypt
05 July 2018
has been registered by Intertek as conforming to the requirements of: Certificate Expiry Date:
5 June 2021

ISO 9001:2015
The management system is applicable to:
Production of various concrete masonry products, curb stones,
interlocks and pre-cast manholes

Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance

Intertek Certification Limited


10A Victory Park, Victory Road
Derby DE24 8ZF, United Kingdom

Intertek Certification Limited is a


UKAS accredited body under
schedule of accreditation no. 014.

In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate’s validity is subject to the organisation maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek’s requirements for systems certification.
Validity may be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the
property of Intertek, to whom it must be returned upon request.
Certificate Number:
16046-01-A
This is to certify that the management system of:
Original Certificate Issue Date:

H.A.Construction Steel
27 June 2006
Last Certificate Expiry Date:
05 June 2018

Division
Date of Last Recertification Audit:
15 May 2018
Certification Cycle Start Date:
K.28 Alex-Cairo Desert Road, Alexandria-Egypt 05 July 2018
Certificate Issue Date:
has been registered by Intertek as conforming to the requirements of: 05 July 2018
Certificate Expiry Date:
ISO 9001:2015 5 June 2021

The management system is applicable to:

Design, fabrication and erection of steel structures, vessels, storage


tanks and plate works.

Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance

Intertek Certification Limited


10A Victory Park, Victory Road
Derby DE24 8ZF, United Kingdom

Intertek Certification Limited is a


UKAS accredited body under
schedule of accreditation no. 014.

In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate’s validity is subject to the organisation maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek’s requirements for systems certification.
Validity may be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the
property of Intertek, to whom it must be returned upon request.
Certificate Number:
16046-01-C
This is to certify that the management system of:
Original Certificate Issue Date:

H.A.Construction Wood
27 June 2006
Last Certificate Expiry Date:
05 June 2018

Products Division
Date of Last Recertification Audit:
15 May 2018
Certification Cycle Start Date:
Block 21, 35, 36 CPC Industrial Park-6th of October City, Giza, Egypt 05 July 2018
Certificate Issue Date:
has been registered by Intertek as conforming to the requirements of: 05 July 2018
Certificate Expiry Date:
ISO 9001:2015 5 June 2021

The management system is applicable to:

Manufacturing and erection for all wooden works & fire rated doors.

Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance

Intertek Certification Limited


10A Victory Park, Victory Road
Derby DE24 8ZF, United Kingdom

Intertek Certification Limited is a


UKAS accredited body under
schedule of accreditation no. 014.

In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate’s validity is subject to the organisation maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek’s requirements for systems certification.
Validity may be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the
property of Intertek, to whom it must be returned upon request.
_____________________________________________________________________ __________________
_

ANNEX 14: PROJECT TEAM

Page 44 of 44
Proposed Organization Chart

Project Manager

Q.A / Q.C Manager HSE Manager

Q.A / Q.C
HSE Supervisors Security Officer
Inspectors

Guards

Construction Technical Office


Accountant
Manager Manager

Technical Office Planner


Local Purchaser Site Engineers Engineer

Cost Control
Store-Keeper Foreman
Engineer

Public Relations DC/Computer


Land Surveyor Operators

Survey Labour
SUMMARY OF KEY EXPERTS

Language
Years
Specialist Experience in and degree
Proposed of A Educational
Name of Expert areas of beneficiary of
position exper ge background
knowledge country fluency(VG,
ience
G, W)
Gamal Hassan Project 39 64 Please refer to the attached CV
Manager
Mohamed Salah Construction 30 52 Please refer to the attached CV
Manager
Mahamed Nada Technical 20 42 Please refer to the attached CV
Office
Manager
Mohamed QA/QC 18 41 Please refer to the attached CV
Waleed Manager
Abd‐ElHamid HSE 21 40 Please refer to the attached CV
ElShazly Manager
Project Manager
1. Client satisfaction, budget control, profitability, contract compliance, problem resolution and
project personnel management
2. Organize, execute and coordinate work of the field project team
3. Responsible for the technical quality, accuracy, and standards adherence of engineering and
design drafting for the project, by working with the engineering and technical groups
ensuring work outputs comply with standards and meets contract requirements
4. Must be able to work professionally with clients, vendors, employees, managers and
supervisors
5. Produce weekly reports to HAC management on site progress & monthly reports to Client
6. Chair monthly Client progress meeting
7. Produce and revise construction schedules.
8. Monitor and document site progress
9. Write site specific subcontract scopes of work for all elements of the works
10. Complete monthly valuations for subcontractors. Complete monthly pay application to Client
11. Work with project civil and electrical engineers (HAC in-house or 3rd party) to ensure required
drawings and information are available ahead of construction and to resolve technical issues
during construction
12. Review of drawings to ensure completeness and constructability
13. Chair daily Plan Of the Day meeting with all subcontractors and Client Representatives
14. Chair weekly site safety meetings with subcontractor managers & Conduct weekly site safety
inspection
15. Develop site specific quality control documentation (with site QA/QC supervisor) &
environmental documentation (with site environmental supervisor)
16. Accomplish any other job-related duties/functions requested by the supervisor
Construction Manager
Specific duties:

1. Leadership Accountabilities: Identify, deploy, and manage a high-performing team needed to


accomplish business objectives. Provide a positive and engaging work environment by:
1. hiring outstanding talent;
2. aligning individual and team objectives to department and company objectives;
3. managing and supporting employee development and growth;
4. Providing regular and direct feedback on performance and goal progress.
2. Sets up initial layout and site infrastructure services to include water, power, internet and
office trailers and required facilities.
3. Schedules and ensures appropriate staffing for daily construction activities with employees
and sub-contractors.
4. Supports the PM and APM for required management coverage.
5. Creates and implements daily work plans.
6. Ensures construction disciplines are coordinating daily functions to minimize schedule delays.
7. Coordinates line drops and ensure utilities are routed appropriately around work in progress.
8. Identifies potential employee relations issues.
9. Identifies potential schedule changes, workflow and staffing issues.
10. Approve invoices for site billing on site services to include utilities, trailers, misc. expenses.
11. Ensures sub-contractors are monitored on site by a Company employee.
12. Serves in safety function as needed and determines appropriate actions.
13. Shuts down a construction site when conditions warrant it, such as weather or safety.
14. Performs site investigation for potential construction sites.
15. Recommends and evaluates sub-contractors for use on projects.
16. Drives throughout the construction site to oversee work in progress.
17. Follows safety and security procedures and determines appropriate action. Reports
potentially unsafe conditions and uses materials and equipment properly.
Safety Manager
1. Manages site safety program; includes holding safety meetings, carrying out accident
investigations, and ensuring contractor compliance with company, customer, and government
safety guidelines
2. Creates a site-specific safety program including a manual to be used by all employees,
contractors, and subcontractors on the company's project site.
3. Supports management’s efforts to ensure compliance with corporate Safety Program
expectations and applicable federal and state law.
4. Performs Job Hazard analysis & Accident/Incident Investigations
5. Identifies areas of risk mitigation
6. Daily, weekly and monthly metrics reporting to site based as well as corporate management
teams
7. 3rd party Contractor Management
8. Safety Audits
9. Directs/leads/facilitates safety training for field site personnel

Quality Manager
1. Manages site quality program; includes holding safety meetings, carrying out accident
investigations, and ensuring contractor compliance with company, customer, and government
safety guidelines
2. Creates a site-specific quality program including a manual to be used by all employees,
contractors, and subcontractors on the company's project site.
3. Develops Site Specific Quality/Testing Plans based on contract/customer requirements and
company standards
4. Trains company personnel/subcontractors on quality standards and documentation
5. Travel to projects and perform construction in-progress quality inspections at intervals
determined by the Safety & Quality Department in coordination with the project team
6. Performs periodic remote pictorial inspections of submitted construction progress photos
7. Travels to projects to perform a final quality inspections
8. Submits quality inspection and audit reports for review and approval, recordkeeping, and
distribution to the project team
9. Follows up on completion of Quality Issue Corrective Actions
10. Supports with overall Quality program improvements through lessons learned
Technical Office Manager
1. Will be in charge of all technical aspects of solar project for projects directly managed by the
company
2. Will represent, on behalf of the entity, for technical issues with third parties in the co-
development.
3. Duties will include the following within each SPV :
3.1. Ensuring the SPV respects all of the technical aspects of the contractual obligations
negotiated under his responsibility towards all third parties:
3.1.1. The Power Purchase Agreement signed with NBET;
3.1.2. The Transmission obligation according to agreements signed with TCN;
3.1.3. The Generation License Agreement obtained from NERC;

4. Ensuring the SPV meets all contractual obligations with regards to the EPC and O&M
contractor;
5. Ensuring that the plant operating and maintenance standards are up to standard, including
HSSE and Quality policies
6. Fulfilling all SPV reporting obligations on technical aspects of the Project as stipulated by the
Power Purchase Agreement, in the form of construction and operation reports or otherwise,
including but not limited to:

6.1. Scheduled and unscheduled outages;


6.2. Weekly and daily generation forecasts;

7. Delivering construction and operation reports to the Board of Directors;


8. Organizing the meetings of the Technical Committee
9. Ensuring that sufficient key spares inventory are kept locally by the operations and
management contractor to ensure minimum downtime;
10. Supervising the construction works in compliance with applicable technical standards;
11. Supervising the daily operation of the Project and ensuring maintenance works are executed
in accordance to best practices;
12. Ensuring the accuracy of the metering installations and facilitating for the testing and
inspection of these installations;
13. Follow-up of design, grid connection studies, technical studies during development phase
14. These tasks will be duplicated for each one of solar projects. The Technical Manager will be
company representative for technical issues and manage the SPV technical team, as technical
director, on site for construction, commissioning then operation...
15. Define the technical reference, including HSE, project and ensure its implementation in
conjunction with EN / HSE.
16. Interface with TAQA Arabia in any technical issue, including but not limited to technical
support, logistic, solar panels deliveries, solar farms architecture
Gamal El-Din Mohamed Hassan
Project Manager

Personal Date of Birth : 16 January 1952


Information
Nationality : Egyptian

Education  B.Sc. in Civil Engineering, Mansoura University, 1977


 English
Languages
 Arabic
 The Professional Programming for PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Other (American University in Cairo).
Qualifications  The OSHA Construction Industry Safety and Health Standards
At The Egyptian Centre For Industrial Safety and Training.
Professional
Experience
2014 to present Hassan Allam Construction

Project Manager

Project: ERC Refinery Project, Mostorod - Egypt


Client: Egyptian Refinery Company
Engineer: GS Engineering & Construction
Project Value: 74,895,339 USD
2013 – 2014 Project Manager

Project: Algiers Refinery Rehabilitation and Adaptation Project


Client: Sonatrach
Engineer: Technip France
Project Value: 21,000,000 Eur
2012 – 2013 Project Manager

Project: Gulsan Egypt Non-Woven Plant in Egypt


Client: Gulsan Holding
Engineer: ECG
Project Value: 120,000,000 EGP

Page 1 of 5
2011 – 2012 Project Manager

Project: L'Oreal New Cosmetics Factory, 10th of Ramadan City, Egypt.


Client: L’OREAL Cosmetic Industry
Engineer: SNC LAVALIN
Project Value: 127,000,000 EGP
2010 - 2011 Project Manager

Project: Al Shabab Power Station Extension 8x150 Simple Cycle units -


Civil Works.
Client: Kharafi National
Engineer: PGESCo.- Power Generation Engineering and Services
Company
Project Value: 210,000,000 EGP
2008 - 2010 Project Manager

Project: Suez - Civil works of line II cement plant & Equipment


fabrication.
Client: Arabian Cement Company
Engineer: FLSmidth
Project Value: 210,952,611 EGP

2007 – 2008 Construction Manager & Deputy Project Manager

Project: El-Atf Power Station - 750 MW (Combined Cycle).


Client: Egyptian Electricity Holding Company - Middle Delta Electricity
Production Co.
Engineer: PGESCo.- Power Generation Engineering and Services
Company
Project Value: 599,514,200 EGP

2006 – 2007 Project Manager

Project: Suez - Ramliya Clinker Plant Line I (6000 ton/day).


Client: Arab Cement Company.
Engineer: FLSmidth
Project Value: 70,000,000 EGP

Page 2 of 5
2003 – 2006 Construction Manager & Deputy Project Manager

Project: Nubaria Power Station - 1500 MW (Combined Cycle).


Client: Egyptian Electricity Holding Company - West Delta Electricity
Production Co.
Engineer: PGESCo.- Power Generation Engineering and Services
Company
Project Value: 263,965,000 EGP
2001 - 2003 Project Manager

Project: Luxor - Waste water facilities.


Client: NOPWASD / (Washington / CII JV).
Engineer: CDM - Dr. Ahmed Abdel Warith
Project Value: 73,000,000 EGP

2000 - 2001 Project Manager

Project: Aswan - Waste water facilities (Komombo).


Client: Ministry of Housing, Utilities, and Urban Development
NOPWASD / (MK /CII JV)
Engineer: CDM - Dr. Ahmed Abdel Warith
1998 - 2000 Project Manager

Project: Ismailia - Sewer Rehabilitation.


Client: Ministry of Housing, Utilities, and Urban Development
NOPWASD / MK
Engineer: CMC
1997 - 1998 Project Manager

Project: Cairo Airport / Upgrading Runway 05R/23L & Taxiways.


Client: Cairo Airport Authority.
Engineer: Cairo Airport Authority.
1992 - 1997 Project Manager

Projects: Three Sewage Network Projects in Giza Area, Contracts Nos


(27I, 27H and 27F).
Client: Ministry of Housing, Utilities, and Urban Development
CWO.
Engineer: Ambric.

Page 3 of 5
1991 - 1992 Project Manager

Projects: Sewage Network Projects in Imbaba Area, Contracts Nos


(24M and 24Z).
Client: Ministry of Housing, Utilities, and Urban Development
CWO.
Engineer: Ambric.

1990 - 1991 Project Manager

Projects: Sewage Network Projects in El Sisi Area, Contract No. 27D.


Client: Ministry of Housing, Utilities, and Urban Development
CWO.
Engineer: Ambric.

1989 - 1990 Site Manager

Project: Talkha - Talkha Thermal Power Station 200MW - 1st Unit


Client: Ministry Of Electricity.
Engineer: Skoda.

1987 - 1989 Site Manager

Project: A Sewer and Water Project in SEDKY AREA


Client: J.P.E.A.
Engineer: Dr. Ahmed Abdel Warith
1986 - 1987 Site Manager

Project: A Sewer Project and the Construction of Pumping Station at


ZEIN/HELWAN AREA
Client: J.P.E.A.
Engineer: Sabbour

1985 - 1986 Site Manager

Project: the Construction of EL SHERIF FACTORY in Cairo (a factory


for producing plastics)
Client: El Sherif Group
Engineer: Dr. Fayek Howeedy

Page 4 of 5
1984 - 1985 Allam - Jarvis

Section Engineer

Project: the Construction of Petro-Chemical Tanks in El MAX, Alex.


1983 - 1984 Section Engineer

Project: The Construction of a Glass Factory in Suez


1981 - 1983 Private Contracting Office

Site Engineer

Project: the Construction of a Service Station and Parking Area,


Construction of the Prefabricated Housing and the Civil works related to
the Construction of a Cold Store.
1979 - 1981 El Delta for Contracting (General Sector)

Site Engineer

Project: Construction of Residential buildings in the New City of Suez


1977 - 1979 The Egyptian Army Force

Site Engineer

Civil Works in various Sites related to the Army.

Page 5 of 5
Mohamed Salah El-Din Hanafy
Construction Manager

Personal Date of Birth : 29/12/1963


Information
Nationality : Egyptian

Education  B.Sc. in Civil Engineering, Assiut University, 1986


Other Qualifications Courses:
 OSHA Occupational ( Safety & Health Administration)
 NASP National Association of Safety Professionals.
Languages  English
 Arabic

Professional
Experience
Jun. 2012 till Present Hassan Allam Construction
Construction Manager

Project: Apache Procurement Kattamia Air Base, Egypt.


Client: US Army Corps of Engineers
Project Value: 85,000,000 USD
Mar. 2010 – Jun. 2012 Construction Manager

Project: Al Sokhna Power Station 2X650 MW (Gas /Oil Fired Units).


Client: Egyptian Electricity Holding Company - East Delta Electricity
Company
Engineer: PGESCo.- Power Generation Engineering and Services
Company
Project Value: 1,181,703,800 EGP
Responsibilities:
 All Industrial CIVIL WORK For Construction: •Steam Turbines,
Steam Building, Control Building, Pipe Rack Structure,
Underground Piping, Water Treatment Area, Boiler Area.
 Reviewing Construction Time Schedule
 Reviewing Shop Drawings.
 Work for P.O for Construction Materials.
 Organization for Construction Equipments, Materials, Labors.
 Meeting With Site Engineers & Construction Staff.
Page 1 of 3
May 2009 – Mar. 2010 Construction Manager

Project: Saint Gobain Float Glass Plant, Ain Sukhna, Egypt.


Client: Saint-Gobain Glass Egypt.
Engineer: Saint-Gobain Glass Egypt
Project Value: 212,683,354 EGP

May 2007 – May 2009 Site manager

Project: Nubaria Power Station III - 750 MW (Combined Cycle).


Client: Egyptian Electricity Holding Company - Middle Delta Electricity
Production Co.
Engineer: PGESCo.- Power Generation Engineering and Services
Company
Project Value: 370,038,600 EGP

Aug. 2006 – May 2007 Construction Manager

Projects: Smart Village Projects

Mar. 2003 – Aug. 2006 Section Engineer

Project: Cairo North Power Station 2 x 750 M.W. (Combined Cycle)


Phases I & II.
Client: Egyptian Electricity Holding Company - Cairo Electricity
Production Co.
Engineer: PGESCo.- Power Generation Engineering and Services
Company
Project Value: Phase I: 131,480,000 EGP, Phase II: 156,293,770
EGP
May 2001 – Mar. 2003 Section Engineer

Project: Luxor - Waste water facilities.


Client: NOPWASD / (Washington / CII JV).
Engineer: CDM - Dr. Ahmed Abdel Warith
Project Value: 73,000,000 EGP

Page 2 of 3
Mar. 1999 – May 2001 Superintendent

Project: Aswan Water & Wastewater Facilities, Aswan.


Client: Ministry of Housing, Utilities, and Urban Development
NOPWASD / USAID
Engineer: CDM - Dr. Ahmed Abdel Warith
Project Value: 400,000,000 EGP

Feb. 1997 – Mar. 1999 Construction Manager

Project: BENI-SUEF & CAIRO - Beni-Suef & Mostorod grain silos.


Client: Middle Egypt & North Cairo flour Mills
Engineer: CIMBRIA

Mar. 1995 – Feb. 1997 Executive Engineer

Project: Elephantine 5 Stars Hotel, Aswan City


Client: Doosan Construction & Eng. Co.
Engineer: Arch. Saleh Hamdi

Oct. 1992 – Mar. 1995 Executive Engineer

Project: Edfu - Edfu Water Supply & Sanitary drainage Project


Client: Ministry of Housing, Utilities, and Urban Development-Kruger
International
Engineer: Dan Group

Apr. 1989 – Oct. 1992 EL-NASSER Phosphate Company

Site engineer

Project: Cosentrated Phosphate Industrial

May. 1987 – Apr. 1989 Military Service

Site engineer

Page 3 of 3
Mohamed Elsayed Mohamed Nada
Technical Office Manager

Personal Date of Birth : 18 November 1973


Information
Nationality : Egyptian

Education  B.Sc. in Civil Engineering, Zagazig University, Banha Branch,


1996
Languages  English
 Arabic

Computer Skills  AutoCAD


 Microsoft Project Planner
 Primavera 6
 Surveying Programs (SDR – SURFER)
 Microsoft office
Other Qualifications  Preparation for Project Management Professional (PMP) from
authorized international institute (amid east) in Cairo
Professional Hassan Allam Construction
Experience
Technical Office Manager
2014 to present
Responsibilities:
 Coordinate design and shop drawing to issue for construction.
 Follow up the project plan and review with planning department.
 Coordinate the work between site and the technical team.
 Follow up the subcontractors and procurement status up to date.
 Review the contract with Quantity bill to insure the variation
requests.
 Check and follow the project control status to alarm the deviated
issued points.
 Follow the interim progress payment monthly and review with the
client.
Project: Procurement of Plant Design, Build, Operate, and maintain Stage
II – Phase II of Gabal El Asfar WWTP Project 500,000 m3/day
Client: Ministry of Housing, Utilities and Urban Development - The
Construction Authority for potable water & waste water
Engineer: Sogreah
Project value: 162,962,963 USD

Page 1 of 3
Jan. 2011 - 2013 Technical Office Manager

Project: Al Shabab Power Station Extension 8x150 Simple Cycle units -


Civil Works
Client: Kharafi National
Engineer: PGESCo.- Power Generation Engineering and Services
Company
Project value: 210,000,000 EGP
Aug. 2009 – Jan. 2011 ASEC engineering group

Technical Office Manager

Project: Cement Factory

SAUDI PAN KINGDOM (SAPAC)

Jan. 2008 – Aug. 2009 Deputy of Construction Projects Director

Project: ALAHELLA Commercial Center, Makkah


Project Value: 245 Million SAR
Aug. 2006 – Jan. 2008 Area Manager – ALBAHA

Supervision of the following projects:


 Sewage treatment plant for ALBAHA province (48600m3 capacity)
 Water network in ALBAHA region
 Sewage network in ALBAHA region – value: 116 million SAR
 Strategy water tank for the area
May. 2004 – Aug. 2006 Technical Office Manager – Project Manager

Project: Comprehensive Rehabilitation Hospital in ALBAHA


Project Value: 66 Million SAR

Oct. 1998 – Apr. 2004 TAG Group

Technical Office Manager – Project Manager

Project: AKASSIA SWISS Hotel & Resort, Marsa Alam


Project Value: 195 Million EGP

Page 2 of 3
Oct. 1997 – Oct. 1998 Futuristic Consultant Office

Civil Engineer (Owner Representative)

Project: ALI-BABA Resort, Hurgada


Project Value: 85 Million EGP
Jul. 1996 – Oct. 1997 Universal International Co. for Contracting

Civil Engineer (Owner Representative)

Project: UNI-SHARM Hotel, Sharm El-Sheikh

Page 3 of 3
Mohamed Waleed
QA/QC Manager

Personal Date of Birth : 23/11/1974


Information
Nationality : Egyptian

Education  B.Sc. in Civil Engineering 1998

Languages  English
 Arabic
Courses  OSHA - MIRDIF Security and safety Consultant
 ISO 9001/2008- internal quality management auditor - Kaizen
Egypt
 Establishing of QMS in accordance with ISO 9001/2008 -
Kaizen Egypt
 Primavera project planner - PROMASTER
Professional
Experience
Mar. 2011 to present Hassan Allam Construction

Quality Control Manager

Project: WESTOWN-FORTY WEST CAIRO-EGYPT


Client: 6th of October Development and investment company
(SODIC)
Engineer: Engineering Consultants Group (ECG)
Project Value: 500,000,000 EGP

Responsibilities and Duties:


 Responsible for overall monitoring of QA/QC staff in the project
and report to the project manager and business unit quality
manager.
 Scope involved is overall monitoring of QA/QC staff in the
project and report to the project manager and business unit quality

Page 1 of 5
manager.
 Maintain the record of the inspections of the incoming materials
and to reject the defective materials.
 Managing non conformities process.
 Expedite close out of the punch list items during the periodical
meeting with the construction team.
2007 - 2011 Orascom Construction Industries

Senior Quality Control Engineer

Project: El-Tebbin Thermal Power Plant 350x2MW (Oil / Gas Fired


Units)
Client: Palm Hills Developments.
Engineer: Engineering Consultants Group (E.C.G)
Project Value: 950M EGP

Responsibilities and Duties:


 Responsible for overall monitoring of QA/QC staff in the project
and report to the project manager and business unit quality
manager.
 Lead effectively a team of quality engineers to achieve the project
specified inspection and testing requirements on site and off site.
 Managing all site activities for inspection and testing at
frequencies denoted in the contract or ITPs.
 Managing calibration of measurements & laboratories
equipments.
 Managing periodic quality reporting at prescribe interval &
format.
 Managing submission of time quality documentation and record
for handover.
 Communicate all Orascom QMS requirements, procedure and
manage the implementation of this system.
 Maintain the record of the inspections of the incoming materials
and to reject the defective materials.
 Managing non conformities process.
 Expedite close out of the punch list items during the periodical
meeting with the construction team.

Page 2 of 5
2006 - 2007 El Gabry general contracting Co.

Junior site Manager

Project: Sun shine hotel in Neama bay sharm el shekh


Projects Value: 52 million L.E

Responsibilities and Duties:


 Insuring the project run to the schedule and budget.
 Managing programs of work (planning)
 Arranging delivery of material.
 Managing arrange of subcontractors.
 Contact and communicate with the local authorities for work
permits.
 Conducting a regular site safety checks.
 Maintaining of strict quality control procedures.
 Liaising with client/consultant periodical meetings to keep them
informed of progress.

2005 - 2006 JV industrial engineering enterprise & VCC

Senior site engineer

Project: urban water and sanitation project (waste water treatment


plant and pump stations and related buildings)
Project Value: 103M EGP

Responsibilities and Duties:


 Providing a technical advice to subcontractors and construction
junior site engineers.
 Supervising (setting out, levelling, surveying the site.
 Ensure delivering of the materials and their quantities.
 Checking plans, drawings and quantities for accuracy of
calculations.
 Day to day management of the site including supervision and
monitoring the site labour force and the work of any
subcontractor.
 Resolving any unexpected technical difficulties.
 Overseeing quality control, health and safety matters at site.
Page 3 of 5
2004 - 2005 MORGANTI AIC/ LLC (Joint Venture)

Lead civil quality control engineer

Project: Alexandria water general authority Egypt utilities


management /Alexandria USAID Grant NO 263-0270.20
Contract NO. 263-C-00-01-00016-00
Project Value: 112 million L.E

Responsibilities and Duties:


 Leading a staff of junior QC engineers and inspectors
 Monitoring all inspection activities related to rehabilitation of a
water treatment plant and erecting of new water treatment plant
 Monitoring inspection and transmission and distribution pipe line
on installation.
 Monitoring inspection and testing pipes (D.I, PVC, CS) for
hydrostatic and disinfection tests.
 Review all inspection report for compliance
 Assist QC manager in the organization, maintenance and control
of quality system.
 Assist QC manager and construction engineers in resolving any
discrepancies
 Prepare nonconformance report to QA/QC manager.
 Review the work procedures and method statement for
compliance
 Attending a weekly meeting with client to discuss the quality
issues

2003 - 2004 ABB Susa INC.

Quality control engineer

Project: Design/build construction project for middle Egypt cities.


Project Value: 101M EGP

Responsibilities and Duties:


 Perform a complete inspection for the delivered material
 Prepare MRR for all the approved material
 Perform all inspection activities related to erection of new water
Page 4 of 5
treatment plant including (concrete work, finishing work and
paving, landscaping)
 Perform inspection of the installation and testing of gravity and
pressure pipe line
 Verify the work procedures and MS for compliance.
 Ensure the work is correctly prepared prior to any inspection
being undertaken.
 Follow up all laboratories testing activity includes (soil, concrete,
asphalt, etc).
 Prepare a QC daily report and NCR to the QC manger.

2002 - 2003 JV Washington international / Contrack

Quality control engineer

Project: Luxor Waste Water Facilities Project


Project Value: 40M EGP

Responsibilities and Duties:


 Perform inspection and testing for precast concrete and various
type of pipes (PVC, RC, DI)
 Perform inspection on the Suring system of deep excavation
according to the design drawing
 Insuring the work is correctly prepared prior to inspection
 Perform the inspection of all the delivered materials and prepare
the MRR
 Follow up all laboratories testing activity includes (soil, concrete,
asphalt, etc).
 Prepare a QC daily report to the QC manger.
 Prepare nonconformance report to the QA/QC manager if needed.

1998-2002 JV Washington international / Contrack

Quality control engineer

Page 5 of 5
Abd-ElHamid Mohamed ElShazly
HSE Manager

Personal Date of Birth : 8 March 1976


Information
Nationality : Egyptian

Education  B.Sc. of Agriculture, 1999


 B.Sc. of Commerce, Department of Accounting
Languages  English
 Arabic
Professional  Computer Course Office (Excel, Word, PowerPoint, Access) &
Training Network.
 Kahromika Co. Course Information for HSE Program in
Technology Department.
 Bechtel Overseas Co. Construction Course (Environment, First
Aid Activities, Confined Space Controller/Permits, Risk
Assessment, HSE Requirements, Management’s Attention,
Evacuation Emergency And Medical, Scaffolding, lockout tag out
(LOTO), ISO 14001, firefighting system, Personal Protective
Equipment, Fire Protection and Prevention & ISO 18001 Auditor.
 30-Hours Occupational Safety and Health Training (OSHA)
Construction Industry Safety & Health. (29 CFR. 1926).
 First Aid Training Course (El- Kuraymat Hospital).
 30-Hours Occupational Safety And Health Training (OSHA)
General Safety & Health. (29 CFR 1926).
 40-Hours Occupational Safety and Health Training (NASP
Diploma ID#:0118506814).
 Fire Fighting (prevention program) Course in NIOSH Institute Of
Occupational Safety And Health ID No: 27.
 Rigging and Slinging In Lloyds British (Certificate No. 141002).
 Lifting Equipment Inspection in Lloyds British (Certificate
No.141012).
 Scaffolding Inspection in Lloyds British (Certificate No. 149365).
 Risk Assessment in Lloyds British (Certificate No.141058).
 NABOSH Course.
 IOSH Course.
 NASP safety manager / trainer

Page 1 of 5
Professional
Experience
Apr. 2012 till Present Hassan Allam Construction (HAC) / DSI JV
HSE Site Manager

Project: Mining Grade Ammonium Nitrate Plant, Ain Sokhna, Egypt


Client: Egypt Hydrocarbon Corporation S.A.E
EPC Contractor: Uhde GmbH
Value: 66,334,992 USD
Apr. 2011 – Apr. 2012 Al-Futtaim Carillion At CFC

HSE Supervisor

Dec. 2010 – Apr. 2011 Kharafi National

HSE Site Manager

Project: DAMIETTA & ALSHABAB fast track power projects.


Engineer: Power Generation Engineering and Services Company
(PGESCO)
Responsibilities & duties:
 Responsible for developing and enforcing health and safety
policies for the project.
 Ensuring proper safety standards and regulations are adhered to
for different activities.
 Promote safe working environment attitudes among all site
personnel.
 Conduct regular inspections to eliminate injuries, accident, and
loss to manpower and damage to equipment.
 Ensure all document Company’s compliance with mandatory HSE
requirements.
 Provide support for development of both active and proactive
HSE key.
 Performance indicators to monitor contractor’s activity progress.
 Familiar with proper hygiene practice.
 Promote safe working environment attitudes among all sites
personnel.
 Environmental control, monitoring and liaison with local
environmental agencies.
 Prepare the reports and schedules for safety activities.

Page 2 of 5
 Prepare the fire evacuation emergency and medical.
 Develop, review and upgrade Plant safety plans.

Feb. 2010 – Dec. 2010 SIEMENS

HSE Manager ( Head Office)

Responsibilities & duties:


 Responsible for developing and enforcing health and safety
policies for the projects.
 Ensuring proper safety standards and regulations are adhered to
for different activities.
 Promote safe working environment attitudes among all site
personnel.
 Conduct regular inspections to eliminate injuries, accident, and
loss to manpower and damage to equipment.
 Ensure all document Company’s compliance with mandatory HSE
requirements.
 Provide support for development of both active and proactive
HSE key.
 Performance indicators to monitor contractor’s activity progress.
 Promote safe working environment attitudes among all sites
personnel.
 Environmental control, monitoring and liaison with local
environmental agencies.
 Prepare the reports and schedules for safety activities.
 Prepare the fire evacuation emergency and medical.
 Develop, review and upgrade Plant safety plans.
Jun. 2009 – Feb. 2010 IBERDROLA Ingenieria y Constructions

HSE coordinator

Project: El Kuraymat ISCC Egypt Power Station

Responsibilities:
 Participating subcontractors spreading the PTW system Culture in
Saqqara project,
 Participate implementation of PTW system on site with
Monitoring Toolbox meetings,
 Perform audits on construction permit to work systems
 Providing training package for all staff and subcontractors,
 Review construction risk assessments,
 Advise field Supervision in aspects of HSE relevant to their tasks,
Page 3 of 5
 Coordinate HSSE meetings with all subcontractors.
 Review all lifting plans of all lifting activities on Power Block
area.
 Liaise with Construction Subcontractor Conduct training in
specific construction requirements
 Monitor Toolbox meetings
 Perform audits on construction activities. Review construction risk
assessments
 Participate in emergency response drills and exercises
 Advise field Supervision in aspects of HSE relevant to their tasks.
Mar. 2005 – Jun. 2009 SIEMENS

HSE Site Manager

Project: Sidi krir power project: substation (500K V) CP-104 & ELATF
power station project
Engineer: Power Generation Engineering and Services Company
(PGESCO).
Responsibilities:
 Review construction risk assessments,
 Advise field Supervision in aspects of HSE relevant to their tasks,
 Coordinate HSSE meetings with all subcontractors.
 Review all lifting plans of all lifting activities on Power Block
area.
 Liaise with Construction Subcontractor Conduct training in
specific construction requirements
 Monitor Toolbox meetings
 Perform audits on construction activities. Review construction risk
assessments
 Participate in emergency response drills and exercises
 Advise field Supervision in aspects of HSE relevant to their tasks
 Make Exiting For Machine Hazard and Permit to Work: Training,
Auditing and Responsibilities
 Bring to management’s attention areas of deficiency.
 Provide support for development of both active and proactive
HSE key.
 Performance indicators to monitor contractor’s activity progress.
 To keep The Record of S.H.E Program Training to All Personal
according To the Construction Contract.
 To Carry Out The H.S.E Inspections On The Site.
 Checking all kind of slings at site before using.
 Recognition the Different kind of hazard of work place and its
effect on the worker.
Page 4 of 5
Mar. 2005 – Aug. 2005 INITEC & KAHROMIKA Co.

HSE Site Manager

Project: Nubaria Power Station Project: 1&2 (Cp-117, 118, 105, 106,
104 A)
Engineer: Power Generation Engineering and Services Company
(PGESCO).
Dec. 2003 – Mar. 2005 CONISYS & KAHROMIKA Co.

HSE Site Manager

Project: Nubaria Power Station Project: 1&2 (Cp-117, 118, 105,


106, 104 A)
Engineer: Power Generation Engineering and Services Company
(PGESCO).
Dec. 2002 – Dec. 2003 INITEC & KAHROMIKA Co.

Safety Supervisor

Project: Cairo North Power Station (CP-118)


Engineer: Power Generation Engineering and Services Company
(PGESCO).
Nov. 2001 – Dec. 2002 KAHROMIKA Co.

Safety Supervisor

Project: East Substation220 K .V (CP-104)


Engineer: Power Generation Engineering and Services Company
(PGESCO).
Jan. 2000 – Nov. 2001 BECHTEL& KAHROMIKA Co.

Safety Supervisor

Project: Sidi Krir Units 3 & 4 Power Project


Jan. 1995 – Nov. 2001 KAHROMIKA Co.

Safety Supervisor

Page 5 of 5

You might also like

pFad - Phonifier reborn

Pfad - The Proxy pFad of © 2024 Garber Painting. All rights reserved.

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.


Alternative Proxies:

Alternative Proxy

pFad Proxy

pFad v3 Proxy

pFad v4 Proxy